1 2 3 4 Biancani, Giuseppe 5 Aristotelis loca mathematica 6 1615 7 Bologna 8 9 la 10 bianc_locam_01_la_1615 11 12 0000000009.xml 13

14 15 ARISTOTELISLOCA MATHEMATICAEx vniuer&longs;is ip&longs;ius Operibus collecta, & explicata.

16 17 Aristotelicæ videlicet expo&longs;itionis complementum hactenus de&longs;ideratum.

18 19 Acce&longs;&longs;ere de Natura Mathematicarum &longs;cientiarum Tractatio; atque Clarorum Mathematicorum Chronologia.

20 21 Authore IOSEPHO BLANCANO Bononien&longs;i è Societate Ie&longs;u, Mathematicarum in Gymna&longs;io Parmen&longs;i Profe&longs;&longs;ore.

22 23 Ad Illu&longs;tri&longs;&longs;imum, ac Nobili&longs;&longs;imumPETRVMFRANCISCVM MALASPINAMAedificiorum Marchionem, apud Cæ&longs;. Maie&longs;tatem pro Sereni&longs;s. Parmen&longs;ium Duce Legatum. 24 25 26 27

28 29 BONONIÆ M. D C. X V. 30 31 32 33

34 35 Apud Bartholomæum Cochium. 36 37 Superiorum permi&longs;&longs;u.

38 39 Sumptibus Hieronymi Tamburini.

40
41

ILLVSTRISSIMO AC NOBILISSIMOPETROFRANCISCO MALASPINAEÆDIFICIORVM MARCHIONI.

42 43 En tandem Illustriß. Marchio opus no­strum de Locis Mathematicis apud Ari­stotelem, vnà cum Tractatione de natura &longs;cientiarum Mathematicarum, necnon Clarorum Mathematicorŭ Chronologia; quod tibi Mecœnati meo munificenti&longs;simo iure meritò dicare, ac &longs;ub clarißimi tui nominis patrocinio in lucem dare con&longs;titui. 44 45 46 47 primùm quidem, vt mei perpetui erga te amoris, & ob&longs;eruantiæ hoc vnum &longs;altem specimen exta­ret: tùm vt idoneum, æquumque propo&longs;itæ rei iudicem nanci&longs;cerer. 48 49 cùm enim adiu&longs;tum arbitrŭ duo potißimùm requirantur, rerum &longs;cilicet cognitio, atque prudentia, quem te rei, de qua agitur peritiorem, quemuè prudentiorem inuenire potuerim? 50 51 tu enim cùm Phy&longs;iologiæ, ac Mathe­maticarum omnium Encyclopædiam mirum in modumexcolueris, adintima Mathematicarum penetralia ita per&longs;ua&longs;i&longs;ti, vt Archimedis, & Apollonij admirandis, ac &longs;ubtilißimis Demon&longs;trationibus detinearis. 52 53 Quanta por­rò in rebus agendis prudentia valeas, toti penè Europæ innotuit, cùm pro no&longs;tris Sereniß. Ducibus, non &longs;olùm ad omnes ferè Italiæ, atque Germaniæ Principes, verùm etiam ad Cæ&longs;aream Maie&longs;tatem rebus fœliciter ge&longs;tis Legatus decimùm extiteris; ac demùm à Sereniß. Duce Ranutio inter primarios de Rep. 54 55 56 57 58 59 Con&longs;iliorum Authores ad&longs;citus fueris. 60 61 Cæterùm in Clarorum Mathematicorum Chro­nologia perlegenda, &longs;æpißimè tibi nobilißimi æquè, ac do­ctißimi Viri, tui omnino per&longs;imiles occurrent, quod tibi nonni&longs;i gratißimum accidere po&longs;&longs;e arbitror. 62 63 Complectere igitur ea benignitate, atque clementia, qua &longs;oles no&longs;tra stu­dia promouere, mea hæc quantulacumque munu&longs;cula. 64 65 quæ &longs;i tibi accepta e&longs;&longs;e intellexero, iam tandem ma­ximorum munerum loco habenda e&longs;&longs;e cen&longs;e­bo. 66 67 incolumem tibi, ac fœlicem D. Opt. Max. longæuitatem tueatur. 68 69 70 71 72 73 Vale.

74 75 Parmæ Idibus Maij M. DC. XIIII.

76 77 Liber de &longs;e ip&longs;o.

78 79 Nec di&longs;cet Lector me &longs;olo interprete totum, Nec &longs;ine me totum di&longs;cet Aristotelem.

80 81 Ego Iordanus Ca&longs;&longs;ini Præpo&longs;itus Prouincialis Prouinciæ Venetæ Societatis Ie&longs;u, ex auctoritate Adm. Reuer. P. nc&longs;tro Præpo&longs;iti Generalis P. Claudij Aquæuiuæ, facultatem concedo, vt hoc opus P. Io&longs;ephi Blancani eiu&longs;dem Societatis, quod in&longs;cribitur, Ari&longs;t. Loca Mathematica ex vniuer&longs;is ip&longs;ius operibus collecta, & explicata, à deputatis Patribus recognitum, & ap­probatum typis mandari po&longs;&longs;it. 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Parmæ die 15. Ianuarij 1615.

92 93 Iordanus Ca&longs;&longs;ini P.Don Marcellus Balda&longs;&longs;inus pro Illu&longs;tri&longs;s.

94 95 96 97 & Reuerendi&longs;s. Archiepi&longs;c. Bonon 98 99 100 101

102 103 Imprimatur

104 105 Fr. Hieronymus Onuphrius pro Reuerendi&longs;s. P. Inqui&longs;itore Bonon. 106 107 108 109 110 111

112 113 LECTORI.

114 115 Qvod pri&longs;cis olim temporibus (humani&longs;&longs;ime Lector) &longs;um­mi duo Philo&longs;ophi, Philippus Mendeus, ac Theon Smyr­næus in Platonis Dialogis egregiè perfecerunt, vt videli­cet quæ pa&longs;&longs;im &longs;ummus hic Philo&longs;ophus de Mathemati­cis &longs;cripta reliquit, eadem ip&longs;a ab illis &longs;electa, & in vnum qua&longs;i corpus redacta lucubrationibus illu&longs;trarent: idem ego quoque in Ari&longs;totelis operibus efficere &longs;um conatus, vt quæ de Mathematicis re­bus in vniuer&longs;is eiu&longs;dem monumentis &longs;par&longs;a leguntur, eadem in vnum à me collecta, & explicata ijs Philo&longs;ophiæ &longs;tudio&longs;is maxime &longs;eruirent, qui pri&longs;ca illa con&longs;uetudine relicta, Mathematicarum omnium ignari non &longs;ine graui &longs;tudiorum &longs;uorum detrimento Philo&longs;ophiæ curriculum aggrediuntur. 116 117 Vt autem huius operis nece&longs;&longs;itas, variæque; vtilitates pla­nius cogno&longs;cantur operæpretium erit initio illius cau&longs;as exponere; quæ me poti&longs;&longs;imum ad illud con&longs;cribendum compulerunt, quarum

118 119 Prima &longs;it, quod hæc Ari&longs;t. 120 121 loca Mathematica, quæ quidem ferè 408. numerantur, pe&longs;&longs;imè latinis literis con&longs;ignata &longs;unt v&longs;que adeò, vt Ari­&longs;totelem ip&longs;um, vel inuitum (quod po&longs;tea multis in locis planum fiet) in ab&longs;urdi&longs;&longs;ima errata &longs;æpi&longs;&longs;imè compellant.

122 123 Secunda, quòd plurima huiu&longs;modi loca à nemine, quod &longs;ciam, adhuc declarata in tenebris magno no&longs;trorum malo delite&longs;cunt: cuiu&longs;modi &longs;unt ad &longs;exaginta problemata, libellus de lineis in &longs;ecabilibus, libellus de mundo, &longs;i tamen Ari&longs;totelis e&longs;t, & Mechanicæ quæ&longs;tiones, quamuis enim Picolomineus in eas paraphra&longs;im ediderit, loca tamen earum dif­ficiliora non &longs;atis illu&longs;trauit. 124 125 Vt autem dixi 408. in vniuer&longs;um loca mi­nimùm numerantur, quibus illud Platonis in&longs;criptum e&longs;t agaiome/trhtos udei/s eisi/to; & in quibus Mathematicæ di&longs;ciplinæ rudes, & imperiti, quem &longs;equuntur ducem Ari&longs;t. 126 127 eum &longs;æpe de&longs;erere non &longs;ine turpi dedecoris no­ta coguntur; quo fit vt exempla illa Mathematica lucem rebus aliquan­do allatura, tenebras cimmerijs, vt aiunt vmbris cra&longs;&longs;iores ij&longs;dem obducant.

128 129 Tertia, quia Græcieorumdem locorum commentatores breuiter, & ob&longs;curè admodum ea, quæ ad Mathematicum &longs;pectant, attingunt, hoc enim ab ip&longs;is certum ponitur, I ectorem e&longs;&longs;e, vt moris tunc erat, omnium Philo &longs;ophorum, Mathematicis imbutum; at verò no&longs;tra ætate magna cum Philo&longs;ophiæ iactura, quamplurimi earumdem di&longs;ciplinarum de&longs;ti­tuti præ&longs;idijs, ne Græcorum quidem Interpretum explanationes, ne­dum Ari&longs;t. 130 131 ob&longs;curè dicta intelligunt.

132 133 Quarta. 134 135 Adde, quod etiam &longs;i quis leuiter &longs;it erudito illo Mathemati­corum puluere con&longs;per&longs;us, adeò tamen peruer&longs;a e&longs;t eorumdem Græco­rum in Latinum tran&longs;latio, tantaque; figurarum, quæ nece&longs;&longs;ariæ erant confu&longs;io, & deprauatio, vt nec abeo, qui &longs;it Mathematicarum &longs;cientia excultus, &longs;ine magno labore percipi po&longs;&longs;int. 136 137 Quin etiam figuræ illæ, quæ omnino nece&longs;&longs;ariæ &longs;unt ob Scriptorum, & Typographorum in&longs;citiam, aut inertiam pluribus in locis de&longs;iderantur. 138 139 Latini verò multo minus, quàm Græci Mathematicæ periti, qua ratione eadem loca pertractaue­rint, facilius e&longs;t conijcere, quàm vt dici oporteat.

140 141 Quinta. 142 143 Ex his omnibus in aliud incommodum, vel maximum Phi­lo&longs;ophi quidam incidebant; aut enim horum locorum expo&longs;itionem ta­citi declinabant: aut eam minime nece&longs;&longs;ariam ad Ari&longs;t. 144 145 percipiendam &longs;ententiam a&longs;&longs;erebant; quo quid ab&longs;urdius, quid &longs;tudio&longs;orum progre&longs;­&longs;ibus pernicio&longs;ius excogitari pote&longs;t? 146 147 Eorum verò nonnulli eorumdem locorum expo&longs;itionem audacter nimis aggrediebantur, atque hinc pueri­les illæ, ac ridiculæ expo&longs;itiones pa&longs;&longs;im auditæ, cuiu&longs;modi e&longs;t illa, quan­do Ari&longs;toteles ait, quod illi frequenti&longs;&longs;imum e&longs;t, omnis triangulus ha­bet tres; nihil aliud &longs;ignificari volunt, quàm omnem triangulum habe­re tres angulos. 148 149 quod &longs;i dicat, omnis triangulus habet tres æquales duo­busrectis: hic hærent, hinc anguntur: cumque ex his angu&longs;tijs, ac tricis &longs;e minimè expedire valeant, aurea verba illa, quibus ingentes &longs;apientiæ the&longs;auri continentur, alto &longs;ilentij velo contegere Mathematicarum eos cogit in&longs;citia: vnde illud, quod Græcæ linguæ imperitis mutata oratio­ne acclamandum illis foret, Mathematicum e&longs;t, non legitur. 150 151 Nec mi­nus elegans illa altera expo&longs;itio; Diametrum e&longs;le incommen&longs;urabilem co&longs;tæ; quod &longs;æpe apud Ari&longs;t. 152 153 legentibus occurrit, nihil aliud &longs;ibi velle, quam Diametrum e&longs;&longs;e longiorem co&longs;ta, quam quidem a&longs;ymetriæ huius ignorantiam Plato de legibus dial. 154 155 7. non hominum, &longs;ed &longs;uum, peco­rumque appellare non dubitauit. 156 157 Quid illa? 158 159 cum Ari&longs;t. 160 161 ait duo cubi, cu­bus, ip&longs;um loqui putant de duplatione Geometrici cubi, nondum in­uenta; non intelligentes, eum ibi de numeris cubis &longs;ermonem habere. 162 163 Auerroes ip&longs;e tantus vir 5. Phy&longs;. commen. 15. quàm &longs;e Mathematicis, reliqui&longs;que Philo&longs;ophis irridendum præbet dum à permutata propor­tione putat &longs;erectè in hunc modum pluribus apud ip&longs;um verbis explica­tum, argumentari, 164 165

166 167 Vt &longs;e habet voluntas noua ad effectum nouum, It a voluntas antiqua ad effectum antiquum. 168 169 Ergo permutatim, vt &longs;e habebit voluntas noua ad effectum antiquum, ita voluntas antiqua ad effectum nouum.

170 171 Spectatum admi&longs;&longs;i rilum teneatis amici? 172 173 nego, ait; qui&longs;piam con&longs;equen­tiam, non enim hoc e&longs;t argumentari à permutata ratione, deberet enim inferre, &longs;ic, ergo ita &longs;e habebit voluntas noua ad antiquam, quemad­modum effectus nouus ad antiquum. 174 175 quæ vitio&longs;a argumentatio quan­tumuis læuis &longs;it, & manife&longs;ta, quo&longs;dam tamen magni nominis philo&longs;o­phantes adeò tor&longs;it, vt adhuc torqueat.

176 177 Quanta autem mi&longs;eratione digni, qui publicè aliquando apud &longs;uos auditores totam Per&longs;pectiuam, qua nihil iucundius e&longs;t, de medio tolle­re conati &longs;unt, propterea quod illæ vi&longs;uales lineæ, illi anguli, illæ pyra­mides, aut coni, quibus vi&longs;io perficitur nullibi extarent, &longs;ed e&longs;&longs;ent vana quædam opticorum figmenta. 178 179 Quì verò fieri potuit, vt non aduerterint i&longs;ti &longs;e Ari&longs;toteli &longs;uo manife&longs;te repugnare, qui &longs;æpius de lineis vi&longs;ualibus per&longs;pectiuum pertractare a&longs;&longs;erit, di&longs;crimenque; inter lineam phy&longs;icam, & opticam a&longs;&longs;ignat, ip&longs;iusque; optices tanquam veræ &longs;cientiæ mentionem &longs;æpius facit.

180 181 Alij ex altera parte contra A&longs;tronomos in &longs;urgunt, eccentricos, atque epiciclos omnes de cœlo detrahere cupientes. 182 183 Verum id i&longs;ti nulla ex­pre&longs;&longs;a nedum probabili ratione faciunt, falsò exi&longs;timantes A&longs;tronomos admirandam illam Cœlorum fabricam a&longs;&longs;erere, non autem &longs;upponere: &longs;ed a&longs;tronomi illam &longs;upponunt, eamque; propterea hypothe&longs;im appellant, non a&longs;&longs;erunt. 184 185 Quod &longs;i aliqua probabili ratione id facerent, vti nonnulli ex recentioribus, quorum Ticho Coripheus e&longs;t, laudandi potius, quam vituperandi e&longs;&longs;ent. 186 187 Impugnant itaque a&longs;tronomachi i&longs;ti hypothe&longs;im pro a&longs;&longs;ertione; talesque; &longs;æpè hi &longs;unt, vt non &longs;atis intelligant, quid &longs;it Aequa­tor, aut Zodiacus, ne dum quid Epiciclus, aut Eccentricus. 188 189 Nec defuit qui viginti duo argumenta excogitarit, atque in medium protulerit, qui­bus contra A&longs;tronomos probare conatus e&longs;t, nullo modo Solem, aut Lunam moueri po&longs;&longs;e motibus contrarijs, ide&longs;t, ab oriente in occidentem motu diurno, & proprio ab occidente in orientem. 190 191 Sed exi&longs;timandum e&longs;t i&longs;tum Lunam nouam à Sole quotidie magis, ac magis ver&longs;us orientem recedere, nunquam animaduerti&longs;&longs;e; ab ea enim hanc motuum concor­diam didici&longs;&longs;et.

192 193 Quid tandem dicendum de quodam magni nominis Philo&longs;opho, om­nium tamen Mathematicarum experte, qui in publica di&longs;putatione axio­ma illud Mathematicum, omne totum e&longs;t maius &longs;ua parte, in &longs;en&longs;u in quo à Mathematicis effertur negare non erubuit, eò, quod in infinito, vt aiebat non concederetur ab omnibus. 194 195 &longs;cilicet non intelligebat ma­thematicum tantummodo tractare de Quantitate finita, ac terminata, in qua axioma prædictum ab omnibus conceditur. 196 197 Neque vero hic nonnullorum infen&longs;us in Mathematicas animus quieuit, verum etiam cò progre&longs;&longs;us e&longs;t, vt eas omnes omnino conuellere, atque ex albo &longs;cien­tiarum, quamuis non Ari&longs;totele tantum, &longs;ed ip&longs;a etiam veritate repu­gnante, expungere conati &longs;int; idque ne&longs;cio an vlla alia de cau&longs;a egerint, quàm quod eas non &longs;atis calerent; non &longs;ecus atque Ae&longs;opica illa Vulpes, quæ cum cauda mutilata e&longs;&longs;et, caudarum mutilationem reliquis vulpi­bus vafrè per&longs;uadere conabatur. 198 199 Verum enim verò optimè &longs;cio, ea, qu&ecedil; hactenus dicta &longs;unt non in omnes no&longs;tri temporis Philo&longs;ophos qua­drare, cum non pauci hodie quoque &longs;int, qui more antiquorum Mathe­maticis &longs;uffulti, optimè &longs;uis &longs;tudijs con&longs;ulentes, reliquam Philo&longs;ophiam non &longs;ine magno compendio aggrediuntur. 200 201 Quo fit, vt cæteros ageo­metretos ita antecellant, vt eorum Magi&longs;tri appellari po&longs;&longs;int, & debeant; tales fuerunt in primis Vicomercatus, Cardanus, Zabarella, Toletus, Bonamicus, & alij, quibus paulo antiquiores fuerunt D. Tho. & Scotus, Hiomnes Mathematicarum auxilio, quantum inter reliquos philo&longs;o­phantes excelluerint, nemo e&longs;t qui non nouerit. 202 203 204 205 Illud hoc loco minimè tacendum, Iacobum Zabarellam in &longs;uis logicæ commentarijs te&longs;tari &longs;e bis &longs;umma diligentia totum Euclidem perlegi&longs;&longs;e, vt perfectè Ari&longs;t. 206 207 de demon&longs;tratione &longs;ententiam a&longs;&longs;equi po&longs;&longs;et.

208 209 Hi ridiculas illas, ac pueriles expo&longs;itiones &longs;uperius allatas minimè effutierunt, neque reliquis &longs;upra recen&longs;itis incommodis obnoxij fue­runt, quibus magno etiam cum dedecore alij Mathematicarum ope ca­rentes afficiuntur.

210 211 In horum igitur gratiam operam diligenter dedi, vt quantum in me e&longs;&longs;et damna à me &longs;upra enarrata aliqua ex parte re&longs;arcirem. 212 213 Quaprop­ter loca hæc mathematica num rectè e&longs;&longs;ent è græco in latinum tran&longs;lata diligenter prius expendi. 214 215 Deinde claritate, quàm potui max ma eadem loca interpretatus &longs;um, & in horum, de quibus dixi gratiam, quædam fanè tenuia pro&longs;equutus &longs;um, quæ alioquin libenter omi&longs;i&longs;&longs;em. 216 217 Tum fi­guras omnes, aut correxi, aut re&longs;titui, aut nouas appo&longs;ui. 218 219 Hocigitur mo&longs;tro qualicunque labore poterit qui&longs;que omnia illa facile intelligere, atque enumerata incommoda euitare, vnum tantummodo à Lectore ma­thematicarum experte requiram, vt principia &longs;altem illa, &longs;cilicet defini­tiones, po&longs;tulata, & axiomata, quæ primò Euclideis libro præponuntur, diligenter prius perlegat cum illa &longs;ua per&longs;picuitate ommbus &longs;int obuia; cætera ego explicanda recipio. 220 221 Obiter etiam auctaria nonnulla partim mathematica, partim naturalia in&longs;erui, quæ ob nouitatem, ac pulchri­cudinem grata Lectori, atque iucunda fore exi&longs;timaui.

222 223 Sciat præterea Lector no&longs;trum in&longs;titutum e&longs;&longs;e loca hæc mathemati­ca, quatenus mathematica &longs;unt declarare, &longs;iue ea &longs;upplere, quæ ex ma­thematicis petenda e&longs;&longs;ent: reliqua autem me tantum attingere, quan­tum harum rerum cum illis connexio po&longs;tulat.

224 225 His omnibus placuit appendices opportune nonnullas addere, qua­rum prima de natura mathematicarum &longs;cientiarum: altera, qua omnes demon&longs;trationes primi libri Euclidis breuiter ad Logicam normam ex­penduntur, vt pateat, quonam demon&longs;trationis genere cen&longs;eri vnaqu&ecedil;que debeat, & ex illis de cæteris iudicium fiat. 226 227 Tandem in gratiam etiam Mathematicorum tertiam appendicem appendi, qua omnia loca Ari&longs;t. Geometrica ad Euclidis ordinem referuntur; vnde & ip&longs;i ad &longs;uas pr&ecedil;le­ctiones exornandas aliquid &longs;ubinde depromere queant. 228 229

230 231 Fruere igitur amice Lector hoc no&longs;tro qualiquali labore, quo ad ple­nam totius Ari&longs;t. 232 233 intelligentiam, cui adhuc mathematicarum ignoratio ob&longs;titit peruenire tandem po&longs;&longs;is: illudque; experiaris, quod optimus qui­dam Philo&longs;ophus, cum totum hunc librum perlegi&longs;&longs;et, effatus e&longs;t, vide­licet, opus hoc Aristot elicæ expo&longs;itionis complementum ad hanc v&longs;que diem de&longs;ideratum iure ac meritò nuncupari po&longs;&longs;e.

234 235 Illud demum tanquam parergon addam, quod ego his elucubran­dis experientia didici, ad veram &longs;cilicet, ac perfectam to­tius Ari&longs;totelis intelligentiam linguæ in primis græcæ, necnon mathematicarum om­nium di&longs;ciplinarum haud medio­crem cognitionem ne­ce&longs;&longs;ariam e&longs;&longs;e. 236 237 Vale.

238 239 Pr&ecedil;cipua qu&ecedil;dam, aut noua, autre&longs;taurata, quæ obiter pertractantur.

1De re&longs;olutione. numero marginali.42De figuris vacuum replentibus, vbi Aristotelis, & expo-&longs;itorum erratum aperitur. num.121Inibi, Apum mirabilis quædam in cellis &longs;uis hexagonis constituendis indu&longs;tria detegitur. num.1203De ijs, quæ aquæ in&longs;ident, vnà cum noua demonstratione problema-tis illius Archimedis, quo metallorum mixtionem indi&longs;&longs;oluta Co-rona, explorauit. in additione. ante num.1244De Cometa, recentiorum &longs;ententia. num.1365De altitudine montis Cauca&longs;i.1486De Terræ rotunditate, ac mundi duratione.1517De Iride. in additione.1818Scytala quid.2509Securis antiqua quæ, & qua ratione fieret.25810Statera antiqua quæ,25911De Ae&longs;tu Maris.27212Araneorum indu&longs;tria nuper patefacta: vbi Democritus contra Ari&longs;t. defenditur.29313De Lucis figuratione, & rerum &longs;imulacris in ob&longs;curo loco.34514De Pupilla oculi.40815De Mathematicarum natura. propè finem operis.16Clarorum Mathematicorum Chronologia, in fine operis.

240 241 PRIMVS INDEX LOCORVM ARIST.

242 243 Quæ in hoc opere explicantur, iuxta ordine librorum ip&longs;ius ex vulgata editione Lugdunen&longs;i.

244 245 In Prædicamentis.

246 247 Gapite s. 248 249 de Relatione, vbi de Quadratura circuli.

250 251 Cap. 252 253 de Priori, vbi de Principijs Mathematicarum,

254 255 Cap. 256 257 de Motu, vbi de Gnomone.

258 259 In Primo Priorum Re&longs;olutoriorum.

260 261 Ad titulum libri de Re&longs;olutione.

262 263 Cap. 264 265 23. &longs;ect 1. libri 1. de Incommen &longs;ur abilibus.

266 267 Cap. 268 269 24. &longs;ecti 1. lib. 270 271 1. de De&longs;criptionibus.

272 273 Cap. 274 275 2. &longs;ect 2. lib. 276 277 1. de De&longs;criptionibus.

278 279 Cap. 280 281 3. &longs;ecti 2. lib. 282 283 1. de Incommen&longs;urabili.

284 285 Cap. 286 287 1. &longs;ecti 3. lib. 288 289 1. de eo, quod est, omnis triangulus habet tres angulos æquales æquales duobus rectis: Aequalitas Geometrica, quæ.

290 291 Cap. 292 293 eodem, de exemplis, quibus vtuntar Geometræ.

294 295 In &longs;ecundo Priorum Re&longs;ol.Cap. 296 297 21. de lineis Paralellis, &longs;eu Coalternis.

298 299 Cap. 300 301 eodem. 302 303 de Paralellis, & de triangulo.

304 305 Cap. 306 307 26. Quod omnis triangulus habet tres, & c.

308 309 Cap. 310 311 31. de Abductione.

312 313 Cap. 314 315 codem, de circuli Quadratura, &longs;ecundum Hippocratem Chium.

316 317 In primo Po&longs;teriorum.

318 319 Textu primo, De Præcognitis Mathematicarum.

320 321 T. 2. Omnis triangulus habet tres, & c.

322 323 T. 5. De Diametro incommen&longs;urabili. 324 325 Item De Mathematicarum Principijs.

326 327 T. eodem, De Indiui&longs;ibilitate vnitatis.

328 329 T. 9. De Puncto, & linea. 330 331 Item de recto, & circulari. 332 333 Item de numero pari, impari;primo, & compo&longs;ito; æquilatero, & altera parte longiore.

334 335 T. 11. Lineæ punctum inest per &longs;e, & c.

336 337 T. 13. De Parallelis. 338 339 De I&longs;o&longs;cele. 340 341 De Alterna Proportione, Item quod omnis triangulus habet tres, & c.

342 343 T. 14. De ij&longs;aem cum præcedentibus.

344 345 T. 20. Magnitudines euadunt numeri. 346 347 Item, quod non duo cubi cubus. 348 349 Item de Mathematicis &longs;ubalternatis.

350 351 T. 23. Quadratura circuli &longs;ecundum Bry&longs;onem. 352 353 Item per&longs;ectam illam e&longs;&longs;e Demon­&longs;trationem, qua Geometræ o&longs;tendunt, quod Omnis triangulus habet tres, & c. 354 355 Per&longs;pectinam, & Mechanicam &longs;ubalternari Geometriæ, Mu&longs;icam, Arithmeticæ.

356 357 T. 24. De numero pari, impari, quodrangulo, cubo. 358 359 In Geometria quid irrationale, refrangi, concurrere. 360 361 Quid Astronomia con&longs;ideret.

362 363 T. 25. Geometram non mentiri in &longs;uis exemplis.

364 365 T. 28. De Parallelis.

366 367 T. 29. Cur in Mathematicis non &longs;it Paralogi&longs;mus. 368 369 Item quid multiplicata propor­tio. 370 371 Quid Cæneus dixerit. 372 373 Cur Affectiones Mathematicorŭ maximè conuertantur.

374 375 T. 30. De Lunæ &longs;phæricitate. 376 377 Quid &longs;tereometria. 378 379 & De &longs;ubalternatione, &c. 380 381 & Ma­thematicorum e&longs;t &longs;cire Propter quid: &longs;en&longs;itiuorum verò &longs;cire Quod.

382 383 T. 37. I&longs;o&longs;celes, & Scalenum habere tres æquales, &c.

384 385 T. 38. Quid Mina, quid Die&longs;is.

386 387 T. 39. Habere tres angulos æquales, &c. 388 389 Item, quod omnis figura habet &longs;uos angu­los externos æquales quatuor tantum rectis.

390 391 T. 43. Triangulum tres æquales, &c. 392 393 De Eclyp&longs;i.

394 395 De combu&longs;tione per refractionem ex &longs;phæra vitrea. 396 397 De principijs &longs;cientiarum.

398 399 T. 44. Diameter incommen&longs;urabilis.

400 401 In 2. Po&longs;teriorum.

402 403 T. 1. Aequalitas, & inæqualitas. 404 405 Terram e&longs;&longs;e in medio mundi ab A&longs;tronomis per­fectè demon&longs;tratur. 406 407 Item Quid con&longs;onantia.

408 409 T. 2. Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c. 410 411 Item de Definitionibus Mathematicarum.

412 413 T. 7. Geometra, quædam accipit, quædam demon&longs;trat.

414 415 T. 11. Angulum in &longs;emicirculo rectum e&longs;&longs;e probari à Geometra per cau&longs;am materia­lem. 416 417 Zabarella correctus.

418 419 T. 24. Echo, Imago è &longs;peculo, Iris.

420 421 T. 25. Permutatim proportionale quid; exemplum in triangulis.

422 423 In primo lib. Topicorum. 424 425

426 427 Cap. 428 429 13. Diameter est incommen&longs;urabilis. 430 431 Vox acuta velox, cur. 432 433 &c. 434 435 Colores in Mu&longs;ica, qui. 436 437 tria genera veteris Mu&longs;icæ.

438 439 In 4. libro.

440 441 Cap. 442 443 1. loco 1. lineæ in&longs;ecabiles.

444 445 In 6. libro.

446 447 Cap. 448 449 2. loco 32. Definitio lineæ.

450 451 In 8. libro.

452 453 Cap. 454 455 2. loco 41. V&longs;us Definitionum in Mathematicis.

456 457 Cap. 458 459 4. loco 86. Elementa geometrica: Numeri capitales.

460 461 In Elenchorum lib. 462 463 1.

464 465 Cap. 466 467 10. Quid P&longs;eudographia. 468 469 Quadraturarur&longs;us Hippocratis, & Bry&longs;enis. 470 471 Mathe­maticæ non contentio&longs;æ. 472 473 Quadratio Antiphontis.

474 475 Ex 1. Phy&longs;ic.

476 477 T. 11. De Quadraturis circuli Hippocratis, & Antiphontis.

478 479 Ex 2. Phy&longs;ic.

480 481 T. 20. Quatenus Per&longs;pectmus con&longs;ideret lineam.

482 483 T. 28. Quid con&longs;onantia Diapa&longs;on.

484 485 T. 68. Mathematicas Demon&longs;trationes babere cau&longs;am, quæ reducitur ad defini­tionem.

486 487 T. 8. Denece&longs;&longs;ario, quod e&longs;t in Mathematicis. 488 489 & omnis triangulus habet tres an­gulos, &c.

490 491 Ex 3. Phy&longs;ic.

492 493 T. 76. Quinam numeri dicantur Gnomones.

494 495 T. 31. Quonam infinito vtantur Mathematici.

496 497 T. 71. De infinito Mathematica.

498 499 Ex 4. Phy&longs;ic.

500 501 T. 120. De commen&longs;urab. 502 503 & incommen&longs;.

504 505 Ex 5. Phy&longs;ic.

506 507 T. 6. De chordis, graui, acuta; media, & vltima.

508 509 Ex 8. Phy&longs;ic.

510 511 T. 15. Omnis triangulus habet tres æquales, &c.

512 513 Ex 1. de Cœlo.

514 515 T. 33. De minimo indiui&longs;ibili.

516 517 T. 36. Ratione vtitur lineari; vt probet mundum e&longs;&longs;e finitum.

518 519 T. 48. Commen&longs;urab. & incommen&longs;urab. 520 521 522 523 quid.

524 525 T. 119. Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c. 526 527 Item de commen&longs;urabili.

528 529 Ex 2. de Cœlo.

530 531 T. 24. Plato ex planis &longs;olida componebat, quì.

532 533 T. 25. Ordo figurarum planarum.

534 535 T. 31. Aquæ &longs;uperficiem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam.

536 537 T. 46. Maiorem circulum velocius moueri. 538 539 Recentiorum ob&longs;eruationes.

540 541 T. 57. De ordine Cœlorum ex &longs;ententia A&longs;tronomorum.

542 543 T. 59. De rotunditate Lunæ, bis.

544 545 T. 107. Centrum duplex grauit: & molis. 546 547 Qua ratione grauia ad mundi centrum aptarentur.

548 549 T. 109. Terram e&longs;&longs;e rotundam. 550 551 alio item modo.

552 553 T. 110. Terram e&longs;&longs;e paruam re&longs;pectu Cœli.

554 555 T. 111. Mare occidentale coniungi indico.

556 557 T. 112. De quantitate Terræ.

558 559 Ex 3. de Cœlo.

560 561 T. 40. Vt componatur &longs;phæra.

562 563 T. 66. Omne corpus diui&longs;ibile.

564 565 T. 66. Quænam planarum figurarum totum &longs;patium repleant. 566 567 Hinc de admirabili Apum mgenio.

568 569 T. eodem. 570 571 Num plures Pyramides locum replere valeant, vbi Ari&longs;totiles, & omnes expo&longs;itores erra&longs;&longs;e o&longs;tenduntur.

572 573 T. 71. Terram e&longs;&longs;e cubum, cur dictum &longs;it.

574 575 Ex 4. de Cœlo.

576 577 T. 33. Extare centrum Mundi, quò grauia tendunt, à quo leuia abeant.

578 579 T. 44. & &longs;eque Cur quædam grautora quàm aqua, &longs;upernatent.

580 581 Ex 2. de Generatione, & Corruptione.

582 583 Tex. 56. Cur Planetæ duobus motibus moueri dicantur.

584 585 Ex 1. Meteororum.

586 587 Summa prima cap. 588 589 3. De magnitudine Terræ ad a&longs;tra, & &longs;olem collata.

590 591 Cap. 592 593 eodem. 594 595 De magnitudine A&longs;trorum.

596 597 Cap. 598 599 4. De ordine Luminarium Solis, & Lunæ.

600 601 Summa 2. cap. 602 603 3. de Mercurij stella. 604 605 Item de Cometa: e&longs;&longs;e in Cœlo.

606 607 Cap. 608 609 5. De Magnitudine Solis, & de vmbra Terræ.

610 611 Cap. 612 613 5. De Glaxia.

614 615 Cap. 616 617 6. Sententia Ari&longs;totelis de Glaxia, partim defenditur: vera, deinde aperitur.

618 619 Summa 4. cap 1. De Monte Parna&longs;&longs;o, dubia. 620 621 Mare extraneum, quod. 622 623 Errata quæ­dam veterum Geographorum, & Ari&longs;t. 624 625 corriguntur. 626 627 Altitudo montis Cauca&longs;i.

628 629 Cap. 630 631 2. De permutatione Aquarum, & continentis. 632 633 Noua ob&longs;eruatio de rotundi­tate Terræ, atque Mundi duratione.

634 635 Ex 2. Meteororum.

636 637 Summa 1. cap. 638 639 1. De Marirubro.

640 641 Summa 2. cap. 642 643 2. De ortu stellarum fixarum: Item de occa&longs;u earumdem.

644 645 Cap. 646 647 eodem, De Canicula. 648 649 De Zonis temperatis. 650 651 Corona Ariadnæ. 652 653 Zonam torridam falsò putabant inho&longs;pitalem. 654 655 cur habitabilis.

656 657 Cap. 658 659 3. De Ventorum&longs;itu.

660 661 Ex 3. Meteor.

662 663 Summa 2. cap. 664 665 2. De Halone, &longs;eu Area, &longs;eu Corona, Mathematica demon&longs;iratio.

666 667 Cap. 668 669 4. De Iridis figura Mathematica demon&longs;tratio, &longs;ed deficiens. 670 671 Noua de eadem tractatio.

672 673 Cap. 674 675 5. De Parelio. 676 677 Rationes Ari&longs;totelis refelluntur.

678 679 Ex 1. De Anima.

680 681 Tex. 11. Quid rectum, quid obliquum. 682 683 & omnis triangulus babet tres, &c.

684 685 T. 13. Sphæra planum tangit in puncto.

686 687 Ex 2. De Anima.

688 689 T. 12. D finitioncm formalem, & cau&longs;alem explicat exemplo Quadrationis Geo­metricæ.

690 691 T. 86. Acutum, & Graue, vt differant.

692 693 T. 159. De Solis magnitudine ad terram.

694 695 Ex 3. De Anima.

696 697 T. 21. Incommen&longs;urabile.

698 699 T. 25. Indiui&longs;ibilia e&longs;&longs;e priuationes.

700 701 T. 32. Permutata proportio.

702 703 Ex lib. De Sen&longs;u. 704 705

706 707 Capite 6. Die&longs;is.

708 709 Cap. 710 711 8. Nete. 712 713 Diapa&longs;on. 714 715 Diapen&longs;e.

716 717 Ex lib. De Memoria, & Rem. 718 719

720 721 Cap. 722 723 1. Omnis triangulus babet tres, &c.

724 725 Cap. 726 727 3. Mathemata facile remini&longs;cibilia.

728 729 Ex lib. De Somnijs. 730 731

732 733 Cap. 734 735 2. Terra, cur nauigantibus moueri videatur.

736 737 Cap. 738 739 3. Cur Oculus digito dimotus res geminatas videat.

740 741 Ex 1. Methaphy&longs;.

742 743 Cap. 744 745 1. Initium Mathematicarum ab Aegyptiorum Saterdotibus. 746 747 Item, Automata, quæ &longs;olstitia. 748 749 Diameter incommen&longs;.

750 751 Summa 2. cap. 752 753 3. Pythagorei Mathematicas cæteris præferebant.

754 755 T. 47. Geometria habet &longs;uas præcognitiones.

756 757 Ex 2. Methaphy&longs;.

758 759 T. 14. Leges apud Mu&longs;icos quid.

760 761 Ex 3. Methaphy&longs;.

762 763 Tex. 764 765 Mathematicas puras carere cau&longs;is efficiente, & finali. 766 767 Ariftippus, vt Mathe­maticas &longs;ugillaret. 768 769 Tetragoni&longs;mus est inuentio mediæ.

770 771 Tex. 8. Geodæ&longs;ia quid.

772 773 Ex 4. Methaphy&longs;.

774 775 T. 4. Quæ &longs;int primæ, & quæ &longs;ecundæ inter Mathematicas.

776 777 T. 28. Diameter, commen&longs;urabilis.

778 779 Ex 5. Methaphy&longs;.

780 781 T. 2. Exemplum cau&longs;æ formalis ex Diapa&longs;on. 782 783 Quæ &longs;int proportiones Mu&longs;icales.

784 785 T. 3. Quæ &longs;it Materia in Mathematicis.

786 787 T. 4. Quidnam &longs;int elementa apud Geometras.

788 789 T. 12. Die&longs;is.

790 791 T. 17. Diameter incommen&longs;urab. 792 793 Quid potentia vnius lineæ.

794 795 T. 34. Diameter incommen&longs;urabilis.

796 797 Ex 6. Methaphy&longs;.

798 799 T. 1. Principia, elementa, & cau&longs;æ in Mathem.

800 801 T. 8. Diameter. 802 803 commen&longs;urab.

804 805 T. 20. De&longs;criptiones. 806 807 Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c. 808 809 Cur Angulus in &longs;emicir­culo rectus.

810 811 T. 22. Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c.

812 813 Ex 10. Methaphy&longs;.

814 815 T. 4. Motum diurnum men&longs;uram reliquorum. 816 817 Die&longs;is.

818 819 T. 11. Similes figuræ quæ. 820 821 Diuer&longs;um in Math. quid.

822 823 Ex 11. Methaphy&longs;.

824 825 Cap. 826 827 2. Ortus punctorum, linearum, &longs;uperficierum.

828 829 Ex 12. Methaphy&longs;.

830 831 T. 44. Peculiari&longs;&longs;imam Philo&longs;ophiam, Mathematicorum videlicet, A&longs;tronomiam pluralitatem Cœlorum docere.

832 833 T. 45. Numerus orbium cœle&longs;t ium &longs;ecundum Eudoxum.

834 835 T. 46. Itidem ex Eudoxo.

836 837 T. 47. Orbium cœle&longs;tium numerus, & fabrica ex Calippo.

838 839 Ex 13. Methaphy&longs;.

840 841 Cap. 842 843 3. Qua ratione Mathematici tractant de Bono.

844 845 In Mechanicas Quæ&longs;tiones.

846 847 Cap. 848 849 1. Quæ &longs;it Mechanica facultas.

850 851 Cap. 852 853 2. De Admirandis circuli.

854 855 Quæ&longs;tio 1. De Libra. 856 857 cur maior, exactior. 858 859 inibi Ari&longs;t. 860 861 lap&longs;us.

862 863 Quæ&longs;t. 2. Duplex Libra. 864 865 Piccolomineus reiectus.

866 867 Quæ&longs;t. 3. De Vecte.

868 869 Quæ&longs;t. 4. De Remo; Petri Nonÿ in Arist. 870 871 correctio.

872 873 Quæ&longs;t. 5. De Temone Nauis.

874 875 Quæ&longs;t. 6. De Antenna.

876 877 Quæ&longs;t. 8 De Rota.

878 879 Quæ&longs;t. 9. De Trochlea, & Scytali. 880 881 figura antiquæ &longs;cytalis.

882 883 Quæ&longs;t. 10. De Libra vacua.

884 885 Qùæ&longs;t. 11. De Curru, & &longs;cytala. 886 887

888 889 Quæ&longs;t. 13. De lugo. 890 891 De Succula.

892 893 Quæ&longs;t. 15. De Vmbelicis.

894 895 Quæ&longs;t. 16. De ligni oblongi, ac breuis flexura.

896 897 Quæ&longs;t. 17. De Cuneo.

898 899 Quæ&longs;t. 18. De Trochlea; error Piccolominei.

900 901 Quæ&longs;t. 19. De Securi. 902 903 Securis veteris figura, & con&longs;tructio; vnà cum affectione eius mirabili.

904 905 Quæ&longs;t. 20. De Statera. 906 907 Veteris stateræ figura restaurata.

908 909 Quæ&longs;t. 21. De Dentiforcipe.

910 911 Quæ&longs;t. 22. De Nucifrago.

912 913 Quæ&longs;t. 23. De Motibus in Rhombo.

914 915 Quæ&longs;t. 24. De duobus circulis concentricis.

916 917 Quæ&longs;t. 25. De funibus lectulorum.

918 919 Quæ&longs;t. 26. De ligno humeris gestato.

920 921 Quæ&longs;t. 27. De ponderibus humero ge&longs;tatis.

922 923 Quæ&longs;t. 28. De Tollenone.

924 925 Quæ&longs;t. 29. De onere à duobus phalanga ge&longs;iato.

926 927 Quæ&longs;t. 30. De &longs;urgente à &longs;e&longs;&longs;ione.

928 929 In libello De Mundo ad Alex.Cap. 930 931 2. Ordo Planetarum.

932 933 Cap. 934 935 3. De Cometis.

936 937 Cap. 938 939 5. De fluxu maris. 940 941 noua de maris æ&longs;tu &longs;ententia.

942 943 In libro De Admirandis audit.

944 945 Num. 8. De nouo orbe. 946 947

948 949 Nu. 950 951 100. De I&longs;tro, error Ari&longs;t. & veterum Geographorum.

952 953 In libello De lineis in&longs;ecabilibus.

954 955 Primus locus. 956 957 De commen&longs;urabili, & incommen&longs;urabili.

958 959 2. locus. 960 961 De figuris incommen&longs;.

962 963 3. locus. 964 965 Quæ linea rationalis, quæ irrationalis. 966 967 Binomio, Apotome.

968 969 4. locus. 970 971 De communi men&longs;ura.

972 973 5. locus. 974 975 Lineæ rectæ motus in &longs;emicirculum.

976 977 6. locus. 978 979 Circulorum æqualium ab inuicem motus.

980 981 7. locus. 982 983 Multum Mathematicis demon&longs;trationibus tribuitur ab Ari&longs;totele.

984 985 8. locus. 986 987 Si extarent indiuidua, omnes lineæ e&longs;&longs;ent commen&longs;.

988 989 9. locus. 990 991 Idem probat aliteŕ.

992 993 10. locus. 994 995 Idem ex triangulo.

996 997 11. locus. 998 999 Idem ex quadrato.

1000 1001 12. Ex diui&longs;ione lineæ idem confirmatur.

1002 1003 13. Idem eodem ferè modo cum præcedenti.

1004 1005 14. A quadrato cuiu&longs;uis lineæ.

1006 1007 15. Idem probat ex &longs;uperficie, & ex corpore.

1008 1009 16. Idem ex contactu circuli cum linea recta.

1010 1011 Ex lib. 1012 1013 9. Hi&longs;toriæ Animalium.

1014 1015 Cap. 1016 1017 39. error Ari&longs;t. & noua ob&longs;eruatio de admiranda quadam Aranearum indu&longs;tria.

1018 1019 De Ince&longs;&longs;u Animal.

1020 1021 Cap. 1022 1023 7. qua ratione in gre&longs;&longs;u &longs;iat bypotenu&longs;a. 1024 1025 & ea quid &longs;it.

1026 1027 De Motu Animal.

1028 1029 Cap. 1030 1031 1. in flexuris animalium e&longs;&longs;e centrum, & circulum.

1032 1033 Cap. 1034 1035 3. Automata.

1036 1037 De Generatione Animal.

1038 1039 Lib. 2. cap. 1040 1041 1. Automata.

1042 1043 Lib. 2. cap. 1044 1045 4. Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c. 1046 1047 Ibidem Diametrum e&longs;&longs;e incommen­&longs;urabilem co&longs;tæ, habet cau&longs;am, & demon&longs;trationem.

1048 1049 In Ethicis ad Nicom.

1050 1051 Lib. 1. cap. 1052 1053 7. Faber, & Geometra diuersè con&longs;iderant angulum rectum.

1054 1055 Lib. 2. cap. 1056 1057 6. De Arithmetica proportione.

1058 1059 cap. 1060 1061 9. Centrum circuli reperire.

1062 1063 Lib. 3. cap. 3. Diameter, & latus incommen&longs;urabilis: Item quid re&longs;olutio Geome­trica: Quid de&longs;ignatio.

1064 1065 Lib. 5. cap. 1066 1067 3. Vnitarius numerus. 1068 1069 Quid Proportionalitas. 1070 1071 Eam in 4. terminis con­&longs;i&longs;tere. 1072 1073 Item quid Permutata proportio. 1074 1075 Item quid Geometrica proportio. 1076 1077 Propor­tio continuata, & di&longs;iuncta quid.

1078 1079 cap. 1080 1081 6. Proportio Geometrica, & Arithmetica.

1082 1083 Lib. 6. cap. 1084 1085 5. Omnis triangulus, &c.

1086 1087 cap. 1088 1089 8. Principia Mathematica non pendere ab experientia.

1090 1091 Lib. 7. cap. 8. De principijs Mathem.

1092 1093 Ex 1. Magnorum Moralium.

1094 1095 Cap. 1096 1097 1. Numerus pariter par.

1098 1099 Cap. 1100 1101 2. Omnis triangulus habet, &c.

1102 1103 Cap. 1104 1105 10 Omnis triangulus habet, &c.

1106 1107 Cap. 1108 1109 16. Quadratum quatuor rectis æquales habere.

1110 1111 Cap. 1112 1113 30. Proportionale in quatuor terminis con&longs;i&longs;tit.

1114 1115 Ex 1. lib. Moralium Eudemiorum. 1116 1117

1118 1119 Cap. 1120 1121 5. Duplum inter multiplices rationes primum tenet locum.

1122 1123 Ex 1. lib. Mor. Eudemiorum. 1124 1125 1126 1127

1128 1129 Cap. 11317 Omnis triangulus habet tres, &c.

1132 1133 Cap. 1134 1135 10. Diametrum commen&longs;. 1136 1137 e&longs;&longs;e. 1138 1139 Circuli quadratio.

1140 1141 Cap. 1142 1143 12. Triangulus habet tres, &c.

1144 1145 Ex 7. lib. Mor. Eudemiorum. 1146 1147 1148 1149

1150 1151 Cap. 1152 1153 12. Diametralis oppo&longs;itio.

1154 1155 Ex 3. lib. Politicorum. 1156 1157

1158 1159 Cap. 1160 1161 2. Modi Dorius, & Phrygius apud Mu&longs;icos, quì.

1162 1163 Ex 4. lib. Polit. 1164 1165

1166 1167 Cap. 1168 1169 3. Modus Doricus, & Phrygius.

1170 1171 Ex 5. lib. Polit. 1172 1173

1174 1175 Cap. 1176 1177 1. Aequitas Arithmetica, & quæ &longs;ecundum dignitatem.

1178 1179 Ex 8. Polit.

1180 1181 Cap. 1182 1183 5. Mu&longs;ica nuda, & cum melodia. 1184 1185 Rithmus quid.

1186 1187 Harmonia lydia. 1188 1189 Rithmus quid &longs;it dicetur in Problematibus.

1190 1191 Cap. 1192 1193 7. Harmoniæ, & Rithmi, vt in præcedenti.

1194 1195 Ex Problematibus.

1196 1197 Sectione 1. num. 1198 1199 3. De ortu &longs;yderum innerrantium: Succulæ, Hypades, Atlantides, Virgiliæ, Pleiades. 1200 1201 num. 1202 1203 17. De occa&longs;u affixarum &longs;tellarum.

1204 1205 Sectione 15. num. 1206 1207 1. Diametri ethymon.

1208 1209 num. 1210 1211 2. Iterum Diametri ethymologia.

1212 1213 num. 1214 1215 3. Denarius numerus cur perfectus. 1216 1217 eius dignitates. 1218 1219 Petri Apponen&longs;is deceptio.

1220 1221 4. De inæquali &longs;olis vmbrarum incremento.

1222 1223 5. Cur Solis illuminationes &longs;emper rotundæ, quamuis per angulo&longs;a foramina ingre­diantur.

1224 1225 6. Cur Luna &longs;emiplena videtur linea recta terminari? 1226 1227 vbi de illuminatione Lunæ, quæ experientia docetur.

1228 1229 7. Cur Sol, & Luna videantur plana?

1230 1231 8. De vmbris Solis orientis, occidentis, meridiantis.

1232 1233 9. Cur Lunæ, quàm Solis minores vmbræ?

1234 1235 10. Cur in defectu Solis etiam illuminationes ip&longs;ius defectiuæ &longs;unt? 1236 1237 modus commodè videndi eclyp&longs;im Solis.

1238 1239 Sect. 16. nu. 1240 1241 1242 1243 1. Cur ba&longs;es bullarum in aquis &longs;unt albæ?

1244 1245 3. Opp lumbati tali.

1246 1247 4. De re&longs;ultu cadentium in terram.

1248 1249 5. Cur conus, & cylindrus diuersè moueantur.

1250 1251 6. De voluminum &longs;ectione.

1252 1253 12. Idem cum præcedenti 3.

1254 1255 13. Idem cum 4 &longs;uperiori. 1256 1257 reflexio radiorŭ pulchrè comparatur corporŭ re&longs;ultationi.

1258 1259 Ex &longs;ectione 19. De Mu&longs;ica.

1260 1261 num. 1262 1263 2. Lineæ duplæ quadratum quadruplum. 1264 1265 Hoc loco &longs;equentium probl. 1266 1267 cau&longs;a, præmittitur totius Mu&longs;icæ ortus breuis tractatio.

1268 1269 3. Vox tam in hypate, quam in nete cantando rumpitur.

1270 1271 4. Cur facilius hypate, quam nete canitur?

1272 1273 5. Cur &longs;uauius notam cantilenam audimus?

1274 1275 7. Cur veteres hypatem omittebant.

1276 1277 8. Cur grauis &longs;onum potest acutæ?

1278 1279 9. Cur cantus ad tibiam vnam, aut lyram &longs;uauior?

1280 1281 10. Teretizare, quid.

1282 1283 11. Vox de&longs;inens acutior fit.

1284 1285 12. Grauior è fidibus contilenam &longs;u&longs;cipit.

1286 1287 13. In Diapa&longs;on graue e&longs;t acuti Antiphonum.

1288 1289 14. Cur Diapa&longs;on vnica vox videtur. 1290 1291 Punicum quid.

1292 1293 15. Leges Mu&longs;icæ, quæ. 1294 1295 Genera, Diatonicum, Chromaticum, Encharmonium. 1296 1297 Tetrachorda quæ.

1298 1299 16. Antiphonum &longs;uauius est &longs;ymphono, cur.

1300 1301 17. Cur &longs;ola Diapa&longs;on canitur. 1302 1303 Magadis quid. 1304 1305 Magadare.

1306 1307 18. De Antiphonis.

1308 1309 19. Cur Diapente, & Diabe&longs;&longs;acon non canunt in Antiphonis.

1310 1311 20. Me&longs;e &longs;ola di&longs;&longs;onante, totum de&longs;&longs;onat p&longs;alterium.

1312 1313 21. Vocum grauium errores manifestiores, cur?

1314 1315 23. Cur nete duplo acutior, quam hypate?

1316 1317 24. Nete interpellata, hypate re&longs;onare videtur.

1318 1319 25. Cur Me&longs;e &longs;ic appellata e&longs;t.

1320 1321 27. Cur &longs;ola audibilia mores obtinent. 1322 1323 Rithmus quid.

1324 1325 28. Cur cantilenæ quædam leges de cebantur?

1326 1327 30. De Harmonijs, &longs;eu Modis, &longs;eu Tonis pri&longs;corum.

1328 1329 31. Vetustiores fui&longs;&longs;e magis Melopæos.

1330 1331 32. De ip&longs;ius Diapa&longs;on ethymo.

1332 1333 33. Cur aptè de acuto in graue, non è contra canitur?

1334 1335 34. Cur bi&longs;diapente, aut bi&longs;diate&longs;&longs;aron con&longs;onantia non e&longs;t.

1336 1337 35. Cur diapa&longs;on omnium pulcherrima e&longs;t con&longs;onantia?

1338 1339 36. Me&longs;e &longs;ola di&longs;&longs;onante, tota perit harmonia.

1340 1341 37. Cur difficilius acutum canere, quam graue?

1342 1343 38. Cur Rythmo, & harmonij omnes gaudent?

1344 1345 39. Cur &longs;uauius e&longs;t &longs;ymphonum vni&longs;ono?

1346 1347 40. Cur &longs;olam Diapa&longs;on magadari &longs;olent?

1348 1349 41. Idem cum 5.

1350 1351 42. Idem cum 34.

1352 1353 43. Idem cum 24. Iugum in lyra veteri quodnam fuerit, vna cum figura vete­ris lyræ.

1354 1355 44. Cur &longs;uauius ad tibiam, quam ad lyram cantatur?

1356 1357 45. Idem cum 25. &longs;uperiori.

1358 1359 46. Idem cum 22.

1360 1361 47. Idem cum 26.

1362 1363 48. Idem cum 7. quid Grauiden&longs;um.

1364 1365 49. Idem cum 30. In choris tragœdiarum, nec &longs;ubdorius, nec &longs;ubphrygius modus erat in v&longs;u.

1366 1367 50. Cur grauior Melodia e&longs;t etiam mollior?

1368 1369 51. Dolia duo æqualia, quorum alterum plenum &longs;it, alterum dimidium, Diapa&longs;on re&longs;onant.

1370 1371 Ex &longs;ectione 23.

1372 1373 De immer&longs;ione Nauigij.

1374 1375 Ex &longs;ectione 30.

1376 1377 6. Omnis triangulus habet tres æquales, &c.

1378 1379 Ex &longs;ectione 31.

1380 1381 7. Cur o culos, ab&longs;que vlla vi, ab inuicem di&longs;&longs;ociari nequimus?

1382 1383 Cur duobus oculis res vna tantum videatur. 1384 1385 Cur aliquando rei vi&longs;æ gemina­tio accidat.

1386 1387 11. Cur di&longs;tractis oculis res vna duæ apparent?

1388 1389 17. Oculo in latera contorto, cur non fit geminatio.

1390 1391 21. Cur &longs;olam rectitudinem vnico oculo in&longs;piciamus.

1392 1393 Auctarium De Oculi Pupilla.

1394 1395 Oculi fabrica præmittitur, colores oculi vbi &longs;int: vnde qui noctu vident.

1396 1397 Primo. 1398 1399 De pupillæ voce.

1400 1401 2. Cur in oculo appareat.

1402 1403 3. Cur non in tota cornea.

1404 1405 4. Pupillæ definitio.

1406 1407 5. Cur mgra in omnibus hominibus.

1408 1409 6. Cur in Sole euane&longs; cat.

1410 1411 7. Quantitas ip&longs;ius num videatur?

1412 1413 8. Cur modo maior, modo minor videatur, & cui&longs;dam lepida deceptio.

1414 1415 Additamentum de natura Mathematicarum di&longs;ciplinarum.

1416 1417 Primo. 1418 1419 De &longs;ubiecto Mathem. &longs;eu de materia intelligibili: vbi o&longs;tenduntur definitio­nes Mathematicæ e&longs;&longs;e perfecti&longs;&longs;imæ.

1420 1421 2. Demon&longs;trationes Mathematicas e&longs;&longs;e perfecti&longs;&longs;imas.

1422 1423 3. Obiectiones: atque etiam calumniæ diluuntur.

1424 1425 4. De præstantia cognitionis, quam Geometria, & Arithmetica gignunt.

1426 1427 5. De 4. Mathematicis medijs: A&longs;tronomia, Per&longs;pectiua, Mu&longs;ica, Mechanica.

1428 1429 6. Appendix de re&longs;olutione omnium demonstrationum primi Euclidis.

1430 1431 7. Clarorum Mathematicorum Chronicon.

1432 1433 Finis Primi Indicis.

1434 1435 ALTER INDEX

1436 1437 Quo loca Aristotelis Geometrica, in hoc Opere explicata, ad Euclidem, &longs;ecundum propo&longs;itionum ordinem refe­runtur; vt Mathematicarum Profe&longs;&longs;ores habeant, vnde &longs;uas prælectiones aliquando valeant locupletare.

1438 1439 In Primo Elem. 1440 1441 Euclidis.

1442 1443 Ad verbum ip&longs;um (Elementum Euclidis) vide infra tex. 4. quinti Methaph. 1444 1445

1446 1447 Ad principia primi elementorum, vide infra tex. 5. pri. Po&longs;ter. 1448 1449 1450 1451

1452 1453 Ad definitionem 10. pri. pro angulo recto, vide 30. quæ&longs;t. 1454 1455 1456 1457 Mecha­nic. & cap. 1458 1459 7. lib. 1460 1461 1. Eth. 1462 1463

1464 1465 Ad axioma 10. quamuis Ari&longs;toteles nihil hac de re dicat; &longs;cias tamen velim hoc vno axiomate qu&ecedil;&longs;tionem quandam inter Philo&longs;ophos valdè difficilem, facile di&longs;&longs;olui. 1466 1467 ea e&longs;t, vtrum marmor, aut adamas, aliudue quidpiam infle­xibile &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;iuè findi, & aperiri po&longs;&longs;it. 1468 1469 qui enim aiunt, &longs;ic refelluntur, quia nimirum &longs;equeretur, duas rectas lineas habere &longs;egmentum commune: in­telligantur enim duæ lineæ, vna in vna &longs;uperficie, altera vero in altera, quæ antequam incipiat apertio, congruant; Quoniam igitur tota illa apertio non fit in in&longs;tanti, &longs;ed &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;iuè, facta iam aliqua apertionis parte con&longs;i­derentur prædictæ lineæ, erit igitur earum pars aliqua ab inuicem &longs;epara­ta, altera verò adhuc alteri congruens, ergo &longs;equetur, duas lineas habere &longs;egmentum commune, quod e&longs;t impo&longs;&longs;ibile, quia contra 10. axioma.

1470 1471 Ad Calcem axiomatum primi accommodetur tex. 1. primi Po&longs;ter. 1472 1473

1474 1475 Ad primam primi, po&longs;t ip&longs;ius explicationem, commodè declarari pote&longs;t, cur Ari&longs;t. Demon&longs;trationes Geometricas appellet De&longs;criptiones, & De&longs;igna­tiones, vide cap. 1476 1477 de Priori, & cap. 1478 1479 24. &longs;ecti primi, libri primi Priorum, & tex. 4. quinti Methaph. & tex. 20. &longs;exti Methaph. & cap. 1480 1481 3. lib. 1482 1483 3. Ethic. 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 Item ad primam primi, vide tex. 7. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. loco 2. 1494 1495

1496 1497 Ad 5. primi, vide cap. 1498 1499 24. &longs;ecti 1 lib. 1500 1501 1. Priorum.

1502 1503 Ad 21. primi, vide tex. 20. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 2. 1504 1505 1506 1507

1508 1509 Ad 22. primi, vide locum 10. de lineis in&longs;ecabilibus.

1510 1511 Ad 28. primi, vide cap. 1512 1513 21. & cap. 1514 1515 22. &longs;ecundi Priorum, & tex. 13. primi Po&longs;ter. 1516 1517

1518 1519 Ad 32. primi, vide cap. 1520 1521 1. &longs;ecti 3. lib. 1522 1523 1. Prior. & cap. 1524 1525 26. &longs;ecundi Priorum, & tex. 2. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 4. & tex. 23. primi Po&longs;ter. vbi ait hanc e&longs;&longs;e poti&longs;&longs;imam demon&longs;trationem. 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 & tex. 37. primi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 39. primi Po&longs;ter. 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 Ibidem loco 4. & tex. 43. primi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 2. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. bis. 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 & tex. 89. &longs;e­cundi Phy&longs;. & tex. 15. octaui Phy&longs;. & tex. 119. primi de Cœlo. 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 & tex. 25. &longs;ecundi de Cœlo. 1562 1563 1564 1565 tex 11. primi de Anima. & cap. 1566 1567 1. de mem. 1568 1569 1570 1571 & remini&longs;c. 1572 1573 & tex. 35. quinti Methaphy&longs;. & tex. 20. &longs;exti Methaphy&longs;. & tex. 22. &longs;exti Methaphy&longs;. & cap. 1574 1575 4. lib. 1576 1577 2. de Generat. animal. 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 & cap. 1592 1593 5. lib. 1594 1595 6. Ethic. & cap. 1596 1597 2. Magnorum Moral. & cap. 1598 1599 10. Mag. Moral. & cap. 16. Mag. Moral. & cap. 7. &longs;ecundi Eudem. & cap. 12. &longs;ecundi Eudem. & problema 6. &longs;ectio­nis 30. tot Ari&longs;totelis loca illu&longs;trat vnica hæc Euclidis Demon&longs;tratio. 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609

1610 1611 Ad &longs;cholion præcedentis 32. primi, vide tex. 39. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 3. Item tex. 25. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. loco vlt. 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617

1618 1619 Ad 45. primi, vide locum 9. de lineis in&longs;ecabilibus.

1620 1621 Ad 46. primi, vide locum 11. de lineis in&longs;ecabilibus.

1622 1623 Ad 47. primi, vide locum 11. de lineis in&longs;ecab. 1624 1625 Item locum 14. de ij&longs;dem.

1626 1627 In &longs;ecundo Elem.

1628 1629 Ad 2. definitionem 2. Gnomonis, vide cap. 1630 1631 de Motu in Po&longs;tprædicam. 1632 1633 Qua­dratum augetur Gnomone circumpo&longs;ito.

1634 1635 Ad 14. propo&longs;. 1636 1637 2. opportunum e&longs;t Auditores de Quadratura circuli erudire, vide igitur cap. 1638 1639 de relatione in prædicam. 1640 1641 & cap. 1642 1643 31. &longs;ecundi Priorum, & tex. 23. primi Po&longs;ter. & finem 1. cap. primi Elenchorum. 1644 1645 1646 1647 lege primam Ar­chimedis de dimen&longs;ione circuli.

1648 1649 In tertio Elem.

1650 1651 Ad primam 3. vide cap. 1652 1653 9. lib. 1654 1655 2. Ethycorum.

1656 1657 Ad 2. tertij, vide tex. 13. lib. 1658 1659 1. de Anima. & locum 16. de lineis in&longs;ecab. 1660 1661 1662 1663

1664 1665 Ad 31. tertij, vide tex. 11. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 20. &longs;exti Methaph. loco 2. 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671

1672 1673 In quarto.

1674 1675 Ad commentarium P. Clauij extremum lib. 1676 1677 4. elementorum. 1678 1679 1680 1681 lege tex. 66. tertij de Cœlo. 1682 1683

1684 1685 In quinto.

1686 1687 Ad 4. definitionem 5. vide cap. 1688 1689 3. lib. 1690 1691 2. Ethyc.

1692 1693 Ad 9. definitionem 5. vide cap. 1694 1695 3. lib. 1696 1697 5. Ethyc. loco 4. & cap. 31. primi Ma­gnorum Moralium. 1698 1699

1700 1701 Ad 10. definitionem 5. vide tex. 29. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 2. 1702 1703

1704 1705 Ad 12. definitionem 5. vide tex. 13. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 3. & tex. 25. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 32. tertij de Anima. & cap. 1706 1707 3. lib. 1708 1709 5. Ethyc. loco 4. 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723

1724 1725 Ad 16. propo&longs;. 1726 1727 5. vide tex. 25. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. loco 2. ex hac Euclidis demon­&longs;tratione patet, vitio&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e illam Auerrois argumentationem, 8. Phy&longs;. comm. 15. &longs;cilicet. 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733

1734 1735 Vt &longs;e habet voluntas antiqua ad antiquum effectum, Ita &longs;e habet etiam voluntas noua ad effectum nouum: Ergo permutando, ita &longs;e habebit voluntas antiqua ad effectum nouum. 1736 1737 Quemadmodum voluntas noua ad effectum antiquum.

1738 1739 Non enim in permutando confert antecedentem ad antecedentem, & con­&longs;equentem ad con&longs;equentem, vt par erat, &longs;ed confert antecedentem ad con&longs;equentem, quod non licet.

1740 1741 In &longs;exto.

1742 1743 Ad 2. propo&longs;it. 1744 1745 6. vide cap. 1746 1747 2. lib. 1748 1749 8. Topicorum loco 41.

1750 1751 Ad 13. &longs;exti, vide tex. 12. &longs;ecundi de Anima, & tex. 3. tertij Methaphy&longs;.In &longs;eptimo. 1752 1753 1754 1755

1756 1757 Ad primam definitionem 7. vide tex. 5. primi Po&longs;ter. 1758 1759

1760 1761 Ad 8. definitionem 7. vide cap. 1762 1763 1. lib. 1764 1765 1. Magnorum Moral.

1766 1767 In octauo.

1768 1769 Ad 4. propo&longs;. 1770 1771 9. vide tex. 20. primi Po&longs;ter. loco 2. 1772 1773

1774 1775 Ad 8. propo&longs;. 1776 1777 9. vide problem. 1778 1779 3. &longs;ectionis 15. loco 4.

1780 1781 In decimo.

1782 1783 Ad primam definitionem 10. vide cap. 1784 1785 23. &longs;ecti 1. primi Priorum. 1786 1787 & tex. 48. primi de Cœlo. 1788 1789

1790 1791 Ad 118. decimi, vide cap. 1792 1793 23. &longs;ecti 1. libri 1. Priorum. 1794 1795 & &longs;ecto 2. cap. 1796 1797 23. li­bri 1. Priorum. 1798 1799 & cap. 22. lib. 1800 1801 2. Priorum. 1802 1803 & tex. 5. primi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 44. primi Po&longs;ter. & cap. 1804 1805 15. primi Po&longs;ter. & tex. 119. primi de Cœlo. 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 & tex. 120. quarti Phy&longs;. & tex. 21. tertij de Anima. & cap. 1818 1819 1. primi Methaphy&longs;. & tex. 28. quarti Met. & tex. 34. quinti Met. & tex. 8. &longs;exti Met. & cap. 1820 1821 4. lib. 1822 1823 2. de Generat. animal. 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 & lib. 1848 1849 3. cap. 1850 1851 3. Ethyc. & cap. 10. &longs;ecundi Eu­dem. 1852 1853 1854 1855 tot Ari&longs;t. 1856 1857 loca ab hac vna Euclidis Demon&longs;tratione illu&longs;trantur.

1858 1859 In decimotertio.

1860 1861 Ad primam propo&longs;. 1862 1863 13. &longs;ecundum editionem Commandini, aut Zamberti. 1864 1865 vide initio Priorum, in verbum (Re&longs;olutio)

1866 1867 Atqne hæc &longs;unt, quæ ex Elementorum opere Ari&longs;toteles pa&longs;&longs;im v&longs;urpauit, quæque nos infra explicabimus.

1868 1869 Finis Secundi Indicis.

1870 1871 Quæ verò ad alias Mathematicas, Mu&longs;icam &longs;cilicet, Per&longs;pe­ctiuam, Mechanicam, & A&longs;tronomiam pertinens, facilè poterunt ex primo Indice ad vnamquamque earum &longs;eor­&longs;um cum libuerit, &longs;ecerni.

1872 1873 TERTIVS INDEX ALPHABETICVS,

1874 1875 cuius numeri re&longs;pondent numeris marginalibus Operis.

AAbductio quid. eius inuentor. numero 16. marginali.Acuti den&longs;um quid.399Aequalitas mathematica, quæ.10Ae&longs;tus maris natura.272Aequitas arithmetica, & æquitas &longs;ecundum dignitatem.330Agathir&longs;i populi.382Angulus quid. vt nominari debeat 10. angulum in &longs;emicirculo e&longs;&longs;e rectum o&longs;tendi per cau&longs;am materialem.71Angulus rectus variè con&longs;ideratur à Geometra, & à Fabro.301Antiphontis quadratura circuli.13Antennæ nauis problema.248Antipbonæ voces. 358. 363. 370. 371.373Apum mirabilis indu&longs;tria.120Apotome linea, quæ.279Aquæ &longs;uperficiem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam ratione mathematica.107Arithmetica proportio.302Aranei industria patefacta, qua ad res inaca&longs;&longs; as tran&longs;eat.293filum emittit ex &longs;ece&longs;&longs;u contra Ari&longs;totelem pro Democrito.ibidem.Astronomiæ principia duo, Apparentia, & Ob&longs;eruatio.8Automata, quæ. 199. 298.a. b.BBa&longs;is ballarum in aqua, cur &longs;it alba, & cur non faciat vmbram.351Binomium linea, quæ.279Bra&longs;ilien&longs;es, qua ratione numer are &longs;oliti.340Bry&longs;onis quadratura circuli.35CCalippi opinio de numero Cœlorum.236Cantilenam notam &longs;uauius, quam ignotam audimus.362Centrum circuli reperire. 303. Centrum mundi mathematicè o&longs;tenditur. 123. Cen-trum grauitatis, & molis. 38.112Chordarum veterum nomina.359Circuli quadratura quid. an po&longs;&longs;ibilis. num. 1. Circulorum concentricorum maiores velocius moueri. 108. Circuli admiranda. 239. De circulorum concentricorum volutatione.263Coalternæ lineæ, quæ. 12. 14.44Cœlorum ordinem petendum ex A&longs;tronomis 109. item numerum233Colores in mu&longs;ica 78. Colores oculorum vnde.408Cometarum tractatiuncula ex recentioribus, qui eas in Cœlo collocant. 136. e&longs;&longs;e &longs;u-pra aerem longi&longs;&longs;imo &longs;altem interuallo o&longs;tenditur mathematicè. 129. in additione.Con&longs;onantia, quid. 64. quibus numeris con&longs;onantiæ con&longs;tent.210Conus, & cylindrus, cur variè mouentur.355Cubus numerus. duo cubi cubus, quid &longs;ignificet.33Curru problema.252Cunei problema.256Cylindri, & coni motus comparatio problematica.335DDefinitiones mathematicæ e&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;entiales, & perfe&longs;&longs;imas. cap. 1. de nat. Math. definitionum v&longs;us in Mathematicis.81De&longs;criptio, & de&longs;cribere, quid. 2. 6. 7.205De&longs;ignatio pro demon&longs;tratione mathematica.305Demon&longs;trationis perfectæ exemplum. 36. demon&longs;trationum mathematicarum præ-&longs;tantia. cap. 4. de nat. Mathem.Dentiforcipis problema.260Denarij numeri perfectio. 339. cur v&longs;que ad denariŭ omnes gentes numerent.339. 8. &c.Diameter incommen&longs;urabilis costæ. 5. diametri etymon.337Diapa&longs;on quid. 90. 350. omnium con&longs;onantiarum pulcberrima.388Diapa&longs;on diapente.359Diapente con&longs;onantia, quæ.359Diate&longs;&longs;aron con&longs;onantia, quæ.359Di&longs;d apa&longs;on con&longs;onantia, quæ.359Die&longs;is, quid. 53.226Dolia duo, quomodo aliquando Diapa&longs;on re&longs;onent.402Duplum inter multiplicia primum e&longs;t.322EElementa mundi non componi ex figuris geometricis.120Elementa geometrica, quæ. 82.213Eudoxi opinio de numero Cœlorum.234Exempla mathematicorum, qualia. 11. non e&longs;&longs;e fal&longs;a.43Exemplorum veritas, & conformitas, quatenus requirantur.36FFiguram omnem planam habere &longs;uos angulos externos quotcŭque æquales quatuor rectis angulis, quæ e&longs;t mira proprietas.59Figuræ &longs;imiles, quæ.70Figurarum planarum ordo 88. quæ nam totum locum repleant.96Figurarum &longs;olidarum, quænam totum locum repleant: vbi Ari&longs;t. & omnium expo&longs;i-torum rratum aperitur.121Figuratio lucis.345Figurationes pro demonftrationibus Mathem.194Filum Araneorum, ex qua parte corporis exeat, & ex qua materia.293Fluxus, ac refluxus maris.272Funium lectorum problema.264GGalaxia quid. 131. Ari&longs;toteles defen&longs;us. 132.140Galibei recens ob&longs;eruatio.141Generatria Mu&longs;icæ veteris. 78. Fusè explicantur.371Geodæ&longs;ia.207Geographiæ veteris plura errata, 145. 146. 147. 148.149Gnomon, quid. 3. &331Gnomones numeri.93Graue qua ratione ad centrum mundi de&longs;cenderet, eiqué aptaretur.112Grauiden&longs;um, quid.399HHalonis demonfiratio.161Hippocratis chij quadratura circuli. 17. eiu&longs;dem quadratura lunulæ optima.17Hyades, Atlantides, & Succulæ.335Hypate, quid.360Hypotenu&longs;a in ince&longs;&longs;u animalium.294IIlluminationes Solis deficientis per foramina tran&longs;euntes, eur &longs;int defectiuæ.350modus videndi eclyp&longs;im facilis, ac iucundus.ibidem.Ince&longs;&longs;us animalium lineis explicatur.294. & &longs;eqqueIncommen&longs;urabilia, quæ, & eorum inuentores.5Indiui&longs;ibilia mathematica e&longs;&longs;e priuationes. 189. oriri ex diui&longs;ione. 231. eorum duo genera.276Infinito, qua ratione vtantur Mathematici. 94.96Iridis demon&longs;tratio &longs;ecundum Ari&longs;t. 163. & &longs;equentibus. Item noua de Iride tra-ctatio. ibidem in additione.Iugum in lyra quid, & eius figura.396LLeges mu&longs;icales.204Libra maior, cur exactior. initio Mechanicarum quæ&longs;t.Linea, quæ terminus est illuminationis in Luna, cur modo recta, modo curua vi-deatur.346Lineæ rationales, & irrationales, &c.279Lumen oculorum noctu videntium, in qua oculi parte manet. in addit. de Pupilla.Lumen Solis, cur &longs;it circulare, quamuis per foramina angulo&longs;a ingrediatur.345Luna plana, cur appareat, cum &longs;it &longs;phærica. 347. cur in eadem altitudine cum Sole &longs;upra horizontem, maiorem vmbram efficiat.349Lunam e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam. 48. illuminari &longs;phæricè quid: ibidem & de illuminatione Lu-næ. iterum e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam ab eclyp&longs;ibus.111Luminarium Solis, & Lunæ ordo.133Lychanos, quid.360Lyræ veteris figura.396MMagalis, &longs;eu magas, & magadi&longs;&longs;are. 373.393Materia intelligibilis. fusè verò. explicatur in tract. de nat. Mathem.Mathematicæ mediæ, &longs;eu &longs;ubalternatæ habent propter quid &longs;uarum demon&longs;iratio-nem.50Mathematici negant reperiri quantitatem indiui&longs;ibilem, &longs;eu minimam.100Mathematicæ non &longs;unt contentio&longs;æ. 83. ostendunt per cau&longs;am formalcm.91Mathematicas inuenerunt Aegyptij Sacerdotes.198Mathematicæ o&longs;tendunt per cau&longs;am materialem, & formalem. 205. earum vtilitas. ibidem. De earum natura. in proprio tractatu. 1876 Mathematicæ maximè tractant de Bono, & Pulcro, qua ratione.237Mechanica facultas, quæ.238Melodia.331Melopeia quid.384Medium Demonstrationum Mathem. in earum tractatu.Me&longs;e quid.360Mina in men&longs;uris quid.53Monochordium.359Motus nauigij, & remi comparatio. 247. Pulchra P. Nonij in id annotatio con-tra Ari&longs;t.Modi mu&longs;ici.383Modorum antiquorum ordo, numerus, &c.383Motus primi mobilis, &longs;eu diurnus e&longs;t men&longs;ura cœlestium motuum.225Mu&longs;ici recentiores reprehen&longs;i. 331. & in fine Chronologiæ.Mu&longs;icæ totius elementa.359Mu&longs;ica nuda, & cum melodia.331NNete quid.360Nucifragi in&longs;trumenti problema.261Numerus, par, impar, primus, & compo&longs;itus, quadratus, &longs;eu æquilaterus, altera parte longior. 24. Cubus num.33Numeri capitales, qui.82Numerum parem e&longs;&longs;e cau&longs;am infiniti: imparem verò finiti.93Numerorum parium alij &longs;unt primi, alij non.224Numerus vnitarius.307OOculi cur moueantur con&longs;imiliter.405Oculi anathome.408. &c.Omophonæ voces. 372.392Oppo&longs;itio diametralis e&longs;t omnium maxima.327Ortus, & occa&longs;us &longs;yderum, quid, & quotuplex: vbide Orione, & Canicula.153PParanete quæ voces, aut chordæ.360Parame&longs;eParhypateParelia, cur appareant nondum &longs;atis explicari.182Parna&longs;&longs;us mons, vbinam &longs;it. Item paropame&longs;&longs;us.145Partes quantitatis &longs;unt materia illius.211Per&longs;pectiuus, quatenus con&longs;ideret lineam.89Pa&longs;&longs;iones Mathematicorum cum &longs;ubiecto conuertuntur.47Pila chri&longs;tallina, vel vitrea, qua ratione comburat.60Planetæ, qua ratione moueantur duplici motu.130Plato &longs;olida ex planis componebat. 105. cur Elementis figuras Geometricas attri-bueret.122Planetarum ordo.271Principia Mathematicorum. 2.118Principia &longs;cientiarum duplicia. Ex quibus, & circa quod.61Principia Mathematica non pendere ab experientia.315Proportio alterna. 28. multiplicata, &longs;eu multiplex &longs;ecundum Cæneum.46P&longs;eudographia quid.83Proportionalitas quid.308Proportio continuata, & di&longs;iuncta quid. 310. alterna, &longs;eu permutata quid.inibi.Proportio Geometrica. 311. Arithmetica.302Proportio &longs;ecundum dignitatem, e&longs;t Geometrica.330Problemata mu&longs;icalia varia à 360. v&longs;que ad finem &longs;ectionis 19. problematum.Punicum, mu&longs;icum in&longs;trumentum.370Pupillæ oculi etymon., & natura. 408. cur in oculo no&longs;tro imago pupillæ appareat. problem. 2.ibidem.Cur nigra in omnibus hominibus. probl. 5.Cur in Sole euane&longs;cat. probl. 6.Cur modo maior, modo minor appareat.Pythagorici primi Mathematicis operam dedere, eas&queacute; ceteris &longs;cientijs præponebăt.202QQvadratura circuli. vide circulus. de quadratura figurarum rectangularum, & quadraturæ duplex definitio cau&longs;alis, & formalis.185Quantitas an conctet ex indiui&longs;ibili. toto libello de lineis in&longs;ecabilibus argumentis mathematicis.RRemi problema.245Re&longs;olutio logica, & mathematica, vt conueniant. 4. &305Re&longs;ultus cadentium in terram, quibus angulis fiat.354Rythmus fusè explicatur.381Rubrum mare duplex.152SScythala quid, & eius figura 250. &252Securis problema, vbi de antiquæ &longs;euris figura, & angulo pulchra demon&longs;tran-tur.258Semitonium, quid.360Solem e&longs;&longs;e terra multo maiorem: probatur.131Sphæram planum tangit in puncto. demon&longs;tratur.184Statera antiqua, quæ: eius figura, & problema.259Stereomatria, vt differat à Geometria.49Succula.253Symphonæ voces. 372.392Symphonia.391TTemonis nauis problema.246Terram e&longs;&longs;e rotundam ex eclyp&longs;i. 114. Item aliter. 115. e&longs;&longs;e re&longs;pectu Cœli paruam valde. 115. e&longs;&longs;e cubum cur Plato voluerit.122Terræ quantitas.115Terram paulatim reduci ad pefféctam rotunditatem.151Tetragoni&longs;mus. vide Quadratura.Teretizare, quid.366Tetrachordon, quid.386Tollenonis problema.267Tonus mu&longs;icus, qui; vnde oriatur.360Trochleæ problemata. 249. 250.251Tunicæ oculi. 408. in tractatu de Pupilla.VVentorum nomina, & &longs;itus.160. a.Vectis quotuplex, & c.244Veteres canere &longs;olitos non &longs;olum in choris, &longs;ed etiam in &longs;cenis. 371. 384.400Virgiliæ, Pleiades.335Vi&longs;æ res gemmantur di&longs;tractis oculis.406Vi&longs;æ rei geminatio non fit altero oculo in latera torto, cur.407Vi&longs;us res vi&longs;as, cur non duplicet, etiam &longs;i duos oculos habeamus.405Vmbelici litoralis problema.254Vmbram terræ parum &longs;upra Lunam tran&longs;cendere.137Vmbrarum incrementa, & decrementa, cur inæqualia. 344.348Vi&longs;us res geminat, &longs;i alter oculorum digito pellatur, cur.197Vocum mu&longs;icalium antiquæ appellationes.360Vox acuta velocior, grauis verò tarda, cur.77Voluminum &longs;ectio modo rectam lineam, modo curuam refert, cur.356Vnitas, cur indiui&longs;ibilis.22ZZonas terræ, vt Arist. de&longs;ignet: & quæ &longs;ecundum ip&longs;um &longs;int habitabiles.156Zonam torridam quatuor reddunt habitabilem.159

1877 1878 Finis Tertij Indicis.

1879

1880 1881 Vi&longs;um e&longs;t etiam opportunum Lectori fore, ea &longs;imul in vnum loca colligere, in quibus Ari&longs;toteles mihi vi&longs;us e&longs;t in Ma­thematicis &longs;copum non attigi&longs;&longs;e, vt alij pr&ecedil;&longs;ertim Peripa­tetici facilius ea inuenire, atque de ij&longs;dem iudicium ferre po&longs;&longs;int.

121Nvmero marginali: vbi ait plura Octaedra, &longs;eu Pyramides re-plere locum: in quo omnes pariter expo&longs;itores lap&longs;i &longs;unt.124Latitudinem figura, ait, cau&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e &longs;upernatationis. & aquam re&longs;i&longs;tere &longs;impliciter diui&longs;ioni.136Cometas in &longs;uprema aeris regione collocat; cuius contrarium ibi line ari demonctratione ostenditur.147Ait Tanaim, & Indum oriri ex monte Paropami&longs;&longs;o. & c.148Ait, tertia parte noctis Cauca&longs;i verticem illuminari à Sole.149Ait Danubium ex Pyreneo monte defluere.150Ait fluuium quendam non minorem Rhodano in Liguria ab&longs;orberi, & iterum egredi.152Ait Rubrum mare parum Atlantico Oceano commi&longs;ceri.159Zonam torridam inhabit abilem exi&longs;timat.164Putat Iridis angulos non po&longs;&longs;e vnum &longs;upra alterum collocari, &longs;ed tantummodo in orbem.182Rationes, quas in Parelij dubitationibus affert, videntur inanes.236In &longs;ubducendo cœle&longs;tium orbium numero, memoria labitur.243Ait lineam O L, &longs;uperare lineam L R, quantitate P L, vt in figura.245Remum ad vectem primi generis reducit.246Temonem nauis reducit ad vectem primi generis.247In motu Remi collato cum motu Nauigij, à Nonio erroris manifestè arguitur. eodem modo in motu Temonis.250Ait maioribus trochleis, aut rotulis facilius onera &longs;ubleuari.256Reducit cuneum ad vectem primi generis.270Cur res in vorticibus ad medium ferantur, veram cau&longs;am a&longs;signa-re non videtur.275Ait Danubium altero ramo in Mediterraneum, altero in Pontum effluere.293Negat Araneum filum ab intrin&longs;eco emittere, Democritum iniuria refellens. quamuis hoc vltimum ad Phy&longs;icum pertineat.403Problem. 2. &longs;ect. 2 3. non benè videtur a&longs;signare cau&longs;am variæ im-mer&longs;ionis nauigij.
1882 1883

LOCAMATHEMATICAEX LIBROPRÆDICAMENTORVMPer ordinem declarata.

1884 1885

1886 1887 1

1888
1889

1890 Ex c. 3. De his, quæ ad aliquid. 1891 1892 1893 Porrò quemadmodum vnus angulus vni angulo æqualis e&longs;t, ita aliquando duo anguli &longs;unt vni angulo æquales, vt patet, &longs;i vnus angulus, v.g. angulus B A C, vbi ait (Scientia verò &longs;i non &longs;it, nihil probibet e&longs;&longs;e &longs;cibile, vt circuli quadratura, &longs;i e&longs;t &longs;cibilis, &longs;cientia quidem eius nondum e&longs;t) Cum velit Ari&longs;t. 1894 1895 o&longs;tendere, nó omnia correlatiua &longs;imul e&longs;&longs;e natura, id de &longs;cibili, & &longs;cien­tia variè probat, præ&longs;ertim verò, quia multa &longs;int &longs;cibilia, quæ tamen nondum &longs;ciantur, vt patet, inquit, in Quadratu­ra circuli, & &longs;cientia ip&longs;ius, quia quamuis ip&longs;a circuli quadratura &longs;it &longs;cibi­lis, nondum tamen &longs;imul cum ip&longs;a, &longs;cientia illius extat. 1896 1897 Quæ vt perfectè intelligantur, &longs;ciendum e&longs;t, quadraturam circuli, quæ à Græcis tetrago­ni&longs;mus dicitur, nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quàm propo&longs;ito cuilibet circulo exhibere quadratum æquale. 1898 1899 Quæ æqualitas debet intelligi de areis, &longs;eu &longs;patijs, ita vt area circuli, &longs;eu &longs;patium illud, &longs;iue &longs;uperficies illa circularis, &longs;it æqualis areæ, &longs;eu &longs;uperficiei quadratæ. 1900 1901 Qua in re plurimi decipiuntur exi&longs;timantes per quadraturam cir culi inquiri æqualitatem linearum, ita vt circumferen­tia circuli debeat e&longs;&longs;e æqualis ambitui, &longs;eu quatuor lateribus quadrati: quod omnino fal&longs;um e&longs;t.

1902 1903 Quadratio porrò circuli dupliciter proponi pote&longs;t, vel tanquam Theo­rema, vel tanquam Problema (theorema autem e&longs;t propo&longs;itio, in qua nihil fa­ciendum proponitur; problema verò aliquid fieri expo&longs;cit) neutrum autem tem­pore Ari&longs;t. 1904 1905 erat adinuentum nam theorema inuentum e&longs;t po&longs;t ip&longs;um ducen­tis circiter annis ab Archimede: problema verò nondum à quoquam per­fectè potuit reperiri. 1906 1907 qua di&longs;tinctione &longs;aluari po&longs;&longs;unt nonnulli, vt Boetius hocloco, qui aiunt, &longs;e vidi&longs;&longs;e Demon&longs;trationem quadraturæ huius, &longs;i nimi­rum intelligant theorema. 1908 1909 & alij etiam verum a&longs;&longs;erunt, dum negant hacte­nus repertam e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;i nimirum de problemate loquantur, theorema Archi­medis e&longs;t propo&longs;itio prima acuti&longs;&longs;imi libelli de Dimen&longs;ione circuli; e&longs;t au­tem huiu&longs;modi. 1910 1911 Quilibet circulus æqualis e&longs;t triangulo rectangulo, cuius quidem &longs;emidiameter vni laterum, quæ circa rectum angulum &longs;unt, ambi­tus verò ba&longs;i eius e&longs;t æqualis.

1912 1913 Sit, v.g. datus circulus, cuius &longs;emidiameter A B; & fit trian gulum rectangu­lum A B C, cuius angulus B, &longs;it rectus, & latus B A, con&longs;tituens angulum re­ctum B, cum ba&longs;i B C, &longs;it æquale &longs;emidiametro A B; ba&longs;is verò B C, &longs;it æqua­lis peripheriæ eiu&longs;dem circuli dati. 1914 1915 1916 1917 demon&longs;trat iam ibi Archimedes acuta æquè, ac euidenti demon&longs;tratione triangulum i&longs;tud æquale e&longs;&longs;e circulo illi. 1918 1919 quod perinde e&longs;t, ac &longs;i o&longs;tendi&longs;&longs;et cuinam quadrato &longs;it æqualis, cum per vl­timam 2. Eucl. po&longs;&longs;imus triangulo huic quadratum æquale con&longs;truere, quod con&longs;equenter dato circulo æquale erit. 1920 1921 1922 1923 Quod &longs;i in modum Problematis ita proponatur: Dato circulo æquale quadratum con&longs;truere, nondum inuenta e&longs;t ratio, quæ demon&longs;tratione confirmetur, qua id geometricè penitus, hoc e&longs;t ad æqualitatem mathematicam, &longs;eu exacti&longs;&longs;imam effici po&longs;&longs;it, totaque; dif­ficultas po&longs;ita e&longs;&longs;e videtur in inue&longs;tigando, quonam modo exhibeamus li­neam rectam B C, æqualem peripheriæ circuli dati. 1924 1925 quam nullus hactenus geometricè illi æqualem potuit exhibere, atque exhibita euidenti demon&longs;tra­tione comprobare; Quamuis Archimedes acumine &longs;anè mirabili in lib. 1926 1927 de lineis &longs;piralibus, eam quoque theorematicè, non tamen problematicè inue­&longs;tigauit. 1928 1929 nam propo&longs;itione 18. illius admirandi operis inuenit lineam rectam æqualem circumferentiæ primi circuli &longs;piralis lineæ; propo&longs; verò 19. repe­rit aliam rectam æqualem circumferentiæ &longs;ecundi circuli. 1930 1931 tu ip&longs;um con&longs;ule, &longs;i admirandarum rerum contemplatione delectaris. 1932 1933 Multa hac de re Pap­pus Alexandrinus lib. 1934 1935 4. Math. coll. 1936 1937 & Ioannes Buteo vnico volumine om­nes quadraturas tain pri&longs;corum, quam recentiorum comprehen&longs;us e&longs;t. 1938 1939 Qua­re qui plura cupit, eos adeat; nos tamen infra &longs;uis locis explicabimus tres illas celebres antiquorum Antiphontis, Bri&longs;&longs;onis, & Hippocratis quadra­turas, quamuis fal&longs;as, quarum &longs;æpe meminit Ari&longs;t. & alij. 1940 1941 &longs;olet autem à non­nullis di&longs;putari, vtrum quadratura i&longs;ta problematica &longs;it po&longs;&longs;ibilis, nec ne, cum videant eam à nemine, quamuis diu magno labore perqui&longs;itam, hacte­nus adinuentam e&longs;&longs;e. 1942 1943 ego quidem e&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;ibilem exi&longs;timo, quis enim dubi­tare pote&longs;t, po&longs;&longs;e exi&longs;tere quadratum æquale circulo propo&longs;ito? 1944 1945 Quod &longs;i po­te&longs;t fieri, quare non etiam demon&longs;trari? 1946 1947 pr&ecedil;fertim cum videamus ab Archi­mede iam inuentam e&longs;&longs;e, quatenus Theorema e&longs;t. 1948 1949 & præterea con&longs;tet, Hip­pocratem quadra&longs;&longs;e lunulam, vt &longs;uo loco dicemus, & Archimedem in libel­lo de quadratura Paraboles, quadra&longs;&longs;e ip&longs;am Parabolem, quæ tamen duæ fi­guræ, lunula &longs;cilicet, & parabola &longs;unt curuilineæ.

1950 1951

1952 1953 2

1954 1955 Ex cap. 1956 1957 de Priori (in &longs;cientijs demon&longs;tratiuis e&longs;t prius, & po&longs;terius ordine, elementa enim priora &longs;unt ijs, quæ de&longs;cribuntur, nam principia prior a &longs;unt theore­matibus ordine) verba illa, nam principia, &c. 1958 1959 quæ non &longs;unt in antiqua tran­&longs;latione de&longs;ump&longs;imus ex ca&longs;tigati&longs;&longs;imo græco codice editionis Francfor­dien&longs;is, propterea quod totum hunc locum declarant; &longs;unt autem i&longs;ta, ai/gar arxai/ pro/terai tw_n qewrhma/twn th ta/xei. per &longs;cientias autem demon&longs;tra­tiuas intelligendas e&longs;&longs;e hoc loco ip&longs;as Mathematicas ex eo patet, quod illis a&longs;&longs;ignet Ari&longs;t. De&longs;criptiones; nam hoc verbo, De&longs;criptiones, &longs;eu figuratio­nes, &longs;olet ip&longs;e Mathematicas Demon&longs;trationes innuere, quod in ip&longs;is figu­rationes, & De&longs;criptiones adhibeantur, vt alijs locis patebit: idcirco ver­ba illa à nobis addita ex græco, optim è præcedentia exponunt, cum per ele­menta intelligantur principia, qualia &longs;unt initio Euclidis, & per de&longs;criptio­nes exponant theoremata. 1960 1961 quod autem principia illa ordine priora &longs;int de­mon&longs;trationibus, &longs;iue ip&longs;as præcedant, ex ip&longs;a primi Euclidis in&longs;pectione patere pote&longs;t.

1962 1963

1964 1965 3

1966 1967 Ex cap. 1968 1969 de motu (Quadratum augetur Gnomone circumpo&longs;ito) Gnomon vox græca inter alia &longs;ignificat in&longs;trumentum illud, quod Latini tum amu&longs;&longs;im,

tum normam appellant, Itali verò, Squadra, ad cuius &longs;imilitudinem Geometræ denominarunt fi­guram quandam, &longs;eu portionem cuiu&longs;uis paralle­logrammi, vt videre e&longs;t in definitione &longs;ecunda 2. elem. 1970 1971 & in præ&longs;enti figura, in qua quadratum A B C D, circumpo&longs;ito gnomone E F G, augetur, & fit maius quadratum H B I L.

1972 1973 Idem etiam verum e&longs;t in quadrato arithmeti­co, &longs;iue in numero quadrato: is enim pariter ad­dito Gnomone augetur. 1974 1975 i. 1976 1977 addito numero impari. 1978 1979 quemadmodum infra 3. Phy&longs;. tex. 26. fusè explicabimus. 1980 1981

1982 1983 Ex Primo Priorum re&longs;olutoriorum.

1984 1985

1986

1987 1988 4

1989 1990 Aliquorum opinio e&longs;t, Ari&longs;totelem ho&longs;ce libros appella&longs;&longs;e re&longs;olu­torios, quod per illos doceat &longs;yllogi&longs;mum, ac demon&longs;trationem iam factam in &longs;ua immediata principia re&longs;oluere, quam opinio­nem meum non e&longs;t, nunc refellere. 1991 1992 per&longs;ua&longs;um tamen mihi e&longs;t, rem multo aliter &longs;e habere, veram rationem huius tituli petendam e&longs;&longs;e ex peni­tiori Mathematicorum eruditione. 1993 1994 Sciendum itaque id, quod tradit Pappus Alex. initio &longs;eptimi Mathem. collect. 1995 1996 antiqui&longs;&longs;imos videlicet Geometras, Euclidem, Apollonium Pergæum, & Ari&longs;t&ecedil;um &longs;crip&longs;i&longs;&longs;e libros de re&longs;olutio­ne, in quibus ars tradebatur, qua propo&longs;ito quouis theoremate, aut proble­mate po&longs;&longs;ent facile ex eo, tanquam vero accepto inue&longs;tigare aliquam veri­tatem, per quam deinde componerent illius, quod quærebatur, Demon&longs;tra­tionem; inue&longs;tigationem illam appellabant re&longs;olutionem: compo&longs;itionem verò nominabant di&longs;cur&longs;um illum, quo ex vero illo per re&longs;olutionem inuento, o&longs;tendebant conclu&longs;ionem. 1997 1998 Porrò Diogenes Laert. huius re&longs;olutionis in­uentorem facit Platonem: à quo eam Leodamas Tha&longs;ius didicit, cuius be­neficio, pluries deinde Geometricas demon&longs;trationes adinuenit. 1999 2000 2001 2002 definitio vtriu&longs;que e&longs;t a pud Euclidem ad primam propo&longs;. 2003 2004 13. Elem. iuxta tran&longs;latio­nem Zamberti, & Commandini; vbi etiam quinque priora theoremata, pri­mò per re&longs;olutionem, deinde per compo&longs;itionem demon&longs;trantur, quæ tan­quam per&longs;picua exempla rei propo&longs;itæ in&longs;eruire po&longs;&longs;unt. 2005 2006 &longs;unt præterea fre­quentes huiu&longs;modi re&longs;olutiones in operibus Archimedis, Apollonij, & Pap­pi. 2007 2008 extat adhuc liber Datorum Euclidis, qui geometricis re&longs;olutionibus in­&longs;eruiebat. 2009 2010 vtinam extarent etiam alij de re&longs;olutione, quorum auxilio non tantopere recentiores Mathematici in inueniendis Demo&longs;trationibus la­borarent; hanc re&longs;olutionem, &longs;ic Pappus fu&longs;ius, quam Euclides explicat; re&longs;olutio e&longs;t via à quæ&longs;ito tanquam conce&longs;&longs;o per ea, quæ exip&longs;o con&longs;equun­tur ad aliquod certum, & conce&longs;&longs;um: in re&longs;olutione enim id, quod quæritur tanquam factum, & verum &longs;upponentes, quid ex hoc &longs;equatur, con&longs;idera­mus, quou&longs;que incidamus in aliquod iam cognitum, vel quod &longs;it è numero principiorum. 2011 2012 Quod quidem erat fignum euidens, quæ&longs;itum quoque verum e&longs;&longs;e. 2013 2014 eadem omnino habet Proclus in comm. ad &longs;extam primi elem. 2015 2016 2017 2018 Quod porrò Ari&longs;t. ip&longs;e hanc re&longs;olutionem Mathematicam cognouerit e&longs;&longs;e medij inqui&longs;itionem manife&longs;tum e&longs;t ex cap. 3. lib. 3. Ethyc. vbi &longs;ic ait (Qui enim con&longs;ultat, quærere videtur, & re&longs;oluere prædicto modo, quemadmodum de&longs;igna­tiones) vbi per de&longs;ignationes intelligit Geometricas demon&longs;trationes, vt &longs;upra innuimus, & infra probabimus; cum ergo con&longs;ultatio nihil aliud &longs;it, quam medij idonei ad finem in rebus agendis inqui&longs;itio, eamque dicat e&longs;&longs;e &longs;imilem re&longs;olutioni Geometricæ, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, ip&longs;am quoque re&longs;olutionem e&longs;&longs;e medij in rebus &longs;peculatiuis idonei perue&longs;tigationem. 2019 2020 2021 2022 Exi&longs;timo igitur cum docti&longs;&longs;imis Zabarella, Burana, Toleto, & alijs, Ari&longs;totilem non &longs;olum hanc &longs;uam logicam ad mathematicarum &longs;cientiarum typum compegi&longs;&longs;e, verum potius imitatum e&longs;&longs;e opus illud Euclidis de re&longs;olutione, atque ex eo non &longs;olum plurima exempla Geometrica, verum etiam titulum de&longs;ump&longs;i&longs;&longs;e, præ&longs;ertim cum argumentum e&longs;&longs;et ferè idem vtrobique, &longs;ed Ari&longs;t. 2023 2024 intentio fuerit accommodare re&longs;olutionem omnibus &longs;cientijs; Euclidis verò, & alio­rum Geometriæ &longs;oli. 2025 2026 hinc patere pote&longs;t, cur hi libri re&longs;olutorij in&longs;cribantur, quod &longs;cilicet tradunt methodum, qua valeamus quæ&longs;itum quoduis re&longs;olue­re, ide&longs;t, ex quæ&longs;ito tanquam vero inue&longs;tare aliquam veritatem, per quam deinde propo&longs;itæ quæ&longs;tionis rationem methodo compo&longs;itiua reddamus. 2027 2028 Et verò cum reliquas appellationes Problematis, Theorematis, Propo&longs;itionis, definitionum, po&longs;tulatorum, axiomatum, & alia huiu&longs;modi ex Geometri­cis ad omnes &longs;cientias tran&longs;tulerit, quid ni etiam re&longs;olutionem? 2029 2030 maximè verò, quia &longs;i horum lib. 2031 2032 intentio e&longs;&longs;et docere iam factum &longs;yllogi&longs;mum in &longs;ua principia re&longs;oluere, parum e&longs;&longs;et vtilis; imò nec vtilis, &longs;ed &longs;uperfluum quid. 2033 2034 at verò vbinam docuit hanc re&longs;olutionem? 2035 2036 profecto nullibi. 2037 2038 quid opus e&longs;t iam factum &longs;yllogi&longs;mum re&longs;oluere? 2039 2040 at verò propo&longs;itam quæ&longs;tionem re&longs;ol­uere veterum mathematicorum more, hoc opus, hic labor e&longs;t.

2041 2042 Hanc porrò re&longs;olutionem attendendam e&longs;&longs;e primò penes formam, quam docet primis duobus analyticis; &longs;ecundò penes materiam, quam tradit duo­bus vltimis, non prætereundum. 2043 2044 reliquas duas logicæ partes, Topicam &longs;ci­licet, & Elenchos, quæ &longs;yllogi&longs;mos probabilem, & apparentem docent, no­luit appellare re&longs;olutorios, quamuis inuentionem mediorum doceant, quia iam mos i&longs;te inoleuerat apud Philo&longs;ophos, & Mathematicos, vt illa &longs;ola pars, quæ ex materia nece&longs;&longs;aria doceret &longs;yllogi&longs;mum demon&longs;tratiuum con­&longs;truere, diceretur re&longs;olutio: cum Mathematici, qui primi de re&longs;olutione &longs;crip&longs;erunt, talem materiam &longs;olum con&longs;iderent.

2045 2046

2047 2048 5

2049 2050 Ex cap. 2051 2052 23. &longs;ecti primi lib. 2053 2054 1. (Vt quod diameter incommen&longs;urabilis eo, quod imparia æqualia paribus fiant, &longs;i fuerit po&longs;ita commen&longs;ur abilis. 2055 2056 æqualia igitur fieri imparia paribus ratiocinantur, diametrum vtrò incommen&longs;urabilem e&longs;&longs;e ex &longs;uppo­&longs;itione mon&longs;trant, quoniam fal&longs;um accidit propter contradictionem) Euclides pri­mis duabus definitionibus 10. elem. 2057 2058 definit, quæ nam &longs;int magnitudines commen&longs;. 2059 2060 & quæ incommen&longs;. 2061 2062 &longs;ic; commen&longs;. 2063 2064 magnitudines dicuntur, quas

eadem men&longs;ura metitur, vt &longs;i fuerint duæ magnitu­dines, A, & B, quas eadem men&longs;ura C, ide&longs;t quan­titas C, metiatur, ide&longs;t quantitas C, applicata quan­titati A, & per ip&longs;am aliquoties replicata ip&longs;am ad­æquatè ab&longs;umat, vt &longs;i linea C, quinquies &longs;uper li­neam A, replicata eam præcisè, & perfectè omninò adæquaret: & eadem linea C, applicata lineæ B, & &longs;uper illam ter, v.g. re­petita ip&longs;am con&longs;umeret, diceretur vtranque metiri, & proinde duas lineas A, & B, e&longs;&longs;e comm. definit po&longs;tea incommen&longs; hoc modo, incomm, autem, qua­rum nullam contingit communem men&longs;uram reperiri; vt &longs;i duarum linea­
rum, A, B, nunquam po&longs;&longs;et reperiri aliqua men&longs;u­ra, quæ vtranque adæquatè metiretur, v. g. &longs;i linea C, men&longs;uraret A, quater &longs;umpta, ter autem &longs;umpta non adæquaret omnino lineam B, &longs;ed deficeret, vel ex­cederet aliquantulum, atque hoc fieret in quauis alia men&longs;ura, loco ip&longs;ius C, a&longs;&longs;umpta, &longs;iue maior, &longs;iue minor ip&longs;a C, vt vtranque nunquam perfectè metiretur, e&longs;&longs;ent duæ illæ lineæ incommen&longs;. 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 Extare porrò tales lineas, & &longs;uperficies, & corpora, eaque; quam­plurima, ac penè infinita ex 10. Elem. manife&longs;tum e&longs;t. 2075 2076 inuentum autem hu­ius a&longs;ymmetriæ, quod Pythagoricis veteres attribuunt, mihi &longs;emper vi&longs;um e&longs;t omni maius admiratione, cum nulla experientia, nullusque; effectus in ip­&longs;ius cognitionem potuerit pri&longs;cos illos Geometras inducere. 2077 2078 Quapropter non immeritò diuinus ille Plato lib. 2079 2080 7. de legib. 2081 2082 huius a&longs;ymmetriæ ignora­tionem, adeo dete&longs;tatus e&longs;t, vt eam non hominum, &longs;ed &longs;uum, pecorumque ignorantiam cen&longs;uerit. 2083 2084 inter lineas incommen&longs;. 2085 2086 &longs;unt diameter, & latus eiu&longs;­dem quadrati, quia nulla pote&longs;t reperiri men&longs;ura quantumuis exigua, vti
e&longs;t lineola E, in præ&longs;enti quadrato, etiam&longs;i illam in infinitum &longs;ubdiuidas, quæ vtranque lineam, diame­trum &longs;cilicet A C, & latus quoduis ex quatuor, v. g. latus B C, præcisè omnino metiatur. 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 theorema i&longs;tud demon&longs;tratur in vltima 10. Elem. eodem me­dio, quod ab Ari&longs;totele hic innuitur; Euclides ex &longs;uppo&longs;itione alterius partis contradictionis ip&longs;ius propo&longs;itionis, quæfal&longs;a e&longs;t, nimirum &longs;uppo&longs;ito prædictas lineas e&longs;&longs;e comm. deducit ad impo&longs;&longs;ibile, &longs;iue, vt ait hic Ari&longs;t. 2093 2094 fal&longs;um ratiocinatur, quod &longs;ci­licet idem numerus e&longs;&longs;et par, & impar, quod Ari&longs;t. &longs;ignificat, quando ait, imparia æqualia paribus fiunt. 2095 2096 2097 2098 ex quo ab&longs;urdo deducitur fal&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e prædi­ctam &longs;uppo&longs;itionem, quæ a&longs;truebat e&longs;&longs;e comm. & proinde altera pars con­tradictionis, quæ e&longs;t, e&longs;&longs;e incomm. vera a&longs;truitur. 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ex quibus &longs;atis videtur ex­plicari hic locus. 2105 2106 videas igitur, quàm leuiter nonnulli no&longs;træ tempe&longs;tatis ageometreti i&longs;tud exponant, dicentes diametrum e&longs;&longs;e incomm. co&longs;tæ, nihil aliud &longs;igni&longs;icare, quam diametrum e&longs;&longs;e longiorem co&longs;ta, qua expo&longs;itione nihil ineptius. 2107 2108 2109 2110 Aduerte tandem figuram vulgatæ editionis e&longs;&longs;e ineptam, cum habeat duo quadrata alterum &longs;uper diametro alterius, quorum maius &longs;uperuacaneum e&longs;t.

2111 2112

2113 2114 6

2115 2116 Et cap. 2117 2118 24. &longs;ecti primi libri primi (Sed magis efficitur manife&longs;tum in de&longs;cri­ptionibus, vt quod æquicruris, qui ad ba&longs;im æquales &longs;int, ad centrum ductæ A B, A C, &longs;i igitur æqualem accipiat A G, angulum ip&longs;i A B D, non omnino ex. 2119 2120 &longs;timans æquales, qui &longs;emicirculorum, & rur&longs;us G, ip&longs;i D, non omnem a&longs;&longs;umens eum, qui &longs;e­cti. 2121 2122 amplius ab æqualibus existentibus totis angulis, & ablatorum æquales e&longs;&longs;e re­tiquos E, F, quod ex principio petet, ni&longs;i acceperit ab æqualibus demptis æqualia derelinqui.) Primum &longs;cias characteres vulgatæ editionis, vna cum figura ip­&longs;is re&longs;pondente, e&longs;&longs;e mendo&longs;os; propterea ex textu græco vtrunque corri­gendum putaui in hunc, quem vidi&longs;ti modum. 2123 2124 Secundo, per de&longs;criptiones Ari&longs;t. 2125 2126 intelligere demon&longs;trationes Geometricas &longs;upra diximus, quod ex hoc loco euidenter confirmatur, vbi manife&longs;tè loco de&longs;criptionis &longs;upponit li­nearem demon&longs;trationem. 2127 2128 In hoc itaque exemplo vult Ari&longs;t. 2129 2130 illud demon­&longs;trare, quod Euclides in 5. primi o&longs;tendit, alio tamen modo, &longs;cilicet I&longs;o&longs;ce­lium triangulorum, qui ad ba&longs;im &longs;unt anguli, inter &longs;e &longs;unt æquales. 2131 2132 e&longs;t au­tem figura in omnibus textibus deprauata, quam &longs;ic puto rè&longs;tintuendam e&longs;&longs;e ex quodam græco codice, qui characteres hoc modo appo&longs;uerat. 2133 2134 &longs;it I&longs;o&longs;ce­

les C A B, cuius ba&longs;is C B, Dico angulos &longs;upra ba&longs;im, in quibus literæ E F, e&longs;&longs;e inuicem æquales. 2135 2136 facto centro in A, de&longs;cribatur circulus A B C, tran&longs;iens per puncta C B, iam &longs;ic. 2137 2138 omnes anguli &longs;emicirculi &longs;unt æquales in­ter &longs;e, ergo anguli A C G, A B D, &longs;unt æquales. 2139 2140 Præte­rea cùm anguli ciu&longs;dem &longs;ectionis &longs;int æquales ad inui­cem, erunt anguli &longs;ectionis C B D G, nimirum anguli, in quibus &longs;unt G, & D, inter &longs;e æquales: cumque; hi duo anguli &longs;ectionis &longs;int partes angulorum &longs;emicirculi A C G, A B D, &longs;i illi ab his auferantur, auferuntur æquales anguli ab æqualibus an­gulis, ergo anguli, qui remanent, &longs;cilicet E, & F, erunt æquales, quod erat demon&longs;trandum. 2141 2142 hinc Ari&longs;t. 2143 2144 infert manife&longs;tum e&longs;&longs;e oportere in omni &longs;yllo­gi&longs;mo, reperiri vniuer&longs;ales, & affirmatiuas propo&longs;itiones, vt Factum e&longs;t in præcedenti aliter e&longs;&longs;et petitio principij. 2145 2146 Quænam vero &longs;it æqualitas, quam Geometræ con&longs;iderant, infra cap. 1. &longs;ecti 3. explicabicur.

2147 2148

2149 2150 7

2151 2152 Ex cap. 2153 2154 2. &longs;ecti 2. lib. 2155 2156 1. (Secundum veritatem quidem ex ijs, quæ &longs;ecundum veritatem de&longs;cribuntur ine&longs;&longs;e, ad dialecticos autem &longs;yllogi&longs;mos ex propo&longs;itionibus &longs;ecundum opinionem) verba illa; ex ijs, quæ &longs;ecundum veritatem de&longs;cribuntur ine&longs;&longs;e; &longs;ic græcè, e/a tw_n xata\ aleiq/ei/an diagegramme/non, vbi manife&longs;tè vtitur verbo, De&longs;cribere, per quod &longs;uperius annotauimus apud Ari&longs;t. &longs;ignificari Geometricas demon&longs;trationes, nam eas opponit dialecticis &longs;yllogi&longs;mis, &longs;e­quentibus verbis, cum dixit (ad diale cticos autem &longs;yllogi&longs;mos ex propo&longs;i­tionibus &longs;ecundum opinionem) hac adhibita con&longs;ideratione, quam inter­pres non videtur adhibui&longs;&longs;e, &longs;en&longs;us huius loci non erit ob&longs;curus.

2157 2158

2159 2160 8

2161 2162 Ex eodem loco paulo po&longs;t (Quare principia quidem, quæ &longs;ecundum vnum­quodque &longs;unt experimenti est tradere: dico autem, vt a&longs;trologicam experientiam a&longs;trologicæ &longs;cientiæ: acceptis enim apparentibus &longs;ufficienter, ita inuentæ &longs;unt a&longs;tro­logicæ demonstrationes) Cum rationem tradat inueniendorum mediorum ad quodlibet problema demon&longs;trandum; nunc docet, non omnia in &longs;eientijs po&longs;&longs;e probari, aut demou&longs;trari: principia enim &longs;cientiarum non demon&longs;tran­tur, &longs;ed &longs;ola experientia manife&longs;ta &longs;unt; vt patet in A&longs;tronomia, quæ ab ex­perientia &longs;ua &longs;olet &longs;tabilire principia: principijs autem experimento con&longs;ti­tutis ex ip&longs;is reliqua problemata demon&longs;trantur. 2163 2164 duo autem &longs;unt apud a&longs;tro­nomos genera experimenti, primum dicitur Phænomena, ide&longs;t, apparentiæ; & &longs;unt ea, quæ vulgo omnibus patent, vt Solem oriri, & occidere; a&longs;tra fer­ri circulariter, diem augeri modo, modo minui: & his &longs;imilia. 2165 2166 alterum ge­nus dicitur ob&longs;eruationes, quæ tantummodo a&longs;tronomiæ peritis per ob&longs;er­uationem innote&longs;cunt, vt Solem inæqualiter ferri proprio motu per Zodia­cum; aliquando maiorem, aliquando minorem videri; plures dies immo­rari citra æquatiorem in parte Zodiaci boreali, quam in altera vltra æqua­torem au&longs;trali. 2167 2168 dies naturales e&longs;&longs;e inuicem inæquales, &c. 2169 2170 ex quibus deinde ponunt eccentricos, & augem, ad &longs;aluandas tum apparentias, tum ob&longs;erua­tiones; & hac ratione a&longs;trologica &longs;cientia paulatim reperta e&longs;t, ac in dies reperitur.

2171 2172

2173 2174 9

2175 2176 Ex cap. 2177 2178 3. &longs;ecti 2. lib. 2179 2180 1. (Vt an ne diameter incomm.) loquitur de a&longs;ymme­tria diametri, & co&longs;tæ eiu&longs;dem quadrati, de qua fusè egimus &longs;uperius in cap. 2181 2182 23. &longs;ecti 1. huius libri; quæ &longs;i repetantur, optimè hunc locum declarant.

2183 2184

2185 2186 10

2187 2188 Ex cap. 2189 2190 1. &longs;ecti 3. lib. 2191 2192 1. (Sit A, duo recti, in quo B, triangulus, in quo C, æquicrus, ip&longs;i itaque C, ine&longs;t A. per B; ip&longs;i vero B, non amplius per aliud, per &longs;e namque triangulus habet duos rectos) nullum aliud exemplum tam frequenter v&longs;urpat Philo&longs;ophus, quam i&longs;tud ex Mathematicis de&longs;umptum de triangu­lo, &longs;cilicet, omnis triangulus habet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis an­gulis, cuius Demon&longs;tratio e&longs;t in 32. primi Elem. 2193 2194 quod, vt probè intelliga­tur, explicandum e&longs;t penes quid attendenda &longs;it æqualitas inter angulum, & angulum, quod facile a&longs;&longs;equemur, &longs;i meminerimus angulum e&longs;&longs;e in clinatio­nem illam, quam duæ lineæ non in directum po&longs;itæ faciunt: &longs;iue etiam (vt melius percipiamus) angulum e&longs;&longs;e acumen illud, &longs;iue mucronem illum, quem duæ lineæ non in directum con&longs;titutæ faciunt, vt duarum linearum A B, A C,

inclinatio in puncto A, &longs;iue acumen illud, &longs;iue mucro, e&longs;t ratio anguli. 2195 2196 &longs;olum igitur duo anguli erunt æqua­les, quando vnius acumen æquale erit acumini alterius; etiam &longs;i lineæ con&longs;tituentes vnum angulum &longs;int lon­giores lineis alterum angulum con&longs;tituentibus, quia quantitas anguli non attenditur penes longitudinem linearum, &longs;ed penes inclinationem, & mucronem, quem faciunt: vnde etiam&longs;i duæ lineæ prædictæ A B, A C, productæ, &longs;iue etiam decurtatæ fuerint, dum­modo &longs;itus, &longs;iue po&longs;itio ip&longs;arum, quam ad inuicem habent, non varietur, erit &longs;emper eadem quantitas anguli A. 2197 2198 Aduertendum præterea rationem anguli non po&longs;&longs;e &longs;aluari in &longs;olo puncto A, in quo lineæ concurrunt, &longs;ed ne­ce&longs;&longs;ariam e&longs;&longs;e aliquam quantitatem, quamuis exiguam, linearum A B, A C. 2199 2200 Notandum etiam, quod in nominatione angulorum, quæ fit per tres lite­ras, &longs;emper literam illam e&longs;&longs;e medio loco proferendam, quæ ad acumen ip­&longs;um po&longs;ita e&longs;t, vt in &longs;uperiori, litera A, debet &longs;emper media proferri, dicen­do angulum B A C, &longs;iue C A B, nunquam tamen licet dicere angulum A C B, vel C B A. 2201 2202 Porrò quemadmodum vnus angulus vni angulo æqualis e&longs;t, ita aliquando duo anguli &longs;unt vni angulo æquales, vt patet, &longs;i vnus angulus, v.g. angulus B A C, diuidatur in duos angulos à linea A D. tunc enim duo angu­
li partiales B A D, D A C, erunt æquales totali angulo B A C, cum partes omnes &longs;imul &longs;umptæ &longs;int &longs;uo toti æqua­les. 2203 2204 2205 2206 pariter tres anguli po&longs;&longs;unt æquari & vni, & duobus alijs angulis, quando nimirum a cumina, &longs;iue mucrones il­li &longs;imul ad vnum punctum con&longs;tituti adæquarentur mucro­niilli, quem con&longs;tituerent alij duo anguli, quibus illi tres &longs;unt pares, v.g. &longs;int tres anguli trianguli A B C, &longs;intque; alij duo anguli recti,
quos linea perpendicularis D E, facit cum li­nea F G; &longs;it inquam anguli recti D E F, D E G, tunc tres anguli illius trianguli dicentur æqua­les duobus hi&longs;ce rectis, &longs;i tres illi mucrones trianguli fimul &longs;umpti, & vniti ad punctum E, ad quod duo quoque mucrones angulorum
rectorum coeunt, congruent omnino duobus prædictis angulis rectis, &longs;iue duobus illis mu­cronibus angulorum rectorum, &longs;iue con&longs;ti­tuent lineam rectam F E G, &longs;icuti faciunt etiam duo illi anguli recti; &longs;iue etiam dica­mus, occupabunt idem &longs;patium omninò, & præcisè, quod occupant duo recti: v.g. &longs;i mucro B, ibi poneretur, faceret angulum F E H, & &longs;i ibi iuxta ip&longs;um apponeretur mucro A, faceret angulum H E I. quem &longs;i deinceps &longs;ub&longs;equetur reliquus angulus C, con&longs;titueret reli­quum angulum I E G. iam, vt vides, illi tres anguli ad E, tran&longs;lati, &longs;unt æqua­les duobus rectis ad E, pariter con&longs;titutis, cum illi tres fiant partes duorum rectorú, vel quia occupant idem &longs;patium, vel eandem lineam rectam F E G, con&longs;tituant. 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 habet igitur omne triangulum &longs;iue &ecedil;quilaterum, &longs;iue &longs;calenum, &longs;iue I&longs;o&longs;celes mirabilem hanc proprietatem, vt tres anguli, cuiu&longs;uis trian­guli &longs;int æquales duobus rectis angulis. 2213 2214 Quam demon&longs;trationem primi om­nium Pythagorici perfecerunt, vt refert Proclus ad 32. primi Elem. Eucli­des deinde ibidem aliter, quam Pythagorici idem demon&longs;trauit. 2215 2216 Quod &longs;i quis huius rei experientiam aliquam velit; etiam&longs;i non exactam (cum æqua­litas mathematica non cadat &longs;ub &longs;en&longs;um, &longs;ed &longs;ola intelligentia percipiatur, quippe quæ in materia intelligibili, non autem &longs;en&longs;ibili ver&longs;atur, & cuius æqualitas nullum di&longs;crimen, quantumuis minimum admittat, quod &longs;en&longs;ui vitare ob &longs;ui imperfectionem non licet: vnde inter eæ, quæ mathematicè &longs;unt æqualia, nullus intellectus aliquam valeat reperire differentiam) &longs;umat inquam triangulum quodpiam materiale, vt ex charta, quantum fieri po­ce&longs;t perfectum, deinde ducat lineam vnam perpendicularem &longs;uper aliam, quæ &longs;cilicet faciat, cum illa duos angulos rectos. 2217 2218 po&longs;tea ab&longs;cindat tres an­gulos trianguli materialis, eosque; ita &longs;imul componat, vt mucrones illorum &longs;int vniti, & contigui ad punctum lineæ perpendicularis cum altera, vti e&longs;t in &longs;uperiori figura punctnm E; & illicò apparebit tres illos angulos mate­riales obtegere adæquatè totum illud &longs;patium duorum rectorum, quos per­pendicularis con&longs;tituit. 2219 2220 Hoc autem experiri poteris in diuer&longs;is admodum triangulis Scalenis, Rectangulis, I&longs;o&longs;celibus, Aequilateris, &c. 2221 2222 non &longs;ine de­lectatione, atque hic e&longs;t &longs;en&longs;us illorum verborum, omnis triangulus habet tres &ecedil;quales duobus rectis. 2223 2224 Ab&longs;tineo à demon&longs;trationibus geometricis, quo­niam ij, qui Mathematicis &longs;unt imbuti, no&longs;tra hac opera parum indigent. 2225 2226 &longs;i quis tamen volet, con&longs;ulat 32. primi Elem. 2227 2228 Ex hac igitur declaratione licet cogno&longs;cere nonnullos ageometretos locum hunc, & &longs;imiles &longs;ub&longs;equen­tes non &longs;atis intelligere, dicentes, nihil aliud verba illa Ari&longs;t. 2229 2230 velle &longs;ignifi­care, quàm omnem triangulum habere tres angulos, quod inquiunt, noti&longs;­&longs;imum e&longs;t. 2231 2232 Sed &longs;i incidant in &longs;equentia; æquales duobus rectis, tunc, cum hæc non intelligant, ab&longs;tinent etiam à priorum declaratione, quibus præ­mi&longs;&longs;is facile e&longs;t Ari&longs;t. 2233 2234 textum percipere. 2235 2236 &longs;it A, duo recti, ide&longs;t, duo anguli recti &longs;int pa&longs;&longs;io demon&longs;tranda, in quo B, triangulus, in quo C, æquicrus. 2237 2238 ip&longs;i itaque C, ide&longs;t triangulo æquicru&longs;i, ine&longs;t A, &longs;cilicet duo recti, hoc e&longs;t, ine&longs;t æquicru&longs;i hæc, pa&longs;&longs;io habere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis per B, ide&longs;t per triangulum vniuer&longs;ale, quia hæc proprietas e&longs;t trianguli propria, & compe­tit æquicru&longs;i, non vt æquicrus e&longs;t, &longs;ed, vt triangulum e&longs;t; quare B, non crit medium ip&longs;ius A, quia prædicta pa&longs;&longs;io. 2239 2240 A, non competit triangulo B, per aliud, &longs;ed per &longs;e, de eo enim primo, & per &longs;e demon&longs;tratur in 32. primi Elem. optimè Aegydius, & Niphus in hunc locum.

2241 2242

2243 2244 11

2245 2246 Ex eodem cap. (Non oportet autem exi&longs;timare penes id, quod exponimus, ali­quid accidere ab&longs;urdum, nihil enim vtimur eo, quod e&longs;t hoc aliquid e&longs;&longs;e. 2247 2248 &longs;ed &longs;icut Geometra pedalem, & rectam hanc, & &longs;ine latitudine dicit, quæ non &longs;unt. 2249 2250 verum non &longs;ic vtitur, tanquam ex his ratiocinans) Quoniam Ari&longs;t. 2251 2252 in exemplis affert pro rebus characteres, A, B, C, po&longs;&longs;et qui&longs;piam &longs;u&longs;picari aliquod propterea ab&longs;urdum accidere: cui &longs;u&longs;picioni Ari&longs;t. 2253 2254 re&longs;pondet, dicens, nihil inde ab&longs;ur­di accidere po&longs;&longs;e, quoniam ip&longs;e vtitur hi&longs;ce literis, non quatenus literæ &longs;unt, &longs;ed quatenus rerum vicem, pro quibus exponuntur, gerunt: quemadmodum etiam Geometræ faciunt, qui lineam, quæ pedalis non e&longs;t, pedalem, & quæ non e&longs;t recta, rectam; & quæ lata e&longs;t, non latam, &longs;upponunt, & tamen nihil inde ab&longs;urdi contingit. 2255 2256 Ex quibus intelligimus per lineas illas &longs;en&longs;ibiles, & phy&longs;icas, quas Geometræ in &longs;uis figuris ducunt, intelligendas e&longs;&longs;e lineas ve­rè Mathematicas omni latitudine carentes; vtitur enim inquit Ari&longs;t. Geo­metra lineis phy&longs;icis, non tanquam phy&longs;icis, nec de eis tanquam de phy&longs;icis lineis ratiocinatur, &longs;ed ijs vtitur tanquam verè mathematicis. 2257 2258 2259 2260 idem dicen­dum e&longs;t de &longs;uperficiebus, necnon de corporibus, quæ ijdem Goometræ de­&longs;cribunt, vt per ea, de verè mathematicis di&longs;currant.

2261

2262 Ex Libro &longs;ecundo Priorum.

2263 2264

2265 2266 12

2267 2268 Ex cap. 2269 2270 21. (Quod faciunt, qui coalternas putant &longs;cribere, latent enim ip&longs;i&longs;e ip&longs;os talia accip entes, quæ non est po&longs;&longs;ibile monstrare uon exi&longs;tentibus coalternis) Vult Ari&longs;t. 2271 2272 exemplo mathematico explicare, quid &longs;it pe­titio principij. 2273 2274 vbi per coalternas intelligit parallelas lineas, vox enim græca parallhlos, idem &longs;ignificat, ac mutuus, & coalternus. 2275 2276 quoad exempli explicationem vtor figura textibus apponi &longs;olita, quæ e&longs;t præ&longs;ens.

probat Euclides in 28. primi Elem. 2277 2278 quod &longs;i linea recta quædam, vti E F, cadens &longs;uper duas rectas, vti &longs;unt A B, C D, fe cerit angu­los alternos &ecedil;quales, angulos nimirum A G H, G H D, ij enim dicuntur alterni; &longs;iue alios dnos, nimirum B G H, G H C, hi enim &longs;unt quoque alterni; probat inquam has duas li­neas A B, C D, e&longs;&longs;e inuicem parallelas. 2279 2280 Iam &longs;i quis vellet probare, &longs;e duas parallelas duxi&longs;&longs;e, hac ratione, quia &longs;cilicet fa ciunt prædictos angulos al­ternos æquales; & probaret facere angulos alternos æquales, quia &longs;unt pa­rallelæ, hic peteret principium, ide&longs;t, illud, quod principio probandum erat, afferret pro ratione, & cau&longs;a, quod dicitur peti principium, quia tunc pe­timus, vt concedatur nobis, id, quod principio, & primo omnium demon­&longs;trare propo&longs;ueramus. 2281 2282 aduerte, quod characteres, qui &longs;unt in &longs;equentibus verbis huius loci, non appellant characteres figuræ appo&longs;itæ; in quo quidam decepti, nullo pacto poterant locum hunc intelligere.

2283 2284

2285 2286 13

2287 2288 Ex cap. 2289 2290 22. lib. 2291 2292 2. Priorum (Vt &longs;i volens mon&longs;trare, quod diameter e&longs;t incom­men&longs;. argueret Zenonis rationem, quod non e&longs;t moueri) &longs;uperius &longs;ecto 3. lib. 2293 2294 1. fusè explicauimus hanc a&longs;ymmetriam, quam &longs;i quis vellet demon&longs;trare ea­dem illa ratione, qua Zeno motum impugnabat, quia &longs;cilicet men&longs;ura com­munis, quæ debet vtramq, quantitatem men&longs;urare, debet in men&longs;urando infinitas partes pertran&longs;ire, uimirum medietates medietatum in in&longs;initum, e&longs;t autem impo&longs;&longs;ibile pertran&longs;ire infinitas huiu&longs;modi partes, & propterea non poterit metiri, neque vnam, neque alteram ex quantitatibus, quæ putaban­tur commen&longs;urabiles, afferret hic, inquit Ari&longs;t. 2295 2296 non cau&longs;am pro cau&longs;a.

2297 2298

2299 2300 14

2301 2302 Ex eodem cap. (Quoniam idem vtique fal&longs;um per plures petitiones accidere nihil forta&longs;&longs;e inconueniens, veluti coalternas coincidere; & &longs;i maior e&longs;t extrin&longs;ecus angulus intrin&longs;eco; & &longs;i triangulus habet plures rectos duobus) per plures po&longs;i­tiones &longs;ubaudi fal&longs;as. 2303 2304 per coalternas intellige lineas æquidi&longs;tantes, &longs;eu pa­rallelas, vt in &longs;uperiori cap. 2305 2306 monuimus. 2307 2308 Cæterum Euclides propo&longs;. 2309 2310 28. pri­mi Elem. 2311 2312 o&longs;tendit, quod &longs;i fuerint duæ parallelæ veluti in præcedenti figura, A B, C D, &longs;uper quas alia recta E F, incidat, nece&longs;&longs;ario faciet angulum ex­trin&longs;ecum E G B, v. g. æqualem interno, & oppo&longs;ito, & ad ea&longs;dem partes, angulo videlicet G H D. &longs;i ergo inquit Ari&longs;t &longs;upponamus i&longs;tud fal&longs;um, an­gulum &longs;cilicet E G B, externum e&longs;&longs;e maiorem angulo interno G H D, &longs;equi­tur etiam fal&longs;um, videlicet lineas æquidi&longs;tantes A B, C D, concurrere. 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 & pro­batur con&longs;equentia hoc modo, quia &longs;i angulus E G B, maior e&longs;t angulo G H D, appo&longs;ito vtique communi angulo B G H, erant primum, duo anguli E G B, B G H, maiores, quam &longs;int duo B G H, G H D, quia &longs;i inæqualibus æqualia addantur, tota erunt inæqualia, vt prius per 4, axioma: hoc loco communis angulus additur &longs;emel maiori angulo, & &longs;emel minori; & ideo totum illud, in quo e&longs;t maior angulus, adhuc maius e&longs;t altero toto, in quo minor angulus continetur. 2319 2320 at illi duo E G B, B G H, per 13. primi, &longs;unt æquales duobus rectis angulis, ergo duo quoque recti erunt maiores duobus internis B G H, D H G, &longs;iue hi duo interni erunt minores duobus rectis. 2321 2322 At quando hi duo interni &longs;unt minores duobus rectis, tunc lineæ A B, C D, &longs;unt concurrentes, &longs;i protrahantur ad partes prædictorum angulorum. 2323 2324 quod P. Clauius luculenti, & hactenus de&longs;iderata demon&longs;tratione ad 28. primi demon&longs;trauit. 2325 2326 2327 2328 Atque hoc pacto ex prima fal&longs;a &longs;uppo&longs;itione, nimirum angu­lum illum externum e&longs;&longs;e maiorem interno, & oppo&longs;ito; &longs;equitur fal&longs;um, ni­mirum lineas parallelas concurrere.

2329 2330 Præterea &longs;i &longs;upponamus aliam fal&longs;itatem, &longs;cilicet triangulum habere tres angulos maiores duobus rectis, &longs;equetur eadem iterum fal&longs;itas, &longs;cilicet pa­

rallelas coincidere, & probatur &longs;ic; &longs;int enim trianguli A B C, tres anguli maiores, quam duo recti anguli, & per punctum C, ducta &longs;it recta C D, parallela lateri B A. quia ergo angulus A, æqualis e&longs;t angulo &longs;ibi alterno A C D, per 29. primi, & quia totalis angulus B C D, æqua­lis e&longs;t duobus angulis B C A, A C D, quos tanquam &longs;uas partes adæquatas continet, quorum alter, &longs;cilicet A C D, e&longs;t æqualis angulo A. erit idem to­talis angulus B C D, æqualis duobus angulis A, & A C B, trianguli propo&longs;i­ti. 2331 2332 ergo totus i&longs;te angulus B C D, &longs;imul cum reliquo trianguli angulo B. con­flabit compo&longs;itionem ex tribus angulis trianguli dati: & con&longs;equenter ta­lis compo&longs;itio trium angulorum erit maior, quam &longs;int duo anguli recti. 2333 2334 ex quo &longs;equitur duas rectas B A, C D, &longs;uper quas cadit linea B C, faciens duos angulos internos, & ad ea&longs;dem partes, &longs;cilicet A B D, maiores duobus re­ctis non e&longs;&longs;e parallelas, &longs;ed concurrentes (vt patet ex nuper citata demon­&longs;tratione P. Clauij) quod fal&longs;um e&longs;t. 2335 2336 & &longs;equitur ex &longs;ecunda fal&longs;a &longs;uppo&longs;itio­ne. 2337 2338 ex quibus textus Ari&longs;t. 2339 2340 videtur &longs;atis clarus.

2341 2342

2343 2344 15

2345 2346 Ex cap. 2347 2348 26. (Vt &longs;i A, duo recti, in quo autem P., triangulus, in quo vero C, &longs;en&longs;ibuis triangulus, &longs;u&longs;picari namque po&longs;&longs;et aliquis non e&longs;&longs;e C, &longs;ciens, quod omnis triangulus habet duos rectos: quare &longs;imul no&longs;cet, & ignorabit idem. 2349 2350 no&longs;ce enim omnem triangulum, quod duobus rectis, non &longs;implex e&longs;t: &longs;ed hoc quidem eo, quod vniuer&longs;alem habet &longs;cientiam: illud autem eo, quod &longs;ingularem. 2351 2352 &longs;ic igitur, vt vni­uer&longs;ale nouit C, quod duo recti; vt autem &longs;ingulare non nouit, quare non habebit contrarias) vide, quæ diximus lib. 2353 2354 1. &longs;ecto 3. cap. 2355 2356 1. ex quibus quidquid Ma­thematicum e&longs;t hic, clarum redditur. 2357 2358 reliqua verò, quæ ad Logicum &longs;pe­ctant, huius loci commentatores pro&longs;equuntur.

2359 2360 In cap. 2361 2362 31. de Abductione.

2363 2364

2365 2366 16

2367 2368 Notandum hic cum eruditi&longs;&longs;imo Burana, Abductionem hanc, de qua in hoc cap. 2369 2370 agitur e&longs;&longs;e vocem mathematicam, camque; Ari&longs;t. 2371 2372 quemadmodum multa alia à Mathematicis mutuatum ad omnes alias &longs;cientias tran&longs;tuli&longs;&longs;e. 2373 2374 e&longs;&longs;e autem terminum mathematicum colligitur manife&longs;tè ex Proelo, qui lib. 2375 2376 3. in comm. Elem. 2377 2378 Euclidis ad primam propo&longs;itionem primi Elementi, pag. 2379 2380 2381 2382 121. &longs;ic ait, Abductio verò e&longs;t tran&longs;itus à propo&longs;ito problemate, vel theo­remate ad aliud, quo cognito, aut comparato Propo&longs;itum quoque per&longs;pi­cuum e&longs;t. 2383 2384 Exempli cau&longs;a, cum cubi duplicatio propo&longs;ita e&longs;&longs;et ad inue&longs;ti­gandam quæ&longs;tionem in aliud tran&longs;tulere, quod illud propo&longs;itum con&longs;equi­tur, ad duarum nempe mediarum linearum inuentionem tran&longs;lata e&longs;t quæ­&longs;tio, & &longs;ic quærebant deinceps, quonam modo datis duabus rectis lineis, duæ mediæ proportionales reperirentur. 2385 2386 Primum autem dicunt Hippocra­tem Chium pr&ecedil;dictorum titulorum, Abductionem feci&longs;&longs;e, qui & lunulæ qua­dratum fecit æquale, & alia multa in Geometria inuenit. 2387 2388 hæc Proclus. 2389 2390 vbi non di&longs;&longs;imulandum nos re&longs;titui&longs;&longs;e verbum, Abductionem, cuius loco inter­pres Procli vtitur inductionis voce, &longs;equuti & rationem, & græcum textum, qui no&longs;tram hanc expo&longs;itionem euidenter po&longs;tulat, apagwgh\ enim valet & inductionem, & abductionem, &longs;ed abductio omnino rei propo&longs;itæ quadrat.

2391 2392 Notandum præterea Hippoetatem Chium fui&longs;&longs;e auctorem huius Abdu­ctionis, eumque; feci&longs;&longs;e Abductionem à propo&longs;ito Problemate quadrandi cir­culi, vnde manife&longs;tè apparet, Ari&longs;totelem ex Mathematicis hunc terminum mutuò accepi&longs;&longs;e, quandoquidem ex ij&longs;dem accepit etiam exemplum Abdu­ctionis Mathematicæ, imò etiam exemplum ip&longs;ius authoris AbductionisMathematicæ. 2393 2394 &longs;yllogi&longs;mus autem Hippocratis, quo o&longs;tendebat circuli qua­draturam reducebatur ad has propo&longs;itiones, omnis rectilinea figura qua­dratur, &longs;ed circulus reducitur ad figuram rectilineam, ergo circulus qua­dratur. 2395 2396 in probatione minoris facta e&longs;t Abductio, cum enim ip&longs;e vellet re­ctificare circumferentiam circuli per lunulas, nec valeret, alij per lineam, quandam quadratricem, vt e&longs;t apud Pappum Alexandrinum, & apud P. Cla­uium in fine &longs;exti Elem. 2397 2398 & alij aliter fru&longs;tra conarentur, facta e&longs;t Abductio circa probationem minoris, in qua adhuc Mathematici verfantur; quæ pro­batio, &longs;i tandem inueniri po&longs;&longs;et, mox &longs;equeretur principale propo&longs;itum pro­blema, nimirum circulus quadraretur; vide quæ &longs;crip&longs;imus in cap. 2399 2400 3. Præ­dicam. de hac re, quia plurimum hunc conferunt. 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 &longs;ed iam ad textus expli­cationem veniamus.

2407 2408

2409 2410 17

2411 2412 Ex eodem cap. (Veluti &longs;i K, e&longs;&longs;et quadrari, in quo autem E, rectilineum, in quo verò F, circulus, &longs;i ip&longs;ius E F, vnum &longs;olum e&longs;&longs;et medium, hoc, quod e&longs;t, cum lunulis æqualem fieri circulum rectilineo, e&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;et propè ip&longs;um cogno&longs;cere, cum vero B C, neque credibilius &longs;it, quam A C, neque pauca media, non dico Abductio­nem: neque quando B C, &longs;it immediatum, tale enim &longs;cientia est) Aduerte figuram vulgatæ editionis e&longs;&longs;e mendo&longs;am, & propterea re&longs;tituendam e&longs;&longs;e, qualis pri­ma &longs;equens ex Simplicio ad tex. 11. primi Phy&longs;ic. hoc modo Hippocrates Chius conabatur circulum ad quadrum redigere; fit circulus A B G C, qua­drandus; con&longs;tituatur itaque &longs;uper diametro cius B C, quadratum B C D F, cuius diameter B D, &longs;ecatur bifariam in G, à circumferentia circuli dati, quod patet ducta &longs;emidiametro H G, perpendiculari ex B C, quæ &longs;uo extre­mo puncto G, &longs;ecat bifariam, & diametrum B D, & circumferentiam B G C. facto ergo centro G, de&longs;cribatur alter circulus per puncta B C D F, conne­ctaturque; recta G C. in triangulo orthogonio B C D, latus B D, &longs;ubtenditur

angulo recto C, ergo quadratum eius ex eorol­lario 47. primi, duplum erit quadrati B C, quare etiam circulus B C D F, duplus erit circuli A B­G C, per 2. duodecimi, & &longs;emicirculus B C D, duplus erit &longs;emicirculi B A C: & quadrans B E­C G, æqualis erit &longs;emicirculo B A C: ablato igi­tur communi &longs;egmento B E C H, remanet lunu­la B A C E, æqualis triangulo B C G, quod trian­gulum &longs;i per vltimam &longs;ecundi quadretur, erit lu­nula B A C, con&longs;equenter quadrata. 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 hucu&longs;que be­nè procedit Hippocrates. 2419 2420 &longs;ed vt reliquum circu­li quadret, &longs;ic pergit, ponatur recta L M, dupla ip&longs;ius B C, &longs;upra quam &longs;emicirculus de&longs;cribatur
L O M, cui in&longs;cribatur hexagoni æquilateri dimidium L Q S M, & &longs;u­per tribus hexagoni lateribus, &longs;int tres &longs;emicirculi, vt in figura. 2421 2422 & quo­niam diameter L M, dupla e&longs;t vniu&longs;­cuiu&longs;que diametrorum B C, L Q, Q S, S M, erit &longs;emicirculus L O M, &ecedil;qua­lis quatuor &longs;emicirculis prædictis per 2. duodecimi, & per 4. &longs;ecundi ablatis igitur tribus &longs;egmentis com­munibus L N Q, Q O S, S P M, relinquetur trapezium L Q S M, æquale &longs;e­micirculo B A C, & tribus lunulis L H Q N, Q R S O, S X M P, ab&longs;cindan­tur itaque detrapezio tria triangula æqualia tribus lunulis, eo modo, quo &longs;u­pra in prima figura factum e&longs;t, & quod relinquetur æquale erit &longs;emicirculo B A C. quod deinde quadretur per vlt. 2423 2424 &longs;ecundi, &longs;ed aduerte, quod quando ait, ab&longs;cindantur de trapezio tria triangula æqualia lunulis, eo modo, quo &longs;upra, committit deceptionem, quia eodem modo, quo &longs;upra minimè id fa­cere po&longs;&longs;umus, quia in &longs;uperiori figura triangula erant con&longs;tituta &longs;uper la­tus B C, quadrati B C D F, intra circulum de&longs;cripti, qui circulus facit cum B C, maius &longs;egmentum, quam faciat &longs;emicirculus L O M, cum lateribus L Q, Q S, S M. & propterea &longs;emicirculus i&longs;te non habet eandem proportionem ad vnamquamque lunularum &longs;uarum, quam habet &longs;emicirculus &longs;uperior B C D, ad lunulam B A C E. atque hæc e&longs;t fallacia, quam authorem &longs;uum mi­nimè latui&longs;&longs;e putandum, cuius Ari&longs;t. &longs;æpius mentionem in &longs;equentibus fa­ciet : quì enim fieri pote&longs;t, vt tam acutus inuentor, adeo manife&longs;tum erro­rem non vidi&longs;&longs;et, verum propter adinuenti excellentiam, authori &longs;uo pla­cuit paralogy&longs;mus. 2425 2426 mirabilis tamen &longs;emper habita e&longs;t illa &longs;uperior lunulæ quadratio. 2427 2428 Ex quibus &longs;atis clara e&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;unt ea, quæ ad Mathematicum per­tinent, ad locum hunc de Abductione declarandum. 2429 2430 facta e&longs;t igitur abdu­ctio ab Hippocrate in quadratione trium po&longs;teriorum lunularum, in qua­rum quadratione diu immoratus, nunquam ni&longs;i cum paralogy&longs;mo quadra­re valuit. 2431 2432 Hæc pluribus, vt &longs;equentibus etiam textibus, in quibus huius te­tragoni&longs;mi fit mentio &longs;atisfacere po&longs;&longs;imus. 2433 2434 Hippocrates i&longs;te Chius e&longs;t alter ab illo Hippocrate Coo medicorum Magi&longs;tro, vt colligitur ex Alexandre Aphrod. in Primum Meteororum de Cometis. 2435 2436

2437 2438 Ex Primo Posteriorum re&longs;olutoriorum.

2439 2440

2441 2442 18

2443 2444 Textu primo (Omnis doctrina, & omnis di&longs;ciplina di&longs;cur&longs;iua ex præexi­&longs;tenti fit cognitione. 2445 2446 manife&longs;tum autem hoc &longs;peculantibus in omnibus, Mathematicæ namque &longs;cientiarum per hunc modum accedunt) quo mo­do Mathematicæ fiant ex præcedenti cognitione, &longs;cilicet Princi­piorum per&longs;picuè quilibet videbit, qui &longs;altem primum Elementorum Eucli­dis, vel è ianuis in&longs;pexerit; pr&ecedil;cedunt enim primo principiorum tria gene­ra, quorum primum continet definitiones &longs;ubiecti Geometriæ, vt definitio­nes lineæ, &longs;uperficiei, trianguli, &c: Secundum continet Po&longs;tulata. 2447 2448 Tertium Axiomata, &longs;eu communes omnium conceptiones, & &longs;ententias, ex quibus tanquam ex vberrimis, & chri&longs;taltinis fontibus Demon&longs;trationes Geome­tricæ deriuantur. 2449 2450 Idem vìdere licet in operibus aliorum Geometrarum, Archimedis, Apollonij, Pappi, & cæterorum. 2451 2452 Aliæ &longs;iniliter mathematicæ, vt Arithmetica, Per&longs;pectiua, Mu&longs;ica, Mechanica, A&longs;tronomia, non ni&longs;t ex præmi&longs;&longs;is, ac manife&longs;ti&longs;simis principijs &longs;uas demon&longs;trationes deducunt. 2453 2454 Nulla porrò alia &longs;cientia tam di&longs;tinctè &longs;ua præmittit principia, tamque; per­&longs;picua, &longs;icuti Mathematicæ, vt non immeritò Philo&longs;ophus eas, tamquam veræ &longs;cientiæ typum, eumque; omnibus numeris ab&longs;olutum &longs;ibi ob oculos pro­po&longs;uerit, ex quo veræ &longs;cientiæ de&longs;criptionem hi&longs;ce libris complecteretur.

2455 2456

2457 2458 19

2459 2460 Tex. 2. (Quod enim omne triangulum habet duobus rectis æquales, præ&longs;ciuit: quod autem hoc, quod e&longs;t in &longs;emicirculo triangulum e&longs;t, &longs;imul inducens cognouit)vide primo, quæ &longs;upra libro 1. Prior. &longs;ecto 3. cap. 2461 2462 1. explicaui de angulis trianguli. 2463 2464 2465 2466 deinde &longs;cias, quod quando Ari&longs;t. 2467 2468 ait, hoc, quod e&longs;t in &longs;emicir cu­lo triangulum, &c. 2469 2470 alludit ad demon&longs;trationem quandam, quam ip&longs;e infe­rius in exemplum adducet, & quæ e&longs;t in 3. Elem. 2471 2472 Euclidis 31. in qua talis fi­gura proponitur qualis e&longs;t præ&longs;ens, in qua vides triangulum A B C. in &longs;e­

micirculo. 2473 2474 tunc autem dicitur triangulum in &longs;emicirculo, quando ba&longs;is ip&longs;ius e&longs;t diameter &longs;emicirculi, & reliqua duo latera ita concur­runt &longs;imul in angulum B, vt ip&longs;um paricer in circumferentia con&longs;tituant, quibus pr&ecedil;mi&longs;sis &longs;ic textum explicaueris: quod enim omne triangulum habet tres angulos æquales duo­bus rectis angulis præ&longs;ciuit vniuer&longs;aliter per 32. primi; quod autem hoc particulare triangulum A B C, quod e&longs;t in &longs;e­micirculo habeat eandem proprietatem, &longs;imul, ac qui&longs;piam animaduertit illud e&longs;&longs;e triangulum cogno&longs;cit, ab&longs;que vlla demon&longs;tratione, &longs;ed &longs;olum virtu­te illius maioris propo&longs;itionis; omne triangulum habet tres, &c.

2475 2476

2477 2478 20

2479 2480 Tex. 5. (Vera quidem igitur oporter e&longs;&longs;e, quoniam non e&longs;t non ens &longs;cire, vt quod diameter &longs;it commen&longs;urabi is) con&longs;ule ea, quæ &longs;crip&longs;imus ad cap. 2481 2482 23. primi Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. &longs;ine quibus locus hic &longs;atis intelligi nequit; ijs autem per­ceptis &longs;ic locum hunc explicare po&longs;&longs;umus, cum diameter quadrati &longs;it incom­men&longs;urabilis lateri &longs;ui quadrati, fal&longs;um erit dicere diametrum e&longs;&longs;e com­men&longs;urabilem prædicto lateri, quod autem fal&longs;um e&longs;t, illud non e&longs;t; igitur impo&longs;sibile e&longs;t &longs;cire diametrum e&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;urabile.

2483 2484

2485 2486 21

2487 2488 Hoc eodem cap. 2489 2490 plura dicuntur de Principijs Demon&longs;trationis, &longs;iue &longs;cien­tiæ, vt &longs;unt Dignitates, Po&longs;itiones, Definitiones, & &longs;imilia, quæ quo modo &longs;e habeant, & quo modo illis Demon&longs;trationes innitantur, optimè ex con­templatione primi libri Elem. 2491 2492 Euclidis percipi pote&longs;t. 2493 2494 vt propterea benè ij &longs;entiant, inter quos præcipui &longs;unt Toletus, & Zabarella, qui a&longs;&longs;erunt, Ari&longs;t. Mathematicas &longs;cientias tamquam typum perfecti&longs;simarum &longs;cientiarum &longs;ibi ob oculos propo&longs;ui&longs;&longs;e; ex quo typo veræ &longs;cientiæ de&longs;criptionem his li­bris complectaretur.

2495 2496

2497 2498 22

2499 2500 Eodem tex. 5. (Ponit enim Arithmeticus vnitatem indiui&longs;ibilem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;ecun­dum quantum) hoc quamquam non ponatur ab Arithmeticis expre&longs;sè, præ­&longs;upponitur tamen ab eis: nu&longs;quam enim Euclides in totis tribus Arithme­ticis libris, infra vnitatem de&longs;cendit, vt propterea appareat, ip&longs;am in quan­titate di&longs;creta e&longs;&longs;e minimum, & indiui&longs;ibile. 2501 2502 2503 2504 Verum dubitabit forrè qui&longs;­piam hoc modo, &longs;i vnitas minimum, atque indiui&longs;ibile e&longs;t in quanto di&longs;creto, qua igitur ratione Arithmetici practici eam diuidunt in dimidium, in trien­tem, in quadrantem, & alijs &longs;imiliter modis, vnde numeri illi, qui fractio­nes appellantur, exurgunt? 2505 2506 Re&longs;pondemus, quotie&longs;eunque vnitas diuiditur ab Arithmeticis, tunc ip&longs;i eam accipiunt tanquam totum quoddam continuum in plures partes diui&longs;ibile: &longs;iue tanquam aggregatum quoddam vnitatum, quæ vnitates &longs;unt partes illius, vt quando dicunt, vnum horæ quadrantem, vel duos horæ quadrantes, vel tres horæ quadrantes, accipiunt horam tan­quam aggregatum quatuor quadrantum, & propterea numeri illi 1/4. 2/4. 3/4. & &longs;imiles fractiones, nihil aliud &longs;unt, quam numeri partium vnius horæ: ex quo patet huiu&longs;modi fractiones omnes reduci ad numeros integros, qui enim dicit tres quadrantes 3/4. dicit tres partes alicuius totius, quod intel­ligitur diui&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e in 4. æquales partes, ex quibus illæ tres tantummodo numerat.

2507 2508

2509 2510 23

2511 2512 Tex. 9. (Per &longs;e autem, quæcunque & in&longs;unt in eo, quod quid e&longs;t, vt triangulo li­nea, & lineæ punctum; &longs;ub&longs;tantia namque ip&longs;orum ex his e&longs;t, & in oratione dicen­te, quid e&longs;t, in&longs;unt) aggreditur explicare quænam &longs;int ea, quæ per &longs;e dicun­tur: quotque; modis dicatur aliquid per &longs;e. 2513 2514 quorum primus e&longs;t, ea &longs;cilicet, per &longs;e de aliquo &longs;ubiecto dici, quæcunque in definitione illius ponuntur, cu­iu&longs;modi &longs;unt linea, & punctum, quæ per &longs;e prædicantur, illa de triangulo, i&longs;tud de linea; in de&longs;initione enim trianguli ponitur linea recta, quia linea recta dum terminat illam &longs;uperficiem, quæ dicitur triangulus illi trianguli naturam impertitur, & ideo triangulus definitur &longs;ic, triangulus e&longs;t figura tribus lineis rectis terminata. 2515 2516 &longs;imiliter in definitione lineæ, non in&longs;initæ, &longs;ed finitæ, & terminatæ ponitur punctum, quia duo puncta, quæ &longs;unt extre­ma illius, faciunt, vt ea &longs;it line a finita, & definitur &longs;ic, linea finita e&longs;t lon­gitudo, caius extrema &longs;unt puncta. 2517 2518 quamuis autem hæc definitio apud Eu­clidem expre&longs;&longs;a non habeatur, tamen ex definitionibus ip&longs;ius præ&longs;ertim &longs;e­cunda, tertia, & quarta elici pote&longs;t.

2519 2520

2521 2522 24

2523 2524 Eodem tex. 9. (Et quibu&longs;cunque iuexi&longs;tentium ip&longs;is, ip&longs;æ &longs;unt in oratione, quidest declarante, quemadmodum rectum ine&longs;t lineæ, & circulare: & impar, & parnumero, & primum, & compo&longs;itum, & æquilaterum, & altera parte longius. 2525 2526 2527 2528 & oimbus bis in&longs;unt in oratione, quid e&longs;t declarante, ibi quidem linea, hic vero numerus)quia locus hic benè exponitur à Toleto, & melius etiam à Conymbr. 2529 2530 addam tantummodo quædam, quæ ad perfectam eius intelligentiam de&longs;iderantur. 2531 2532 Sciendum igitur primò, nu&longs;quam ab Euclide definiri rectum, circulare, impar, par, primum, compo&longs;itum, æquilaterum, nec altera parte longius: verum ab ip&longs;o in definitionibus primi definiri lineam rectam, non tamen cir­cularem expre&longs;sè. 2533 2534 in definitionibus deinde &longs;eptimi definiri numerum parem, & imparem, item numerum primum, & compofitum, & æquilaterum, & al­tera parte longiorem. 2535 2536 ex quibus definitionibus po&longs;&longs;unt erui definitiones re­cti, circularis, imparis, & cæterorum, quorum hic Ari&longs;toteles meminit. 2537 2538 Cæterum Euclides definitione 11. &longs;eptimi, &longs;ic definit numerum primum: primus numerus e&longs;t, quem vnitas &longs;ola metitur. 2539 2540 numerus autem, vel vnitas metiri dicitur alium numerum, quando &longs;æpius repetita ip&longs;um omnino ad­æquat, vt ternarius metitur nouenarium, quia ter repetitus ip&longs;um ad vn­guem explet. 2541 2542 illi igitur numeri dicuntur ab Arithmeticis primi, qui à nullo alio, præterquam ab vnitate men&longs;urantur, quales &longs;unt, 2. 3. 5. 7. &c. 2543 2544 Defi­nitione verò 13. definit numerum compo&longs;itum &longs;ic; compo&longs;itus numerus e&longs;t, quem numerus qui&longs;piam metitur, vt &longs;enarius erit compo&longs;itus, quia ip&longs;um binarius metitur, nam ter repetitus, ip&longs;i perfectè adæquatur.

2545 2546 Per æquilaterum, intelligit quadratum, quadratus autem numerus defi­nitione 18. &longs;eptimi &longs;ic explicatur: Quadratus numerus e&longs;t, qui &longs;ub duobus æqualibus numeris continetur, ide&longs;t, qui fit ex ductu vnius numeri in &longs;e ip­

&longs;um, vt &longs;i ducantur 3. in 3. fient 9. qui continetur &longs;ub duobus ternarijs; omnes autem ternarij &longs;unt æquales. 2547 2548 is autem nu­merus dicetur quadratus, quia, vt apparet in figura, nouem ip&longs;ius vnitates po&longs;&longs;unt in plano ita ad inuicem collocari, vt referant quadratum; & &longs;icuti quadratum geometricum ha­bet latera æqualia, ita etiam quadratum arithmeticum: &longs;i­ue numerus quadratus, habet &longs;ua latera æqualia, quot enim vnitates &longs;unt in vno, tot etiam &longs;unt in reliquis, vt in præ&longs;enti &longs;unt tres vnitates in &longs;ingulis lateribus. 2549 2550 pr&ecedil;terea quemadmodum quadratum geometricum re&longs;olni pote&longs;t in plura quadrata, ita etiam arithmeticum, vt præ&longs;ens, qui re&longs;oluitur in quatuor quadrata arithmetica. 2551 2552 Neque enim pote&longs;t quilibet numerus, vt opi­nantur ageometreti, in hunc modum di&longs;poni, &longs;ed &longs;olum ij, qui producuntur ex multiplicatione numeri alicuius in &longs;e ip&longs;um.

2553 2554 Per altera parte longius, intelligit numerum, qui producitur à duobus

numeris inæqualibus inuicem multiplicatis, qualis e&longs;t duodenarius, qui ex ductu trium in quatuor produci­tur, & refert figuram altera parte longiorem, &longs;iue, vt ait Boetius longilateram, cuius vnum latus e&longs;t maius altero, vt in appo&longs;ita figura videre licet. 2555 2556 atque hæc &longs;unt, quæ ex Mathematicis petenda erant, ad huius loci intelligentiam.

2557 2558

2559 2560 25

2561 2562 Tex. 11. (Per &longs;e autem, & &longs;ecundum quod ip&longs;um, idem, vt per &longs;e lineæ inestpunctum, & rectum; etenim &longs;ecundum quod linea, & triangulo, &longs;ecundum quod triangulum duo recti: etenim per &longs;e triangulum duobus rectis æquale. 2563 2564 Vniuer&longs;ale autem e&longs;t tunc, quando in quolibet, & primo mon&longs;tratur, vt duos rectos habere, neque figuræ e&longs;t vniuer&longs;ale, quamuis e&longs;t mon&longs;irare de figura, quod duos rectos habet, &longs;ed non de qualibet figura, neque vtitur qualibet figura monstrans, quadrangulum enim figura a quidem est, non habet autem duobus rectis æquales. 2565 2566 Aequicrus verò babet quidem quodcunque duobus rectis æquales, &longs;ed non primò, &longs;ed triangulum prius. 2567 2568 quod igitur quoduis primum mon&longs;tratur duos rectos habens, aut quodcunque aliud, huic primo ine&longs;t vniuer&longs;ale, & demonstratio de hoc vniuer&longs;aliter e&longs;t, de alijs verò quodammodo, non per &longs;e, neque de æquicrure e&longs;t vniuer&longs;aliter, &longs;ed in plus) pro quorum intelligentia nece&longs;&longs;aria &longs;unt ea, quæ primo Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 2569 2570 1. &longs;crip&longs;imus. 2571 2572 deinde memineris figuram vniuer&longs;aliorem e&longs;&longs;e triangulo, & tri­angulum vniuer&longs;alius æquicrure. 2573 2574 quando ait (vt duos rectos habere) vult dicere, habere duos angulos rectos non actu, &longs;ed potentia; quæ affectio e&longs;t trianguli, quia, vt &longs;uperius diximus, habet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis: quæ proprietas vniuer&longs;aliter, & primò competit triangulo. 2575 2576 non autem figuræ, quia figura e&longs;t vniuer&longs;alior. 2577 2578 neque i&longs;o&longs;celi, quia i&longs;o&longs;celes e&longs;t re&longs;trictius triangulo. 2579 2580 omittimus reliqua &longs;ingillatim exponere, tum quia &longs;a­tis clara &longs;unt, tum quia ab interpretibus benè explicantur.

2581 2582

2583 2584 26

2585 2586 Tex. 13. (Si quis igitur mon&longs;trauerit, quod rectæ non coincidunt, videbitur vtique buius e&longs;&longs;e demonstratio, eo quod in omnibus e&longs;t rectis; non e&longs;t autem: &longs;i quidem non quoniam &longs;ic æquales, fit hoc, &longs;ed &longs;ecundum quod quomodocunque æquales) pro­ponit tres errores, qui circa demon&longs;trationem de vniuer&longs;ali contingunt, quos omnes Geometricis exemplis illu&longs;trat; affert autem primo pro tertio errore duo exempla, quorum primum in præmi&longs;&longs;is verbis continetur, atque ex 28. primi Elem. 2587 2588 de&longs;umitur, quam propterea primo loco exponendam

cen&longs;ui. 2589 2590 Quando igitur duæ rectæ con&longs;titu­tæ fuerint, vt A B, C D, in quas alia recta, vt G F, incidens, faciat duos angulos in­ternos, re&longs;pectu rectarum A B, C D, & ad ea&longs;dem partes rectæ E F, vt &longs;unt ex parte &longs;ini&longs;tra anguli A G H, C H G; exparte ve­rò dextra B G H, D H G; &longs;i inquam linea E F, fecerit duos illos angulos ex parte &longs;ini&longs;tra &longs;imul &longs;umptos, æquales duobus rectis angulis, vel duos ex parte dextra pariter æquales duobus rectis, pro­bat Euclides rectas A B, C D, non concurrere, &longs;iue parallelas e&longs;&longs;e. 2591 2592 Verum, quia linea E F, pote&longs;t facere aliquando prædictos angulos non tantum æqua­les duobus rectis, verum etiam rectos, quo etiam modo probarentur cædem lineæ e&longs;&longs;e parallelæ, vt in &longs;equenti figura, cum &longs;int anguli A G I, C I G, re­
cti, probabitur de rectis A B, C D, æquidi&longs;tan­tia. 2593 2594 Ex his facile textum in hunc modum expo­nemus; &longs;i quis igitur mon&longs;trauerit, quod rectæ A B, C D, nunquam coincidunt, etiam&longs;i in in&longs;i­nitum producantur, &longs;eu quod &longs;unt æquidi&longs;tantes, quando anguli prædicti interni &longs;unt duo recti, videbitur vtique huius e&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;tratio de vniuer&longs;ali per &longs;e, & de primo &longs;u­biecto, vel &longs;ecundum quod ip&longs;um, eò quod probatur vniuer&longs;aliter de lineis omnibus habentibus prædictos angulos rectos. 2595 2596 non autem de omni, &longs;ecun­dum quod ip&longs;um, &longs;i quidem non competit affectio hæc, e&longs;&longs;e parallelas, li­neis habentibus illos angulos rectos actu; &longs;ed primò, & vniuer&longs;aliter, & &longs;e­cundum quod ip&longs;um competit lineis habentibus illos angulos æquales duo­bus rectis, quomodocunque æquales &longs;int duobus rectis, &longs;iue ambo &longs;int recti, &longs;iue vnus acutus, alter obtu&longs;us, &longs;ed tamen ambo &longs;imul æquentur duobus re­ctis, quales &longs;unt lineæ primæ figuræ. 2597 2598 In tertio igitur errore, vniuer&longs;ale exi­&longs;tit quidem, & habet nomen, &longs;ed tamen prætermittetur, &longs;eu &longs;trictius &longs;ume­tur, quam oportet. 2599 2600 alij latini, quos quidem viderim, præter Zabarellana perperam omnino ob mathematicarum ignorantiam, exemplum i&longs;tud in­terpretantur.

2601 2602

2603 2604 27

2605 2606 Ibidem (Et &longs;i triangulum non e&longs;&longs;et aliud, quam I&longs;o&longs;celes, &longs;ecundum quod I&longs;o­&longs;celes videretur vtique ine&longs;&longs;e) i&longs;tud e&longs;t &longs;ecundum exemplum tertij erroris. 2607 2608 Por­rò cum tres &longs;int &longs;pecies triangulorum, æquilaterum, I&longs;o&longs;celes, Scalenum, &longs;i accideret, vt ex illis tribus vna tantum &longs;pecies, v. g. I&longs;o&longs;celes in mundo re­periretur; tuncque; qui&longs;piam de I&longs;o&longs;cele o&longs;tenderet affectionem quampiam, putans &longs;e o&longs;tendi&longs;&longs;e pa&longs;&longs;ionem de proprio &longs;ubiecto, & primo, falleretur, quia aifectio illa competeret I&longs;o&longs;celi, non vt huic &longs;peciei I&longs;o&longs;celis, &longs;ed quatenus e&longs;t triangulum, cui primo, & per &longs;e, & &longs;ecundum quod ip&longs;um conuenit. 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 hoc loco di&longs;ce&longs;&longs;imus à Zabarella, qui putat i&longs;tud e&longs;&longs;e exemplum primi erroris, cum verba textus adeo clara &longs;int, vt expo&longs;itionem illius nullo modo admit­tant. 2615 2616 &longs;unt autem hæc textus verba (Et &longs;i triangulum non e&longs;&longs;et aliud, quam I&longs;o­&longs;celes, &longs;ecundum quod I&longs;o&longs;celes videretur vtique ine&longs;&longs;e) quibus verbis manife&longs;tè apparet Ari&longs;t. 2617 2618 accipere pro &longs;ubiecto vniuer&longs;ali non indiuiduum vnum, vt in primo errore contingit, &longs;ed &longs;peciem loco generis, &longs;cilicet I&longs;o&longs;celes, quod e&longs;t &longs;pecies trianguli pro genere ip&longs;o, nimirum pro Triangulo. 2619 2620 ait enim, &longs;i non e&longs;&longs;et aliud, quam I&longs;o&longs;celes, &longs;ecundum quod I&longs;o&longs;celes: quibus verbis cla­rè &longs;peciem, non indiuiduum, &longs;igni&longs;icat, ex his duobus exemplis manife&longs;tus e&longs;t tertius error, qui erat, quando erat (vt in parte totum) quodque; illis verbis expo&longs;uerat (vei contingit etiam, vt in parte totum, in quo mon&longs;tratur: ijs emm, quæ &longs;unt in parte inerit quidem demon&longs;tratio, & erit de omni, &longs;ed tamen non erit buius primi vniuer&longs;aliter demon&longs;tratio. 2621 2622 dico auttm huius primi, &longs;ecundum quod buius demonstrationem, quando &longs;it primi vniuer&longs;aliter) ide&longs;t, quando vniuer&longs;ale &longs;ubiectum exi&longs;tit quidem, &longs;ed tamen non de ip&longs;o &longs;it demon&longs;tratio, &longs;ed de ali­qua parte ip&longs;ius, v. g. de &longs;pecie aliqua demon&longs;tratur aliquid, quod deberet o&longs;tendi primò de ip&longs;o vniuer&longs;ali, cum illi primò competat. 2623 2624 2625 2626

2627 2628

2629 2630 28

2631 2632 Ibidem (Et proportionale, quod alternatim, &longs;ecundum quod numeri, & &longs;ecun­dum quod lineæ, & &longs;ecundum quod &longs;olida, & &longs;ecundum quod tempora: quemad­modum & mon&longs;trabatur aliquando &longs;eor&longs;um, contingens vtique de omnibus vnica demon&longs;tratione mon&longs;irari; &longs;ed quia non &longs;unt nominatum quidam omnia hæc vnum, numeri, longitudines, tempora &longs;olida, & &longs;pecie differunt à &longs;einuicem &longs;cor&longs;um ac­cipiebantur. 2633 2634 nunc autem vniuer &longs;aliter mon&longs;tratur, neque enim &longs;ecundum quod lineæ, aut &longs;ecundum quod numeri, inerat; &longs;ed &longs;ecundum quod boc, quod vniuer &longs;ale &longs;up­ponunt e&longs;&longs;e) affert exemplum &longs;ecundi erroris, quiaccidit, quando vniuer&longs;a­le exi&longs;tit quidem, &longs;ed tamen e&longs;t innominatum, pro cuius explicatione &longs;cien­dum quid &longs;it alterna proportio. 2635 2636 Alternam igitur proportionem definit Eu­clides definitione 12. quinti, &longs;ic, e&longs;t &longs;umptio antecedentis ad antecedentem,

& con&longs;equentis ad con&longs;equentem. 2637 2638 Explico, exponantur qua­tuor quantitates proportionales, v.g. vt 6. ad 3. ita &longs;int 4. ad 2. &longs;i igitur argumentemur &longs;ic, vt 6. ad 3. ita 4. ad 2. ergo al­ternatim erit, vt 6. ad 4. ita 3. ad 2. &longs;iue dixerimus, vt pri­mum ad &longs;ecundum, ita tertium ad quartum, igitur alterna­tim erit, vt primum ad tertium, ita &longs;ecundum ad quartum: valebit con&longs;e­quentia; quæ quidem probatur deinde propo&longs;itione 16. quinti de magnitu­dinibus, hoc e&longs;t in vniuer&longs;um de lineis, &longs;uperficiebus, & &longs;olidis. 2639 2640 2641 2642 quando igi­tur Ari&longs;t. 2643 2644 ait, mon&longs;tramus proportionale, ide&longs;t, qua&longs;uis quatuor quantita­tes proportionales, habere hanc proprietatem, vt &longs;int etiam alternatim proportionales, & non mon&longs;tramus vnica demon&longs;tratione de omni quouis proportionali, &longs;ed &longs;eparatim de magnitudinibus in 16. quinti, de numeris in 13. &longs;eptimi, & &longs;eor&longs;um de temporibus in a&longs;tronomia, vel phy&longs;ica; hoc modo non o&longs;tendimus vniuer&longs;aliter de primo &longs;ubiecto, quia talis affectio conuenit &longs;ingulis, non vt numeri, aut ma gnitudines, aut tempora &longs;unt, &longs;ed &longs;ecundum quandam naturam illis omnibus communem, cui primò illa pa&longs;­&longs;io debetur; quæ quidem natura communis nomine caret, & propterea e&longs;t cau&longs;a erroris.

2645 2646

2647 2648 29

2649 2650 Nunc autem vniuer&longs;aliter demon&longs;tratur) nu&longs;quam apud Mathematicos in­uenio hanc demon&longs;trationem vniuer&longs;alem de illo communi omnibus præ­dictis, quare dicendum cum Zabarella, illud, nunc, e&longs;&longs;e intelligendum &longs;ic, nunc autem, ide&longs;t, in præ&longs;entia autem deberet vniuer&longs;aliter demon&longs;trari, quod tamen cum non &longs;iat, contingit nos decipi putantes vniuer&longs;aliter de­mon&longs;tra&longs;&longs;e. 2651 2652 vel dicendum i&longs;tud verificari tantum de lineis, &longs;uperficiebus, & &longs;olidis, de quibus &longs;imul in vnica natura communi, quæ e&longs;t magnitudo, de­mon&longs;tratur in 16. quinti vniuer&longs;aliter. 2653 2654 atque hoc modo explicatum e&longs;t exem­plum &longs;ecundi erroris, qui verbis illis (Vel &longs;it quidem, &longs;ed innominatum &longs;it in rebus &longs;pecie differentibus) continebatur.

2655 2656

2657 2658 30

2659 2660 Ibidem (Propter hoc &longs;i quis mon&longs;trauerit &longs;ingulum triangulum. 2661 2662 demon&longs;tratio­ne aut vna, aut altera, quod duos rectos habet vnumquodque, æquilateium &longs;eor&longs;um, & &longs;calenum, & æquicrus: nondum nouit triangulum, quod duobus rectis, ni&longs;i &longs;o­phi&longs;tico modo, neque vniuer&longs; aliter triangulum, neque &longs;i vllum e&longs;t præter prædicta triangulum alterum. 2663 2664 non enim &longs;ecundum quod triangulum, neque omnetriangulum, ni&longs;i &longs;ecundum numerum, &longs;ecundum &longs;peciem autem non omne; & &longs;i nullum e&longs;t, quod non nouit) vltimo loco ponit exemplum primi erroris, quem &longs;upra verbis il­lis (Quando vel nibil &longs;it accipere &longs;uperius, præter &longs;ingulare) expre&longs;&longs;erat, quod, vt benè intelligamus, opus e&longs;t ea, legere, quæ libro primo Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 2665 2666 1. &longs;crip&longs;imus de proprietate illa trianguli, quod &longs;cilicet habet tres an­gulos æquales duobus rectis angulis, quibus præmi&longs;&longs;is, &longs;ic deinde locum hunc interpretaberis; Propter hoc, quod præcedenti textu dictum e&longs;t; no­tandum in primo errore vniuer&longs;ale, tanquam &longs;i non e&longs;&longs;et vniuer&longs;ale o&longs;ten­ditur de &longs;ingulari, &longs;i quis igitur mon&longs;trauerit &longs;ingillatim de vnoquoque trian­gulo in &longs;ingulari, &longs;cilicet de vno æquilatero, tantum, & de vno Scaleno, & de vno I&longs;o&longs;cele, &longs;eparatim, vtens auteadem demon&longs;trationc dum de vnoque; &longs;epatatim o&longs;tendit, aut vtens diuerfis demon&longs;trationibus, vna pro æquila­tero, altera pro I&longs;o&longs;cele, tertia pro Scaleno, o&longs;tendens, quod vnumquodque illorum habet tres angules æquales duobus rectis angulis; i&longs;te nondum no­uit triangulum omne habere talem affectionem, ni&longs;i modo &longs;ophi&longs;tico, quia non cogno&longs;cit hanc affectionem illis competere propter naturam illam com­munem trianguli, cui primo, & per &longs;e competit; & neque vniuer&longs;aliter co­gno&longs;cit triangulum omne e&longs;&longs;e tale, etiam &longs;i nullum aliud reperiatur trian­gulum, præter illud æquilaterum, vel illud I&longs;o&longs;celes, vel illud Scalenum, de quibus &longs;eparatim demon&longs;trauit, & &longs;ecundum numernm, ide&longs;t de vnoquoque, quatenus e&longs;t vnum numero. 2667 2668 non nouit autem &longs;ecundum &longs;peciem, ideft fecun­dum naturam, & formam communem illis tribus indiuiduis, quæ e&longs;t natu­ra trianguli. 2669 2670 hoc autem e&longs;&longs;e exemplum primi erroris manife&longs;tè conuincitnr, tum ex verbis illis, quando nihil &longs;it &longs;uperius, præter &longs;ingulare, tum ex hu­ius textus verbis illis (Singulum triangulum) & ex illis (Ni&longs;i &longs;ecundum nume­rum) ide&longs;t, ni&longs;i de vno, quod &longs;it vnum numero. 2671 2672 propterea nos de &longs;in gulari triangulo omi&longs;&longs;a Zabarellæ &longs;ententia explicauimus tandem in confirma­tionem no&longs;træ expo&longs;itionis in hæc tria errata illud non omittendum, &longs;atiuse&longs;&longs;e dicere, Ari&longs;t. 2673 2674 attuli&longs;&longs;e pro tribus erratis tria exempla ordine retrogra­do, quàm, quod facit Zabarella, primum e&longs;&longs;e pro tertio, &longs;ecundum pro pri­mo, tertium verò pro &longs;ecundo; eo enim modo, Ari&longs;t. 2675 2676 confu&longs;ionem nulla ra­tione, imò contra omnem rationem imponimus.

2677 2678

2679 2680 31

2681 2682 Textu 14. continet quidem quædam mathematica, &longs;ed ferè eadem cum &longs;uperioribus, quæ quia tum ex prædictis facile intelligi po&longs;&longs;unt, tum quia benè ab expo&longs;itoribus explicantur, ne actum agamus, prætermittimus.

2683 2684

2685 2686 32

2687 2688 Tex. 20. (Ni&longs;i magnitudines numeri &longs;int) hoc e&longs;t, ni&longs;i magnitudines &longs;int di­fcretæ, ita vt cadant &longs;ub numernm, vt &longs;i linea quæpiam diuidatur in partes decem, vel duodecim, tunc euadit quantitas di&longs;creta, &longs;iue numerus. 2689 2690 & tunc linca numerus e&longs;t. 2691 2692 idem de &longs;uperficie, ac &longs;olido intelligendum.

2693 2694

2695 2696 33

2697 2698 Ibidem (Propter hoc Geometriæ non licet mon&longs;trare, quod contrariorum vna e&longs;e &longs;cientia, &longs;ed neque quod duo cubi cubus) quo ad verba illa, duo cubi cubus, quæ ad nos pertinent, vult Ari&longs;t. 2699 2700 docere, quod non debet Geometra o&longs;ten­dere numerorum affectiones (per enbos enim intelligit numeros quo&longs;dam &longs;ic dictos, vt paulo po&longs;t o&longs;tendam) vt &longs;i quis vellet geometricè o&longs;tendere id, quod o&longs;tenditur in 4. noni Elem. 2701 2702 &longs;cilicet, &longs;i cubus numerus cubum numerum multiplicauerit, productus numerus erit pariter cubus. 2703 2704 nonnulli latinorum perperam textum hunc expo&longs;uerunt putantes reperiri &longs;olummodo cubos geometricos, at Euclides definit. 2705 2706 19. &longs;eptimi, &longs;ic arithmeticum cubum de­finit, cubus numerus e&longs;t, qui &longs;ub tribus numeris æqualibus continetur, qua­lis e&longs;t. 2707 2708 8. qui e&longs;t ad in&longs;tar cubi geometrici, & continetur&longs;ub tribus binarijs multiplicatis inuicem, quæ multiplicatio &longs;ic in&longs;tituitur, exponuntur tres bi­

narij, 2, 2, 2, primus ducitur in &longs;ecundum, & producitur. 2709 2710 4. qui e&longs;t numerus quadratus huius figuræ,
, deinde tertius binarius ducitur in prædictum quadratum 4. & pro­ducitur 8. qui dicitur cubus, quia &longs;i intelligantur duo qua­ternarij, vnus &longs;upra alterum, vt in præ&longs;enti figura refe­runt cubicam figuram, cuius tam longitudo, quam latitudo, & altitudo, e&longs;t 2. Similiter cubus numerus e&longs;t 27. quia &longs;it ex tribus terna­rijs inuicem modo prædicto multiplicatis, 3. 3. 3. nam 3. in 3. ductis &longs;it 9.
qui e&longs;t quadratus. 2711 2712 quo deinde ducto in tertium ter­narium, producitur 27. qui e&longs;t cubus, & refert &longs;igu­ram cubicam hanc. 2713 2714 Iam verò &longs;i cubus 8. multipli­cet cubum 27. procreabitur 216. qui pariter cubus e&longs;t. 2715 2716 atque hoc &longs;ibi volunt verba illa, &longs;i duo cubi cubus, ide&longs;t, &longs;i duo numeri cubi multiplicentur mutuò, cu­bus alter producetur; ex quibus videas, quam in­eptè illi interpretentur hunc locum, qui dicunt, Ari­&longs;totilem velle dicere non pertinere ad Geometram probare duos cubos geometricos &longs;ibi additos face­re alium cubum, quod erat problema Delphicum de duplatione cubi, nondum inuentum; bis enim i&longs;ti peccant, primo in Logi­cam, quia &longs;ic non tran&longs;iret Geometra de genere in genus, ip&longs;ius enim e&longs;t agere de duplatione cubi; &longs;ecundò in Mathematicas, cum nondum noue­rint arithmeticos cubos; & præterca ignorent duos cubos &longs;ibi additos, non facere alium cubum. 2717 2718 Quod præterea hoc loco intelligendi &longs;int cubi arith­metici certò certius con&longs;tat, ex &longs;equenti 24. textu, vbi &longs;ic dicitur (Veluti Arithmetica quidem, quid impar, aut par, aut quadrangulum, aut cubus.)

2719 2720

2721 2722 34

2723 2724 Ibidem (Neque alij &longs;cientiæ quod alterius, ni&longs;i quæcunque ita &longs;e habent inter &longs;e, vt &longs;it alterum &longs;ub altero, vt per&longs;pectiua ad Geometriam, & harmonica ad Arith­meticam) excipit ab illa regula (qua prohibetur, quamuis &longs;cientiam in alie­nam falcem immittere) &longs;cientias &longs;ubalternatas, quæ propriè in Mathemati­cis reperiuntur, Per&longs;pectiua enim propriè &longs;ubalternatur Geometriæ, quia vtitur Demon&longs;trationibus linearibus, quas applicat lineis vi&longs;ualibus, & Mu­&longs;ica &longs;ubalternatur Arithmeticæ, quia ab ip&longs;a mutuatur demon&longs;trationes nu­merorum, quas applicat numeris &longs;onoris. 2725 2726 v.g. Per&longs;pectiua dicit, ea, quæ vi­dentur eminus videri minora, quam quæ videntur cominus, quia illa viden­tur &longs;ub angulo minori, hæc verò &longs;ub angulo maiori, quod verò remotiora videantur &longs;ub angulo minori, quam propinquiora cæteris paribus probat

per 21. primi Elem. 2727 2728 &longs;it enim ma­gnitudo vi&longs;a A B, remotior ab o­culo in C, po&longs;ito, & vi&longs;a propin­quior ab oculo in D. ductis lineis vi&longs;ualibus C A, C B: D A, D B; ab oculis C, & D, ad extremitates &longs;pectatæ magnitudinis, erit remo­tioris vi&longs;ionis angulus C, minor angulo D, propinquioris, vt ex præallegata Demon&longs;tratione pater. 2729 2730 2731 2732 Hine per&longs;picuè vides, qua ratione Per&longs;pectiua Geometriæ &longs;ubalternetur, &longs;iue quid &longs;it ip&longs;a &longs;ubalternatio, vbi medium e&longs;t Geometricum, conclu&longs;io autem optica. 2733 2734 Exemplum &longs;ubalternationis Muficæ &longs;it, con&longs;onantia Diapa&longs;on, quam vulgò octauam appellant in data chorda collocare, hoc e&longs;t, vocem grauio­rem facere duplam vocis acutioris &longs;umatur chorda A B, & diuidatur bifa­riam, &longs;ine in æqualia in C; tota igitur chorda A B, ad dimidium A C, haber
proportionem, quam 2. ad 1. &longs;iue duplam, ergo etiam &longs;o­nus totius chordæ A B, ad &longs;o­num chordæ dimidiæ A C, ha­bebit eandem rationem, nimirum quam 2. ad 1. &longs;iue duplam. 2735 2736 &longs;ed &longs;onus chor­dæ A B, ad &longs;onum chordæ A C, con&longs;onat diapa&longs;on, &longs;eu octauam, ergo in data chorda collocata e&longs;t con&longs;onantia diapa&longs;on, quod oportebat. 2737 2738 vides me­dium e&longs;&longs;e arithmeticam, conclu&longs;ionem verò harmonicam. 2739 2740 Aliud exemplum Tonus, quod e&longs;t interuallum primæ vocis, Vt, ad &longs;ecundam, Rè, in duo æqua­lia &longs;emitonia diuidi nequit, ratio e&longs;t Arithmetica, quia proportio &longs;uper­particularis in duo æqualia arithmeticè &longs;ecari nequit; at Tonus con&longs;i&longs;tit in ratione &longs;uperparticulari, nempè in &longs;e&longs;quioctaua, ergo Tonus bifariam diui­di nequit. 2741 2742 de&longs;umptum e&longs;t ex Boetio.

2743 2744

2745 2746 35

2747 2748 Tex. 23. (Est autem &longs;ic mon&longs;trare, quemadmodum Bry&longs;o quadraturam, &longs;ecun­dum enim commune mon&longs;trant tales rationes) cum velit e&longs;tendere veram de­mon&longs;trationem con&longs;tare debere ex proprijs, non autem ex communibus; primum affert exemplum demon&longs;trationis cuiu&longs;dam Bry&longs;onis, quæ ex com­munibus procedat, vt autem benè intelligamus, quale&longs;nam &longs;int huin&longs;modi demon&longs;trationes, quæ per communia o&longs;tendunt, legenda prius ea &longs;unt, quæ &longs;crip&longs;imus de quadratura circuli in pr&ecedil;dicamento relationis. 2749 2750 Bry&longs;o itaque, vt tradit Alexander, in hunc modum conabatur quadrare circulum. 2751 2752 &longs;it qua­drandus circulus A B C D, cui circum&longs;eribatur quadratum E F G H. per 7 quarti, & alterum quadratum I L M N, eidem in&longs;cribatur per 6. quarti, quid autem &longs;it circum&longs;cribere, & in&longs;cribere figuram circulo, ex definitione

3. & 4. eiu&longs;dem libri petatur, quamuis ex in&longs;pectione figuræ pr&ecedil;sentis &longs;atis per­cipi po&longs;&longs;it; deinde aliud quadratum me­dium inter prædicta duo con&longs;tituatur, &longs;itque; O P Q R. 2753 2754 Iam &longs;ic o&longs;tendebat i&longs;tud medium quadratum e&longs;&longs;e æquale circu­lo propo&longs;ito. 2755 2756 Quæcunque &longs;unt, &longs;imul ma­iora eodem, & minora eodem, &longs;unt in­uicem æqualia, &longs;ed circulus, & quadra­tum medium, &longs;unt ambo maiora qua­drato in&longs;cripto, & ambo minora qua­drato circum&longs;cripto, ergo circulus, & quadratum medium, &longs;unt æqualia. 2757 2758 vte­batur, inquit Ari&longs;t pr&ecedil;dicto principio, etiam numeris, lineis, temporibus, & qualitatibus communi, neque deducto ex natura circuli, aut quadrati, de qui­bus erat demon&longs;tratio. 2759 2760 præterea aduertendum e&longs;t, illud e&longs;&longs;e fal&longs;um, nam &longs;ex, & quinque, ambo &longs;unt maiores, quam quatuor, & minores, quam &longs;eptem, & tamen non &longs;unt æquales.

2761 2762

2763 2764 36

2765 2766 In codem textu (Vnumquodque autem &longs;cimus, non &longs;ecundum accidens, quando &longs;ecundum illud cogno&longs;camus, &longs;ecundum quod ine&longs;t ex principijs illius, &longs;ecundam quod illud; vt duobus rectis æquales, habere, cui ine&longs;t per &longs;e, quod dictum e&longs;t exprincipijs huius) affert nunc exemplum alterius demon&longs;trationis, quæ non ex communibus, vt præcedens Bry&longs;onis, &longs;ed ex proprijs principijs o&longs;tendit affectionem de &longs;ubiecto proprio. 2767 2768 E&longs;t autem illud exemplum toties decan­tatum de triangulo habente tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis; id­circo operæpretium e&longs;&longs;e puto explicare demon&longs;trationem, 32. primi Eucli­dis, quæ i&longs;tud ex proprijs principijs demon&longs;trat, & quam hoc loco Ari&longs;to­teles innuit, hoc enim modo ip&longs;ius Ari&longs;t. 2769 2770 mentem probè penetrare poteri­

mus. 2771 2772 &longs;it ergo triangulum A B C. 2773 2774 Dico ag­gregatum trium ip&longs;ius angulorum A, B, C, e&longs;&longs;e æquale aggregato ex duobus angu­lis rectis (vt autem melius intelligas, quæ &longs;equuntur, lege prius ea, quæ dicta &longs;unt in lib. 2775 2776 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 2777 2778 1.) produ­catur latus B C, v&longs;que in D, vt fiat angulus externus A C D; Iam &longs;ic, quoniam pro­batum e&longs;t in 13. primi, duos angulos, quos facit linea A C, cum linea B D, &longs;cilicet angulos A C B, A C D, e&longs;&longs;e pares duobus rectis: & quia pariter in prima parte huins propo&longs;. 2779 2780 32. probatum e&longs;t ab Euclide duos angulos A B, e&longs;&longs;e æquales externo angulo A C D: &longs;i ter­tius angulus reliquus A C B, &longs;umatur bis, &longs;emel cum duobus angulis A, B, & &longs;emel cum externo A C D, addentur æqualia æqualibus, & propterea tres anguli A, B, A C B, &longs;imul &longs;umpti, erunt æquales duobus A C D, A C B, &longs;imul &longs;umptis; &longs;ed his duobus &longs;unt æquales duo recti, ergo cum quæ &longs;unt æqualia vni tertio, &longs;int etiam æqualia inuicem, erit aggregatum trium angulorum A, B, A C B, æquale aggregato duorum rectorum; quod erat demon&longs;tran­dum. 2781 2782 Medium itaque huius demon&longs;trationis, &longs;i res ad trutinam Logicam ex­pendatur, e&longs;t, quod partes aggregati trium angulorum A, B, A C B, &longs;unt æqua­les partibus aggregati duorum, & ideo aggregatum, aggrega to æqua­le e&longs;t. 2783 2784 quod medium e&longs;t in genere cau&longs;æ materialis. 2785 2786 quod verò partes illius &longs;int æquales partibus huius, probatur, per dignitatem illam, quæ &longs;unt æqualia vni tertio, &longs;unt etiam inter &longs;e. 2787 2788 partes porrò aggregati trium angulorum erant hæ, anguli A, B, vna; altera verò angulus A C B; partes verò aggre­gati duorum rectorum erant A C B, A C D, quibus partibus, illæ &longs;unt æqua­les, & ideo totum toti æquale. 2789 2790 quod medium e&longs;t omnino intrin&longs;ecum, & ex proprijs ip&longs;ius trianguli, &longs;iue ex proprijs angulorum ip&longs;ius, cum &longs;int ip&longs;ius partes. 2791 2792 quod pariter medium ex parte pa&longs;&longs;ionis, quæ demon&longs;tratur, e&longs;t ex proprijs, cum &longs;int partes illius materiales. 2793 2794 per materiam autem oportet hoc loco intelligere materiam intelligibilem, ide&longs;t quantitatem à qualita­tibas ab&longs;tractam, & terminatam, de qua pluribus agemus infra in tractatu de natura mathematicarum. 2795 2796 Hinc videas eos magnopere decipi, qui pu­tant, hanc demon&longs;trationem e&longs;&longs;e per extrin&longs;eca, eò quod ad demon&longs;tran­dum producatur linea B C, in D, putantes lineam illam productam C D, e&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trationis medium; lineæ namque huiu&longs;modi, quæ in demon&longs;tra­tionibus geometricis con&longs;truuntur, nunquam &longs;unt media propria demon­&longs;trationum, &longs;ed tantummodo a&longs;&longs;umuntur ad probandum medium iam ex­cogitatum e&longs;&longs;e veram cau&longs;am conclu&longs;ionis. 2797 2798 Hinc etiam manife&longs;tè colligas Mathematicas facultates habere demon&longs;trationes perfecti&longs;&longs;imas, quod ageometreti negare &longs;olent, &longs;ed audacter aiunt exempla Ari&longs;t. 2799 2800 non e&longs;&longs;e vera: neque requiri veritatem exemplorum; in quorum vtroque peccant, nam dictum illud v&longs;urpari &longs;olet, & debet de exemplis moralibus. 2801 2802 at vero requiri confor­mitatem exemplorum cum regulis traditis, nemo &longs;anæ mentis dubitabit. 2803 2804 Vernm i&longs;ti confundunt conformitatem cum veritate. 2805 2806 Veritas exemplo tunc ine&longs;t, quando illud, quod in exemplo narratur, verè extitit, vt &longs;i quis in exemplum pudicitiæ afferret hi&longs;toriam Io&longs;ephi, verum i&longs;tuà e&longs;&longs;et exemplum. 2807 2808 quæ veritas in exemplis moralibus non &longs;emper e&longs;t nece&longs;&longs;aria, talia exempla &longs;unt &longs;æpè parabolæ, & fabulæ, quæ nunquam extiterunt, v. g. narratur ab Ari&longs;t. 2809 2810 de quodam filio, qui patrem crudeliter traxerat, qui po&longs;tea grandior factus, cum filium procrea&longs;&longs;et, ab eodem pariter raptatus e&longs;t ip&longs;e, v&longs;que ad eundem locum, quo ip&longs;e patrem &longs;uum impiè raptauerat. 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 non e&longs;t nece&longs;&longs;e, ta­lem extiti&longs;&longs;e filium, neque patrem. 2817 2818 Verumtamen &longs;emper conformitas exem­pli cum regulis, & præceptis, quæ traduntur nece&longs;&longs;aria e&longs;t, alioquin exem­pla de&longs;truerent id, quod præceptio con&longs;truit, illique contraria e&longs;&longs;et, quod om­nino ab&longs;urdum foret. 2819 2820 non &longs;ecus, ac &longs;i quis vellet alium docere characteres latinos, illique; barbaros, quos Gothicos vocant in exemplum proponeret. 2821 2822 re­quiritur igitur &longs;emper in omni exemplo conformitas cum eo, quod doce­tur; in moralibus tamen non &longs;emper requiritur veritas, vti diximus; Alij verò dicunt non requiri in exemplis determinatam veritatem, &longs;ed &longs;atis e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;i exemplum verum &longs;it &longs;ecundum opinionem aliquorum: quorum &longs;ententiam non improbamus. 2823 2824 Exempla igitur ab Ari&longs;t. 2825 2826 pa&longs;&longs;im ex mathem aticis allata, congrua, conformiaque; omninò &longs;unt ip&longs;ius doctrinæ, aliter ip&longs;um perpetuò mentientem facimus. 2827 2828 Po&longs;tremò illud etiam e&longs;t aduertendum, fortè Ari&longs;t. 2829 2830 in præ&longs;enti textu &longs;pecta&longs;&longs;e non ad hanc Euclidianam demon&longs;trationem, &longs;ed po­tius ad Pithagoricam. 2831 2832 Pithagorei enim eam aliter, quamuis per idem me­dium, &longs;cilicet à cau&longs;a materiali, demon&longs;trabant; con&longs;truebant enim aliter, neque vlla vtebantur diui&longs;ione. 2833 2834 quod dictum velim propter nonnullos, qui ab huiu&longs;modi diui&longs;ionibus abhorrent, timentque; ne demon&longs;trationis perfectio­ni per eas plurimum derogetur. 2835 2836 Pithagoreorum demon&longs;trationem vide apud Clauium in &longs;cholio 32. primi Euclidis, quam ex Eudemo etiam Pro­clus in comm. eiu&longs;dem recitat. 2837 2838

2839 2840

2841 2842 37

2843 2844 Ibidem (Sed quemadmodŭ harmonica per Arithmeticam) vide &longs;upra tex. 20. 2845 2846

2847 2848

2849 2850 38

2851 2852 Ibidem (Demon&longs;tratio autem non computatur in aliud genus; m&longs;i, vt dictum e&longs;t geometricæ demon&longs;trationes in Per&longs;pectiuas, aut Mcchamcas, & arithmeticæ in harmonicas) exempla &longs;ubalternationis Per&longs;pectiuæ, & Mu&longs;icæ in tex. 20. at­tulimus; nunc Mechanicæ &longs;ubalternationis, quam hic Ari&longs;t. 2853 2854 in&longs;inuat, exem­plum &longs;it illud, quod Archimedes prop. 2855 2856 14. primi Aequep. demon&longs;trat, ni­mirum centrum grauitatis omnis trianguli e&longs;&longs;e punctum illud, in quo rectæ lineæ ab angulis trianguli ad dimidia latera oppo&longs;ita ductæ concurrunt. 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 &longs;it triangulum A B C, à cuius angulis A, & B, ducantur duæ rectæ A D, B E, ita vt bifariam &longs;ecent latera A C, B C, in punctis D, & E, & concurrant in F. 2863 2864 Dico F, e&longs;&longs;e centrum grauitatis propo&longs;iti trianguli. 2865 2866 Quoniam enim in 13. Aequep. probauit centrum grauitatis e&longs;&longs;e in ea linea, quæ ducta ab angulo quouis &longs;ecat oppo&longs;itum latus bifariam, crit in linea A D, centrum grauitatis.

&longs;ed eadem ratione erit etiam in linea B E, er­go non ni&longs;i in puncto F, quod &longs;olum e&longs;t in vtra­que, quod erat demon&longs;trandum. 2867 2868 2869 2870 ex quibus ap­paret, qua ratione mechanica conclu&longs;io Geo­metriæ &longs;ubiaceat, dum lineari di&longs;cur&longs;u ip&longs;a demon&longs;tratio perficitur. 2871 2872 Scias præterea cen­trum grauitatis e&longs;&longs;e tale punctum, ex quo &longs;i &longs;u­&longs;pendatur corpus triangulare vniformis cra&longs;­&longs;itici, manet &longs;emper horizonti parallelum, &longs;i tamen antequam &longs;u&longs;penderetur, iacebat plano horizontis, æquidi&longs;tans; neque &longs;i &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;um feratur huc illud nutat, &longs;ed &longs;emper in codem &longs;itu per&longs;euerat.

2873 2874

2875 2876 39

2877 2878 Tex. 24. (Veluti Arithmetica quidem quid impar, aut par; aut quadrangu­lum, aut cubus) cogno&longs;cas hinc certò certius quadrangulum, & cubum e&longs;&longs;e &longs;pecies numerorum, &longs;icuti &longs;upra tex. 9. & 20. explicauimus, quò nunc te vi­ci&longs;&longs;im, vt præ&longs;entem locum intelligas, remittimus. 2879 2880

2881 2882

2883 2884 40

2885 2886 Ibidem (Geometrica verò quid irrationale, aut refrangi, aut concurrere) per verbum, irrationale, non videtur Ari&longs;t. 2887 2888 intellexi&longs;&longs;e proprietatem illam duo­rum linearum incommen&longs;urabilium longitudine, & potentia, quia v&longs;us fui&longs;­&longs;et verbo, a/rrpton. quod apud Geometras v&longs;urpari &longs;olet in illa &longs;ignificatio­ne, &longs;ed v&longs;us e&longs;t verbo, a\logon, quod latinè redditur improportionale.

2889 2890

2891 2892 41

2893 2894 Per verbum (Refrangi) &longs;eu frangi, intelligit lineam aliquam rectam, non in directum rendere, &longs;ed in aliquo puncto frangi, &longs;eu declinari à rectitudine, ita vt con&longs;tituat angulum.

2895 2896 Per verbum (Concurrere) intelligit, non e&longs;&longs;e parallelas, &longs;ed ad idem ali­quod punctum coire, &longs;i protrahantur.

2897 2898

2899 2900 42

2901 2902 Ibidem (Et Astrologia &longs;imiliter) per A&longs;trologiam intelligit Ari&longs;t. 2903 2904 non iu­diciariam, quamuis à recentioribus hoc nomine vocetur, &longs;ed quam hodie dicunt A&longs;tronomiam, aitque; ip&longs;am con&longs;iderare quantitatem, figuram, mo­tum, & locum totius Mundi, ac partium ip&longs;ius integrantium, vt &longs;unt Cœli, & Elementa.

2905 2906

2907 2908 43

2909 2910 Tex. 25. (Neque Geometra fal&longs;a &longs;upponit, quemadmodum quidam a&longs;&longs;eruere di­centes, quod non oportet fal&longs;o vti: Geometram verò mentiri dicentem pedalem, non pedalem, aut rectam de&longs;criptam, non rectam existentem: Geometra verò nihil con­cludit eò, quod bæc e&longs;t linea, &longs;ed quæ per hæc e&longs;tenduntur) innuit his verbis eam materiam intelligibilem, quæ e&longs;t &longs;ubiectum Geometriæ: eam &longs;cilicet, quæ &longs;ub figuris Geometricis &longs;en&longs;ibilibus, & plerunque fal&longs;is latet; nam &longs;æpè Geo­metra vtitur linea quadam &longs;en&longs;ibili pro recta, quæ verè nec e&longs;t linea mathe­matica, nec recta; &longs;upponit aliquando talem lineam e&longs;&longs;e pedalem, quæ ve­rè non e&longs;t pedalis: Verumtamen non mentitur, quia re&longs;picit ad veram li­neam mathematicam, quæ &longs;ub illa intelligitur, & quæ recta concipitur; & quidem hæc omnia verè concipiuntur, quoniam ita e&longs;&longs;e re vera po&longs;&longs;unt.

2911 2912

2913 2914 44

2915 2916 Tex. 28. (Coaltern as verò coincidere) per coalternas intelligendas e&longs;&longs;e pa­rallelas lineas, alias, & nunc quoque monemus.

2917 2918

2919 2920 45

2921 2922 Tex. 29. (In Matbematicis verò non est &longs;imiliter paralogi&longs;mus, quoniam me­diŭ e&longs;t &longs;emper, quod duplex, de hoc enim omni, & hoc rur&longs;us de alio dicitur omni)aduerte, quod quamuis nonnulli codices habeant pro, in mathematicis, in di&longs;ciplinis, idem tamen apud græcos maqhmata &longs;unt, ac apud latinos di&longs;ci­plmæ; verbum autem maqhmata v&longs;urpat hoc loco Ari&longs;toteles. 2923 2924 Porrò non e&longs;t in mathematicis, &longs;icut in alijs paralogi&longs;mus, quia in omni demon&longs;tra­tione maius extremum dicitur de omni medio, & rur&longs;us medium dicitur de omni minori extremo, ac &longs;i diceret mathematicæ demon&longs;trationes &longs;unt in primo modo, qui barbarè à latinis recentioribus Barbara appellatur. 2925 2926 Hæc e&longs;t autem pulcherrima mathematicarum commendatio, quippe præclarum e&longs;t à laudato laudari. 2927 2928 In mathematicis, inquit, non accidit &longs;imiliter para­logi&longs;mus, ide&longs;t, tam frequenter, quemadmodum in &longs;yllogi&longs;mis dialecticis, quia modus argumentandi mathematicarum e&longs;t perfecti&longs;&longs;imus, quippe in primo modo primæ figuræ.

2929 2930

2931 2932 46

2933 2934 Eodem tex. (Contingit autem quo&longs;dam non &longs;yllogi&longs;ticè dicere, & quod ex vtri&longs;­que con&longs;equentia accipiunt, quemadmodum & Cæneus facit, quod ignis in multi­plici proportione: etenim ignis celeriter gignitur, vt ait: & hæc est proportio. 2935 2936 &longs;ic autem non e&longs;t &longs;yllog &longs;mus, ni&longs;i celerrimam proportio &longs;equatur multiplex: & ignem celerrima in motu proportio) verba illa (in multiplici proportione) græcè &longs;ic &longs;e habent, en th pollaplasioni analogia, quod melius redditur latinè in mul­tiplici proportione, quemadmodum fecimus, quam in multiplicata, quem­admodum in vulgata editione. 2937 2938 porrò quid inter multiplicem, & multipli­catam rationem inter&longs;it, optimè declarat no&longs;ter Clauius ad 4. definit. 2939 2940 lib. 2941 2942 5. Elem. 2943 2944 ex quo etiam loco pauca decerpam, quæ huic loco declarando con­ducunt. 2945 2946 Proportio igitur multiplex e&longs;t habitudo inter duas quantitates in­æquales, quarum maior continet minorem, bis, vel ter, vel quater, &c. 2947 2948 vn­de proportio multiplex habet &longs;ub &longs;e genera infinita, quando enim maior continet minorem bis, dicitur Dupla: quando ter, Tripla: quando quater, Quadrupla: & &longs;ic in infinitum: v. g. 2. ad 1. e&longs;t proportio dupla; 3. ad 1. tri­pla; 4. ad 1. quadrupla, &c. 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 omnes tamen continentur &longs;ub genere multipli­cis rationis. 2955 2956 porrò &longs;i qu&ecedil;piam proportio ex genere multiplici progrediatur per plures terminos, v. g. proportio quadrupla progrediatur hoc modo, 1. 4. 16. 64. 256. &c. 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 fit, vt &longs;ub&longs;equentes termini mirum in modum augean­tur. 2963 2964 hic vides primum ip&longs;am quadruplam rationem in di&longs;po&longs;itis terminis progredi, quia quilibet &longs;equens terminus ad præcedentem e&longs;t quadruplus. 2965 2966 cernis etiam in paucis terminis, quinque &longs;cilicet magnum factum e&longs;&longs;e incre­mentum, cum v&longs;que ad 256. excreuerint. 2967 2968 Cæneus igitur dicens ignem augeri &longs;ecundum multiplicem rationem, vnam ex prædictis intelligebat aliquam, quia quælibet illarum magnopere cre&longs;cit, &longs;i propagetur, vt ad 10. quinti definit. 2969 2970 traditur: & vt paulo ante exemplo licuit per&longs;picere. 2971 2972 argumentaba­tur igitur Cæneus in hunc modum; quod in multiplici ratione augetur, ce­lerrimè augetur: ignis celerrimè augetur, ergo ignis in multiplici ratione augetur, quæ argumentatio vitio&longs;a e&longs;t, ex duabus quippe affirmatiuis in &longs;e­cunda figura procedens, vt colligitur ex verbis illis tex. (Ex viri&longs;que con&longs;e­quentia accipiunt) ex his mathematica huius locis patere &longs;atis po&longs;&longs;unt.

2973 2974

2975 2976 47

2977 2978 Ibidem (Conuertuntur autem magis, quæ&longs;unt in mathematicis, quoniam nul­lum accidens accipiunt (m quo quidem ijs præ&longs;tăt, quæ di&longs;putationibus traduntur) &longs;ed definitiones) Hæc e&longs;t altera mathematicarum laus, vnde earum quoque præ&longs;tantia elucet, quia &longs;cilicet mathematicæ pro medijs vtuntur definitio­nibus &longs;ubiecti, aut pa&longs;&longs;ionis, quæ nuilo modo &longs;unt accidentalia conclu&longs;ioni, v. g. in prima Euclidis demon&longs;tratione per definitionem &longs;ubiecti probantur tres lineæ e&longs;&longs;e æquales, quia nimirum &longs;int &longs;emidiametri circulorum æqua­lium, quæ e&longs;t ip&longs;arum definitio. 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 & in 4. primi probantur ba&longs;is, & anguli vnius trianguli æquales e&longs;&longs;e ba&longs;i, & angulis alterius trianguli per formalem definitionem pa&longs;&longs;ionis, videlicet æqualitatis, quæ traditur in octauo axio­mate &longs;ic, quæ &longs;ibi mutuo congruunt, ea inter &longs;e &longs;unt æqualia. 2985 2986 probat igitur Euclides in quarta ba&longs;im, & angulos vnius trianguli e&longs;&longs;e æqualia ba&longs;i, & an­gulis alterius trianguli, quia o&longs;tendit, quod, &longs;i ba&longs;is illa huic ba&longs;i, & illi an­guli hi&longs;ce angulis &longs;uperponantur, congruunt; ex qua congruentia mutua, quæ e&longs;t æqualitatis definitio, infert æqualitatem ip&longs;arum ba&longs;ium, necnon angulorum. 2987 2988 eadem deinde æqualitatis definitione totam demon&longs;trationem concludit, &longs;cilicet totum triangulum toti triangulo æquale e&longs;&longs;e, quia vnum alteri congruat. 2989 2990 A&longs;tronomi quoque demon&longs;trant eclyp&longs;im de Luna, per in­rerpo&longs;itionem terræ inter Lunam, & Solem, quæ interpo&longs;itio e&longs;t definitio cau&longs;alis ip&longs;ius eclyp&longs;is, &longs;cilicet pa&longs;&longs;ionis. 2991 2992 huiu&longs;modi &longs;excentas reperies apud Geometras, Arithmeticos, A&longs;tronomos, cæterosque; Mathematicas demon­&longs;trationes: ita vt meritò dixerit Ari&longs;t. Mathematicas alias omnes natura­les &longs;cientias, quæ di&longs;putabilibus rationibus traduntur ex hac parte antecel­lere. 2993 2994 a&longs;&longs;umunt igitur terminos conuertibiles, quia adhibent &longs;æpè definitio­nes ad demon&longs;trandum. 2995 2996 Reliqua logici expo&longs;itores declarant.

2997 2998

2999 3000 48

3001 3002 Tex. 30. (Rur&longs;us quemadmodum mon&longs;trant Lunam, quod &longs;phærica &longs;it per aug­menta: &longs;i enim quod ita augetur, e&longs;t &longs;phæricum; augetur autem Luna; planŭ quod &longs;phærica) Illius demon&longs;trationis, quæ ab effectu procedit, affert exemplum ex a&longs;tronomia; A&longs;tronomi enim demon&longs;trant Lunam e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam ab ef­fectu ip&longs;ius &longs;phæricitatis, qui e&longs;t illuminatio &longs;phærica: &longs;ic enim ratiocinan­tur: ea, quæ &longs;phæricè illuminantur &longs;unt &longs;phærica, Luna &longs;phæricè illumina­tur, ergo &longs;phærica e&longs;t: quæ argumentatio fu&longs;ius explicanda e&longs;t; quod ait, quod ita augetur, ide&longs;t, &longs;phæricè, e&longs;t &longs;phæricum, ide&longs;t, quia lumen nouæ Lu­næ augetur &longs;phæricè, hoc e&longs;t, ad eum modum, quo quæuis &longs;phæra obiecta corpori lumino&longs;o &longs;olet illuminari. 3003 3004 illuminatio porrò Lunæ in &longs;e &longs;emper e&longs;t eadem, quia &longs;emper dimidium Lunæ quod Solem a&longs;picit, illuminatur; dici­tur tamen augeri re&longs;pectu oculi no&longs;tri, quia &longs;cilicet initio facto à nouilunio pars illuminata incipit quotidie magis vergere ad oculum no&longs;trum, ita vt in dies maiorem, ac maiorem illuminationem videamus, donec opponatur Soli, in qua oppo&longs;itione totum ferè Lunæ illuminatum con&longs;picitur. 3005 3006 Vt autem huius illuminationis non iniucundam f cias experientiam; cape &longs;phæram quampiam &longs;olidam manu, cum qua recede ad medium cubiculi, & pone lu­men &longs;eor&longs;um ad partem aliquam: deinde brachio exten&longs;o oppone &longs;phæram lumini, quo &longs;itu nihil de illuminatione videbis, quamuis dimidium ferè il­lius illuminetur. 3007 3008 po&longs;tea conuerte te ip&longs;um ibidem paulatim, ita vt aliquid illuminationis oculo tuo appareat; & videbis partem illam illuminationis, falcatæ, &longs;eu nouæ Lunæ &longs;imilem. 3009 3010 Deinde adhuc magis te conuerte, & cer­nes illuminationem dimidiatæ Lunæ &longs;imilem: verte adhuc te ip&longs;um donec &longs;it &longs;phæra ita lumini oppo&longs;ita, vt inter ip&longs;am, & lumen oculus tuus &longs;it me­dius; apparebit tunc tota illuminatio, quæ erit in&longs;tar plenilunij. 3011 3012 perge ad­huc te ip&longs;um conuertere, & videbis paulatim lumen oculo tuo decre&longs;cere non aliter ac in Luna &longs;ene&longs;cente. 3013 3014 atque hoe e&longs;t &longs;phæricè illuminari, fierique &longs;phærica illuminationis augmenta. 3015 3016 cum ergo videamus Lunam eo modo lu­mine augeri, quo &longs;phæra, hinc ip&longs;am quoque &longs;phæricam-e&longs;&longs;e argumentamur.

3017 3018

3019 3020 49

3021 3022 Po&longs;t nonnulla (Vt Per&longs;pectiua ad Geometriam, & Mechanica ad Stereome­tricam, & Harmonica ad Arithmeticam, vt Apparentia ad A&longs;trologicam) &longs;upra tex. 20. exempla &longs;ubalternationum Per&longs;pectiuæ, & Mechanicæ cum Geo­metria &longs;unt allata. 3023 3024 3025 3026 hic primo notandum Stereometriam non ef&longs;e &longs;cientiam di&longs;tinctam à Geometria, ni&longs;i &longs;icuti partem à toto: nam cum Geometria con&longs;ideret quantitatem, &longs;ecundum tres dimen&longs;iones, longitudinem, latitu­dinem, & profunditatem, oritur triplex illius diui&longs;ro, de lineis, de &longs;uperfi­ciebus, de &longs;olidis. 3027 3028 pars igitur, quæ de &longs;olidis tractat, pattimque; continetur 11. 12. 13. 14. & 15. Euclidis, partim aliorum Geometrarum libris, vt li­bro Archim. de Sphæra, & Cyl. & &longs;imilibus, dicitur Stereometria à græco steoeov, ide&longs;t &longs;olidum. 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 Porrò cur malit Ari&longs;t. Mechanicam &longs;ubalternari Ste­reometriæ, quam toti Geometriæ, qua tamen, vt videre e&longs;t apud Archime­dem, innititur, fortè ea ratio e&longs;t, quia Mechanica præcipuè con&longs;iderat ma­chinas, quæ corpora &longs;unt, & propterea præcipuè, & primò debet Stereome­triæ, quæ corpora pariter contemplatur, &longs;ubalternari. 3035 3036 Quod ait Apparen­tia ad A&longs;irol. 3037 3038 inteiligit per Apparentia vulgarem quandam Nautarum, & Agricolarum a&longs;tronomiam, quæ quodammodo &longs;ubaiternatur, & pendet ex &longs;cientia A&longs;trologiæ; indiget enim cognitione ortus, & motus a&longs;trorum, præ&longs;ertim Lunæ, Hyadum, Pleiadum, & Canis. 3039 3040 Reliqua v&longs;que ad &longs;inem ca­pitis optimè à Zabarella explicantur, neque ad nos pertinet, cum de Mathe­maticis agant, quatenus ad Logicum &longs;pectant.

3041 3042

3043 3044 50

3045 3046 Po&longs;t nonnulla (Hic enim ip&longs;um quidem quod &longs;en&longs;itiuorum e&longs;t &longs;cire, ip&longs;um ve­rò Propter quid Mathematicorum; hi namque habent cau&longs;arum demon&longs;trationes, &c.) &longs;en&longs;us e&longs;t in &longs;ubalternatis, & dependentibus di&longs;ciplinis, quas &longs;en&longs;itiuas appellat, quia de rebus &longs;en&longs;ibilibus &longs;unt, vt in Per&longs;pectiua de obiectis vifibi­libus, & in Mu&longs;ica de &longs;onis cogno&longs;citur Quod, ide&longs;t effectus: cuius effectus cau&longs;a, &longs;eu Propter quid &longs;citur auxilio Mathematicarum, ide&longs;t, traditur à &longs;cientijs &longs;ubalternantibus. 3047 3048 v. g. alicuius effectus in Per&longs;pectiua cau&longs;a inqui­ritur, & inuenitur ope Geometriæ, cuiilla &longs;ubiacet. 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 Hic obiter notandum, Ari&longs;t. 3055 3056 fateri manife&longs;tè Mathematicas &longs;ubalternatas, &longs;eu medias o&longs;tendere per cau&longs;as, quas &longs;ubalternantium ope perue&longs;tigant.

3057 3058

3059 3060 51

3061 3062 Et po&longs;tea (Se habet autem & ad Per&longs;pectiuam, vt hæc ad Geometriam, alia ad hanc, vt quoæ e&longs;t de Iride ip&longs;um enim quod Naturalis e&longs;t &longs;cire, ip&longs;um vcrò Prop­ter quid Per&longs;pectiui) &longs;icut &longs;e habet, inquit, &longs;cientià Naturalis de Iride ad Per­&longs;pectiuam, ita Per&longs;pectiua ad Geomettiam. 3063 3064 qua verò ratione cau&longs;a Iridis pertineat ad opticam, atque hine tandem ad Geometriam, optimè patebit in Meteoris, cum ip&longs;ius demon&longs;trationem afferemus.

3065 3066

3067 3068 52

3069 3070 Tex. 37. (Vt æquicruri, & Scaleno hoc, quod e&longs;t duobus rectis æquales habere &longs;ecandum commune aliquod ine&longs;t) quid &longs;it habcre tres æquales duobus rectis&longs;atis explicatum e&longs;t lib. 3071 3072 r. 3073 3074 Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3075 3076 r. 3077 3078 nunc igitur paraphra&longs;im&longs;olum huius loci dabo. 3079 3080 Triangnlo I&longs;o&longs;celi, & Scaleno connenit pa&longs;&longs;io illa,habere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis &longs;ecundum aliquod com­mune, quia illis competit, quatenus ambo &longs;unt figura quædam, ide&longs;t, qua­tenus vtrumque illorum triangulum e&longs;t; triangulo namque omni primo com­petit habere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis.

3081 3082

3083 3084 53

3085 3086 Tex. 38. (Et quemadmodum in alijs principium &longs;implex, boc autem non idem vbique, &longs;ed in pondere quidem mina, in cătu verò die&longs;is) Die&longs;is apud Muficos e&longs;t pars Toni. 3087 3088 Tonus autem e&longs;t interuallum duarum vocum, quale e&longs;t inter pri­mam vocem, Vt, & &longs;ecundam Rè, vt modo loquuntur. 3089 3090 i&longs;tud interuallum diuidunt Mu&longs;ici primum in &longs;emitonia, non tamen æqualia, &longs;ed vnum maius altero. 3091 3092 minus iterum in duas partes æquales &longs;ubdiuidunt, quarum vtramque veteres harmonici die&longs;im dixerunt. 3093 3094 & h&ecedil;c die&longs;is e&longs;t minima vox ab eis con­&longs;iderata; & quæ prima cadit &longs;ub &longs;en&longs;um; & propterea veluti &longs;implex prin­cipium, & clementum, ex quo alia maiora interualla conftent; & in quod re&longs;oluuntur. die/ois porrò græcè valet inter alia, diui&longs;ionem. 3095 3096 igitur interual­lum i&longs;tud minimum dictum e&longs;t die&longs;is, quod &longs;it quædam diui&longs;io, &longs;eu &longs;egmen­turn Toni (Quemadmodum in pondere mina) qui de ponderibus antiquis tra­ctant, a&longs;&longs;erunt, Minam fui&longs;&longs;e maiorem libra per &longs;emunciam, æquipondera­bat enim centum drachmis: quæ refragantur huic loco. 3097 3098 &longs;ed fortè dicendum, Ari&longs;t. 3099 3100 con&longs;idera&longs;&longs;e, Minam re&longs;pectu Talenti, re&longs;pectu enim illius dici pote&longs;t principium, cum &longs;ex millia minarum in Attico talento continerentur.

3101 3102

3103 3104 54

3105 3106 Tex. 39. (Si enim quod duobus rectis ine&longs;t, non in quantum æquicrus, &longs;ed in quantum triangulus, no­&longs;cens, &c.) ide&longs;t, &longs;i enim qui cogno&longs;cit, quod ha­bere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis conuenit æquicruri, non quatenus æquicrus e&longs;t, &longs;ed quate­nus triangulus e&longs;t, &c. 3107 3108 quid &longs;it habere tres æqua­les duobus rectis, &c. 3109 3110 fusè explicatum e&longs;t in lib. 3111 3112 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3113 3114 1. quò te nunc mitto.

3115 3116

3117 3118 55

3119 3120 Po&longs;t pauca (Ine&longs;t omni triangulo hoc quod est duos, &c.) ide&longs;t, hæc proprietas, quæ e&longs;t habere duos angulos rectos non actu, &longs;ed per æquiualen­tiam trium angulorum trianguli. 3121 3122 Vide quæ im­mediatè &longs;upra de hac re dixi, & quò te remi&longs;r.

3123 3124

3125 3126 56

3127 3128 Eodem tex (Quando igitur cognofcimes, quod­quatuor exteriores &longs;unt æquales, quoniam I&longs;o&longs;celes, adhuc defseit, propier quid I&longs;o&longs;celes? 3129 3130 quoniain trian­gulus: & hoc quoniam figura rectilinea, &c.) exem­plo geometrico vult o&longs;tendere demon&longs;trationem vniuer&longs;alem e&longs;&longs;e particulari præ&longs;tantiorem: e&longs;t autem exemplum de pulcherrima, atque admira­bili proprietate, quæ omnibus figuris rectilineis conuenit, e&longs;t que; huiu&longs;modi: Omnis figuræ rectili­neæ anguli externi omnes &longs;imul &longs;umpti, &longs;unt æqua les quatuor rectis angulis, quæ affectio demon­&longs;tratur in &longs;cholio 32. primi Elem. 3131 3132 dicuntur autern anguli externi, qui productis lateribus fiunt, vt in triangulo pra&longs;enti anguli externi &longs;unt, B D C, D F E, F B A, ita vt quælibet figura tot angulos externos &longs;ortiatur, quot habet latera; cum exproductis lateribus oriantur. 3133 3134 Vt autem propo&longs;itio ve­rificetur, &longs;ingula latera ordinatim &longs;unt producenda, hoc e&longs;t, ver&longs;us eandem partem, vt in figuris appo&longs;itis vides. 3135 3136 Quæuis igitur figura rectilinea, &longs;iue trilatera &longs;it, &longs;iue quadrilatera, vel etiam millelatera, & proinde mille quo­que angulos externos habeat, hanc tamen mirabilem proprietatem (quod vix credi pote&longs;t) po&longs;&longs;idet, vt omnes illi anguli externi &longs;imul &longs;int æquales quatuor rectis angulis. 3137 3138 vnde tres externi anguli trianguli, & quatuor exter­ni quadranguli, & quinque externi pentagoni, &c. 3139 3140 &longs;unt æquales quatuor tan­tum rectis, nec aliter res &longs;e habet in figura millelatera. 3141 3142 Ex quo fit, vt an­guli externi cuiu &longs;uis figuræ &longs;int æquales angulis omnibus externis alterius cuiu&longs;libet figuræ. 3143 3144 Ari&longs;t. 3145 3146 igitur inquit, quando cogno&longs;cimus, quod quatuor angulis rectis &longs;unt æquales exteriores omnes anguli alicuius figuræ, quo­niam figura illa e&longs;t triangulum &longs;calenum, adhuc talis cognitio e&longs;t defecti­ua, quia non illi competit illa pa&longs;&longs;io, quia &longs;it triangulum &longs;calenum, neque competit &longs;caleno, quia &longs;it triangulum; &longs;ed his omnibus competit, quia &longs;unt figuræ rectilineæ, cui hæc proprietas ine&longs;t primo, & vniuer&longs;aliter: qui igi­tur &longs;cit, &longs;calenum habere prædictam affectionem, ex eo, quod &longs;it figura re­ctilinea, perfectius &longs;cit, quia nihil amplius quæri pote&longs;t, quia illa figura re­ctilinea illud vniuer&longs;ale e&longs;t, cui primo competit; reliquis autem per illam. 3147 3148 qui igitur vniuer&longs;ale &longs;cit, perfectius &longs;cit; quod volebat Ari&longs;t. 3149 3150 demon&longs;trare.

3151 3152

3153 3154 57

3155 3156 Eodem tex. (Vt &longs;i quis nouit, quod omnis triangulus habet tres duobus rectis æquales) nihil &longs;requentius. 3157 3158 vide &longs;upra lib. 3159 3160 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3161 3162 1.

3163 3164

3165 3166 58

3167 3168 Tex. 43. (Sed planum, quod et&longs;i e&longs;&longs;et &longs;entire triangulum, quod duobus rectis æquales habet angulos) vide &longs;upra lib. 3169 3170 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3171 3172 1.

3173 3174

3175 3176 59

3177 3178 Po&longs;t pauca (Quare & &longs;i &longs;upra Lunam e&longs;&longs;emus, & videremus obiectam terram, non vtique &longs;ciremus cau&longs;am eclyp&longs;is) loquitur de defectu Lunæ, qui fit, quando terra inter Lunam, & Solem po&longs;ita, impedit, ne lumen Solis feratur in Lu­nam, &longs;ed efficit, vt vmbra ip&longs;ius terræ eam contegat.

3179 3180

3181 3182 60

3183 3184 Et paulo po&longs;t (Qutmadmodŭ &longs;t vi­trum perforatum videremus, & lumen permeans, planum vtique e&longs;&longs;et propter quid comburit) Ioquitur de ea com­bu&longs;tione, cuæ fit per refractionem media &longs;phæra vitrea. 3185 3186 de qua Vitel­lio propo&longs;. 3187 3188 48. decimi libri; non au­tem de ea, quæ fit per reflexionem ex &longs;peculo concauo quando combu­&longs;tio fit per refractionem, cau&longs;atur à radijs Solis vitrum permeantibus, in quo ita franguntur, vt egredien­tes è vitro &longs;imul vniantur, ex qua vnione ita calor intenditur, vt ibi comburat. 3189 3190 vt in appo&longs;ita figura cer­nere facile e&longs;t; in qua radij à Sole manentes, &longs;phæram vitream perua­dunt, atque in exitu ita refraguntur, vt ad A, punctum coaceruati, ibi po&longs;­&longs;int, &longs;i quid combu&longs;tibile occurrat, comburere. 3191 3192 Si igitur, inquit Ari&longs;t. 3193 3194 vide­remus illos radios &longs;ic permeare, & refrangi, planum vtique nobis e&longs;&longs;et pro­pter quid incendant.

3195 3196 61

3197 3198 Ad finem tex. 43. (Principia enim duplicia &longs;unt, ex quibus, & circa quod: quæ quidem igitur, ex quibus, communia &longs;unt: quæ autem circa quod propria, vt numerus, magnitudo) nonnulli codices corruptè legunt (vt numerus magni­tudine) &longs;ed ex græco tex. corrigendi &longs;unt, vti fecimus. 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 Cæterum per prin­cipia, ex quibus intelligit Dignitates, quia ex illis di&longs;currimus. 3205 3206 per princi­pia verò circa quod, intelligit Definitiones, quibus, vt apparet apud Eucli­dem, explicatur &longs;ubiectum, circa quod &longs;cientia ver&longs;atur; vt in definitioni­bus primi Elem. 3207 3208 docemur, quid &longs;it linea, quid triangulum, quid circulus, quid magnitudines reliquæ, quæ &longs;unt materia, circa quam Geometria &longs;pe­culatur. 3209 3210 In &longs;eptimo verò traduntur definitiones numerorum, quid &longs;it nu­merus, quid impar, quid compo&longs;itus, quadratus, cubus, & reliquæ nume­rorum &longs;pecies, quæ &longs;unt materia &longs;eptimi, octaui, & noni, in quibus de Arith­metica tractatur.

3211 3212

3213 3214 62

3215 3216 Tex. 44. (Commen&longs;urabilem namq e&longs;&longs;e diametrum verè opinari, ab&longs;urdum e&longs;t)vide, quæ de commen&longs;urabilitate diametri quadrati cum latere expo&longs;uimus lib. 3217 3218 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 1. cap. 3219 3220 23. ait igitur Ari&longs;t. 3221 3222 ab&longs;urdum e&longs;&longs;e opinari dia­metrum e&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;urabilem co&longs;tæ, &longs;eu lateri eiu&longs;dem quadrati, reli­qua &longs;unt Logica.

3223 3224 Ex Secundo Posteriorum.

3225 3226

3227 3228 63

3229 3230 Tex. 1. (Dico autem &longs;impliciter quidem &longs;ubiectum, vt Lunam, aut ter­ram, aut Solem, aut triangulum; aliquid verò defectum, æqualitatem, inæqualitatem. 3231 3232 &longs;i in medio, aut non) Zabarella locum hunc, etiam quatenus ad Mathematicum attinet, optimè declarat. 3233 3234 In quæ­&longs;tionibus, & demon&longs;trationibus duo &longs;unt, &longs;ubiectum, & prædicatum, vtriu&longs;que cau&longs;æ exi&longs;tunt, & quæruntur: v. g. Luna, terra, Sol, & triangulum &longs;unt &longs;u­biectum in demon&longs;tratione, quorum prædicata &longs;unt, Lunæ quidem, & So­lis, eclyp&longs;is. 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 terræ autem e&longs;&longs;e in medio mundi, quod ab A&longs;tronomis ratione ab eclyp&longs;ibus de&longs;umpta, euidentius, quam ab alio quoquam demon&longs;tratur, vt patet ex tractatu de &longs;phœra. 3241 3242 in quo Zabarella non probatur, qui &longs;olum ait, terram e&longs;&longs;e in medio mundi, à Phy&longs;icis demon&longs;trari. 3243 3244 triangulum autem, &longs;eu angulorum ip&longs;ius prædicatum e&longs;t æqualitas, & inæqualitas: vt cum in 32. primi Elem. 3245 3246 demon&longs;trat Euclides, omne triangulum habcre tres angulos æquales duobus rectis.

3247 3248

3249 3250 64

3251 3252 Ibidem (Quid e&longs;t con&longs;onantia? 3253 3254 ratio numerorum in acuto, & graui, &c) tan­git breuiter Ari&longs;t. 3255 3256 cau&longs;am formalem con&longs;onantiæ, & con&longs;equenter defini­tionem ip&longs;ius. 3257 3258 definiunt igitur Mu&longs;ici con&longs;onantiam hoc modo; Con&longs;onan­tia e&longs;t compo&longs;itio &longs;oni grauis, & acuti, quæ &longs;uauiter auribus accidit; & quo­rum &longs;onorum proportio ad inuicem &longs;it &longs;icuti proportio numerorum, qui quaternario includuntur: vt e&longs;t proportio 2. ad 1. vel 3. ad 1. vel 4. ad 1. vel 3. ad 2. vel 4. ad 3. Quotie&longs;eunque igitur duo &longs;oni habuerin quampiam ex quinque prædictis proportionibus, &longs;i &longs;imul coaluerint, ita vt ex eis vnue tantum &longs;onus efficiatur; &longs;onus ille erit concordans, & auribus gratus. 3259 3260 atque hæc e&longs;t &longs;ententia pri&longs;corum præ&longs;ertim Pythagoreorum, qui propterea di­cebantnon licere Mu&longs;ico vltra quaternarium pertran&longs;ire, eò quod &longs;olæ pro­portiones, vt diximus, numerorum quaternario contentorum, concordem, ac con&longs;onantem concentum efficere poterant: quod vt adhuc melius per­

cipiamus, accipe exemplum. 3261 3262 Sint duæ chordæ A, & B, æqualis cra&longs;&longs;itici, & æquè ten&longs;æ. 3263 3264 qua­rum A, dupla &longs;it ip&longs;ius B, quia igitur corpora &longs;onantia &longs;unt in dupla proportione, erunt pa­riter corum &longs;oni in ratione dupla (vt patet ex principijs harmonicæ) hoc e&longs;t, eorum &longs;oni erunt, vt 2. ad 1. quia &longs;cilicet &longs;onus maioris chordæ A, erit duplus ad &longs;onum mi­noris chordæ B. hoc e&longs;t, erit, vt 2. ad 1. & propterea, &longs;i &longs;imul ambæ chordæ pul&longs;entur, &longs;onus, quem ex duobus mixtum edent, con&longs;onans, atque grati&longs;&longs;i­mus auribus no&longs;tris perueniet. 3265 3266 huiu&longs;modi porrò con&longs;onantia, quæ e&longs;t in proportione dupla, quæque omnium &longs;uaui&longs;&longs;ima e&longs;t, à græcis dicebatur Dia­pafon. 3267 3268 atque hæc in præ&longs;entia &longs;ufficiant, cum plura de his ad &longs;ectionem pro­blematum 19. quæ tota e&longs;t de Mu&longs;ica, dicenda &longs;int.

3269 3270

3271 3272 65

3273 3274 Tex. 2. (Vt quod omnis triangulus duobus rectis æquales babet) vide anno­tata lib. 3275 3276 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3277 3278 1.

3279 3280

3281 3282 66

3283 3284 Eodem tex. (Definitiones verò apparent omnes &longs;upponentes, & accipientes ip&longs;um quid e&longs;t, vt Mathematicæ, quid vnitas, quid par, & impar) alludit ad de­finitiones 7. Elem. 3285 3286 vbi agitur de numeris. 3287 3288 Quæ verò hoc loco de principijs dicuntur, luculenti&longs;&longs;imè patent con&longs;ideranti definitiones, & axiomata, quæ Mathematicis demon&longs;trationibus in omnibus ferè libris præmittuntur; ex quibus &longs;tatim demon&longs;trationes deriuantur.

3289 3290

3291 3292 67

3293 3294 Et paulo po&longs;t (Neque vtique de plano figura, non enim e&longs;t planum figura, neque fi­gura planum) alludit ad definitiones planarum figurarum, qualis e&longs;t circu­lus, cuius definitio e&longs;t inter definitiones primi Elem. 3295 3296 15. & e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi: circulus e&longs;t figura plana, &longs;ub vnica linea comprehen&longs;a, quæ periphæria ap­pellatur, ad quam ab vno puncto eorum, quæ intra figuram &longs;unt po&longs;ita, ca­dentes omnes rectæ lineæ inter &longs;e &longs;unt æquales: in qua quidem definitione non prædicatur planum de figura, nec figura de plano: neque enim planum, &longs;au plana &longs;uperficies e&longs;t figura &longs;ecundum &longs;e, ni&longs;i terminetur; neque figura e&longs;t plana &longs;uperficies, cum plurimæ &longs;int figuræ curuæ, & præterea &longs;olidæ quam­plurimæ.

3297 3298

3299 3300 68

3301 3302 Ibidem (Quoniam mon&longs;tratum e&longs;t I&longs;o&longs;celes habere tres angulos æquales duo­bus rectis, &longs;i id de omni triangulo mon&longs;tratum &longs;it) ex dictis lib. 3303 3304 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3305 3306 1. petatur huius loci declaratio.

3307 3308

3309 3310 69

3311 3312 Tex. 7. (Quid enim &longs;ignificat triangulum, accipit Geometra) vt manife&longs;tum e&longs;t in 20. dednitione primi Elem.

3313 3314

3315 3316 70

3317 3318 Ibidem (Quod autem &longs;it, monstrat) vt per&longs;picuum e&longs;t in prima demon&longs;tra­tione primi Elem. 3319 3320 vbi triangulum æquilaterum con&longs;truit, & po&longs;tea probat illud e&longs;&longs;e triangulum æquilaterum. 3321 3322 Certum tamen e&longs;t, Geometram luppo­nere triangulum in communi, cum inter definitiones ip&longs;ius contineatur, quod tamen non ob&longs;tat, quominus probare po&longs;&longs;it, aliquando po&longs;&longs;e con&longs;trni, & e&longs;&longs;e aliquod particulare triangulum, vt fit in prædicta demon&longs;tratione, Euclidis.

3323 3324

3325 3326 71

3327 3328 Tex. 11. (Manife&longs;tum autem, & &longs;ic, propter quid e&longs;t rectus in &longs;emicirculo)affert exemplum demon&longs;trationis per cau&longs;am materialem, idque; vti &longs;olet ex Mathematicis petitum, e&longs;t enim apud Euclidem 31. demon&longs;tratio 3. Elem. vbi ip&longs;e o&longs;tendit angulum in &longs;emicirculo e&longs;&longs;e rectum. 3329 3330 Vbi aduertendum e&longs;t propo&longs;itionem hanc 31. ab Euclide demon&longs;trari duobus modis; ex quibus &longs;ecundum innuit hoc loco Ari&longs;t. 3331 3332 cui a&longs;cripta e&longs;t figura &longs;imilis huic no&longs;træ; in editione Clauiana. 3333 3334 quod fortè non benè aduertens Iacobus Zabarella, alioquin in his &longs;atis oculatus incidit in errorem, dicens, &longs;e nullo pacto vi­dere medium Euclidianæ demon&longs;trationis e&longs;&longs;e cau&longs;am materialem; quod tamen nos mox aperiemus. 3335 3336 per angulum in &longs;emicirculo intelligas eum, qui fit à lineis ductis ab extremitatibus diametri, & &longs;imul in quoduis punctum

circumferentiæ coeuntibus, vt in figura præ&longs;enti vides lineas A C, B C, ad C, pun­ctum conuenire, ibique; facere angulum, A C B, qui dicitur angulus in &longs;emicircu­lo, quia de&longs;criptus e&longs;t in &longs;emicirculo A­C B. e&longs;tque; &longs;anè mirabilis hæc &longs;emicirculi proprietas, cum vbicunque punctum C, in periphæria &longs;umptum fuerit, &longs;emper ta­men angulus A C B, fiat rectus. 3337 3338 quod Euclides eodem pror&longs;us medio, quod Ari&longs;t. 3339 3340 hic innuit, hoc modo demon&longs;trat. 3341 3342 ducta enim recta D C, à centro D, ad punctum C, exurgunt duo l&longs;o&longs;celia triangula A D C, C D B, ergo per 5. primi, anguli D C A, D A C, &longs;unt æquales: pariter anguli D C B, D B C, æquales &longs;unt. 3343 3344 & quia per 32. primi, anguli D A C, D C A, &longs;imul &longs;unt æqua­les angulo externo C D B, & inter &longs;e æquales, erit angulus A C D, dimidium anguli C D B. eadem ratione probatur angulus D C B, e&longs;&longs;e dimidium an­guli C D A. ergo totus angulus A C B, dimidium erit duorum angulorum A D C, C D B, qui per 13. primi, &longs;unt vel recti, vel duobus rectis æquiualent. 3345 3346 Sequitur igitur, angulum A C B, in &longs;emicirculo e&longs;&longs;e dimidium duorum re­ctorum; & quia omnes recti &longs;unt æquales, &longs;equitur dimidium duorum re­ctorum, nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quam vnum rectum angulum, ergo angulus in &longs;e­micirculo, cum &longs;it &longs;emi&longs;&longs;is duorum rectorum, erit vnus rectus angules; quod erat probandum. 3347 3348 ex quibus vides medium illud, quod Ari&longs;t. 3349 3350 a&longs;&longs;ump&longs;it, e&longs;&longs;e omnino idem cum eo, quo Euclides vtitur, &longs;cilicet, e&longs;&longs;e dimidium duorum rectorum, & propterea e&longs;&longs;e rectum: quod etiam medium in toto demon­&longs;trationis decur&longs;u e&longs;t vltimum, & principale, quod proximè conclu&longs;ionem attingit, & propterea dici meretur e&longs;&longs;e medium huius demon&longs;trationis. 3351 3352 Cæterum, quod medium i&longs;tud &longs;it in genere cau&longs;æ materialis, patet ex co, quod e&longs;t, e&longs;&longs;e dimidium; nam e&longs;&longs;e dimidium, vel e&longs;&longs;e tertiam partem, & &longs;i­milia, nihil aliud e&longs;t, quam e&longs;&longs;e partem; e&longs;&longs;e autem partem e&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e materiam totius, etiam ex &longs;ententia ip&longs;ius Ari&longs;t. 3353 3354 ex hac præterea materia conflatur definitio minoris extremi, vel &longs;ubiecti; dum dicitur, angulus in &longs;emicircu­lo e&longs;t dimidium duorum rectorum. 3355 3356 &longs;yllogi&longs;mus enim reducitur tandem ad hanc formam, dimidium duorum rectorum e&longs;t rectus, angulus in &longs;emicir­culo e&longs;t dimidium duorum rectorum, ergo angulus in &longs;emicirculo e&longs;t rectus. 3357 3358 vides in minori propo&longs;itione contineri definitionem &longs;ubiecti materialem? 3359 3360 adeò vt hæc &longs;it demon&longs;tratio omnibus numeris ab&longs;oluta per cau&longs;am mate­rialem, vt benè &longs;entit Ari&longs;t. 3361 3362 Reliqua ad logicum pertinent, etiam&longs;i per cha­racteres more mathematicorum exponantur.

3363 3364

3365 3366 72

3367 3368 Tex. 24. (Vt propter quid re&longs;onat? 3369 3370 aut propter quid apparet? 3371 3372 aut propter quid Iris? 3373 3374 omnia enim hær idem problemata &longs;unt genere, omnia enim &longs;unt refractio, &longs;ed &longs;pecie altera) propter quid re&longs;onat? 3375 3376 &longs;cilicet echo; propter quid apparet? 3377 3378 &longs;cilicet imago in &longs;peculo. 3379 3380 dicit cau&longs;am echo, imaginis in &longs;peculo, & iridis in nubibus e&longs;&longs;e eandem; nimirum refractionem; quamuis tres illæ refractio­nes, &longs;eu; vt melius loquamur, reflexiones differant &longs;pecie ab inuicem, illa enim e&longs;t repercu&longs;&longs;io vocis; hæc reflexio &longs;peciei vi&longs;ibilis ex corpore ter&longs;o; i&longs;ta denique radiorum Solis ex nube rorida in &longs;tato angulo repercu&longs;&longs;us. 3381 3382 qua ratione autem i&longs;ta omnia fiant, longum e&longs;&longs;et exponere, & ab intelligentia huius loci fortè alienum. 3383 3384 Illud tamen non prætereundum, quod &longs;i propriè cum Per&longs;pectiuis loqui velimus, dicendum e&longs;&longs;e, omnia illa e&longs;&longs;e reflexionem, non refractionem. 3385 3386 nam reflexio e&longs;t, quando linea vi&longs;ualis, per quam fertur &longs;péecies in aliquod corpus ter&longs;um, impingit, ex quo deinde ad oculos refle­ctitur. 3387 3388 refractio tunc e&longs;t, quando &longs;pecies obiectivi&longs;ibilis tran&longs;it per media diuer&longs;æ cra&longs;&longs;itiei., vt quando &longs;pecies lapilli per aquam primùm, deinde per æerem means ad oculum peruenit; tunc enim linea, per quam &longs;pecies pro­greditur, frangitur in confinio aquæ, & aeris, ita vt &longs;pecies non per vnicam lineam rectam, &longs;ed per fractam, &longs;eu refractam in confinio illo, oculis tan­dem accidat.

3389 3390 In fine textus (Quoniam Luna deficit) non intelligit defectum illum, qui eclyp&longs;is appellatur, &longs;ed ilium, quo paulatim lumen Lunæ minus oculis no­&longs;tris apparet: decre&longs;cente enim Luna &longs;olent humida augeri.

3391 3392

3393 3394 73

3395 3396 Tex. 25. (Vt propter quid, & permutatim proportionale? 3397 3398 & c.) quod quan­titates, quæ &longs;unt proportionales, &longs;int etiam alternatim, &longs;eu permutatim proportionales explicatum e&longs;t ad tex. 13. primi Po&longs;ter. quæ etiam nece&longs;&longs;a­ria &longs;unt ad hunc locum benè intelligendum. 3399 3400 3401 3402 Illud autem commune propter quod ea, quæ &longs;unt proportionalia, &longs;int etiam permutatim proportionalia, e&longs;t quoddam innominatum, de quo ibi dictum e&longs;t, quod cum conueniat li­neis, & numeris, & tamen &longs;eparatim de vtri&longs;que illa pa&longs;&longs;io demon&longs;tretur, quærit cuinam primò, & per &longs;e conueniat hæc pa&longs;&longs;io, e&longs;&longs;e permutatim pro­portionale; &longs;cilicet quidnam &longs;it illud innominatum; in quo deinde commu­nicent lineæ, & numeri, vt inde habeant e&longs;&longs;e etiam permutatim propor­tionalia.

3403 3404

3405 3406 74

3407 3408 Ibidem (Hic quidem forta&longs;&longs;e proportionaliter habere latera, & angulos) vult indicare, in quonam con&longs;i&longs;tat &longs;imilitudo inter duas-figuras rectilineas geo­metricas, quam &longs;imilitudinem Euclides definit. 3409 3410 1. &longs;exti, &longs;ic explicat: &longs;imi­les figuræ rectilíneæ &longs;unt; quæ & angulos &longs;ingulos, &longs;ingulis angulis æquales habent, atque etiam latera, quæ circa angulos æquales &longs;unt proportionalia. 3411 3412 vt &longs;i duo triangula appo&longs;ita habeant angulos æquales, angulum A, angulo D: angulum B, angulo E. angulum C, angulo F. & præterea latera, quæ &longs;une

circa angulos æquales, v. g. cirea an­gulos A, & D, habeant proportiona­lia, hoc e&longs;t, vt latus A B, ad latus A C; ita &longs;it latus D E, ad latus D F; & &longs;ic de lateribus alijs circa reliquos angulos æquales; erunt tunc prædicta duo tri­angula fimilia. 3413 3414 3415 3416

3417 3418

3419 3420 75

3421 3422 Ibidem (Vt extrin&longs;ecos æquales e&longs;&longs;e) ide&longs;t extrin&longs;ecos angulos cuiu&longs;uis fi­guræ rectilineæ æquales e&longs;&longs;e quatuor rectis angulis: vide quæ &longs;crip&longs;imus de hac re ad tex. 39. &longs;ecundi Po&longs;ter. quæ huic pariter loco &longs;atisfaciunt. 3423 3424

3425 3426 EX TOPICIS.

3427 3428 Ex Primo Libro.

3429 3430

3431 3432 76

3433 3434 3435 Cap. 13. (Con&longs;iderare, quod diameter est co&longs;tæ incommen&longs;urabilis) vide quæ de hac re &longs;crip&longs;i lib. 3436 3437 3438 1. Priorum &longs;ecto 1. cap. 3439 3440 23.

3441 3442

3443 3444 77

3445 3446 Eodem cap. (Similiter autem & acutum; non enim idem &longs;impliciter in omnibus dicitur: nam vox acuta quidem velox (&longs;icut dicunt, qui &longs;e­cundum numeros harmonici &longs;unt) angulus autem acutus, qui minor e&longs;trecto; gla­dius verò, qui e&longs;t anguli acuti) affert tres &longs;pecies acuti, aliud dicens e&longs;&longs;e acu­tum, quod e&longs;t in voce acuta; aliud, quod e&longs;t in angulo acuto: aliud denique, quod e&longs;t in gladio acuto horum enim trium acumen diuer&longs;o modo &longs;e habet. 3447 3448 nam acumen vocis, & &longs;oni ex celeritate motus, qua aer percu&longs;&longs;us impelli­tur; grauitatem autem ex tarditate oriri tradiderunt antiqui Mu&longs;ici om­nes: quamuis non ex &longs;ola celeritate, & tarditate, &longs;ed ex alijs etiam cau&longs;is oriri po&longs;&longs;e voluerint. 3449 3450 Primus omnium Architas Tarentinus, vt e&longs;t apud Por­phirium in harmonicis Ptolæmei, & Zarlinum pag. 3451 3452 58. complem. 3453 3454 mu&longs;ica­lium, ait, &longs;i virga celerius feriat aerem, gigni motum celeriorem in aere, atque hinc &longs;onum acutiorem reddi, experientia con&longs;tat: &longs;i autem eadem vir­ga tardius aerem feriat, gigni motum in aere tardiorem, ex quo etiam &longs;o­num grauem, vt experientia docet. 3455 3456 Ptolæmeus deinde lib. 3457 3458 1. cap. 3459 3460 3. Harm. cum ex alijs, tum ex celeritate oriri &longs;onum acutum, grauem verò ex tardi­tate a&longs;&longs;erit; vt &longs;i chorda eadem parum inten&longs;a pul&longs;etur, tardius aerem ver­berat, & ideo grauiorem &longs;onum efficit: &longs;i autem magis intendatur, validius aerem pul&longs;abit, & proinde citiorem motum illi imprimet, & propterea acutiorem &longs;onum reddet. 3461 3462 3463 3464 hæc ille. 3465 3466 videmus etiam, quod cannæ organo­rum maiores cum plus aeris moucant, & idcirco tardius, &longs;onum grauiorem emittunt, quàm cannæ graciliores, quæ quia parum aeris cient, & ideo ce­lerius, &longs;onum acutum edunt. 3467 3468 ab hac &longs;ententia po&longs;teriores Mu&longs;ici non recel­&longs;erunt, vt videre e&longs;t apud Zarlinum.

3469 3470 In quo po&longs;tea con&longs;i&longs;tat ratio acnti anguli, explicat inducens definitionem ip&longs;ius, quæ e&longs;t inter de&longs;initiones primi Elem. 3471 3472 huiu&longs;modi, Angulus acutus e&longs;t, qui minor recto e&longs;t. 3473 3474 Demum explicat, cur nam gladius dicatur acutus, quia nimirum habet angulum acutum &longs;uperficialem, ide&longs;t, quem duæ &longs;uper­ficies &longs;imul in acie gladij concurrentes efficiunt.

3475 3476

3477 3478 78

3479 3480 Eodem cap. (Rur&longs;um &longs;i eorundem; quæ &longs;unt &longs;ub eodem nomine diuer&longs;æ d ffe­rentiæ &longs;unt; vt coloris, qui e&longs;t in corporibus, & in melodijs) veteres Mu&longs;ici can­tilenas omnes ad tria genera reuocarunt, videlicet Enharmonicum, Chro­maticum, & Diatonicum; quæ diftinguebantur inuicem ex varia diui&longs;ione interuallorum, ex quibus ip&longs;orum Monochordia conftabant: &longs;iue ex varijs vocum interuallis, v. g. quia in vno continebantur plures toni, vt in Diato­nico; in alio plures die&longs;es, vt in Enharmonico; in tertio verò plura &longs;emito­nia, vt in Chromatico: quæ vox deducitur à chroma, græco, quod latinis e&longs;t color; quare Chromaticum latinè redditur coloratum. 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 Hic e&longs;t igitur color ille, quem hic Ari&longs;t. 3487 3488 innuit. 3489 3490 quod genus for&longs;itan à calore denomina­batur, quòd ip&longs;ius notæ mu&longs;icales e&longs;&longs;ent coloratæ, vt hoc modo ab alijs ge­neribus digno&longs;ceretur. quam con&longs;uetudinem exi&longs;timat Zarlinus cap. 3491 3492 46. &longs;e­cundæ partis, etiam no&longs;tra tempe&longs;tate aliquo modo per&longs;euerare, cum vi­deamus in organis, & alijs huiu&longs;modi in&longs;trumentis, quæ pinnas, vulgò ta­&longs;tos, habent; illas inquam pinnas, quæ chromaticis interuallis deputatæ &longs;unt, colore nigro tinctas e&longs;&longs;e.

3493 3494 Libro Quarto.

3495 3496

3497 3498 79

3499 3500 3501 Cap. 1. loco 10. (Si quis in&longs;ecabiles ponens lineas) nonnulli antiquorum Philo&longs;ophorum putarunt omnia ex indiui&longs;ibilibus componi, vt Demo­critus, & Leucippus, & propterea dixerunt, etiam lineas con&longs;tare ex lineis quibu&longs;dam ade ò paruis, quæ omnino e&longs;ient in&longs;ecabiles, &longs;eu indiui&longs;ibiles: de quibus plura in libello de line is in&longs;ecabilibus. 3502

3503 3504 Libro Sexio.

3505 3506

3507 3508 80

3509 3510 3511 Cap. 2. loco 32. (Vt qui lineam definiunt longitudinem &longs;ine latitudine e&longs;&longs;e) &longs;uppenimus lectorem inteil exi&longs;&longs;e definitiones &longs;altem primi Elem. 3512 3513 3514 in­ter quas definitio lineæ e&longs;t &longs;ecunda, cademque; cum hac Ari&longs;totelis.

3515 3516 Libro Octauo.

3517 3518

3519 3520 81

3521 3522 3523 Cap. 2. loco 41. (Videntur dutem in di&longs;ciplinis, &longs;eu Mathematicis quædam ob de&longs;initionis defectum non facile de&longs;cribi; vt & quoniam, quæ ad latus &longs;e­cat planum linea, &longs;imiliter diuidit & lineam, & locum: definitione autem dicta, &longs;tatim manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, quod dicitur, nam eandem ablationem habent loca, & linea, &longs;ive latus planæ figuræ, est autem definitio eiu&longs;dem proportionis hæc) mendosè lugitur à nonnullis (E&longs;t distem de&longs;initio eiu&longs;dem orationis hæc) quos puto de­ceptos ab æquiuoco lsgous quod & orationem, & rationem, &longs;iue proportio­nem &longs;ignificat: hic autem &longs;ignificare proportionem res &longs;ubrecta &longs;atis mani­fe&longs;tat. 3524 3525 3526 Notandum po&longs;tea cum Alexandro (quod & &longs;uperius alias commo­nui in cap. 3527 3528 de Priori, & alibi) per verbum (De&longs;cribi) fignificari hoc loco geometricè demon&longs;trare, quoniam Geometræ non ni&longs;i adhibit is de&longs;criptio­nibus, &longs;eu figutis demon&longs;trant. 3529 3530 Vult autem Ari&longs;t. 3531 3532 exemplo mathematico o&longs;tendere, difficile e&longs;&longs;e di&longs;putare, aut argumentari, ni&longs;i prius rectè a&longs;&longs;ignetur definitio illius rei, de qua di&longs;&longs;eritur. 3533 3534 Porrò exemplum mathematicum hic allatum &longs;ic videtur explicandum: Conetur aliquis demon&longs;trare hanc pro­po&longs;itionem; &longs;i linea ducta fuerit æquidi&longs;tans lateri vnius plani trianguli, &longs;e­cabit & latera, & locum, ideft &longs;uperficiem illam triangularem &longs;imiliter, ide &longs;t

in eadem proportione, vt in triangulo A B C, linea D E, parallela ba&longs;i B C, &longs;ecat latera A B, & A C, in punctis D, & E, in eadem ratione, in qua etiam fecat totum triangulum, ita vt eadem &longs;it proportio lineæ A D, ad D B, & lineæ A E, ad E C, quæ e&longs;t partium totalis trianguli A B C, &longs;eilicet quæ e&longs;t partis A D E, ad partem E D C, fiue ad partem D E B. quod con&longs;tat ex &longs;ecunda 6. Elem. 3535 3536 Inquit ergo Ari&longs;t. 3537 3538 Si quis vellet hoc demon&longs;trare nondum præmi&longs;&longs;a defi­nitione eorum, quæ habent eandem rationem, &longs;iue nondum definitione al­lata quantitatum proportionalium, hic difficile id valeret o&longs;tendere: at ve­rò allata prins definitione quantitatum proportionalium facile demon&longs;tra­bit. 3539 3540 Subdit verò Ari&longs;t. 3541 3542 dictam definitionem, dicens, tunc quantitates e&longs;&longs;e proportionales, quando habent eandem ablationem, ide&longs;t, eandem diui&longs;io­nem, ide&longs;t, eadem diui&longs;io ne tantum proportionaliter de vna, quantum de altera magnitudine re&longs;ecatur: Quemadmodum etiam Euclides loco cita­to probat, latera illius trianguli, & &longs;uperficiem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;imiliter diui&longs;a, ex quo &longs;equitur e&longs;&longs;e proportionalia. 3543 3544 Porrò Euclides definit. 3545 3546 &longs;eptima 5. paulo ali­ter definit quantitates proportionales e&longs;&longs;e illas, quæ eandem habent ratio­nem, v. g. &longs;i &longs;it, vt prima ad &longs;ecundam, ita tertia ad quartam. 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 ex quibus quoad Mathematicas &longs;pectat, huic loco &longs;atisfactum &longs;it.

3553 3554

3555 3556 82

3557 3558 3559 Cap. 4. loco 86. (Tentandum autem, & ea, in quæ &longs;æpi&longs;&longs;imè incidunt di&longs;puta­tiones, tenere, nam quemadmodum in Geometria ante opus e&longs;t circa elementa exer­citatum e&longs;&longs;e, & in numeris circa capitales promptè &longs;e habere, & multum refert ad boc, & alium numerum cogno&longs;cere multiplicatum) Elementa vocabant antiqui demon&longs;trationes faciliores, & &longs;impliciores, quales propriè &longs;unt omnes, quæ &longs;ex prioribus libris Euclidianis continentur: ex illis enim tanquam ex ele­mentis ab&longs;tru&longs;iores, & difficiliores demon&longs;trationes deducebant. 3560 3561 3562 atque hæc e&longs;t ratio, cur Euclides &longs;uos libros elementa nuncupauerit. 3563 3564 ait igitur curan­dum e&longs;&longs;e horum elementorum cognitionem in promptu habere, quia fre­quens de ip&longs;is incidit di&longs;putatio. 3565 3566 Per capitales numeros intelligo &longs;implices ab vnitate, v&longs;que ad nouem inclu&longs;iuè. 3567 3568 & quando ait, alium numerum cogno­&longs;cere multiplicatum, &longs;ignificat vtile valdè e&longs;&longs;e ad quotidianum v&longs;um cogno&longs;cere, quemnam numerum producant numeri capitales, &longs;i ad inuicem multiplicentur, quamuis huiu&longs;modi co­gnitio facilis, ac leuis &longs;it: qua de cau&longs;a vide­mus v&longs;que in hanc diem pueros diu in Abaco memoriter perdi&longs;cen­do detineri.

3569 3570 Ex Primo Elenchorum.

3571 3572

3573 3574 83

3575 3576 3577 Cap. 10. (Nam p&longs;eudograpbiæ non contentio&longs;æ (&longs;ecundum enim ea, quæ &longs;ub arte &longs;unt, captio&longs;æ &longs;unt ratiocinationes) neque &longs;i aliqua e&longs;t p&longs;eudogra­phia circa verum, vt Hippocratis quadratura, quæ per lunulas, &longs;ed, vt Bry&longs;&longs;o quadrauit circulum; & tamet&longs;i quadretur circulus, quia tamen non &longs;ecundum rem, ideo &longs;ophi&longs;ticus) qua ratione Hippocrates orbi quadrum exhibere æquale tentauerit, explicatum e&longs;t abundè in 2. Priorum cap. 3578 3579 3580 31. & quo itidem modo Bry&longs;&longs;o lib. 3581 3582 1. Po&longs;ter. tex. 23. &longs;olummodo id hoc loco no­tandum per p&longs;eudographiam intelligere, vt apertè etiam inferius explicat, Geometricam demon&longs;trationem fallacem, eò quod demon&longs;trationes geo­metricæ fiant adhibitis de&longs;criptionibus, &longs;eu figurationibus: p&longs;endographia autem latinè idem e&longs;t, ac fal&longs;a de&longs;criptio; quemadmodum è contrariò, &longs;i­cuti &longs;upra in Topicis, & alibi ob&longs;eruaui, per de&longs;cribere intelligit geometri­cè demon&longs;trare, & per de&longs;criptiones intelligit demon&longs;trationes geometri­cas. 3583 3584 3585 3586 Qua ratione item Hippocrates ex ijs, quæ &longs;ub arte Geometriæ &longs;unt, procederet ibi dictum e&longs;t, propter quod non e&longs;t contentio&longs;a, quamuis fallax ip&longs;ius demon&longs;tratio: appellat enim Ari&longs;t illas demon&longs;trationes contentio­&longs;as, quæ non procedunt ex proprijs illius &longs;cientiæ, in qua fiunt, &longs;ed ex com­munibus alijs &longs;cientijs: captio&longs;as verò, & &longs;ophi&longs;ticas, quæ ex proprijs &longs;cien­tiæ, in qua fiunt, decipiunt. 3587 3588 At verò demon&longs;tratio, &longs;eu p&longs;eudographia Bry&longs;­&longs;onis erat contentio&longs;a, quia ex communibus, & extra Geometriam petitis argumentabatur: quemadmodum ibi explicatum e&longs;t.

3589 3590

3591 3592 84

3593 3594 Eodem cap. (Quadratura per lunulas non contentio&longs;a) inquit Hippocratis tetragoni&longs;mum, de quo in 2. Priorum, quæ non contentio&longs;a dicitur, quia ex proprijs Geometriæ deducebatur.

3595 3596

3597 3598 85

3599 3600 Ibidem (Bry&longs;&longs;onis autem contentio&longs;a: & illam quidem non e&longs;t transferre, ni&longs;i ad Geometriam &longs;olum; eo quod ex proprijs &longs;it principijs) quando ait (& illam qui­dem) intelligit quadrationem Hippocratis. 3601 3602 vide 2. Prior cap. 3603 3604 31. & quæ pau­lo ante in præcedentibus locis diximus.

3605 3606

3607 3608 86

3609 3610 Ibidem (Hanc autem ad plures) intelligit tetragoni&longs;mum Bry&longs;&longs;onis, qui per communia deducebatur. 3611 3612 lege &longs;uperius dicta in præcedentibus locis hu­ius capituli.

3613 3614

3615 3616 87

3617 3618 Ad &longs;inem cap. (Aut vt Antiphon quadra­uit) &longs;imile peccatum pecca&longs;&longs;e Antiphon­tem in orbe quadrando, ac Hippocratem, Ari&longs;t. 3619 3620 his verbis videtur &longs;ignificare, ide&longs;t, ip&longs;um, quamuis ex proprijs Geometriæ, fal&longs;is tamen ratiocinatum e&longs;&longs;e. 3621 3622 Cæterum Antiphontem in hunc modum orbem ad quadrum redigere tenta&longs;&longs;e, tradit Simpli­cius. 3623 3624 circulo quadrando in&longs;cribebat pri­mò quadratum A B C D. deinde in &longs;ingu­lis quatuor &longs;egmentis in&longs;cribebat totidem trigona æquilatera, vt patet in ad&longs;cripta figura. 3625 3626 po&longs;tea &longs;uper &longs;ingula latera horum triangulorum in reliquis &longs;egmen­tis in&longs;cribebat adhuc triangula &longs;imilia triangulo A I E. alia in&longs;uper trigona &longs;uper latera i&longs;torum con&longs;tituebat, donec ambitus figuræ illius multilateræ in circulo delinearæ, circumferentiæ circuli aptaretur. 3627 3628 quod fieri po&longs;&longs;e ille falsò contra Geometriæ principia a&longs;&longs;umebat; e&longs;t enim principium Geome­tricum continuum e&longs;&longs;e diui&longs;ibile in infinitum, neque per diui&longs;ionem ab&longs;umi po&longs;&longs;e; cui principio aduer&longs;atur, dum putat &longs;e con&longs;umpturum rotum circu­lum, diuidendo illud in triangula &longs;emper minora; vel quia putat, lineam curuam con&longs;tare ex minimis lineis rectis. 3629 3630 Similiter igitur atque Hippocra­res errauit, qúi pariter in Geometria fallebatur: Antiphon quidem contra principia illius: Hippocrates verò a&longs;&longs;umens fal&longs;i quidpiam in Geometria. 3631 3632 At Bry&longs;&longs;o, eo quod per communia alijs &longs;cientijs deduceret ratiocinatio­nem propterea p&longs;eudographia Antiphontis non litigio&longs;a quidem, &longs;ed tamen fallax extitit, non enim per communia alijs &longs;cientijs procedat; vnde nec transferri poterat ip&longs;ius fal&longs;a de­&longs;criptio, &longs;eu demon&longs;tratio extra Geometriæ li­mites, quod cau&longs;a e&longs;t contentionis.

3633 3634 Logicorum locorum finis.

3635 3636 EX PRIMO LIBROPHYSICORVM.

3637 3638 88

3639 3640 Tex. 11. (Simul autem neque conuenit omnia &longs;oluere', &longs;ed quæcunque ex principijs aliquis demon&longs;trans mentitur; quæcunque verò non, minimè: vt tetragoni&longs;mum, eum quidem, qui per &longs;ectiones Geometrici est di&longs;­&longs;oluere: illum autem, qui Antiphontis non Geometrici e&longs;t) Tetrago­ni&longs;mum, &longs;eu circuli quadraturam per &longs;ectiones, e&longs;&longs;e illam Hip­pocratis Chij exi&longs;timant græci expo&longs;itores, qui per lunulas, quas Ari&longs;t. &longs;e­ctiones appellat, orbem quadrare tentabat. 3641 3642 Eius den on&longs;trationem expli­caui ad cap. 3643 3644 31. de Abductione in 2. Priorum, quam inibi videas. 3645 3646 hoc &longs;olum hic notandum pertinere ad Geometram, ip&longs;am refellere, quia ex fal&longs;a qua­dam præmi&longs;&longs;a ex Geometria de&longs;umpta, ratiocinabatur, idcirco debet (in­quit Ari&longs;t.) Geometra illius deceptionem inuenire. 3647 3648 Tetragoni&longs;mum autem Antiphontis non e&longs;t Geometræ confutare, quia aduer&longs;abatur principijs Geo­metriæ, &longs;upponebat enim circuli circumferentiam ex indiuiduis, minimisque; lineis rectis componi: cuius fal&longs;am demon&longs;trationem explicatam inuenies ad cap. 3649 3650 10. primi Elench. po&longs;&longs;umus addere tertiam rationem quia &longs;cilicet Hippocrates non procedebat per communia alijs &longs;cientijs, vt videre e&longs;t ad tex. 23. primi Po&longs;ter. cap. 3651 3652 8. vbi ip&longs;ius p&longs;eudographiam expo&longs;ui. Quemad­modum igitur Geometra di&longs;&longs;oluit fal&longs;as tantummodo rationes eas, quæ &longs;er­uatis Geometricis principijs procedunt; non autem eas, quæ Geometriæ principia conuellunt: ita Phy&longs;ico non incumbit contra Parmenidem, ac Me­li&longs;&longs;um naturæ principia de&longs;truentes di&longs;ceptare, aut fallaces eorum rationes coarguere. 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 Hoc volebat Ari&longs;toteles inferre.

3659 3660 Ex Secundo Phy&longs;icorum.

3661 3662

3663 3664 89

3665 3666 Tex. 20. (Geometria enim de phy&longs;ica linea con&longs;iderat, &longs;ed non quatenus e&longs;t phy&longs;ici: Per&longs;pectiua autem mathematicam quidem lineam, &longs;ed non quatenus phy&longs;ica e&longs;t) quamuis textus hic non pertineat ad Mathe­maticum, libuit tamen illum in ordinem no&longs;trum recen&longs;ere, ope­ræpretium etenim e&longs;t ea, quæ in ip&longs;o continentur à nonnullis recentioribus rectè intelligi, vt ab his moniti, ab inani quadam optices impugnatione ab­&longs;tineant, ac tandem ex Ari&longs;t. 3667 3668 lineas illas vi&longs;uales quas ip&longs;i de medio tollunt, per&longs;picuè videant. 3669 3670 cætera, quæ in præcedentibus locis Ari&longs;t. 3671 3672 de Natura Ma­thematicarum habet, &longs;unt præter no&longs;trum in&longs;titutum.

3673 3674

3675 3676 90

3677 3678 Tex. 28. (Alio autem modo, &longs;orma, & exemplum: bæc autem e&longs;t ratio ip&longs;ius, quod quid erat e&longs;&longs;e, & huius genera, vt ip&longs;ius diapa&longs;on duo ad vnum, & omnino numerus, & partes, quæ in ratione &longs;unt) vt benè intelligas, quod in præ&longs;enti textu mathematicum e&longs;t, con&longs;ule prius, quæ &longs;crip&longs;i ad tex. 1. cap. 3679 3680 primi 2. Po­&longs;ter. &longs;uper verba illa (Quid e&longs;t con&longs;onantia?) vbi per&longs;picuè videbis, cur con­&longs;onantiæ, quæ dicitur Diapa&longs;on, e&longs;&longs;entia, & definitio &longs;it ip&longs;a proportio dupla, quæ &longs;ub his num. 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 2.1. continetur: quibus per&longs;pectis facilis erit phy&longs;ico totius loci intelligentia.

3687 3688

3689 3690 91

3691 3692 Tex. 68. (Aut enim ad ip&longs;um quid e&longs;t, reducitur ip&longs;um propter quid in immo­bihbus, vt in Mathematicis, ad definitionem enim recti, aut commen&longs;urabilis, aut alius cuiu&longs;piam reducitur vltimum) ex his manife&longs;tè videas Mathematicas de­mon&longs;trare per cau&longs;am formalem, cum cau&longs;am ip&longs;am ad ip&longs;um quid e&longs;t, ide&longs;t, ad definitionem reducant. 3693 3694 quorum exempla in logicis ex Mathematicis at­tuli: &longs;ed etiam &longs;equentis loci exemplum de triangulo idem apertè manife­&longs;tat; in quo probat duos angulos A C B, A C D, e&longs;&longs;e rectos, ex definitione ip&longs;orum, &longs;iue ex definitione lineæ perpendicularis A C, quod idem e&longs;t.

3695 3696

3697 3698 92

3699 3700 Tex 89. (E&longs;t autem nece&longs;&longs;arium in Mathematicis, & in his, quæ &longs;ecundum natur am fiunt qua&longs;i eodem modo; quoniam enim hocrectum e&longs;t, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t, trian­gulum trcs angulos habere æquales duobus rectis; &longs;ed non, &longs;i hoc, illud; &longs;ed &longs;i hoc non e&longs;t, neque rectum e&longs;t.) cum animaduerterim non parum e&longs;&longs;e di&longs;&longs;en&longs;ionis, & difficultatis in exemplo hoc mathematico explicando, ita vt recentiores quidam textum hunc pro arbitratu &longs;uo perperam latinè verterint: ideò pri­mum ex græcis codicibus interpretationem hanc veram attuli. 3701 3702 deinde, quia etiam græci in exemplo mathematico enodando, vel malè, vt Simplicius; vel ob&longs;curè nimis, vt reliqui; Latini verò vel nihil, vel peius multò loquun­tur, ideò &longs;ic ego exponendum cen&longs;ui. 3703 3704 cum velit Ari&longs;t. 3705 3706 o&longs;tendere nece&longs;&longs;ita­tem, quæ in &longs;cientijs inter præmi&longs;&longs;as, &longs;cu medium, & conclu&longs;ionem reperi­tur, affert exemplum illud mathematicum &longs;ibi familiare, demon&longs;trationem &longs;cilicet illam, qua o&longs;tenditur, omne triangulum habere tres angulos æqua­les duobus rectis angulis, cuius fu&longs;i&longs;&longs;imam explicationem inuenies &longs;upra in primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3707 3708 1. quam nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t, con&longs;ulas. 3709 3710 pro medio autem huius pa&longs;&longs;ionis accipit lineam perpendicularem, quam innuit verbis illis (quoniam enim hoc rectum e&longs;t) vt in figura &longs;it triangulum A B C, &longs;itque; vt latus

A C, &longs;it perpendiculare cum latere B C, & pro­ducatur B C, in D; tunc triangulum A B C, habere tres angulos, A, B, & A C B, æquales duobus rectis planum erit: nam cum latus A C, &longs;it perpendiculare (quod Ari&longs;t. 3711 3712 dicit, cum re­ctum hoc &longs;it) erunt duo anguli deinceps A C B, A C D, recti, ex definitione lineæ perpendicu­laris, cum ergo duo anguli A, & B, externo, rectoque; A C D, &longs;int æquales per 32. primi, & reliquus angulus A C B, communis, ide&longs;t, &longs;it angulus triangu­li, & angulus vnus lineæ perpendicularis, & ideò rectus; manife&longs;tè apparet, tres angulos A, B, A C B, e&longs;&longs;e æquales nece&longs;&longs;ariò duobus rectis, ex po&longs;itio­ne illius recti, &longs;iue lateris perpendicularis, quia ex verò, verum nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;equitur; non tamen po&longs;ita hac pa&longs;&longs;ione, &longs;iue conclu&longs;ione, habere &longs;cilicet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis, nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;equitur illud e&longs;&longs;e rectum, idelt latus illud A C, e&longs;&longs;e perpendiculare ad latus B C, quia verum &longs;equi pote&longs;t ex verò, & falsò. 3713 3714 valebit tamen hæc con&longs;e quen­tia, &longs;i triangulum non habet hanc proprietatem, ne­que illud rectum e&longs;t, ide&longs;t, neque latus prædi­ctum crit perpendiculare, quia fal&longs;um non, ni&longs;i exfal&longs;o &longs;equitur.

3715 3716 Ex Tertio Phy&longs;icorum.

3717 3718

3719 3720 93

3721 3722 Tex. 26. (Et hi quidem infinitum e&longs;&longs;e par; hoc enim compræhen&longs;um, & ab impari terminatum tribuit ijs, quæ &longs;unt, infinitatem. 3723 3724 &longs;ignum autem huius id e&longs;&longs;e, quod contingit in numcris, circumpo&longs;it is enim Gnomoni­bus circa vnum, & &longs;eor&longs;um, aliquando quidcm &longs;emper aliam fieri &longs;pe­ciem, aliquando autem vnam) vt melius percipiantur ea, quæ &longs;equuntur, lege prius, quæ in cap. 3725 3726 de Motu in po&longs;t prædicamentis &longs;crip&longs;i de Gnomone, ad &longs;imilitudinem enim Gnomonis illius Geometrici, inueniuntur etiam in nu­meris Gnomones Arithmetici. 3727 3728 Pythagorici enim (à quibus i&longs;ta mutuatus e&longs;t Ari&longs;t. 3729 3730 numeros impares &longs;olos appellabant Gnomones, eò quod in for­mam normæ æquilateræ, &longs;iue Gnomonis con&longs;titui po&longs;&longs;int, vt patet in his

nimirum in ternario, quinario, &longs;eptenario, & &longs;ic de reliquis imparibus. 3731 3732 pares autem numeri, quia ne­queunt in figuram normæ æquilateræ di&longs;poni, cum non habeant vnitatem pro angulo, & paria po&longs;tea la­tera, vt oportet, non merentur appellari Gnomones, vt quaternarius, &longs;i di­&longs;ponatur &longs;ic
non refert Gnomonem, quia lateribus in&ecedil;qualibus con­&longs;tat; neque &longs;i hoc modo
quia dee&longs;t huic figuræ angularis vnitas, quæ illi nece&longs;iaria e&longs;t. 3733 3734 Pythagorici igitur dicebant, numerum parem ideò e&longs;&longs;e infinitum ip&longs;um, quia videbant ip&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e cau&longs;am perpetuæ diui&longs;ionis, cum quælibet res quanta &longs;it diui&longs;ibilis bifariam, ide&longs;t in duo &longs;ecundum numerum parem, & &longs;ubdiui&longs;ibilis po&longs;tea bifariam, & &longs;ic in infinitum, vt de linea pro­blematicè probatur in 10. primi Elem. 3735 3736 quamuis theorematicè &longs;it axioma. 3737 3738 hunc porrò numerum parem dicebant terminatum e&longs;&longs;e ab impari, quia ori­tur ex diui&longs;ione cuiu&longs;uis rei, quæ vna &longs;it, &longs;umentes vnitatem pro impari. 3739 3740 &longs;ignum præterea huius finitatis ab impari, & infinitatis à pari numero pro­cedentis, aiunt e&longs;&longs;e Gnomones, numeros &longs;cilicet impares: Gnomones enim, ide&longs;t impares numeri vnitati additi, producunt eandem perpetuò numero­rum formam, videlicet quadratum: at verò è contrariò numeri pares vni­tati additi, conflant perpetuò varias numerorum formas: quapropter vi­dentur numeri impares e&longs;&longs;e finitatis cau&longs;a; &longs;icut pares exaduersò infinitatis principium. 3741 3742 quæ vt melius intelligas, declaranda e&longs;t 26. propo&longs;. 3743 3744 7. Arith­metices lordani, vbi i&longs;tud idem demon&longs;trat, quæ e&longs;t hæc. 3745 3746 &longs;it vnitas, & &longs;uo or­dine &longs;equantur impares, vt in &longs;equenti hac &longs;erie apparet 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. & c.
&longs;i igitur vnitati addatur ternarius in Gnomo­nis modum, vt vides in prima figura, produ­cetur quaternarius numerus, qui e&longs;t numerus quadratus (quid &longs;it quadratus numerus expli­caui in Logicis tex. 9. primi Po&longs;ter.) etfi huic quaternario addatur &longs;equens impar, qui e&longs;t quinarius in modum Gnomonis, vt in &longs;ecundafigura, &longs;it numerus nouenarius, qui pariter e&longs;t quadratus. 3747 3748 3749 3750 et&longs;i huic &longs;imiliter addatur &longs;e quens impar, nimirum &longs;eptenarius, conflabitur &longs;edenarius, qui numerus pariter quadratus e&longs;t, vt in tertia figura, & hoc modo, &longs;i in infini­tum procedatur, numeri &longs;emper quadrati progignentur. 3751 3752 Vides igitur, qui ratione Gnomonum, &longs;iue imparium additione fiat &longs;emper eadem &longs;pecies, &longs;cilicet quadratus numerus, quod &longs;ignum e&longs;t, inquiunt, imparem numerum non infinitatis, &longs;ed finitatis e&longs;&longs;e auctorem. 3753 3754 Po&longs;t prædictam 26. propo&longs;itio­nem Iotdani, &longs;unt aliquot propo&longs;itiones, quarum &longs;umma hæc e&longs;t: &longs;i pares numeri ab vnitate coaceruentur; coaceruati erunt &longs;emper variæ formæ nu­merorum. 3755 3756 quæ &longs;ic explicantur: &longs;int ab vnitate pares di&longs;po&longs;iti ordinatim hoc modo, 1. 2. 4. 6. &c. 3757 3758 &longs;i igitur vnitati binarius coaceruetur, fit numerus
triangularis, vt in prima figura. 3759 3760 &longs;i huic ternario coaceruetur &longs;equens par, fiet altera &longs;pecies, ni­mirum hexagonus numerus, vt in &longs;ecunda figu­ra. 3761 3762 cui &longs;i &longs;equens addatur par, &longs;cilicet &longs;enarius, fiet iterum noua numeri forma, v. g. 3763 3764 3765 3766 dodecago­nus, vt in tertia figura. 3767 3768 & &longs;ic &longs;emper in infinitum nouæ ac variæ numerorum formæ ex hac additione parium prouenient, quod argumento e&longs;t numerum parem infiniti naturam &longs;apere. 3769 3770 Porrò reperiri numeros triangulares, pen­tagonos, & &longs;imiles, con&longs;tat ex Arithmetica Nicomachi, Boetij, & Iordani, citati in definitionibus 7. &longs;uæ Arithmeticæ, atque ex tractatu Diophantis Alex. de numeris rectangulis. 3771 3772 atque ex his locus hic &longs;atis clarus redditur.

3773 3774

3775 3776 94

3777 3778 Tex. 31. (Vtuntur etiam Mathematici infinito) aliquando Mathematici du­cunt lineas quantumuis longas, &longs;eu indefinitæ longitudinis, quas etiam in­finitas appellant: & hoc modo vtuntur infinito, vt infra tex. 71. ip&longs;e Ari&longs;t. exponit. 3779 3780 3781 3782 alio præterea modo vtuntur infinito, vt quando &longs;upponunt data quauis quantitate po&longs;&longs;e &longs;umi maiorem, vel etiam minorem in infinitum, vt patet ex 6. po&longs;tulato primi Elem. 3783 3784 editionis Clauianæ. 3785 3786 numerum quoque au­geri po&longs;&longs;e in infinitum, e&longs;t &longs;ecundum po&longs;tulatum libri 7. Elem. 3787 3788 vel demum quando probant quamlibet lineam po&longs;&longs;e diuidi bifariam, quia hinc &longs;equitur po&longs;&longs;e &longs;ub diuidi in infinitum; his igitur modis Mathematicis infinitum in v&longs;u e&longs;t.

3789 3790

3791 3792 95

3793 3794 Tex. 68. & 69. plura de magnitudine, & numero continent; &longs;ed quæ non indigeant opera no&longs;tra.

3795 3796

3797 3798 96

3799 3800 Tex. 71. (Non remouet autem ratio Mathematicos à contemplatione auferens &longs;ic e&longs;&longs;e infinitum, vt actu &longs;it ver&longs;us augmentum, vt intran&longs;ibile, ncque enim nunc in­digent infinito, neque vtuntur, &longs;ed &longs;olum e&longs;&longs;e quantumcunque velint finitam) ratio phy&longs;ica tollens infinitum actu, non e&longs;t Mathematicis impedimento, quia ip&longs;i non vtuntur infinito actu; quam enim ip&longs;i ducunt lineam infinitam, non e&longs;t verè infinita, &longs;ed indefinita, eam enim quantumlibet magnam producunt, vt po&longs;&longs;it ad demon&longs;trandum &longs;ufficere.

3801 3802 Ex Quarto Phy&longs;icorum.

3803 3804

3805 3806 97

3807 3808 Tex. 120. ter in hoc textu meminit commen&longs;urabilitatis, & incommen­&longs;urabilitatis, quæ e&longs;t diametri ad co&longs;tam: cuius explicationem vide primo Priorum, &longs;ecto primo, cap. 3809 3810 23.

3811 3812 Ex Quinto Phy&longs;icorum.

3813 3814

3815 3816 98

3817 3818 Tex. 6. (Vt media grauis ad vltimam, & acuta ad primam) alludit ad or­dinem chordarum in mu&longs;icis in&longs;trumentis, vbi media chorda edit &longs;o­num, re&longs;pectu quidem vltimæ, & &longs;upremæ chordæ grauem: re&longs;pectu verò primæ, & infimæ acutum.

3819 3820 Ex Octauo Phy&longs;icorum.

3821 3822

3823 3824 99

3825 3826 Tex. 15. (Etenim triangulus habet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis)lib. 3827 3828 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3829 3830 1. huius rei explicationem reperies.

3831 3832 EX PRIMO DE COELO.

3833 3834

3835 3836 100

3837 3838 Tex. 33. (Vt &longs;i quis minimam quădam e&longs;&longs;e dicat magnitudinem, hic enim minimum introducens, maxima vbique amoueret mathematicorŭ) ide&longs;t, &longs;i quis, vt Democritus po&longs;uerit in magnitudinibus e&longs;&longs;e minima, &longs;eu indiui&longs;ibilia, ex quibus entia mathematica componerentur, hic euerteret maxima mathematicorum, ide&longs;t maxime ip&longs;orum demon&longs;tra­tiones, atque etiam effata euerterentur: v. g. 10. primi Elem. 3839 3840 quæ docet quamlibet lineam po&longs;&longs;e diuidi bifariam nulla e&longs;&longs;et, quia linea illa, quæ con­&longs;taret ex tribus Democriti atomis, nulla ratione bifariam &longs;ecari po&longs;&longs;et. 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 pa­riter totus ferè decimus liber Elem. 3847 3848 deceptiuus, & nullus e&longs;&longs;et, &longs;i enim da­rentur illæ atomi, ex quibus quantitas conflaretur, nullæ e&longs;&longs;ent lineæ incom­men&longs;urabiles, quandoquidem omnes communi illa, ac indiuidua, commen­&longs;urarentur. 3849 3850 po&longs;tulatum quoque illud, qualibet data magnitudine &longs;umi po&longs;&longs;e minorem pror&longs;us irritum redderetur, quia data atomo, illa minor accipi non po&longs;&longs;et.

3851 3852

3853 3854 101

3855 3856 Tex. 36. (Sit itaque linea, in qua A G E, infinita ad partes E; & alia vtrinque infinita, in qua b B; &longs;i itaque de&longs;cribat circulum linea A G E, cir ca centrum G, fe-

retur circulariter linea A G E, &longs;ecans ali­quando lineam b B, tempore finito; totum enim tempus, in quo circulariter latum e&longs;t Cœlum finitum e&longs;t, & ablatum igitur, quo &longs;ecans ferebatur; erit igitur aliqued prmcipium, quo primum linea A G E, li­neam b B, &longs;ecuit. 3857 3858 &longs;ed impo&longs;&longs;ibile est; non est igitur circulariter verti infinitum, quare neque mundum, &longs;i e&longs;&longs;et infinitus) quamuis textus hic parum &longs;it mathematicus, quia tamen &longs;upponit figuram mathe­maticam, quæ in codicibus pariter, ac commentarijs de&longs;ideratur, illam pla­cuit apponere. 3859 3860 in qua quidem, quamuis duæ lineæ infinitæ &longs;upponantur, vna ad alteram tantum partem in qua E: altera verò ad vtramque partem b, & B, non potuerunt tamen de&longs;cribi, ni&longs;i finitæ; appo&longs;itæ idcircò &longs;unt ad partes illas, ad quas deberent e&longs;&longs;e infinitæ lineolæ quædam infinitatem indicantes. 3861 3862 debemus po&longs;tea, vt mentem Ari&longs;t. 3863 3864 percipiamus concipere lineam A G E, moueri circulariter facto centro in G. quæ quia infinita &longs;upponitur ad par­tem E, &longs;ecabit nece&longs;&longs;ariò alteram vtrinque infinitam b B, illamque; nece&longs;&longs;ariò finito tempore percurret, finito enim tempore tota mundi circulatio per­agitur, &longs;patio videlicet viginti quatuor horarum. 3865 3866 ex quo Ari&longs;t. 3867 3868 infert mun­dum non po&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;e infinitæ magnitudinis; quia &longs;i mundus e&longs;&longs;et infinitus; &. 3869 3870 duæ lineæ infinitæ, quales &longs;unt prædictæ in ip&longs;o, atque cum ip&longs;o moueri alte­ra earum A E, intelligatur, alteram b B, manentem in tempore finito, ide&longs;t, in diurna conuer&longs;ione pertran&longs;ibit: fieri autem nequit, vt infinita magni­tudo finito tempore percurratur; quare dicendum e&longs;t, mundum e&longs;&longs;e finita magnitudine præditum.

3871 3872

3873 3874 102

3875 3876 Tex. 48. (Nihil autem refert grauitates, commen&longs;urabiles &longs;int, an incommen­&longs;ur abiles) quidnam &longs;it commen&longs;urabilitas, & incommen&longs;urabilitas, expli­catum e&longs;t lib. 3877 3878 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 3879 3880 23.

3881 3882

3883 3884 103

3885 3886 Tex. 119. (Est autem impo&longs;&longs;ibile, & po&longs;&longs;ibile; fal&longs;um, & verum, ex &longs;uppo&longs;itio­ne quidem, dico autem, vt triangulum impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t duos rectos habere, &longs;i hæc)ide&longs;t, &longs;i &longs;upponantur fal&longs;a quædam, quæ &longs;upponi po&longs;&longs;unt, &longs;equetur impo&longs;&longs;i­bile e&longs;&longs;e triangulum habere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis, vi­de, quæ &longs;crip&longs;i lib. 3887 3888 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3889 3890 1. de hoc, quod e&longs;t, habere tres angulos æquales duobus rectis. 3891 3892 v. g. &longs;i in triangulo pag. 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 73. producto late­re A C, in D. &longs;i &longs;upponatur externus angulus B C D, non e&longs;&longs;e æqualis duobus internis, & oppofitis A, & B, nunquam poterimus eo modo, quo Euclides, demon&longs;trare pa&longs;&longs;ionem prædictam de triangulo A B C. huiu&longs;modi impo&longs;&longs;i­bile, cuius oppo&longs;itum non &longs;olum po&longs;&longs;ibile, &longs;ed etiam nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t, vocat Ari&longs;t. 3899 3900 impo&longs;&longs;ibile ex &longs;uppo&longs;itione, quia &longs;cilicet impo&longs;&longs;ibile euadit ex quo­dam fal&longs;o &longs;uo &longs;uppo&longs;ito, vt in allato exemplo, triangulum habere tres an­gulos æquales duobus rectis, quamuis nece&longs;&longs;arium &longs;it, tamen ex fal&longs;a &longs;up­po&longs;itione, impo&longs;&longs;ibile oua&longs;it.

3901 3902

3903 3904 104

3905 3906 Ibidem (Et diameter commen&longs;urabilis est co&longs;tæ, &longs;i bæc) vide primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3907 3908 23. hoc &longs;olum nunc addendum (Si hæc) v. g. &longs;i &longs;upponamus li­neas e&longs;&longs;e compo&longs;itas ex indiui&longs;ibilibus, con&longs;ectarium erit diametrum e&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;urabilem co&longs;tæ, quia indiui&longs;ibile illud, ex quo vtraque linea con­&longs;tat, erit vtriu&longs;que men&longs;ura communis. 3909 3910 3911 3912

3913 3914 Ex Secundo de Cælo.

3915 3916

3917 3918 105

3919 3920 Tex. 24. (Amplius qui &longs;olida diuidunt in plana, atque ex planis corpora generant, his te&longs;tes fui&longs;&longs;e videntur: &longs;olam enim figurarum &longs;olidarum &longs;phæram non diuidunt, vt non plures &longs;uperficies. 3921 3922 quam vnam habenum. 3923 3924 diui&longs;io enim in plana non perinde e&longs;&longs;icitur, vt qui&longs;piam diuidens in par­tes diuidat totum, &longs;ed vt in &longs;pecie diuer&longs;a: patct igitur &longs;phæram e&longs;&longs;e &longs;olidarum primam) qui &longs;olida diuidunt in plana, ca diuidunt &longs;ecundum numerum &longs;uper­&longs;icierum, quibus ambiuntur, v. g. diuidunt cubum in &longs;ex &longs;uperficies, quia cubus &longs;ex quadratis planis &longs;uperficiebus continetur: qua ratione nequcunt &longs;ohæram in plana vlla re&longs;oluere, neque in alias plures &longs;uperficies, quia &longs;phæ­ra ambitur vnica tantum &longs;uperficie &longs;phærica. 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 quando verò ex planis corpo­ra generant, vt facit Plato in Timæo, accipíunt primò triangulum æquila­terum, & ex quatuor triangulis æquilateris &longs;imul compactis conficiunt py­ramidem; & hoc modo alia &longs;olida à pluribus &longs;uperficiebus ambita con&longs;ti­tuunt: verum hac ratione nullo modo po&longs;&longs;unt &longs;phæram componere, quia vnica tantum, eaque; &longs;phærica &longs;uperficie compræhenditur: atque hoc pacto i&longs;ti diuidentes, & componentes corpora fidem faciunt, &longs;phæram, cum ex nullis componatur, &longs;olidorum e&longs;&longs;e primam.

3931 3932

3933 3934 106

3935 3936 Tex. 25. (Est autem, & &longs;ecundum numerorum ordinem a&longs;&longs;ignantibus, &longs;ic po­nentibus rationabili&longs;&longs;imam, circulum quidem &longs;ecundum vnum; triangulum autem &longs;ecundum dualitatem, quoniam duo recti. 3937 3938 &longs;i autem &longs;ecundum triangulum, vnum. 3939 3940 circulus non erit figura) In ordine figurarum conueniens e&longs;t, inquit, primam facere circulum propter &longs;implici&longs;simam ip&longs;ius naturam, cum vnica, ac per­fecta circulari linea comprehendatur: Triangulum verò &longs;ecundam, quoniam duo anguli recti, ide&longs;t, quia triangulum habet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis; quod fusè explicatnm e&longs;t lib. 3941 3942 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 3943 3944 1. De­mum &longs;i primum locum dederimus triangulo, nullus alius remanet pro cir­culo, quod e&longs;t inconueniens, ergo circulus prima figura erit.

3945 3946

3947 3948 107

3949 3950 Tex. 31. (At verò, quod aquæ &longs;uperficies talis &longs;it, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t hac &longs;uppo&longs;i­tione &longs;umpta, quod apta natura e&longs;t &longs;emper confluere aqua ad magis concauum: ma­gis autem concauum e&longs;t, quod centro propinquius est. 3951 3952 ducantur ergo ex centro A,

linea A B, & linea A C, & producatur, in qua B C, ducta igitur ad ba&longs;im linea, in qua A D, minor e&longs;t eis, quæ ex centro. 3953 3954 magis igitur concauus locus e&longs;t, quare influet aqua, donec vtique æquetur. 3955 3956 æqualis e&longs;t autem eis, quæ ex centro linea A E, quare nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t apud eas, quæ ex centro, e&longs;&longs;e aquam, tunc enim quie&longs;cet. 3957 3958 linea autem, quæ eas, quæ ex centro tangit, circularis e&longs;t, &longs;phærica igitur aquæ &longs;uperficies e&longs;t, in qua B E C.) toto hoc textu lineari demon&longs;tratione probat aquæ manen­tis &longs;uperficiem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam: quæ demon&longs;tratio per&longs;picua euadit, &longs;i &longs;igura, quæ in codicibus tam græcis, quam latinis, atque etiam in commentarijs de&longs;ideratur, quemadmo­dum fecimus, re&longs;tituatur. 3959 3960 &longs;it igitur in præcedenti figura A, centrum mundi, ex quo educantur duæ rectæ lineæ æquales A B, A C, quæ deinde alia recta B C, coniungantur. 3961 3962 educatur quoque recta alia ex centro A, quæ pertingat ad B C, quæ ba&longs;is e&longs;t trianguli B A C, & producatur vlterius quantumlibet in E. intelligatur demum circumferentia tran&longs;ire per puncta B, & C, quia illæ duæ lineæ A B, A C, &longs;unt æquales, quæ circumferentia alteram A D, quæ fuit protracta, &longs;ecet in E. 3963 3964 Iam &longs;ic argumentatur: aqua natura &longs;ua &longs;emper de&longs;luit ad locum magis concauum, ide&longs;t, ad loca centro A, terræ propin­quiora, quale e&longs;&longs;et in figura locus D, re&longs;pectu locorum B, & C, quia A D, linea minor e&longs;t ijs, quæ ex centro eductæ &longs;unt A B, A C. quapropter aqua debet de&longs;luere ex B, ad D, vel ex C, ad idem D, donec pertingat ad E. qui locus non e&longs;t decliuior punctis B, & C. quare cum loca B, E, C, quæ &longs;unt ex­trema linearum, &longs;int æquè decliuia, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t aquæ &longs;uperficiem apud ip&longs;a con&longs;i&longs;tere, tunc enim debet quie&longs;cere, aliter nunquam quie&longs;ceret; &longs;ed vide­mus aquam manentem, & quietam, ergo quie&longs;cit circa puncta B, E, C, à centro terræ æquidi&longs;tantia, per quæ tran&longs;it linea circularis coniungens illa; et&longs;i &longs;uperficies per eiu&longs;modi loca pertran&longs;iret, e&longs;&longs;et &longs;phærica: &longs;ed &longs;uper&longs;i­cies aquæ tran&longs;it per talia loca, ergo &longs;phærica e&longs;t. 3965 3966 Huius etiam habes acu­ti&longs;&longs;imam Archimedis demon&longs;trationem initio libelli de ijs, quæ vehuntur in aqua, quam in &longs;uam &longs;phæram retulit Clauius.

3967 3968

3969 3970 108

3971 3972 Tex. 46. (Reliquum e&longs;t orbes quidem moueri, stellas verò quie&longs;cere, & infixas ip&longs;is orbibus ferri; &longs;olum enim &longs;ic nullum ab&longs;urdum accidit. 3973 3974 celeriorem enim e&longs;&longs;e maioris circuli velocitatem, rationabile e&longs;t circa idem centrum infixis: vt enim in alijs maius corpus velocius fertur propria latione, &longs;ic, & in circularibus: maius enim e&longs;t eorum, quæ auferuntur ab eis, quæ ex centro, maioris circuli &longs;egmentum)ex intellectione vltimæ periodi textus totius intelligentia pendet: &longs;it igitur

figura præ&longs;ens, in qua cum &longs;int duo circuli concen­trici, vnus altero maior, eductæque; &longs;int ex centro duæ &longs;emidiametri A D, A E, quæ vtrunque circulum &longs;e­cant, apparet maius e&longs;&longs;e &longs;egmentum D E, quod è ma­iori circulo &longs;emidiametri ex centro eductæ auferunt, quam &longs;egmentum B C, minoris circuli, quod ei&longs;dem &longs;emidia metris intercipitur. 3975 3976 Verumtamen &longs;i circuli ambo &longs;imul moueantur, maior circulus æquali tem­pore maius illud &longs;patium D E, & minor minus B C, pertran&longs;ibit: idem igitur de cœle&longs;tibus orbibus di­cendum, qui quamuis omnes diurnum &longs;imul motum ab&longs;oluunt, maiores tamen celerius conuertuntur: quo fit, vt &longs;tellæ maiori­bus circulis infixæ, atque delatæ, maiori celeritate &longs;uos cur&longs;us peragant, ne­que oportet eas, dum mouentur cœlum di&longs;&longs;ecare, quod accideret, &longs;i pro­prio motu veluti pri&longs;ces per aquam progrederentur.

3977 3978 Hæc quidem Ari&longs;t. 3979 3980 con&longs;entanea ob&longs;eruationibus veterum A&longs;tronomo­rum; at verò illis no&longs;træ ætatis ob&longs;eruationes repugnant; præ&longs;ertim illæ, quæ fiunt circa &longs;tellas errantes: ex quibus fatendum e&longs;&longs;e videtur, Cœlum, qua parte Planetas continet, liquidum e&longs;&longs;e, ac per illud Planetas proprio motu, ceu pi&longs;ces in aqua progredi. 3981 3982 Tycho namque Brahe, alijque; plures exactè demon&longs;trant Cometas in regione Planetarum e&longs;&longs;e, eosque; motu quodam in tran&longs;uer&longs;um moueri, quo nece&longs;&longs;ario C&ecedil;lú deberent perforare; ijdem o&longs;ten­dunt nonnullos Planetas, Martem præ&longs;ertim, ac Venerem modo &longs;upra So­lem, modo infra a&longs;cendere, & de&longs;cendere. 3983 3984 Idem patet ex ob&longs;eruatione no­ua per nouum Tele&longs;copij i &longs;trumentum in Venere facta, quæ lunulata vtrinque à Sole apparet: quando nimirum e&longs;t in imo epicyclo. 3985 3986 iterumque; rotunda ve­luti Luna plena, cum in &longs;ummo epicyclo ver&longs;atur: quæ minimè apparerent, ni&longs;i &longs;upra, ac infra Solem circumiret. 3987 3988 His rationibus conantur ip&longs;i proba­re Cœlum e&longs;&longs;e liquidum; atque in eo Planetas, veluti aues in aere, permearc: quarum &longs;olutio mihi nulla occurrit, alijs forta&longs;&longs;is occurrct.

3989 3990

3991 3992 109

3993 3994 Tex. 57. (De ordine autem ip&longs;orum, quo quidem modo &longs;ingula di&longs;ponantur, vt quædam &longs;int priora, quædam posteriora, & quomodo &longs;patijs &longs;e ăhabeant ad inuicem,ex ijs circa A&longs;trologiam, con&longs;ideretur: dicitur enim &longs;ufficienter) &longs;umit hoc loco A&longs;trologiam, pro A&longs;tronomia, &longs;i iuxta recentiores loqui velimus. 3995 3996 Dicit igi­tur ordinem cœlorum, ac &longs;yderum, item &longs;itum, & proportiones magnitu­dinum corundem, cum per naturalis &longs;cientiæ princip ia &longs;ciri nequeant, ex rationibus A&longs;tronomorum petenda e&longs;&longs;e, apud quos i&longs;ta &longs;ufficienter demon­&longs;trentur. 3997 3998 & meritò quidem hæc dicuntur; po&longs;teriores enim ab Ari&longs;t. 3999 4000 ordines, &longs;itus, ac magnitudines tam cœlorum, quam &longs;yderum firmis rationibus, atque inuentu peracutis demon&longs;trarunt. 4001 4002 quorum princeps fuit ptolæmeus; no&longs;tra tamen ætate Tycho Brahe, qui certis ob&longs;eruationibus, quas maximo labo­re, ac &longs;umptu exantlauit, in nonnullis à Ptolæmeo, ac reliquis di&longs;&longs;entjt: &longs;tan­dum autem e&longs;&longs;e recentioribus ob&longs;eruationibus apud A&longs;tronomiæ peritos in confe&longs;&longs;o e&longs;t.

4003 4004

4005 4006 110

4007 4008 Tex. (Luna autem o&longs;tenditur per ea, quæ circa vi&longs;um, quod &longs;phærica &longs;it: non enim vtique fieret accre&longs;cens, & decre&longs;cens, plurimŭ quidem alter a ex parte curua, altera concaua, aut vtrmque curua, &longs;emel autem bipartita) ait per ea, quæ circa vi&longs;um, ide&longs;t per opticem probari Lunam e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam: &longs;ed con&longs;ule, quæ primo Po&longs;ter. tex. 3. de hac re &longs;crip&longs;i, & plenam etiam huius loci intelligen­tiam a&longs;&longs;equeris, præ&longs;ertim &longs;i experimentum ibi traditum inieris. 4009 4010

4011 4012

4013 4014 111

4015 4016 Ibidem (Et rur&longs;us per Astrologica, quia vtique non e&longs;&longs;ent &longs;olis eclyp&longs;es lunulæ &longs;peciem præ&longs;eferentes. 4017 4018 Quare &longs;i vnum est tale, palam e&longs;t, quod & alia vtique erunt talia) &longs;icuti præcedens &longs;phæricitatis Lunæ ratio ex Per&longs;pectiua de&longs;umpta e&longs;t, ita præ&longs;ens ex A&longs;tronomia, ex eò enim, quod eclyp&longs;is Solis habeat figuram lunulæ, ide&longs;t, &longs;i in&longs;tar Lunæ falcatæ, probant A&longs;tronomi Lunam e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæri­cam. 4019 4020 intellige tamen partem illam Solis, quæ non eclyp&longs;atur, habere figu­ram lunulæ, pars enim à Luna obumbrata non videtur, et&longs;i videretur oua­lem quandam &longs;peciem, præ&longs;eferret: pars igitur, illa e&longs;t corniculata, quia

cum Solis defectio ex interpo&longs;itione Lunæ inter nos, & Solem contingat, & Luna &longs;it &longs;phærica, nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;phæ­ricè, & circulariter Solem obumbrabit; quare pars illa non obumbrata remanet falcata, & corniculata, vt in præ&longs;enti figura vidcre e&longs;t; vbi cernis, Lunam Solem or­biculariter offu&longs;care in linea A D C, partem Solis de­tectam contentam lineis curuis A B C D, e&longs;&longs;e lunularem, & falcatam; cum ergo in hunc modum fiat Solis deli­quium, &longs;ignum certum e&longs;t, Lunam e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam.

4021 4022

4023 4024 112

4025 4026 Tex. 107. (Quod autem dubitatur, hoc e&longs;t; videre autem non e&longs;t difficile, &longs;i pa­rum con&longs;iderauerimus, & di&longs;tinxerimus, quonam modo cen&longs;eamus quantamuis ma­gnitudinem grauem ad medium ferri. 4027 4028 manife&longs;tum enim e&longs;t, quod non quou&longs;que ex­tremum tangat ip&longs;um centrum; &longs;ed maior pars vincat, oportet, quou&longs;que &longs;uo medio ip&longs;um medium compræhendat; hucn&longs;que enim habet propen&longs;ioncm) &longs;en&longs;us Ari&longs;to­telis e&longs;t, debere nos exi&longs;timare, quod &longs;i quæpiam grauis magnitudo de&longs;cen­dat ad centrum mundi, eam non perman&longs;uram, &longs;latim ac ip&longs;ius extremum centrum mundi attigent; &longs;ed cò v&longs;que de&longs;cen&longs;uram, quou&longs;que ip&longs;ius medium, mundi medium, &longs;iue centrum a&longs;&longs;equutum &longs;it; maior enim ip&longs;ius pars, in qua &longs;cilicet medium e&longs;t, minorem partem propellit, donec vtrinque à centro mundi æquè emineat; omne enim graue hucu&longs;que habet propen&longs;ionem, &longs;iue hucu&longs;que grauitat, v. g. &longs;i lapis illuc de&longs;cenderet, non quie&longs;ceret &longs;tatim ac prima ip&longs;ius pars ad mundi centrum pertingeret, &longs;ed reliquæ ip&longs;ius partes adhuc grauitarent, &longs;icque; vlterius primam partem impellerent, donec lapi­áis medium, mundi medio congrueret: quo facto lapis quie&longs;ceret. 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 quæ num vera &longs;int, vt intelligamus, oportet prius præmittere, iuxta Mathematicos duplex e&longs;&longs;e medium, &longs;iue centrum cuiu&longs;uis magnitudinis: aliud enim e&longs;t centrum molis, aliud e&longs;t centrum grauitatis. 4035 4036 centrum molis e&longs;t illud pun­ctum, à quo extrema æquidi&longs;tant: centrum grauitatis e&longs;t punctum illud, à quo extrema æque ponderant, &longs;iue à quo graue &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;um æquè ponderat, &longs;iue in æquilibrio manet. 4037 4038 Porrò in corporibus regularibus, &longs;i vnifo mia &longs;int idem, & vnum &longs;unt centrum molis, ac centrum grauitatis: vt in &longs;phæra plumbea, idem crit vtrumque centrum: &longs;i verò difformia &longs;int in grauitate, vt in &longs;phæra partim plumbea, partim lignea, diuer&longs;um erit centrum molis, à centro grauitatis; illud enim erit in medio &longs;phæræ; centrum verò graui­tatis in parte plumbea exi&longs;tet. 4039 4040 In corporibus deinde irregularibus, etiam&longs;i &longs;int vniformis ponderis, aliud tamen e&longs;&longs;e pote&longs;t centrum molis à centro gra­uitatis, vt in corpore oblongo, cuius alterum extremum &longs;it reliquis parti­bus multò maius, vti e&longs;t claua: vbi centrum molis erit in medio longitudi­nis clauæ; centrum verò grauitatis, erit propinquius capiti clauæ. 4041 4042 quando igitur Ari&longs;t. 4043 4044 ait, graue de&longs;cen&longs;urum, donec ip&longs;ius medium, &longs;iue centrum, mundi centrum attingat; benè dicit, &longs;i de medio grauitatis intelligat; ma­lè autem &longs;i de medio molis. 4045 4046 quia grauia omnia ratione centri grauitatis ponderant, neque manent; ni&longs;i ip&longs;um maneat: quare ni&longs;i ip&longs;um attingant cen­trum mundi &longs;emper grauitabunt, & mouebuntur. 4047 4048 Verum enim verò ex an­tiquorum monumentis manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, Archimedem, qui multò po&longs;t Ari­&longs;totelem floruit, primum omnium de centro grauitatis e&longs;&longs;e philo&longs;ophatum, qua ratione dicendum e&longs;&longs;et, Ari&longs;totelem de centro, molis loquutum e&longs;&longs;e, & perinde non v&longs;quequaque verè.

4049 4050

4051 4052 113

4053 4054 Tex. 109. (Præterea quoque & per ta, quæ apparent &longs;ecundum &longs;en&longs;um, neque enim Lunæ eclyp&longs;es tales haberent deci&longs;iones; nunc enim in ijs, quæ &longs;ecundum men­&longs;em fiunt, figurationibus, omnes accipit diui&longs;iones: etenim recta fit, & vtrinque curua, & concaua) probat terram e&longs;&longs;e &longs;phæricam ratione a&longs;tronomica, ex Lunæ eclyp&longs;ibus de&longs;umpta: nam ni&longs;i terra e&longs;&longs;et rotunda, nunquam Luna in eclyp&longs;i haberet tales deci&longs;iones, ide&longs;t non haberet falcatas, aut lunulatas partes illas, quæ in eclyp&longs;i ob&longs;curantur, & quafi à Luna re&longs;ecantur. 4055 4056 quam­uis enim &longs;ingulis men&longs;ibus Luna terminetur modo linea concaua, vt quan­do noua e&longs;t; modo recta, vt quando diuidua e&longs;t: modo vtrinque curua, vt cum à diuiduæad plenilunium tendit. 4057 4058 quod fu&longs;ius primo Po&longs;ter. tex. 30. ex­po&longs;ui. 4059 4060 4061 4062 in eclyp&longs;ibus tamen &longs;emper curuam habet lineam illam, quæ partem ec'yp&longs;atam de&longs;init; vt paulo po&longs;t explicabo. 4063 4064 Vide precedentem textum 59. & ca, quæ ibi annotaui, quæque tibi propo&longs;ui, & plenam huius loci intelligen­tiam a&longs;&longs;equeris. 4065 4066 vide etiam, quæ mox &longs;ubdam circa huius loci reliquum.

4067 4068

4069 4070 114

4071 4072 Ibidem (Circa autem eclyp&longs;es, &longs;emper curuam habet terminătem lmeam: qua­re qaon'am eclyp&longs;im palitur propter terræ obiectionem, terræ circumferentia &longs;phæ­rica exi&longs;tens, figuræ cau&longs;a erit) probat rotunditatem terræ ab eclyp&longs;i lunari, ex eo, quod Luna &longs;phæricè eclyp&longs;etur, quod innuitur illis verbis, &longs;emper curuam hzbet terminantem lineam, linea &longs;cilicet, quæ terminat partem eclyp&longs;atam à non eclyp&longs;ata, &longs;emper apparet circularis; cum autem hæc li­nea &longs;it terminus vmbræ terræ, quæ lumen obumbrat, &longs;ignum manife&longs;tum e&longs;t vmbram ip&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e rotundam; nam cum Luna deficiat propter terræ obie­ctionem inter ip&longs;am, & Solem, ita, vt vmbra terræ protendatur v&longs;que ad Lu­nam, eamque; in omni eclyp&longs;atione, &longs;iue eclyp&longs;is &longs;it &longs;upra terram, &longs;iue infra, ad quamlibet denique partem terræ fiat, orbiculariter eam contegit, &longs;ignum per&longs;picuum e&longs;t terram proijcere quoquouer&longs;us vmbram rotundam, quæ vt in &longs;phæra o&longs;tenditur, e&longs;t rotunda ad modum coni; cum ergo vmbra terræ ex quauis parte proijciatur, &longs;it rotunda, certò certius colligitur, terramque; quoque ip&longs;am rotunda &longs;igura præditam e&longs;&longs;e. 4073 4074 hanc eandem rationem, &longs;i libue­rit, fu&longs;ius pertractatam videre poteris apud P. Clauium in &longs;phæra. 4075 4076

4077 4078

4079 4080 115

4081 4082 Tex. (Præterea per astrorum apparentiam, non &longs;olum manife&longs;ium e&longs;t, quod re­tunda, &longs;ed & quod magnitudine non magna &longs;it; paruo enim facto ncbis tran&longs;itu ad meridiem, & Vr&longs;am, manifa&longs;tè fit alter horizon circulus, ita vt a&longs;tra, quæ &longs;uper caput, magnam habcant mutationem, & non eadem appareant, & ad Vr&longs;am, & ad meridiem tran&longs;euntibus, quædam enim in Acgypto quidem stellæ videntur, & cir­ca Cyprum, in ijs autem, quæ ad Vr&longs;am vergunt regionibus, non viaentur. 4083 4084 & a&longs;tro­rum ea, quæ &longs;emper in ijs, quæ ad Vr&longs;am vergunt, apparent, in illis locis occidunt. 4085 4086 Quare non &longs;olum ex his manife&longs;tum e&longs;t rotundam e&longs;&longs;e figuram terræ, &longs;ed & &longs;phæræ non magnæ: non enim tam celeriter in&longs;igne quippiam faceret, tran&longs;latis nobis adeò parum) hic textus ei, qui &longs;phæram mundi audiuerit perfacilis e&longs;t: propte­rea eum breuiter &longs;ic paraphra&longs;ticè exponam. 4087 4088 Terram e&longs;&longs;e rotundam, atque re&longs;pectu cœle&longs;tium corporum non magnam, &longs;ignum e&longs;t, quod facto à nobis paruo itinere &longs;iue ad meridionalem plagam, &longs;iue ad &longs;eptentrionalem (quam Vr&longs;am dicit) magnopere mutatur horizon: quod apparet primo ex varia­tionc a&longs;trorum, nam quæ in primo loco &longs;upra no&longs;trum verticem tran&longs;ibant, in &longs;ecundo loco non amplius, &longs;ed alia, atque alia valde ab inuicem &longs;eiuncta

exfacto quamuis paruo itinere tran&longs;eunt. 4089 4090 &longs;it in præ&longs;enti figura terra, vbi A, in qua facta parua mutatione ex loco F, in locum G, fieret magna mutatio a&longs;trorum ver&longs;icalium B, in C, quæ mul­tum ab inuicem di&longs;tant. 4091 4092 &longs;i autem terra e&longs;&longs;et maior, v. g. circulus medius, tunc facta maio­ri mutatione ex D, in E, fieret eadem a&longs;trorum variatio ex B, in C; &longs;ed cum nos experiamur &longs;ieri magnam a&longs;trorum mutationem, ex parua locorum intercapedine, &longs;ignum e&longs;t magnope­re mutari horizontem, ac proinde terram e&longs;&longs;e rotundam, ac re&longs;pectu cœle&longs;tium corporum paruam. 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 aliud præterea &longs;ignum hums horizontis permutationis e&longs;t, quod &longs;tellæ, quæ in priori loco &longs;upra horizontem apparebant, mutato paululum loco ad alterutram plagam, &longs;tatim ab&longs;conduntur; aliæ verò nouæ apparent vt in Acgypto, & Cypro, &longs;tella, quæ dicitur Canobus &longs;upra horizontem a&longs;cendit; quæ &longs;i paululum Vr&longs;am, &longs;eu &longs;eptentrionem ambulaueris, &longs;tatim latitabit. 4099 4100 Demum ciu&longs;dem citæ mutationis &longs;initoris indicium etiam &longs;it, quod regiones &longs;eptentrionales incolentibus plurima &longs;unt a&longs;tra, quæ nun­quam occidunt, quamuis horizontem leuiter per&longs;iringant, quæ tamen Cy­prijs, atque Aegyptijs oriuntur, atque occidunt. 4101 4102 ex quibus & rotunditas, & paruitas terræ colligi pote&longs;t. 4103 4104 has ea&longs;dem rationes fu&longs;ius explicatas repe­ries apud P. Clauium in &longs;phæra. 4105 4106

4107 4108

4109 4110 116

4111 4112 Tex. 111. (Quapropter existimantes eum, qui circa Herculcas columnas e&longs;t lo­cum coniungi ei, qui circa Indiam, & boc modo mare vnum e&longs;&longs;e, nen admcdum incredibilia exi&longs;timare videntur &c.) exi&longs;timatores ho&longs;ce non perperam exi­&longs;tima&longs;&longs;e apertè conuincunt Chri&longs;tophori Columbi, Argonautarum principis nauigationes; quibus nouus orbis repertus e&longs;t, qui inter columnas Hercu­lis, atque orientalem Indiam totus vna cum mari Oceano Atlantico interiacet.

4113 4114

4115 4116 117

4117 4118 Tex. 112. (Matbematicorum etiam, qui circum ferentiæ magnitudinemratio­cinari tentant, ad 400. dicunt ftadiorum millia, &c.) quam &longs;ubtilibus rationi­bus inue&longs;tigauerint A&longs;tronomi quantitatem terræ, optimè, ac dilucidè ex­ponitur à P. Clauio in &longs;phæra: quem &longs;i libet, con&longs;ule, ne inani labore opu­&longs;culum i&longs;tud exere&longs;cat. 4119 4120

4121 4122 Ex Tertio de Cœlo.

4123 4124

4125 4126 118

4127 4128 Tex. 40. (Figuræ autem omnes componuntur ex pyramidibus: rectilinea quidem ex rectilmeis: fphæra verò ex octo partibus componitur) Ale­xander exiftimat, Ari&longs;totelem dicere &longs;phæram con&longs;tare ex octo partibus illis, quæ de&longs;ignantur per tres circulos, quorum duo &longs;e­cant &longs;e mucuò ad angulos rectos, vt in &longs;phæra mundi faciunt duo coluri; tertius verò medios illos diuidit æquidi&longs;tanter à &longs;ectionibus illorum mutuis, quemadmodum æquator in &longs;phæra mundi &longs;ecat duos coluros. 4129 4130 ex quibus &longs;e­ctionibus tota &longs;phæra in octo partes diuiditur, quibus &longs;phæram componi vult Ari&longs;toteles. 4131 4132 aduerte tamen hanc &longs;phæræ compo&longs;itionem nullo modo habere partes actu, cum &longs;phæra &longs;it vnica &longs;implici &longs;uperficie terminata; &longs;ed quæ tantum &longs;int à prædictis imaginatis circulis de&longs;ignatæ: at verò aliæ fi­guræ, quæ pluribus planis terminantur, vt cubus, octaedrum, & &longs;imilia, quæ Ari&longs;t. 4133 4134 vocat rectiliheas, quia terminantur &longs;uperficiebus rectilineis actu di­&longs;tinctis ab inuicem ex natura &longs;ua, non per no&longs;tram de&longs;ignationem, ideò re­ctè dicuntur componi ex pyramidibus, v. g. dicimus cubum componi ex &longs;ex pyramidibus, quia cum habeat &longs;ex ba&longs;es, cogitamus &longs;upra vnamquamque il­larum &longs;ingulas pyramides erigi, quarum omnium vertices ad idem punctum medium intra cubum imaginatum coeant. 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 & &longs;ic de reliquis &longs;olidis. 4141 4142 quæ qua ratione re&longs;oluantur in plures pyramides, con&longs;tat ex 10. 11. 12. & 13. Ele­mentorum Euclidis, at verò in &longs;phæra nullum reale compo&longs;itionis, aut di­ui&longs;ionis fundamentum reperitur.

4143 4144

4145 4146 119

4147 4148 Tex. (Ad hæc nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t non omne corpus e&longs;&longs;e diui&longs;ibile dicere, &longs;ed repugnare certi&longs;&longs;i nis &longs;cientijs; nam Mathematicæ ip&longs;um quideæ intelligibile, accipiunt diui­&longs;ibile) ip&longs;um intelligibile, ide&longs;t, quantitatem ab&longs;tractam tam continuam, quam di&longs;eretam, quam &longs;tatuunt Philo&longs;ophi e&longs;&longs;e &longs;ubiectam materiam ma­thematicarum. 4149 4150 quam ideo appellant intelligibilem, quia cum &longs;it ab&longs;tracta per intellectum à &longs;en&longs;ibilibus affectionibus, re&longs;tat vt &longs;it tantummodo intel­lectu perceptibilis. 4151 4152 Hanc eandem &longs;upponunt e&longs;&longs;e diui&longs;ibilem in infinitum, vt &longs;upra 3. Phy&longs;. textu 31. dictum e&longs;t.

4153 4154

4155 4156 120

4157 4158 Tex. 66. (Ommnò autem eniti &longs;implicibus corporibus figur as tribuere irratio­nabile e&longs;t. 4159 4160 primò quidem, quia accidit non repleri totum; nam in planis tres figuræ videntur implere locum, Triangulus, Quadratum, & Sexangulus) per &longs;implicia corpora intelligit quatuor elementa. 4161 4162 Vult enim probare quatuor elemen­ta non habere figuras illas mathematicas, quas illis Plato tribuebat, vt au­tem Ari&longs;t. 4163 4164 rationem probè percipiamus, &longs;ciendum, quod implere totum, &longs;iue locum, illæ figuræ dicuntur, quæ &longs;imul &longs;uis angulis in plano quopiam ad vnum, atque idem punctum vnitæ locum illum totum, qui cirea punctum il­lud con&longs;i&longs;tit, contegunt, ita vt nihil vacui inter ip&longs;as relinquatur. 4165 4166 tales &longs;unt, quibus fieri po&longs;&longs;unt pauimenta, oportet enim, vt &longs;imul vnitæ nihil vacui in pauimento relinquant. 4167 4168 huiu&longs;modi &longs;unt triangula æquilatera (de his enim intelligendus e&longs;t textus) quadrata, & hexagona, &longs;iue &longs;exilatera regularia;

nam &longs;ex triangula æquilatera &longs;imul iuncta in plano paui­re po&longs;&longs;unt, vt patet in figura præ&longs;enti; ratio huius e&longs;t, quia omnes anguli circa idem punctum (y. 4169 4170 g. A, in hac figura) in plano, quotquot fuerint con&longs;tituti, &longs;unt æqua­les quatuor rectis, ex coroll. 4171 4172 4173 4174 &longs;ecundo 15. primi Elemen­ti: cum igitur &longs;ex anguli, trianguli æquilateri æquiualeant quatuor rectis angulis, con&longs;tituti omnes circa punctum A, totum locum circa illud implere po&longs;&longs;unt. 4175 4176 Quadratum etiam replere lo­
cum manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, cum enim ip&longs;ius anguli &longs;intrecti, &longs;i quatuor quadrata ad idem punctum A, copulentur, vt in figura apparet, replebunt eadem de cau&longs;a vacuum.

4177 4178 Hexagonum quoque regulare, ide&longs;t æquilaterum, & æquiangulum idem præ&longs;tare pote&longs;t; cum enim tres angu­li ip&longs;ius æquiualeant quatuor rectis, &longs;i tria hexagona ad idem punctum A, vt in &longs;igura adaptentur, nece&longs;&longs;ariò ni­hil vacui inter ip&longs;a relinquetur, vt in figura hac o&longs;tenditur. 4179 4180 præter has tres

figuras, nulla alia reperitur, quæ i&longs;tud efficere pol­&longs;it. 4181 4182 cuius demon&longs;trationem perfectam videre pote­ris in fine commentarij P. Clauij &longs;uper 4. Elem. 4183 4184 nos ea tantum attingimus, quæ percipi po&longs;&longs;int ab homi­ne vix mathematicis tincto: &longs;ed tamen, quæ &longs;en&longs;um Ari&longs;totelis patefaciunt. 4185 4186 4187 4188 Aliæ porrò figuræ replen­tes locum planum, quibus aliquando Architectores vtuntur, vel &longs;unt irregulares, vel ad prædictas redu­ci po&longs;&longs;unt. 4189 4190 cum igitur tres tantum ex figuris planis totum repleant, hæ &longs;olæ poterunt elementis attri­bui, ac propterea non &longs;ufficient, ni&longs;i pro tribus elementis. 4191 4192 quare quartum ab&longs;que figura relinquetur; quod e&longs;t ab&longs;urdum.

4193 4194 Admirabilis quædam A&pgrave;um industria.

4195 4196 Cæterum occa&longs;ione harum figurarum illud hoc loco apponere vi­&longs;um e&longs;t, quod Pappus Alexandrinus initio quinti libri collectionum mathematicarum &longs;cribit, De admirabili Apum indu&longs;tria, atque prudentia in con&longs;truendo &longs;uas cellulas figura hexagona regulari. 4197 4198 cum enim vellent omne vacuum excludere, & præterea capaci&longs;&longs;imam om­nium figuram habere, hexagonam accepere, quæ inter prædictas tres vtrum­que præ&longs;tat, nam & inane omne excludit, & illarum trium capaci&longs;&longs;ima e&longs;t, cum magis ad circularem figuram accedat: vt patet ex tractatu de figuris I&longs;operimetris, qui e&longs;t apud Clauium in &longs;phæra, necnonin Geometria pra­ctica. 4199 4200 hoc ideò libentius recen&longs;ui, quia animaduerti naturales hi&longs;toriogra­phos omnes latere, vel ip&longs;um Aldobrandum no&longs;trum, qui quamuis indu­&longs;trio&longs;æ Apis in&longs;tar omnia delibauerit, i&longs;tud tamen de Apibus artificium tan­ta &longs;apientia plenum, ne&longs;cio quo modo prætermi&longs;it.

4201 4202

4203 4204 121

4205 4206 Ibidem (In folidis verò duæ &longs;olum pyramis, & cubus) ide&longs;t replent locum &longs;olidum. 4207 4208 nullum reperi, qui in hoc loco explicando non errauerit; nam Græ­ci, qui alioqui &longs;olent mathematica probè intelligere, hic omnes lap&longs;i &longs;unt, &longs;ecumque; & Arabes, & Latinos in eandem foueam &longs;upra &longs;e mi&longs;erè traxerunt. 4209 4210 communis ferè error omnium fuit, pyramides plures &longs;imul compactas po&longs;­&longs;e replere &longs;olidum locum. 4211 4212 quod vt melius intelligamus, &longs;ciendum e&longs;t, reple­re locum &longs;olidum nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quam &longs;i plura corpora &longs;olida &longs;imul ad idem punctum coaptata, ita con&longs;tipentur, vt totum &longs;patium, quod e&longs;t circa pun­ctum illud omninò occupent, hoc e&longs;t, nihil vacui inter ip&longs;a relinquatur: &longs;i­cut enim prædictæ tres &longs;iguræ planæ, de quibus paulò ante, replent locum planum, ide&longs;t &longs;uper&longs;iciem; ita cubi replent &longs;olidum, ide&longs;t &longs;oliditatem &longs;imul vniti con&longs;tituunt, ita vt &longs;i octo cubi &longs;imul ad idem punctum coaptentur, con­&longs;tituant corpus &longs;olidum ex octo illius con&longs;latum, nihilque; inane inter ip&longs;os cubos relinquatur. 4213 4214 & &longs;icuti planæ illæ figuræ erant conficiendis pauimentis aptæ, ita &longs;olidæ hæ muris, qui corpora &longs;unt &longs;olida, con&longs;truendis idonea &longs;unt. 4215 4216 Notam dum præterea, quod per pyramidem debemus intelligere pyramidem regularem, quæ dicitur etiam Tetraedrum, e&longs;tque; &longs;ecunda inter quinque cor­pora regularia rectilinea, quæ alias Platonica corpora dicuntur. 4217 4218 eorumque; defraitiones &longs;unt in 11. Elem. 4219 4220 Tetraedrum autem &longs;ic definitur, e&longs;t figura &longs;o­lida &longs;ub quatuor triangulis æquilateris, atque inuicem æqualious contenta: de hac inquam e&longs;t &longs;ermo. 4221 4222 quia &longs;i liceret intelligere de irregularibus figuris, infinitæ reperir entar figuræ tam planæ, quam &longs;olidæ, quæ vtrumque locum complerent. 4223 4224 Aduertendum tandem Ari&longs;t. 4225 4226 videri loqui de repletione loci &longs;olidi, quia tran&longs;it à planïs figuris ad &longs;olidas. 4227 4228 & quia &longs;i hæ duæ pyramis, & cubus replent locum &longs;olummedo &longs;ecundum &longs;uas &longs;uperficies, quæ &longs;unt trian­gulum, & quadratum, iam de his cum proximè ante dixi&longs;&longs;et, quid opus fui&longs;­&longs;et idem po&longs;t modum repetere. 4229 4230 ad hæc &longs;i in medium &longs;olida hæc duo profert, aitque; ip&longs;a replere locum, intelligens, planum, profectò non loquitur forma­liter, ide&longs;t de ip&longs;is, vt &longs;oh da &longs;unt. 4231 4232 Quare Ari&longs;t. 4233 4234 videretur &longs;ibi non con&longs;tare, vel perperam exi&longs;tima&longs;&longs;e plura Tetraedra complere &longs;oliditatem. 4235 4236 deceptus fortè fuit Ari&longs;t. 4237 4238 cò quod videret Ico&longs;aedrum con&longs;tare ex viginti pyramidi­bus, verùm illæ non &longs;unt regulares, ide&longs;t non &longs;unt Tetraedra, vt po&longs;tea o&longs;ten­dam. 4239 4240 Verum quidem e&longs;t octo cubos &longs;imul adactos &longs;oliditatem conficere, quia ad id nece&longs;&longs;arij &longs;unt octo anguli &longs;olidi, quos octo cubi præbere po&longs;&longs;unt, cum anguli ip&longs;orum &longs;int recti, & &longs;olidi. 4241 4242 Verum enim verò plures pyramides regulares, &longs;iue plura Tetraedra non po&longs;&longs;e replere vacuum, &longs;olidumque; con­&longs;tituere, ex eo patet, quia &longs;i id præ&longs;tarent, conflarent nece&longs;&longs;ariò, vel vnum ex quinque corporibus regularibus, de quibus in 13. Elemen. vel aliud quod­piam; non aliud, nam, vt patet ex &longs;cholio 13. Elem. 4243 4244 non dantur, ni&longs;i illa. 4245 4246 4247 4248 quinque; neque vllum ex illis, quia diameter huiu&longs;modi corporis, quod com­poneretur ex illis pyramidibus, e&longs;&longs;et dupla lateris eiu&longs;dem, vt patet, quia pyramides illæ omnes concurrerent ad centrum &longs;phæræ illas omnes com­plectentis, quare latus vnius pyramidis à &longs;uperficie &longs;phæræ incipiens de&longs;i­neret in centrum, ergo latus i&longs;tud e&longs;&longs;et &longs;emidiameter, quapropter tota dia­meter illius &longs;ph&ecedil;ræ, & con&longs;equenter huius corporis in illa in&longs;cripti, e&longs;&longs;et du­pla lateris eiu&longs;dem figuræ &longs;olidæ in&longs;criptæ, &longs;ed nullo talis proportio diame­tri alicuius ex illis quinque &longs;olidis regularibus ad latus eiu&longs;dem reperitur, quæ &longs;it nimirum dupla, vt patet ex vltimis demon&longs;trationibus 13. Elem. 4249 4250 ini­tio facto à 13. demon&longs;tratione, in quibus nulla reperitur proportio dupla inter diametrum, & latus eiu&longs;dem alicuius ex illis &longs;olidis; ex quibus mani­fe&longs;tum e&longs;t, plures regulares pyramides quouis pacto &longs;imul vnitas nullo mo­do replere locum &longs;olidum. 4251 4252 cum igitur animaduerterem, &longs;en&longs;um Ari&longs;t. 4253 4254 nullo modo po&longs;&longs;e verificari de repletione &longs;olidi per plura Tetraedra, & omnes tamen commentatores auctoritate Ari&longs;t. 4255 4256 decepti pro ip&longs;o &longs;tarent, dubius, ancepsque; diu hæ&longs;i, neque quid quam mea Minerua a&longs;&longs;erere au&longs;us &longs;um, &longs;ed P. Clauium præceptorem meum per literas con&longs;ului, qui in hunc modum hu­mani&longs;&longs;imè re&longs;pondit; cubus implet locum quater &longs;umptus, ad idem enim punctum quatuor cubi coaptantur: &longs;ic etiam pyramis &longs;exies &longs;umpta, &longs;eu &longs;ex pyramides ad idem punctum iunctæratione &longs;ub&longs;tantium triangulorum æqui­laterorum. 4257 4258 4259 4260 Verum hac ratione non videntur implere locum lolidum, fa­teor; &longs;ed tamen Ari&longs;t. 4261 4262 in co tex. non loquitur de repletione loci &longs;olidi. 4263 4264 4265 4266 hæc ip&longs;e. 4267 4268 &longs;i igitur libeat Ari&longs;totelem, quod fortè Clauius intendebat defendere, dicendum e&longs;t cum eo Ari&longs;t non loqui de repletione loci &longs;olidi: neque loqui de cubo, & Tetraedro, quatenus &longs;unt corpora, &longs;ed quatenus habent &longs;uper­ficies, cubus quidem &longs;ex quadratas, Tetraedrum autem quatuor æquilate­ras &longs;uperficies, quæ duæ figuræ, vt &longs;upra in hoc textu vidimus, replent lo­cum: atque hoc modo facimus Ari&longs;totelem non formaliter loquentem. 4269 4270 ex­aduersò ne videamur magis Ari&longs;t. 4271 4272 quam veritatem &longs;equi, videtur dicen­dum, Ari&longs;totilem formaliter locutum e&longs;&longs;e, & vt patet ex rationibus &longs;upra allatis de repletione &longs;olidi e&longs;&longs;e intelligendum, vt etiam intellexerunt omnes huius loci expo&longs;itores; Verumtamen ip&longs;um erra&longs;&longs;e, dum plures pyramides replere &longs;olidum exi&longs;timauit. 4273 4274 Vtrumuis dixerimus, non tamen Ari&longs;t. 4275 4276 ab om­ni crrore vindicabimus. 4277 4278 Hoc tamen certum e&longs;t, ex prædictis, Græcos om­nes pariter, ac Latinos, illos &longs;equentes, lapos e&longs;&longs;e, a&longs;&longs;erentes duodecim py­ramides complere &longs;olidum locum, atque Dodecaedrum con&longs;tituere; nam py­ramides Dodecaedron con&longs;tituentes non &longs;unt regulares, ide&longs;t, non &longs;unt Te­traedra (de quibus tamen Ari&longs;t. 4279 4280 loquitur) vt patet ex &longs;upradictis. 4281 4282 Indul­geas Lector, &longs;i hoc loco nece&longs;&longs;e fuit in Geometriæ penetralia ingredi: ope­ræpretium enim e&longs;t aliquando ip&longs;is Mathematicis &longs;atisfacere. 4283 4284 tu verò, &longs;i adeo es mathematicis imbutus, con&longs;ule po&longs;tremas demon&longs;tra. 4285 4286 13. Elem. 4287 4288 & præcipuè &longs;cholium vltimum, vbi plura de his corporibus &longs;citu digni&longs;&longs;ima, atque huc &longs;pectantia reperies ex his omnibus Mathematica, quæ no&longs;træ &longs;unt partes, per&longs;picuè &longs;atis expo&longs;uimus.

4289 4290 Multo po&longs;t tempore, quàm hæc &longs;crip&longs;eram incidi fortè in cap. 4291 4292 38. &longs;pecu­lationem 10. Benedicti de placitis Ari&longs;t. reperique; ab eo vno Ari&longs;t. 4293 4294 hoc loco erroris notari, dum a&longs;&longs;eruit duodecim pyramides replere locum corporeum, ide&longs;t, vt exponit ip&longs;e, &longs;ex pyramides &longs;uper hexagonam aliquam figuram &longs;uperficialem, & &longs;ex &longs;ub eadem, id præ&longs;tarent, cum potius maius vacuum remaneat ad quamlibet partium &longs;upra, & infra, quam plenum. 4295 4296 4297 4298 hæc ip&longs;e. 4299 4300 &longs;ed expo&longs;itio i&longs;ta puerili, ne dum Ari&longs;t. 4301 4302 ingenio pror&longs;us indigna e&longs;t: vt propte­rea exi&longs;timem ca&longs;u potius eum Ari&longs;t. 4303 4304 rectè reprehendi&longs;&longs;e, quam ex certa &longs;cientia, cum illius erratum maiori errato conetur corrigere. 4305 4306 Incidi po­&longs;tremò in Indicem librorum, quem Maurolyius &longs;uæ Co&longs;mographiæ præpo­nit, vbi &longs;ic ait: Demon&longs;tramus autem in libello de figuris planis, &longs;olidisque; locum replentibus, cubos per &longs;e, pyramides verò cum octacdris compactas dumtaxat implere locum, qua in re Auerroem erra&longs;&longs;e pueriliter manife&longs;tum erit. 4307 4308 Vides igitur tanti viri auctoritate confirmari no&longs;tram &longs;ententiam, py­ramides videlicet per &longs;e, non replere vacuum. 4309 4310 cum igitur con&longs;tet vnam tan­tum ex figuris &longs;olidis, &longs;iue etiam dicas, vt perperam Ari&longs;t. & alij plures exi­&longs;timarunt, replere totum &longs;olidum; nulla ratione poterunt elementa quatuor, quatuor diuer&longs;is figuris indui, &longs;ed vnum tantummodo, quare reliqua ab&longs;que figura remanere nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;et: quod e&longs;t omnino inconueniens.

4311 4312

4313 4314 122

4315 4316 Tex. 71 (Deinde &longs;i terra e&longs;t cubus &c.) lege definitiones 11. Elem. 4317 4318 quæ &longs;unt admodum faciles, ibi reperies de&longs;initiones quinque corporum regularium, quorum figuras Plato elementis tribuebat: qua verò id ratione faceret, ha­bes in &longs;phæra Clau. 4319 4320 Simpl. etiam hoc loco &longs;atisfacit. 4321 4322

4323 4324 Ex Quarto de Cœlo.

4325 4326

4327 4328 123

4329 4330 Tex. 33. (Deinde ad &longs;imiles videtur angulos ignis quidem &longs;ur&longs;um ferri, terra autem deor&longs;um, & omninò quod grauitatem babet, quare nece&longs;&longs;e est ferri ad medium. 4331 4332 boc autem vtrum accidit ad ip&longs;um tcrræ medium, an ad vniuer&longs;i, quoniam idem ip&longs;orum &longs;it, alius &longs;ermo e&longs;t) cum vellet

probare Ari&longs;toteles dari punctum quoddam in medio mundi, ad quod grauia de&longs;cendant, & concurrent: & à quo leuia a&longs;cendat; vtitur, præter alias, etiam ratione aliqua ex parte mathematica; quæ e&longs;t huiu&longs;­modi. 4333 4334 videmus ignem, & cætera l&ecedil;uia a&longs;cendere à terra &longs;ur&longs;um ad angulos æquales; &longs;imiliter videmus terram, & c&ecedil;tera grauia de&longs;cendere ad terram dcor­&longs;um ad angulos æquales, quod &longs;ignum e&longs;t omnia i&longs;ta idem mundi medium re&longs;picere: v.g. &longs;it terra in &longs;igu­ra præ&longs;enti circulus E C D, cuius medium, &longs;ine cen­trum A. via, qua a&longs;cendit ignis &longs;it in linea A C B, quæ facit angulos in &longs;u­perficie terræ æquales, nimirum angulos B C D, B C E. &longs;imiliter terra per candem lineam faciens eo&longs;dem angulos æquales de&longs;cendit. 4335 4336 4337 4338 linea autem, quæ facit tales angulos tendit ad centrum &longs;phæræ A, vt patet ad &longs;en&longs;um in figu­ra, & probari pote&longs;t geometricè ex primis tertij Elem. 4339 4340 ex quibus patet tam læuia, quam grauia, quæ per talem lineam ferantur, re&longs;picere centrum A, &longs;phæræ. 4341 4342 Vtrum autem i&longs;tud centrum &longs;it idem cum centro totius mundi, alius, inquit, e&longs;t &longs;ermo, hoc e&longs;t, ad a&longs;tronomum pertinet. 4343 4344 vide igitur hac de re pulchram de&longs;&longs;ertationem apud Clauium in &longs;phæra: qui probat euidenter e&longs;&longs;e vnum, & idem.

4345 4346

4347 4348 124

4349 4350 Hoc loco de&longs;ideratur commentarius in cap. 4351 4352 vlt. 4353 4354 de Cœlo. 4355 4356 cuius loco ìn-

4357 4358 terim Lector adeat Di&longs;cur&longs;um Italicum Galilæi Galilæi, de his,quæ in aqua mouentur, ac natant: ubi propè finem, plura in hu-ius capitis explicationem affert.

4359 4360 125

4361 4362 126

4363 4364 127

4365 4366 128

4367 4368 129

4369 4370 Ex Lib. 2. de Generatione, & Corruptione.

4371 4372 130

4373 4374 Tex. 56. (ldeoqué non prima latio cau&longs;a Generationis, & Corruptionis e&longs;t, &longs;ed quæ &longs;ecundum obliquum circulum, in hac enim & continuum vnum e&longs;t & moueri duobus motibus) per primam lationem intelligit mo­tum primi mobilis, qul &longs;it &longs;uper polis mundi, quo Stellæ omnes ab oriente in occidentem rectà feruntur. 4375 4376 per obliquum verò circulum in­telligit Zodiacum, qui obliquus e&longs;t, quia poli eius &longs;unt alij à polis mundi, & quia non tendit rectà ab ortu ad occa&longs;um, &longs;ed in &longs;phæra mundi tran&longs;uer­&longs;us e&longs;t, & deflectit à &longs;eptentrione in meridiem, quamuis non rectà, vt in &longs;phæra explicari &longs;olet. 4377 4378 motus ergo Planetarum, qui fit &longs;ecundum hunc cir­culum, & ip&longs;e obliquus, & tran&longs;uer&longs;us codem modo erit; ferrentur que per eum à Borea ad Au&longs;trum, & è conuer&longs;o; ex quo acce&longs;&longs;u, & rece&longs;&longs;u efficiunt æ&longs;tatem, & hyemem, item generationes, & corruptiones. 4379 4380 Sol porrò, & pla­netæ, qui motibus proprijs hunc circulum peragunt, dicuntur moueri duo­bus motibus, & quidem contrarijs: quoniam dum Sol. 4381 4382 v. g. per Zodiacum graditur motu proprio, interim etiam à primo mobili fertur ab ortu in oc­ca&longs;um: ex quibus duobus motibus fit vnus tantum Solis motus &longs;piralis, qui mixtus e&longs;t, ide&longs;t, qui fit à duobus motoribus; vnde re vera Sol non mouetur duobus motibus contrarijs re ip&longs;a di&longs;tinctis; hoc enim impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t: &longs;ed motu mixto ex duobus, qui &longs;piralis e&longs;t, circa mundum de&longs;cribens &longs;piras ab vno tropico ad alterum: qui, vt dixi, cau&longs;atur à duobus motoribus, qui &longs;unt Sol ip&longs;e, mouens &longs;e ip&longs;um per Zodiacum: & primum mobile mouens in&longs;u­per ip&longs;um Solem, & Zodiacum ab ortu in occa&longs;um circa mundum. 4383 4384 4385 4386

4387 4388 EX PRIMO METEORORVM.

4389 4390

4391 4392 131

4393 4394 Svmma 1. cap. 4395 4396 3. (Moles autem terræ quanta &longs;it ad ambientes magnitudi­nes, non immamfestum, iam enim vi&longs;um est per a&longs;trologica theoremata, quod multò etiam quibu&longs;dam a&longs;tris est minor) Quantitas terræ non &longs;o­lum ab&longs;olutè con&longs;iderata, ab A&longs;tronomis explorata habetur, vt vi­dere e&longs;t in &longs;phæra Clauij; &longs;ed etiam re&longs;pectiuè con&longs;iderata, ide&longs;t re&longs;pectu aliorum elementorum, & ip&longs;orum etiam a&longs;trorum; cuius demon&longs;trationes &longs;unt partim in libello Ari&longs;tarchi Samij, de magnitudine, & di&longs;tantia Solis, & Lunæ, partim apud Ptolæmeum in magna Syntaxi, &longs;iue Almage&longs;to: par­tim apud Albategnium de &longs;cientia &longs;tellarum: partim demum apud Ticho­nem Brahe. 4397 4398 Porrò facile e&longs;t demon&longs;trare Solem e&longs;&longs;e terra multò maiorem, terram verò maiorem Luna, idque; ex eclyp&longs;i lunari, cuius imaginem habes in figura &longs;equenti; vbi vmbra terræ e&longs;t D B E, in quam Luna nigricans im­mergitur, ac lumine deficit, reliqua cognitu &longs;unt facilia: quia igitur A&longs;tro­nomi ob&longs;eruarunt vmbram terræ paulò &longs;upra Lunam pertingere, cum &longs;upe­riora a&longs;tra non adeat, hinc collegerunt eam nece&longs;&longs;ariò e&longs;&longs;e acuminatam, &longs;eu conicam, vt figura refert. 4399 4400 Cum ergo terra vmbram proijciat turbinatam, nece&longs;&longs;ariò corpus Solis, quod ip&longs;am illuminat, eadem maior erit: quoti­diana enim experientia docemur, corpore illuminante exi&longs;tente maiore quà &longs;it illuminatum, vmbram proijci fa&longs;tigiatam: cum deinde Solem val­de a terra di&longs;tare certum &longs;it, optimè infertur, eum re&longs;pectu terræ e&longs;&longs;e maxi­mum: quanto enim duæ lineæ, &longs;iue radij B A, B C. à terra ad partes Solis

magis elongantur, tan­to maius corpus illu­minans intercipiunt. 4401 4402 ha­ctenus de magnitudine terræ ad Solem. 4403 4404 Cum verò Luna eclyp&longs;atio­nis tempore, aliquan­do non &longs;olum tota in vmbræ vertice lateat, verùm etiam aliquando moram trahat, euidens e&longs;t, eam e&longs;&longs;e multò mi­norem illa vmbræ par­te, in quam immergi­tur; quæ pars cum &longs;it conicæ vmbræ media, crit multò gracilior quàm &longs;it ip&longs;a terra. 4405 4406 Ex quo manife&longs;tè apparet, Lunam, quæ illa vmbra minor e&longs;t, e&longs;&longs;e à fortio­ri multò minorem ip&longs;a terre&longs;tri mole. 4407 4408 Atque hæc de comparatione terræ ad Lunam. 4409 4410 harum rerum demon&longs;trationes exactiores pertractare non e&longs;t huius loci.

4411 4412

4413 4414 132

4415 4416 Eodem cap. (Con&longs;iderautes vtique, quæ nunc c&longs;tenduntur per Mathematica&longs;ufficienter, fortè vtique de&longs;isterent ab hac puerili opinione; valde enim &longs;implex e&longs;t putare vnumquodque eorum quæ feruntur e&longs;&longs;e paruum magnitudinibus, quia vi­detur a&longs;picientibus, binc nobis &longs;ic) vtinam i&longs;ta, necnon alia his &longs;imilia, quæ pa&longs;&longs;im apud Ari&longs;t. 4417 4418 occurrunt, plerique no&longs;træ ætatis con&longs;iderarent, qui nulla ratione probari po&longs;&longs;e exi&longs;timant, Solem, v. g. terra e&longs;&longs;e centies &longs;exagies &longs;e­xies maiorem; &longs;ed etiam, quod peius e&longs;t, negant e&longs;&longs;e maiorem; ad demon­&longs;trationes autem a&longs;tronomicas dicunt &longs;e exi&longs;timare eas e&longs;&longs;e fallaces; at que impo&longs;libile e&longs;&longs;e nos res adeo à nobis di&longs;taptes &longs;ufficienter perue&longs;tigare: quanto &longs;apientius, ac prudentius eorum Magi&longs;ter Ari&longs;t. 4419 4420 alibi &longs;æpius, &longs;ed hoc præcipuè loco; quippe qui Mathematicis &longs;ufficienter excultus erat; quibus i&longs;ti de&longs;tituti, nullo vnquam modo ve&longs;tigia præceptoris a&longs;&longs;equi poterunt. 4421 4422 4423 4424

4425 4426

4427 4428 133

4429 4430 Summa 1. cap. 4431 4432 4. (Quæ igitur astrorum e&longs;t, velox quidem; longè autem: quæ verò Lunæ deor&longs;um quidem, tarda autem: quæautem Solis ambo hæc babet &longs;uffi­cienter) quæ igitur a&longs;trorum, ide&longs;t latio a&longs;trorum e&longs;t velox, &longs;ed procul à ter­ra; Lunæ verò latio terræ quidem proxima, tarda tamen: at verò Solis la­tio medio modo &longs;e habet inter vtrumque, ide&longs;t, quia neque nimis vt a&longs;tra di­&longs;tat, neque tardè &longs;icut Luna circunfertur. 4433 4434 exi&longs;timo Ari&longs;t. 4435 4436 loqui de motu diur­no, quia &longs;ecundum hunc a&longs;tra inerrantia &longs;unt Sole citatiora, Sol verò ip&longs;a Luna citior. 4437 4438 Verumenimuerò illud non prætereundum, quod plurium inua­luerit opinio exi&longs;timantium Ari&longs;t. 4439 4440 his verbis, Solem &longs;upra Lunam proximè colloca&longs;&longs;e; quod tamen ex ip&longs;is nullo pacto deduci pote&longs;t; &longs;ed &longs;olummodo ip&longs;um &longs;upra Lunam colloca&longs;&longs;e. 4441 4442 quod &longs;i ita &longs;en&longs;i&longs;&longs;et venia dignus haberetur, cum tunc temporis nondum fortè adinuentæ e&longs;&longs;ent demon&longs;trationes illæ a&longs;tronomicæ, quibus ordo Planetarum certi&longs;&longs;imè con&longs;tat, Solque; medius in­ter Planetas collocatur. 4443 4444 At verò nulla ratione ferendi &longs;unt quicunque no&longs;tra hac tempe&longs;tate non &longs;olum Ari&longs;t. 4445 4446 ita &longs;en&longs;i&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ed etiam contra firmi&longs;&longs;imas aftronomorum demon&longs;trationes, quibus adeò Ari&longs;t. 4447 4448 deferebat, vnica, vt pu­tant ip&longs;ius auctoritate fulti, Solem &longs;ecundum à Luna locum occupare om­ni ope defendunt.

4449 4450

4451 4452 134

4453 4454 Summa 2. cap. 4455 4456 3. (Quod accidit circa Mercurij stellam, quia enim modicum &longs;upera&longs;cendis, &longs;æpè non apparet, it a vt po&longs;t tempus multum appareat) quod Mer­curius non ni&longs;i rarò con&longs;pici po&longs;&longs;it, cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quia parum à Sole elongatur, &longs;iue ip&longs;um antecedat, &longs;iue &longs;ub&longs;equatur. 4457 4458 ex quo fit, vt diu ferè &longs;imul cum So­le cit cumferatur, & propterea &longs;iue oriatur, &longs;iue occidat, parum &longs;upra ho­rizontem eleuatus apparere pote&longs;t, quod Ari&longs;t. 4459 4460 ait modicum &longs;upera&longs;cendit. 4461 4462 vnde fit tum propter nimiam Solis vicinitatem, cuius lumine tegitur; tum propter vapores, qui horizonti vt plurimum incumbunt, vt rarò, & po&longs;t ma­gna temporis interualla con&longs;piciatur. 4463 4464 non me fugit hæc omnia ab a&longs;trono­mis per epiciclum excu&longs;ari; &longs;ed ego mediocritati eorum, in quorum gra­tiam hæc &longs;cribo, con&longs;ultum volo.

4465 4466

4467 4468 135

4469 4470 Eodem cap. (Ad au&longs;trum autem quando feratur, copiam quidem habere talís humiditatis, &longs;ed quia parua e&longs;t &longs;ictio circuli, quæ &longs;uper terram, quæ autem deor­&longs;um multiplex, non po&longs;&longs;e vi&longs;um hominum fractum ferri ad Solem, neque ip&longs;i tropico au&longs;trino appropinquanti; neque in æ&longs;tiuis ver&longs;iombus exi&longs;tente Sole. 4471 4472 quapropter in lis quidem locis neque fieri cometem ip&longs;um. 4473 4474 quando verò ad Boream &longs;ubdefecerit, accipere comam, quia magna e&longs;t circun&longs;erentia, quæ e&longs;t &longs;upra horizontem; quæ au-tem e&longs;t &longs;ubtus, pars circuli parua; facilè enim vi&longs;um hominum pertingere tunc ad Solem) cur cometa in regione au&longs;trali vltra Solis, annique; vias con&longs;titutus non appareret, cau&longs;am referebat Hippocrates paruitatem circuli, qucm motu diurno cometa de&longs;cribebat, ob quam adeò parum &longs;upra horizontem attolleretur, vt non po&longs;&longs;et vi&longs;us no&longs;ter ab ip&longs;o ad Solem reflecti; quod &longs;ecun­dum ip&longs;um erat nece&longs;&longs;arium ad cometarum apparitionem. 4475 4476 I oquitur igitur Hippocrates de circulis, quos diurna conuer&longs;ione cometes circumducir, qui omninò &longs;imiles &longs;unt ijs, quos etiam Sol, reliquaque; a&longs;tra eodem motu de &longs;i­gnant. 4477 4478 qui quidem omnes in no&longs;tr a &longs;phæra obliqua ita &longs;e habent, vt ij, qui &longs;unt vltra æquatorem ad Capricorm tropicum, minus &longs;upra horizontem extent, quàm infra de primantur, & tanto minus, quanto magis ab æquato­re in auftrum recedunt: contra verò faciunt, qui citra æquatorem ad Can­cri conuer&longs;ionem co&longs;&longs;ocantur, quanto enim magis ab æquatore in boream remouentur, tantò eorum &longs;ectio, quæ e&longs;t &longs;upra horizontem, maior e&longs;t ea, quæ infra horizontem latet. 4479 4480 quæ quidem omnia clara &longs;unt adhibita &longs;phæra materiali, quam &longs;i ad tuam poli eleuationem accommodaueris, illicò vi­debis tropici, Cancri &longs;ectionem, quæ e&longs;t &longs;upra horizontem multo maiorem ea, quæ e&longs;t infra. 4481 4482 oppo&longs;itum verò in altero Capricorni tropico, cuius mini­mam portionem &longs;upra, maximam verò infra horizontem exi&longs;tere videbis. 4483 4484 Idem proportionaliter imaginari debes de circulis, quos cometa tam vltra Capricornum, quàm citra Cancrum delineat; nam eorum, qui &longs;unt vltra Capricornum ad au&longs;trum minores adhuc &longs;ectiones &longs;upra horizontem exi­&longs;terent, quàm opus &longs;it ad cometen &longs;pectandum. 4485 4486 Atque hæc cau&longs;a e&longs;t ex &longs;en­tentia Hippocr. cur in illa au&longs;trali plaga nunquam cometes effulgeat. 4487 4488 4489 4490 è con­trario autem, quia ad boream &longs;ectiones illæ maximæ &longs;unt, aptæque; ad refra­ctionem vi&longs;us no&longs;tri v&longs;que ad Solem, idcircò in hac mundi parte cometas con&longs;picere &longs;olemus. 4491 4492 Reliqua Vicomercatus, atque Alexand. optimè expli­cant, quos tu con&longs;ule, ne actum agatur. 4493 4494

4495 4496 In cap. 4497 4498 4. &longs;ummæ 2. lib. 4499 4500 1. Meteor. de Cometis. 4501 4502

4503 4504

4505 4506 136

4507 4508 In præ&longs;enti cap. Ari&longs;t. &longs;uam de Cometis &longs;ententiam exponit: Come­tam nimirum infra Lunam in elementari mundo procreari, & ignitum quoddam Meteoron, ex lenta, pingui, &longs;iccaque; materia à terra in &longs;u­premam aeris regionem attracta, exi&longs;tere; ibique; rapti aeris calore, vel elementi ignis (quod illic e&longs;&longs;e putat) vicinitate, vel etiam vi a&longs;trorum incendi, atque impelli. 4509 4510 4511 4512 Hanć porrò opinionem & &longs;i probabilibus tantum ra­tionibus confirmatam vulgò tamen v&longs;que ad hanc diem receptam, cum fal­&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e a&longs;tronomi exi&longs;timent, non erit abs re rationes eas ex &longs;ecundo pro­gymn. 4513 4514 Tichonis volumine, de&longs;umptas hic breuiter referre, quibus a&longs;trono­mus ille eos &longs;upra Lunam in ætherea regione collocauit: quas quidem ra­tiones ille ex diuturnis ob&longs;eruationibus per exqui&longs;ita organa factis adinue­nit: ea&longs;que Mathematicis linearum, ac numerorum demon&longs;trationibus explicauit.

4515 4516 Prima. 4517 4518 &longs;ed vt ab auctoritate, in quam obiter incidimus initium faciamus, non e&longs;t exi&longs;timandum nonnuilos &longs;olum ex recentioribus id con&longs;tanter a&longs;&longs;e­uera&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ed &longs;uperiori etiam ætate id ip&longs;um Hieron. 4519 4520 Cardan. libro de &longs;ubtili­tate conatus e&longs;t, neque irrito conatu, demon&longs;trare; qui præterea idem cum &longs;e ip &longs;o &longs;en&longs;i&longs;&longs;e ait Albumazar. 4521 4522 4523 4524 quibus etiam ex antiquis Seneca annumeran­dus e&longs;t. 4525 4526 pr&ecedil;dicti autem recentiores omnes varijs demon&longs;trationibus ex ac­curata ob&longs;eruatione erutis illud certò certius con&longs;irmare contendunt: idque; non in vno dumtaxat, &longs;ed in quinque cometis; quorum demon&longs;trationes apud Tychonem partim in progymn. 4527 4528 partim in epi&longs;t. fu&longs;ius explicatas reperies. 4529 4530

4531 4532 2. Quarum poti&longs;&longs;ima illa e&longs;t, quæ ex parallaxi, &longs;eu a&longs;pectus diuer&longs;itate de&longs;umitur, certi&longs;&longs;imum enim e&longs;t lumen illud e&longs;&longs;e altero &longs;ublimius, quod mi­norem exhibet parallaxim: expertos autem &longs;e e&longs;&longs;e hi omnes, affirmant ho­&longs;ce quinque cometas multò minorem pati parallaxim, quam Lunam; imò quempiam minorem, quàm Sol ip&longs;e patiatur, quo po&longs;ito manife&longs;tè conuin­ceretur eos omnes &longs;upra Lunam in ætherea regione efful&longs;i&longs;&longs;e.

4533 4534 3. Ratio, qua etiam ante nouas ob&longs;eruationes vti &longs;olebant, de&longs;umitur ex motu cometæ diurno, quo &longs;cilicet oritur, & occidit, quemadmodum cæ­tera &longs;ydera, hoc e&longs;t &longs;patio 24. horarum diurnam conuer&longs;ionem circa totam terram ab&longs;oluit. 4535 4536 &longs;i igitur comete e&longs;&longs;et in &longs;ublimiori aeris regione, vbi cæte­ra ignita meteora collocantur, mouereturque; diurno motu circa terram, &longs;e­queretur nece&longs;&longs;ariò eum tanta velocitate videri à nobis circumferri, vt po­tius fulgor quidam, &longs;eu radius pertran&longs;iens ab oriente in occidentem appa­reret, quam &longs;tella qu&ecedil;dam: idque; propter propinquitatem; a&longs;tra enim ob ni­miam di&longs;tantiam videntur tardè moueri, quamuis veloci&longs;&longs;imè moueantur.

4537 4538 Quod melius ex &longs;equenti figura conuincitur, vbi circulus interior e&longs;t terra, cuius &longs;emidiameter A B. cir­culus verò exterior e&longs;t cometæ gy­rus, quem ip&longs;e &longs;patio 24. horarum percurrit, qui &longs;ecundum veram pro­portionem deberet adhuc ip&longs;i terræ propinquior, ac proinde minor e&longs;&longs;e, iuxta aeris &longs;upremam partem. 4539 4540 hori­zon e&longs;t recta D C, tangens terram in B, vbi e&longs;t oculus no&longs;ter, qui nihil in­fra ip&longs;am D C, videre pote&longs;t; quare &longs;i cometa 24. horarum totum gyrum D C E, percurrit, non videbitur, ni&longs;i quando percurret portionem D C, &longs;upra horizontem; quæ quidem por­tio, neque &longs;emihoræ re&longs;ponderet, &longs;i &longs;i­gura iuxta veram proportionem con&longs;trueretur. 4541 4542 experientia tamen con&longs;tat, cometas videri &longs;upra horizontem tot horis, quot &longs;tellæ fixæ, &longs;ub quibus mo­uentur: non ergo e&longs;t in &longs;upremo aere. 4543 4544 Quod &longs;i &longs;iat figura, in qua exterior cometæ ambitus adeò magnus &longs;it, vt ip&longs;ius portio D C, &longs;upra horizontem exi&longs;tens, re&longs;pondeat tempori, quo cometa &longs;upra no&longs;trum pariter horizon­tem &longs;pectatur, ea figura terræ &longs;emidiametrum A B. toties multiplicabit, vt ip&longs;i Lunæ circuitui proximè accedat.

4545 4546 Præterea aiunt, quis &longs;anæ mentis dixerit, Meteoron vlium ex materia vaga, ac fluxa con&longs;tans, po&longs;&longs;e tanta pernicitate moueri, vt diurnam con­uer&longs;ionem ab&longs;oluat? 4547 4548 vnde illi motus i&longs;te? 4549 4550 præ&longs;ertim cum videamus cætera ignita meteora e&longs;&longs;e ad modum temporanea, atque euanida.

4551 4552 4. Comprobationem nobis &longs;uppeditant ex via, &longs;eu ductus circuli, quem toto durationis tempore proprio cur&longs;u de&longs;ignarunt: prædicti namque quin­que cometæ motu &longs;ibi proprio, quo ab occidente non omninò orientem ver&longs;us, &longs;ed ad aquilonem deflectentes ab initio &longs;uæ apparitionis, v&longs;que ad vl­timum fiuem exqui&longs;iti&longs;&longs;imè portionem circuli maximi in c&ecedil;lo de&longs;ignarunt; non aiiter quàm Sol proprio motu per eclypticam in cœlo mundi &longs;phæram in duo æqualia diuidentem de&longs;cribit. 4553 4554 necnon aliter ac Luna &longs;uum iter per circulum maximum cœlum bifariam diuidentem perficit. 4555 4556 quapropter co­metas ho&longs;ce non minus quam Sol, vel Luna in ip&longs;o æthere &longs;patiatos e&longs;&longs;e con­tendunt. 4557 4558 qui enim, aiunt, fieri potui&longs;&longs;et, &longs;i in mundo elementari flagra&longs;&longs;ent, vt tam regulari, atque con&longs;tanti ductu circuli maximi portionem tam exactè delinea&longs;&longs;ent, quam quidem inter elementa vagum, atque in&longs;tabilem pro ma­teriæ in&longs;tabilitate exercere debui&longs;&longs;ent?

4559 4560 5. Adde, quod in maximo hoc circulo de&longs;cribendo, etiam &longs;i inæquali ve­locitate vi&longs;i &longs;int moueri, inæqualitatem tamen illam regularem vbique &longs;em­per &longs;eruauerunt, in principio quidem velociores, deinde &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;iuè, & pro­portionaliter velocitatem illam &longs;imili analogia &longs;emper &longs;eruata inhibuerunt, nullo igitur pacto inordinatam inæqualitatem, qua à tardiore motu &longs;ubito in celeriorem, & rur&longs;us &longs;tatim ab hoc in illum pro&longs;ilirent exhibuerunt: prout omnia Meteora, quæ in mundi parte elementari ex flammanti materia ge­nerantur, talem di&longs;parem, atque incon&longs;tantem motum obtinere cernuntur.

4561 4562 6. Argumento præterea e&longs;t cometas ho&longs;ce minimè elementares fui&longs;&longs;e, quod hic eorum proprius motus, quo maximo illo tramite ferebantur, nua­quam tantus fuit, vt proprium Lunæ motum, vel tardi&longs;&longs;imum adæquauerit, quæ quidem cum lenti&longs;&longs;ima e&longs;t plus denis gradibus vna die promouetur; cum tamen cometæ initio cum veloci&longs;&longs;imi &longs;unt non multum vltra quinos gradus diurno motu progre&longs;&longs;i &longs;int, vt ob id longè &longs;upra Lunam cur&longs;um &longs;uum ab&longs;olui&longs;&longs;e manife&longs;tè comprobari po&longs;&longs;it: quo enim &longs;ydera magis à terra at­tolluntur, octauæque; &longs;phæræ propius accedunt, eò tardioribus proprijs la­tionibus proferuntur: ita vt &longs;teilæ i&longs;tæ cœlo ad&longs;cititiæ &longs;upra Lunam admo­dum euehendæ videantur. 4563 4564 Quod &longs;i in &longs;uprema aeris regione con&longs;lagrarent, qua nam ratione vnà cum toto cœlo diurnam conuer&longs;ionem ab&longs;olui&longs;&longs;ent: neque enim putandum e&longs;t &longs;upremum hunc aeris limbum eadem pernecitate, qua cœle&longs;tes orbes, verum minori admodum imò tardi&longs;&longs;imè à diurno mo­tu, &longs;i tamen eo rapitur circumduci.

4565 4566 7. Tandem argumentum ex ip&longs;orum duratione de&longs;umatur. 4567 4568 cætera nam­que meteora &longs;tatim atque apparuerint, veluti temporanea pror&longs;us, atque eua­nida extinguuntur: At verò cometæ ad men&longs;em aliquando integrum per­&longs;euerant. 4569 4570 quì igitur fieri potuerit, vt in hac corruptibili mundi parte ex ma­teria adeò &longs;luxa, & vaga, quam illis Ari&longs;teteles &longs;upponit, tandiu perdura­re potui&longs;&longs;ent.

4571 4572 Atque hæ &longs;unt rationes, quibus plurimi a&longs;tronomorum recentiorum, co­metas ho&longs;ce motum æthereæ regioni conformem, contrà quam Ari&longs;t. 4573 4574 opi­natus e&longs;t, obtinui&longs;&longs;e, munifeftum e&longs;&longs;e volunt; ac proinde eorum locum, & cur&longs;um in cœle&longs;ti mundi parte extiti&longs;&longs;e, &longs;e comproba&longs;&longs;e exi&longs;timant: qua de re prudentis Lectoris e&longs;to iudicium: neque enim, vt ille cecinit, no&longs;trum e&longs;t, tantas componere lites.

4575 4576 Verumenimuerò Peripatetica omnis &longs;chola reclamat; Cœlum e&longs;t inge­nerabile, & incorruptibile, mhil igitur noui cœlo pote&longs;t accidere. 4577 4578 &longs;ed age re&longs;pondent, nonne omnium a&longs;tronomorum con&longs;en&longs;u &longs;tellæ tres nouæ no&longs;tro hoc &longs;æculo in cœlo toti mundo con&longs;picuæ illuxerunt? 4579 4580 easque; in octaua &longs;phæ­ra re&longs;edi&longs;&longs;e conftans e&longs;t omnium a&longs;&longs;ertio? 4581 4582 quarum prior anno 1572. in con­&longs;tellatione Ca&longs;&longs;iopeæ apparuit. 4583 4584 Secunda anno 1600. in Cygno, quæ nec dum extinguitur. 4585 4586 Tertia anno 1604. inter Sagittarij &longs;tellas vi&longs;a e&longs;t, de quibus vi­de P. Clauium in &longs;phæra breuiter de illis tractantem: aut &longs;i mauis, & vacat, vide quoad primam primum volumen progymna&longs;matum Tychonis Brahe, vbi etiam aliorum a&longs;tronomorum de eadem certi&longs;&longs;imas commentationes reperies. 4587 4588 4589 4590 con&longs;ule etiam de reliquis duabus Ioannis Kepleri Cæ&longs;areæ Maie­&longs;tatis Mathematici commentaria; & coactus libenter fateberis noui ali­quid cœlo aduenire po&longs;&longs;e.

4591 4592 Po&longs;tremò tandem po&longs;&longs;et qui&longs;piam in hunc modum opponere: etiam &longs;i con­&longs;tet quinque cometas c&ecedil;lo oberra&longs;&longs;e, non propterea dicemus reliquos omnes e&longs;&longs;e pariter cœle&longs;tes, nullumque; proinde &longs;ublunarem. 4593 4594 Huic memorati A&longs;tro­nomi &longs;ic re&longs;ponderent; id quidem mathematica, & infallibili ratione non colligi, imò aliquot parum infra Lunam extiti&longs;&longs;e, non omninò negandum videri: at verò in &longs;uperiori aeris plaga, in tam fluxa, ac in&longs;tabili mundi par­te, cometas vnquam efful&longs;i&longs;&longs;e, nemo &longs;ibi ob allatas rationes meritò per&longs;ua­dere po&longs;&longs;e.

4595 4596

4597 4598 137

4599 4600 Summæ 2. cap. 4601 4602 5. (Ad hæc autem &longs;i quemadmodum o&longs;tenditur in ijs, quæ cir­ca Astrologiam &longs;peculationibus, Solis magnitudo maior e&longs;t quàm terræ; & diftax­tia multò maior a&longs;trorum ad terram quàm So is; &longs;icut Solis ad terram quàm Lu­næ; non vtique longè alicubi à terra conus, qui à Sole, conijciet radios, neque vtique vmbraterræ, quæ vocatur nox, erit apud astra; &longs;ed nece&longs;&longs;e Solem omnia a&longs;tra cir­cun&longs;picere, & nulli ip&longs;orum terram ob&longs;istere) ex dictis &longs;umma 1. cap. 4603 4604 3. huius, & ex figura ibi de&longs;cripta, facilè e&longs;t intelligere præ&longs;entem locum; nam cum Sol &longs;it multò maior terra, vt ibi probatur, ac minus di&longs;ter à terra quàm fixæ &longs;tellæ, magis tamen quàm Luna, vt patet ex &longs;olari eclyp&longs;i, &longs;equitur nece&longs;&longs;a­riò vmbram terræ, quæ nox e&longs;t ip&longs;a, effici turbinatam, & valdè procul à ter­ra acumen coni vmbræ a&longs;cendet, &longs;ed paulò &longs;upra Lunam conus hic vmbræ permittet radios Solis &longs;e ip&longs;um ambientes iterum &longs;imul committi, quod il­lis verbis (Conijciet radios) ide&longs;t committet radios expre&longs;&longs;it Ari&longs;t. 4605 4606 cum igi­tur vmbra apud Lunam &longs;it &longs;atis gracilis, breui &longs;upra Lunam de&longs;inet, neque vllo pacto ad affixa &longs;ydera protendetur, neque illis renebras offundet. 4607 4608 quod etiam experientia confirmat, cum nunquam a&longs;tra illa, quæ Soli opponuntur, quæque; vertex vmb æ collimat, vllam patiantur eclyp&longs;im. 4609 4610 quare &longs;ine vllo ter­ræ impedimento Sol pote&longs;t af&longs;ixa omuia &longs;ydera perlu&longs;lrare. 4611 4612 Exactiores ha­rum rerum demon&longs;trationes &longs;unt alterius loci.

4613 4614

4615 4616 138

4617 4618 Eodem cap. (Amplius autem e&longs;t tertia quædam opinio de ip&longs;o, dicunt enimquidam lac e&longs;&longs;e reflexionem no&longs;tri vi&longs;us ad Solem; &longs;icut & &longs;tellam comatam; im­po&longs;&longs;ibile autem e&longs;t & hoc, &longs;i enim videns quieuerit & &longs;peculum, & quod videtur omne in eodem puncto &longs;peculi eadem apparebit vtique pars imaginis, &longs;i autem mo­ueatur &longs;peculum, & quod videtur, in eadem quidem di&longs;tantia ad videns, & quie­&longs;cens; ad inuicem autem neque æquè velociter, neque in eadem &longs;emper di&longs;tantia im­po&longs;&longs;ibile eandem imaginem in eadem e&longs;&longs;e parte &longs;peculi. 4619 4620 Quæ autem in lactis circu­lo feruntur a&longs;tra, & Sol, ad quem fit reflexio, mouentur manentibus nobis, & &longs;i­militer, & æqualiter ad nos di&longs;tantia; à &longs;e ip&longs;is autem non æqualiter: aliquando enim medijs noctibus Delphin oritur, aliquando verò diluculo. 4621 4622 partes autem lactis eædem manent in vnoquoque; atqui non oportebat, &longs;i erat imago, &longs;ed non in ei&longs;dem adhuc e&longs;&longs;et hæc pa&longs;&longs;io locis) in his Ari&longs;t. 4623 4624 confutat opinionem dicentium Gala­xiam apparere per quandam reflexionem vi&longs;us no&longs;tri ab illa parte c&ecedil;li, ceu, ex quodam &longs;peculo ad Solem: probat autem hoc e&longs;&longs;e impo &longs;&longs;ibile ratione de&longs;umpta ex parte Optices, quæ dicitur Catoptrica, &longs;iue &longs;pecularia, quia tractat de vi&longs;ione reflexa, quæ fit mediante &longs;peculo, quam quidem rationem &longs;i vellem mathematicè explicare, longa nimis, ac præter in&longs;titutum fieret tractatio. 4625 4626 Pauca tamen addam, quæ Ari&longs;totelis &longs;ententiam &longs;atis per&longs;picuam reddant. 4627 4628 &longs;i igitur inquit, Galaxia nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;et quàm reflexio no&longs;tri vi&longs;us ex illa cœli parte, in qua ip&longs;a apparet tanquam ex &longs;peculo ad Solem, ita vt nihil aliud ip&longs;a e&longs;&longs;et, quàm Sol vi&longs;us per reflexionem exilla cœli parte tan­quam &longs;peculo; &longs;equeretur eam non &longs;emper in eadem cœli parte apparere, &longs;ed modo in vna, modo in alia, ita vt &longs;patio vnius anni totum cœlum perua­garetur: quod tamen non accidit. 4629 4630 quod autem illud con&longs;equatur manife­&longs;tum e&longs;&longs;e pote&longs;t ex ob&longs;eruatione eorum, quæ ex &longs;peculis videntur: tunc enim res per &longs;pe culum vi&longs;a in eadem &longs;peculi parte apparet, quando & videns, & &longs;peculum, & obiectum immota manent: quod &longs;i & &longs;peculum, & obiectum ad inuicem accedant, vel recedant, &longs;eruata tamen eadem ab in&longs;pectore di&longs;tan­tia, nullo modo fieri pote&longs;t, vt eadem imago, in eadem &longs;peculi parte &longs;pe­ctanti videatur, ni&longs;i obiectum &longs;peculo per eandem lineam accedat, &longs;ecun­dum quam illi incidebat. 4631 4632 At verò partibus illis lactei circuli, &longs;iue a&longs;tris, quæ in eo fulgent, Sol perpetuò accedit, vel recedit, neque per lineam incidentiæ eandem, &longs;eruata tamen eadem à nobis di&longs;tatia, quod quidem inde patet, quia Delphini con&longs;tellatio, qui in ip&longs;o ferè lacte exi&longs;tit, aliquando medijs noctibus, aliquando verò mane, aliquando etiam ve&longs;peri oritur; quod inde accidit, quia illi Sol modò appropinquat, modò coniungitur, modò ab eo recedit, quare nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;et, vt lacteus orbis, non &longs;emper in ij&longs;dem locis, &longs;ed perpe­tuò in alijs, atque alijs cernerecur, cuius tamen contrarium videmus. 4633 4634 ex qui­bus con&longs;tat fal&longs;am omninò e&longs;&longs;e eorum &longs;ententiam, qui Galaxiam per huiu&longs;­modi re&longs;lexionem fieri opinabantur. 4635 4636 Quæ dicta &longs;unt de &longs;peculo, & obiecto &longs;atius e&longs;t a&longs;&longs;umpto aliquo &longs;peculo experiri, quàm ea pluribus ob&longs;curare: qua etiam experientia Ari&longs;t. 4637 4638 ratio confirmabiaur.

4639 4640

4641 4642 139

4643 4644 Ibidem (Quæ autem in lactis cir culo feruntur astra, & Sol, ad quem fit refle­xio, mouentur mancntibus nobis, & &longs;imiliter, & æqualiter ad nos di&longs;t antia à &longs;e ip&longs;is autem non æqualiter) quæ hic ab Ari&longs;totele dicuntur non &longs;unt v&longs;quequae; vera propter apogæum, ac porigæum Solis, quæ quidem duo ab omnibus a&longs;tronomis a&longs;&longs;eruatur: quando igitur Sol e&longs;t in apogæo, maiori multo in­teruallo di&longs;tat à nobis, quàm quando e&longs;t in perigæo, interuallum enim illud con&longs;tat diametris terræ duobus, & quadraginta, hoc e&longs;t milliarijs 208000. ferè, ide&longs;t octonis millibus &longs;upra ducenta millia. 4645 4646 quæ differentia facit vt Sol manife&longs;tè appareat nobis minor apogæus, quàm perigæus. 4647 4648 Sol præterea &longs;i­militer ip&longs;is inerrantibus &longs;tellis fit tantumdem modo remotior, modo pro­pinquior: &longs;ed fortè Ari&longs;t. 4649 4650 i&longs;ta non occurrerunt, vel tunc temporis nondum per&longs;pecta erant.

4651 4652

4653 4654 140

4655 4656 Ibidem (Aliquando enim medijs noctibus Delphin oritur) vt probet, Gala­xiam non &longs;emper &longs;eruare à Sole di&longs;tantiam eandem, accipit tanquam huius rei &longs;ignum, manife&longs;tum, quod Delphini con&longs;tellatio aliquando medijs no­ctibus oriatur &longs;upra horizontem, aliquando verò diluculo; non ideò tamen putes hanc rationem &longs;upponere Delphinum e&longs;&longs;e in ip&longs;o lacteo circulo, quod tamen verum non e&longs;t, non enim e&longs;t in Galaxia, &longs;ed tamen illi proximus, vt noctu videre e&longs;t in cœlo, vel etiam &longs;i mauis in globo a&longs;tronomico: non ta­men ob id Ari&longs;t. 4657 4658 ratio minus valida redditur, cum Delphinus &longs;emper Gala­xiæ eodem modo &longs;it proximus, eoque; moto, ip&longs;a pariter moueatur.

4659 4660

4661 4662 141

4663 4664 Summæ 2. cap. 4665 4666 6. Sunt qui velint Ari&longs;t. Galaxiam nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quàm quandam refractionem lucis &longs;tellarum illarum, quæ &longs;unt in ætherea Gala­xia, quæ inquam refractio fiat circa &longs;upremam aeris regionem ex occur&longs;u exhalationum, quæ ibi perpetuò con&longs;eruantur, & vi earumdem &longs;tellarum &longs;ur&longs;um &longs;emper attrahuntur, quæ refractio fiat ad eum modum, quo halo cir­ca Solem, & Lunam. 4667 4668 4669 4670 & quemadmodum halo, &longs;iue area omnibus vndecunque a&longs;picientibus &longs;emper videntur in eodem cœli loco, hoc e&longs;t è regione Solis, vel Lunæ; &longs;imiliter Galaxia in aere omnibus vndecunque intuentibus appa­reat in eadem cœli parte, ide&longs;t ex aduersò eorumdem &longs;yderum, quæ cœle­&longs;tem lacteam viam conficiunt. 4671 4672 Porrò qui &longs;ic mentem Ari&longs;t. 4673 4674 exponunt, nul­lo modo po&longs;&longs;unt à Mathematicis redargui per rationem de&longs;umptam à di­uer&longs;itate a&longs;pectus (quam po&longs;tea explicabo) quamuis phy&longs;icis rationibus re­fellantur. 4675 4676 Alij &longs;unt, quorum &longs;ententia magis videtur improbanda, cò quod Ari&longs;t. &longs;ummum Philo&longs;ophum pueriliter in a&longs;tronomia lap&longs;um fateri cogan­tur. 4677 4678 Exi&longs;timant hi Galaxiam hanc Ari&longs;totelicam nihil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quàm ip­&longs;as tenues exhalationes in aere &longs;ubuectas, directèque infra &longs;tellas illas la­cteum circulum in cœlo con&longs;tituentes nobis obiectas. 4679 4680 qui præter innumera, ac magna ab&longs;urda è naturali Philo&longs;ophia petita, vnum maximum ex A&longs;tro­nomia, nempè ex diuer&longs;itate a&longs;pectus de&longs;umptum, nullo modo vitare po&longs;­&longs;unt; e&longs;tque; huiu&longs;modi, quia &longs;i lacteus hic circulus e&longs;&longs;et in aere, non ab om­nibus, neque ex omni terræ loco per eadem &longs;ydera commeare cerneretur, &longs;ed è diuer&longs;is, & præcipuè ab inuicem valde di&longs;&longs;itis, circa diuer&longs;a a&longs;tra &longs;e &longs;e ocu­lis no&longs;tris obijceret: at te&longs;timonio &longs;en&longs;us con&longs;tat, Galaxiam &longs;emper in eo­dem loco; eademque; à &longs;yderibus fixis di&longs;tantia albicare, ergò nullo modo viam hanc in aere qua&longs;i pendulam fabricare debemus. 4681 4682 rationem hanc di­uer&longs;itatis a&longs;pectus a&longs;tronomicè magis explicatam reperies apud Clauium in &longs;phæra. 4683 4684 Porrò hæc ratio quamuis adeo certa, ac no&longs;tra tempe&longs;tate vul­gata, parum tamen à nonnullis de rebus Meteorologicis commentaria con­farcinantibus intellecta, minimè eos ab&longs;terrere potuit, quin prædictam opi­nionem, non &longs;olum Ari&longs;toteli imponerent, verum etiam ip&longs;i tanquam veram a&longs;truerent: huiu&longs;modi patiuntur incommoda, qui ab&longs;que Mathematicarum auxilio Philo&longs;ophiam aggrediuntur.

4685 4686

4687 4688 142

4689 4690 Eodem cap. (Ad hæc autem locus plenus e&longs;t a&longs;tris maximis, & fulgidi&longs;&longs;imis, & adhuc &longs;par&longs;is vocatis) non &longs;olum viam hanc lacteam a&longs;tris plurimis refer­ti&longs;&longs;imam e&longs;&longs;e videmus, &longs;ed præterea eandem &longs;tellarum admodum feracem appellare licebit, &longs;i quidem &longs;tellæ omnes illæ nouæ, quæ no&longs;tra tempe&longs;tate apparuerunt, omnes in hac via exortæ &longs;unt. 4691 4692 prima enim anno 1572. efful&longs;it in Ca&longs;&longs;iopea; altera anno 1600. in Cygno. 4693 4694 tertia demum anno 1604. in Sa­gittario, quæ omnes con&longs;tellationes intra lacteum circulum continentur. 4695 4696 Veri&longs;&longs;imum præterea e&longs;&longs;e hoc idem confirmatur in&longs;trumenti illius mirabi­lis auxilio, quod &longs;uperiori anno in Belgio excogitatum, & po&longs;tea in Italia à Galilæo perfectius redditum e&longs;t, quodque; ip&longs;e primum Italicè Cannocchiale, Latinè verò, & quidem aptè à Græcis mutuato vocabulo alius Tele&longs;copium appellauit: hoc inquam &longs;pecillo adhibito per&longs;picuum &longs;tatim fit non &longs;olum in via lactea innumeras &longs;tellas contineri, verum quid ip&longs;a &longs;it, certò certius con&longs;tat; &longs;ed &longs;atius e&longs;t ip&longs;ius Galilæi verba ex Nuncio &longs;ydereo referre: Quod tertio inquit, loco à nobis fuit ob&longs;eruatum e&longs;t ip&longs;iu&longs;met lactei circuli e&longs;&longs;en­tia, &longs;en materies, quam Tele&longs;copij beneficio adeò ad &longs;en&longs;um licet intueri, vt & altercationes omnes, quæ per tot &longs;æcula Philo&longs;ophos excruciarunt ab oculata certitudine dirimantur, nosque; à verbo&longs;is di&longs;putationibus liberemur: e&longs;t enim Galaxia nihil aliud, quàm innumerarum &longs;tellarum coaceruatim con&longs;itarum congeries, in quancunque enim regionem illius &longs;pecillum dirigas, &longs;tatim &longs;tellarum ingens fre quentia &longs;e &longs;e in con&longs;pectum profert, quarum com­plures &longs;atis magnæ, ac valdè con&longs;picuæ videntur; &longs;ed exiguarum multitudo pror&longs;us inexplorabilis e&longs;t. 4697 4698 hæc ille.

4699 4700

4701 4702 143

4703 4704 Eodem cap. (Con&longs;ideretur autem & circulus, & quæ &longs;unt in ip&longs;o a&longs;tra ex de­&longs;criptione) id e&longs;t, con&longs;ideretur Galaxia, & a&longs;tra ip&longs;ius in&longs;piciantur diligenter ex de&longs;criptione alicuius Globi a&longs;tronomici, in quo &longs;olent A&longs;tronomi omnes con&longs;tellationes, ac &longs;tellas &longs;uis locis reddere, atque etiam lacteum ip&longs;um cir­culum graphicè effingere. 4705 4706 huiu&longs;modi globum veteres &longs;ph&ecedil;ram Aratæam di­cebant ab Arato Poeta græco, qui con&longs;tellationes omnes carmine pro&longs;e quu­tus e&longs;t, ac proinde globum hunc ordine expo&longs;uit:

4707 4708

4709 4710 144

4711 4712 Eodem cap. (Spar&longs;a autem vocata) putò &longs;par&longs;a hæc &longs;ydera illa e&longs;&longs;e, quæ recentiores informia appellant, eò quod ad aliorum a&longs;teri&longs;morum formas minimè reuocentur.

4713 4714

4715 4716 145

4717 4718 Summa 4. cap. 4719 4720 1. (In A&longs;ia igitur plurimi ex Parna&longs;&longs;o vocato monte videntur &longs;tuentes) rectè dubitat Alexander, qua ratione mons Parna&longs;&longs;us ab Ari&longs;t. 4721 4722 po­natur in A&longs;ia, cum certò certius con&longs;tet, ip&longs;um in Græcia Europæ regione &longs;itum e&longs;&longs;e. 4723 4724 fortè legendum e&longs;t, vt vult Vicomercatus, ex Paropame&longs;&longs;o, non autem ex Parna&longs;&longs;o, quamuis Græci codices aduer&longs;entur; Paropame&longs;&longs;um namque Plinius, & Strabo in A&longs;ia collocant, voluntque; ip&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e iugum quod­dam montis Cauca&longs;i: Cauca&longs;um autem &longs;upra Pontum orifi, & v&longs;que ad Hir­canum, & vltra mare per totam A&longs;iam &longs;e proferre, tradunt veteres Geo­graphi. 4725 4726 vide The&longs;aurum geographicum Abrahami Ortelij. 4727 4728 Strabo lib. 4729 4730 15. &longs;ic: Indiam à &longs;eptentrione Tauri extrema terminant, ab Ariana v&longs;que in orientale mare, quæ extrema indigenæ particulatim nominant Poropami&longs;­&longs;um, Emodum, Imauum, & alijs nominibus: Macedones verò Cauca&longs;um vocant.

4731 4732

4733 4734 146

4735 4736 Ibidem (Apparet mare, quod e&longs;t extra) intelligit illud mare Oceanum, quod Arabiam, ac Per&longs;iam alluit, Indicoque; Oceano committitur: quodque; à pri­&longs;cis Geographis Rubrum mare appellatur, cuius alterum Rubrum mare, quod inter Africam, & Arabiam &longs;e in&longs;inuat, e&longs;t quidam &longs;inus, quem nunc communiter omnes Rubrum mare appellant. 4737 4738 de illo inquam meritò intel­ligit Alexander, non de hoc Aegyptiaco, cum ex a&longs;pectu illius à monte Pa­ropame&longs;&longs;o, &longs;equatur ip&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e editi&longs;&longs;imum, quod non &longs;equeretur ex altero ob illius propinquitatem. 4739 4740 Dixit autem mare, quod e&longs;t extra, ide&longs;t extra terram habitatam, ad di&longs;tinctionem maris Mediterranei, quod e&longs;t intra terram habitatam, ac propterea Mediterraneum dictum e&longs;t.

4741 4742

4743 4744 147

4745 4746 Ibidem (Ex hoc igitur fluunt & alij fluuij, & Bactrus, & Choa&longs;pes, & Ara­xes. 4747 4748 ab hoc autem ab&longs;cinditur Tanais pars exi&longs;tens in Meotidem paludem fluit au­tem, & Indus ex ip&longs;o, omnium fluuiorum fluxio maxima) hæc omnia &longs;unt fal&longs;a, & impo&longs;&longs;ibilia; nam cum Bactrus Bactrianam regionem irriget, quæ e&longs;t vl­tra Per&longs;iam, Choa&longs;pes verò Per&longs;iam ip&longs;am, Indus denique in India oriatur: quì fieri pote&longs;t, vt in Regionibus adeò inuicem di&longs;&longs;itis orti fluuij ab eodem quoque Paropame&longs;&longs;o monte ortum ducant. 4749 4750 nec minus fal&longs;um e&longs;t illud de Ta­nai, quod &longs;it qua&longs;i ip&longs;ius Araxis ramus quidam, Tanais enim ex Riphæis montibus Scythiæ delabitur in Meotidem paludem longè longius ab Araxi. 4751 4752 eumque; terminum inter Europam, & A&longs;iam Geographi con&longs;tituunt, vnde Diony&longs;ius Afer &longs;ic cecinit:

4753 4754 Europam, atque A&longs;iam Tanais di&longs;terminat amnis.

4755 4756 verùm huiu&longs;modi errata Ari&longs;t. atque adeò Geographis illius temporis con­donanda &longs;unt, cum nondum Geographia &longs;atis exculta e&longs;&longs;et. 4757 4758

4759 4760 De altitudine montis Cauca&longs;i.

4761 4762

4763 4764 148

4765 4766 Eod. cap. (Cauca&longs;us autem maximus mons e&longs;t eorum qui ad orientem æ&longs;tiua­lem, & multitudine, & altitudine &longs;igna autem altitudinis quidem, quia videtur & à vocatis Profundis, & à nauigantibus in Stagnum in&longs;uper il­lu&longs;trantur à Sole ip&longs;ius &longs;ummitates, v&longs;que ad tertiam partem nocte, & ab aurora, & iterum a ve&longs;pera) Cauca&longs;us mons &longs;itus e&longs;t inter mare Euxinum, & Ca&longs;pium, &longs;upra Cholchidem, & Iberiam regiones, vbi polus eleuatur 47. circiter grad. ac re&longs;pectu Græciæ, & maris Euxini vergit ad eam mundi pla­gam, vnde illis æ&longs;tiuo tempore Sol oritur. 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 ait Ari&longs;t. 4773 4774 eum e&longs;&longs;e omnium mon­tium illius plagæ alti&longs;&longs;imum, quod probat primò, quia admodum à longè cernitur, nimirum ab illo Euxini loco, qui Profunda vocatur, eò quòd à Nau­tis nu&longs;quam ibi fundus reperiatur. 4775 4776 & præterca à Nauigantibus in Stagnum, &longs;iue in Meotidem paludem, quæ quidem loca minimùm di&longs;tant a Cauca&longs;o 560. milliaribus. 4777 4778 Secundò, probat il ius altitudinem ex eo, quòd &longs;ummi­tates ip&longs;ius v&longs;que ad tertiam partem nocte, & ve&longs;peri à Sole illu&longs;trentur. 4779 4780 Lo­cum hunc fusè pertractat eruditi&longs;&longs;imus Iacobus Mazonius &longs;ectione 3. & 4. de Comparatione Platonis, & Ari&longs;t. 4781 4782 quo in opere plurima habet ex Mathe­maticis de&longs;umpta, quibus naturalem Philo&longs;ophiam mirificè illu&longs;trat, mani­fe&longs;tumque; reddit, quàm nece&longs;&longs;ariæ &longs;int Mathematicæ ad philo&longs;ophicæ veri­tatis in&longs;pectionem. 4783 4784 Is igitur &longs;ect. 4785 4786 3. cap. 4787 4788 5. de hoc Ari&longs;t. 4789 4790 loco &longs;ie loquitur: hic locus diligenter expendendus videtur tum quia difficillimus e&longs;t, tum quia multis an&longs;am dedit reprehendendi Ari&longs;t. 4791 4792 tanquam puerilia effutientem. 4793 4794 tex­tus itaque Ari&longs;t. 4795 4796 duplicem habet &longs;en&longs;um; alter à quo non abhorret Alexander; vt tertia illa pars ad montem referatur, qua&longs;i dicat, quod antequam Sol ima montis illu&longs;tret, illuminat illius cacumen v&longs;que ad tertiam montis partem: &longs;ed hæc Mazonij expo&longs;itio nulla e&longs;t, cuiu&longs;libet enim montis etiam medio­cris altitudinis Sol illu&longs;trat non &longs;olum tertiam partem, &longs;ed & dimidium, & duas tertias, & ferè totum, antequam ad planam illius ba&longs;im de&longs;cendat. 4797 4798 Ego &longs;ic exponendum cen&longs;eo, vt Ari&longs;t. 4799 4800 dicat, mane, ide&longs;t initio Crepu&longs;culi matutini, & ve&longs;pere, ide&longs;t, in fine Crepu&longs;culi ve&longs;pertini ip&longs;ius tertiam par­tem illuminatam con&longs;pici ab ijs, quorum horizonti tunc incipit, vel de&longs;init Crepu&longs;culum; ex quibus illi nece&longs;&longs;ariò re&longs;pectu Cauca&longs;i &longs;unt occidentales, quì manè hoc vident, vti &longs;unt ij, qui in Euxino, &longs;eu Ponto, & Meotide naui­gant, vel loca proxima inhabitant: illi verò, qui in fine Crepu&longs;culi ve&longs;per­tini hoc cernunt, nece&longs;&longs;ariò re&longs;pectu Cauca&longs;i erunt orientales. 4801 4802 Alter huius loci &longs;en&longs;us e&longs;t, ait Mazonius, vt non de tertia montis parte, &longs;ed de tertia noctis portione loquatur, ita vt manè. 4803 4804 v. g. initio tertiæ, & vltimæ noctis parte, cacumen Cauca&longs;i illuminetur. 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 hæc ille. 4811 4812 vbi animaduertendum expo­&longs;itionem hanc parùm differre à no&longs;tra modò allata, cùm vtraque in idem tem­pus recidat; nam &longs;i dixerimus initio Crepu&longs;culi matutini illuminari ter­tiam partem Cauca&longs;i, tempus hoc coincidit cum initio tertiæ partis noctis, quantitas enim Crepu&longs;culi in poli eleuatione 47. grad. qualem habet Cau­ca&longs;us, per totam æ&longs;tatem tres horas plus minus continet, vt patet ex tabu­la quantitatis Crepu&longs;culi, quæ e&longs;t apud Nonium, & apud Clauium in &longs;phæ­ra vltimæ editionis; quæ quantitas reperiri geometrico calculo pote&longs;t, vt docent Nonius, Clauius, & Maginus lib. 4813 4814 10. primi mob. 4815 4816 4817 4818 quod quidem trium circiter horarum tempus e&longs;t tertia ferè noctis pars in ijs regionibus, quibus polus eleuatur 47. grad. &longs;iue ergo dicamus id contingere initio Crepu&longs;culi, &longs;iue initio tertiæ partis noctis, erit idem tempus, trium &longs;cilicet horarum. 4819 4820 4821 4822 &longs;i ergo, inquit Mazonius, &longs;equamur priorem declarationem, nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t dicere, quod ea tertia pars montis, quæ initio auroræ Solis lumine per­funditur, &longs;it ea montis altitudo, qua ip&longs;e exuperat illam aeris regionem, vnde Crepu&longs;culum incipit apparere. 4823 4824 quo po&longs;ito aptè, ac &longs;agaciter altitudi­nem Cauca&longs;i inue&longs;tigat hoc pacto. 4825 4826 præmittit autem &longs;eptem propo&longs;itiones apud Mathematicos manife&longs;tas, quas ego mi&longs;&longs;as facio cum non mihi nece&longs;­&longs;ariæ videantur. 4827 4828 po&longs;tea &longs;ic di&longs;currit; His ergo ita &longs;e habentibus, dico nos in­uenire po&longs;&longs;e viam, qua &longs;altem rudi Minerua, montis altitudinem comper­tam habeamus. 4829 4830 &longs;i enim in principio Crepu&longs;culi v. g. matutini (ita enim, vt &longs;upra annotaui intelligendus e&longs;t Ari&longs;t.) illuminatur tertia pars, nece&longs;&longs;arium vidctur tertiam illam partem &longs;upra cam regionem collocari, ex qua Cre­pu&longs;culum in planitie apparere incipit, &longs;ed illa regio ex Alhazino, & Vitell. de Crepu&longs;culis milliaribus 52. à terra recedit, ergo duæ tertiæ montis par­tes, quæ Solem initio auroræ non vident, &longs;unt 52. milliaria ad perpendicu­lum, & tertia alia pars illuminata e&longs;t ad perpendiculum 26. milliaria: ita vt totius montis altitudo perpendicularis &longs;it 78. mill. &longs;ed papè in quos acu­leos imprudens me conieci? 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 rident enim hoc Ari&longs;t. 4841 4842 dictum Mathematici, putant enim eum pueriliter lap&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e. 4843 4844 Cæterum ego pro præceptoris tu­rela, dico eum &longs;equutum e&longs;&longs;e famam. 4845 4846 hæc Mazonius, quorum nonnulla in­digent con&longs;ideratione cuiu&longs;modi, &longs;unt illa, quando dicit, nece&longs;&longs;arium vi­detur, quod ea pars &longs;upra eam regionem attollatur, vnde Crepu&longs;culum in planitie apparere ineipit. 4847 4848 videtur enim his verbis velle dicere, quod quan­do habitantibus planitiem, quæ e&longs;t ad pedem montis Cauca&longs;i, vel horizon­tem eiu&longs;dem, incipit Crepu&longs;culum, ij&longs;dem etiam tunc tertia montis pars appareat illuminata; in quo &longs;en&longs;u errat po&longs;tea in colligenda montis altitu­dine, quamuis enim verum e&longs;&longs;et partem illuminatam eminere totam &longs;upra 52. milliaria, non tamen &longs;equitur ip&longs;am &longs;olam eminere, &longs;ed alia etiam pars eminere pote&longs;t, quod &longs;ic geometricè demon&longs;trabo. 4849 4850 de&longs;cribatur enim figura

illa, qua ad vaporum altitudines indagandas vtuntur Alhazenus, Vitellio, & Clauius, in qua terræ globus e&longs;t F L G E, regiò vaporum, & exhalatio­num M X N T. horizon a&longs;tronomicus O P. phy&longs;icus Q R, tangens terram in puncto F, vbi etiam ponendus e&longs;t huius horizontis habitator, vnà cum. 4851 4852 Cauca&longs;o F V. 4853 4854 Sol A B C, qui initio Crepu&longs;culi infra horizontem O P, depri­mitur gr. 18. vti ab A&longs;tronomis compertum e&longs;t, hoc e&longs;t, arcum D P, e&longs;&longs;e grad. 18. radius autem C I K, tangens terram, incipit illuminare halitus, qui &longs;unt ad K, in extremo horizonte &longs;en&longs;ibili F K. quique po&longs;&longs;unt videri ab oculo in F, ide&longs;t ab huius horizontis habitatore. 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 Cæterùm prædicti autho­res po&longs;t longam ratiocinationem ex calculo planorum triangulorum tandem o&longs;tendunt in triangulo H F K, latus H K, continere milliaria 3631. ex quo detracta H L, &longs;emidiametro terræ, quæ e&longs;t milliar, 3579. reliqua L K, &longs;um­ma halitunm eleuatio relinquatur 52. milliar. 4861 4862 quibus ab ip&longs;is demon&longs;tra­tis, &longs;i H F, terræ &longs;emidiameter, quæ continet milliar. 4863 4864 3579. ponatur &longs;inus totus 100000. & latus F K, ponatur tangens anguli ad H, quem pr&ecedil;dicti au­thores probant e&longs;&longs;e grad. 8. 54. erit F K, tangens partium 15659. fiat igi­tur per 2. pro. 4865 4866 4867 4868 trjang. 4869 4870 rectil. 4871 4872 Clauij;

vt H F, &longs;inus totus,ad milliar.ita tangens F K,ad milliar.100000.3579.15659.560.

4873 4874 & inueniemus per auream regulam latus F K, continere milliar. 4875 4876 560. quan­ta &longs;cilicet e&longs;t di&longs;tantia ab oculo no&longs;tro ad exhalationes Crepu&longs;culi initium efficientes. 4877 4878 Con&longs;ideremus iam triangulum F K V, vt ip&longs;ius latus F V, quæ e&longs;t Cauca&longs;i altitudo, in milliaribus innote&longs;cat. 4879 4880 iam ip&longs;ius latus F K, inno­tuit, angulus verò ad F, e&longs;t rectus; at angulus ad K, &longs;ic manife&longs;tabitur; in quadrilatero F K I H, quatuor anguli &longs;unt æquales 4. rectis ex 32. primi. 4881 4882 duo autem F, & I, &longs;unt recti ex 18. 3. ergo reliqui duo H, & K, æquales erunt duo­bus rectis, quorum alter H, e&longs;t gr. 17. 48. vt præditi Mathematici o&longs;tendunt, reliquus igitur ad K, erit gr. 162. 12. vt compleat duos rectos. 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 qui &longs;i detra­hatur à duobus rectis, qui &longs;unt deinceps ad lineam F K, reliquus angulus F K V, erit gr. 17. 48. &longs;i ergo latus F K, notum ponatur &longs;inus totus 100000. latus verò F V, tangens anguli noti, erit ip&longs;a 32100. fiat igitur, 4889 4890

vt F K, &longs;inus totus,ad milliar.ita F V, tangensad milliar.100000.560.32100.180.

4891 4892 inueniemusque; latus F V, continere milliar. 4893 4894 180. cuius pars F X, quæ e&longs;t in­fra habituum altitudinem continet milliar. 4895 4896 52. quibus detractis ex 180. re­manent 128. pro tota X V, quæ tota e&longs;t &longs;upra vapores, nondum tamen illu­minata. 4897 4898 vnde patet Mazonium erra&longs;&longs;e in colligenda hoc modo Cauca&longs;i al­titudine, ex prima Crepu&longs;culi illuminatione in horizonte Cauca&longs;i facta, cum ex præmi&longs;&longs;o calculo con&longs;tet partem montis F V, totam tunc temporis e&longs;&longs;e tenebro&longs;am, quamuis &longs;uperet multò regionem vaporum, contrà quàm ip&longs;e putabat, &longs;uperat enim eam milliar. 4899 4900 128. quare duæ tertiæ montis erunt non 52. mill. vt ip&longs;e ait, &longs;ed mill. 180. & proinde tota altitudo erit mill. 270. quod &longs;anè ridiculum e&longs;t, cum nullius montis altitudo &longs;e&longs;quimilliare tran­&longs;cendat. 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 Quod &longs;i &longs;equamur alteram expo&longs;itionem, vt nimirum Ari&longs;tor. lo­quatur non de tertia montis parte, &longs;ed noctis, ita vt dicat, circa initium tertiæ partis noctis apicem montis illu&longs;trari, altitudo eius erit tantum­modo 180. quot continet latus F V. vt vidimus, quæ quamuis illa minor &longs;it, adhuc tamen ab&longs;urda e&longs;t. 4909 4910

4911 4912 Si verò dixerimus Ari&longs;t. 4913 4914 intelligere hæc omnia, non re&longs;pectu horizontis Cauca&longs;i, &longs;ed alterius, cuius habitator in principio &longs;ui Crepu&longs;culi tertiam Cauca&longs;i partem iam illu&longs;tratam videat, vti accideret &longs;i Cauca&longs;us &longs;tatuere­tur in L K, vbi incipit Crepu&longs;culum habitanti in F. tunc e&longs;&longs;et altitudo tanta, quanta colligit Mazonius, &longs;i tamen Ari&longs;t. 4915 4916 intelligatur de tertia montis par­te; e&longs;t enim L K, altitudo habituum 52. mill. & duæ tertiæ montis, quare totus mons erit 78. &longs;i autem intelligatur circa tertiam noctis partem, mon­tis apicem illuminatum videri ab habitatore F, &longs;ic altitudo eins erit tan­tummodo 52. mill. quæ tamen adhuc omnem veritatem nimium &longs;uperat. 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 Cum ergo hinc inde &longs;equantur ab&longs;urda, putat Mazonium excu&longs;andum e&longs;&longs;e Ari&longs;tot. dicendo eum &longs;equutum e&longs;&longs;e famam, loquutumque; e&longs;&longs;e populariter. 4923 4924 4925 4926 Verumenimuerò &longs;apientiores iudicent num rectè philo&longs;ophus, cuius e&longs;t re­condita, atque abdita docere, excu&longs;etur, &longs;i dicatur, eum, popularem famam &longs;equutum e&longs;&longs;e.

4927 4928 Tandem monendus mihi Lector e&longs;t, in demon&longs;tratione Magini, quæ e&longs;t apud Mazonium &longs;ect. 4929 4930 4. citati operis; a&longs;&longs;umi radium Solis tangentem terræ globum, qui cum horizonte faciat angulum gr. 18. quod fal&longs;um e&longs;t, &longs;olus enim radius centralis, qui à centro Solis ad centrum terræ ducitur talem facit angulum, atque hac de cau&longs;a ip&longs;e colligit altitudinem no&longs;tra maiorem; no&longs;tra e&longs;t 270. mill. &longs;ua verò 276. vbi etiam, &longs;icut & nos a&longs;&longs;umit horizon­tem Cauca&longs;i. 4931 4932 4933 4934

4935 4936 Aduertendum tandem Mazonium admodum aduer&longs;antia loquutum e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ect. 4937 4938 enim 3. demon&longs;tratinè concludit altitudinem 76. mill. &longs;ect. 4939 4940 4941 4942 verò 4. &longs;i­mul cum Magino demon&longs;tratiuè pariter colligit altitudinem eiu&longs;dem 276. m. 4943 4944 quæ nimis ab innicem di&longs;crepant, cum tamen vtrobique demon&longs;tret, & ve­ritas &longs;it vna. 4945 4946 At verò cau&longs;a huius di&longs;crepantiæ e&longs;t, quòd &longs;ect. 4947 4948 3. accipit Cre­pu&longs;culum non horizontis Cauca&longs;i, &longs;ed illius, in cuius extremitate orientali, vbi incipit Crepu&longs;culum, Cauca&longs;us &longs;itus &longs;it, di&longs;tetque; ab habitatore 560. m. 4949 4950 vt &longs;upra o&longs;tendimus. 4951 4952 &longs;ect. 4953 4954 verò 4. accipit horizontem ip&longs;ius Cauca&longs;i, vt ex figura illic de&longs;cripta videre e&longs;t. 4955 4956 ex hac igitur horizontum varia &longs;uppo&longs;itio­ne, varia etiam altitudo colligitur, quamuis vtrobique ex vtraque &longs;uppo&longs;itio­ne vtramque altitudinem rectè concludat. 4957 4958 Atque hæc de Cauca&longs;o &longs;ufficiant.

4959 4960

4961 4962 149

4963 4964 Eodem cap. (Ex Pyreneo autem, hic autem est mons ad occidentem æquino­ctiaiem in Gallia, flaunt l&longs;ter, & Tarte&longs;&longs;us, iste quidem extra columnas, I&longs;ter au­tem per totam Europam in Pontum Euxmum) Ari&longs;t. 4965 4966 fortè &longs;equutus e&longs;t Herodo­tum, qui falsò tradit I&longs;trum, &longs;ine Dannbium ex Pyreneis de&longs;luere, nam Iu­ce clarius con&longs;tat ip&longs;um ex ijs Alpibus, quæ Heluetiorum montes dicuntur, propè Ba&longs;ileam ex Adula monte ortum ducere. 4967 4968 neque verum e&longs;t Tarte&longs;&longs;um, quem & Bœtim alij nominant ex Pyreneis de&longs;cendere. 4969 4970 Tarte&longs;&longs;um hunc Ma­ginus putat e&longs;&longs;e Tagum, cui fauet vocabulorum quali&longs;cunque &longs;imilitudo. 4971 4972 extra tamen columnas Herculis qui&longs;quis &longs;it in Oceanum occidentale illa­bitur. 4973 4974 Igno&longs;cenda &longs;unt i&longs;ta Ari&longs;t. 4975 4976 tunc enim Geographia nondum adoleuerat.

4977 4978

4979 4980 150

4981 4982 Ad finem eiu&longs;dem cap. (Et circa Ligu&longs;ticam non minor Rhodano ab&longs;orbetur quidam fluuius, & iterum egreditur &longs;ecundum alium locum) incompertum & hoc Ari&longs;t. 4983 4984 vt &longs;uperiora, ob Geographiæ illius &longs;eculi imperfectionem, nu&longs;quam enim in tota Liguria quidpiam tale reperitur.

4985 4986 De Terræ rotunditate.

4987 4988

4989 4990 151

4991 4992 Svmma 4. cap. 4993 4994 2. quod e&longs;t de permutatione, & vici&longs;&longs;itudine aquarum, & continentis. 4995 4996 Pergratum Lectori fore exi&longs;timaui, nec alienum ab in&longs;tituto, &longs;i occa&longs;ione huius permutationis maris, ac terræ, rem ex­po&longs;uero &longs;citu digniffimam, quam pridem ob&longs;eruare cœpi, ac in dies ob&longs;eruo, præ&longs;ertim cum nullus præteritorum &longs;criptorum, quod &longs;ciam, eam literis mandauerit: Terræ &longs;cilicet totius molem paulatim reduci ad perfe­ctam &longs;phæricitatem, ita vt aliquando nece&longs;&longs;e &longs;it futurum ip&longs;am à mari inun­dari, atque omninò inhabitabilem reddi. 4997 4998 Prrmum igitur illud ex &longs;acris lite­ris &longs;tatuendum, orbem terræ in &longs;uo primordio fui&longs;&longs;e ab opifice rerum om­nium, figura &longs;phærica donatum, hoc e&longs;t ab&longs;que montium eminentijs, atque vallium depre&longs;&longs;ionibus. 4999 5000 quod patet ex eo, quia tunc tota Mari obtegebatur, ita vt minimè apta e&longs;&longs;et animantibus ad inhabitandum. 5001 5002 redditam verò ha­bitabilem, cum ip&longs;ius conditor quandam ip&longs;ius partem humiliorem, & quan­dam eminentiorem effeci&longs;&longs;et; transferendo nimirum maximam terræ por­tionem ex vno loco in alium, vnde illic maris concauitas, i&longs;tic verò mon­tium &longs;ublimitas emer&longs;it. 5003 5004 quo facto aquæ omnes in loca illa decliuiora &longs;ua &longs;pontè rece&longs;&longs;erunt, quæ aquarum congregatio Mare appellatum e&longs;t. 5005 5006 Hine nonnulli auctores graui&longs;&longs;imi a&longs;&longs;erere non dubitarunt, montes conflatos fui&longs;­&longs;e ex terra illa, quæ locum illum occupabat, quem po&longs;tea maria inua&longs;erunt. 5007 5008 quæ cum ita &longs;int. 5009 5010 &longs;equitur terram nunc e&longs;&longs;e extra naturalem &longs;uam figuram, & propterea in quodam &longs;tatu violento, violentum autem nullum perpetuum. 5011 5012 præ­terea cum terra &longs;it grauior quàm aqua, nulla ratione deberent terræ partes &longs;uperiores a quæ &longs;uperficiem &longs;uperare, cuius tamen contrarium accidit, nam &longs;uperficies ip&longs;a terræ, & multò magis montana loca &longs;uperficiem maris cuiu&longs;­uis non parum &longs;uperant; quæ altera violentia terræ, & aquæ ine&longs;t, & ideò minimè mirum e&longs;t, imò vtriu&longs;que naturæ valdè conueniens terram redire ad pri&longs;tinam, ac primigeniam figuram, ex qua con&longs;ectarium erit aquam quoque &longs;uam pariter illam &longs;ibi primæuam recuperaturam e&longs;&longs;e figuram. 5013 5014 cau&longs;am au­tem re&longs;tauratricem huius terrenæ rotunditatis e&longs;&longs;e aquas tum pluuiales, tum fluuiales iamdiù ob&longs;eruauimus, vt ex &longs;equentibus ob&longs;eruationibus patebit.

5015 5016 Primò, videmus flumina quotidie montium radices corrodere, ac qua&longs;i &longs;uffodere, ita vt pa&longs;&longs;im ex hoc, vel illo monte magnas faciant ruinas, ac pr&ecedil;­cipitia, atque hiac inde prærupti appareant montes, vt meritò legamus apud Iob cap. 5017 5018 14. allunione paulatim terra con&longs;umitur. 5019 5020 humum porrò illam ex montibus delap&longs;am &longs;emper ad loca humiliora fluuij &longs;ecum detrahunt. 5021 5022 Ex continua etiam hac inter montes corro&longs;ione facta manife&longs;tè apparet, flumi­num alueos in montanis modò e&longs;&longs;e humiliores quàm olim, quamuis contra­rium accidat alueis &longs;luuiorum per plana decurrentium, qui modò altiores &longs;unt quam exordio mundi, vt paulò po&longs;t o&longs;tendam. 5023 5024 Illud autem liquidò apparet ex &longs;ignis, &longs;eu &longs;ymbolis, &longs;eu ex &longs;imilitudine terræ, aut lapidis, quæ in alti&longs;&longs;imis fluminum ripis hinc inde pa&longs;&longs;im videntur, quæ indicio &longs;unt montes illos iam olim fui&longs;&longs;e continuos, atque vnam, eandemque; terram continentem, antequamflumen eos ab inuicem &longs;epararet; flumenque; ip&longs;um olim altius, vbi &longs;unt &longs;igna illa ambula&longs;&longs;e; quemadmodum in Pyramo Ciliciæ amne ob&longs;eruauit Strabo, dum libro 12. de illius ripis hæc tradit, mira præterea e&longs;t montis cæ&longs;ura, per quam alueus ducitur; nam quemadmodum in petris per medium &longs;ci&longs;&longs;is contingit, alterius partis depre&longs;&longs;ioribus ita conuenire alterius partis emi­nentias, vt coniungi po&longs;&longs;int: &longs;ic videre e&longs;t imminentes flumini petras vtrin­que ferè v&longs;que ad montis &longs;umma pertendentes duorum, triumuè iugerum &longs;patio concauitates qua&longs;dam eminentijs oppo&longs;itas habere. 5025 5026 hæc Strabo de vno, quod nos in pluribus ob&longs;eruauimus. 5027 5028 Pr&ecedil;terea videmus quotidie pluuias aquas, idem quantum po&longs;&longs;unt efficere, &longs;uperficies montium, eorum maxi­mè, qui coluntur, perpetuò ab&longs;umentes, atque ad loca conuallium deducen­tes. 5029 5030 hinc videre e&longs;t, montes cæteris duriores, vt &longs;unt lapido&longs;i, cæteris altio­res reman&longs;i&longs;&longs;e; quippe qui magis & pluuijs, & fluuialibus aquis &longs;ua duritie ob&longs;titerunt. 5031 5032 idem montani incolæ omnes confirmant, qui omnes aiunt &longs;ibi hanc montium demolitionem iampridem innotui&longs;&longs;e, ex eo quod nonnulli montes olim &longs;ibi impedimento erant, ne arcem, turremuè in vlteriore mon­te &longs;itam con&longs;picerent, quam deinde plures po&longs;t annos intermedio monte depre&longs;&longs;o, commodè videbant. 5033 5034 Ad hæc; antiqua in montium verticibus con­&longs;tituta ædeficia, propterea intercidunt, quia terra hinc, & inde ab aquis paulatim confumpta, deor&longs;umque; delap&longs;a, fundamenta ip&longs;orum nuda primò relinquit; deindé terra etiam ip&longs;a, qua fundamenta innitebatur &longs;en&longs;im de­lap&longs;a, ip&longs;a quoque fundamenta vnà cum toto ædeficio nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t collabi, hu­ius &longs;igna infinita propemodum videri po&longs;&longs;unt; vnum tamen, quod toti orbi confpicuum e&longs;t, non ommittam; Capitolium videlicet Romanum, cuius modo fundamenta tota extant, quæ olim altè &longs;ub terram de&longs;cendebant. 5035 5036 vi­de pulcherrimam hac de re tractationem apud Georgium Agricolam lib. 5037 5038 3. cap. 5039 5040 1. qui amplius addit illud, quod & mihi maximè probatur; flumina ni­mirum producere montes, collesque; hoc modo; vult enim initio mundi non extiti&longs;&longs;e tot particulares montes ab inuicem di&longs;cretos, &longs;ed fui&longs;&longs;e perpetua quædam terræ iuga eminentia quidem, &longs;ed non tot vallibus di&longs;&longs;ecta: v. g. mons no&longs;ter Apenninus erat iugum, &longs;iue dor&longs;um quoddam terræ eminens quidem, &longs;ed nullis vallibus in tot particulares colles, aut montes di&longs;&longs;ectum; &longs;ed po&longs;tquam flumina à &longs;ummitate ip&longs;ius deor&longs;um fluere cœperunt; paula­tim corrodentes humum in dies magis, ac magis effecerunt valles, atque hac ratione in colles, montesque; plurimes totus Apenninus diui&longs;us e&longs;t. 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 hæc de montibus &longs;ufficiant, nunc ad plana de&longs;cendamus.

5047 5048 Contrarium igitur omninò accidere videmus in planis, quoniam eædem aquæ, quæ ex montibus quotidie terram &longs;ecum deducunt, eam ad humilio­ra loca, vt &longs;unt plana, & campe&longs;tria, &longs;iue ibi &longs;int maria, &longs;iue arida, compor­tant, eamque; ibidem deponunt. 5049 5050 hinc videmus antiqua ædeficia in planis locis ex&longs;tructa, e&longs;&longs;e iam penè tota &longs;epulta, contra quam in montanis, cuius exem­plum habes etiam Romæ propè ip&longs;um Capitolium, in Arcu triumphali Sep­timij, qui iam ferè totus ruino&longs;a vndique terra obruitur. 5051 5052 &longs;ic Pantheon. 5053 5054 &longs;ic etiam templa Epi&longs;copalia, quæ plerunque &longs;atis peruetu&longs;ta &longs;unt, admodum infra terram con&longs;piciuntur. 5055 5056 Idem affirmant cœmentarij, & architectores omnes, quibus vbique terrarum, dum in planis ædeficiorum fundamenta ex­canant, occurrit primò terra quædam, quam ip&longs;i motam appellant, quæ li­gnis, ruderibus, ferramentis, numi&longs;matis, &longs;epulturis, varijsque; rebus per­mixta e&longs;t; qua eruta, reperitur terra alia, quam nunquam fui&longs;&longs;e motam, ap­paret, ex eo quod &longs;olida, ac benè compacta &longs;it, neque vllis externis rebus, præ&longs;ertim artificiatis admixta, terra illa, quam motam dicunt, variam va­rijs in locis &longs;ortita e&longs;t altitudinem, prout aquæ plurimum, vel minimum montanæ terræ huc, vel illuc comportarunt: alicubi vt hic Parmæ erit &longs;ex vlnarum, alibi viginti, vt Mutinæ; alibi triginta, vt Romæ, nonnullis in lo­cis. 5057 5058 Comprobatur tandem hæc no&longs;tra ob&longs;eruatio ex arte illa, qua per ea&longs;­dem fluuiales aquas &longs;olent, tam loca depre&longs;&longs;iora per aggerationem paula­tim replere, atque eleuare: quàm etiam altiora per aquarum earumdem cor­ro&longs;ionem deprimere. 5059 5060 qua in arte exercitati&longs;&longs;imum P. Augu&longs;tinum Spernac­ciatum no&longs;træ Societatis videmus modo de mandato Summi Pontificis Pa­dum, ac Renum Bononien&longs;em ob aggerationem &longs;tagnantes in mari emitte­re; cui totus hic no&longs;ter di&longs;cur&longs;us maximè probatur. 5061 5062 5063 5064 Ex quibus omnibus &longs;e­quitur &longs;uperficiem terræ tam montium, quam planorum quotidie variari. 5065 5066 illam nimirum deprimi, hanc attolli. 5067 5068 vnde aliud maximum notandum &longs;e­quitur, videlicet hac tempe&longs;tate non e&longs;&longs;e eandem agrorum &longs;uperficiem, quæ erat antiquitus, cum in montanis agris &longs;it multò humilior, in campe&longs;tribus verò altior, quàm antiqua illa, ac primigenia; quapropter mirum videri non debet, &longs;i quorumdam locorum adeò immutata natura e&longs;t, vt quæ olim genero&longs;a vina ferebant, vel quouis alio e&longs;&longs;ent prædita munere, adeò dege­nerauerint, vt & vina, & alia nullius modò valoris, vel in parua copia pro­ferant. 5069 5070 Quod verò ad marium aggerationem &longs;pectat, dicimus ij&longs;dem aquis magnam arenarum copiam perpetuò impertantibus, fieri aggerationem, hoc e&longs;t littora quotidie magis cre&longs;cere, &longs;eu in mare ingredi, & con&longs;equen­ter mare recedere. 5071 5072 quod primò Ari&longs;t. 5073 5074 te&longs;timonio in hoc cap. 5075 5076 comprobatur, cum quo pariter &longs;entiunt veteres Geographi, & Hi&longs;torici omnes. 5077 5078 Ari&longs;t. 5079 5080 igi­tur in comprobationem huius adducit primò magnam Aegypti aggeratio­nem; pars enim illa Aegypti, quæ Delta, Nilique; donum appellatur ab He­rodoto, ex arenis, & limo, ex Aethyopiæ montibus &longs;imul cum Nilo in mare delabentibus, e&longs;t conflata, atque antiquo littori addita, cui locum paulatim mare ce&longs;&longs;it; e&longs;tque; propterea donum Nili appellata, quod ab ip&longs;o illuc are­nas importante &longs;it facta. 5081 5082 &longs;ecundum, Ari&longs;t. 5083 5084 exemplum e&longs;t Ammonia Regio, cuius humiliora loca. 5085 5086 f. 5087 5088 maritima, palam e&longs;t, inquit, quod aggeratione facta, fiunt &longs;tagna, & continens: &longs;uccedente autem tempore, &longs;tagnans aqua ob nouam aggerationem de&longs;iccata e&longs;t, & iam annihilata. 5089 5090 tertium e&longs;t Meotidis Paludis; At verò, ait, & quæ &longs;unt circa Meotidem Paludem creuerunt allu­uione fluuiorum tantum, vt multò minores magnitudine naues, nunc innare po&longs;&longs;int, quàm anno ab hinc &longs;exage&longs;imo. 5091 5092 quare ex hoc facilè e&longs;t ratiocinari, quod & primò, vt multa &longs;tagnorum, ita & hoc opus e&longs;t fluuiorum, & tan­dem nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t totum fieri &longs;iccum. 5093 5094 quartum e&longs;t illi Bo&longs;phorus Tracius; quod vnà cum præcedentibus &longs;atius e&longs;t apud ip&longs;um, vel potius apud eius expo&longs;i­torem Vicomercatum videre, vt breuitati con&longs;ulatur. 5095 5096 Accedit & Plinij te­&longs;timonium, qui tradit multas terras na&longs;ci, non &longs;olum fluminum inuectu, &longs;ed etiam marium rece&longs;&longs;u; &longs;ic mare ab Ambraciæ portu 10. millia pa&longs;&longs;uum; ab Athenarum verò quinque millia, & alijs in locis plus minu&longs;uè rece&longs;&longs;i&longs;&longs;e &longs;cri­bit. 5097 5098 Huc facit locus quidam Strabonis ex lib. 5099 5100 12. de Pyramo Ciliciæ fluuio: &longs;ic; montes verò egre&longs;&longs;us tantum limum in mare deducit, partim ex Ca­taonia, partim ex Ciliciæ campis, vt huiu&longs;modi de co oraculum feratur;

5101 5102 Tempus erit rapidis olim cum Pyramus vndis In &longs;acram veniet conge&longs;io litore, Cyprum:

5103 5104 hic enim fluuius è regione Cypri in&longs;ulæ in mari influit, &c. 5105 5106 hæc Strabo.

5107 5108 Verùm recentiora non de&longs;unt exempla. 5109 5110 Rauenna olim erat in extremo littore &longs;ita, nunc paulatim aggeratione aucto litore, mare multum ab ea rece&longs;&longs;it. 5111 5112 Patauium pariter, vt fertur mare alluebat, quod modo 25. pa&longs;&longs;uum millibus ab eo di&longs;tat. 5113 5114 Aæ&longs;tuarium ip&longs;um Venetum, ob arenas à varijs &longs;lu­minibus in ip&longs;um immi&longs;&longs;as adeò fundum extulit, vt vix amplius nauigatio­ni &longs;it aptum, periculamque; &longs;it ne Venetiarum mirabilis locus, ex maritimo fiat terre&longs;tris. 5115 5116 demum exemplum &longs;it Bononien&longs;ium Renus, qui quamuis exi­guus &longs;it torrens, paucis tamen annis Padum ip&longs;um, in quem immi&longs;&longs;us fue­rat arena ita repleuit, vt & &longs;ibi, & Pado magno vicinorum agrorum damno viam in mare ob&longs;truxerit. 5117 5118 Cum igitur mare ob hanc adaggerationem co­gatur &longs;e quotidie magis recipere, fiatque; propterea alueus ip&longs;ius angu&longs;tior, atque clatior, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t etiam ip&longs;am quoque maris aquam quotidie magis coangu&longs;tari, atque attolli, & aliquando futurum, vt exundare incipiat. 5119 5120 quod iam pleri&longs;que in locis accidit, vt in littore Baltico, Danico, & Hollandico, quibus in locis &longs;unt hac tempe&longs;tate extructi prælongi, ac præalti aggeres contra maritimas innundationes: quibus antiquitus minimè fui&longs;&longs;e opus hi­&longs;toricorum, ac Geographorum &longs;ilentium comprobat. 5121 5122 Hoc igitur modo ter­ra, qua montes, collesque; con&longs;tant paulatim ab aquis in maris concauitates deportata, cau&longs;a e&longs;t, vt mare &longs;en&longs;im modo hac, modo illac, terræ &longs;uperfi­ciei &longs;uperfundatur, terraque; iterum, quemadmodum exordio mundi inhabi­tabilis reddatur: quod tunc maximè accidct cum aquæ tam fluuiales, quàm pluuiæ, &longs;uper faciem terræ perpetuò di&longs;currentes, totam illam montanam terram in pri&longs;tinum locum, vbi ab initio fuerat, vndeque; &longs;ublata fuit, re&longs;ti­tuerint; tunc terra erit iterum rotunda, & &longs;phærica, hoc e&longs;t &longs;uæ primigeniæ iterum figuræ re&longs;tituetur: quapropter mare etiam rur&longs;us &longs;icut initio mundi totam terræ faciem circumquaque innundabit, quod probare volebam.

5123 5124 Tantum æui mutare potest longæua vetu&longs;tas.

5125 5126 Hinc nonnulla colligi po&longs;&longs;unt non minus notatu, ac &longs;citu, quàm præceden­tia digni&longs;&longs;ima, quibus Ethnicorum Philo&longs;ophorum error redarguatur, &longs;ides verò no&longs;tra magis roboretur: mundum nimirum ab æterno neutiquam ex­titi&longs;&longs;e, vel &longs;altem terram ab æterno non fui&longs;&longs;e hac figura præditam, qua nunc videmus, ncc mundum perpetuò duraturum. 5127 5128 nam &longs;i hæc montuo&longs;a illi figu­ra ab æterno ine&longs;&longs;et, iampridem tota illa montium tubero&longs;itas fui&longs;&longs;et ab aquis exæ&longs;a, & con&longs;umpta: neque æterna erit, quia &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;u temporis, vt pro­bauimus, reducetur ad rotunditatem, atque à mari innun dabitur, & idcircò inhabitabilis, vnde nece&longs;&longs;ariò mortalium genus interibit. 5129 5130 Quapropter ni&longs;i igne illo, quem &longs;acræ literæ innuunt catacly&longs;mus ille præueniatur, aqua mundus interiturus e&longs;&longs;et. 5131 5132 &longs;ed de his hactenus.

5133 5134 Quoad magnum illud Diluuium, quod Ari&longs;t. 5135 5136 hoc capite exi&longs;timat po&longs;t multa &longs;ecula reuolui, hoc veritati e&longs;&longs;e con&longs;entaneum argumento &longs;unt, ac pariter admirationi varia conchiliorum genera, quæ tùm in Apennino mon­te, tùm in Alpibus ob&longs;eruaui; Ìdemque; in alijs mundi partibus inueniri pu­to; præ&longs;ertim in tam immen&longs;a copia, atque intra vi&longs;cera montium colloca­ta, quæ nulla vis humana illuc contuli&longs;&longs;er, ni&longs;i temporibus catacly&longs;mi ebul­lientibus aquis maris &longs;uper terram facta fui&longs;&longs;et hæc varia rerum maritima­rum cum terre&longs;tribus commixtio: quæ quidem optimè ex Pomponio Mela comprobantur, qui libro 1. de Numidia &longs;ic narrat: interius, & longè &longs;atis à litore, &longs;i fides res capit, mirum admodum, &longs;pinæ pi&longs;cium, Muricum, O&longs;treo­rumque; fragmenta, &longs;axi atritu, vti &longs;olent fluctibus, & non differentia mari­nis, infixæ cautibus anchoræ, aliaque; huiu&longs;modi &longs;igna, & ve&longs;tigia effu&longs;i olim v&longs;que ad ea loca pelagi, in campis nihil alentibus e&longs;&longs;e inuenirique narrantur. 5137 5138 neque locus ille Ouid. Met. 15. extra rem: 5139 5140 5141 5142

5143 5144 Vidi ego, quod fuerat olim &longs;olidi&longs;&longs;ima petra E&longs;&longs;e fretum, vidi fact as ex æquore terras: Et procul à Pelago conchæ iacuere marinæ, Et vetus inuenta e&longs;t in montibus anchora &longs;ummis.

5145 5146 Nos autem Chri&longs;tiani ad Noemi Diluuium i&longs;ta referre debemus.

5147 5148 Ex Secundo Meteororum.

5149 5150

5151 5152 152

5153 5154 5155 Cap. 1. ait multa e&longs;&longs;e maria, quæ ad inuicem non communicant. 5156 5157 5158 Eorum rubrum mare vnum e&longs;&longs;e; quod cum Oceano Atlantico, qui e&longs;t extra Herculeum fretum ad occidentem parum videtur com­mi&longs;ceri &longs;iue Ari&longs;t. 5159 5160 pro Rubro mari intelligat Oceanum illum, qui Arabiam, ac Per&longs;iam alluit, &longs;iue illius &longs;inum, qui Arabiam, atque Aethiopiam interluit, fal&longs;um e&longs;t ip&longs;um parum communicare cum occidentali Oceano, vt quotidianis Lu&longs;itanorum nauigationibus ad Indos patet. 5161 5162 &longs;ed meritò hoc Ari&longs;tot. condonandum, cum tunc temporis nondum tota Africa e&longs;&longs;et certò circumlu&longs;trata, neque iter ab Hi&longs;pania ad Indos maritimum, adeo nunc fre­quens, patefactum e&longs;&longs;et. 5163 5164

5165 5166

5167 5168 153

5169 5170 Summæ 2. cap. 5171 5172 2. (Quapropter & circa Orionis orturm maximè fit tranquilli­tas) quando Medici, Philo&longs;ophi, Poetæ, ac reliqui auctores loquuntur de ortu a&longs;trorum fixorum, aut con&longs;tellationum, quæ &longs;unt in firmamento, vti e&longs;t Orion (& Canis, de quo po&longs;tea) intelligunt &longs;emper de ortu ip&longs;orum, qui fit matutino tempore, quando &longs;cilicet vel &longs;imul cum Sole, vel paulò ante Solem emergunt, ita vt videantur à nobis; qui ortus dicitur Co&longs;micus, tunc propriè, quando &longs;imul a&longs;trum cum Sole oritur; quando autem incipit appa­rere manc ante Solem, dicitur ortus Heliacus. 5173 5174 i. 5175 5176 &longs;olaris, quia oritur quodam­modo ex radijs Solis, &longs;ub quibus antea latebat. 5177 5178 A&longs;tra verò incrrantia, & planetæ Sole tardiores oriuntur vtroque modo. 5179 5180 nam cùm ip&longs;a Sol, quippe il­lis velocior primum a&longs;&longs;equitur, ea &longs;uo lumine obtegit, e&longs;tque; hic occa&longs;us eo­rum heliacus: cum verò eadem præterierit, ac po&longs;t &longs;e reliquerit fit, vt mo­tu diurno toto cœlo conuer&longs;o, mane ante Solem effulgeant, &longs;iue heliacè oriantur: & cum quotidie magis Sol ab illis recedat, ip&longs;aque magis à Sole elongentur, fit, vt quotidie magis ortum Solis anticipent, & citius mane au­te Solem videantur. 5181 5182 &longs;icque; tanto in dies citius, vt deinde media etiam nocte oriantur; tum ante mediam noctem po&longs;tea paulò ante occa&longs;um Solis. 5183 5184 de­mum cum fuerint Soli oppo&longs;ita, occidente Sole oriantur, qui ortus dicitur Ve&longs;pertinus, vel Acronicus. 5185 5186 po&longs;tea oriuntur &longs;emper in die ante Solis occa­&longs;um, donec Sol ip&longs;a iterum a&longs;&longs;equatur, eaque; radijs &longs;uis offu&longs;cet, quod e&longs;t he­liacè occidere; & mox cum ip&longs;o Sole occumbant, quod Acronicè e&longs;t occi­dere. 5187 5188 Totum porrò illud tempus, quo per diem oriuntur, non eorum ortui, &longs;ed occa&longs;ui deputatur, eò quod non cernuntur oriri, vt &longs;equenti loco expli­cabitur. 5189 5190 Quæ omnia adhibito Globo a&longs;tronomico, in quo con&longs;tellationes omnes depictæ &longs;unt, eoque; ad tui poli eleuationem con&longs;tituto, appo&longs;itoque Sole &longs;uo loco in Zodiaco, qui paulatim per Zodiacum orientem ver&longs;us gra­diatur, & interim diurno motu globus conuertatur, ad &longs;en&longs;um manife &longs;ta apparebunt. 5191 5192 In &longs;umma auctores intelligunt de ortu, qui mane fit ante So­lem, quia tunc primum po&longs;t diuturnas latebras incipit apparere. 5193 5194 non autem intelligunt de ortu Acronico, quia ante hunc ortum videbatur noctu, itaque ortu Acronico non fit noua apparitio; ideo de hoc non intelligunt. 5195 5196 fit au­tem ortus hic Orionis, heliacus, & matutinus, de quo Ari&longs;t. 5197 5198 hoc loco, & alij auctores, no&longs;tra hac tempe&longs;tate paulò ante Solis ingre&longs;&longs;um in Cancrum, &longs;i­ue ante &longs;ol&longs;titium æ&longs;tiuum circa 22. Iunij.

5199 5200 154

5201 5202 Eodem cap. (Incertus autem, & mole&longs;tus Orion e&longs;&longs;e videtur & occumbens, & oriens, quia in tran&longs;mutatione temporis accidit occa&longs;us, & ortus, a&longs;tate, aut hye­me, & propter magnitudinem a&longs;tri dierum &longs;it aliqua pluralitas) hoc loco Vico­mercatus ex &longs;ententia a&longs;tronomorum occa&longs;um Orionis fieri autumni tem­pore, Sole Scorpionem ob&longs;idente docet, quod & verba Ari&longs;t. 5203 5204 clarè &longs;ignifi­cant, cum dicat ortum ip&longs;ius fieri æ&longs;tate; in tran&longs;mutatione verò temporis, videlicet in autumno fieri occa&longs;um. 5205 5206 Porrò occa&longs;us hic fieri incipit primum mane oriente Sole, diciturque; occa&longs;us co&longs;micus, quia dum Sol e&longs;t in oriente, Orion e&longs;t in occidente, & infra orizontem cadit: deinde paulò ante Solis or­tum, &longs;ed tamen nocturno tempore, ita vt occa&longs;us eius videri po&longs;&longs;it, donec occidat parum po&longs;t Solis occa&longs;um, & tandem cum Sole ip&longs;o heliacè euane­&longs;cat. 5207 5208 Scriptores autem ferè &longs;emper cum loquuntur de occa&longs;u inerrantium &longs;yderum, de eo, qui noctu videatur, intelligunt: &longs;icuti ortum intelligunt eum, qui noctu fit, noctuque; videtur. 5209 5210 affixa namque &longs;ydera per fex fermè men­&longs;es noctu oriuntur, oririque; ea con&longs;picimus, & propterea totum illud tem­pus, ortui ip&longs;orum deputamus: Reliquum verò tempus, quo per diem oriun­tur, & idcircò ortus illorum minimè apparet, nulla ratione ortui debuit a&longs;cribi: totum verò tempus, quo noctu occidunt, & occidere cernuntur, oc­ca&longs;ui illorum meritò attribuitur. 5211 5212 & quemadmodum temporis illius initium, quo primo de nocte apparere incipiunt, dicitur ab&longs;olutè ortus cuiu&longs;uis &longs;y­deris; &longs;ic etiam initium temporis illius, quo primum per noctem ea occide­re videmus, &longs;impliciter occa&longs;um appellamus.

5213 5214

5215 5216 155

5217 5218 Eodem cap. (Ete&longs;iæ autem flant post ver&longs;iones, & Canis ortum) per ver&longs;io­nes intelligit tropicos, quod & tropici etymon confirmat, cum tropicus idem valeat, ac conuer&longs;iuus. 5219 5220 circa Canis ortum eadem &longs;unt notanda, quæ &longs;upra de ortu Orionis annotaui; intelligit enim eum Canis ortum, qui mane fiat primum paulò ante Solis ortum, cum &longs;cilicet incipit apparere.

5221 5222 Cum porrò in c&ecedil;lo &longs;it Canis maior, & Canis minor, qui & Procyon, ide&longs;t Anticanis dicitur, exi&longs;timo Canem maiorem e&longs;&longs;e eum, qui vulgò Canicula nominatur, &longs;oletque; vehementes, ac noxios calores excitare. 5223 5224 de quo etiam putò Ari&longs;t. 5225 5226 intelligere. 5227 5228 eius porrò ortus in no&longs;tra poli eleuatione quadra­ginta quinque graduum, circa diem tertium Augu&longs;ti contingit, Sole autem 10. gradum Leonis occupante. 5229 5230 Ex Magini tabulis ante ephemerides.

5231 5232

5233 5234 156

5235 5236 Eodem cap. (Duobus enim exi&longs;tentibus &longs;egmentis habitabilis regionis: vno quidem ad &longs;uperiorem polum, qui no&longs;ter e&longs;t; altero ad alterum, & ad meridiem: eaque, tympani &longs;peciem habeant, talem enim figuram terræ excidunt ex centro ip&longs;ius ductæ lineæ, & faciunt duos conos, bunc quidem habentem ba&longs;im tropicum, alte­rum autem habentem ba&longs;im circulum &longs;emper manifestum, verticem autem in me­dio terræ. 5237 5238 eodem autem modo ad inferiorem polum alij duo coni terræ &longs;egmenta fa­ciunt) vt benè duas ha&longs;ce terræ portiones, quas &longs;olas habitabiles putat Ari­&longs;tot. concipias, reliquaque huius loci intelligas, in&longs;pice &longs;equentem figuram.

Maior circulus &longs;it cœlum, in quo polus L, articus; M, antarticus, ille eleua­tus &longs;upra no&longs;trum horizontem S N, 45. gradibus, i&longs;te verò totidem infra depre&longs;&longs;us. 5239 5240 5241 5242 &longs;intque; diametri circuli &longs;emper apparentium maximi S R, necnon diametri &longs;emper occultorum maximi Y N: tropicorum item T Q, Cancri, X O, Capricorni, vt vides in figura. 5243 5244 Terra &longs;it A B C H G F E D Z K. à cu­ius centro Z, educantur primo duæ lineæ rectæ Z R, Z S. ad circulum &longs;em­per apparentium maximum, quæ in terra tran&longs;eant per puncta B, K. & iun­gatur linea B K: iam vides conum S R Z, cuius ba&longs;is e&longs;t circulus &longs;emper ap­parens S R, vertex autem Z, in centro terræ, vt ait Ari&longs;tot. 5245 5246 educantur nunc duæ aliæ rectæ ad tropicum Cancri Z T, Z Q, quæ in terra faciant puncta I, C, iungaturque; recta I C; hic pariter vides conum alterum T Q Z, cuius ba­&longs;is e&longs;t circulus Cancri, vertex verò centrum terræ Z. con&longs;idera iam figuram B K I C, inter duas rectas B K, I C, & duos circuli terræ arcus contentam; hanc Ari&longs;t. 5247 5248 appellat tympanum vnum terræ habitabile, quod e&longs;t ad Vr&longs;am, ide&longs;t in &longs;eptentrionali plaga, in qua &longs;umus nos: quæ quidem portio &longs;i con&longs;i­deretur vt &longs;olida, & à reliqua terra præci&longs;a, erit corpus rotundum, vtrinque tamen duobus planis circulis ad in&longs;tar tympani terminatum: Ductis dein­de &longs;imiliter alijs quattuor lineis à centro Z, ver&longs;us polum antarticum fit al­terum tympanum H D E G, au&longs;tralis terræ habitabilis, vt in figura manife­&longs;tum e&longs;t. 5249 5250 fui&longs;&longs;e autem huiu&longs;modi habitabilis terræ &longs;egmenta figuræ tympa­ni &longs;imilia, optimè declarant veteres figuræ geographicæ Ptol&ecedil;mei, & patet etiam ex longitudine, & latitudine, vt benè ait Ari&longs;t. 5251 5252 quas Geographi por­tioni terræ habitabili attribuebant, longitudinem enim dixerunt eius di­men&longs;ionem ab occa&longs;u ad ortum: latitudinem autem à &longs;eptentrione in meri­diem, eò quòd illa multò hac longior e&longs;&longs;et. 5253 5254 Ex quibus apparet habitatam fui&longs;&longs;e veluti Zonam, terram ab occa&longs;u ad ortum præcingentem. 5255 5256 quæ Zona &longs;i &longs;umatur cum &longs;oliditate, quam ambit, ab Ari&longs;t. 5257 5258 tympano a&longs;&longs;imilatur.

5259 5260

5261 5262 157

5263 5264 Eodem cap. (Hæ autem habitari &longs;olæ po&longs;&longs;ibiles: & neque vltra ver&longs;iones; vm­bra enim non vtique e&longs;&longs;et ad Vr&longs;am: nunc autem inhabitabilia prius fiunt loca, quàm &longs;ubdeficiat, aut permutetur vmbra ad meridiem. 5265 5266 Quæ autem &longs;ub Vr&longs;a, è frigore inhabitabilia) quod ait vltra ver&longs;iones, ide&longs;t intra tropicos in ip&longs;a &longs;cilicet Zona torrida, non po&longs;&longs;e habitari, fal&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e o&longs;tendunt plurimæ regiones tam veteris, quam noui orbis, &longs;uperiori &longs;eculo patefactæ, in quibus magna in amœnitate, ac fertilitate, &longs;ummisque; delicijs viuitur. 5267 5268 Quoad vmbram il­lam, intellige meridianam. 5269 5270 i. 5271 5272 quam Sole circa meridiem exi&longs;tente, nos qui Boreales &longs;umus, &longs;emper ad &longs;eptentrionem proijcimus. 5273 5274 Quod &longs;i ad meridiem perrexerimus, occurret inhabitabilis (vt falsò putat) terra, prius quam. 5275 5276 vmbra meridiana in Boream vergens deficiat. 5277 5278 quæ &longs;igna &longs;unt no&longs;tram habi­tationem e&longs;&longs;e citra Zonam torridam, in Boreali parte. 5279 5280 Quæ autem &longs;ub Vr­&longs;a, ide&longs;t &longs;ub polo arctico, ob nimium frigus inho&longs;pita omninò habetur, nam

5281 5282 Quod latus mundi nebulæ, malusque; Iupiter vrget.

5283 5284 Verumtamen, quæ &longs;ub vtroque polo partes &longs;unt adhuc incognitæ manent.

5285 5286

5287 5288 158

5289 5290 Eodem cap: (Fertur autem, & corona &longs;ecundam hunc locum, videtur enim &longs;u­per caput e&longs;&longs;e nohis, cum fuerit &longs;ecundum meridianum) con&longs;tellatio videlicet, quæ corona Ariadnæ dicitur, hæc cum in cœlo manife&longs;tè &longs;it Borealis, no­&longs;troque; vertici noctu, quando meridianum pertran&longs;it, incumbat: clarè indi­cat nos quoque e&longs;&longs;e Boreales.

5291 5292

5293 5294 159

5295 5296 Eodem cap. (Et quidem ad latitudinem v&longs;que ad inhabitabilia &longs;cimus hahita-tam, hic enim propter frigus non amplius habitant, illic autem propter æ&longs;tum)illic autem, ide&longs;t &longs;ub Zona torrida, compertum autem e&longs;t nunc totam ferè torridam Zonam, & quidem alicubi percommodè habitari, cuius cau&longs;æ &longs;unt quatuor, quæ ip&longs;um latuerunt. 5297 5298 prima eaque; toti Zonæ torridæ communis, e&longs;t perpetuum æquinoctium, quo Sol tantum &longs;upra, quantum infra terram immoratur. 5299 5300 accedit, quòd Sol nocturno tempore maximè ad imum cœli fe­ratur, plurimumque; ab horizonte, &longs;uperoque; hemi&longs;pherio recedat. 5301 5302 atque ob hanc &longs;olam rationem Campanus in &longs;ua &longs;phæra Zonam hanc putat maximè e&longs;&longs;e habitabilem: quamuis hæc &longs;ola cau&longs;a, vt quotidiana docet experientia, non &longs;ufficiat. 5303 5304 &longs;ecunda &longs;unt pluuiæ, quæ alicubi quotidie &longs;tata hora decidunt. 5305 5306 tertia venti, qui veluti flabella quædam aerem agitant. 5307 5308 quarta præalti mon­tes perpetuis niuibus ob&longs;iti. 5309 5310 quæ quatuor torridam hanc pa&longs;&longs;im refrigerant, atque habitabilem reddunt.

5311 5312

5313 5314 160.a

5315 5316 Summæ 2. cap. 5317 5318 3. de ventis (Oportet autem de &longs;itu &longs;imul rationes ex de&longs;criptio ne con&longs;iderare) ide&longs;t rationes ventorum ex de&longs;criptione, ide&longs;t in figura ali­qua, vt in &longs;equenti con&longs;iderare; &longs;olet enim Ari&longs;t. 5319 5320 figuras, imò demon&longs;tratio­nes ip&longs;as Mathematicorum, de&longs;criptiones appellare, vt &longs;æpius in Logicis monuimus.

5321 5322 De&longs;criptus &longs;it igitur, vt clarior res euadat horizontis circulus quapropter, & rotundus) vt in &longs;equenti figura circulus A G B H, de&longs;criptus horizontem referret,

5323 5324 Oportet autem ip&longs;ius alteram portionem intelligere, quæ nobis habitatur; quæ eodem modo diuidi poterit) ide&longs;t oportet intelligere ip&longs;ius horizontis, vel ter­ræ habitatæ partem, quæ quamuis rotunda non &longs;it, poterit tamen, ac &longs;i ro­tunda e&longs;&longs;et in figura circulari repre&longs;entari, atque in plures partes eo modo, quo circulus &longs;ecatur, &longs;ecari.

5325 5326 Supponatur autem primò contraria &longs;ecundum locum, e&longs;&longs;e plurimum di&longs;tantia &longs;ecundum locum; &longs;icut &longs;ecundum &longs;peciem contraria, plurimum di&longs;tant &longs;ecundum &longs;peciem. 5327 5328 plurimum autem di&longs;tant &longs;ecundum locum, quæ per diametrum opponuntur, &longs;it igitur vbi A, occidens æquinoctionalis, contrarius autem huic locus vltimus B, ortus æquinoctionalis) ide&longs;t in &longs;equenti figura ducta diametro B A. in altera ip&longs;ius extremitate vbi A. &longs;it occa&longs;us æquinoctialis, qui fit Sole exi&longs;tente in alterutro æquinoctio; huic igitur per diametrum opponatur ortus æquino­ctialis in B. qui pariter contingit tempore æquinoctiorum: linea autem B A, refert ip&longs;um æquatorem.

5329 5330 Alia autem diameter hanc perpendiculariter &longs;ecet, cuius punctum illud, in quo G, &longs;it Vr&longs;a: huic autem contrarium ex oppo&longs;ito illud, in quo H, meridies) hæc dia­meter erit ip&longs;a linea meridiana. 5331 5332 pro Vr&longs;a verò intelligit &longs;eptentrionem, quod ibi &longs;it Vr&longs;æ con&longs;tellatio.

5333 5334 Id autem, in quo F, ortus æ&longs;tiualis; in quo verò E, occidens æ&longs;tiualis) quæ duo puncta iunguntur linea F E, quæ refert &longs;ectionem tropici, Cancri cum ho­rizonte: ortus enim, & occa&longs;us æ&longs;tiualis contingunt Sole Cancri tropicum percurrente.

5335 5336 Id autem, in quo D, oriens byemalis; vbi verò C, occidens hyemalis) linea au­tem D C, erit &longs;ectio tropici Capricorni, & horizontis; Sole enim hunc tro­picum attingente ortus, & occa&longs;us hybernus fiunt.

5337 5338 Ab F, autem ducatur diameter ad C, & à D, ad E. quoniam igitur plurimum di&longs;tantia &longs;ecundum locum, contraria &longs;unt &longs;ecundum locum: plurimum autem di­stantia, quæ &longs;ecundum diametrum; nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t, & flatuum hos inuicem con­trarios e&longs;&longs;e, quicunque &longs;ecundum diametrum exi&longs;tunt. 5339 5340 vocantur autem &longs;ecundum po­&longs;itionem locorum venti &longs;ic; Zephyrus quidem ab A, hoc enim e&longs;t occidens æquino­ctialis. 5341 5342 Boreas autem, & Aparetias à G. hic enim Vr&longs;a, contrarius autem huic Notus ab H. 5343 5344 Meridies enim e&longs;t hic, à quo flat, & H, ip&longs;i G, contrarium e&longs;t; &longs;ecun­dum enim diametrum &longs;unt. 5345 5346 Ab F, autem Cæcias; hic enim oriens æ&longs;tiuus e&longs;t; cui contrarius est, non qui flat ab E, &longs;ed qui à C. Libs, i&longs;te enim ab occidente hyemali flat; estque, illi contrarius, quia &longs;ecundum diametrum illi opponitur. 5347 5348 Qui verò à D, Eurus, i&longs;te enim ab horiente hyberno flat, vicinus existens Noto, vnde & &longs;æpè Eu­ronoti flare dicuntur: contrarius autem huic, non qui à C. Libs, &longs;ed qui ab E, quem vocant, hi quidem Arge&longs;ten, hi autem Olympium, alij verò Scironem; iste enim ab occidente æ&longs;tiuo flat, & &longs;ecundum diametrum ip&longs;i &longs;olus opponitur. 5349 5350 Venti igitur, qui &longs;ecundum diametrum po&longs;iti &longs;unt, & quibus alij aduer&longs;antur, ij &longs;unt. 5351 5352 Alij autem &longs;unt, &longs;ecundum quos non &longs;unt contrarij venti, ab I, quem vocant Tra&longs;ciam, qui me­dius e&longs;t inter Argesten, & Apparitiam, à K, autem, quem vocant Me&longs;en, Mtdius enim e&longs;t Cæciæ, & Aparetiæ. 5353 5354 Diameter autem K I, iuxta circulum &longs;emper con&longs;pi­cuum e&longs;&longs;e &longs;olet, non tamen exactè) ide&longs;t linea K I, &longs;olet in horizonte referre diametrum circuli omnium &longs;emper apparentium maximi, eo quod &longs;it ferè &longs;ub diametro illius, in qualibet enim &longs;phæra obliqua, ide&longs;t, in qua polus cle­natur, intelligunt A&longs;tronomi circulum quendam &longs;emper apparentium ma­ximum, quem de&longs;cribunt ex ip&longs;o polo, tanquam centro, & interuailo v&longs;que ad horizontem, circa ip&longs;um polum: hunc appellant &longs;emper apparentium, maximum, quia intra hunc alios quamplurimos concipiunt circa eundem polum, quorum minores &longs;emper &longs;unt polo propinquiores. 5355 5356 huius igitur dia­metrum vult Ari&longs;t. 5357 5358 per lineam, quæ à K, in I, duceretur (quamuis non exa­ctè) repre&longs;entari.

5359 5360 Contrarij autem non &longs;unt his &longs;latibus, neque ip&longs;i Me&longs;e, &longs;piraret enim vtique aliquis ab eo, in quo M. hoc enim illi e&longs;t &longs;ecundum diametrum; neque Tra&longs;ciæ ab N, enim, quod punctum per diametrum aduer&longs;um illi e&longs;t, &longs;piraret. 5361 5362 Ni&longs;i ab eo veniat, qui ta­men non longè progreditur ventus quidam, quem accolæ Phæniciam vocant. 5363 5364 maxi­mè igitur præcipui, & definiti venti hi &longs;unt: hocque, modo di&longs;po&longs;iti) &longs;upradicta por­rò omnia ex &longs;equenti figura optimè poterunt intelligi, quam diligenti ope­ra ad mentem Ari&longs;t. 5365 5366 ex græcis codicibus re&longs;tituere conatus &longs;um, cum ani­maduerterem figuras val dè deprauatas pa&longs;&longs;im apud commentatores reperiri. 5367 5368 Porrò ad literam M, in figura &longs;crip&longs;i ventum Libonotum, quem Ari&longs;t. 5369 5370 qui­dem non ponit propter ip&longs;ius paruitatem; imò apertè dicit Hele&longs;pontum non habere contrarium: &longs;ed feci, vt completum ventorum numerum, quem alij tradunt, haberemus.

5371 5372 Ex Tertio Meteororum.

5373 5374

5375 5376 160.b

5377 5378 Antequam textuum explicationem aggrediar, illud animaduerten dum e&longs;t, vbicunque interpretatio antiqua vtitur verbis, refractio, & refrangere; ibi Vicomercatum in &longs;ua interpretatione meritò, & propriè v&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e verbis; reflexio, & reflecti: differunt enim valdè apud Opticos refractio, & reflexio, vt etiam refrangere, & reflectere. 5379 5380 propterea optimè hoc loco Olympiodorus di&longs;tinguit inter anaxlasin, xai diaxlasin, reflexionem, & refractionem. 5381 5382 Reflexio enim fit ex repercu&longs;&longs;o, vt quando lumen Solis incidens in aliquod &longs;peculum, inde re&longs;ilit in oppo&longs;itum parietem, illud re&longs;ilire e&longs;t propriè per&longs;pectiuis reflecti, vnde reflexio. 5383 5384 Re­fractio autem fit ex tran&longs;pectu: vt quando lapis, qui e&longs;t in aqua, emittit fuam &longs;peciem ad oculum, qui e&longs;t in aere, tunc enim, quia &longs;pecies lapidis re­pre&longs;entatiua non tendit recta ad oculum, &longs;ed in confinio aquæ, & aeris fran­gitur, dicitur fieri refractio, & refrangi, in refractione igitur requiruntur duo media, per quæ &longs;iat vi&longs;io, quæ &longs;int diuer&longs;æ den&longs;itatis, vt &longs;unt aqua, & aer: vapor, exhalatio, & aer: vitrum, & aer, &c. 5385 5386 quando igitur videmus Solem, aut Lunam per vapores, aut exhalationes fit refractio, quia den&longs;ior e&longs;t vapor, & exhalatio, quam aer.

5387 5388 Notandum etiam Aream, de qua mox dicam explicari po&longs;&longs;e tam per re­flexionem, quàm per refractionem: per reflexionem, quia &longs;upponunt Philo­&longs;ophi e&longs;&longs;e in acre rorido innumcra &longs;pecula parua inuicem valdè proxima, ide&longs;t guttulas, per quas re&longs;lectatur ad oculum no&longs;trum &longs;pecies &longs;yderis. 5389 5390 per re&longs;ractionem verò, vt vult Vitellio, quia &longs;umit totum illum aerem humi­dum magis den&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e aere paro, qui e&longs;t circa oculos no&longs;tros, & hoc modo con&longs;tituit diucr&longs;a media in den&longs;itate, per quam fiat vi&longs;io; corpus inquam illud humidum den&longs;ius, & aerem deinde circa oculum rarius. 5391 5392 Vicomerca­tus igitur quamuis vtatur voce reflexionis in Halone, non tamen ex prædi­ctis videtur reprchenden dus.

5393 5394

5395 5396 161

5397 5398 Summæ 2. cap. 5399 5400 2. De Areæ figura (Refrangitur autem à con&longs;i&longs;tente caligine circa Solem, aut Lunam vi&longs;us; quapropter non ex oppo&longs;ito &longs;icut iris, apparet. 5401 5402 Vn­dique autem &longs;imiliter refracto, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t circulum e&longs;&longs;e, aut circuli partem. 5403 5404 ab co­dem enim &longs;igno ad idem &longs;ignum æquales frangentur &longs;uper circuli lineam &longs;emper. 5405 5406 &longs;it

enim à puncto, in quo A, ad B, fracta, & ea, quæ est A C B, & quæ A F B, & quæ A D B, æquales autem & hæ A C, A F, A D, inuiccm. 5407 5408 & quæ ad B, inui­cem &longs;cilicet C B, E B, D B. & protrahatur A E B, quare trianguli æquales, etenim &longs;uper æqualem, quæ e&longs;t A E B, ducantur autem perpendiculares ad A E B, ex angulis; à C, quidem, quæ e&longs;t C E; ab F, autem, quæ e&longs;t F E; à D, autem, quæ e&longs;t D E, æquales itaque hæ, in æqualibus enim triăgulis, & in vno plano om­nes, ad rectum emm omnes ei, quæ e&longs;t A E B. & ad vnum punctum E, copulantur, circulus igitur erit de&longs;cripta, centrum autem E. &longs;it autem B, quidem Sol, A, autem vi&longs;us, quæ autem e&longs;t circa C D F, circun­ferentia nubes, à qua refrangitur vi&longs;us ad Solem)quia &longs;uppono Aream, &longs;iue Halonem fieri per re­fractionem, vt vult etiam Vitellio, propterea præmittendum e&longs;t principium quoddam, quo tra­ctatio de refractione innititur; e&longs;t autem huiu&longs;­modi; ea, quæ videntur per refractionem, &longs;iue &longs;ub aliquo refractionis angulo, manentibus nobis & a&longs;tro, & medio ij&longs;dem in locis, non po&longs;&longs;unt vide­ri &longs;ub diuer&longs;o angulo à priori, nec per con&longs;equens alibi apparere. 5409 5410 v. g. Sol (vt in præ&longs;enti figura) videatur ab oculo A, media nube C D F, &longs;ub an­gulo refractionis B C A, vel B F A, & alijs &longs;imilibus angulis in eadem nube; manente igitur oculo A, & a&longs;tro B, necnon nube C D E. eodem in loco, im­po&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t Solem videri ab eodem oculo &longs;ub diuer&longs;o angulo à priori, nec con&longs;equenter alibi apparere, quam in B. 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 Nunc ad textus declarationem, in quo continetur Geometrica demon&longs;tratio rotunditatis Areæ, quam &longs;ic bre­uiter prius veteres excogitarunt: Viderunt primò Solem in Area apparere in orbem, & con&longs;imiliter: hinc intulerunt nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;e apparere etiam per con&longs;imiles, &longs;iue æquales refractionis angulos; quia diuer&longs;i anguli, diuer&longs;am etiam apparentiam efficiunt: atqui con&longs;imiles, &longs;iue æquales refractionis an­gulos nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t in circulum con&longs;titui, vt mox con&longs;tabit; cau&longs;a igitur rotun­ditatis huius, e&longs;t angulorum refractionis æqualitas. 5417 5418 Sed iam textum Ari&longs;t. qui geometricam huius rci continet demon&longs;trationem, explicemus. 5419 5420 Suppo­nit igitur primò Ari&longs;t. 5421 5422 lineas vi&longs;uales à &longs;ydere B, ad oculos no&longs;tros A, per nubem roridam C D F, procedentes, in nube con&longs;imiliter refrangi, ide&longs;t vn­dique circa Solem, Lunamuè facere angulos refractionis æquales. 5423 5424 quod etiam patet ex 48. 10. Vitellionis; vt in figura, in qua &longs;ydus B, oculus A, nubes C D F, radij vi&longs;uales tres refracti in nube &longs;int B C A, B D A, B E A, facien­tes con&longs;imilem refractionem, ide&longs;t angulos refractos B C A, B D A, B E A, æquales in punctis C, D, F: atque hoc e&longs;t con&longs;imilem facere refractionem. 5425 5426 Supponit &longs;ecundò lineas à &longs;ydere ad nubem, v&longs;que exten&longs;as e&longs;&longs;e æquales, vt &longs;unt B C, B D, B F: &longs;imiliter reliquas tres à nube ad vi&longs;um A. pares e&longs;&longs;e C A, D A, F A. his &longs;uppo&longs;itis, &longs;i deinde protrahatur recta A B, ab oculo ad &longs;ydus, exurgunt tria triangula omninò æqualia, & &longs;imilia, cuni duo latera vnius &longs;int æqualia duobus alterius vtrunque vtrique, & angulus angulo, & præterea ba&longs;is &longs;it communis; ideò per quartam primi &longs;unt omninò æqualia. 5427 5428 ducan­tur nunc ex angulis C, D, F, tres perpendiculares ad rectam A B, quæ &longs;int C E, D E, F E, in figura; quæ tres nece&longs;&longs;ariò erunt æquales, cum &longs;int ductæ ab angulis æqualibus æqualium triangulorum ad communem ba&longs;im, & di­uident nece&longs;&longs;ariò ba&longs;im in eodem puncto E, cum diuidant triangula æqua­lia proportionaliter; eruntque; propterea hæ tres rectæ in eodem plano, quod in nube concipitur ex 5. 11. Quare &longs;i concipiamus &longs;uperficiem, &longs;iue planum delineari circa E, ad interuallum linearum æqualium C E, D E, F E, de­&longs;criptus erit circulus per 9. tertij, cuius circumferentia C D F. 5429 5430 Ex quibus patet tria illa puncta C, D, E, per quæ Sol tran&longs;paret e&longs;&longs;e in orbem di&longs;po&longs;i­ta. 5431 5432 cau&longs;a igitur rotunditatis Areæ, e&longs;t &longs;imilitudo angulorum refractionis, quibus Sol tran&longs;paret: vel ideo rotunda e&longs;t, quia &longs;imiles anguli nece&longs;&longs;ariò in orbem con&longs;tituuntur, vt o&longs;ten&longs;um e&longs;t. 5433 5434 Eadem ratione omnia alia puncta eiu&longs;dem circunferentiæ &longs;unt puncta, per quæ Sol videtur refractè; & hoc mo­do ad &longs;imilitudinem trium linearum A C B, A D B, A F B, refractarum, in­finitæ vndique intelligendæ &longs;unt, quarum aliæ refrangantur in circunferentia prædicta, aliæ verò in alia periphæria maiori, aliæ etiam in minori, ita vt ex tota nube fiant refractiones circulares plurimæ, ex quibus in nube area con&longs;tituatur. 5435 5436 Atque hæc cur Halonis figura orbicularis videatur, rationem reddunt, vnaque; textui lucem afferunt.

5437 5438 Summæ 2. cap. 5439 5440 4. De Iridis figura.

5441 5442

5443 5444 162

5445 5446 Qvod autem neque circulum po&longs;&longs;ibile &longs;it fieri Iridis, neque maiorem &longs;emicir­culo portionem, & de alijs accidentibus circa ip&longs;am, ex de&longs;criptione erit con&longs;iderantibus manife&longs;tum) In Logicis &longs;æpius monui Ari&longs;t. 5447 5448 per de&longs;criptiones intelligere geometricas demon&longs;trationes, quod etiam hoc loco confirmatur, vbi Geometrica demon&longs;tratione quam de&longs;cri­ptionem appellat, Iridis figuræ accidentia o&longs;tendit; nimirum cur &longs;it quidem circularis, nunquam tamen circulus integer, imò neque &longs;emicirculo vnquam maior, &longs;ed tamen &longs;emicirculo minor.

5449 5450

5451 5452 163

5453 5454 Ibidem (Hemi&longs;pberio enim exi&longs;t exte &longs;uper horizontis circulum in quo A. cen­tro autem K, alio autem quodam oriente puncto, in quo G, &longs;i lineæ, quæ à K, &longs;ecun­dum conum excidentes faciant velut axem lineam in qua G K, & à K. ad M, co­pulatæ refrangantur ab hemi&longs;phærio ad G, &longs;uper maiorem angulum, circuli circun­ferentiam incident lineæ, quæ à K, & &longs;i quidem in ortu, aut in occa&longs;u a&longs;tri reflexio fiat, &longs;emicirculus ab horizonte a&longs;&longs;umetur &longs;uper terram factus. 5455 5456 &longs;i autem &longs;upra, minor

&longs;emper &longs;emicirculo, minus autem, cum in meridie fuerit a&longs;trum) quod &longs;upra monui, iterum moneo, re­tinendam vocem reflexionis, quan­uis in antiqua tran&longs;latione lega­tur refractio, e&longs;t enim apud om­nes in confe&longs;&longs;o Iridem fieri per reflexionem. 5457 5458 E&longs;t igitur in &longs;upe­riori figura, quam textui, vt par erat re&longs;titui, horizon G K O. cuius centrum K. in quo e&longs;t vi&longs;us no&longs;ter, &longs;itque; hemi&longs;phærium no&longs;trum in arcu G A M O, repræ&longs;entatum, &longs;itque; nubes rori­da, in qua Iris appareat, vbi M, quod punctum M, nubem referens, in figu­ra ponitur in hemi&longs;phærij ambitu, quod cœlum repræ&longs;entat, cum tamen nubes parum à terra &longs;ubuchatur; id enim ad demon&longs;trationem ferè perinde e&longs;t. 5459 5460 in oriente G, &longs;it a&longs;trum. 5461 5462 &longs;i ergò lineæ vi&longs;uales à K, ad M, nubem tenden­tes reflectantur &longs;uper maiorem angulum M K G, ad G, erit reflexarum vna veluti M G. 5463 5464 Porro omnes lineæ viluales, quæ adnubem M, incidunt, nece&longs;­&longs;ariò, vt probabo, cadent in ambitum circularem. 5465 5466 debemus enim innume­ras lineas im aginari à K, in coni figuram excidentes, cuius vertex &longs;it in K, & axis G K O, quas omnes repræ&longs;entat vna K M, meliusque; repræ&longs;entabit, fi cogitemus axem G K O, circa polos G, O, manentes circumuolui, &longs;ecumque; lineam K M, circumducere. 5467 5468 in hac etiam giratione linea K M, tran&longs;ibit per omnes illas lineas, quas imaginabamur; de&longs;cribetque; conum, quem illæ con­formare debebant. 5469 5470 In prædicta autem axis volutatione, extremum M, li­neæ K M, nece&longs;&longs;ariò de&longs;cribit circulum, qui e&longs;t circulus Iridis, & e&longs;t ba&longs;is memorati coni.

5471 5472 Si igitur oriente, vel occidente a&longs;tro fiat iris, Iris erit &longs;emicirculus, ide&longs;t illa &longs;emi&longs;&longs;is circuli pr&ecedil;dicti (quem horizon bifariam diuidit) quæ &longs;upra ter­ram extabit. 5473 5474 &longs;i autem a&longs;trum eleuatum &longs;upra horizontem fuerit, quando fit iris, erit &longs;emper arcus Iridis &longs;emicirculo minor; tuncque; minimus cum a&longs;trum meridianum circulum occupauerit. 5475 5476 h&ecedil;c tria &longs;unt, quæ deinceps probanda recipit.

5477 5478

5479 5480 264

5481 5482 Ibidem (Sit enim in oriente pri­mum vbi G, & refracta &longs;it K M, ad G, & planum erectum &longs;it in quo A, à triangulo in quo G K M, cir­culus igitur erit &longs;ectio &longs;phæræ, qui maximus &longs;it in quo A, differet enim mbil &longs;i quodcŭque eorum, quæ &longs;uper G K, &longs;ecundum triangulŭ K M G, erectum fuerit planum. 5483 5484 lineæ igitur ab ijs, quæ G, K, ductæ in bac ratio­ne non cen&longs;tituentur ad aliud, & aliud punctum, quàm &longs;emicirculi in quo A. 5485 5486 Quoniam enim puncta G, K, data &longs;unt, & quæ K M, vtique data erit; & quæ M G, ad M K; datam igi­tur circunferentiam tanget M, fit itaque bæc in qua M N, quare &longs;ectio circunferen-tiarum data e&longs;t. 5487 5488 apud autem aliud punctum, quam ip&longs;ius M N, circunferentiæ, ab ij&longs;dem punctis, eadem ratio in eodem plano non con&longs;i&longs;tit) eorum omnium, quæ demon&longs;tranda &longs;unt, præmittenda &longs;unt duo nece&longs;&longs;aria fundamenta. 5489 5490 Primum e&longs;t; ea, quæ videmus per reflexionem &longs;ub quopiam angulo, manentibus no­bis &longs;peculo, & obiecto ij&longs;dem in locis, non po&longs;&longs;unt videri &longs;ub alio diuer&longs;o angulo, nec alibi con&longs;equenter apparere. 5491 5492 v. g. in &longs;uperiori figura, quam textui re&longs;tituimus exi&longs;tente Sole in G, oculo in K, & nube in M. ex qua ra­dius Solis G M, re&longs;lectatur ad vi&longs;um in K, per lineam M K, &longs;ub angulo G M K, impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t manentibus illis, vt dixi, videri Solem in nube M, &longs;ub diuer­&longs;o angulo à priori, nec alibi apparere. 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 Alterum e&longs;t apud Opticos vulga­tum; ea &longs;cilicet, quæ per reflexionem (de quorum numero e&longs;t Iris) viden­tur, videri, tunc &longs;olum, quando angulus incidentiæ fuerit æqualis angulo reflexionis, quia tunc breui&longs;&longs;imis lineis fit vi&longs;io; quibus &longs;oli, natura (&longs;i fieri

pote&longs;t) vtitur. 5499 5500 v. g. in figura præ&longs;enti &longs;it &longs;pe­culum C D E, obiectum A, oculus B, linea in­cidentiæ e&longs;t A D, & angulus pariter inciden­tiæ e&longs;t A D C. linea verò D B, e&longs;t linea refle­xionis, & angulus pariter reflexionis e&longs;t B D­E, qui duo anguli ni&longs;i fuerint æquales, nun­quam videbitur obiectum A, ab oculo B, hinc e&longs;t, quod aliquando po&longs;ito &longs;peculo, obiectum quamuis illi aduer&longs;um, à nobis pariter ante &longs;peculum con&longs;titutis, videri nequit, quia &longs;ci­licet in tali po&longs;itione &longs;peculi, obiecti, & no&longs;tri, nulla linea incidentiæ, ide&longs;t, quæ ab obiecto in &longs;peculum tendit, facere pote&longs;t angulum cum &longs;peculo, qui dicitur angulus incidentiæ, æqualem angulo illi, quem facit linea eadem re­flexa à &longs;peculo ad oculum, quem dicunt angulum re&longs;lexionis. 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 Cum ergo in Iride videamus colorem Solis per reflexionem, tunc &longs;olum apparebit Iris, quando Sol, nubes, & oculus fuerint in ea con&longs;titutione, qua radius incidens nubi, & radius à nube repercu&longs;&longs;us faciant pares angulos. 5507 5508 Et quia quando nubes ro&longs;cida perpendiculariter opponitur Soli, & nobis, po&longs;&longs;unt &longs;ieri præ­dicti anguli æquales non in vno loco nubis, &longs;ed in pluribus, con&longs;titutis ta­men in circuli periphæria, hinc fit, quod Solis color reflectatur ex pluribus locis in orbem con&longs;titutis, quæ reflexio e&longs;t ip&longs;ius Iridis arcus. 5509 5510 ex Vitellion 63. 10. Totam autem figuræ Iridis demon&longs;trationem &longs;ic breuiter puto ad­inuentam e&longs;&longs;e. 5511 5512 cum Sol in Iride videatur in orbem, atque con&longs;imiliter, ne ce&longs;­&longs;e e&longs;t id prouenire ex angulis reflexionum con&longs;imilibus, &longs;iue æqualibus: di&longs;­&longs;imiles enim anguli, di&longs;&longs;imilem vtique efficiunt Solis apparentiam. 5513 5514 atqui con­&longs;imiles anguli, &longs;iue æquales, non ni&longs;i in orbem po&longs;&longs;unt con&longs;titui; igitur an­gulorum æqualitas cau&longs;a erit rotundationis arcus. 5515 5516 h&ecedil;c e&longs;t &longs;umma totius di­&longs;cur&longs;us, quem pluribus, & nimis ob&longs;curè Ari&longs;t. 5517 5518 explicat.

5519 5520 Inquit igitur Ari&longs;t. &longs;it enim in oriente, &c. 5521 5522 vbi aggreditur probare vnum ex tribus illis, quæ &longs;upra propo&longs;uit, nimirum tunc Iridem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emicircu­lum, quando a&longs;trum fuerit in oriente, &longs;iue in horizonte, vbi G. &longs;i igitur per triangulum G M K, intelligamus planum exten&longs;um, in quo A, in figura, adeo magnum, vt totum &longs;ecet hemi&longs;phærium, faciet in &longs;uperficie hemi&longs;phærij &longs;e­ctionem, quæ erit portio maximi circuli, per 6. Theodo&longs;ij, cum planum &longs;e­cans hemi&longs;phærium, tran&longs;eat per centrum ip&longs;ius, quæ &longs;ectio, &longs;iue circuli por­tio repræ&longs;entatur in figura, per &longs;emicirculum in quo A, &longs;iue in quo G A M­R O. nihil autem refert quodcunque intelligas planum &longs;uper axem G K O, tran&longs;iens &longs;iue per triangulum G K M, &longs;iue per aliud illi &longs;imile. 5523 5524 Præmitten­dum præterea non po&longs;&longs;e in &longs;emicirculo &longs;uperiori, quod e&longs;t planum, & &longs;ectio trianguli G K M, poni alias duas lineas. 5525 5526 v. g. G R, K R, ad aliud punctum, vti e&longs;t R, quæ habeant eandem inuicem proportionem, quam habent prio­res duæ G M, K M, quod probatur, quia &longs;i &longs;int vt G M, ad K M, ita G R, ad K R, cum G R, &longs;it centro K, propinquior quam G M, erit etiam eadem G R, longior ip&longs;a G M, per 15. 3. & tamen deberet e&longs;&longs;e æqualis illi; quemadmo­dum K M, e&longs;t æqualis alteri K R; nequeunt autem duæ lineæ inæquales inui­cem, habere eandem rationem ad duas inuicem æquales: ergo non habent eandem rationem G M, & K M, quam habent G R, & K R. quod &longs;i punctum R, &longs;umatur &longs;upra M, erit &longs;imilis demon&longs;tratio, &longs;i literæ M, & R, loca permu­tent. 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 his po&longs;itis, ait (Quoniam enim G, K, puncta data &longs;unt, & c.) ide&longs;t data &longs;unt po&longs;itione, cum notum &longs;it vbi &longs;int. 5533 5534 G, enim e&longs;t in ortu. 5535 5536 K, verò in centro horizontis, &longs;equitur, quod etiam linea G K, cuins ip&longs;a &longs;unt extrema, data &longs;it, & po&longs;itione, & magnitudine, per 26. Datorum Euclidis. 5537 5538 eadem quoque ratione data erit K M, linea; &longs;iue quia e&longs;t æqualis ip&longs;i G K, &longs;iue quia per a&longs;trolabium po&longs;&longs;umus ip&longs;ius longitudinem, & po&longs;itionem inue&longs;tigare; qua­re & punctum M, datum erit per 27. Datorum, quare & linea G M, data erit quoad &longs;itum, & magnitudinem per 26. Datorum. 5539 5540 Quare per primam Datorum erit data proportio linearum G M, M K, punctum itaque M, tange t ambitum datum, qui ba&longs;is e&longs;t coni, quem linea K M, de&longs;cribit in reuolutio­ne axis G K O, &longs;uper polis G, O. cum enim data &longs;it K M, po&longs;itu, & magni­tudine, eaque; &longs;it latus prædicti coni, &longs;equitur periphæriam, vel ambitum ba­&longs;is coni e&longs;&longs;e datum per &longs;imilem definitionem 5. definitioni Datorum. 5541 5542 &longs;it au­tem ambitus ille in figura &longs;equenti notatus literis L M N. qui ambitus L M N, non e&longs;t concipiendus in eodem plano &longs;emicirculi G A N O, quemadmodum falsò pingitur in figura; &longs;ed debemus ip&longs;um concipere tanquam erectum ad angulos rectos cum prædicto &longs;emicirculo, necnon cum horizonte G K O. 5543 5544 Iam &longs;i triangulum G M K, prioris figuræ circumuoluatur circa axem G K O, punctum ip&longs;ius M, de&longs;cribit prædictum ambitum L M N. hunc ambitum inquit Ariltot. linea K M, attinger, eritque; hic ambitus datus, vt dictum e&longs;t.

Erit præterea &longs;ectio circunferentiarum ho­rizontis, & huius amb tus data, cuius extre­ma puncta e&longs;&longs;ent L, & N. &longs;i enim concipiamus in figura non &longs;olum horizontis diametrum G K O, &longs;ed etiam circunferentiam (in qua circunferentia e&longs;&longs;ent duo illa puncta L, & N, vt in præ&longs;enti de&longs;criptione melius intelli ge­tur, in qua horizon G N O L, & ambitus prædictus e&longs;t L M N, qui debet intelligi ele­uatus &longs;upra horizontem perpendiculariter) tunc &longs;ectio ip&longs;ius mutua cum horizonte e&longs;&longs;et linea N P L, cuius extrema puncta &longs;unt L, N, quæ data erunt, cum &longs;int ex­trema lineæ K M, circumlatæ; & quemadmodum dabatur &longs;uperius punctum M. eadem ratione ex Datis, dabitur punctum N, & L. quare etiam &longs;ectio N P L, quæ inter data puncta continetur, data erit ex 26. Datorum. 5545 5546

5547 5548 Illud nunc in memoriam reuocandum, quod paulò ante probaui, nimirum proportionem linearum G M, K M, non po&longs;&longs;e &longs;eruari in alijs lineis, quæ &longs;int in eodem plano trianguli G M K, &longs;i ducantur ab ij&longs;dem punctis G, K. pote&longs;t tamen &longs;eruari in alijs duabus, quæ cadant in prædictum ambitum, &longs;iue cir­cunferentiam L M N, quæque; &longs;int in alio plano, quam in plano trianguli G M K, quod tamen tran&longs;eat per axem G K O, &longs;itque; vnum ex planis illis, de quibus &longs;upra dictum e&longs;t. 5549 5550 Verumenimuerò ad quid probatio hæc? 5551 5552 non po&longs;&longs;e duas alias lineas in eodem plano, &c.? exi&longs;timo Ari&longs;t. 5553 5554 idcircò hoc proba&longs;&longs;e, quia &longs;i aliæ duæ lineæ habentes eandem rationem, po&longs;&longs;ent collocari in eodem plano; e&longs;&longs;ent permutando illæ duæ (in priori figura) G R, R K. vtraque vtrique æquales prioribus G M, M K, per quas videtur Iris, cum enim K R, &longs;it æqua­lis ip&longs;i K M, erit, & G M, æqualis ip&longs;i G R, per 7. 5. & in eius &longs;cholio. 5555 5556 qua­re natura ageret tam per lineas breui&longs;&longs;imas agendo per has, quam per illas, hocque; pacto perhas etiam Iris videri po&longs;&longs;et. 5557 5558 cum ergò con&longs;tet non po&longs;&longs;e has e&longs;&longs;e prioribus proportionales, &longs;ed maiorem, vel minorem, alteram illarum, quàm &longs;it G M, &longs;equitur, quod non faciunt angulum æqualem angulo G M K, &longs;ub quo videtur Iris, nimirum angulum G R K, qui &longs;it æqualis angulo G M K; habet enim Iris hunc angulum determinatum, ita vt &longs;ub maiori, vel mino­ri videri nequeat; ex 10. Bapti&longs;ta Porta. 5559 5560 &longs;i autem punctum R, e&longs;&longs;et infra M, angulus G R K, e&longs;&longs;et minor angulo Iridis G M K, &longs;i verò &longs;upra e&longs;&longs;et maior eodem, quod vel ad &longs;en&longs;um patere pote&longs;t in quouis circulo, idque; &longs;ufficiat, ne longior euadat hæc tractatio. 5561 5562 Fortè etiam addi pote&longs;t, quod alibi exi&longs;ten­te puncto R, quàm in M, non po&longs;&longs;ent anguli incidentiæ, & reflexionis e&longs;&longs;e æquales, quæ cau&longs;a e&longs;&longs;et cur &longs;ub alio angulo, quam prædicto G M K, Iris non appareret.

5563 5564 Prædicta omnia &longs;unt &longs;ecundum Ari&longs;tot. di&longs;cur&longs;um, & figurationem dicta, nam &longs;ecundum veritatem po&longs;&longs;unt in eadem nube con&longs;titui plures anguli æquales, nec tamen in eodem orbe, &longs;ed vnus &longs;upra alterum; vt in figura præ­

&longs;enti, &longs;i nubes e&longs;&longs;et vbi B D. oculus in C, Sol in A. e&longs;&longs;ent duo anguli A B C, A D C, æ­quales per 33. 3. qui tamen non &longs;unt in gyrum con&longs;tituti, po&longs;&longs;et igitur, per illorum vtrun­que Sol Iridem efficere. 5565 5566 5567 5568 atque animaduer&longs;io h&ecedil;c videtur ma­gni momenti e&longs;&longs;e, ad Iridis de­mon&longs;trationem con&longs;tituendam: cum hinc v&longs;itatæ demon&longs;tra­tiones infringatur. 5569 5570 Fortè confu giendum e&longs;t ad illud, quod Maurolycus, & 10. Bapti&longs;ta Porta ob&longs;eruarunt; debere nimirum di&longs;tantiam ab oculo ad cen­trum Iridis e&longs;&longs;e æqualem altitudini, &longs;iue &longs;emidiametro Iridis. 5571 5572 Ita vt non &longs;o­lum requiratur idem angulus, &longs;ed etiam tanta Iridis altitudo, quanta requi­ritur vt angulus in orbem con&longs;tituatur, ex quo Iris po&longs;&longs;it apparere. 5573 5574 hæc à nemine hactenus animaduer&longs;a placuit addere, vt ex ijs demon&longs;tratio Iridis omnibus numeris aliquando ab&longs;olui po&longs;&longs;it, quod infra (ni fallor, fauente Deo) præ&longs;tabimus.

5575 5576 165

5577 5578 Ibidem (Extraponatur igitur quædam linea, quæ D B, & &longs;eindatur vt M G, ad­M K, &longs;ic quæ D, ad B, maior autem quæ M G, ea quàm M K, quoniam &longs;uper ma­iorem angulum reflexio coni, maiori enim angulo &longs;ubtenditur trianguli M K G. 5579 5580 Maior igitur e&longs;t & ip&longs;a D, ip&longs;a B. addatur igitur ad eam, quæ B, ea in qua F, vt &longs;it quod D, ad B, quæ B F, ad D. 5581 5582 Deinde quod F, ad K G, quæ B, ad aliam fiat, quæ K P. & à P, ad M, copuletur quæ P M, erit igitur P. polus circuli, ad quem lineæ, quæ à K, incidunt) hucu&longs;que o&longs;tendit lineas vi&longs;uales cadere ad M, pun­ctum in Iridis periphæriam, pergit deinceps inue&longs;tigare polum, & po&longs;tea centrum eiu&longs;dem ambitus, vtraque autem exi&longs;tere in horizonte reperit, vt hinc inferat Iridis portionem illam, quæ oriente Sole &longs;upra horizontem ap­paret, e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emicirculum, vt propo&longs;uerat. 5583 5584 Differt autem polus circuli à cen­tro eiu&longs;dem circuli. 5585 5586 polus e&longs;t punctum extra planum circuli, ex quo tamen vt centro adhibito circino circuli periphæria de&longs;cribi pote&longs;t; &longs;ic polus æqua­toris e&longs;t idem, qui polus mundi: centrum verò e&longs;t in plano &longs;ui cir culi, &longs;ic cen­trum æquatoris e&longs;t idem cum centro mundi, cum æquator per illud incedat.

5587 5588 Dicit itaque Ari&longs;t. 5589 5590 cum data &longs;it proportio linearum K M, & M G, in &longs;upe­riori &longs;ecunda figura numeri 164. quam nunc iterum in&longs;picere opertet; ex­

ponatur alia linea recta B D. quæ diui­datur in partes B, & D. proportionales cum lineis K M, G M, per 10. 6. cum ergo K M, &longs;it minor quàm G M, per 19. primi, quia in triangulo G M K, oppo­nitur minori angulo, erit quoque B, minor quàm D, addatur iam ip&longs;i B. linea nea F, ita vt &longs;it tota F B, tertia proportionalis ad duas B, & D, per 11. 6. hoc ordine, vt F B, ad D. ita D, ad B. 5591 5592 Deinde vt &longs;e habet F, ad K G. ita &longs;it B, ad aliam, quæ &longs;it K P, in eadem figura per 12. 6. & à puncto P, ad M, iun­gatur recta P M. 5593 5594 Dico P, e&longs;&longs;e polum circuli, quem dixi Iridis, & in quem li­neæ à K, procedentes turbinis formam effingunt, probatur autem ab Ari&longs;t. in &longs;equentibus.

5595 5596

5597 5598 166

5599 5600 Ibidem (Erit etiam, quod quæ F, ad K G. & quæ B, ad K P. & quæ D, ad P M. non enim &longs;it, &longs;ed aut ad minorem, aut ad maiorem ea, quæ P M, nibil emm differet. 5601 5602 &longs;it enim ad P R. eandem ergo rationem G K, & K P, & P R, inuicem habebunt, quam quæ F, B, D: quæ autem F, B, D, proportionales crant, quod quidem D, ad B. quæ F B, ad D: quare quod quæ P G, ad P R, quæ P R, ad eam, quæ P K. &longs;i igi­tur ab ijs, quæ K G, quæ G R, & K R, ad R, coniungantur, coniunctæ hæ eandem habebunt rationem, quam quæ G P, ad eam, quæ P R, circa eundem enim angulum P, proportion aliter, & quæ trianguli G P R, & eius, qui K R P. quare & quæ G R, ad eam quæ K R, eandem rationem habebit, quam & quæ G P, ad eam quæ P R, habet autem & quæ M G, ad M K, eam rationem, quam quæ D, ad eam quæ B, quare ambæ à punctis G K, non &longs;olum ad circun&longs;erentiam M N, con&longs;tituentur ean­aem habentes rationem, &longs;ed & alibi, quod quidem impo&longs;&longs;ibile) incipit, vt dixi, probare P, e&longs;&longs;e polum prædicti ambitus, &longs;ic. 5603 5604 Primò enim &longs;ciendum in præ­mi&longs;&longs;a con&longs;tructione e&longs;&longs;e, vt F, ad G K, & B, ad K P, ita D, ad P M. nam &longs;i non &longs;it eadem ratio D, ad P M, cum alijs prædictis, erit eadem ratio eiu&longs;dem D, ad aliam maiorem, vel minorem ipfa P M. &longs;it ad minorem P R. nihil enim refert &longs;iue dixeris habere eandem rationem ad minorem, &longs;iue ad maiorem, ergo permutando erunt G K, K P, P R, proportionales cum F, B, D. &longs;ed li­neæ F, B, D, erant proportionales componendo hoc modo, vt F B, ad D, ita D, ad B: quare &longs;imiliter erunt vt G P, ad P R, ita P R, ad P K. per 18. 5. &longs;i igi­tur à punctis G, & K, figuræ nu. 5605 5606 164. iungantur lineæ ad R, quæ &longs;int G R, K R, erit vt G R, ad K R, ita G P, ad P R. quia orta sunt duo triangula G P R, K P R, quæ habent eundem angulum ad P. & latera proportionalia circa dictum angulum. 5607 5608 e&longs;t etiam vt G P, ad P R, in maiori triangulo, ita P R, ad K P, in minori, ex con&longs;tructione, quare per 6. 6. erunt illa duo triangula æquian­gula; ergò per 4. 6. erunt latera circum æquales angulos proportionalia; quare erit vt G P, ad P R. ita G R, ad R K: erat autem vt K M, ad G M, ita B, ad D. & ita etiam G P, ad P R; ergò per 11. 5. vt K M, ad M G. ita K R, ad R G, intra eandem circunferentiam, & in eodem plano: quod e&longs;&longs;e im­po&longs;&longs;ibile &longs;upra o&longs;tendimus, hoc autem impo&longs;&longs;ibile, &longs;equitur &longs;i neges e&longs;&longs;e vt F, ad G K; & B, ad K P, ita D, ad P M.

5609 5610

5611 5612 167

5613 5614 Ibidem (Quoniă igitur quæ D, neque ad minorem ea, quæ P M, neque ad maiorem (&longs;imiliter enim demon&longs;ir abimus) palam e&longs;t, quod ad ip&longs;am vtique erit, in qua P M, quare erit, quod quæ M P, ad P K, quæ P G, ad M P. 5615 5616 Si igitur eo in quo P, polo vtens, di&longs;tantia autem ea, in qua P M, circulns de&longs;cribatur, omnes angulos attin­get, quos reflexæ faciunt, quæ à K, G. &longs;i autem non, &longs;imiliter o&longs;tendentur eandem babere rationem, quæ alibi, quam in &longs;emicirculo con&longs;tituuntur; quod quidem erat impo&longs;&longs;ibile) quoniam igitur, inquit, linea D, neque ad minorem, neque ad ma­iorem quam P M, habet eam rationem, quæ e&longs;t ip&longs;ius F, ad G K, aut ip&longs;ius B, ad K P. &longs;imiliter enim demon&longs;tratur ab&longs;urdum &longs;equi. 5617 5618 palàm e&longs;t, quoniam erit D, ad P M, vt prædictæ ad prædictas: quare componendo, & permu­tando, erunt tandem vt G P, ad P M, ita P M, ad P K, & ita G M, ad M K, a&longs;&longs;ump&longs;imus enim in con&longs;tructione e&longs;&longs;e G M, ad M K, ita F B, ad D, & D, ad B. quare cum &longs;it vt G M, ad M K, ita F B, ad D. & G P, ad P M. & P M, ad K P; erunt per 11. 5. vt G M, ad M K. ita G P, ad P M. & P M, ad P K. &longs;i quis igitur vtens puncto P, tanquam polo, & interuallo P M, circulum de&longs;cribat, omnes angulos reflexionis attinget, quos faciunt lineæ productæ à K, & re­flexæ ab M, ad G. harum enim infinitam multitudinem debemus imaginari à K, ad infinita puncta M, produci in ambitu illo con&longs;tituta, re&longs;lectique; ad G. &longs;i enim non attingat omnes illos angulos, &longs;equitur, vt &longs;upra, in eodem &longs;emi­circulo con&longs;titui po&longs;&longs;e duas alias rectas proportionales prioribus G M, M K, quod e&longs;t impo&longs;&longs;ibile. 5619 5620 Porrò &longs;ub angulo G M K, linearum G M, M K, Iris apparet: quare apparebit etiam &longs;ub alijs omnibus, quæ à punctis G K, duci po&longs;&longs;unt ad extremum lineæ P M, quia erunt in eadem ratione cum illis; cum non de&longs;inant in eundem &longs;emicirculum, &longs;ed in ambitum Iridis M N, in quo M, punctum imaginamur circumduci. 5621 5622 Ex quibus pater P, e&longs;&longs;e polum Iridis, ex quo per puncta M, vbi &longs;it reflexio, de&longs;cribitur arcus attingens omnes Iridis reflexiones.

5623 5624

5625 5626 168

5627 5628 Ibidem (Si igitur circumducas &longs;emicirculŭ, in quo A, circa diametrum in qua G K P, que à G, K, reflexæ ad id in quo M; in omnibus planis &longs;imiliter &longs;e habebunt, & æqualem facient angulam, qui K M G, & quem etiam facient angulum, quæ K P, & P M, &longs;uper eam, quæ G P, &longs;emper æqualis erit. 5629 5630 Trianguli igitur &longs;uper eam, quæ G P, æquales ei, qui G M P. con&longs;i&longs;tunt. 5631 5632 horum autem perpendiculares ad idem &longs;ignum cadent eius, quæ G P, & æquales erunt, cadunt ad w, centrum ergò circuli w &longs;emicirculus autem, qui circa M N, ab&longs;ectus e&longs;t ab horizonte) hac vitima textus parte concludit Iridis portionem &longs;upra horizontem a&longs;tro oriente exi­&longs;tentem e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emicirculum, hoc modo; &longs;i igitur imaginatione circumducas &longs;emicirculum, in quo A, circa diametrum horizontis G K P, in hac circum­uolutione duæ lineæ G M, M K, in omnibus planis con&longs;titui po&longs;&longs;ibilibus cir­ca prædictam diametrum, quæ &longs;upra etiam fieri à triangulis infinitis dixi­mus, &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;iuè erunt; &longs;iue percurrent &longs;imiliter omnia illa plana, & facient vbique angulum Iridis K M G, eundem: pariter duæ lineæ K P, P M, facient vndique eundem angulum K P M. quare omnia triangula in predictis planis imaginata, & con&longs;tituta &longs;uper linea G P, &longs;imilia ip&longs;i G M P, & æqualia erunt; &longs;i igitur ab angulis ip&longs;orum, in quibus M, ductæ &longs;int perpendiculares ad la­tus G P, omnes cadent in idem punctum w, vt in figura; quarum vna erit M w,quæ tamen cæteras omnes repre&longs;entabit, eisque; omnibus in volutatione axis G K w, coincidit; erunt autem omnes æquales, quandoquidem &longs;unt trian­gulorum æqualium. 5633 5634 eruntque; in eodem eiu&longs;dem circuli plano, & punctum w,erit centrum ip&longs;ius. 5635 5636 &longs;imilia dicta &longs;unt in Halone. 5637 5638 Cum ergò ip&longs;ius centrum a, &longs;it in diametro horizontis G K w P O, manife&longs;tum fit portionem eius, quæ &longs;upra horizontem eminet, e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emicirculum, qui in figura notatur lineis L M N. 5639 5640 Atque hoc accidit Sole, vel Luna in horizonte exi&longs;tentibus; quod erat primo loco demon&longs;trandum.

5641 5642 Porrò &longs;ciendum po&longs;&longs;e nos breuius polum prædictum inuenire, &longs;i nimirum

ad M, ducatur M P, faciens angulum K P M, æqua­lem angulo G M K, per 23. primi, erunt enim duo triangula æquiangula G P M, K P M, angulus enim P, e&longs;t communis, angulus verò M K P, e&longs;t æqualis duobus G, & G M K, per 32. primi, ergo etiam duobus ad M, &longs;iue toti G M P, & reliquus K M P, reliquo, quare per 4.6. latera circa angulos æqua­les proportionalia erunt, & omologa G M, ad M K, ita G P, ad P M, quæ æqualibus augulis &longs;ubtenduntur. 5643 5644 ea&longs;dem autem proprietates habcbant etiam triangula Ari&longs;t. 5645 5646 in figura, de qua paulò ante dicebam. 5647 5648 Verba illa (Quæ ali­b quam in &longs;emicirculo constituuntur) &longs;unt perperam in antiqua tran&longs;latione tran&longs;lata, nam Græcè &longs;ic, ai alloqi tou_ hmixoxlnou/ sunisamenai, transferenda e&longs;&longs;ent, quæ in alio circuli loco concurrunt.

5649 5650

5651 5652 169

5653 5654 Ibidem (Iterum &longs;it horizon quidem in quo A C. oriatur autem &longs;upra hunc G, axis autem &longs;it nunc in quo G P. 5655 5656 Alia igitur omnia &longs;imiliter o&longs;tendentur vt & prius. 5657 5658 Polus autem circuli, in quo P, erit &longs;ub horizonte eo, in quo A C, eleuato puncto, in quo G. in eadem autem & polus, & centrum circuli, & terminantis nunc ortum, e&longs;t enim i&longs;te, in quo G P. 5659 5660 Quoniam autem &longs;upra diametrum, quæ A C, quod K G, centrum vtique erit &longs;ub horizonte priori eius, in quo A C, in linea K P, in quo w,

Quare minor erit &longs;uperior &longs;ectio &longs;emicir­culo, in qua S T, (nam Q S T, &longs;emicir­culus est, nunc autem inter&longs;ectus e&longs;t ab horizonte A C; itaque Q S, di&longs;parens erit) eleuato ip&longs;o Sole) demon&longs;trat propo&longs;i­tionem &longs;ecundam nimirum Sole &longs;upra horizontem elcuato, ambitum Iridis e&longs;&longs;e minorem circuli portionem, &longs;iue &longs;emicirculo minorem. 5661 5662 &longs;it igitur in fi­gura &longs;uperiori, quam textui congruen­tem re&longs;tituimus, linea A C, horizon­talis, &longs;upra quam Sol &longs;it eleuatus in circulo altitudinis in loco G, axis au­rem coni, quem reflexè faciunt &longs;it G K w P. alia igitur omnia, quæ &longs;upra exi&longs;tente in ortu a&longs;tro o&longs;ten&longs;a &longs;unt, hic pariter o&longs;tendi po&longs;&longs;unt, &longs;cilicet Iridem fieri tantum per lineas proportiona­les, & æquales lineis G M, M K, quia Iris videri nequit, ni&longs;i in tali, ac deter­minata reflexione, & angulo, vt initio &longs;uppo&longs;ui; & quia lineæ illis propor­tionales non po&longs;&longs;unt alibi con&longs;titui, quam in ambitu circulari, & in diuer&longs;is planis, &longs;equitur, vt &longs;upra Iridem e&longs;&longs;e circularem M N L; eiusque; polum P, & centrum w, inueniemus &longs;imiliter in axe G K w P, & quia axis hic &longs;ecat hori­zontem in K, in hac vltima figura propter eleuationem Solis &longs;upra A C, in G, &longs;equitur partem axis, in qua w, & P, exi&longs;tunt, infra horizontem deprimi. 5663 5664 & quia (vt pater ex 64. 10. Vitell.) & P, polus, & centrum w, Iridis, & cen­crum K, circuli horizontis, cuius &longs;cilicet diameter e&longs;&longs;et A K S, & Sol, &longs;unt in eadem linea G K w P, &longs;i centrum Iridis w, &longs;it infra horizontem, patet mi­norem circuli portionem, quam &longs;it &longs;emicirculus &longs;upra horizontem eminere, in qua po&longs;ui literas S L T, nam Q S L T R, e&longs;t &longs;emicirculus, cuius pars con­tenta inter duos arcus Q S, & T R, e&longs;t infra horizontem. 5665 5666 debemus autem hunc &longs;emicirculum, & hanc portionem ip&longs;ius S L T, extantem &longs;upra hori­zontem imaginari erectam e&longs;&longs;e, vt planum ip&longs;ius circuli faciat angulos re­ctos &longs;iue &longs;it perpendiculare cum axe G K P; & circulum altitudinis A G M N, modo fungi vice horizontis. 5667 5668 &longs;ic enim &longs;ola portio S L T, appareret nobis, e&longs;­&longs;etque; rationabiliter con&longs;tituta. 5669 5670 Ex quibus 2. Ari&longs;t. 5671 5672 propo&longs;itio manife&longs;ta e&longs;t.

5673 5674

5675 5676 180

5677 5678 Ibidem (Minima autem cum in meridie, quanto enim &longs;uperius G, tanto in&longs;e­rius & polus, & centrum circuli erit) probat tertiam propo&longs;itionem, nimi­rum Sole exi&longs;tente in meridie minimam omnium e&longs;&longs;e Iridis arcus portionem: ratio autem e&longs;t, quia tunc G, &longs;iue Sol, e&longs;t alti&longs;&longs;imus &longs;upra horizontem, & con&longs;equenter w; centrum Iridis e&longs;t depre&longs;si&longs;&longs;imum, quare tunc maxima cir­culi Iridis portio ab&longs;condetur, & proinde minima apparebit, quod erat vl­timo demon&longs;trandum. 5679 5680 Non me latet has Ari&longs;t. 5681 5682 figurationes e&longs;&longs;e apud Olym­piodorum nonnullis obiectionibus obnoxias, &longs;ed cum facilè dilui po&longs;&longs;int, & etiam &longs;i non diluantur, &longs;aluetur tamen veritas Ari&longs;totelicæ demon&longs;tratio­nis, breuitati &longs;tudens, con&longs;ultò eas prætermitto.

5683 5684 Aduertendum præterea Vicomercatum inordinatè citare librum Dato­rum Euclidis, & quandoque etiam malè citare Euclidem ip&longs;um. 5685 5686 peius verò faciunt ij, qui has demon&longs;trrationes ab&longs;que vlla libri Datorum mentione ex­plicare conantur, cum manife&longs;tè illo innitantur.

5687 5688 Cæterum &longs;i quis breues, ac dilucidas harum rerum demon&longs;trationes re­quirat, is legat 74. 75. 76. propo&longs;itiones 10. Vitell. vel &longs;equentem no&longs;tram de Iride additionem. 5689 5690 5691 5692 ego enim longiorem hanc, atque impeditam Ari&longs;t. 5693 5694 tra­ctationem in gratiam textus illius, vt in&longs;tituti mei ratio po&longs;tulabat, per&longs;e­quutus &longs;um.

5695 5696

5697 5698 181

5699 5700 Ibidem (Quod autem in minoribus quidem diebus ijs, qui po&longs;t æquinoctium au­tumnale contingit &longs;emper fieri Iridem: in longioribus aurem diebus ijs qui ab æqui­noctio altero, ad æquinoctium alterum circa meridiem non fit Iris, can&longs;a est, quia quæ ad Vr&longs;am &longs;ectiones omnes maiores &longs;unt &longs;emicirculo, & &longs;emper ad maiores quod autem e&longs;t occultum, paruum: quæ autem ad æquatoris meridiem &longs;ectiones, quæ qui­dem &longs;upra &longs;ectio, parua; quæ autem &longs;ub terra magna, & &longs;emper maiores, quæ lon­gius. 5701 5702 quare in ijs, qui ad æ&longs;tiuas ver&longs;iones diebus propter magnitudinem &longs;ectionis, antequam veniat G, ad medium &longs;ectionis, infra iam pœnitus fit P; propterea quod longè di&longs;tat à terra meridies propter magnitudinem &longs;ectionis. 5703 5704 In ijs autem diebus, qui ad hyemates ver&longs;iones, quia non multŭ &longs;unt &longs;upra terram &longs;ectiones cir culorum, contrarium nece&longs;&longs;arium fieri, modicum enim eleuato in quo G, in meridie fit Sol)quærit cur po&longs;t æquinoctium autumnale v&longs;que ad vernum, hoc e&longs;t hyemali tempore, Iris appareat etiam Sole meridiem occupante: reliquo autem tempore æ&longs;tiuo, quod e&longs;t ab æquinoctio verno ad autumnale appareat tan­tum Sole vel in ortu, aut occa&longs;u exi&longs;tente, vel parum &longs;upra terram &longs;ublato. 5705 5706 cau&longs;a autem huius refert in &longs;ectiones parallelorum circulorum, quos Sol diurno motu inter vtrunque tropicum de&longs;cribit: nam &longs;ectiones parallelorum, qui &longs;unt ad Vr&longs;am, ide&longs;t in parte &longs;phæræ Boreali, qui omnes &longs;unt inter æqua­torem, & tropicum Cancri; &longs;ectiones inquam horum circulorum, quæ &longs;unt &longs;upra horizontem, maiores &longs;unt &longs;ectionibus infra horizontem depre&longs;&longs;is, & &longs;emper eò maiores, quò propiores &longs;unt Cancro, ita vt magna yaldè &longs;it ea portio, quæ e&longs;t &longs;upra terram, exigua verò admodum, quæ infra (intelligan­tur hæc in &longs;phæra obliqua, cuius polus eleuetur grad. 45. circiter) quare quando a&longs;trum G, con&longs;cenderit meridiem, adeò P, polus Iridis, & etiam w,centrum eius infra terram deprimitur, vt aut nihil, aut in&longs;en&longs;ibile quid de Iridis ambitu &longs;upra terram eleuari po&longs;&longs;it, contrarium accidit in parallelis meridionalibus, quia eorum &longs;ectiones &longs;uperiores &longs;unt &longs;emper inferioribus minores, quapropter etiam &longs;i a&longs;trum ad meridiem eleuetur, parum tamen attollitur, & con&longs;equenter centrum w, Iridis parum infra horizontem de&longs;cendit, ac propterea etiam in meridie pars ip&longs;ius &longs;atis ma­gna con&longs;picitur. 5707 5708 5709 5710 quæ omnia adhibita &longs;phæra materia­li, eaque a&longs;tronomicè ad &longs;uam eleuationem accommodata, nullo negotio li­cebit intueri.

5711 5712 Additio de Iride.

5713 5714 Cvm &longs;uperior Ari&longs;tot. de Iride tractatio ob&longs;cura, ac tricis pluribus impedita eua&longs;erit, cumque; aliorum etiam demon&longs;trationes aliqua ex parte vacilient, vi&longs;um e&longs;t breuiter expeditam, atque ab&longs;olutam ip&longs;ius apponere demon&longs;trationem. 5715 5716 5717 5718 Cum igitur in cœle&longs;ti arcu duo poti&longs;&longs;imum &longs;int, quæ &longs;ui admiratione Philo&longs;ophorum animos in &longs;ui con­templationem alliciant, colores, &longs;cilicet, & figura: nos mirabilem illam co­lorum triadem, tanquam alienam, phy&longs;icis relinquentes, de figura ip&longs;ius iu­re mathematico di&longs;&longs;eremus: rotunditatis &longs;cilicet Iridis cau&longs;am opticis ra­tionibus venabimur, cur aliquando &longs;emicirculus, aliquando &longs;emicirculo mi­nor appareat. 5719 5720 vt igitur ordine procedamus.

5721 5722 Primo loco aduertendum e&longs;t tria ad Iridis vi&longs;ionem e&longs;&longs;e nece&longs;&longs;aria, So­lem, oculum, & nubem tenuem, ac ro&longs;cidam, quæ &longs;cilicet minutis guttulis iam &longs;cateat; hac enim ratione guttulæ illæ innumera erunt veluti parua &longs;pecula, quæ lumen Solis ob paruitatem imperfecto quodam modo repre­&longs;entare po&longs;&longs;int, ex tali enim repre&longs;entatione Iris apparet. 5723 5724 quæ tria debent e&longs;&longs;e ita di&longs;po&longs;ita, vt Sol, oculus, & centrum Iridis &longs;int in eadem recta linea con&longs;tituta, oculusque; medium locum, inter Solem, & Iridis centrum obtineat, vt in prima figura videre e&longs;t, in qua Sol vbi A, oculus in C. nubes verò G H L E, in qua apparet Iris in arcu E B F, quem debemus concipere e&longs;&longs;e in rece&longs;&longs;u, vt pictores aiunt, depictum. 5725 5726 i. 5727 5728 non in hoc &longs;itu, & ouali figura, &longs;ed

e&longs;&longs;e perfectè &longs;emicircularem, habereque; talem po&longs;itionem, vt pars ip&longs;ius B F, &longs;it citra chartam eleuata, ip&longs;ique; perpendicularis, pars verò E B, vltra pagi­nam rectà recedat, &longs;icque; diameter Iridis E F, faciat angulos rectos cum linea horizontali A C L, in quo &longs;itu oculo C, totus ex oppo&longs;ito directè &longs;pe­ctaretur, non aliter ac Iridem ip&longs;am con&longs;picere &longs;olemus. 5729 5730 Quod autem ne­ce&longs;&longs;aria &longs;it nubes ro&longs;cida, pulcherrima hac experientia comprobatur: &longs;i enim in Sole po&longs;iti ore aquam efflantes leui a&longs;pergine aerem Soli, ac nobis ad­uer&longs;um irroremus, actutum Iridis arcum guttulis illis, quamuis volitanti­bus inhærcntem &longs;umma voluptate &longs;pectabimus. 5731 5732 Quod præterea oculus no­&longs;ter, cum Iridem videmus, medius &longs;it inter Solem, & Iridis centrum, expe­rimento diuturno, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t.

5733 5734 Secundò, notandum e&longs;t, arcum per reflexionem fieri: quod quidem pri­mo eadem experientia, qua præcedens conclu&longs;io confirmatur: deinde, quia Iridem &longs;emper in oppo&longs;ita Soli, ac nobis parte con&longs;picimus; quemadmodum in eadem figura o&longs;tenditur, quod aliter quàm per reflexionem fieri nequit.

5735 5736 Tertiò, &longs;ciendum e&longs;t ex Maurolyco, & 10. Bapti&longs;ta Porta, tantam e&longs;&longs;e di­&longs;tantiam C D, ab oculo ad centrum arcus, quanta e&longs;t altitudo, &longs;eu &longs;emidia­meter D B, ob&longs;eruarunt enim ip&longs;i angulos D C B, & C B D, e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emirectos, & proinde æquales, & con&longs;equenter duo latera C D, D B, trianguli C D B, per 6. 1. æqualia &longs;unt.

5737 5738 Quartò, con&longs;iderandum e&longs;t lineas A B, A D, ob maximam Solis ab Iride di&longs;tantiam in&longs;en&longs;ibiliter differre; & ideò &longs;upponi po&longs;&longs;unt æquidi&longs;tantes, quare angulus A B C, qui æqualis e&longs;t alterno B C D, &longs;umi pote&longs;t ab&longs;que vllo errore pro &longs;emirecto. 5739 5740 hic autem angulus A B C, dicitur angulus reflexionis Iridis, &longs;ub tali enim reflexione lumen Solis occurrens nubi in B, reflectitur ad oculum C.

5741 5742 Quintò, &longs;equitur ex prædictis arcum videri &longs;emper &longs;ub &longs;tato, ac determi­nato reflexionis angulo, &longs;cilicet &longs;ub &longs;emirecto, neque po&longs;&longs;e per alium videri. 5743 5744 quod etiam probari pote&longs;t ex Ari&longs;t. 5745 5746 quia nimirum videmus arcum apparere con&longs;imiliter in ambitu circulari, ergò nece&longs;&longs;ariò apparebit vbique in toto il­lo ambitu per con&longs;imilem reflexionem, &longs;iue per æquales reflexionis angulos, pro quibus omnibus vnus cernitur in figura angulus A B C.

5747 5748 Sextò, ad Iridis vi&longs;ionem, præter ea, requiri aeris rorantis multiplica­tionem; &longs;icuti enim nebulam videre nequimus, ni&longs;i aer exhalatione illa in­fectus multus &longs;it ante oculum no&longs;trum: &longs;ic etiam exi&longs;timo ad Iridis appari­tionem, opus e&longs;&longs;e plurima nube rore&longs;cente, vt ex multiplicatione guttula­rum, quarum aliæ po&longs;t alias &longs;int, totus tandem Iris appareat. 5749 5750 quia paucæ guttulæ, etiam &longs;i quælibet illarum aliquid Iridis efficeret, ob paruitatem tamen illarum, nulla arcus figura &longs;pectaretur. 5751 5752 Quod &longs;i ante oculum pluri­mæ &longs;int in toto aere aliæ po&longs;t alias, tunc &longs;e mutuò iuuantes, obiectum &longs;atis &longs;en&longs;ibile, quoc Iris e&longs;t, efficere po&longs;&longs;unt. 5753 5754 Adde, quod etiam ex tali guttula­rum multiplicatione, aer opacatur, quæ opacatio plurimum iuuat ad Iri­dem &longs;pectandam.

5755 5756 Septimò, Iridis rotundationis cau&longs;am ex præmi&longs;&longs;is con&longs;tare poti&longs;&longs;imum ex duabus. 5757 5758 primò, ex angulo reflexionis determinato, qui videlicet &longs;it ferè &longs;emirectus. 5759 5760 &longs;ecundò, ex paribus di&longs;tantijs C D, D B, huiu&longs;modi enim plures anguli, qui ad Iridem &longs;unt nece&longs;&longs;arij (debent enim &longs;ingulæ Iridis partes &longs;ub huiu&longs;modi angulo repre&longs;entari) non po&longs;&longs;unt aliter quàm in gyrum con&longs;titui, quem gyrum optimè concipiemus, &longs;i imaginemur triangulum A B C, cir­cumuerti circa lineam horizontalem A C L, fixam, tanquam circa axem. 5761 5762 in hac enim conuer&longs;ione angulus Iridis B, de&longs;cribet circulum, qui erit Iris, & pertr an&longs;ibit omnes angulos, qui in tali Solis, oculi, ac nubis &longs;itu, arcum ef­ficere &longs;unt idonei.

5763 5764 Sed contra prædicta de angulo Iridis determinato eadem nobis obijcies, quæ nos &longs;upra ad finem numeri 164. Ari&longs;t. & alijs obiecimus, plures nimi­rum po&longs;&longs;e con&longs;titui angulos æquales angulo Iridis B, in plano trianguli A B C, qui non &longs;int in eodem orbe con&longs;tituti, in quo &longs;unt omnes anguli B. 5765 5766 Iridem reflectentes, quique reflexionem faciant ad eundem oculum C, vnde &longs;equitur prædictam Iridis altitudinem non e&longs;&longs;e, vti diximus, determinatam, cum po&longs;&longs;it angulus B, alios &longs;ibi æquales tam &longs;upra, quàm infra habere, qua ra­tione deberet etiam Iris, & altius, & inferius apparere.

5767 5768 Huic dubitationi re&longs;pondeo, quod quamuis huiu&longs;modi plures anguli æquales fiant, non tamen Iridis generationi ob&longs;tant, quinimò ad eam valdè nece&longs;&longs;arij &longs;unt; cum enim omnes &longs;int in circunferentia circuli A C D B, quar­tæ figuræ num. 5769 5770 164. quæ modo in&longs;picienda e&longs;t, vt &longs;unt in ea anguli A D C, A B C; quæ circunferentia ob &longs;ui circuli immen&longs;itatem ad &longs;en&longs;um e&longs;t in&longs;tar lineæ rectæ, fit vt omnes illi anguli tàm qui &longs;upra B, quàm qui infra &longs;unt, &longs;int quoad &longs;en&longs;um in eadem recta C D B, ante vi&longs;um proten&longs;a, &longs;icque; Iris, qui apparet in D, & in B, &c. 5771 5772 ob medij rorantis multiplicationem vnam tantùm oculo Iridem repre&longs;entet. 5773 5774 locus tamen, in quo apparet, & vbi e&longs;t angulus B, qui propriè Iridis appellatur, e&longs;t in tanta di&longs;tantia à centro arcus, quan­ta e&longs;t ab eodem centro ad oculum, vt &longs;upra dictum e&longs;t.

5775 5776 Quod verò alibi extra circunferentiam illius circuli, poni nequeat angu­lus æqualis angulo B, præ&longs;entis figuræ, qui re&longs;lectat ad C. patet &longs;ic, &longs;it enim angulus A N O, &longs;emirectas, & ideò æqualis angulo B, erunt ergo B C, N O, parallelæ, quare non concurrent ambæ ad C, &longs;ed altera ad E, altera verò ad O, quæ propterea oculo in O, po&longs;ito Iridem efficeret, non autem oculo C: &longs;icque; oculus C, & oculus O, viderent diuer&longs;os arcus. 5777 5778 eodem modo o&longs;tendi pote&longs;t, neque in &longs;uperiori parte nubis vbi P, con&longs;titui po&longs;&longs;e angulum æqualem angulo B, qui oculo C, Iridem valeat o&longs;tendere. 5779 5780 Ex quibus &longs;atis patefacta e&longs;t cau&longs;a rotunditatis arcus, angulus &longs;cilicet determinatus cum di&longs;tantia­rum C D, D B, paritate, necnon cum medij rorantis &longs;ufficienti multiplica­tione. 5781 5782 Ex his etiam Iridis definitio in hunc modum concinnari pote&longs;t, Iris e&longs;t arcus multicolor in nube rorida, ex radiorum Solis, aut Lunæ reflexio­ne &longs;ab &longs;tatuto angulo effulgens.

5783 5784 Octauo loco Problemata nonnulla re&longs;oluemus.

5785 5786 Problema Primum.

5787 5788 Cur oriente, aut occumbente Sole, Iris &longs;emicirculus e&longs;t?

5789 5790 Cau&longs;a huius hæc e&longs;t; &longs;upra enim dictum e&longs;t, in omni Iridis appari­tione tria hæc, Solem, oculum, & Iridis centrum e&longs;&longs;e in eadem re­cta linea, v. g. in linea A C D, præcedentis figuræ, cum igitur Sol tam oriens, quam occidens &longs;it in horizonte, v. g. in A, horizontis puncto, &longs;imiliter oculus &longs;it in C, horizontis centro, con&longs;ectarium e&longs;t, cen­trum etiam Iridis D, e&longs;&longs;e pariter in horizontis &longs;uperficie, quare &longs;ecabitur ab horizonte per centrum, vnde etiam &longs;equitur ip&longs;ius Iridis portionem E B F, quæ &longs;upra horizontem extat e&longs;&longs;e &longs;emicirculum. 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 Quod &longs;i horizon non ob&longs;taret, integrum Iris compleret orbem, cernereturque; toto ambitu B F M E.

5801 5802 An quandoque; maior &longs;emicirculo appareat?

5803 5804 Problema Secundum.

5805 5806 Maior quidem, imò etiam integer circulus, &longs;ed ab oculo in &longs;ummitate montis con&longs;tituto, Soleque; iam multum eleuato videri pote&longs;t, vt in hac &longs;ecunda figura cernitur, vbi euecto Sole ad locum E, &longs;upra horizontem

A B, poterit oculus in vertice montis C, po&longs;itus Iridem F G H I, comple­tam videre, quia infra lineam E C D, in qua exi&longs;tunt Sol, oculus, & Iridis centrum, nihil e&longs;t ad partes D, vbi nubes irrorat, quod Iridis apparitioni &longs;it impedimento.

5807 5808 Cur quanto Sol altior e&longs;t, tanto inferior, tantoque; &longs;emicir­culo minor appareat Iris?

5809 5810 Problema Tertium.

5811 5812 Qvia eleuato Sole ad E, vt in hac tertia figura, nece&longs;&longs;ario centrum Iri­dis D, infra horizontem A B, deprimetur, cum in eadem recta E C D.

Sol E, oculus C, centrunque; Iridis D, exi&longs;tant: vnde nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;equitur Iridis portionem F G H, &longs;upra horizontem extantem, &longs;emicirculo minorem e&longs;&longs;e.

5813 5814 Cur Iris in&longs;equentes fugit, fugientes verò in&longs;equitur?

5815 5816 Problema Quartum.

5817 5818 Pvlcherrimum i&longs;tud phænomenon primus omnium Philippus Mendæus Platonis di&longs;cipulus, ob&longs;eruauit; Cuius ratio e&longs;t, quia arcus non ni&longs;i &longs;ub determinato angulo, di&longs;tantijs etiam illis paribus, ac tandem idone a a&longs;per­gino&longs;æ nubis multiplicatione &longs;pectatur; quapropter &longs;i quis per aerem to­tum vndique ro&longs;cidum inambulet, vbicunque illi anguli, illæque; conditiones af­fuerint Iris apparebit: quod &longs;i in aperta planitie obequitans arcu con&longs;pe­cto, additis equo calcaribus citatum cur&longs;um ad eum direxerit, fugientem ante &longs;e Iridem &longs;umma cum iucunditate mirabitur.

5819 5820 Ex dictis pr&ecedil;tere a patet, &longs;impliciter nimis eos hallucinari, qui exi&longs;timant in plana, aut concaua nubis &longs;uperficie Iridem tantummodo apparere po&longs;&longs;e.

5821 5822 Curlunares Irides fiunt rariores?

5823 5824 Problema Quintum.

5825 5826 Qvoniam iuxta plenilunia tantum, cum &longs;cilicet Luna plurimo lumine abundat, quod Iridem efficere debet, contingunt: præterea quia cum lunare lumen debile &longs;it, ni&longs;i aliæ cau&longs;æ perfectæ admodum concur­rant, quod rarò accidit, Iris nullo modo effulgere valet. 5827 5828 Hactenus de Iri­dis figura &longs;it &longs;atis.

5829 5830 Summa 2. cap. 5831 5832 5. De Parelio.

5833 5834

5835 5836 182

5837 5838 Textus (Fiunt autem vt diximus, & Virgæ, & Parelia in ortu, & oc­ca&longs;u, & nec &longs;upra Solem, nec infra, &longs;ed ex lateribus, nec propè admo­dum, nec procul omninò. 5839 5840 propinquam enim concretionem Sol di&longs;&longs;oluit: &longs;i autem procul ab&longs;it, a&longs;pectus non reflectetur, &longs;i enim à paruo &longs;peculo procul protenditur imbecillus fit. 5841 5842 quare, & Coronæ è regione Solis non fiunt. 5843 5844 &longs;i igi­tur &longs;upra fuerit, & proxima; eam Sol di&longs;&longs;oluet: &longs;i verò procul a&longs;pectus minor quam vt reflecti po&longs;&longs;it in Solem non-incidet; à latere autem fieri pote&longs;t, vt &longs;pecu­lum ita distet à Sole, vt non &longs;oluatur, & a&longs;pectus totus ad eum perueniat, eo quod ad terram dum fertur, qua&longs;i per immen&longs;um feratur, peruenire nequeat. 5845 5846 &longs;ub Sole verò non fit, quia cum ad terram propius acce&longs;&longs;erit à Sole di&longs;&longs;oluitur, cum medium cœli tenuerit a&longs;pectus di&longs;trahitur. 5847 5848 omninò ne à latere quidem, Sole medium cœli tenente, efficitur, quia a&longs; pectus &longs;ub terram non fertur, quare exiguus ad &longs;peculum producitur, & qui reftectitur pror&longs;us imbecillis redditur) ibi (propinquam enim concretionem Sol di&longs;&longs;oluit) rationes, quas affert circa Parelia videntur (auda­cter loquar) admodum debiles. 5849 5850 præ&longs;ens ea e&longs;t, vt Parelium non fiat propè Solem, quia illa nubis concretio, quæ Parelio nece&longs;&longs;aria e&longs;t, nequit adeo So­li propinqua e&longs;&longs;e, quia nimirum Sol ob propinquitatem eam di&longs;&longs;olueret; &longs;ed quis non videt eam nubem, quam vulgò exi&longs;timamus e&longs;&longs;e Soli propinquam, &longs;eu qua&longs;i inter nos, & Solem tantum, imò etiam minus aliquando à Sole ve­rè di&longs;tare, quàm alia, quàm vulgò remotiorem à Sole putabimus? 5851 5852 præte­rea omnes nubes no&longs;tri horizontis re vera æquidi&longs;tare à Sole certum e&longs;t, ob maximam enim Solis di&longs;tantiam totus no&longs;ter horizon phy&longs;icus e&longs;t in&longs;en&longs;i­bilis quantitatis ad Solem, & vnius puncti vicem gerit.

5853 5854 Ibi verò (Si autem procul ab&longs;it, &c.) reddit rationem, cur parelium non appareat in nube à Sole valde remota &longs;ecundum vulgarem æ&longs;timationem, vnde vulgarem etiam rationem affert, ait enim, nubem illam e&longs;&longs;e veluti &longs;pe­culum Solis repre&longs;entatiuum, &longs;peculum autem tàm longè à Sole po&longs;itum, reddi debile, & proptereá non po&longs;&longs;e Solis imaginem referre: Verùm ratio hæc nulla e&longs;&longs;e videtur, quis enim ignorat non propterea e&longs;&longs;e remotius à So­le, quamuis maiorem habere videatur à Sole lateralem di&longs;tantiam, vt pau­lò ante dixi? 5855 5856 Eandem rationem illi dubitationi accommodat, cur neque vi­deatur &longs;upra Solem, quamuis non ei quadret, pote&longs;t enim aliqua nubes vi­deri &longs;upra Solem, quæ tamen remotior &longs;it à Sole, quam illa, in qua Parclium gignitur. 5857 5858 Ait po&longs;tea (A latere autem, &c.) cur appareat in nube fatis Soli à latere vicina, in di&longs;tantiam à Sole refert: &longs;ed quæ dudum dicta &longs;unt, i&longs;tud quoque refellunt. 5859 5860 Verba illa (Eo quod ad terram dum fertur qua&longs;i per immen&longs;um feratur, peruenire nequeat) videntur alieno loco dicta; &longs;imilia præcedentibus &longs;unt reliqua, præ&longs;ertim quæ ibi (Sub Sole verò non fit, quia cum ad terram pro­pius acce&longs;&longs;erit) cur non videatur infra Solem, rationem quandam, quæ fortè inanis e&longs;t reddit; nunquid enim non po&longs;&longs;umus tam infra Solem, quàm &longs;upra ita &longs;peculum accommodare, vt Solem no&longs;tris vi&longs;ibus remittat? 5861 5862 huic certè Optice tota repugnat. 5863 5864 Cum igitur Mathematica ratione hæ rationes non con&longs;i&longs;tant, alias alij excogitent. 5865 5866 Mirum tamen e&longs;t, omnes, quos viderim commentatores, eas tanquam optimas admittere.

5867 5868 In quarto Meteororum nihil Mathematicum occurrit.

5869 5870 EX LIB. PRIMO DE ANIMA.

5871 5872

5873 5874 183

5875 5876 Tex. 11. (Videtur autem non &longs;olum ip&longs;um quid e&longs;t cogno&longs;cere vtile e&longs;&longs;e ad cogno&longs;cendas cau&longs;as accidentium &longs;ub&longs;tantijs: &longs;icut in Mathemati­cis quid rectum, & quid obliqaum, aut quid linea, & planum, ad co­gno&longs; cendum quot rectis, trianguli anguli &longs;unt æquales) quid &longs;it vnum­quodque ex prædictis patet tum ex definitionibus primi Elem. 5877 5878 tum ex com­mentarijs ip&longs;arum; quamuis autem ibi non definiatur rectum, nec obliquum in genere, definitur tamen linea recta, & obliqua, & plana &longs;uperficies, &longs;iue planum, ex quibus facilè definitio recti, & obliqui colligi pote&longs;t: quæ defi­nitiones nece&longs;&longs;ariæ &longs;unt ad cogno&longs;cendum quot rectis angulis æquales &longs;int tres anguli cuiufuis trianguli. 5879 5880 vide quæ de hac æqualitate &longs;crip&longs;i lib, primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 5881 5882 1.

5883 5884

5885 5886 184

5887 5888 Tex. 13. (Si igitur e&longs;t aliqua animæ operatio, aut pa&longs;&longs;io propria, continget vti­que ip&longs;am &longs;eparari: &longs;i verò nulla e&longs;t propria ip&longs;ius non vtique erit &longs;eparabilis. 5889 5890 &longs;ed &longs;icut recto in quantum rectum multa accidunt, vt tangere æneam &longs;phæram &longs;ecun­dum punctum, non tamen tanget hoc, rectum ip&longs;um &longs;eparatum: in&longs;eparabile enim, &longs;i quidem cum corpore quodam &longs;emper e&longs;t) Propo&longs;itio 2. tertij Elem. 5891 5892 &pacute;robat li­

neam rectam, duo quælibet puncta quantumuis pro­pinqua in circuli ambitu a&longs;&longs;umpta coniungentem cadere intra circulum. 5893 5894 v. g. puncta A B, quantum­uis &longs;ibi inuicem propinqua fnerint, attamen &longs;i line a A B, ea coniungat, ip&longs;a cadet intra circulum, & veluti chorda &longs;ubtendet arcum A B, quantulum­cunque. 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 ex qua demon&longs;tratione colligitur in corol­lario eius lineam rectam tangentem circulum ip­&longs;um in vnico puncto tangere. 5901 5902 v. g. rectam C D, tan­gere circulum in puncto E. &longs;i enim dixeris tangere in duobus admodum propinquis, vt in E F, tunc non erit amplius tangens, &longs;ed &longs;ecans, quia vt modo dixi, pars lineæ rectæ, quæ coniungeret puncta E F, intra circulum per &longs;ecundam præallegatam caderet, quod e&longs;t ab&longs;urdum, quia contra hypothe&longs;im, cum &longs;upponamus illam &longs;olùm tangere, non autem &longs;ecare circulum. 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 Ex hac Euclidis doctrina Theodo&longs;ius primo &longs;phæricorum, propo&longs;itione 3. probat planum, &longs;iue &longs;uperficiem planam tangere &longs;phæram in vnico puncto, vt hoc loco innuit Philo&longs;ophus. 5909 5910 probat autem hac ferè ra­
tione. 5911 5912 &longs;it &longs;phæra A B C, quæ tangat quodpiam planum in duobus punctis A, B, &longs;i fieri pote&longs;t. 5913 5914 per quæ duo pun­cta intelligatur ducta recta linea A B, intelligatur etiam circulus A B C, qui &longs;ecet &longs;phæram per centrum C. & per puncta A, B, ergo ex demon&longs;tratis ab Euclide li­nea A B, quæ coniungit puncta A B, cadet intra prædi­ctum circulum; &longs;ed linea hæc e&longs;t in plano tangente ex &longs;uppo&longs;itione, circulus verò in &longs;phæra; ergò cum linea cadat intra circulum, cadet etiam nece&longs;&longs;ariò planum in quo e&longs;t linea, & cum linea cadat intra circulum, cadet etiam nece&longs;&longs;ariò intra &longs;phæram; idemque; faciet planum, quod eam nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;equatur, ergò planum &longs;ecat &longs;phæram, non autem tangit, quod e&longs;t ab&longs;urdum, quia contra hypothe&longs;im, &longs;upponunt autem Mathematici, entia hæc mathematica e&longs;&longs;e perfecta, qualia in &longs;ublunaribus fortè non reperiuntur; ænea enim &longs;phæra nulla erit perfectè rotunda, vel planum aliquod perfectè complanatum, vt ip&longs;i &longs;upponunt, eò quod materiæ imperfectio, ac ruditas id nequaquam pa­tiatur. 5915 5916 quare cum huiu&longs;inodi entia non reperiantur ab&longs;tracta ab impura hac materia, nullum erit inquit Ari&longs;t. 5917 5918 ab&longs;tractum planum, quod po&longs;&longs;it mathe­maticè, atque adeò in vnico puncto mathematico &longs;phæram tangere. 5919 5920 hucu&longs;que nece&longs;&longs;aria &longs;unt mathematica ad huius loci intelligentiam. 5921 5922 ex quibus ea etiam, quæ ad phy&longs;icum &longs;pectant manife&longs;ta fiunt, nimirum &longs;icut entia mathemati­ca à materia non exi&longs;tunt &longs;eparata, quia &longs;ic nullam haberent operationem; ita etiam anima, &longs;i nullam habet propriam operationem non exi&longs;tet à cor­pore &longs;eparata.

5923 5924 Ex Secundo de Anima.

5925 5926

5927 5928 185

5929 5930 Tex. 12. (Non enim &longs;olum ip&longs;um, quod&longs;it, oportet definitiuam rationem oftendere, &longs;icut plures definitionum dicunt, &longs;ed & cau&longs;am ine&longs;&longs;e, & ap­parere. 5931 5932 nunc autem, vt conclu&longs;iones rationes definitionum &longs;unt, vt quid tetragoni&longs;mus? 5933 5934 æquale altera parte longiori rectangulum æquilaterum e&longs;&longs;e, talis autem definitio ratio conclu&longs;ionis. 5935 5936 dicens autem, quod tetragoni&longs;mus e&longs;t medij inuentio rei cau&longs;am dicit) aggre&longs;&longs;urus Ari&longs;t. 5937 5938 animæ definitionem præ­mittit duplicem e&longs;&longs;e definitionem, alteram &longs;cilicet, quæ explicat &longs;olum rei e&longs;&longs;entiam, quam dicunt formalem definitionem; alteram verò, quæ præte­rea explicat etiam rei cau&longs;am, quam dicunt cau&longs;alem definitionem: vtram­que autem exemplo Geometrico explicat.

5939 5940 In cap. 5941 5942 igitur de relatione plura &longs;crip&longs;i de tetragoni&longs;mo, &longs;eu qua dratio­ne circuli, quæ huc &longs;pectant. 5943 5944 propterea nunc tantum propria huius loci de­claranda re&longs;tant. 5945 5946 loquitur igitur hic Philo &longs;ophus non de quadratione circuli, &longs;ed figuræ rectilineæ illius, quæ dicitur Altera parte longior, qualis e&longs;t præ­&longs;ens figura A B C D, cuius quadrandæ ratio e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi. 5947 5948 per 13. 6. inue­

niatur recta linea media proportionalis inter duo latera figuræ A B, B C, eaque; &longs;it B D, in &longs;e­quenti figura. 5949 5950 e&longs;&longs;e autem mediam proportio­nalem nihil aliud e&longs;t quam ita e&longs;&longs;e A B, ad B D, &longs;icut B D, ad B C. diciturque; media proportio­nalis, quia in hac habitudine medium locum obtinet. 5951 5952 quadratum autem li­neæ B D, æquale e&longs;t rectangulo dato A B C D, per 17.6. Inuentio porrò hu­ius mediæ proportionalis, quia facilis e&longs;t, & &longs;citu iucunda, eam &longs;ic habeto.
accipe duo latera A B, & B C, quadrandi rectan­guli, eaque; in directum con&longs;titue, vt vnicam re­ctam con&longs;tituant A C, vt apparet in figura; de­inde diui&longs;a tota A C, bifariam in E, facto cen­tro in E, de&longs;cribe &longs;emicirculum &longs;uper lineam A C, demum à puncto B, in quo duo latera con­iunguntur, erigatur linea perpendicularis v&longs;que ad periphæriam, quæ &longs;it B D. hæc enim B D, e&longs;t media proportionalis inter latera A B, B D, quam nimirum habitudinem habet A B, ad B D, eam quo­que obtinet B D, ad B C. 5953 5954 Quadratum igitur huius B D, hoc e&longs;t quadratum, cuius quatuor latera &longs;iut æqualia lineæ B D, quale e&longs;t præ&longs;ens, æquale erit
dato &longs;uperiori rectangulo A B C D, atque hoc modo per­acta erit quadratio, &longs;eu tetragoni&longs;mus dati quadrilateri A B C D. 5955 5956 Vides igitur, qua ratione quadratum con&longs;ti­tuatur æquale dato quadrilatero; & qua rationem inuen­tio illius mediæ proportionalis &longs;it cau&longs;a quadraturæ re­ctanguli, & proinde &longs;i quis dicat quadrationem hanc e&longs;&longs;e effectionem rectanguli æquilateri, ide&longs;t quadrati, æqualis dato quadrilate­ro, hic definitionem formalem &longs;olum afferet: quæ definitio, vt dixit in Lo­gicis, e&longs;t in&longs;tar conclu&longs;ionis. 5957 5958 &longs;i quis verò dicat tetragoni&longs;mum hunc quadri­lateri dati e&longs;&longs;e mediæ prædictæ inuentionem cau&longs;alem afferet definitionem, cum rei cau&longs;am dicat. 5959 5960 Aduerte 10. Grammaticum immeritò accu&longs;are Ale­xandrum, quod dicat quadrationem hanc per inuentionem mediæ propor­tionalis tradi in 2. Elem. 5961 5962 nam verè in 14. 2. traditur talis inuentio, quam­uis enim ibi nulla fiat expre&longs;&longs;a mentio huiu&longs;modi mediæ, in ip&longs;a tamen eareperitur, ac per eam figuræ rectilineæ quadrantur: quod patet ex figura 14. prædictæ, quæ eadem e&longs;t cum figura 13. 6. qua docemur prædictam in­uentionem.

5963 5964

5965 5966 186

5967 5968 Tex. 86. (Acutum mouet &longs;en&longs;um in tempore pauco multùm: graue autem in multo parùm; non igitur velox e&longs;t acutum, graue autem tardum, fed fit illius qui­dem propter velocitatem motus huiu&longs;modi, huius autem propter tarditatem) vide quæ de hac re primo topic. 5969 5970 cap. 5971 5972 13. dicta &longs;unt, illa enim omnia in hunc lo­cum quadrant. 5973 5974 Verum occurrit illa dubitatio; quod cum Ari&longs;t. 5975 5976 ibi dicat (Vox acuta quidem velox) hic autem (Non igitur velox e&longs;t acutum) repugnan­tia dicere videtur. 5977 5978 cui dubitationi &longs;ic occurrendum; vt dicamus ibi Philo­&longs;ophum dicere vocem acutam e&longs;&longs;e velocem, quatenus acumen vocis oritur ex velocitate motus aerem impellentis. 5979 5980 hic verò di&longs;tinguere acutum à ve­loci, tanquam effectum à cau&longs;a.

5981 5982

5983 5984 187

5985 5986 Tex. 159. (Apparent autem, & fal&longs;a, de quibus &longs;imul exi&longs;timationem veram habet, vt apparet &longs;ol vnius pedis, per&longs;ua&longs;um autem e&longs;t, eum maiorem e&longs;&longs;e babitata)habitata, ide&longs;t terra habitata. 5987 5988 Vide, quæ cap. 5989 5990 3. &longs;ummæ 1. primi Meteor. 5991 5992 Item capite 5. &longs;ummæ 2. de Solis magnitudine &longs;crip&longs;i, ea enim huic loco abundè &longs;atisfaciunt.

5993 5994 Ex Tertio de Anima.

5995 5996

5997 5998 188

5999 6000 Tex. 21. (Vt incommen&longs;urabile, & diameter) vide, quæ de incom­men&longs;uratione diametri, & co&longs;tæ &longs;cripta &longs;unt lib. 6001 6002 1. Priorum, cap. 23. vnde &longs;atis huic loco fieri pote&longs;t.

6003 6004

6005 6006 189

6007 6008 Tex 25. (Punctum autem, & omnis diui&longs;io, & &longs;ic indiui&longs;ibile mon­&longs;tratur &longs;i cut priuatio) punctum enim cum &longs;it terminus lineæ, e&longs;t negatio vl­terioris lineæ (Et omnis diui&longs;io) innuit his verbis præter punctum, lineam etiam, & &longs;uperficiem, nam quemadmodum punctus oritur ex diui&longs;ione li­neæ, ita linea ex diui&longs;ione &longs;uperficiei, & &longs;uperficies ex diui&longs;ione corporis. 6009 6010 & quamuis punctum, linea, &longs;uperficies, &longs;int indiui&longs;ibilia, mon&longs;trantur ta­men quatenus &longs;unt priuationes, &longs;eu negationes, illud vlterioris lineæ, i&longs;ta vlterioris &longs;uperficiei, hæc tandem vlterioris corporis.

6011 6012

6013 6014 190

6015 6016 Tex. 32. (Sit igitur vt A, quidem album, ad B, quod nigrum; &longs;ic C, ad D; qua­re & permutatim) ide&longs;t, quare & permutando (vt aiunt Geometræ) erit vt A, ad C, ita B, ad D, hunc argumentandi modum à permutata proportio­ne explicaui in primo Po&longs;ter. cap. 6017 6018 5. tex. 13. dicitur etiam alterna ratio; & definitur ab Euclide definitione 12, 5. 6019 6020

6021 6022 Ex Libro de Sen&longs;u.

6023 6024

6025 6026 191

6027 6028 Cap, 6. (Et qui in Die&longs;i &longs;onus latet, quamuis continuum exi&longs;tentem audit omnem cantum, di&longs;t antia enim eius ad extremos &longs;onos latet) quid &longs;it Die&longs;is apud Mu&longs;icos explicatum e&longs;t primo Po&longs;ter. tex. 38. cum autem Die&longs;is &longs;it minima di&longs;tantia, &longs;eu vt loquuntur Mu&longs;ici, mini­mum interuallum inter duas voces, hinc fit vt hæc minima di&longs;tantia inter ex­tremos &longs;onos non exaudiatur, quemadmodum nec minima particula alicu­ius magni corporis à longè vi&longs;i non percipitur, &longs;ed latetinter extrema illius. 6029 6030

6031 6032

6033 6034 192

6035 6036 6037 Cap. 8. (Vnumquodque magis e&longs;t &longs;entire &longs;implex exi&longs;tens, quàm mixtum, velut vinum non temperatum, quàm temperatum; & mel, & colorem, & neten &longs;olam. 6038 6039 6040 quàm in diapa&longs;on, quia ob&longs;curant &longs;e inuicem) nete apud veteres mu&longs;icos erat in mu&longs;icis in&longs;trumentis omnium chordarum acuti&longs;&longs;ima, cuiu&longs;modi apud nos e&longs;t, quam vulgò canto appellant. 6041 6042 Hypate verò erat chorda omnium graui&longs;&longs;ima, qualis e&longs;t ea, quam modo Ba&longs;&longs;o vocant. 6043 6044 hæ duæ &longs;imul pul&longs;atæ edebant conionantiam, quæ Diapa&longs;on dicitur, & vulgò octaua. 6045 6046 ex quibus &longs;en&longs;us verberum Ari&longs;t. 6047 6048 manife&longs;tus e&longs;t.

6049 6050

6051 6052 193

6053 6054 Eodem cap. (Velut Diapa&longs;on, & Diapente) quid &longs;it con&longs;onantia Diapa­&longs;on, explicaui in primo Po&longs;ter. tex. 1. Diapente verò e&longs;t con&longs;onantia ex duo­

bus &longs;onis coale&longs;cens, quorum proportio &longs;it vt 3. ad 2. quæ dicitur &longs;e&longs;quialtera. 6055 6056 6057 6058 v. g. &longs;int duæ chordæ æqualis cra&longs;fitiei, atque æquè ten&longs;æ: vna tamen habeat ad alteram proportionem &longs;e&longs;­quialteram, vt in figura apparet; &longs;i &longs;imul pul­&longs;entur, edent con&longs;onantiam Diapente. 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 vulgò autem quinta.

6065 6066 Ex Libro de Memoria, & remini&longs;centia.

6067 6068

6069 6070 194

6071 6072 6073 Cap. 1. (Sic meminit eos, qui trianguli, quod duobus rectis æquales) ide&longs;t &longs;ic meminit tres angulos cuiu&longs;uis trianguli &longs;imul &longs;umptos æqua­les e&longs;&longs;e duobus angulis rectis &longs;imul &longs;umptis. 6074 6075 6076 lege annotata primo Po&longs;ter. &longs;ecto 3. cap. 6077 6078 1.

6079 6080

6081 6082 195

6083 6084 6085 Cap. 3. (Sunt facilè remini&longs;cibilia, quæcunque habent ordinationem aliquam, vt mathemata) h&ecedil;c Philo&longs;ophus dicensfp ectabat ad mirabilem illam, ac per­petuam de mon&longs;trationum connexionem, qua Geometræ omnes, & præci­puè Euclides opera &longs;ua ab initio ad finem v&longs;que, diuino planè ingenij acu­mine deduxerunt. 6086

6087 6088 Ex Libro de Somnijs.

6089 6090

6091 6092 196

6093 6094 6095 Cap. 2. (Cur autem fallimur, cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quoniam non &longs;olum cum &longs;en&longs;ibile mouetur apparent quælibet, &longs;ed etiam cum &longs;en&longs;us ip&longs;e mouetur, &longs;i eodem modo moueatur, quemadmodum à &longs;en&longs;ibili. 6096 6097 6098 dico autem velut terra vi­detur nauigantibus moueri, dummodo vi&longs;us ab alio) reddit rationem, cur nauigantibus videatur terra ip&longs;a moueri, ac retrocedere, non autem ip&longs;i nauigantes, quin potius ip&longs;i fibi &longs;tare videantur. 6099 6100 cau&longs;am igitur eam e&longs;­&longs;e ait, quia ex motu nauis, terra ip&longs;a manente, accidit, vt eodem modo im­mutetur &longs;en&longs;us vi&longs;us, ac &longs;i terra ip&longs;a moueretur, vi&longs;us verò quie&longs;ceret. 6101 6102 At cur eodem modo afficitur &longs;en&longs;us? 6103 6104 Per&longs;pectiuirationem e&longs;&longs;e dicunt, quia ea, quæ circa oculum &longs;unt, vt nauis, & ea, quæ in naui &longs;unt, non mutant &longs;i­tum re&longs;pectu oculi, quemadmodum facerent, &longs;i nos ip&longs;i &longs;ine naui progrede­remur. 6105 6106 arbores autem, & reliqua, quæ in terra &longs;unt, variant &longs;itum re&longs;pectu oculi, non &longs;ecus, ac &longs;i ip&longs;æ arbores retro deferrentur. 6107 6108 propterea igitur vi&longs;us tunc arbores remeare iudicat, quia quæ circa oculum &longs;unt re&longs;pectu ip&longs;ius oculi non mouentur, &longs;iue non variant &longs;itum ad ip&longs;um; ex variatione enim &longs;itus rei re&longs;pectu oculi, percipimus cuiu&longs;uis rei localem motum.

6109 6110

6111 6112 197

6113 6114 6115 Cap. 3. (Quemadmodum igitur, &longs;i quem lateat &longs;uppo&longs;itus oculo digitus, non &longs;olum app trebit, &longs;ed etiam putabitur duo, quod e&longs;t vnum. 6116 6117 6118 Si verò non lateat appa­rebit quidem, non putabitur tamen) e&longs;t hæc optica deceptio, quæ tunc accidit, cum aliquod obiectum intuentes, interim digito alterum oculum &longs;ur&longs;um pellimus, ita vt oculi propterea varient &longs;itum re&longs;pectu obiecti, &longs;iue non eo­dem &longs;itu vterque obiectum intueatur, hoc e&longs;t, vt optici aiunt, axes vi&longs;uales non amplius concurrunt &longs;imul in rem vi&longs;am. 6119 6120 Vnde &longs;equitur &longs;peciem rei in­tentionalem oculis vario &longs;itu affectis imprimi, ac proinde eam eundem &longs;i­tum in vtroque oculo minimè obtinere, &longs;ed ea, quæ oculo à &longs;uo naturali &longs;latu dimoto accidit ab altera alterius oculi differt; quapropter vario ctiam modo, duplici nimirum, obiectum repre&longs;entant. 6121 6122 atque hæc ip&longs;a cau&longs;a e&longs;t, cur illud, quod vnum tantum e&longs;t, duo tamen emoto oculorum altero, videatur. 6123 6124 Vide Alhaze­num lib. 6125 6126 3. propo&longs;it. 6127 6128 11. & 12. & infra Problem. 7. &longs;ectionis 31.

6129 6130 EX PRIMOMETAPHYSICAE.

6131 6132

6133 6134 198

6135 6136 Capite 1. (Cirea Aegyptum Mathematicæ artes constitutæ &longs;unt; illic enim gens Sacerdotum vacare permittitur) Notanda maximè no­bilis Mathematicarum origo, cum ab Aegyptiorum Sacerdoti­bus te&longs;te Philo&longs;opho fuerint adinuentæ, quibus occa&longs;ionem præ­buit anniuer&longs;aria agrorum ob Nili innundationem, diui&longs;io: cum enim iam perplures dimetiendorum agrorum rationes repertæ fui&longs;&longs;ent, Sacerdotes ip&longs;i, quibus per otium licebat, illarum praxium demon&longs;tr ationes cœperunt perue&longs;tigare, &longs;icque; paulatim po&longs;tea Geometria amplius exculta adoleuit; quæ deinde ij&longs;dem ad res a&longs;tronomicas per&longs;crutandas adiumento fuit, hacque; ratione reliquas etiam in mathematicas inciderunt.

6137 6138

6139 6140 199

6141 6142 6143 Cap. 2. (Sicut de præ&longs;tigio&longs;is, quæ per &longs;e mouentur, illi qui nondum &longs;peculati &longs;unt cau&longs;am) verbis illis (Quæ per &longs;emouentur) vnica dictio Græcare&longs;pondet, Automata. 6144 6145 6146 erant autem Automata apud veteres Gr&ecedil;cos machinæ qu&ecedil;dam, quæ à Mathematicis Mechanicæ artis occultis quibu&longs;dam ingenijs, ea arte con&longs;truebantur, vt à &longs;eip&longs;is de loco ad locum, ac &longs;i viuæ e&longs;&longs;ent &longs;pontè pro­grederentur; vnde, & automata, qua&longs;i &longs;pontanca dicebantur. 6147 6148 Extat adhuc de huiu&longs;modi machinis liber Heronis Alexandrini, quem nuper ex græco latinum reddidit docti&longs;&longs;imus Abbas Gua&longs;tallenfis. 6149 6150 de huiu&longs;modi artificio&longs;is operibus, quibus &longs;æpè pri&longs;ci ita admirationi fuere, vt præ&longs;tigia quædam ar­tificium ignorantibus, viderentur, intelligit hoc loco Ari&longs;t.

6151 6152

6153 6154 200

6155 6156 6157 Cap. 3. (Aut de &longs;ol&longs;titijs) quid &longs;ol&longs;titium, cur dicatur &longs;ol&longs;titium, & cur Sol in vtroque topico, quoad dierum incrementum, ac decrementum, & quoad eleuationem eius, aut depre&longs;&longs;ionem meridianam, videatur moras trahere, quamuis no&longs;trum &longs;it explicare, ob rei tamen facilitatem omittantur. 6158 6159 6160 Hoc tantum &longs;cias velim &longs;ol&longs;titiorum cau&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e Zodiaci ad Tropicos longio­rem adhæ&longs;ionem, ide&longs;t, quòd Zodiacus propè contactum tropicorum ab ijs parum recedat, cum ergo Sol motu proprio &longs;emper per Zodiacum inam­bulet, fit vt ip&longs;e quoque pariter modicum à tropicis remoueatur, imò pluri­mum &longs;ecus illos incedat, ita vt eo tempore, quo ad eos paulatim accedit, aut ab eis paulatim recedit, qua&longs;i &longs;tare, &longs;iue quie&longs;cere apud eo&longs;dem videa­tur: atque hinc etiam quantitas dierum, ac noctium videatur ferè nihil variari; & noua elcuatio, aut depre&longs;&longs;io Solis &longs;upra horizontem nuila ferè appareat.

6161 6162

6163 6164 201

6165 6166 Ibidem (Aut de diametri incommen&longs;ur abilitate, admirabile enim omnibus vi­detur, &longs;i quid, cum non &longs;it minimum non men&longs;uretur, decet autem in contrarium, & in melius &longs;ecundum prouerbium con&longs;umare, quemadmodŭ in his fit, cum di&longs;cant, nihil enim magis vir Geometricus admiraretur, quàm &longs;i diamcter commen&longs;urabi­lis &longs;ieret) vide quæ de hac commen&longs;urabilitate &longs;crip&longs;i lib. 6167 6168 1. Priorum, &longs;ect. 6169 6170 1. cap. 6171 6172 1. Videtur inquit mirum à principio Geometriam aggredienti diame­trum, & latus eiu&longs;dem quadrati non commen&longs;urari, cum in neutro eorum detur minimum, &longs;eu indiui&longs;ibile, videtur enim omne diui&longs;ibile po&longs;&longs;e men&longs;u­rari. 6173 6174 po&longs;tea tamen cum in Geometria ver&longs;atus fuerit, maximè admirare­tur, &longs;i audiret diametrum e&longs;&longs;e lateri commen&longs;urabilem.

6175 6176

6177 6178 202

6179 6180 Summa 2. cap. 6181 6182 3. (Pythagorici primi Mathematicis operam dedere, hæc præpo­nebant, & in cis enutriti, eorum principia, entium quoque cunctorum putant e&longs;&longs;e principia) vtinam no&longs;trates Philo&longs;ophi Pythagoricos imitarentur; enimue­rò multò melius & &longs;ibi, & Philo&longs;ophiæ con&longs;ulerent. 6183 6184 At verò non &longs;ine ma­gno artium, atque di&longs;ciplinarum omnium di&longs;pendio à plurimis hac tempe­&longs;tate de&longs;pectui habentur; &longs;ed quid mirum cum quas &longs;cientiarum omnium alumni Pythagorei omnibus &longs;cientijs anteferebant; eas no&longs;tri &longs;eculi quam­plures omnibus alijs facultatibus po&longs;thabeant.

6185 6186

6187 6188 203

6189 6190 Tex. 47. (Qui Geometriam di&longs;cit aliqua præ&longs;cire contingit) ide&longs;t definitio­nes, po&longs;tulata, axiomata, quæ &longs;unt tria principiorum genera, ex quibus to­ta Geometria deducitur.

6191 6192 Ex Secundo Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6193 6194

6195 6196 204

6197 6198 Tex. 14. (Quantam verò vim con&longs;uetudo habeat, leges declar ant, in qui­bus fabulo&longs;a, ac puerilia plus po&longs;&longs;unt propter con&longs;uetudinem, quàm &longs;i ea cogno&longs;ceremus) per leges intelligit cantilenas illas, quas vete­res Mu&longs;ici leges appellabant, eò quòd eas &longs;olas, cæteris abroga­tis liceret lata lege decantari. 6199 6200 Vide declarationem problematis 15. & 28. &longs;ect. 6201 6202 19. problematum vbi tanquam in proprio loco i&longs;ta fu&longs;ius pertractabuntur.

6203 6204 Ex Tertio Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6205 6206

6207 6208 205

6209 6210 Tex. 3. Verba huius textus, cum &longs;atis per&longs;picua &longs;int, ac parum ma­thematicis indigeant, omittenda duxi. 6211 6212 Quod ad mathematicas attinet, ait, eas non demon&longs;trare, nec per cau&longs;am finalem, nec per efficientem (quod intelligendum e&longs;t de Mathematicis puris, & &longs;peculatiuis nam mathematicæ practicæ reliquas etiam cau&longs;as, efficien­tem, & finalem nece&longs;&longs;ariò habere debent, quapropter &longs;ophi&longs;ta quidam no­mine Ari&longs;tippus, eas irridebat, atque adeo illiberalibus, ac &longs;edentarijs arti­bus po&longs;thabebat, quæ cau&longs;am efficientem, quia &longs;cilicet operantur, & fina­lem &longs;cilicet quæ&longs;tum &longs;ibi proponunt. 6213 6214 fuit autem i&longs;te ex Plutarcho, & Laer­tio primus, qui pacto pretio doceret, philo&longs;ophiamque; faceret quæ&longs;tuo&longs;am: ideoque; mathematicas paruipendebat, quòd neglecta cau&longs;a efficiente, nihil efficerent; & finali, nihil lucrarentur. 6215 6216 videas igitur quales &longs;int pulcherrima­rum facultatum contemptores, ij nimirum, qui philo&longs;ophiæ, aut lucri, aut ambitionis cau&longs;a dant operam. 6217 6218 Quod autem Mathematicæ nihil efficiant, nihilque; lucrentur, ne videamur vtile paruifacere, e&longs;t omninò fal&longs;um: &longs;unt enim plures mathematicæ practicæ, quæ innumera, atque admiranda efficiunt opera, quæque; magnos quæ&longs;tus quotidie faciunt. 6219 6220 huiu&longs;modi &longs;unt Geometria practica, qua men&longs;urationes omnes vel &longs;olo vi&longs;u perficiuntur. 6221 6222 Arithmeti­ca, cuius v&longs;us quàm latè patet? 6223 6224 Mu&longs;ica practica, qua quotidie ip&longs;i oblecta­mur; Deoque; Optimo Maximo laudes debitas concinimus. 6225 6226 Mechanica pra­ctica, cuius ope ingentia pondera, vel exigua vi, inuitaque; natura &longs;u&longs;g; deque; commouentur. 6227 6228 Per&longs;pectiua, quæ Pictoribus, & Architectoribus adeo in&longs;er­uit, vt ab&longs;que ea nihil fermè audeant. 6229 6230 A&longs;tronomia tandem, &longs;i in praxim de­ducatur, ex vna &longs;olum eclyp&longs;ium prædictione, quantam vniuer&longs;o orbi ad­mirationem parit? 6231 6232 mitto hanc &longs;olam dierum, men&longs;ium, & annorum di&longs;tri­butionem, ac temporum emendationem exhibere, rem adeò Reipublicæ Chri&longs;tianæ nece&longs;&longs;ariam.

6233 6234

6235 6236 206

6237 6238 Eodem tex. 3. (Item & in cæteris tunc &longs;cire vnumquodque arbitramur torum, quorum &longs;unt demonstrationes, cum quid e&longs;t &longs;ciamus, vt puta quid tetragoni&longs;mus, quòd inuentio mediæ) eadem reperies &longs;uperius in &longs;ecundo de Anima, tex. 12. fu&longs;ius explicata. 6239 6240 6241 6242

6243 6244

6245 6246 207

6247 6248 Tex. 8. (Si enim in hoc differret &longs;olum Geometria à Geodæ&longs;ia, quod hæc quidem eorum e&longs;t, quæ &longs;entimus, illa verò non &longs;en&longs;ibilium e&longs;t) Geodæ&longs;ia e&longs;t pars Geo­metriæ practicæ, ea &longs;cilicet, quæ circa diui&longs;ionem &longs;uperficierum ver&longs;atur. 6249 6250 audi Pedia&longs;mum de men&longs;uratione: Terræ inquit men&longs;uratio in duas partes diuiditur, Geometriam &longs;cilicet, & Geodæ&longs;iam: Areæ namque &longs;ecundum ar­tem men&longs;uratio, & terræ men&longs;uratio e&longs;t, & meritò Geometria vocatur. 6251 6252 Vnius verò, & eiu&longs;dem areæ, &longs;eu loci diui&longs;io inter diuer&longs;as per&longs;onas, parti­tio quædam e&longs;t terræ, & iure optimo Geodæ&longs;ia appellatur. 6253 6254 hæcille. 6255 6256 dicitur autem Geodæ&longs;ia à gea, terra, & da/iw, diuido. 6257 6258 Vocabulum tamen i&longs;tud Geo­dæ&longs;iæ fuit po&longs;tea ad latiorem tran&longs;latum &longs;ignificationem: extat enim Geo­dæ&longs;ia Heronis Mechanici antiqui &longs;criptoris, quampridem Baroccius lati­nitate donauit, quæ quidem ars e&longs;t eadem cum Geometria practica, cum non &longs;olum diui&longs;iones, &longs;ed men&longs;urationes omnes etiam per dioptricam f­cultatem, &longs;eu per lineas vi&longs;uales doceat inue&longs;tigare.

6259 6260 Ex Quarto Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6261 6262

6263 6264 208

6265 6266 Tex. 4. (Philo&longs;ophus namque e&longs;t, vt ille, qui Mathematicus dicitur, & bæc enim habet partes: ac prima quædam, & &longs;ecunda &longs;cientia e&longs;t: cæ teræ quoque con&longs;equenter in mathematibus) inter mathematicas pri­mæ &longs;cientiæ &longs;unt Geometria, & Arithmetica, quia ip&longs;æ à cæteris nulla ratione dependent; imò cæteræ ip&longs;is innituntur, quæ &longs;ecundæ hoc lo­co appellantur, hæ &longs;unt Per&longs;pectiua, Mu&longs;ica, Mechanica, A&longs;tronomia. 6267 6268 illas duas recentiores &longs;ubalternantes, has verò &longs;ecundas &longs;ubalternatas vocant. 6269 6270 Exempla &longs;ubalternationum varia attuli in Logicis tex. 20. & 23. primi Po­&longs;ter. vbi clarè licet intueri quid &longs;it &longs;ubalternatio, vnde etiam præ&longs;ens lo­cus illu&longs;tratur. 6271 6272 6273 6274

6275 6276

6277 6278 209

6279 6280 Tex. 28. (Vti diametrum commen&longs;urabilem e&longs;&longs;e) legenda &longs;unt ea, quæ libro primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 6281 6282 23. de hac commen&longs;urabilitate, & incommen­&longs;urabilitate tractata &longs;unt.

6283 6284 Ex Quinto Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6285 6286

6287 6288 210

6289 6290 Tex. 2. (Alia verò cau&longs;a e&longs;t forma, & exemplar: hæc autem e&longs;t ratio ip­&longs;ius quid erat e&longs;&longs;e, & borum genera, vt ip&longs;ius Diapa&longs;on duo ad vnum, & &longs;impliciter numerus, & partes, quæ in ra ione &longs;unt) affert exem­plum cau&longs;æ formalis ex Mu&longs;ica petitum; aitque; cau&longs;am formalem illius con&longs;onantiæ, quæ Diapa&longs;on dicitur, e&longs;tque; omnium perfecti&longs;&longs;ima, e&longs;&longs;e duplam proportionem, ide&longs;t, quæ e&longs;t inter duo, & vnum, id, quod omnes Mu&longs;ici fatentur. 6291 6292 quod vtinelius intelligas, repete, quæ in 2. Po&longs;ter. ad tex. 1. &longs;cripta &longs;unt: necnon quæ in libro de Sen&longs;u in cap. 6293 6294 8. Amplius inquit can&longs;am formalem genericam eiu&longs;dem Diapa&longs;on e&longs;&longs;e numerum, & partes numeri, &longs;ub numero enim continentur & duo, & vnum. 6295 6296 6297 6298 Occurrit hoc loco vnum magnopere notandum, videlicet tam con&longs;onantias, quam di&longs;&longs;onantias ha­bere proportiones numerorum, hoc tamen di&longs;crimine, quod con&longs;onantiæ habent &longs;olùm proportiones numerorum eorum, qui quaternario continen­tur, ex veterum præ&longs;ertim Pythagoreorum &longs;ententia, qui propterea vltra quaternarium progredi vetabant. 6299 6300 Recentiores tamen y&longs;que ad &longs;enarium procedunt, quippe, qui omnes vocum con&longs;onantias admittunt, quæ pro­portionibus numerorum &longs;enario contentorum præditæ &longs;int. 6301 6302 Di&longs;&longs;onantiæ verò &longs;eoundum pri&longs;cos habent proportiones numerorum extra quaterna­rium progredientium, iuxta no&longs;tros autem extra &longs;enarium. 6303 6304 qua de re pluri­bus Zarlinus colloquio 2. definit. 6305 6306 3.

6307 6308

6309 6310 211

6311 6312 Tex. 3. (Partes quoque totius) ide&longs;t &longs;unt inateria; loquitur enim de cau&longs;a materiali. 6313 6314 libuit locum hunc annotare in gratiam Geometricarum demon­&longs;trationum, quorum media &longs;æpè &longs;unt ex cau&longs;a materiali &longs;umpta, quod ta­men non ita ab omnibus ob&longs;eruatur, quotie&longs;cunque enim probant affe ctio­nem quampiam de aliquo &longs;ubiecto, ex eo, quod &longs;ubiectum illud &longs;it, vel di­midium alicuius, vel duplum, vel reliquum, vel tertia pars, & his &longs;imilia, erit talis ratio in genere cau&longs;æ materialis. 6315 6316 neque e&longs;t cur recentiores quidam, naturalibus &longs;cientijs a&longs;&longs;ueti, negent huiu&longs;modi materiam veram e&longs;&longs;emate­riam, ac proinde neq, Geometricas demon&longs;trationes veras e&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;tra­tiones; dicendum enim talem quidem materiam non e&longs;&longs;e veram materiam phy&longs;icam, & proinde illas demon&longs;trationes non e&longs;&longs;e veras naturales demon­&longs;irationes, e&longs;&longs;e tamen veram materiam intelligibilem, quæ Geometriæ &longs;u­bijcitur, & proinde demon&longs;trationes illas veras e&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trationes Geo­metricas; id quod Ari&longs;t. &longs;æpius in libris Po&longs;ter, apertè &longs;ignificat, tum a&longs;&longs;er­tionibus, tum exemplis quamplurimis. 6317 6318 Quapropter cauendum e&longs;t illis, ne ingrati animi notam incurrant, dum pulcherrimam artem re&longs;olutoriam, quam Ari&longs;t. à Mathematicis acceptam omnibus &longs;cientijs accommodauit (vt initio Priorum o&longs;ten&longs;um e&longs;t) eam ip&longs;i ita alijs facultatibus adaptent, vt Mathematicis ip&longs;is, ex quibus orta, & &longs;ub quibus adoleuit, pulla ratione conuenire poi&longs;it. 6319 6320 De hac materia fu&longs;ius infra in additamento de natura Ma­thematicarum.

6321 6322

6323 6324 212

6325 6326 Tex. 3. (Et ip&longs;ius Diapa&longs;on duplum, & numerus) &longs;cilicet cau&longs;æ formales &longs;unt, quemadmodum &longs;upra tex. 2. huius cap. 6327 6328 explicatum e&longs;t. 6329 6330

6331 6332

6333 6334 213

6335 6336 Tex. 4. (Similiter autem figurationum quoque elementa dicuntur, ac &longs;impliciter demon&longs;trationum primæ enim demon&longs;trationes, quæ in pluribus demonstr ationbus in&longs;unt, hæc elementa demon&longs;trationum dicuntur) verbo (Figurationum) &longs;iue de­&longs;criptionum, Ari&longs;t, intelligere demon&longs;trationes Geometricas, &longs;æpius dictum e&longs;t, præ&longs;ertim in Logicis, & ex hoc loco pariter confirmatur. 6337 6338 Ex hoc por­rò loco illud innote&longs;cit dignum, quod præcipuè à Mathematico non igno­retur, quæ nam &longs;int demon&longs;trationes illæ, quæ nomine elementorum debeant appelllari, necnon cau&longs;a cur Euclides &longs;uum opus elementa nuncupauerit, &longs;unt enim illæ, quæ in pluribus demon&longs;trationibus in&longs;unt, ide&longs;t, quæ &longs;æpius in alijs demon&longs;trationibus citantur, vti &longs;unt præcipuè &longs;ex priores libri Eu­clidis: atque hac ratione elementa appellantur.

6339 6340

6341 6342 214

6343 6344 Tex. 12. (Principium itaque &longs;cibilis, circa vnumquodque ip&longs;um vnum, non e&longs;t au­tem idem in cunct is generibus vnum, &longs;ed hic quidem die&longs;is, hic verò vocalis, aut muta) ide&longs;t, in Mu&longs;ica quidem principium omnium, & elementum e&longs;t die­&longs;is, quæ e&longs;t minima vox, aut &longs;onus, qui &longs;ub Mu&longs;ici con&longs;iderationem cadat. 6345 6346 Porrò ad tex. 38. primi Po&longs;ter. de die&longs;i plura &longs;unt dicta. 6347 6348

6349 6350

6351 6352 215

6353 6354 Tex. 17. (Veluti diametrum commen&longs;urabilem e&longs;&longs;e impo&longs;&longs;ibile est) huius expo­&longs;itionem inuenies 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 6355 6356 23.

6357 6358

6359 6360 216

6361 6362 Tex. eodem (Metaphoricè autem, quæ in Geometria po­tentia dicitur) potentiam vnius lineæ appellant Geometræ quadratum illius, ide&longs;t quadratum &longs;uper ip&longs;am con&longs;tru­ctum. 6363 6364 v. g. quadratum in quo C, dicitur potentia lineæ D B, quia &longs;uper illam con&longs;tructum e&longs;t. 6365 6366 6367 6368

6369 6370

6371 6372 217

6373 6374 Tex. 34. (Quemadmodum dicitur diametrum e&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;urabilem) vide an­notata 1. Priorum, fecto 1. cap. 6375 6376 23.

6377 6378

6379 6380 218

6381 6382 Tex. 35. (Vt triangulo duos rectos habere) ide&longs;t affectio trianguli e&longs;t habe­re tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis. 6383 6384 Vide declarationem huius lib. 6385 6386 primo Priornm, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 6387 6388 1.

6389 6390 Ex Sexto Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6391 6392

6393 6394 219

6395 6396 Tex. 1. (Mathematicorum quoque principia, elementa, & cau&longs;æ &longs;unt) notanda &longs;unt hæc aduer&longs;us quo&longs;dam, qui negant in Mathemati­cis cau&longs;as reperiri, vt hinc quoque illis &longs;cientiam auferant. 6397 6398 enim­uerò apertè patet eos falli ex toto hoc Ari&longs;t. 6399 6400 di&longs;cur&longs;u.

6401 6402 Ex Nono Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6403 6404

6405 6406 220

6407 6408 Vt &longs;i quis dicat diametrum po&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;arari, non tamen commen&longs;u­rabitur) & paulò infra (Commen&longs;urari enim impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t) expo&longs;i­tionem horum reperies 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 6409 6410 23.

6411 6412

6413 6414 221

6415 6416 Tex. 20. (De&longs;eriptiones quoque actu inueniuntur, diuidentes nanque inuenirent, quod &longs;i diui&longs;æ e&longs;&longs;ent, manife&longs;i è e&longs;&longs;ent, nunc autem in&longs;unt potentia, cur triangulus duo recti? 6417 6418 quia qui circa vnum punctum anguli duobus rectis æquales&longs;unt, &longs;i igitur quæ ad latus educeretur, videnti mox e&longs;&longs;et manife&longs;tum) per de&longs;cri­ptiones, vel figurationes, vel de&longs;ignationes intelligendas e&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;tra­tiones Geometricas &longs;æpius &longs;upra dictum e&longs;t, & pariter ex hoc loco com­probatur. 6419 6420 Dicit igitur, quod demon&longs;trationes &longs;uas Geometræ inueniunt, reducendo ad actum ea, quæ erant in potentia, diuidentes enim educunt in actum, figuras, angulos, lineas, & cætera huiu&longs;inodi, quæ prius &longs;olùm erat in potentia, ex quibus po&longs;tea &longs;uas demon&longs;trationes perficiunt (Cur triangu­lus duo recti) affert exemplum eius, quod proximè dixerat, &longs;cilicet Geome­tras demon&longs;trare producendo ad actum entia quædam Mathematica, quod exemplum, vt intelligas ijs opus habes, quæ primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 6421 6422 1. con&longs;cripta &longs;unt (Cur triangulus duo recti?) ide&longs;t, cur triangulus habet tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angulis (Quia qui circa vnum punctum anguli duobus rectis angulis æquales &longs;unt) ni&longs;i hoc dictum ad bonum trahatur &longs;en&longs;um,

fal&longs;um e&longs;t, nam omnes anguli, qui circa vnum punctum, v. g. A, &longs;unt con&longs;tituti, æquales &longs;unt non duobus, vt e&longs;t in textu, &longs;ed quatuor rectis, vt patet ex corollario 2. 15. primi Elem. 6423 6424 quot­quot enim anguli con&longs;tituantur ad punctum A, omnes &longs;imul erunt æquales quatuor rectis, quos faciunt præ&longs;entes lineæ B C, D E. vniuer&longs;i enim illi congruent his quatuor rectis: &longs;ed Ari&longs;t. &longs;en­&longs;us e&longs;t omnes angulos ad ea&longs;dem partes con&longs;ti­tutos, v. g. ad partes &longs;uperiores lineæ B C, e&longs;&longs;e æquales duobus rectis B A D, D A C, vt o&longs;tenditur in 13. primi, necnon etiam patere pote&longs;t ex corollario 2. 15. eiu&longs;dem. 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 tales &longs;unt quatuor anguli ad &longs;uperiores partes lineæ B C, & ad punctum A, con&longs;tituti, qui, vt patet,
&longs;unt æquales duobus rectis B A D, D A C, tales etiam &longs;unt in hac &longs;ecunda figura tres anguli B C A, A C D, D C E, qui quidem æquales &longs;unt duobus rectis angulis. 6435 6436 hoc &longs;en&longs;i&longs;&longs;e Ari&longs;t. 6437 6438 patet ex demon&longs;tratione 32. primi, quæ demon&longs;trat memoratam ab Ari­&longs;tot. trianguli affectionem, & ad quam propterea ip&longs;e &longs;pectabat, cuius figura e&longs;t eadem cum hac &longs;ecunda, in qua Euclides o&longs;tendit prædictos tres angulos æquari duobus rectis. 6439 6440 6441 6442 &longs;ubdit po&longs;tea, &longs;i igitur linea C D, quæ ad latus A B, parallela e&longs;t in potentia, educeretur in actum, videnti mox e&longs;&longs;et manife&longs;tum tres angulos trianguli A B C, e&longs;&longs;e pares duobus rectis. 6443 6444 ducta enim C D, pa­rallela lateri B A, apparet &longs;tatim angulus A, æqualis angulo A C D, & an­gulus B, angulo D C E; cum reliquus verò trianguli angulus B C A, &longs;it apud prædictos duos ad idem punctum C, con&longs;tit utus; atque omnes hi tres duobus rectis æquentur, mox in&longs;picienti talem figur ationem manife&longs;tum fit tres an­gulos illius trianguli e&longs;&longs;e duobus rectis æqu ales.

6445 6446

6447 6448 222

6449 6450 Ibidem (Cur in &longs;emicirculo vniuer&longs;aliter rectus? 6451 6452 quia &longs;i tres æquales, & quæ ba&longs;is e&longs;t duo, & quæ ex medio &longs;upra stat recta, videnti manifestum erit ei, qui illud &longs;ciat) In 2. Po&longs;ter. tex. 11. inuenies hu ius loci expo&longs;itionem. 6453 6454 6455 6456 nunc &longs;olùm

hæc addenda &longs;unt. 6457 6458 Re&longs;pondet Ari&longs;t. 6459 6460 quæ­&longs;ito pr&ecedil;cedenti, cur &longs;cilicet angulus in &longs;e­micirculo &longs;it rectus, qualis e&longs;t in figura angulus A C B, dicitque; cau&longs;am e&longs;&longs;e, quia in figura tres lineæ &longs;unt æquales, duæ ni­mirum, in quas ba&longs;is B A, diuiditur, quæ &longs;unt B D, D A, & tertia, quæ ex medio ba&longs;is erigitur, e&longs;tque; D C, cum omnes &longs;int &longs;emidia metri ciu&longs;dem circuli. 6461 6462 educta itaque linea D C, de potentia in actum, &longs;i cuipiam trium harum linearum æqualitas innote&longs;cat, continuò ei etiam manife&longs;tum erit angulum A C B, in &longs;emicirculo, e&longs;&longs;e rectum. 6463 6464 quia &longs;tatim ap­parent duo i&longs;o&longs;celia B D C, A D C, quorum anguli ad ba&longs;es B C, A C, &longs;unt æquales inuicem; & anguli duo ad D, &longs;unt dupli duorum angulorum A C D, D C B, ex quibus conflatur totus angulus A C B, ergo duo anguli ad D, &longs;unt dupli anguli B C A, &longs;ed duo anguli ad D, &longs;unt æquales duobus rectis, ergo duo recti &longs;unt dupli anguli A C B, ergo angulus B C A, e&longs;t dimidium duo­rum rectorum. 6465 6466 cum autem omnes recti &longs;int æquales, con&longs;ectarium e&longs;t dimi­dium duorum rectorum e&longs;&longs;e angulum rectum. 6467 6468 patet igitur, qua ratione ex ductu linearum prædictarum actu, manife&longs;tum fiat angulum in &longs;emicirculo A C B, e&longs;&longs;e rectum. 6469 6470 ne mireris &longs;i vulgatam tran&longs;lationem antiquam non &longs;um &longs;equutus, indigebat enim correctione, quam iuxta græcum exem­plar adhibui.

6471 6472

6473 6474 223

6475 6476 Tex. 22. (Vt puta &longs;i triangulum non putet mutari, non opinabitur modo duos rectos habere, modo non, mutaretur enim) quia nimirum huius habemus &longs;cien­tiam per demon&longs;trationem 32. primi Elementorum. 6477 6478 quomodo autem tri­angulus habeat duos rectos, ide&longs;t tres angulos æquales duobus rectis angu­lis, explicatum e&longs;t primo Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 6479 6480 1.

6481 6482

6483 6484 224

6485 6486 Ibidem (Verum aliquid quidem, aliquid verò non, vt puta parem numerum primum nullum e&longs;&longs;e; aut quo&longs;dam quidem, quo&longs;dam verò non) definitione 11. 7. Elem. 6487 6488 &longs;ic numerus ille, qui à Mathematicis dicitur primus, definitur, pri­mus numerus e&longs;t, quem vnitas &longs;ola metitur, vnde patet inter numeros pa­res &longs;olum binarium e&longs;&longs;e primum, cum ip&longs;um &longs;ola vnitas bis replicata men­&longs;uraret. 6489 6490 quaternarium autem, &longs;enarium, &c. 6491 6492 pares, non e&longs;&longs;e primos, cum eos non &longs;ola vnitas, &longs;ed alius numerus metiatur: quaternarium enim bina­rius bis replicatus men&longs;urat: &longs;enarium men&longs;urat & binarius, & ternarius: quare verum erit exi&longs;timare inter pares numeros aliquos e&longs;&longs;e primos, ide&longs;t binarium, aliquos verò non, ide&longs;t cæteros pares vltra binarium.

6493 6494 Ex Decimo Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6495 6496

6497 6498 225

6499 6500 Tex. 4. (Ac etiam motum &longs;implici, & veloti&longs;&longs;imo motu men&longs;urant, mi­nimum enim tempus hic habet. 6501 6502 quapropter in A&longs;trologia tale vnŭ prin­cipium, & men&longs;ura e&longs;t. 6503 6504 motum enim æqualem, & veloci&longs;&longs;iniŭ œli &longs;up­ponunt, ad quem cæteros tudicant) intelligit motum diureum, quam primo cœlo, &longs;eu mobili a&longs;eribunt, hic enim veloci&longs;&longs;imus e&longs;t omnium reli­quorum cœle&longs;tium motuum, ac &longs;impliciffimus, & valdè vniformis, ac regu­laris, & propterea minimum habet tempus, ide&longs;t tempus vnius diei natura­lis, quo tempore totum primum mobile circulationem integram perficit. 6505 6506 per minimum tempus, po&longs;&longs;uut etiam intelligi partes diei, quæ &longs;unt horæ, & horarum partes. 6507 6508 con&longs;iderant hunc motum in circulo æquàtoris, quia æqua­tor motu primi mobilis, &longs;eu diurno vniformiter, ae maximè regulatiter mouetur: hac de cau&longs;a hunc motum tanquam reliquorum men&longs;uram, ac normam meritò a&longs;&longs;ump&longs;erunt.

6509 6510

6511 6512 226

6513 6514 Ibidem (Et in Mu&longs;ica Die&longs;is primus &longs;en&longs;ibilis &longs;onus, quia minimum) ide&longs;t mi­nimum interuallum, quod à Mu&longs;icis con&longs;ideretur, e&longs;t men&longs;ura maiorum in­teruallorum. 6515 6516 ad tex. 38. primi Po&longs;ter. &longs;atis dictum e&longs;t de Die&longs;i, quæ videas. 6517 6518

6519 6520

6521 6522 227

6523 6524 Eodem tex. &longs;ed cap. 6525 6526 3. (Nox &longs;emper autem men&longs;ura numero vnum e&longs;t, verum aliquando plura, vt puta die&longs;es duæ, non quidem &longs;ecundum cuditum, &longs;ed in ratio­nibus, & voces plures, quibus men&longs;uramus, & diameter duobus men&longs;uratur, & la­tus, & omnes magnitudines) ita corrigenda e&longs;t antiqua tran&longs;latio. 6527 6528 6529 6530 quid die&longs;is dictum &longs;it ad tex. 38. primi Po&longs;ter. quando autem ait (Vt puta duæ die&longs;es)ide&longs;t duæ die&longs;es &longs;unt men&longs;ura vnius interualli mu&longs;ici, qui tonus appellatur: quæ quidem duæ die&longs;es non &longs;unt men&longs;ura &longs;en&longs;ibilis, quæ &longs;cilicet auribus per­cipiatur, &longs;ed tantummodò exi&longs;tunt in numerorum proportionibus, ibi per intellectum excogitatis, quando ait (Et voces plures quibus men&longs;uramus)quando vtimur eodem interuallo, &longs;iue eadem voce ad cantus men&longs;uram, tunc &longs;unt plures men&longs;uræ numero, quamuis vna tantum &longs;pecie. Ait (Et dia­meter duobus men&longs;uratur) v. g. duobus &longs;emidiametris: vel duobus pedibus. 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 & latus pariter quadrati, duobus. 6539 6540 v. g. pedibus mensuratur; eodemque; mo­do reliquæ omnes magnitudines po&longs;&longs;unt ab eadem men&longs;ura &longs;æipius replica­ta men&longs;urari. 6541 6542 6543 6544

6545 6546

6547 6548 228

6549 6550 Eodem tex. (Semper autem men&longs;ura eiu&longs;dem generis e&longs;t, magnitudinum nam­que magnitudo, & &longs;ecundum vnumquedque, longitudinis longitudo) ex his ratio manife&longs;ta apparet, cur Geometræ practici men&longs;urent longitudines per ali­quam longitudinem, vt puta per vlnam, digitum, vnciam, &c. 6551 6552 &longs;uperficies etiam per aliquam &longs;uperficiem, &longs;ed quæ &longs;it quadrata, vt puta per vlnam qua­dratam, palmum quadratum, &c. 6553 6554 corpora quoque per corpus, quod tamen &longs;it cubus, vt per vlnam cubicam, palmum cubicum, vnciam cubicam, &c.

6555 6556

6557 6558 229

6559 6560 Tex. 11. (Similia verò &longs;i cum non &longs;int eadem &longs;impliciter, nec &longs;ecundum &longs;ab&longs;t an­tiam &longs;ubiectam in d. 6561 6562 fferentia &longs;ecundum formam eadem &longs;it: quemadmodum quadra­tum maius minori &longs;imile e&longs;t, & lineæ inæquales, hæ enim &longs;imiles quidem, verŭ non cædem &longs;impliciter &longs;unt) Prima definitio &longs;exti definit &longs;imiles figuras eas e&longs;&longs;e, quæ &longs;unt æquiangulæ inuicem, & quæ habent latera proportionalia circa æquales angulos. 6563 6564 cum ergò quadratum maius, & minus &longs;int æquiangula, quia habent omnes angulos rectos; & præterea habeant latera circa æqua­les angulos proportionalia, &longs;icut enim latera maioris quadrati circa vnum angulum rectum &longs;unt in proportione æqualitatis; ita quoque latera minoris circa vnum angulum rectum &longs;unt illis proportionalia, cum &longs;int inuicem pa­riter in proportione æqualitatis, erunt nece&longs;&longs;ariò &longs;imilia hæc duo quadrata. 6565 6566 duæ ctiam, exempli gratia, lineæ rectæ &longs;unt inuicem &longs;imiles, quamuis vna &longs;it maior altera.

6567 6568

6569 6570 230

6571 6572 Eodem tex. (Tertium &longs;icut illa, quæ in Mathematicis) tertium &longs;cilicet mo­dum diuer&longs;i, ponit in entibus Mathematicis, &longs;icut enim po&longs;uit idem e&longs;&longs;e in Mathematicis, quando duæ figuræ &longs;unt &longs;imiles, & æquales: ita ex oppo&longs;ito diuer&longs;um erit in Mathematicis, quando duæ figuræ fuerint di&longs;&longs;imiles, & in­æquales, dicenturque; diuer&longs;æ, in quo con&longs;i&longs;tat &longs;imilitudo figurarum dictum e&longs;t in præcedenti expo&longs;itione.

6573 6574 Ex Vndecimo Metaphy&longs;iæ.

6575 6576

6577 6578 231

6579 6580 Svmma r. 6581 6582 cap. 6583 6584 2. (Si quis verò lineas, aut quæ has &longs;equuntur, dico autem primas &longs;uperficies principia e&longs;&longs;e ponat. 6585 6586 bæc non &longs;unt &longs;ub&longs;tantiæ &longs;eparabiles, verùm &longs;ectiones, & diui&longs;iones, illæ quidem in &longs;uperficierum, hæc verò cor­porum, puncta verò linearum &longs;unt, & etiam ip&longs;arum earumdem termini; hæc autem omnia in alijs &longs;unt, & nihil &longs;eparabile e&longs;t) ait puncta oriri ex &longs;ectio­ne lineæ, quamuis &longs;int etiam termini illius; lineas verò oriri ex diui&longs;ione &longs;uperficierum, quamuis &longs;int etiam termini illarum. 6587 6588 &longs;uperficies quoque oriri ex diui&longs;ione corporum, quamuis &longs;int etiam termini, illorum. 6589 6590 Hæc placuit annotare propter ip&longs;orum conuenientiam cum ijs, quæ à Geometris traduntur.

6591 6592

6593 6594 232

6595 6596 Summa 3. cap. 6597 6598 2. (Vt puta &longs;ub Cane fiat frigus) ideft &longs;ub ortum Canis cœ­læ&longs;tis, &longs;eu Caniculæ. 6599 6600 Vide quæ libro &longs;ecundo Meteororum, &longs;umma 2. cap. 6601 6602 2. de hac &longs;tella &longs;crip&longs;imus.

6603 6604 Ex Duodecimo Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6605 6606

6607 6608 233

6609 6610 Tex. 44. (Pluralitatem verò lationum ex peculiari&longs;&longs;ima Philo&longs;ophie Mathematicarum &longs;cientiarum, videlicet ex A&longs;tronomia con&longs;iderandum est: hæc enim de &longs;ub&longs;tantia &longs;en&longs;ibili quidem, ac &longs;empiterna &longs;peculatur)pluralitatem nimirum cœle&longs;tium motuum petendam e&longs;&longs;e a&longs;&longs;erit ex præcipua totius Philo&longs;ophiæ parte, quam ait e&longs;&longs;e A&longs;tronomiam. 6611 6612 dignum porrò con&longs;ideratione e&longs;t, quanti faciat Ari&longs;t. Mathematicas di&longs;ciplinas, ac præcipuè &longs;yderalem &longs;cientiam.

6613 6614

6615 6616 234

6617 6618 Tex. 45. (Eudoxus igitur Solis, & Lunæ lationem po&longs;uit fieri à tribus orbibus, quorum primus quidem e&longs;&longs;et, qui inerrantium &longs;iellarum; &longs;ecundus verò &longs;ecunduns id, quod per medium Zodiacum; tertius tandem, &longs;ecundum quem qui in latitudine Zodiaci obliquatur. 6619 6620 in maiori autem latitudine obliquari eum &longs;ecundum quem Lu­na, quàm eum &longs;ecundum quem Sol &longs;ertur) Eudoxi tempore nondum &longs;atis ex­culta fuerat A&longs;tronomia, vt propterea minimè mirandum &longs;it, eum hoc lo­co imperfecta admodum circa c&ecedil;le&longs;tia tradere. 6621 6622 omittit enim in Sole orbem motum augis conficientem; necnon duos eccentricos, qui &longs;olis anomaliam, atque eccentricitatis variationem excu&longs;ant. 6623 6624 attribuit præterea Soli motum quendam in latitudinem, quod fal&longs;um e&longs;t omninò, cum Sol perpetuò directè &longs;ub eclyptica incedat. 6625 6626 In Luna pariter plures nece&longs;&longs;arios illi orbes ad motus ip&longs;ius &longs;aluandos prætermittit. 6627 6628 Ex &longs;ententia tamen Tychonis Brahe hos or­bes, ac circulos tanquam ab inuicem di&longs;tinctos abrogare debemus.

6629 6630

6631 6632 235

6633 6634 Tex. 46. (Errantium verò &longs;tellarum vniu&longs;cuiu&longs;que in quatuor &longs;phæris, quarura primam quidem, & &longs;ecundam eandem illis e&longs;&longs;e: etenim, quæ fix arum eft eam illam e&longs;&longs;e, quæomnes fert: at cam, quæ &longs;ub ip&longs;a ordinata e&longs;t, ac quæ &longs;ecuxdum Zodiacum lationem habet, communem omnibus e&longs;&longs;e. 6635 6636 Tertiæ verò omnium polos in eo, quod per medium Zodiacum e&longs;t. 6637 6638 Quartæ autem lationem &longs;ecundum eum, qui obliquatus ad medusm eius e&longs;t; e&longs;&longs;e verò tertiæ &longs;phæræ polos aliarum quidem proprios, Veneris autem, & Mercurij eo&longs;dem) pergit tradere theoriam reliquorum errantium quinque &longs;yderum, &longs;ecundum mentem Eudoxi, qui propriè Planetæ dicuntur: Sol autem, & Luna hoc nomine non e&longs;t complexus, eo quod ip&longs;a mereantur potius duo mundi luminaria appellari, quàm cum c&ecedil;teris &longs;tellis in ordinem redigi. 6639 6640 Reliquis igitur quinque erronibus &longs;ingulis quatuor &longs;phæris attribue­bat, quarum prima, & &longs;ecunda eodem modo &longs;e habebant, ac in Sole, & Lu­na, etenim octaua &longs;phæra, &longs;eu firmamentum, quod affixa &longs;ibi &longs;ydera differt communicabat, &longs;ecundum ip&longs;um reliquis inferioribus &longs;phæris motum &longs;uum peculiarem, videlicet diurnum, quo ab oriente in occidentem tota c&ecedil;li ma­china conuertebatur. 6641 6642 fecundam eam facit, quæ Planetas omnes &longs;ecundum Zodiaci longitudinem ab occidente in orientem vehebat, quæ pariter eodem modo &longs;e habet in &longs;ingulis. 6643 6644 Tertiam verò eam confinxit, cuius poli e&longs;&longs;ent in eclyptica, in quibus cita, ab eclyptica vltrò, citroque; dilataretur. 6645 6646 Quartam demum po&longs;uit, quæ tertiam bifariam &longs;ecaret, eamque; tali motu cieret, ne ab eclyptica plus iu&longs;to ver&longs;us mundi polos exorbitaret. 6647 6648 porrò in reliquis vo­luit polos tertij orbis e&longs;&longs;e peculiares, Veneri autem, & Mercurio eo&longs;dem e&longs;&longs;e, ide&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e in eadem linea. 6649 6650 Ex mente igitur Eudoxi cœle&longs;tes orbes in vniuer&longs;um 27. numerantur, in Sole &longs;imul, ac Luna 6. in reliquis quinque er­rantibus 20. atque octauæ &longs;phæræ 1. Non me later, has Eudoxi po&longs;itiones, ob ratas po&longs;teriorum a&longs;tronomorum ob&longs;eruationes non &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;tere. 6651 6652 at verò hic non ip&longs;ius placita, &longs;ed præcipuè textus intelligentiam per&longs;equor.

6653 6654

6655 6656 236

6657 6658 Tex. 47. (At Calippus &longs;itum quidem &longs;phærarum eundem Eudoxo ponebat, hoe e&longs;t di&longs;tantiarum ordinem. 6659 6660 pluralitatem autem &longs;tellæ quidem Iouis, ac Saturni ean­dem illi attribuebat. 6661 6662 Solis verò, & Lunæ duas adbuc putabat &longs;phæras addendas e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;i quis eorum, quæ &longs;en&longs;ibilitcr apparent, can&longs;as a&longs;&longs;ignare debeat. 6663 6664 Cæteris ve­rò errantium vnicuique vnam. 6665 6666 nece&longs;&longs;e verò e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;i debent omnes &longs;imul po&longs;itæ, quæ apparent reddere, &longs;ecundam vnamquamque errantium alteras &longs;phæras vna paucie­res e&longs;&longs;e, quæ reuoluant, & ad idem po&longs;itione &longs;emper primam eius astri &longs;phæram, quod inferius ordinatum e&longs;t, con&longs;tituant. 6667 6668 boc enim modo &longs;olùm contingit errantium lationem omnia facere. 6669 6670 Cùmigitur, in quibus ip&longs;a quidem feruntur &longs;phæris, hæ quidem octo, bæverò vigintiquinque &longs;int. 6671 6672 horum &longs;ane non oportet illas &longs;olas reuo­lai, in quiòus fertur, quod infimè ordinatum e&longs;t. 6673 6674 quæ quidem duarum &longs;phærarum primas reuoluant, &longs;ex erunt. 6675 6676 quæ verò pe&longs;teriorum quatuor, &longs;exdecim. 6677 6678 cunctarum verò numerus, tùm earum quæ ferunt, tùm quæ reuoluunt eas, quinquaginta quin­que. 6679 6680 quòd &longs;i Lunæ, & Soli, non addat aliquis quos diximus motus, omnes &longs;phæræ erunt &longs;eptem, & quadraginta. 6681 6682 pluralitas itaque &longs;phærarum tanta &longs;it) textum hunc per paraphra&longs;im &longs;ic explico; Calippus igitur eundem quidem ordinem, at­que di&longs;tantiam &longs;phærarum cum Eudoxo ponebat: eandemque; pluralitatem orbium mouentium Saturnum, ac Jouem; quatuor nimirum vnicuique eorum. 6683 6684 &longs;ed putabat &longs;oli duas addendas, ac Lunæ &longs;imiliter, &longs;i quis eorum apparentias &longs;aluare vellet. 6685 6686 cæteris verò errantium, Marti, Veneri, & Mercurio vnicuique vnam. 6687 6688 nece&longs;&longs;e præterea exi&longs;timabat e&longs;&longs;e, vt prædictæ omnes &longs;phæræ &longs;imul apparentias omnes excu&longs;arent, addendas e&longs;&longs;e alias &longs;ingulis planetis toti­dem &longs;phæras vna minus, quas Reuoluentes appellabat; ita vt qui quatuor Mouentes &longs;phæras habuif&longs;et, tribus præterea reuoluentibus opus haberet: quæ &longs;phæræ reuoluentes id præ&longs;tabant, vt qua&longs;i priores Mouentes ita in of­ficio continerent, vt priori po&longs;itioni a&longs;trum, quod interiori orbi affigebur &longs;uo tempore re&longs;tituerent, vt Alexander exponit. 6689 6690 hoc enim &longs;olummodo po&longs;­&longs;ibile putabat omnes errantium lationes nos imitari po&longs;&longs;e. 6691 6692 Cum igitur mo­uentes &longs;phæræ illæ quidem Saturni, ac Iouis &longs;int octo; reliquorum verò vi­gintiquinque, nam reliqui Planetæ quinque &longs;inguli &longs;phæras quinque mouentes habent, quæ omnes &longs;imul numerum vigintiquinque explent: quarum omnium &longs;olæ inferiores, quibus a&longs;trum affixum volebat, non indigebant reuoluente, &longs;equitur duorum &longs;uperiorum Saturni, & Iouis, quorum octo erant mouen­tes, &longs;ex debere e&longs;&longs;e reuoluentes. 6693 6694 Inferiorum verò quatuor planetarum re­uoluentes erunt &longs;exdecim: &longs;ed hoc loco Ari&longs;t. 6695 6696 memoria fallit, deberet enim dicere, reliquorum quinque planetarum reuoluentes erunt vigintì, &longs;unt enim planetæ &longs;eptem, quorum Saturno, ac Ioui &longs;upremis &longs;ex reuoluentes attri­buit habita ratione &longs;phæratum mouentium; reliquis igitur quinque planetis habita ratione &longs;uorum orbium mouentium, 25. cum &longs;inguli habeant quinque mouentes, habebunt ex prælcripto Calippi &longs;inguli 4. reuoluentes; ac pro­inde 20. in vniuer&longs;um erunt reuoluentes. 6697 6698 Omnium igitur &longs;phærarum tam mouentium, quàm reuoluentium &longs;ummam ait, &longs;ed perperam, e&longs;&longs;e quinqua­gintaquinque; cum enim mouentes Saturni, & Iouis &longs;int 8. reliquorum au­tem 25. reuoluentes verò Saturni, & Iouis &longs;int 6. reliquorum autem, vt ip­&longs;e memoria fal&longs;us ponit, &longs;exdecim, conflant quidem &longs;ummam prædictam, &longs;ed illi in memoria reuocandus e&longs;t, planeta ille, quem oblitus e&longs;t, cuius &longs;unt quatuor reuoluentes, qui prioribus additi &longs;phærarum errantium numerum quinquaginta nouem con&longs;tituent: quibus etiam addenda e&longs;t octaua &longs;phæra, &longs;eu firmamentum, quod inerrantium &longs;edes e&longs;t, non enim &longs;olum errantium, &longs;ed omnium cœle&longs;tium orbium numerum inue&longs;tigare volebat, &longs;icque; e&longs;&longs;ent omnes &longs;ecundum Calippum &longs;ph&ecedil;ræ &longs;exaginta. 6699 6700 Quod &longs;i Lunæ, & Soli non ad­dantur &longs;ingulis duo mouentes, vt facit Calippus, neque con&longs;equenter quatuor illis debiti reuoluentes non erunt omnes, 55. verùm, detractis octo prædi­ctis, erunt tantum 47. &longs;eu vt melius loquatur non erunt in vniuer&longs;um, 60. &longs;ed 52. tantum. 6701 6702 Hactenus de numero cœlorum.

6703 6704 Ex Decimotertio Metaphy&longs;icæ.

6705 6706

6707 6708 237

6709 6710 Svmma 1. cap. 6711 6712 3. (Qui dicunt Mathematicas &longs;cientias nihil de bono, vel pulchro dicere, fal&longs;um dicunt. 6713 6714 dicunt. 6715 6716 n. 6717 6718 & maximè o&longs;tendunt. 6719 6720 nam & &longs;i non nominant, quia tamen opera, & rationes ostendunt, non ne dicunt de eis? 6721 6722 pulchra namque maximè &longs;pecies &longs;unt, ordo, commen&longs;uratio, & definuŭ, quæ maximè à Mathematicis &longs;cientijs o&longs;tenduntur, &c.) placuit hæc in Mathemati­carum commendationem, ac defen&longs;ionem apponere, cum non de&longs;int hac no&longs;tra tempe&longs;tate ageometrcti complures, qui cas libenter &longs;ugillare &longs;olent.

6723 6724 IN MECHANICAS QVÆSTIONES.

6725 6726 Qvidquid Mathematicum in his quæ&longs;tionibus occurret, illud, vt plurimum per paraphra&longs;im exponemus, ita tamen, vt tex. Ari&longs;t. & figuræ textui re&longs;pondentes per eam, quantum fieri poterit re­&longs;tituantur, & &longs;i quæ &longs;e offerent difficilia, pro viribus &longs;oluantur. 6727 6728 6729 6730 E&longs;t autem nonnullis in locis textus tam græcus, quàm latinus adeò corrup­tus, ac deprauatus, vt nullo modo emendari queat.

6731 6732 Caput Primum.

6733 6734 Quæ &longs;it artis Mechanicæ facultas.

6735 6736

6737 6738 238

6739 6740 Eorum, quæ miraculo &longs;unt, alia quidem natura contingunt, &longs;untque; ea, quorum ignorantur cau&longs;æ: alia verò &longs;unt, quæ præter naturam per artificium aliquod ad hominum vtilitatem perficiuntur, in multis namque natura ei, quod nobis v&longs;ui e&longs;&longs;e pote&longs;t, contrarium facit, quod inde oritur, quia natura eundem &longs;emper, ac &longs;implicem &longs;eruat modum: quod autem nobis vtile e&longs;t, plurimas &longs;ubit varietates. 6741 6742 quando igitur quippiam præter naturam facere opportuerit, illud, quod faciendum e&longs;t, difficultate &longs;ua nos remoratur, arteque; propterea indigemus. 6743 6744 quamobrem eam artis partem, quæ huiu&longs;modi &longs;uccurrit difficultatibus, Mechanicam appellamus. 6745 6746 Cæterùm optimè Antiphon Poeta in hunc modum cecinit;

6747 6748 Arte &longs;uperamus ea, in quibus à natura vincimur.

6749 6750 Quemadmodum accidit, cum minora &longs;uperant maiora, & quæcunque exi­guam vim habentia, magna tamen mouent pondera, & omnia ferè illa, quæ &longs;ub ea cadunt problemata, quæ mechanica nuncupari &longs;olent. 6751 6752 &longs;unt autem hæc neque naturalibus omninò quæ&longs;tionibus eadem, neque &longs;eiugata valde: verùm mathematicarum contemplationum, naturaliumque communia. 6753 6754 Po&longs;tea in græcis codicibus hæc &longs;equuntur (to\ men ga\r w_c di\a twn maqhmatixw_n dh/log: to\ de pevi\o\, di\a tw_n fuszxw_n) ide&longs;t, &longs;i quidem quomodo &longs;int, &longs;eu qua ratione exi&longs;tant, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t per Mathematica: illud verò circa quod ver&longs;antur, hoc e&longs;t obiectum, de quo pertractant Mechanicæ quæ&longs;tiones per &longs;cientias phy&longs;icas habetur, ide&longs;t res naturalis e&longs;t; e&longs;t enim pondus, & vis, aut poten­tia pondus ip&longs;um mouens, quatenus quanta &longs;unt; &longs;iue dixeris e&longs;t quantitas ponderum, atque potentiarum. 6755 6756 Mathematicæ enim mediæ, de quorum nu­mero e&longs;t facultas Mechanica, con&longs;iderant quantitatem rei alicuius determinatæ, &longs;ic A&longs;tronomia circa cœle&longs;tium corporum, mo­tuumque; quantitates, Per&longs;pectiua circa linearum vi&longs;ua­lium; Mu&longs;ica circa &longs;onorum quantitates ver­&longs;antur. 6757 6758 quæ placuit annotare, vt &longs;cien­tiæ huius naturam per&longs;pectam haberemus.

6759 6760 De dignitatibus, admirandisque; Circuli proprietatibus.

6761 6762 Cap. 6763 6764 Secundum.

6765 6766

6767 6768 239

6769 6770 Cvm vellet Ari&longs;t. 6771 6772 mirabilium effectuum, quos in Mechanicis admi­ramur, cau&longs;am referre in circulum: meritò ante omnia de admi­randa ip&longs;ius circuli natura di&longs;&longs;erit, quo minus mirum deinde vi­deatur prædictas mirabiles-operationes exip&longs;o procedere. 6773 6774 quan­doquidem exadmiranda cau&longs;a admirabiles effectus prodire debeant. 6775 6776 qua­lia &longs;unt ea, quæ circa yectem, cum magna omnium admiratione contingunt. 6777 6778 videmus enim exiguam pror&longs;us vim ingens pondus, quod ab&longs;que vecte mini­mè mouere po&longs;&longs;et, addito etiam ip&longs;ius vectis pondere, facilè quocunque vo­luerit propellere. 6779 6780 quod quidem auditu ab&longs;urdum foret, ni&longs;i vi&longs;u con&longs;taret. 6781 6782 omnium autem huiu&longs;modi cau&longs;æ principium circulus obtinet: & hoc qui­dem meritò, ex admirabili enim, quippiam mirandum accidere rationi omninò con&longs;entaneum eft.

6783 6784 Primò igitur maximè admirandum e&longs;t contraria &longs;imul fieri, aut exi&longs;tere:circulus tamen ex contrarijs e&longs;t con&longs;titutus, oritur enim circulus ex com­moto, & manente, quæ quidem naturaliter &longs;untinuicem contraria. 6785 6786 &longs;it au­tem circulus ex commoto, & manente, quia oritur ex circumuolutione vnius rectæ lineæ, cuius alterum extremum fixum manet, alterum verò cir­cumagitur; quamobrem i&longs;thæc cernentes minus admirari conuenit reliquas, quæ in ip&longs;o &longs;unt contrarietates. 6787 6788 cuiu&longs;modi e&longs;t hæc, quod cum linea, quæ cir­culi orbem complectitur, quæque; circunferentia appellatur, nullam habeat latitudinem, ei tamen contraria quodammodo in&longs;unt, concauum &longs;cilicet, & curuum; quæ quidem eo modo &longs;unt contraria, quo etiam magnum, & pa­ruum, horum enim medium e&longs;t æquale; illorum verò rectum. 6789 6790 & &longs;icuti quan­do magnum, & paruum inuicem commutantur, ita vt quod magnum e&longs;t fiat paruum, quod verò paruum fiat magnum, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t, vt perueniant ad æquale priu&longs;quam ad extremum alterutrum; ita linea curua antequam fiat concaua, debet prius fieri recta: & ex concaua, vt tran&longs;eat ad conuexam, & circularem, debet &longs;imiliter prius e&longs;&longs;e recta.

6791 6792 Alterum contrarium, quod circulo ine&longs;t, e&longs;t &longs;imul contrarijs motibus mo­neri: &longs;imul enim ad anteriorem mouetur locum, & ad po&longs;teriotem. 6793 6794 & eo­dem modo linea illa, quæ ex vno extremo manens, ex altero verò circum­lata circulum de&longs;cribit, &longs;e habet; contraria enim &longs;imul contipet, primum &longs;cilicet, & extremum. 6795 6796 Ex quo enim primo loco circumagi incipit ad eun­dem rur&longs;us po&longs;tremò reuertitur, ita, vt primum ip&longs;ius, & po&longs;tremum idem &longs;int; quapropter, vt prius dicebamus non e&longs;t inconueniens, ip&longs;um circulum miraculorum omnium e&longs;&longs;e principium. 6797 6798 Admiranda igitur ea, quæ circa li­bram &longs;iunt, ad circulum tanquam cau&longs;am referuntur, quæ verò circa vectem ad ip&longs;am libram: alia autem ferè omnia, quæ circa mechanicas contingunt motiones, ad vectem reducuntur.

6799 6800 Præter prædicta aliud tandem mirum ip&longs;i ine&longs;t, quia nimirum cum innu­mera &longs;int puncta in vna eademque; linea, quæ &longs;emidiameter e&longs;t, omnia tamen quando &longs;emidiameter circa centrum mouetur, quamuis cum ip&longs;a mouean­tur, inæquali veiocitate mouentur; Nam punctum illud &longs;emper velocius mouetur, quod remotius e&longs;t à centro circuli, &longs;eu à manente &longs;emidiametri termino, & proinde illud tardius, quod centro proximius e&longs;t. 6801 6802 Atque ex hac mira circuli proprietate, pleraque miraculorum accidunt circuli motioni­bus, vt in &longs;equentibus quæ&longs;tionibus manife&longs;tum erit.

6803 6804 Quoniam autem &longs;ecundum contrarias &longs;imul motiones mouetur circulus, & alterum quidem diametri extremum vbi A, in figura præ&longs;enti antror&longs;um

mouetur; alterum verò vbi B, retror­&longs;um, efficiunt nonnulli, vt ab vnica mo­tione multi contrariò &longs;imul mouean­tur denticulati circuli: vt &longs;unt ij, quos in locis proponunt &longs;acris, quorum alij &longs;unt ænei, alij ferrei. 6805 6806 &longs;i enim circulus A B, alterum circulum C D, contige­rit, mota diametro A B, ita vt A, an­tror&longs;um eat, commouebit alteram dia­metrum C D, ita vt C, retror&longs;um, hoc e&longs;t in contrarium ip&longs;i A, veniat, in contrarium igitur mouebitur &longs;ecundus circulus C D, ad circulum A B, & rur&longs;us circulus E F. in contrarium ip&longs;i C D, commouebitur ab ip&longs;o C D, ob eandem rationem. 6807 6808 eodem etiam modo &longs;i plures fuerint, idem facient vno &longs;olo tanquam primo motore commoto. 6809 6810 hanc igitur circuli naturam animad­uertentes Architecti, in&longs;trumentum artificiosè fabricant, motus principium occultantes, vt machinæ &longs;olù manife&longs;tum &longs;it illud, quod admirationem parit, cau&longs;a verò lateat: quod genus machinarum Automata dicebantur, quia &longs;pontè à &longs;e ip&longs;is mouebantur.

6811 6812 In primis igitur, quæ circa libram accidunt, dubitare faciunt, quamnam ob cau&longs;am maiores libræ minoribus &longs;int exactiores: huius autem rei prin­cipium e&longs;t illud, quod &longs;upra innuimus, quod &longs;cilicet, quæ à centro plus di­&longs;tat linea, &longs;iue quæ longior e&longs;t, eadem vi commota citius fertur, quam illa, quæ minus à centro di&longs;tat, &longs;eu quæ minor e&longs;t. 6813 6814 Porrò citius bifariam dicitur; &longs;iue enim in minori tempore æquale pertran&longs;it &longs;patium: &longs;iue in æquali tem­pore, maius conficit interuallum; citius feci&longs;&longs;e dicitur. 6815 6816 &longs;i autem duæ lineæ circa idem centrum moueantur vna maior, & altera minor in æquali tem­pore; maior maiorem circulum de&longs;cribet, quam minor; quia circulus à ma­iori de&longs;criptus, alterum à minori delineatum circumple ctetur, atque intra &longs;e continebit; maius autem e&longs;t continens, quàm contentum. 6817 6818 horum autem cau­&longs;a, quoniam quæ circulum de&longs;cribit linea, duabus fertur lationibus, quæ nul­lam inuicem obtinent analogiam: quod antequam probemus, &longs;ciendum e&longs;t, quod, quidquid duobus motibus inuicem proportionatis, mouetur, ne­ce&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t, quod motu exillis mixto progrediatur per lineam rectam, quæ dia­meter e&longs;t quadrilateri, cuius latera habeant illam proportionem, quam duo illi motus. 6819 6820 &longs;it enim in figura proportio lateris A B, ad latus A C, quam ctiam habent duo motus, &longs;ecundum quos latum quodpiam feratur, &longs;itque; la­tum illud A, & feratur motu vno ver&longs;us B, per lineam A B, altero verò mo­tu feratur ver&longs;us C. quod fiet &longs;i cogitemus latus A B, de&longs;cendere ver&longs;us M C,

ip&longs;i æquidi&longs;tanter, dum punctum A, mouetnr ad B. his duabus lationibus A, latum. 6821 6822 nece&longs;&longs;a­niò motu mixto progre dietur per diametrum A M, quod &longs;ic probari pote&longs;t; &longs;it iam A, mo­tum primo motu v&longs;que ad D, linea verò ex &longs;e­cundo motu &longs;it in G F E, quo motu punctum A, quod erat in D, tractum erit in F. quod pun­ctum e&longs;t in diametro A M, quoniam enim mo­uetur duobus motibus, cum lineis A B, A C, proportionalibus, motus au­tem hucu&longs;que &longs;unt A D, A E, quæ debent e&longs;&longs;e proportionales, cum A B, A C compleatur rectangulum A D F E, erunt &longs;imiliter proportionalia F E, D E, cum &longs;int æqualia duobus D A, A E, quare per 26. 6. cum quadrilaterum paruum A D F E, &longs;it &longs;imile toti A B M C, erit A M, vtriu&longs;que diameter, ergò punctum F, in quo e&longs;t A, e&longs;t in diametro A M. eodem modo, de quouis pun­cto in linea A B, ad quod A, perueniat, probabitur ab altero motu de&longs;cen­di&longs;&longs;e v&longs;que ad diametrum. 6823 6824 &longs;emper ergò latum A, per rectam A M, diame­trum quadrilateri, cum illis motibus proportionalibus progreditur, quod probandum erat. 6825 6826 è conuersò manife&longs;tum etiam e&longs;t, quod &longs;i quid &longs;ecundum diametrum duabus fertur lationibus, eas lationes e&longs;&longs;e proportionales late­ribus quadrilateri, cuius e&longs;t illa diameter, &longs;i enim illæ lationes non &longs;unt la­teribus proportionales, latum illud non feretur &longs;ecundum diametrum il­lam, &longs;ed &longs;ecundum aliam alterius quadrilateri.

6827 6828 Quod &longs;i quid duabus lationibus nullam habentibus proportionem per­petuò ferratur, impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t ip&longs;um motu mixto lineam rectam de&longs;cribere. 6829 6830 &longs;i enim dixeris illud po&longs;&longs;e de&longs;cribere rectam lineam, tunc circa rectam il­lam tanquam diametrum de&longs;cribam quadrilaterum, & po&longs;tea o&longs;tendam, vt proximè o&longs;ten&longs;um e&longs;t, illud latum e&longs;&longs;e &longs;ecundum laterum illius proportio­nem, quare impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;t id, quod mouetur duabus lationibus nullam in­uicem rationem habentibus, ferri per lineam rectam: quapropter dicendum e&longs;t hoc modo latum, nece&longs;&longs;ariò ferri circulariter, &longs;iue per lineam circularem. 6831 6832 Quod autemea, quæ de&longs;cribit circulum linea, dum altero eins manente extremo circumagitur, duabus &longs;imul feratur lationibus, ex quibus motus orbicularis oriatur, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t ex &longs;uperioribus, quia & antror&longs;um, & retror&longs;um impellitur; tùm etiam, quia &longs;i rectà tenderet recta de&longs;cribens cir­

culum, nunquam ad diametri perpendiculum perueniret, &longs;ed tamen peruenit, ita vt &longs;it ip&longs;a à centro perpendicularis diametro. 6833 6834 &longs;it circuli figura A B C D, in qua extremum diametri B, feratur ad alterum extremum vbi D, per ip&longs;ius diametri B D, circumuolutionem circa centrum F, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t aliquando B, perueniat ad C. &longs;i igitur B, feretur duabus lationibus aliquo modo proportionatis, v. g. vt e&longs;t pro­portio lateris B E, ad E C, latus, &longs;equeretur ex demon&longs;tratis ip&longs;um B, ferri per rectam B C, quæ diameter e&longs;&longs;et quadrilateri B E C G. &longs;ed quia in nu&longs;la proportione fertur, propterea per circularem lineam B E C, progreditur ad C, ita vt ip&longs;a diameter B D, in po&longs;itione A C, fiat perpendi­cularis priori diametro B D. ex quibus &longs;equitur eam moueri duobus moti­bus nullam rationem habentibus; quod erat intentum. 6835 6836 6837 6838

6839 6840 Hoc modo Ari&longs;t. 6841 6842 probare conatur, lineam circulum de&longs;cribentem, dua­bus ferri lationibus, quæ nullam habeant analogiam: Yerùm, vt liberè fa­tear nullo modo mihi videtur intentum a&longs;&longs;equi, nam neque ex dictis pater, ip&longs;am duobus motibus ferri, quibus opus e&longs;&longs;et: neque patet eos (quamuis concedantur) nullam inuicem habere analogiam: qui enim fieri pote&longs;t, vt duo motus reperiantur, quì nulla &longs;e mutuò habitudine re&longs;piciant? 6843 6844 Præte­rea &longs;i B, ferretur illis motibus, non &longs;equitur debere moueri per lineam cir­cularem, cum præter lineam rectam &longs;int plures curuæ, quæ tamen non &longs;unt circulares, vt &longs;unt &longs;ectiones parabolicæ, & lineæ &longs;pirales. 6845 6846 Deinde pergit.

6847 6848

6849 6850 241

6851 6852 Vt autem cau&longs;a appareat, cur ea, quæ à centro longior e&longs;t linea velocius moueatur, &longs;iue quod in eadem &longs;emidiametro remotiora puncta à centro ve­locius moueantur, vt &longs;upra dictum e&longs;t, &longs;ciendum e&longs;t, Quod &longs;i duo mouean­tur ab eadem potentia, quorum vnum à quopiam alio mouente plus repel­latur à motu priori, alterum verò minus, rationi con&longs;entaneum e&longs;&longs;e, tardius moueri id, quod plus, eo quod minus impeditur; quod videtur accidere maiori, & minori illarum, quæ à centro egre&longs;&longs;æ circulos delineant. 6853 6854 quoniam enim propius e&longs;t manenti eius, quæ minor e&longs;t extremum, quàm extremum maioris, propterea plus à centro, cui propius e&longs;t, retrahitur à priori mo­tu, hincque; motus eius tardior redditur, ide&longs;t, quia centro propius e&longs;t; hinc fit, vt extremum illud de&longs;cribat lineam circularem quidem, &longs;ed tamen curuiorem quam de&longs;cribat extremum longioris lineæ, quæ circulum minus curuum, &longs;eu magis ad rectam lineam accedentem delineat. 6855 6856 omni quidem igitur lineæ circulum de&longs;cribenti i&longs;tud accidit, vt duobus feratur motioni­bus; vna quidem, quæ illi naturalis, ac &longs;ecundum circunferentiam, qua re­ctà tenderet ni&longs;i impediretur: altera verò, quæ illi innaturalis, qua in tran&longs;­uer&longs;um agitur, &longs;eu &longs;ecus centrum, ob quam cogitur in gyrum duci, minor autem linea &longs;ecundum hanc motionem innaturalem plus fertur, quàm ma­ior, ide&longs;t plus ip&longs;ius progre&longs;&longs;io inflectitur in orbem; quia enim e&longs;t centro

vicinior, quod quodammodo retra­hit à motu naturali, propterea ma­gis vincitur, quàm remotior. 6857 6858 Quod ex his erit manife&longs;tum. 6859 6860 &longs;it circulus vbi B C E D, & alter in eo minor, vbi N M O P, circa idem centrum A. & proijciantur diametri in magno qui­dem C D, B E, in minori verò M O, N P. & altera parte longius quadri­laterum compleatur D K R C. &longs;i igi­tur &longs;emidiameter A B, circumacta de&longs;cribit circulum maiorem, reuer­titur tandem ad locum B A, vnde di­gre&longs;&longs;a e&longs;t. 6861 6862 &longs;imiliter M A, circumuoluta redibit ad priorem po&longs;itionem in M A. 6863 6864 Tardius autem fertur M A, quàm B A, vt dictum e&longs;t, quia maior illi fit retractio à recta progre&longs;&longs;ione. 6865 6866 Sit igi­tur linea A B, mota v&longs;que ad locum A L F, & à puncto L, ducatur L Q, per­pendicularis ip&longs;i A B, in minori circulo. 6867 6868 & rur&longs;us ducatur L S, parallela ei­dem A B, & à puncto S, in maiori circulo ducatur S T, perpendicularis ei­dem B A, necnon F X. erunt igitur S T, L Q, latera rectanguli T L, æqualia per 34. primi. 6869 6870 erit po&longs;tea B T, minor quam M Q, quia æquales rectæ S T, L Q, ductæ à circunferentia ad diametrum perpendiculares in circulis in­æqualibus, ea quæ e&longs;t in maiori circulo minorem re&longs;ecat diametri portio­nem, quàm quæ in minori.

6871 6872 In quanto autem tempore ip&longs;a A L, lata e&longs;t per circunferentiam M L, in tanto temporis &longs;patio in maiori circulo B, extremum ip&longs;ius B A, latum erit per maiorem arcum quàm &longs;it B S; iam con&longs;ideraudum e&longs;t motus vtriu&longs;que lineæ in hoc ca&longs;u æquales e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;unt enim de&longs;cripti per lineas æquales T S, Q L, quæ &longs;unt rectæ; tam enim linea B A, quàm M A, naturali motu recta tenderet, vt dictum e&longs;t, peragra&longs;&longs;etque; illa rectam T S: hæc verò rectam Q L. 6873 6874 Verum lationes innaturales &longs;unt impares, latio enim B T, breuior e&longs;t M que quantitate autem B T, retracta e&longs;t B A, à motu &longs;ibi naturali, & recto: quan­titate verò M Q, retracta e&longs;t M A, vnde apparet motu hoc violento magis retractam e&longs;&longs;e minorem M A, quàm maiorem B A, quod erat primo de­clarandum.

6875 6876 Quod autem ob id A B, maior c&ecedil;lerius mota &longs;it motu naturali, quàm mi­nor M A, palàm fiet. 6877 6878 quia enim oportet vtramque lineam maiorem, & mi­norem eadem vi motam, confeci&longs;&longs;e binos illos motus proportionales, ide&longs;t ita &longs;e debet habere motus naturalis maioris ad motum innaturalem eiu&longs;­dem, quemadmodum &longs;e habet motus naturalis minoris ad motum innatu­ralem eiu&longs;dem: Oportet ergo, vt &longs;i A B, & A M, &longs;unt eadem vi commotæ, vt &longs;it eadem ratio T S, ad Q L, quæ e&longs;t B T, ad M Q, non e&longs;t autem, vt o&longs;ten­&longs;um e&longs;t; ergo linea A B, eadem vi commota, ac M A, conficit plu&longs;quam B S, &longs;ed nece&longs;&longs;ariò peruenit ad F. hoc enim in puncto erunt prædicti motus proportionales, vt oportet, erit enim motus naturalis in maiori perpendi­cularis F X, & innaturalis B X, in minori verò naturalis L Q, innaturalis M que quod &longs;i ducantur rectè B F, M L, apparebunt duo triangula æquian­gula B X F, M Q L, & erunt per 4. 6. vt F X, ad B X. ita L Q, ad M Q, & permutando erunt etiam vt F X, ad L Q, ita B X, ad M que ide&longs;t, vt motus naturalis ad naturalem, ita innaturalis ad innaturalem. 6879 6880 In alio autem lo­co præter F, non erunt eædem proportiones.

6881 6882 Ex quibus patere &longs;atis pote&longs;t, cur A B, longior à centro velocius mouea­tur quàm minor M A, &longs;eu cur puncta eiu&longs;dem B A, velocius vertuntur, quo longius ab&longs;unt à centro A, ide&longs;t maiorem arcum B F, peractum e&longs;&longs;e à B, quàm &longs;it arcus M L, peractus ab M, quod erat o&longs;tendendum.

6883 6884 Atque hic e&longs;t di&longs;cur&longs;us ille Ari&longs;t. 6885 6886 quo putat &longs;e cau&longs;am aperui&longs;&longs;e, cur lon­gior &longs;emidiameter velocius moueatur: quod num rectè attigerit, non puto operæpretium e&longs;&longs;e hoc loco di&longs;cutere, præ&longs;ertim cum ad naturalem Philo­&longs;ophum &longs;pectet.

6887 6888 Mihi tamen maximè con&longs;iderandum videtur hoc ip&longs;um quod a&longs;&longs;eruit, & ex &longs;e patet, remotiores &longs;cilicet partes diametrorum à centro velocius mo­ueri, quàm viciniores; ex hac enim maiori velocitate &longs;equitur maiore etiam vi moueri, vnde & potentiæ mouenti in extremo eius vis augebitur, & plus poterit quam &longs;ola &longs;ine vecte, e&longs;t enim vectis duæ &longs;emidiametri altera alte­ram longior; ex quibus fortè apparet vnde vectis vires oriantur.

6889 6890 His igitur tanquam huius Mechanicæ facultatis principijs po&longs;itis, ad va­rias Quæ&longs;tiones di&longs;cutiendas accedit.

6891 6892 QVÆSTIO PRIMA

6893 6894 De Libra.

6895 6896

6897 6898 242

6899 6900 Cvr autem maiores libræ minoribus &longs;int exactiores, palàm e&longs;t ex præmi&longs;&longs;is principijs. 6901 6902 con&longs;iderare enim oportet, quod in motu li­bræ de&longs;cribitur quidam circulus, cuius diameter &longs;unt ip&longs;a libræ brachia, centrum verò e&longs;t fpartum, &longs;iue trutina; hoc enim pun­ctum in motu libræ manet: duo verò brachia &longs;unt veluti duæ &longs;emidiametri

à centro exeuntes, vt in figura cerne­re e&longs;t, in qua centrum, &longs;iue &longs;partum e&longs;t vbi C, reliqua &longs;unt manife&longs;ta. 6903 6904 In eadem porrò figura libra maior &longs;it A B. minor verò circa idem &longs;partum C, &longs;it F G. 6905 6906 Iam vt præmi&longs;&longs;um e&longs;t, ea­dem vi, vel eodem onere in lance B, po&longs;ito, mouebitur velocius brachium libræ maioris, quàm minoris &longs;it ma­ior tran&longs;lata ad locum D E, ergò com­mota e&longs;t per arcum B E, vel A D. 6907 6908 Minor autem libra acta e&longs;&longs;et per mino­rem arcum G I, vel F H, melius autem apparet arcus B E, maior, quam mi­nor G I, atque hoc e&longs;t, quòd maiores libras exactiores facit. 6909 6910 hincque; etiam e&longs;t, quòd nonnulla pondera in minimis libris adeò paruam brachiorum aper­tionem faciant, vt ægrè percipi po&longs;&longs;it; in magnis verò propter brachiorum longitudinem valdè &longs;en&longs;ibilem efficiant. 6911 6912 quædam verò benè, & in magnis, & in paruis apparent, &longs;ed tamen &longs;emper melius in magnis ob dictam ratio­nem. 6913 6914 Quamobrem machinantur ij, qui purpuram vendunt, vt pendendo defraudent, tum in medio libræ non ponentes &longs;partum, vt hoc modo bra­chium ex vna parte longius factum facilius moueatur, & proinde à minori purpuræ pondere; tum etiam plumbum in lancem illam infundentes inquam merces imponitur, vel partem illam lancis, quam magis grauitare cu­piunt ex ligno radici proximo, vel ex nodo&longs;o facientes: lignum enim, quod radici proximum e&longs;t, graue admodum e&longs;t, quemadmodum etiam nodus; quia nodus e&longs;t, quædam radix. 6915 6916 Atque hæc e&longs;t huius pri­mæ quæ&longs;tionis paraphra&longs;is.

6917 6918 QVÆSTIO SECVNDA

6919 6920 De Libra

6921 6922

6923 6924 243

6925 6926 Cvr &longs;i quidem &longs;ur&longs;um fuerit &longs;partum, quando deor&longs;um lato pondere, qui&longs;­piam id amouet, rur&longs;um a&longs;cendit libra? 6927 6928 Si autem deor&longs;um constitutum fuerit, non a&longs;cendit, &longs;ed manet? 6929 6930 An quia &longs;ur&longs;um &longs;parto quidem exi&longs;ten­te plus libræ extra perpendiculum fit, &longs;partum enim e&longs;t perpendiculum, quare nece&longs;&longs;e est deor&longs;um ferri id, quod plus est, donec a&longs;cendat, quæ bifariam li­bram diuidit ad ip&longs;um perpendiculŭ, cum onus incumbat ad libræ partem tractam.

&longs;it libra vbi recta B C, &longs;partum autem A D: hoc igitur &longs;ur&longs;um erecto, perpendi­culum erit vbi A D M. &longs;i igitur in ip&longs;o B, ponatur onus, B, quidem de&longs;cendet vbi E; C, autem a&longs;cendat vbi H, quamobrem ea, quæ bifariam libram &longs;ecat, primò quidem erit D M, ip&longs;ius perpendiculi; incumben­te autem onere erit D G, quare libræ ip­&longs;ius vbi E H, quod extra A M, perpendi­culum e&longs;t, vbi e&longs;t D D H, maius e&longs;t dimidio. 6931 6932 &longs;i igitur amoueatur onus ab ip&longs;o E, ne­ce&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t H, deor&longs;um ferri, minus enim e&longs;t ip&longs;um E D. &longs;i quidem igitur &longs;ur&longs;um ha­buerit &longs;partum, propter hoc a&longs;cendit libra. 6933 6934 &longs;i autem deor&longs;um fuerit, id quod &longs;ub­stat, contrarium facit; plus enim dimidio fit libræ, quæ deor&longs;um e&longs;t, pars, quàm quod perpendiculum &longs;ecet; quapropter non a&longs;cendit, pars enim eleuata leuior e&longs;t.
&longs;it libra vbi N G, perpendiculum autem K L M, bifariam igitur &longs;ecatur N G. im­po&longs;ito autem onere in ip&longs;o N, erit quidem N, vbi O, ip&longs;um autem G, vbi R; K L, au­tem vbi K P, quare maius e&longs;t L P O, quàm L R, ip&longs;o P L. 6935 6936 Ablato igitur onere, ne­ce&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t manere; incumbit enim, ceu onus exce&longs;&longs;us medietatis in quo P L.) Aduer­te textum græcum e&longs;&longs;e mendo&longs;um, la­tinum vero mendo&longs;i&longs;&longs;imum. 6937 6938 Ego partim ex certa rei intelligentia, vti vi­des re&longs;titui. 6939 6940 Idemque; circa figuras præ&longs;titi. 6941 6942 Porrò quoniam Piccolomineus, & &longs;i plurimum, vt ip&longs;e fatetur, in&longs;udauerit, non tamen &longs;olutionem huius quæ&longs;tionis e&longs;t a&longs;&longs;ecutus, eam tibi ex Mechanicis Guidibaldi tradam. 6943 6944 Ari&longs;t­igitur ponit duas libræ &longs;pecies, &longs;iue potius duas eiu&longs;dem libræ po&longs;itiones, vnam, quæ haber &longs;partum, &longs;iue perpendiculum &longs;upra; alteram, quæ infra.
vt in præ&longs;enti figura, &longs;it libra B C, cuius &longs;partum, &longs;iue perpendiculum A D, &longs;it &longs;ur­&longs;um, ita vt in puncto A, &longs;it affixum perpen­diculum, & circa idem punctum A, tan­quam circa centrum tota libra circum­uertatur. 6945 6946 hæc e&longs;t prima libræ collocatio. 6947 6948 &longs;it deinde libra B C, cuius &longs;partum, &longs;iue perpendiculum A D, &longs;it deor&longs;um, vt in altera figura, &longs;itque; circa pun­
ctum A, tanquam circa centrum, aut axem ita fixum, vt ip&longs;i libræ conuer&longs;io innita­tur, quæ e&longs;t altera libræ po&longs;itio. 6949 6950 Quærit igitur, cur &longs;i in libra &longs;ur&longs;um habente per­pendiculum, & centrum, ponatur ex vna parte onus quodpiam, v. g. in parte B, vt in prima textus figura factum e&longs;t, libra de primo &longs;itu B C, mouetur ad &longs;itum E H, &longs;ed tamen ablato pondere reuertitur &longs;ua &longs;pontè ad pri&longs;tinum &longs;itum B C. &longs;i autem in libra, cuius per­pendiculum, ac centrum deor&longs;um &longs;it, vt in &longs;ecunda figura textus, pondus imponatur, ip&longs;a quidem à &longs;itu B C, ad &longs;itum O R, transferretur; verumta­men ablato onere, non amplius ad priorem po&longs;itionem, vti prior, reucrtitur. 6951 6952 6953 6954

6955 6956 Huic quæ&longs;tioni, vt re&longs;pondeat, tacitè &longs;upponit omne graue tendere de­or&longs;um, hoc pacto, vt centrum grauitatis ip&longs;ius tendat per lineam rectam ad mundi centrum ab ip&longs;o grauitatis centro protractam, quam lineam Di­rectionis Recentiores appellant. 6957 6958 &longs;ciendum autem centrum grauitatis e&longs;&longs;e punctum quoddam in quolibet graui, ex quo &longs;i graue illud &longs;u&longs;pendatur, &longs;em­per manet in æquilibrio, nec vnquam po&longs;itionem re&longs;pectu &longs;uarum partium mutat, quamuis ita &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;um huc illuc transferatur. 6959 6960 Ita Pappus Alexan­drinus initio octaui libri Mathematicarum collectionum. 6961 6962 Totius igitur li­bræ ab&longs;que onere centrum grauitatis e&longs;&longs;et circa punctum D, quod e&longs;&longs;et di­&longs;tinctum à centro circumuolutionis A. quod grauitatis centrum, &longs;emper quantum fieri pote&longs;t, &longs;i nihil ob&longs;tet, centro mundi appropinquat; & propte­rea facit, vt prior libra &longs;ine onere &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;a in A, in æquilibrio, atque hori­zonti parallela permaneat, &longs;tante enim D, centro mundi maximè propin­quo, &longs;iue in loco humillimo, erit inter punctum A, & centrum mundi, ac con&longs;equenter in linea directionis. 6963 6964 quæ linea directionis in prima figura textus e&longs;&longs;et eadem cum perpendiculo A D M, manente libra &longs;ine pondere horizonti parallela; in &longs;ecunda autem figura textus coincideret pariter cum perpendiculo K L M, antequam libra ob impo&longs;itum onus ab æquilibrio di­moueretur. 6965 6966 per hanc enim lineam centrum grauitatis libræ, quod e&longs;t propè puncta D, & L, tenderet ad mundi centrum, &longs;i libra liberè ad centrum mun­di dilaberetur. 6967 6968 his præmi&longs;&longs;is &longs;ic quæ&longs;tioni &longs;atisfacit, & primò primæ parti, quando nimirum &longs;partum &longs;upernè collocatum e&longs;t. 6969 6970 Ratio igitur, cur tunc li­bra amoto pondere ad horizontis æquilibrium reuertatur e&longs;t, quia pondus libræ impo&longs;itum in altera tantum libræ parte, grauitando impellit libram ad alium &longs;itum E H, ita vt maior pars libræ con&longs;tituatur ex altera parte li­neæ directionis prioris A D M, in qua etiam parte exi&longs;tit centrum granita­tis libræ ip&longs;ius, e&longs;t enim circa D, quod centrum vi ponderis incumbentis in E, cogitur paulùm a&longs;cendere, atque contra ip&longs;ius naturalem inclinationem à mundi centro recedere, vt &longs;i in libra B C, appendatur onus in B, vt in pri­ma textus figura; B, de&longs;cendet ad E, & C, a&longs;cendet ad H, & centrum graui­tatis D, paulùm a&longs;cendet à centro mundi, & linca A D M, quæ libram bi­fariam &longs;ecabat modo tran&longs;lato perpendiculo in A D G, non amplius cam bifariam &longs;ecabit; &longs;ed libræ E H, maior pars erit vltra perpendiculum A D­M, quæ maior pars e&longs;t D D H.

6971 6972 Si igitur nunc onus amoueatur libræ E H, centrum grauitatis, quod e&longs;t ad D, remanet vltra priorem Directionis lineam; & quia pondus non am­plius illi æ que ponderat, grauitabit, & quia libra cùm affixa &longs;it ad A, nequit deor&longs;um recta tendere, circumferretur circa A, trahente ip&longs;am grauitatis centro, cum nihil ob&longs;it, donec iterum perpendiculum A D G, priori &longs;itui A D M, congruat: hac enim ratione centrum grauitatis, quantum pote&longs;t, iuxta naturam &longs;uam de&longs;cendet, libraque; ad pri&longs;tinum æquilibrij B C, &longs;itum re&longs;tituetur. 6973 6974 Si autem deor&longs;um fuerit &longs;partum in &longs;ecunda figura textus, im­po&longs;ito pondere contrarium accidit, quia maior pars libræ, & in qua cen­trum grauitatis e&longs;t, in tali motu de&longs;cendit: altera autem pars minor, ac læ­uior &longs;ur&longs;um tollitur. 6975 6976 & quia graue natura &longs;ua nequit a&longs;cendere, propterea ablato pondere non reuertitur ad æquilibrium B C, cum centrum grauita­tis a&longs;cendere ne queat, quod tunc oporteret.

6977 6978 Sit libra N G, in &longs;ecunda figura, cuius perpendiculum, &longs;imulque; directio­nis linea &longs;it K L M, quæ libram in prima po&longs;itione diuidit bifariam; impofi­to autem onere in N. N, trahetur ad O, & G, ad R, & K L, vbi K P. quare maior e&longs;t O L, in quo centrum grauitatis, & propterea grauior quàm &longs;it L R: &longs;uperat enim O L, ip&longs;am L R, exce&longs;&longs;u duplæ P L, quod facilè apparet &longs;i po­natur tota O R, 10. & dimidia O P, & O R, 5. & P L, ponatur 2. erit enim tunc O L, 7. & L R, 3. quæ hanc &longs;uperat 4. duplo &longs;cilicet ip&longs;ius P L, 2. qua­re ne&longs;cio cur Ari&longs;t. 6979 6980 dicat, ip&longs;am O L, &longs;uperare ip&longs;am L R, &longs;olùm quantitate P L. 6981 6982 Quapropter etiam &longs;i onus auferatur, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t ibi libram manere, quia maior, & grauior ip&longs;ius pars deor&longs;um e&longs;t, nec pote&longs;t natura &longs;ua læui­tare, vel a&longs;cendere, vt oporteret, &longs;i ad pri&longs;tinum &longs;itum N G, re&longs;titui debe­ret. 6983 6984 remanebit igitur in O R.

6985 6986 Ex his, quæ&longs;tionis &longs;olutionem, textus explicationem, ac re&longs;titutio­nem habeto.

6987 6988 Aduertendum quoad &longs;ecundam libram, ne &longs;imul cum 10. Bapti&longs;ta Bene­dicto in libro &longs;peculationum immeritò Ari&longs;t. 6989 6990 erroris arguamus: ip&longs;e enim, quia libram hanc non agnouit, au&longs;us e&longs;t affirmare, Ari&longs;tot. hoc loco fal&longs;um pror&longs;us dixi&longs;&longs;e, cum dixit libram &longs;patto infimè collocato, non redire ad pri&longs;tinam po&longs;itionem. 6991 6992

6993 6994 QVÆSTIO TERTIA

6995 6996 De Vecte.

6997 6998

6999 7000 244

7001 7002 Cvm textus tam græci, quàm latini mendis &longs;cateant, neque hi textus maioris &longs;int momenti, eos per paraphra&longs;im explicabo, in qua ta­men totus textus continebitur, atque emendabitur. 7003 7004 Cur exiguæ vires (quemadmodum à principio dictum e&longs;t) adhibito vecte, ma­iora mouent pondera, quam ab&longs;que vecte? 7005 7006 contrarium enim videtur debere fieri, nam mouenti additur grauitas vectis, & ideò pondus augetur, ergò difficilius ip&longs;um cum vecte, quàm &longs;ine eo mouere deberet.

7007 7008 Vectis porrò e&longs;t in&longs;trumentum oblongum, quo ad &longs;ubleuandum graue quodpiam vtuntur opifices, quod innititur cuidam fulcimento, quod græcè hypomoclion dicitur: hypomoclion antem oncri leuando, quanrum &longs;ieri pote&longs;t proximum e&longs;&longs;e debet, vt vectis pars longior &longs;it ad partes potentiæ mouentis. 7009 7010 vt plurimum verò fulcimentum e&longs;t inter pondus, & potentiam: aliquando etiam e&longs;t ex altero vectis extremo, ita vt onus &longs;it inter fulturam, & potentiam; aliquando potentia e&longs;t inter vtrunque, vnde tres vectis &longs;pe­cies exi&longs;tunt. 7011 7012 vt in &longs;ubiectis figuris apparet. 7013 7014 In prima, vectis e&longs;t A B, fultu­

ra E, onus C. potentia autem &longs;eu vis, &longs;eu aliud pondus mouens &longs;it vbi D. quæ deor&longs;um in D, præmens eleuabit &longs;ur­&longs;um ex altera parte onus C. & vectis circa fulturam E, tanquam centrum conuertetur. 7015 7016 In altera figura pondus e&longs;t inter fulturam, & potentiam, ful­tura autem in altera extremitate, vt patet in figura, hic autem potentia non præmit deor&longs;um in D: &longs;ed &longs;ur&longs;um vectem eleuando pondus C, attollitur. 7017 7018 In tertia tandem figura potentia, e&longs;t inter vtrunque, e&longs;t enim in D, ibique &longs;ur&longs;um vrget. 7019 7020 verum tamen e&longs;t hunc vectem artificibus e&longs;&longs;e inutilem, quip­pe qui nullo modo iuuet potentiam, imò verò pondus ip&longs;um grauius reddit: neque hoc genere in his Mechanicis indigemus.

7021 7022 Re&longs;pondet igitur dubitationi, dicens rationem huius incrementi poten­tiæ motricis, quod fit a&longs;&longs;umpto vecte fortè inde oriri, quod vectis &longs;it quæ­dam libra, cuius alterum brachium &longs;it altero longius; in prima autem quæ­&longs;tione explicatum e&longs;t, cur libra maior, maiorem vim habeat, eam ad cir­culum reducendo; vectis autem fit libra, hypomoclion enim e&longs;t loco &longs;parti, tam enim &longs;partum, quam hypomoclion veluti centra manent. 7023 7024 quoniam ve­rò ab eodem pondere, c&ecedil;lerius, &longs;iue maiori vi mouetur linea, quantò lon­gior à centro fuerit, vt dictum e&longs;t de admiranda circuli natura; hinc fit, vt cum duæ &longs;int in vecte potentiæ, &longs;iue duo pondera, mouens, & motum, illud facilius ac maiore vi moueat, &longs;iue vires ex vecte acquirat, quod longiorem vectis partem pre&longs;&longs;erit. 7025 7026 quemadmodum igitur pars vectis longior, quæ &longs;pe­ctabat ad mouentem potentiam, &longs;uperat minorem partem, in qua e&longs;t mo­tum; ita etiam maius e&longs;t pondus motum, quàm mouens. 7027 7028 &longs;emper autem quan­to ab hypomoclio magis di&longs;tabit potentia, tantò facilius mouebit, cuius cau&longs;a &longs;upra reddita e&longs;t, quoniam nimirum, quæ plus à centro elongatur ma­iorem de&longs;cribit circulum, qui magis ad lineam rectam accedit: quare ab eadem potentia adhibito vecte, tantò facilius pars vectis mouens dimoue­bitur, quantò magis à fulcimento di&longs;tabit. 7029 7030 Exempli gratia &longs;it in &longs;uperiori prima figura vectis A B, pondus C, mouens D, hypomoclion E, in qua præ­dicta poteris contemplari. 7031 7032 vltima illa textus verba (Quod autem vbi D, mo­uens, vbi F, motum autem vbi C, pondus in G,) videntur &longs;uperuacanea, atque mendosè addita.

7033 7034 In hac quæ&longs;tione re&longs;pexit Ari&longs;t. &longs;olùm ad primam vectis &longs;peciem. 7035 7036 Illud demum, quod dixit eandem habere rationem potentiam ad pondus, quàm partes vectis inuicem demon&longs;tratum e&longs;t po&longs;tea acuti&longs;&longs;imè ab Archimede propo&longs;itione 6. & 7. de æqueponderantibus: & no&longs;tra tempe&longs;tate alio quam­uis modo, & vnica demon&longs;tratione à Guido Vbaldo in &longs;uis Mechanicis pro­po&longs;itione 1. de Vecte, quæ e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi; Potentia &longs;u&longs;tinens pondus vecti appen&longs;um, eandem ad ip&longs;um pondus proportionem habet, quam vectis di­&longs;tantia inter fulcimentum, ac ponderis &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;ionem, ad di&longs;tantiam, à fulci­mento ad potentiam interiectam. 7037 7038 quod de omni vecte ab eo demon&longs;tratur, cuius propo&longs;itionis &longs;en&longs;us e&longs;t hic; in &longs;uperiori prima figura &longs;i pars vectis E B, fuerit, v.g. qua drupla partis A E; etiam pondus C, erit quadruplo ma­ius pondere, &longs;eu vi in D, quæ ip &longs;um C, ope vectis &longs;u&longs;tinet. 7039 7040 7041 7042 quod etiam trans­ferre debes ad &longs;ecundam figuram.

7043 7044 QVÆSTIO QVARTA

7045 7046 De Remo.

7047 7048

7049 7050 245

7051 7052 EI, qui &longs;uperiora intellexerit &longs;atis clara videtur. 7053 7054 Illud tamen non omittendum, &longs;cilicet dicendum potius Remum e&longs;&longs;e vectem &longs;ecundi generis, quàm primi, quod fortè Ari&longs;t. 7055 7056 non animaduertit, nec Pic­colomineus, nam mare e&longs;t hypomoclion, re&longs;pectu enim nauis non mouetur, &longs;ed manet, &longs;calmus autem &longs;imul cum tota naui e&longs;t pondus motum; verè enim nauis ip&longs;a mouetur. 7057 7058 mouens e&longs;t ip&longs;e remex. 7059 7060 Reliqua in textu &longs;unt clara.

7061 7062 QVÆSTIO QVINTA

7063 7064 De Temone Nauis.

7065 7066

7067 7068 246

7069 7070 Qvemadmodum in præcedenti quæ&longs;tione Ari&longs;t. 7071 7072 vectem &longs;ecundi ge­neris ad &longs;olutionem non adhibuit, vt par erat, & propterea ob&longs;cu­rior eua&longs;it, ita etiam in præ&longs;enti, qu&ecedil;&longs;tionem ad ve ctem primi ge­neris reducit, quæ ad alterum reducendà erat: atque hinc ob&longs;curi­tas, atque prolixitas &longs;olutionis manauit. 7073 7074 E&longs;t enim propriè Temo, &longs;iue gu­bernaculum nauis, vectis &longs;ecundi generis, vt mox explicabo, e&longs;t enim temo

in&longs;trumentum in extrema nanis par­te, &longs;eu puppi affixum, vt in figura prç­&longs;enti vides tabellam, in qua B C D, cuius manubrium A B, intra nauim recipitur, quæ tabella, &longs;eu temo in duobus cardinibus, vbi C, & D, cir­cumuertitur à Nauis gubernatore, manubrium vbi A, tractante; ex qua conuer&longs;ione nauigium, quò vult ip&longs;e gubernator facilè dirigit, ip&longs;umque nauigium huc illuc quamuis adeò magnum ip&longs;e &longs;olus impellit, & agitat. 7075 7076 e&longs;t enim temo vectis, cuius auxilio vires mirum in modum augentur, nam to­ta A B, e&longs;t ip&longs;a Vectis longitudo, cuius hypomoclion e&longs;t mare, cui contra­nititur tabella B E; onus autem e&longs;t puppis, quod onus præ&longs;ertim in cardini­bus C D, mouenti re&longs;i&longs;tit, & quod præcipuè mouere gubernator intendit. 7077 7078 cum igitur motum onus &longs;it intra vectis extrema, hypomoclion in extremo ad B E, vbi in motu temonis tabella mare vrget, quod minimè cedit, ip&longs;aque; in hoc motu ferè maneat, & fiat qua&longs;i centrum, circa quod totus temo cir­cumducitur, patet temonem e&longs;&longs;e vectem &longs;ecundæ &longs;peciei, vt dicebam. 7079 7080 quod etiam hinc patere pote&longs;t, quia temo e&longs;t veluti remus, cuius &longs;calmus &longs;int car­dines C, D. &longs;icut ergo remus e&longs;t vectis &longs;ecundi generis, cuius pondus e&longs;t &longs;ealmus, & mare hypomoclion; ita temo erit vectis eiu&longs;dem generis, cuius pondus erit vbi cardines, fultura verò mare.

7081 7082 Quærit igitur Ari&longs;t. 7083 7084 vnde nam tantas vires paruus nauis temo guberna­tori &longs;uggerat, re&longs;pondetque; propterea id contingere, quod temo vectis na­turam obtineat, cuius inquit onus e&longs;t mare, melius autem, vt dixi, dixi&longs;&longs;et onus e&longs;&longs;e nauim, mare autem hypomoclion, mouens autem e&longs;t gubernator. 7085 7086 Differunt autem remus, & temo, quamuis vterque &longs;it vectis, quoniam remus &longs;ecundum latitudinem nauis, &longs;eu ad latera nauis mari obnititur. 7087 7088 temo au­tem in directum ferè nauigij con&longs;titutus mare &longs;cindit. 7089 7090 hinc fit, vt remus ad nauem antror&longs;um rectà agitandam, gubernaculum verò ad eam in latera, & obliquè contor quendam idoneum &longs;it. 7091 7092 quoniam enim mare e&longs;t hypomo­clion, fit vt dum gubernator mouet an&longs;am temonis in A, &longs;eu ad dextram, &longs;eu ad &longs;ini&longs;tram &longs;ecum ad eandem partem trahat nauigium, quod temoni e&longs;t connexum; ad contrariam tamen partem trahit ei, &longs;ecundum quam mare impingit. 7093 7094 atque hoc pacto remus antror&longs;um, temo verò obliquè nauim agit.

7095 7096 Po&longs;thæc &longs;equuntur huiu&longs;modi verba (In extremo autem, & non in medio iacet, quoniam mouenti facillimum est ab extremo motum mouere: prima enim pars celerrimè fertur, quoniam quemadmodum in ijs, quœ feruntur in fine deficit latio, &longs;ic ip&longs;ius continui in fine imbecili&longs;&longs;ima e&longs;t latio, imbecili&longs;&longs;ima autem ad expellendum est facilis, propter hœc igitur in puppi gubernaculum ponitur) quorum &longs;en&longs;us videtur difficilis, neque græcus textus excu&longs;andus e&longs;t, benè enim tran&longs;lata &longs;unt. 7097 7098 Piccolominæus quidem plura quàm Ari&longs;t. 7099 7100 fatur, &longs;ed non clariora. 7101 7102 dif­ficultas e&longs;t in verbis illis (Prima enim pars celerrimè fertur) & in illis (Sic ip­&longs;ius continui in fine imbecili&longs;&longs;ima eft latio) videtur velle dicere, quod quando continuum aliquod proiectum fertur per aera, pars ip&longs;ius anterior ea e&longs;t, quæ præ cæteris partibus principaliter mouetur, & ad cuius motum reliquæ po&longs;teriores tanquam &longs;ub&longs;e quentes moueantur; qua&longs;i dicat tota vis lationis e&longs;t in anteriori parte: &longs;iue ip&longs;i impetus maior ine&longs;t: videmus enim proiecta, quorum vna pars e&longs;t cæteris grauior, quia ei parti melius imprimitur mo­tus, eam etiam fieri anteriorem in latione, quamuis initio fuerit po&longs;terior. 7103 7104 &longs;ic etiam quando graue fertur deor&longs;um, dicimus ip&longs;um ferri &longs;ecundum cen­trum grauitatis ip&longs;ius, ibique; maiorem vim grauitandi exi&longs;tere, &longs;ic in proie­ctis partem anteriorem dicere po&longs;&longs;umus e&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ecundum quam totum conti­nuum fertur: ibique; totum e&longs;&longs;e impetum lationis, & propterea etiam maio­ri impetu, atque celerrimè ferri: & con&longs;equenter partem po&longs;teriorem, quam­uis priorem æqua velocitate con&longs;equatur, non tamen tanto impetu, cum ip­&longs;a ad alterius impetum moueatur, & propterca latio ip&longs;ius e&longs;t admodum imbecillis.

7105 7106 Si quis &longs;agittam per aerem latam à &longs;uo motu vellet deflectere, eam faci­lius in po&longs;teriore parte à &longs;uo cur&longs;u deuiaret, quàm in anteriore. 7107 7108 hunc con­cinui corporis motum continuo proiectorum motui a&longs;&longs;imilat: quemadmo­dum enim motus proiectorum in fine debilior lente&longs;cit: &longs;ic totum conti­nuum in po&longs;trema parte &longs;egnius impellitur. 7109 7110 Quia igitur nauis e&longs;t continuum, quod vi remorum recta antror&longs;um fertur, & propterea maiore vi prora, quàm puppis, facilius e&longs;t à &longs;uo directo cur&longs;u nauem deflectere, eam in pup­pi, quàm in prora commouendo. 7111 7112 hac igitur de cau&longs;a, gubernaculum puppi affigitur. 7113 7114 quæ quidem ratio, & quantum valcat, & an naui quadret, & num benè &longs;it explicata, phy&longs;icorum e&longs;t iudicare.

7115 7116 Ego tamen aliam huius rationem video, quia nimirum &longs;i temo in priori parte e&longs;&longs;et, quando à rectitudine ip&longs;ius nauis ad dextram, aut ad &longs;ini&longs;tram e&longs;&longs;et inclinandus, tunc quia aqua in vnam tantum ipfius partem, &longs;eu faciem tota impingeret, in eam &longs;cilicet, quæ antror&longs;um re&longs;piceret, eam aqua re­tror&longs;um &longs;imul cum tota naui auerteret, &longs;icque; totam nauim inuerteret, ita vt prora, cui adhæreret temo extrema fieret. 7117 7118 impetus igitur aquæ, & naui­gij temonati, cogit temonem e&longs;&longs;e po&longs;tremum non primum, nec medium. 7119 7120 atque hinc oritur nece&longs;&longs;itas eum po&longs;teriori parti affigendi. 7121 7122 &longs;ubdit po&longs;tea aliam eiu&longs;dem rationem, quia nimirum parua motione facta in puppi multo ma­ius interuallum cogitur mutare prora; nam idem angulus, quo eius lineæ &longs;unt longiores, eò maiorem &longs;ubten&longs;am &longs;ibi lineam re&longs;picit, quod facilè in

ad&longs;cripta figura intueri licet; in qua duæ lineæ A B, A C, continent angulum A, cui angulo &longs;ubtenduntur tres lineæ parallelæ F G, D E, B C, quarum B C, maxima e&longs;t, quia ibi maiores, &longs;iue remotiores &longs;unt ab angulo A, duæ rectæ A B, A C, ip&longs;um con­tinentes, quod Geometricè per 4. 6. pro­bari pote&longs;t. 7123 7124 &longs;ic etiam facta motione, vel parua in puppi, tota nauis transfertur ad alium &longs;itum, ita vt prora multum aliò transferatur, quod non accideret, &longs;i eadem motio fieret ad medium nauigij. 7125 7126 propterea igitur apti&longs;&longs;imè puppi gubernaculum connectitur.

7127 7128

7129 7130 247

7131 7132 Ex ij&longs;dem etiam rationibus mathematicis patet, cur magis antror&longs;um procedit nauigium, quàm remi ip&longs;ius palmula retror&longs;um: eadem enim ma­gnitudo, ij&longs;dem mota viribus in aere plus, quàm in aqua progreditur. 7133 7134 Sit igitur A B, remus, G, verò &longs;calmus. 7135 7136 A, autem in nauigio &longs;it remi initium. 7137 7138 B, verò in mari palmula. 7139 7140 &longs;i igitur A, vbi D, transferatur, per totum &longs;pa­tium A D, non permeabit tantumdem &longs;patij B, v&longs;que ad E. 7141 7142 B E, enim ponitur æqualis ip&longs;i A D, &longs;ed minus interuallum propter re&longs;i&longs;tentiam aquæ ex &longs;up­po&longs;itione percurret, quale e&longs;t B F, quod minus e&longs;t quàm A D, quare etiam li­nea B G, abbreuiabitur, eritque; veluti F Y, quæ etiam erit minor ip&longs;a D G, quæ facta e&longs;t D Y, propter duo &longs;indlia triangula D Y A, B Y F, &longs;imilia au­tem triangula &longs;unt ea, quorum anguli vnius &longs;unt æquales angulis alterius, quo po&longs;ito &longs;unt etiam latera vnius proportionalia lateribus alterius, vt pa­tet ex prima definitione 6. necnon ex quarta eiu&longs;dem demon&longs;tratione. 7143 7144 hæc

quidem duo triangula &longs;unt &longs;imi­lia, & rectè concluditur F Y, mi­nus e&longs;&longs;e quàm D Y, &longs;ed tamen non videntur i&longs;ta propo&longs;itum o&longs;tendere, quod erat, plus nauim procedere, quàm palmulam re­trocedere. 7145 7146 Fateor quidem tex­tum hunc e&longs;&longs;e ob&longs;curi&longs;&longs;imum, idque; propterea fortè quia e&longs;t admodum corruptus, præ&longs;ertim circa chara­cteres, qui corrigendi &longs;unt vti nos facimus. 7147 7148 ne&longs;cio qua ratione Piccolomi­neus videatur &longs;ibi locum hunc explica&longs;&longs;e. 7149 7150 For&longs;itan addenda &longs;unt nonnulla hoc pacto; cum initio remigationis ponamus remum in &longs;itu A B, in fine ve­rò primæ impul&longs;ionis in D F, &longs;calmum verò circa medium remi in G, pri­mo; vltimo erit etiam circa medium D F, vbi H, quare &longs;calmus tran&longs;latus e&longs;t à G, ad H, totaque; G H, perficit, quam deberet Ari&longs;tot. vt &longs;ibi con&longs;taret probare e&longs;&longs;e maiorem ip&longs;a B F, quam palmula obiuit, & con&longs;equenter pro­ba&longs;&longs;et nauigium plus proce&longs;&longs;i&longs;&longs;e, quàm palmula rece&longs;&longs;erit: quod propo&longs;ue­rat. 7151 7152 7153 7154 Verum hoc non demon&longs;trat; neque ex præmi&longs;&longs;is deduci pote&longs;t. 7155 7156 po&longs;tea &longs;ubdit (Stans autem erit medium vbi e&longs;t G, in contrarium enim ip&longs;i, quqd in mari e&longs;t, extremo B, procedit, vbi extremum in nauigio e&longs;t A, non procederet autcm vbi est D, ni&longs;i commoueretur nauigiŭ, & eò transferretur vbi e&longs;t remi principium)vbi in textu mendosè legitur C, pro G.

7157 7158 Sen&longs;us porrò horum verborum e&longs;t hic; &longs;i remus cirea &longs;calmum G, verte­retur, & tamen nauis ab eo non propelleretur, &longs;ed &longs;taret, tunc medium na­uis maneret vbi G, per motum enim remi impellitur in contrarias partes ip&longs;i palmulæ B, quæ e&longs;t in mari, quia &longs;equitur motum alterius extremi A, manubrij &longs;cilicet remi, qui e&longs;t in naui: quod autem nauigium à remo mo­neatur, &longs;ignum e&longs;t, quia manubrium A, non procederet vbi e&longs;t D, ni&longs;i pari­ter cum remo nauigium illor&longs;um con&longs;equeretur. 7159 7160 Hæc quidem Ari&longs;t. 7161 7162 circa motum nauigij imperfectè admodum ni&longs;i textus corruptionem cau&longs;etur, di­xi&longs;&longs;e videatur. 7163 7164 Quapropter operæpretium me facturum exi&longs;timo, &longs;i Petri Nonij acuti&longs;&longs;imi Mathematici, &longs;ubtili&longs;&longs;imas, &longs;cituque; digni&longs;&longs;imas in præ&longs;ens problema anuotationes hoc loco de&longs;crip&longs;ero, ex quibus perfectè, ac ma­thematicè toti huic quæ&longs;tioni fit &longs;atis, quæ &longs;ic &longs;e habent.

7165 7166 In Problema Mechanicum Arist. 7167 7168 de motu Nauigij ex remis, annotatio Petri Nonij.

7169 7170 Cvm olim di&longs;cipulis no&longs;tris mechanicas Ari&longs;t. 7171 7172 quæ&longs;tiones interpre­taremur, nonnulla circa problema illud annotauimus, cur magis procedat nauigium, quam remi palmula in contrarium. 7173 7174 Ari&longs;tot. enim ratiocinatio ob&longs;cura e&longs;t; quam nos tamen, vt aliquid lucis haberet, ad hunc modum explicauimus; & propter materiæ &longs;imilitudinem hi&longs;ce no&longs;tris libris de nauigandi ratione adiunximus. 7175 7176 7177 7178 Supponit autem ip&longs;e auctor remi palmulam retrocedere, quoties nauigium in anteriora progre­ditur, locumque; &longs;calmi, &longs;uper quo circulari motu remus vertitur, in medio ip&longs;ius remi po&longs;itum e&longs;&longs;e, vt &longs;cilicet tantum di&longs;tet à manubrio, quantum à palmula. 7179 7180 Duæ itaque rectæ lineæ ponantur æquales A B, & D E, quæ quidem in C, puncto medio &longs;e inuicem &longs;ecent, & connectantur A B, & D E: remus autem in initio vnius remigationis po&longs;itionem habeat rectam lineam A B, &longs;itque; A, manubrium; B, palmula; C, verò &longs;ealmus. 7181 7182 Cum igitur A, remi ca­put in fine ip&longs;ius remigationis eò tran&longs;latum fuerit D, non erit B, vbi E; &longs;i

enim ibi fuerit; remus igitur po&longs;itionem habebit rectam lineam D E; & quoniam contrapo&longs;iti anguli, qui ad C, æquales &longs;unt, & duo latera A C, & D C, trianguli A D C, duobus lateribus B C, & C E, trianguli B­E C, æqualia etiam &longs;unt: reliqui igitur an­guli, atque ba&longs;es ip&longs;orum triangulorum æqua­les erunt per 4. propo&longs;itionem primi libri Euclidis, & propterea tantum &longs;patium per­curret B, quantum A: &longs;calmus verò C, im­motus omninò erit: & nauigium idcircò, in quo ip&longs;e &longs;calmus, immotum etiam erit con­tra hypothe&longs;im. 7183 7184 &longs;upponitur enim in que&longs;tio­ne, quod nauigium illa remigatione in anteriora moueatur, remi verò pal­mula retrocedat. 7185 7186 Scalmus porrò quamquam circularis remi motus expers &longs;it; motu tamen nauigij commouetur. 7187 7188 Remus igitur po&longs;itionem habeat in fine ip&longs;ius remigationis rectam lineam D Z, quæ quidem rectam A B, &longs;ecec in T, inter B, & C; rectam verò B E, in Z. 7189 7190 Et quoniam duo coalterni anguli C A D, & C B E, æquales o&longs;ten&longs;i &longs;unt, & angulus A T D, contrapo&longs;ito B T Z, æqualis e&longs;t: duo igitur triangula A T D, & B Z T, æquiangula erunt per 32. primi, & communem &longs;ententiam. 7191 7192 Similia itaque erunt ip&longs;a triangula, late­raque; habebunt proportionalia per 4. 6. &longs;icut A T, ad B T, ita D A, ad B Z. 7193 7194 Maior e&longs;t autem A T, quàm B T: maior igitur D A, quàm B Z, quod etiam per communem &longs;ententiam neglecta triangulorum &longs;imilitudine concludi pote&longs;t.

7195 7196 Maius itaque &longs;patium decurrit manubrium, quàm remi palmula, atque illuc tran&longs;uehetur nauigium, quò remi capulus deportatus fuerit: nauigium igi­tur in diuer&longs;a procedens, plus &longs;patij, quàm remi palmula tran&longs;mittet. 7197 7198 Vti­mur aurem tralatione, atque demon&longs;trationis figura Victoris Fau&longs;ti. 7199 7200 Aduer­tendum e&longs;t tamen, quod cum remus po&longs;itionem habuerit D Z, remi palmu­la erit infra Z. 7201 7202 Nam quoniam trianguli A D C, duo latera A C, & D C, æqua­lia po&longs;ita &longs;unc: duo igitur anguli, qui ad D, & A, æquales erunt: angulus igitur A D T, angulo D A T, maior erit: & idcircò latus A T, trianguli A­T D, latere D T, maius erit per 19. primi. 7203 7204 Aæqualis porrò o&longs;ten&longs;us e&longs;t an­guius B Z T, angulo A D T, præterea angulus D A T; angulo T B Z, æqua­lis: angulus igitur B Z T, angulo T B Z, maior erit, & propterea latus B T, trianguli B T Z, latere T Z, maius erit: tota igitur recta linea A B, tota D Z, maior erit: & idcircò cum remus po&longs;itionem habuerit rectam lineam D Z palmula erit vltra Z. 7205 7206 E&longs;to igitur in K, & connectantur rectæ lineæ B D, & B K: &longs;patium igitur decur&longs;um ab ip&longs;a palmula non erit B Z, &longs;ed B K: quod quidem minus etiam o&longs;tendemus e&longs;&longs;e ip&longs;o D A. 7207 7208 Nam quoniam duo latera B D, & D K, trianguli B D K, duobus lateribus B D, & D E, trianguli B E D, æqualia &longs;unt, &longs;ed minor e&longs;t angulus B D K, angulo B D E: minorigitur erit ba&longs;is B K, ba&longs;e B E, per 24. primi, quod demon&longs;trandum erat

7209 7210 Præterea, quod Ari&longs;t. 7211 7212 ratiocinando &longs;umit tantum &longs;patium conficere na­uigium, quantum remi manubrium, ambiguum e&longs;t. 7213 7214 Nam remi manubrium duabus fertur motionibus: vna propria, circularique; &longs;uper &longs;calmo: altera verò, qua vnà fertur cum ip&longs;o nauigio. 7215 7216 &longs;patium igitur, quod omninò decur­&longs;um e&longs;t à remi manubrio, eo quod à nauigio confectum e&longs;t, mains erit. 7217 7218 At &longs;i paria &longs;patia decur&longs;a e&longs;&longs;e intelligat à remi manubrio motu proprio, & à nauigio, neque hoc difficultate caret. 7219 7220 Nam nauiginm interdum maius &longs;pa­tium percurret, interdum minus, iuxta remigum vires, & prout mari remi palmula immer&longs;a fuerit: remi verò manubrium tamet&longs;i ab exiguis viribus moueatur haud minorem tamen ambitum de&longs;cribet, quàm &longs;i à multo ma­iore virtute moueretur. 7221 7222 Quapropter, vt huiu&longs;modi Ari&longs;t. &longs;ententiam exa­minaremus, Theoremata, quæ &longs;equuntur, demonftrauimus.

7223 7224 PROPOSITIO PRIMA.

7225 7226 Si Remiges nauigium mouere po&longs;&longs;unt, maius &longs;emper &longs;pa­tium remi manubrium percurrit, quàm nauigium.

7227 7228 Sit enim remus A C, manubrium A, &longs;calmus B, qui propter nauigij motum &longs;patium percurrat à B, in D, in quo loco ip&longs;eremus A C, &longs;i­

tum rectitudinis habeat E F. 7229 7230 Spatium itaque, quod A, conficit, curna linea &longs;it A E, cui recta linea re&longs;pondeat A Z, in re­ctam E F, perpendieularis. 7231 7232 Nauigium verò idem &longs;patium conficiet, quod &longs;ealmus B: aio igitur ip&longs;am A Z, rectam lineam, recta B D, maiorem e&longs;&longs;e. 7233 7234 &longs;ecet enim recta A C, rectam E F, in G: æquiangula &longs;unt igitur bina trian­gula A G Z, & B G D, quapropter &longs;icut A G, ad B G, &longs;ie A Z, ad B D, per. 7235 7236 4. 6. libri Eucli­dis: maior e&longs;t autem A G, ipfa B G, & maior igitur erit A Z, quam B D. & proinde maius &longs;patium remi manubrium percurrit, quam nauigium, quod demon&longs;trandum erat.

7237 7238 Quod &longs;i à puncto B, rectam lineam vtrinque ducamus H K, ad remi men&longs;uram, rectos facientem angulos cum B D, re­ctamque; A Z, &longs;ecantem in I, manife&longs;tè intelligemus ip&longs;am rectam A Z, con­&longs;tare ex A I, & I Z, quarum prior re&longs;pondet curuæ A H, quæ motu proprio manubrij de&longs;cripta e&longs;t; po&longs;terior verò æqualis e&longs;t rectæ B D, quæ motu na­uigij decur&longs;a e&longs;t.

7239 7240 PROPOSITIO SECVNDA.

7241 7242 Si remi manubrium motu proprio, & nauigium, æqualia &longs;patia pertran&longs;ierint, fieri non poterit, vt palmula mo­ueatur: &longs;ed veluti centrum immota manebit.

7243 7244 Esto iterum remus A C, manubrium A, &longs;calmus B: tantum autem &longs;pa­tium conficiat nauigium; quantum motu proprio A. Dico, quod C, remi palmula immota manebit. 7245 7246 Nam &longs;i a loco &longs;uo dimota fuerit: &longs;patium igitur permeet C D, ad po&longs;teriora: quo quidem decur&longs;o, remus A C, po&longs;itionem rectitudmis habeat F D, &longs;calmus itaque B, tran&longs;latus erit in G. 7247 7248 Excitetur autem à puncto B, in vtramque partem linea E B R, ad

rectos angulos &longs;uper B G, & à puncto A, recta A H, &longs;uper D F: itemque à puncto E, recta C E, &longs;uper E R; ip&longs;arum verò rectarum linearum E R, & A H, &longs;ectio &longs;it in K, &longs;ed C F., & D F, &longs;it in Z, & quo­niam A K, id &longs;patium e&longs;t, quod motu proprio re­mi manubrium permeauit, curuilineo enim re­&longs;pondeat A R, recta autem B G, id &longs;patium e&longs;t, quod nauigium confecit: ip&longs;æ igitur rectæ lineæ H K, & B G, æquales erunt. 7249 7250 Atqui in duobus æqui­angulis triangulis E B C, & B A K, vel per 26. propo&longs;itionem primi Euclidis, vel 4. 6. æquales e&longs;&longs;e concludes A K, & E C, rectas lineas: quapro­pter æqualis erit E C, rectæ B G, per communem &longs;ententiam: eidem autem B G, æqualis e&longs;t E Z, in parallelogrammo, per 34. propo&longs;itionem ip­&longs;ius primi libri: æqualis igitur erit recta E Z, re­ctæ E C, pars toti, quod e&longs;t impo&longs;&longs;ibile. 7251 7252 Et pro­pterea immota manebit palmula C, quod erat à nobis o&longs;tendendum.

7253 7254 PROPOSITIO TERTIA.

7255 7256 Si remi manubrium motu proprio duplum confecerit &longs;pa­tium, quàm nauigium, tantum prouehetur ea remiga­tione nauigium, quantum palmula retroce&longs;&longs;erit.

7257 7258 Remus enim incipiente motu po&longs;itionem habeat A C, de&longs;inente verò rectitudinis &longs;itum F G. &longs;calmus igitur B, propter nauigij motum, &longs;patium con&longs;iciet B D. 7259 7260 Excitetur à puncto B, in vtramque partem perpendicularis E Z, in quam veniant a punctis A, & C, ad rectos angulos rectæ lineæ A E, & C Z: &longs;patium autem A E, à manubrio

decur&longs;um motu proprio &longs;patij B D, duplum &longs;it: recta verò linea C H, curuæ re&longs;pondeat C G, quæ à remi palmula de&longs;cripta e&longs;t. 7261 7262 Di­co ip&longs;as rectas lineas B D, & C H, æquales e&longs;&longs;e. 7263 7264 Nam in duobus triangulis B A E, & C B Z, duæ rectæ lineæ A E, & C Z, æqua­les &longs;unt. 7265 7266 In parallelogrammo autem B H, duæ B D, & H Z, æquales, atqui recta A E, dupla e&longs;t rectæ B D, per hypothe&longs;im; dupla e&longs;t igitur, & C Z, rectæ H Z, quapropter C H, & H Z, æquales erunt, Duæ igitur C H, & B D, æquales per communem &longs;en­tentiam.

7267 7268 Et quia nauigium tantum &longs;patium de­currit &longs;emper, quantum &longs;calmus: &longs;i igitur remi manubrium motu proprio duplum confecerit &longs;patium, quàm nauigium, tan­tum prouehetur nauigium, quantum pal­mula retroce&longs;&longs;erit, quod demon&longs;trandum erat.

7269 7270 PROPOSITIO QVARTA.

7271 7272 Si nauigium minus &longs;patium decurrat, quàm remi manu­brium, &longs;ed &longs;upra dimidium, magis prouehetur, quàm pal­mula retrocedat; &longs;i verò citra dimidium, minus.

7273 7274 In de&longs;cripta enim figura ponatur B D, minor quam A E, &longs;ed eius dimi­dio maior. 7275 7276 Dico, quod ip&longs;a B D, maior e&longs;t quàm C H. 7277 7278 Nam B D, & H Z, æquales &longs;unt: Ad hæc A E, & C Z, æquales &longs;unt rectæ lineæ; ma­ior igitur erit H Z, dimidio ip&longs;ius A E: quapropter reliqua C H, mi­nor dimidio erit eiu&longs;dem A E, & minor igitur erit C H, quàm B D. 7279 7280 Spa­tium autem B D, id e&longs;t, quod nauigium conficit, &longs;patium verò C H, remi palmula in contrarium decurrit; idcircò prior pars Theorematis vera e&longs;t. 7281 7282 Po&longs;terior autem &longs;imiliter o&longs;tendetur. 7283 7284 &longs;i enim B D, minor e&longs;t dimidio ip&longs;ius A E: minor igitur erit, & H Z, dimidio eiu&longs;dem A E; & quoniam A E, & C Z, æquales &longs;unt: reliqua igitur C H, dimidio eiu&longs;dem A E, maior erit: & proinde minor erit B D, quàm C H. 7285 7286 Nauigium igitur minus &longs;patium de­curret in anteriora, quam remi palmula in contrarium, quod demon&longs;tran­dum &longs;u&longs;cepimus.

7287 7288 Corollarium.

7289 7290 Ex hac, & præcedenti infertur, quod &longs;i remi manubrium motu proprio maius &longs;patium decurrat, quàm nauigium, &longs;iue id &longs;it duplum, &longs;iue mi­nus duplo, &longs;iue maius duplo, &longs;patium, quod nauigium interim decurrit ad anteriora, & quod palmula remi in contrarium &longs;imul iuncta, ei quod ip&longs;um remi manubrium motu proprio conficit, æqualia erunt. 7291 7292 &longs;emper enim B D, æqualis e&longs;t H Z: tota verò C Z, quæ æqualis e&longs;t A E, ex &longs;uis partibus C H, & H Z, con&longs;tabit.

7293 7294 Propo&longs;itionis conuer&longs;io.

7295 7296 Si nauigium longius progrediatur, quàm remi palmula re­trocedat, &longs;patium conficiet plu&longs;quam dimidium eius, quod motu proprio remi manubrium decurrit: &longs;i minus, citra dimidium.

7297 7298 Huius demonctratio ex &longs;upradictis facilè colligi poterit.

7299 7300 PROPOSITIO QVINTA.

7301 7302 Si celerius feratur nauigium, quàm remi manubrium, mo­uebitur palmula in vlteriora, nilque; vnquam retroce­det, idque; &longs;patium decurret, quo nauigij motus motum manubrij &longs;uperat.

7303 7304 Habeat enim remus incipiente motu po&longs;itionem A C: de&longs;inente

verò &longs;itum rectitudinis F G. &longs;cal­mus igitur B, propter nauigij motum tran&longs;latus, erit in D, &longs;it itaque &longs;patium B D, maius quàm A H, à re­mi manubrio motu proprio decur&longs;um: &longs;ic enim celerius dicetur ferri nauigium, quàm manubrium. 7305 7306 Dico, quòd palmula C, in vlteriora mouebitur. 7307 7308 Nam cum &longs;calmus B, prouectus fuerit in D: tran&longs;lata erit ip­fa palmula C, vbi G, in rectitudinis &longs;itu, &longs;patiumque; conficiet C G, curuilineum, cui re&longs;pondet C K: mouebitur igitur palmula in vlteriora. 7309 7310 Nihil autem vnquam retro­cedere, o&longs;tendetur in hunc modum. 7311 7312 eadem enim celeritate mouentur A, in H, & C, ver&longs;us I, circa &longs;calmum. 7313 7314 Atqui per hypo­the&longs;im celerius fertur nauigium, quam A. in H, celerius igitur ip&longs;um nauigium fer­tur, quàm C, ver&longs;us I. &longs;ed mouetur idem C. ip&longs;a nauigij celeritate ver&longs;us K; celerius igitur ferretur C, ad K, quam ad I, quapropter nihil vnquam retrocedet ip&longs;um C, imò verò in vlteriora progredietur, &longs;patiumque; decurret C K, quod quidem relinquitur detracto I C, ex I K. &longs;i enim remi palmula tota ip&longs;a nauigij celeritate moueretur, vl­tra K, progrederetur, cum B, perueniret ad D: &longs;ed retrahitur interim, pro­pter eum motum, qui fit circa B. 7315 7316 Sic igitur palmulæ celeritate, quæ à mo­tu nauigij prouenit retardata, decur&longs;um &longs;patium erit C K. 7317 7318 Videtur autem &longs;olo remorum impul&longs;u hoc fieri non po&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ed alia in&longs;uper virtute impel­lente opus e&longs;&longs;e, vt venti, vel aquæ.

7319 7320 Ex his Theorematis liquet, inquit Nonius, quàm incerta interroget Ari­&longs;toteles, & quàm in&longs;citè re&longs;pondeat. 7321 7322 Nam non continuò &longs;i nauigium in an­teriora mouetur, remi palmula retroceder; neque etiam &longs;i retrocedat, mi­nus &longs;patìum tran&longs;mittit in contrarium, quàm nauigium progrediatur. 7323 7324 De­mon&longs;trant hoc &longs;ecunda, & tertia propo&longs;itio. 7325 7326 Remi verò manubrium motu proprio, qui circa &longs;calmum fit, & vnà cum nauigij motu maius &longs;patium con­ficit quàm nauigium. 7327 7328 &longs;olo autem proprio motu, &longs;i contingat tantum &longs;pa­tium conficere, quantum nauigium, fieri non poterit, vt palmula mouea­tur. 7329 7330 fru&longs;tra igitur conatur in vniuer&longs;um demon&longs;tr are remi manubrium ma­ius &longs;patium decurrere, quàm palmulam in contrarium. 7331 7332 Præterea quando nauigium longius progreditur, quàm remi palmula regrediatur, minus &longs;pa­tium decurrit, quam manubrium: igitur hon æquale. 7333 7334 Et proinde con&longs;tat neque veritatem in propo&longs;ito, neque demon&longs;trationem in ijs, quæ conge­rit, reperiri.

7335 7336 Hucu&longs;que Petrus Nonius:

7337 7338 Reliqua huius textus vtinam quemadmodum &longs;unt clara, ita etiam vera e&longs;&longs;ent: &longs;ed quia quæ modo dixit de remo, eadem temoni applicat propte­rea ij&longs;dem etiam obnoxia &longs;unt difficultatibus.

7339 7340 QVÆSTIO SEXTA

7341 7342 De Antenna.

7343 7344

7345 7346 248

7347 7348 Qværit cur quanto Antenna &longs;ublimior fuerit, ij&longs;dem velis, & vento eodem celerius ferantur nauigia. 7349 7350 Re&longs;pondet inde id prouenire, quia malus, &longs;iue arbor nauis in huiu&longs;modi ventorum impul&longs;u ve­ctis euadit, cuius auxilio idem ventus, qui mouens e&longs;t, maiorem vim acquirit, quanto longior fuerit pars vectis, quæ inter hypomoclion, & vim mouentem intercipitur: quando autem altior fuerit antenna, tunc ea vectis pars longior euadit, & propterea accidit, vt vires ventorum augean­tur. 7351 7352 &longs;ed i&longs;ta melius in figura in&longs;piciamus. 7353 7354 &longs;it nauis A B, cuius arbor C D E, antenna F C G, velum F G H, vectis e&longs;t arbor, cuius fultura e&longs;t in E, extre­mo mali in fundo nauis, onus autem in D, vbi malus exit è carina. 7355 7356 mouens potentia e&longs;t ventus, qui mouet in antenna F C G. quanto igitur &longs;ublimior e&longs;t antenna, tanto longior euadit vectis E C, tantoque; maiores fiunt venti vires. 7357 7358 dixi autem onus e&longs;&longs;e in D, quia &longs;i nauis vento ob&longs;i&longs;teret, ip&longs;a inuerte­retur hac ratione, vt puppis A, eleuata, prora B, demergeretur, manente

veluti centro parte E. quia ve­rò ob maris liquiditatem na­uis minimè obfi&longs;tit, &longs;ed facilè cedens à ventis vrgetur, hinc fit, vt meritò dixerim pondus nauis e&longs;&longs;e ad D, fulcimentum verò ad E.

7359 7360 Quæ&longs;tio &longs;eptima, & &longs;atis pec &longs;e clara e&longs;t; neque Mathemati­ci e&longs;t eam exponere.

7361 7362 QVÆSTIO OCTAVA

7363 7364 De Rota.

7365 7366 Cur ex figurarum genere quæcun que rotundæ &longs;unt, & cir­culares facilius mouentur?

7367 7368

7369 7370 249

7371 7372 Tribus autem modis circulum rotari contingit; aut enim &longs;ecun­dum ap&longs;idem, &longs;iue curuaturam centro &longs;imul moto, quemadmo­dum plau&longs;trorum rotæ vertuntur: aut circa manentem axem, tanquam centrum veluti rotulæ illæ, ex quibus trochlea compo­nitur; vel quibus ad puteos vtimur, quæ quidem rectæ ad horizontem &longs;o­lent con&longs;titui. 7373 7374 aut quem ad modum rota figuli, quæ pariter circa manens cen­trum gyratur, &longs;ed qua&longs;i pro&longs;trata horizonti æquidi&longs;tans collocata e&longs;t. 7375 7376 Quæ igitur primo modo mouentur, fortè facilius quam figuræ rectilineæ, vt &longs;unt triangulares, quadratæ, pentagonæ, &c. 7377 7378 mouentur, quia circulares figuræ parua &longs;ui parte, & qua&longs;i in puncto planum, &longs;eu pauimentum contingunt, vn­de fit, vt neque offen&longs;ent, neque impingant; cuius cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quia à terra &longs;emo­tus e&longs;t angulus, ide&longs;t tali angulo planum contingunt, vt ab eo &longs;tatim rotæ curuatura à terra eleuari incipiat, & propterea parum terræ hæreat: in fi­guris verò rectilineis, in quadrata. 7379 7380 v. g. &longs;ecus accidit, quia ab angulo ad an­gulum linea recta tenditur, vnde in ip&longs;ius volutatione po&longs;t contactum vnius anguli tota recta linea &longs;equens, plano adaptabitur, & non &longs;emouebitur &longs;ta­tim in altum, & ideò multum offen&longs;abit, & impinget, tardeque; idcircò mo­uebitur. 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 Præterea circulares etiam, &longs;i cui obulam fiunt corpori, illud &longs;imi­liter &longs;ecundum pu&longs;illum tan gunt: rectilineæ verò figuræ, rectitudine &longs;ua plani multum contingerent. 7387 7388 Ad hæc motor mouens huiu&longs;inodi rotas, eas mouet, quò nutant: nam quando rota erecta e&longs;t &longs;uper pauimentum, dia­meter ip&longs;ius, quæ à contactu pauimenti ad angulos rectos, ad &longs;upremum rotæ perducitur totum rotæ pondus in duas æquas partes diuidit, ita vt ta­le pondus in æquilibrio con&longs;tituatur, cum ex vna parte tantum &longs;it, quantum ex altera; ex quo fit, vt vel exigua vis ip&longs;am impellere valeat: quando enim duo æqualia pondera &longs;unt in æquilibrio, quelibet vis pote&longs;t ea ab æquilibrio dimouere. 7389 7390 quando po&longs;tea rota e&longs;t in motu, vel cum primum ei motus fuerit à motore inditus, &longs;emper nutat ad partes illas, ad quas primum fuit incita­ta per impre&longs;&longs;am motionem, quapropter nullo negotio ad ea&longs;dem partes, &longs;eu antror&longs;um mouetur; quò enim vnumquodque vergit, illuc facillimè fer­tur: quemadmodum è contrario difficillimum e&longs;t in contrariam nutus &longs;ui partem vnumquodque pellere. 7391 7392 Huc etiam pertinet, quod nonnulli dicunt, circuli nimirum periphæriam perenni ver&longs;ari motu, atque hinc facilius mo­ueri. 7393 7394 &longs;icuti etiam dicunt, quod manentia propterea manent, quia contrani­tuntur, & ob&longs;i&longs;tunt mouenti: quod fortè dicebant propter maximam circu­li ad motum aptitudinem. 7395 7396 & quia &longs;icut diameter ad diametrum, ita maio­ris circuli periphæria ad minoris periphæriam (vt po&longs;tea o&longs;tendam) & quia quo longior diameter e&longs;t, eò facilius, vt initio probaui, mouetur, fit vt etiam periphæria maioris facilius, quàm minoris moueatur, &longs;iue dixeris, quod an­gulus maioris circuli ad angulum minoris nutum quendam habet; & quia facilius mouetur angulus maioris, quàm minoris, fit, vt maior rota adhi­beatur ad minorem mouendam: & quia intra maiorem infinitæ circa idem centrum concipi po&longs;&longs;unt, hinc fit, vt rotæ maiores facilius moueantur, & motæ moueant cæteras intra &longs;e contentas. 7397 7398 quod dictum e&longs;t de nutu anguli maioris circuli ad angulum minoris ex appo&longs;ita figura facilè patebit, vbi

pro minore angulo intelligendus e&longs;t arcus C B, pro maiore autem arcus D E, quorum vterque vo­catur angulus, quoniam angulo A, qui e&longs;t in cen­tro opponuntur. 7399 7400 Atque hæc &longs;ufficiant deijs, quæ primo modo moueutur.

7401 7402 Nunc ad ea, quæ reliquis duobus modis cieri &longs;olent, quæ &longs;cilicet non mouentur &longs;ecundum ap&longs;i­dem, &longs;ed aut iuxta planitiem, ide&longs;t, quæ æquidi­&longs;tanter pauimento collo cantur, vt rotæ figulorum, aut quæ in loco à terra eleuato, vt troclearum or­biculi. 7403 7404 rotæ hæ facilius ip&longs;æ, & ea etiam, quæ ip&longs;is annectuntur commouen­tur, quam &longs;i rectilinea figura con&longs;tarent; non quia parua &longs;ui portione vel tangant planum, vel offen&longs;ent, &longs;ed ob aliam inclinationem, de qua initio huius operis ante quæ&longs;tiones dictum e&longs;t, vbi diximus circulum duas incli­nationes ad motum obtinere, &longs;ecundum quas à motore mouetur; vna e&longs;t, quam diximus naturalem, qua &longs;olet cieri &longs;ecundum periphæriam, motor enim &longs;emper mouet circulum in periphæria, & &longs;ecundum hanc inclinatio­nem extremum diametri rectà, non circulariter moueretur: hanc inclina­tionem fortè habet à materia grauitante, & in ip&longs;o circulo con&longs;tituta in æquilibrio: quæ autem in æquilibrio, facillimè cedunt; & qui talia mouent, qua&longs;i prius mota mouent, & ideò facillimè. 7405 7406 Secundum igitur inclinatio­nem hanc, quæ in obliquum e&longs;t, ide&longs;t, quæ &longs;ecundum circunferentiam &longs;it, ip&longs;am rotam mouens facillimè mouet. 7407 7408 altera latio e&longs;t, &longs;ecundum quam cir­culus à &longs;eip&longs;o &longs;ecundum diametrum mouetur, ide&longs;t circa &longs;uum centrum re­trahit continuò extrema diametri; ne recta &longs;ecundum naturalem lationem ferantur, &longs;ed in orbem circulariter circa centrum gyrentur. 7409 7410 hæc Ari&longs;t. 7411 7412 Re­&longs;tat vt &longs;atisfaciam promi&longs;&longs;is.

7413 7414 Dictum e&longs;t ab Ari&longs;t. 7415 7416 in textu (Sicut diameter ad diametrum, ita maior circu­lus ad maiorem) quæ verba intelligenda e&longs;&longs;e non de circulis, &longs;ed de periphæ­rijs, vti expo&longs;ui, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t ex 11. propo&longs;it. 7417 7418 5. Pappi Alexandrini, quæ talis e&longs;t: Circulorum circunferentiæ inter &longs;e &longs;unt vt diametri. 7419 7420 quam etiam Pater Clauius demon&longs;trat propo&longs;. 7421 7422 2. lib. 7423 7424 8. & propo&longs;. 7425 7426 1. lib. 7427 7428 4. Geom. pract. &longs;i autem de ip&longs;is circulis intelligerentur fal&longs;a e&longs;&longs;ent, non enim e&longs;t circulus ad circulum, vt diameter ad diametrum; &longs;ed circuli &longs;unt inter &longs;e, quemad­modum à diametris ip&longs;orum quadrata per &longs;ecundam 12. Elem. 7429 7430 quadrata autem &longs;unt inter &longs;e in duplicata ratione laterum per 20. 6. eiusque corolla­rium; hoc e&longs;t &longs;i fiat, vt latus maioris quadrati ad latus minoris, ita latus mi­noris ad aliam tertiam lineam, erit quadratum maius ad minus, vt latus ip&longs;ius ad tertiam illam lineam; non autem vt ad latus minoris. 7431 7432 7433 7434 7435 7436 cum ergo circulus &longs;it ad circulum, vt quadratum diametri ad quadratum diametri, & quadrata non habeant rationem laterum, &longs;eu diametrorum prædictorum, &longs;ed illorum duplicatam, neque circuli inuicem illam habere poterunt.

7437 7438 Illud demum non ignorandum, quod Guidus Vbaldus propo&longs;it. 7439 7440 1. de Tro­chlea, demon&longs;trat, quod nimirum potentia &longs;u&longs;tinens pondus per rotulam, cui funis &longs;upernæ fuerit circumductus, qualis ea e&longs;t, qua ad hauriendam ex puteis aquam vtimur, talis inquam potentia e&longs;t æqualis ponderi; cuius ra­tio e&longs;t, quia tunc trochlea fit vectis, cuius fulcimentum e&longs;t in medio vectis, pondus verò, & potentia in extremitatibus &longs;unt, & æquidi&longs;tant ab hypomo­clio, & propterea cum &longs;it eadem proportio ponderis ad potentiam, quæ di­&longs;tantiæ ad di&longs;tantiam, vt &longs;upra qu&ecedil;&longs;t. 7441 7442 3. probatum e&longs;t ex Archimede, & Gui­do Vbaldo, di&longs;tantiæ autem &longs;int æquales, erunt etiam pondus, & potentia æqualia, ide&longs;t, &longs;i pondus e&longs;&longs;et vnius libræ, &longs;u&longs;tineretur à tanta vi, quanta opus e&longs;t ad libram vnam &longs;u&longs;tinendam, & non amplius. 7443 7444 vt autem clarè appareat vectis in trochlea, & hypomoclion, & æquales di&longs;tantiæ, &longs;it figura, in qua

pondus D, ductario funi D C B E, alligatum. 7445 7446 poten­tia &longs;u&longs;tinens E. axis autem erit diameter rotulæ B A C, nam potentia premit rotulam in B, & pondus in C, & cum rotula &longs;u&longs;tineatur in A, à &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;orio F A. erit punctum A, hypomoclion, quia in motu vectis eua­dit centrum, e&longs;tque; punctum manens. 7447 7448 æquales autem di&longs;tantiæ vtrinque ab hypomoclio &longs;unt B A, A C, &longs;unt enim ex centro eodem. 7449 7450 ex quibus manife&longs;tum e&longs;t hu­iu&longs;modi rotulam nullam vim mouenti addere, &longs;ed &longs;o­lum illud præ&longs;tat, vt omne tollat impedimentum, quemadmodum ait Ari&longs;t. 7451 7452 manife&longs;tum etiam e&longs;t ma­iorem vim quamlibet, quam &longs;it ea, quæ &longs;u&longs;tinet, po&longs;&longs;e idem pondus &longs;ur&longs;um mouere. 7453 7454 hæc & præ&longs;enti loco, & &longs;equentibus lucem afferre po&longs;&longs;unt.

7455 7456 QVÆSTIO NONA

7457 7458 De Trochleis, & Scytalis.

7459 7460

7461 7462 250

7463 7464 Cvr ea, quæ per maiores circulos tollantur, & trahuntur facilius, & ci­tius mouentur? 7465 7466 veluti per maiores trochleas, quàm per minores, & &longs;cy­talas &longs;imiliter? 7467 7468 An quanto maior fuerit illa, quæ à centro e&longs;t, in æquali temporis &longs;patio maius &longs;patium conficit? 7469 7470 quamobrem æqualì inexi&longs;tente onere, idem faciet, &longs;icuti diximus maiores libras minoribus exactiores e&longs;&longs;e; &longs;par­tum enim in illis centrum e&longs;t: partes verò libræ vtrinque à &longs;parto &longs;unt veluti lineæ ex centro) Cum textus huius quæ&longs;tionis fatis clarus &longs;it, præ&longs;ertim &longs;i prius legantur, quæ dicta &longs;unt de libra in prima quæ&longs;t. 7471 7472 & quæ de rota, & trochlea in proxima præcedenti, à paraphra&longs;i ip&longs;ius &longs;uper&longs;edebo. 7473 7474 Illud tamen, quod magis nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t, non omittam, vt &longs;cilicet difficultatibus quibu&longs;dam occurram. 7475 7476 Et primo, quod Ari&longs;t. 7477 7478 ait, ea quæ per maiores circulos veluti trochleas, &longs;eu rotulas trahuntur, facilius trahi, quàm ea, quæ per minores, non videtur ex omni parte verom. 7479 7480 nam &longs;icuti in præcedenti qnæ&longs;tione o&longs;ten­&longs;um e&longs;t ex Guido Vbaldo, trochlea &longs;implex, &longs;iue rotula illa &longs;triata, cui funis &longs;upernè inditur, vt in &longs;uperiori figura; nullas addit vires potentiæ, quia re­ducitur ad vectem, cuius fultura &longs;it in medio ip&longs;ius. 7481 7482 &longs;iue igitur rotula illa magna fuerit, &longs;iue parua, &longs;emper in talem vectem re&longs;oluetur, & propterea, vt etiam experientia con&longs;tat eodem labore aquam hauriunt, &longs;iue rotula illa magna fuerit, &longs;ine parua. 7483 7484 nec minus vera videtur re&longs;pon&longs;io, cum ait (An quia quanto maior fuerit illa, quæ à centro e&longs;t, in æquali tempore maius mouetur (patium)quæ quidem vera &longs;unt, &longs;i intelligantur hoc modo, nimirum, quod quando plures circul&longs;concentrici, atque inuicem connexi fuerint, ita vt vans &longs;ine alijs moueri nequeat, tunc quanto maior fuerit diameter, & con&longs;equenter cir­cunferentia, tanto velocius mouebitur. 7485 7486 &longs;i autem intelligantur de duobus circulis ab inuicem &longs;eparatis, quorum vnus ab&longs;que altero moueri pote&longs;t, vt &longs;ie quando vtimur modo rotula magna, modo parua ad aquam hauriendam non videntur vera, in quo &longs;en&longs;u manife&longs;tè loquitur Ari&longs;t. 7487 7488 Quapropter vt &longs;in­cerè loquar, nunc ne&longs;cio, qua ratione Ari&longs;t ab errore excu&longs;are valeam, alijs fortè occurret.

7489 7490 Secundo loco videndum quid &longs;int &longs;cyntalæ. 7491 7492 Vt autem con&longs;tat ex &longs;equenti quæ&longs;tione 11. &longs;cyntala erat in&longs;trumentum quoddam vectorium, quod ro­tas, &longs;icut currus, aliter tamen factas, habebat, porrò sxutalh\, ide&longs;t &longs;cytala inter alia &longs;ignificat baculum, &longs;iue hgnum oblongum, ac teres, qualia ea &longs;unt, quibus vtimur in &longs;ucculis, vulgò Na&longs;pe; & in axe in peritrochio, vt videre e&longs;t apud Guidum Vbaldum. 7493 7494 hinc factum e&longs;t, vt apud Lacædemonios &longs;cytala &longs;ignificaret quoddam genus epi&longs;tolæ, quam &longs;cytalem laconicam dicebant, quia in charta in&longs;tar zonæ oblonga, & circa &longs;cytalam, hoc e&longs;t circa bacillum quendam &longs;piratim circumuoluta exarabatur; ita vt yer&longs;us &longs;cripturæ &longs;ecun­dum &longs;urculi longitudinem ducerentur, ex quo &longs;iebat, vt per iuncturas mem­branæ, literæ, ac verba procederent, membranam hanc ex &longs;cytala reuolu­tam, & aliter complicatam Imperatori mittebant, re&longs;olutio autem mem­branæ literas truncas, atque mutilas reddebat; cum partim continerentur citra iuncturas, partim vltra: eæquè partes, quæ &longs;imul fuerant &longs;criptæ, & continuatæ, po&longs;t re&longs;olutionem erant ab innicem valde di&longs;&longs;itæ. 7495 7496 quapropter Imperator commenti totius con&longs;cius, eandem membranam &longs;cytali alteri priori omninò &longs;imili, æqualique; eodem modo, quo prius circumponebat, &longs;icque; iuncturæ priores redibant, quæ literas, ac verba mutila, & imperfecta in integrum re&longs;tituebant, vt facilè legi po&longs;&longs;ent. 7497 7498 hoc illi vtebantur &longs;ecreto, cum literas ad Imperatores &longs;uos mi&longs;&longs;as, ho&longs;tibus occultas e&longs;&longs;e volebant.

7499 7500 Ex quibus conijcere licet &longs;cytalam fui&longs;&longs;e lignum oblongum, & teres, &longs;iue vt Geometræ dicunt, Cylindrum; in cuius tamen extremitatibus e&longs;&longs;ent margines duo aliquantulum prominentes, ceu binæ rotæ, cum ip&longs;o tamen continuæ, & connexæ, vt cum ip&longs;o &longs;imul conuoluerentur; non tamen tan­

quam circa axem. 7501 7502 cuius hanc accipe fi­guram. 7503 7504 Quærit igitur Ari&longs;t. 7505 7506 cur huiu&longs;­modi &longs;cytalæ facilius moueantur, quo maiores ip&longs;arum &longs;unt rotæ. 7507 7508 Cui quæ­&longs;tioni &longs;imul, ij&longs;demque verbis, quibus quæ&longs;tioni de maioribus rotulis re&longs;pondet, &longs;ed non &longs;atisfacit ob eandem ra­tionem, quam ibi attuli. 7509 7510 Crediderim tamen maiores &longs;cytalas, & maiores curruum rotas, & alia id generis, quæ volutantur, ita vt motu progre&longs;&longs;iuo mutent locum, facilius moueri, &longs;ed ob aliam cau&longs;am, quia nimirum maio­res rotæ minus &longs;i quid obuiam fiat, offen&longs;ant, quia &longs;ua magnitudine quem­libet obicem facilè &longs;uperare po&longs;&longs;unt; cuius cau&longs;a e&longs;t angulus acuti&longs;&longs;imuns, quem cum terra facit; at verò exiguæ rotæ, &longs;i cui maiori ob&longs;taculo obuia­rint, ip&longs;um nequeunt &longs;uperare, aut &longs;upera&longs;cendere, quia angulum cum ter­ra faciunt in&longs;to maiorem, vnde facilè ip&longs;orum cur&longs;us inhibetur, ip&longs;æque; pro­pterea præ maioribus tardiores euadunt. 7511 7512 Atque hæc in hanc quæ&longs;tionem dicta &longs;ufficiant.

7513 7514 QVÆSTIO DECIMA

7515 7516 De libra vacua, & alijs &longs;imilibus.

7517 7518

7519 7520 251

7521 7522 Cvr libræ, quæ omni incumbente pondere &longs;unt vacuæ ab impo&longs;ito pondere facilius mouentur, quàm &longs;i quopiam inexi&longs;tente pondere aliud rur&longs;us onus &longs;uperaddatur. 7523 7524 &longs;imiliter etiam rota, & huiu&longs;modi quippiam, quod grauius quidem e&longs;t, difficilius commouetur quàm læue, v. g. rota ferrea difficilius, quàm lignea. 7525 7526 7527 7528 7529 7530 &longs;imiliter quæ maiora &longs;unt, etiam &longs;i ex eadem materia con&longs;tent difficilius mouentur quàm minora, vt rota maior ferrea, quàm minor etiam ferrea. 7531 7532 Habet hæc quæ&longs;tio tres par­tes, quibus Ari&longs;t. 7533 7534 re&longs;pondet dicens, quod graue e&longs;t ægrè moneri non &longs;olum contra nutum &longs;uum, idc&longs;t &longs;ur&longs;um, &longs;ed etiam in obliquum, &longs;eu ad latera, quia grauia deor&longs;um nutant, non &longs;ur&longs;um, nec in tran&longs;uer&longs;um: ideo libræ cum one­re, quia &longs;unt grauiores, & rota ferrea quàm lignea, & ferrea ctiam maior, quàm minor grauior e&longs;t, ideò difficilius agitatur.

7535 7536 Contra quam re&longs;pon&longs;ionem &longs;ic fortè obijcies; in præcedenti enim quæ­&longs;tione dictum e&longs;t ab Ari&longs;t. 7537 7538 maiores trochleas, & &longs;cytalas, minoribus facilius commoueri, hic autem dicit maiorem rotam difficilius quàm minorem mo­ueri. 7539 7540 Hanc obiectionem Piccolomineus di&longs;&longs;imula&longs;&longs;e videtur, cui ego, inge­nuè fateor, me &longs;atisfacere ne&longs;cire, vt enim in præcedenti annotaui, nulla mihi ratio Ari&longs;t. 7541 7542 excu&longs;andi occurrit, alijs fortè occurret. 7543 7544 In præ&longs;enti au­tem benè quidem re&longs;pondet, &longs;ed tamen intimam rei cau&longs;am non attingit.

7545 7546 Sciendum igitur e&longs;t id, quod Guidus Vbaldus in tractatu de libra pluri­bus demon&longs;trauit: quod &longs;i quoduis graue &longs;u&longs;pendatur pror&longs;us in centro gra­uitatis, ita vt in perfecto &longs;it æquilibrio, tunc &longs;iue magnum, &longs;iue paruum, &longs;iue graue, grauiu&longs;uè fuerit, à quauis exigua vi poterit ab æquilibrio dimo­ueri. 7547 7548 cur ergo in libris, & rotis grauioribus, aut maioribus experientia con­trarium o&longs;tendit? 7549 7550 ratio e&longs;t, quia hæc omnia communiter non collocantur, ita vt circa centrum &longs;uum, quod etiam centrum grauitatis e&longs;t, conuerti po&longs;&longs;int: verum aptantur circa axem, & quidem iu&longs;to maiorem, laxiu&longs;que circa ip&longs;um conuertuntur, vnde fit, vt ip&longs;a ob in&longs;itam grauitatem premant axem in &longs;uperiori parte, vnde quando ab aliquo gyrantur, non propriè gy­rant, &longs;ed in &longs;uperiori axis parte hærentes ip&longs;um atterunt; ex qua attritione fit, vt retardentur, idque; eò magis, quo graniora magis premunt; hærent, difficiliusque; propterea raptantur potius, quàm gyrentur.

7551 7552 Ex his, & textus, & ratio Ari&longs;totelis &longs;atis clara redduntur.

7553 7554 QVÆSTIO VNDECIMA

7555 7556 De Scytala, & Curru.

7557 7558

7559 7560 252

7561 7562 Cvr &longs;uper &longs;cytalas facilius portantur onera quàm &longs;uper currus, cum tamen currus magnas habeant rotas, &longs;cytalæ verò pu&longs;illas?

7563 7564 Quidnam &longs;cytala e&longs;&longs;et explicatum e&longs;t in 9. quæ&longs;t. 7565 7566 Quo autem modo per &longs;cytalas onera portentur, &longs;ic, accipe: exi&longs;timo binas &longs;cy­talas inuicem æquidi&longs;tantes, & aliquantulum &longs;emotas inuicem &longs;ic di&longs;poni, vt efficiant in&longs;trumentum vectorium currus in&longs;tar, & fortè veteres vteban­tur his &longs;cytalis eo modo, quo nunc architectores vtuntur duobus illis lignis longis, ac rotundis, quæ vulgò dicuntur Ruccioli.

7567 7568 Re&longs;pondet igitur id accidere, quia rotæ &longs;cytalarum &longs;imul &longs;unt cum &longs;uo axe coinpactæ, ita vt &longs;imul cum ip&longs;o rotentur: rotæ autem curruum, quia &longs;eiunctæ &longs;unt ab earum axe, ita vt &longs;ine illius rotatione ip&longs;æ voluantur, fit vt illæ firmius incedant, nechuc, illucque; nutent, veluti rotæ plan&longs;tri: neque illæ ad ip&longs;um axem offen&longs;ent, quemadmodum i&longs;tæ. 7569 7570 addit aliam rationem, quia currus nimia oneris grauitate premens rotas ip&longs;as ferè &longs;i&longs;tit, quod &longs;cytalis non accidit, cum rotæ ip&longs;arum vnum, & idem cum &longs;uo &longs;int axe. 7571 7572 quæ ratio quantum valeat, ne&longs;cio, nam quamuis rotæ &longs;cytalarum non premantur ab axe, premitur tamen axis ip&longs;arum ab onere, à quo &longs;imiliter &longs;i&longs;ti debe­rent &longs;cytalæ.

7573 7574 Crediderim ego facilius portari magna onera per &longs;cytalas, propter ip&longs;a­rum firmitatem, currus enim ip&longs;orumque rotæ &longs;unt multò debiliores, neque maioribus oneribus &longs;ufficiunt. 7575 7576 Concludit po&longs;tea quæ&longs;tionem dicens, quia igitur &longs;cytalæ ab ip&longs;o onere non ita premuntur quin moueri melius po&longs;&longs;int quàm currus, imò ab ip&longs;o onere iam commoto, ip&longs;æ quoque incitentur, & præterea à potentia per planum infernè, benè &longs;ub&longs;tratum, & complanatum trahantur, fit, vt qua&longs;i in duobus locis ip&longs;arum rotæ impellantur ab onere &longs;upra, & à potentia infra; &longs;icque facilius quam currus ingentia præ&longs;ertim onera vehunt.

7577 7578 De Funda.

7579 7580 QVÆSTIO DVODECIMA.

7581 7582 Non videtur declaratione indigere.

7583 7584 QVÆSTIO DECIMATERTIA

7585 7586 De Iugo, & Succula.

7587 7588

7589 7590 253

7591 7592 Declarandum prius quid &longs;it hoc loco iugum: e&longs;t igitur iugum li­gnum illud cylindricum, quod vulgò dicitur Subbio. 7593 7594 quorum bi­na ponuntur in ea machina textoria, quam vulgò dicunt Telaio, qua&longs;i telarium, eo quod in ip&longs;a telæ texantur. 7595 7596 alteri autem iugo conuoluitur &longs;tamen: alteri verò contexta iam tela &longs;ubinde cum opus e&longs;t cir­cumponitur: quæ duo textores faciunt ip&longs;a iuga conuertendo. 7597 7598 quæ vt faci­lius conuertant, iugis vtrinque in&longs;erunt per bina foramina binos collopes. 7599 7600 qui collopes &longs;unt duo ligna oblonga &longs;atis gracilia vnius vlnæ ferè in longi­tudinem; quibus appræhen&longs;is, motisque; iugum facilè ver&longs;atur. 7601 7602 quanto autem collopes &longs;unt longiores, facilius iugum circumagitur. 7603 7604 cuius cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quia collops ad vectem reducitur, cuius fultura e&longs;t circa medium iugi, pondus verò e&longs;t extima iugi &longs;uperficies è qua telæ, aut &longs;taminis pondus pendet: in altera verò extremitate collopis, quæ extra iugum multum prominet, e&longs;t potentia: ibi enim textoris manus premit, vel trahit. 7605 7606 quando ergò longior e&longs;t collops, ea pars, quæ e&longs;t inter fulturam, & vim, augetur; altera non mu­tata; quia &longs;emper inter fulturam, &longs;eu centrum iugi, & vltimam iugi &longs;uper­ficiem continetur; quanto autem illa hanc &longs;uperar, tantum virium po­tentiæ addi.

7607 7608 Secundò, videndum quid &longs;it &longs;uccula: hanc vulgò Na&longs;pa appellant, ni fal­lor à verbo græco a)gaspa/w, oriunda, quod &longs;ur&longs;um extrahere &longs;ignificat. 7609 7610 cum quo, & voce, & &longs;ignificatione conuenit; e&longs;t enim in&longs;trumentum, quo &longs;æpius architectores in extrahendis &longs;ur&longs;um ruderibus effo&longs;&longs;is vtuntur. 7611 7612 e&longs;t autem compago quædam cylindrica non admodum longa, cuiex vna parte poti&longs;­&longs;imum prominent plures collopes non mobiles, vt in iugo, verum &longs;tabiles, ac cum ip&longs;a &longs;uccula compacti, quibus manu appræhen&longs;is &longs;uccula &longs;upra bi­nos polos ver&longs;atur, eique; interim ductarius funis circumuoluitur, &longs;ecumque &longs;ur&longs;um pondus educit. 7613 7614 cuius imaginem qualcmcunque in&longs;pice. 7615 7616 quærit igitur, cur quanto gracilius fucrit corpus &longs;ucculæ A B, tanto facilius vertitur. 7617 7618 Ratio e&longs;t, quia collops, quemadmodum etiam iugum, reducitur ad vectem,

cuius hypomoclion e&longs;t in medio &longs;ucculæ, &longs;iue in axe ip&longs;ius &longs;ucculæ; potentia verò e&longs;t in &longs;ummitatibus collopum, vt in C, E, F, D, pon­dus verò e&longs;t vbi funis ductarius cum onere pendet è &longs;uccula in &longs;u­perficie nimirum, vt vbi L, quare pars vectis inter axim, & &longs;uperfi­ciem &longs;ucculæ eadem e&longs;t, quæ inter hypomoclium, & pondus. 7619 7620 quanto igitur &longs;ucculæ corpus gracilius fuerit, tanto hæc pars minuetur; & con&longs;e­quenter altera inter hypomoclium, & potentiam productior euadet: eaque propter facilius à motore ver&longs;abitur.

7621 7622 De ligno ad genu fracto.

7623 7624 QVÆSTIO DECIMAQVARTA.

7625 7626 Satis per&longs;e clara videtur.

7627 7628 QVÆSTIO DECIMAQVINTA

7629 7630 De Vmbilicis.

7631 7632

7633 7634 254

7635 7636 Notandum primò, quæ Græcis *krexai, ide&longs;t Crocæ dicuntur, Latinis Vmbilicos appellari; de his enim loquitur Cic. 2. de Oratore, vbi &longs;ic, non audeo dicere de talibus viris, &longs;ed tamen ita narrare &longs;ole­bat Sceuola, conchas, eos, & vmbilicos ad Caietam, & ad Lucri­num legere con&longs;ueui&longs;&longs;e. 7637 7638 7639 7640 hos autem vmbilicos exponunt Grammatici e&longs;&longs;e lapillos paruos, acrotundos, polito&longs;que, de quibus etiam Ari&longs;t. 7641 7642 loquitur. 7643 7644 Quare decipitur Piccolomineus dum negat, nos harum crocarum latinum nomen habere. 7645 7646 Cæterùm, & quæ&longs;tio, & re&longs;pon&longs;io, ex &longs;uperioribus &longs;atis per&longs;picua e&longs;&longs;e videntur.

7647 7648 QVÆSTIO DECIM ASEXTA

7649 7650 De ligno oblongo.

7651 7652

7653 7654 255

7655 7656 Ex appo&longs;ita figura totus huius problematis textus, alioquin &longs;atis cla­rus patebit. 7657 7658 &longs;int duo ligna oblonga, vnum altero longius, & cra&longs;&longs;ius. 7659 7660 in eleuatione maioris, fulcimentum e&longs;t in B, vbi manus altera ferè manens appræhendit; in C, verò, vbi altera manus mouens premit e&longs;t potentia, &longs;iue maius onus. 7661 7662 in A, verò onus ip&longs;ius ligni, deor&longs;um tendens premit, quod nunc e&longs;t in&longs;tar potentiæ motricis, quare A, & C, &longs;unt &longs;ibi in­uicem, & potentiæ, & pondera. 7663 7664 In minori autem ligno, onus ligni in D,

fultura manus in E, potentia alterius ma­nus in F. iam inquir Ari&longs;t. 7665 7666 maius lignum A B C, magis flectitur, quamuis cra&longs;&longs;ius &longs;it, quàm lignum D E F, quod e&longs;t tenuuius, &longs;ed multò breuius; quia in maiori onus ip&longs;ius ligni, quod circa A, deor&longs;um pre­mit longius di&longs;tat ab hypomoclio B, quàm in minori ligno. 7667 7668 Ex quo &longs;equitur iuxta ip&longs;ius principia, vt onus A, facilius lignum mouere, aut inflectere po&longs;&longs;it.

7669 7670 Cæterùm exi&longs;timo, quod &longs;i maioris ligni longitudo ad eiu&longs;dem cra&longs;&longs;itiem haberet eandem proportionem, quàm minoris longitudo ad eiu&longs;­dem cra&longs;&longs;itiem, &longs;icque; vtrumque e&longs;&longs;et ab hypomoclio in eadem ratione diui­&longs;um, fore, vt vtrunque eodem modo inflecteretur, quia haberent pondera eandem rationem ad di&longs;tantias ab hypomoclio, oportet igitur vt &longs;int non analoga, &longs;ed aloga, vt eis præ&longs;ens problema Ari&longs;totelis vnà cum eiu&longs;dem &longs;olutione competat.

7671 7672 QVÆSTIO XVII.

7673 7674 De Cuneo.

7675 7676

7677 7678 256

7679 7680 Cvr paruo cuneo magna finduntur onera, & corporum moles, adeoque valida fit impre&longs;&longs;io? 7681 7682 fortè, quia cuneus duobus vectibus &longs;ibi inui­cem oppo&longs;itis con&longs;tat; quorum vterque, & potentiam mouentem, & hypomoclion, & pondus habet. 7683 7684 hypomoclion autem illud ip&longs;um e&longs;&longs;e ait, quod cuneo diuellitur; hoc autem dicit Ari&longs;tot. quia non agnouit alium, præter primi generis vectem, vt &longs;upra etiam dixi. 7685 7686

7687 7688 Verum &longs;atius e&longs;t cum Guido Vbaldo reducere cuneum ad duos &longs;ecundi generis vectes, quorum fultura &longs;it in cunei apice extremo, pondus verò in­tra vectem, ea nimirum pars ligni, que à cuneo vrgetur, ac diuellitur. 7689 7690 cuneo præterea vires adduntur ex valida mallei percu&longs;&longs;ione; malleus autem ip&longs;e magna vi percutit, quia motus mouet, &longs;eu quia mouens malleum, mouet ip&longs;um etiam dum e&longs;t in ip&longs;a latione, vnde ip&longs;a lationis celeritate malleus fit valentior: hocque; modo paruos cunci vectes maiores con&longs;equuntur vires,

quàm ip&longs;a vectium magnitudo po&longs;tulet. 7691 7692 &longs;it cuneus A B C. lignum autem &longs;cinden­dum D E F G, vectesque duo &longs;int A C, & B C, quorum commune hypomoclion e&longs;t in C, onus autem vectis B C, e&longs;t pars li­gni G, hæc enim ip&longs;i contranititur, atque ab eo expellitur. 7693 7694 potentia verò mouens vectem e&longs;t in malleo, dum &longs;uperius latus cunei A B, percutit. 7695 7696 alter huic auer&longs;us vectis e&longs;t latus A C, cuius fultura e&longs;t C, cadem cum priori, onus propul&longs;atum D, potentia cum altero communis e&longs;t in latere A B, à malleo validè percu&longs;&longs;o. 7697 7698 cunei igitur virtus partim ex vectibus, partim ex percu&longs;&longs;ione con&longs;tat.

7699 7700 QVÆSTIO XVIII.

7701 7702 De Trochlea.

7703 7704

7705 7706 257

7707 7708 Hvius quæ&longs;tionis &longs;en&longs;us, ac verba optimè intelligentur ex &longs;equen­tibus. 7709 7710 Trochlea, vt patet ex &longs;uperioribus Ari&longs;t. 7711 7712 e&longs;t orbiculus in periphæria &longs;triatus, vna cum toto loculumento, cui in&longs;eritur: cuius imaginem ad 8. quæ&longs;t. 7713 7714 exhibui. 7715 7716 Apud Architectores verò trochlea con&longs;tat &longs;altem ex duobus prædictis loculamentis, in quibus &longs;unt orbiculi; & vnus orbiculus e&longs;t &longs;upernè collocatus, alter verò infernè, vt pa­tebit in &longs;equenti figuratione: quod in&longs;trumentum nunc vulgò dicitur Taglia, à nonnullis dicitur etiam Rechamo. 7717 7718 Auxilio huius in&longs;trumenti machinato­res parua vi attollunt ingentia pondera. 7719 7720 communiter autem con&longs;tat ex plu­

ribus orbiculis, qui partim &longs;uperiori loculamento, partim infetiori inditi &longs;unt, per quos orbiculos cer­ta lege circumductus e&longs;t ductarius funis, qui deinde in &longs;ui po&longs;trema parte à potentia tractus omnes illos orbiculos, per quos tran&longs;it circumuoluens inferius loculamentum, cui appen&longs;um e&longs;t pondus, vnà cum ponderc attollit. 7721 7722 figuram &longs;implicis trochleæ, con­&longs;tantis &longs;cilicet ex duobus tantum orbiculis, facilita­tis cau&longs;a exhibebo, in hac enim melius apparebit, qua ratione trochlea ad vectem reducatur. 7723 7724 vnde, & Ari&longs;t. &longs;en&longs;um, quamuis ob&longs;curi&longs;&longs;imum, ac proinde problematis &longs;olutionem optimè percipere licebit. 7725 7726 Sit igitur orbiculus &longs;uperior A, qui in pegmate I K­L D, voluatur circa axem G, &longs;itque; pegma i&longs;tud &longs;upe­rius fixum, & immobile à clauo H, pendens. 7727 7728 Infe­rior orbiculus B, in loculamento O P Q R, circa axem B, conuoluatur: &longs;itque funis ductarius circa hos orbiculos hoc modo circumductus. 7729 7730 primo ca­put funis religetur clauo D, in &longs;uperiori pegmate infixo, hinc demi&longs;&longs;us &longs;ubtus inferiorem rotulam per ip&longs;ius &longs;triam de&longs;cendat per puncta L S, a&longs;cendatque po&longs;tea per M E N, ad &longs;uperiorem rotulam, &longs;upra quam a&longs;cendat per punctum T, de&longs;cendatque; ad V, & inde demittatur ad potentiam F. am &longs;i quepiam po­tentia in F, traxerit funem F V, deor&longs;um, interim partes T, N, E, M, &longs;ur&longs;um attrahentur, & locula­mentum inferius &longs;imul cum appen&longs;o pondere eleua­bitur, manente tamen interim fune prope D, vbi clauo D, e&longs;t religatus, & immobilis. 7731 7732 &longs;ed vbinam hic vectis? 7733 7734 con&longs;idera diametrum M L, inferioris orbiculi, hæc enim ea e&longs;t, quæ vectem gerit. 7735 7736 huius enim extrema L M, à fune tanguntur, & ab eius medio B, onus pender, & grauitat; & quia funis in M, &longs;ur&longs;um trahitur, &longs;ecumque; ex parte illa &longs;ur&longs;um eieuat diametrum L M, erit potentia mouens, & eleuans in M. pondus verò intra vectem ad B, medium vectis; quare fulcimentum erit in reliquo extremo L, vbi funis &longs;u&longs;tinet loculamentum, & vbi diameter, &longs;eu vectis innititur. 7737 7738 quare diameter hæc e&longs;t vectis &longs;ecundi generis expo&longs;iti. 7739 7740 aduerte præterea vectem hunc e&longs;&longs;e mobilem, &longs;imul cum fulcimento, quia dum ex parte M, &longs;ur&longs;um tollitur &longs;imul cum toto orbiculo, ac loculamento, &longs;ub­&longs;equitur etiam alterum extremum L, quod fune fulcitur, & in ip&longs;o fune &longs;ur­&longs;um ver&longs;us D, a&longs;cendit; & hoc modo inferius tignum cum onere tandem ad­&longs;uperius tignum &longs;ublatum erit. 7741 7742 hinc verum dixi&longs;&longs;e Ari&longs;t. 7743 7744 con&longs;tat, trochleam &longs;cilicet idem e&longs;&longs;e, ac vectem. 7745 7746 quod tamen de &longs;olo inferiori orbiculo intelli­gi debet, &longs;uperior enim rotula quamuis vectis fiat, non tamen vires vllas potentiæ tribuit, cum eius hypomoclion &longs;it in medio, quemadmodum &longs;upra ad 8. quæ&longs;t. 7747 7748 expo&longs;ui. 7749 7750 Inferior igitur ille e&longs;t, qui mouenti maximo e&longs;t adiu­mento. 7751 7752 quod &longs;i &longs;cire aueas quantum iuuet, re&longs;pondeo ip&longs;um vires potentiæ duplicare; adeo vt &longs;i quatuor. 7753 7754 v. g. homines erant nece&longs;&longs;arij ad pondus tol­lendum, auxilio huius &longs;implicis trochleæ duo tantum &longs;ufficiant. 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 quod &longs;i ad­dantur duo alij orbiculi, vnus &longs;uperior, alter inferior, rur&longs;us vires duplica­buntur, eritque; vnus tantum homo nece&longs;&longs;arius. 7761 7762 quod &longs;i plures aliæ rotulæ tam &longs;upernè, quàm infernè addantur, vt&longs;olet in maioribus trochleis, quas ve­teres Poly&longs;pa&longs;tos, ide&longs;t multum trahentes dixerunt, augebuntur vires in in­finitum. 7763 7764 quod dixi de virium duplicatione con&longs;tat ex 6. & 7. propo&longs;itione Archimedis de Aequip. 7765 7766 quia enim in vecte no&longs;tro L M, dupla e&longs;t proportio inter L M, & L B, eadem etiam proportio erit inter pondus, & potentiam, quare pondus C, duplum erit potentiæ in M, hoc e&longs;t à minore potentia &longs;ibi &longs;ubdupla &longs;u&longs;tinebitur: & à quauis adhuc quantumcunque maiore eleuabitur.

7767 7768 Qui plura de trochlea de&longs;iderat, adeat Guidi Vbaldi, Mechanica, cuius auxilio fateor me verum &longs;en&longs;um harum Mechanicarum Ari&longs;t. & præ&longs;ertim huius loci enuclea&longs;&longs;e. 7769 7770 quæ &longs;i cum Piccolominei expo&longs;itione contuleris, vide­bis eum nequaquam cognoui&longs;&longs;e, vbi nam vectis in trochlea lateret, eumque tam &longs;uperiorem, quàm inferiorem rotulam æquè vectem facere; in quo etiam Io. Bapti&longs;ta Benedictus pariter erra&longs;&longs;e videtur in &longs;uis &longs;peculationibus, cum inferiores tantummodo vice vectium fungantur, vt probatum e&longs;t. 7771 7772

7773 7774 Atque ex his &longs;atis mihi videtur textus, ac &longs;en&longs;us Ari&longs;t. 7775 7776 illu&longs;trari.

7777 7778 QVÆSTIO XVIIII.

7779 7780 De Securi.

7781 7782

7783 7784 258

7785 7786 Pattim ex &longs;e, partim ex dictis in 17. quæ&longs;t. 7787 7788 &longs;atis clara e&longs;t. 7789 7790 placet au­tem his, quæ de cuneo, & &longs;ecuri dicta &longs;unt, nonnulla ex Guido Vbal­do loco corollarij adijcere, videlicet. 7791 7792 Ad huiu&longs;modi facultatis in­&longs;trumentum ca quoque omnia commodè referri po&longs;&longs;unt, quæ percu&longs;­&longs;ione, &longs;iue impul&longs;u incidunt, diuidunt, perforant, huiu&longs;modique; alia obeunt munera; vt en&longs;es, gladij, mucrones, &longs;ecures, terebræ, & &longs;imilia: &longs;erra quoque ad hoc reducitur, dentes enim percutiunt, cuneique; in&longs;tar exi&longs;tunt.

7793 7794 Additio de veteri Securi, & Bipenne.

7795 7796 Libet etiam huic tractationi de &longs;ecuri nonnulla addere, quæ olim oc­ca&longs;ione ex Proclo accepta in tenebris diu delite&longs;centia in lucem re­&longs;tituimus, &longs;unt autem hæc. 7797 7798 Primò, antiquæ &longs;ecuris, necnon bipen­nis figuram re&longs;tituam. 7799 7800 Secundò, o&longs;tendam angulum &longs;ecuris, qui curuilineus e&longs;t, æqualem e&longs;&longs;e angulo trianguli æquilateri, qui rectilineus e&longs;t. 7801 7802 Proclus igitur in comm. 23. primi Euclidis, &longs;ic ait: o&longs;ten&longs;um fuit ab anti­quis, &longs;cilicet Geometris, quod angulus figuræ illius, quæ &longs;ecuri &longs;imilis e&longs;t, æqualis e&longs;t angulo rectilineo, quippe qui duabus tertijs anguli recti æqualis e&longs;t. 7803 7804 7805 7806 hanc anguli &longs;ecuris affectionem, cum nec ille, nec alij, quod &longs;ciam de­mon&longs;trent, ego paulò po&longs;t demon&longs;trabo. 7807 7808 deinde &longs;ubdit; fit autem huiu&longs;mo­di &longs;ecuralis figura, quæ pelecoides vocatur duobus circulis per centra &longs;e mutuò &longs;ecantibus. 7809 7810 hæc Proclus. 7811 7812 Ex his autem po&longs;tremis verbis de&longs;criptio­nem antiquæ &longs;ecuris, &longs;ic puto eruendam. 7813 7814 Ducatur primo recta A C, quæ

erit in&longs;tar manubrij &longs;ecuris. 7815 7816 de­inde ex centro C, interuallo. 7817 7818 v. g. C B, de&longs;cribatur circulus B F; &longs;i­militer eodem interuallo B D, ex centro D, de&longs;cribatur circulus B E; tandem ex B, centro, atque eodem interuallo ducatur alius circulus D E F C, qui priores duos &longs;ecabit in punctis E F. con&longs;ideremus iam, reliquis circulorum partibus ommi&longs;&longs;is, curuilineam figuram B E F, quam e&longs;&longs;e veteris &longs;ecuris formam ex &longs;ententia Proclinon e&longs;t dubitandum, cum cir­culis &longs;e mutuò per centra &longs;ecantibus con&longs;tituatur, vt vult ip&longs;e, & præterea habeat angulos E F, tantos, quantos ip&longs;e tradit, vt mox patebit; linea au­tem A B C, &longs;ecuris manubrium refert. 7819 7820

7821 7822 Quod autem tam angulus E, quàm angulus F, &longs;int æquales duabus tertijs vnius angulirecti, &longs;iue quod idem e&longs;t angulo trianguli æquilateri, manife­ftum erithoc modo. 7823 7824 De&longs;cribatur iterum &longs;ecuralis figura prædicto modo, &longs;itque ea A B C. ducantur præterea ad &longs;ingulos angulos tres rectæ A B, B C, C A, quæ con&longs;tituunt trianguium æquilaterum A B C, tria enim ip&longs;ius late­

ra &longs;ubtendunt tres arcus æquales A B, B C, C A, &longs;unt enim tres &longs;extantes æqualium circulorum, ut facilè colligi pote&longs;t ex 15. 4. ex quo etiam &longs;e­quitur tres ilias circulorum portiones, quas re­ctè cum &longs;uis arcubus con&longs;tituunt e&longs;&longs;e inuicem æquales, & limiles portiones nimirum A B E, B C D, C A F. hinc pr&ecedil;terea &longs;equitur angulos ip­&longs;arum e&longs;&longs;e inuicem æquales, angulos, v.g. A B E, C B D, mixtos e&longs;&longs;e æquales, quod facilè e&longs;t per imaginatiam &longs;uperpo&longs;itio­nem demon&longs;trare. 7825 7826 7827 7828 cum igitur prædicti duo anguli &longs;int æquales, &longs;itque intet eos medius alius angulus E B C, qui pariter mixtus e&longs;t, &longs;i ip&longs;e addatur tanl angulo C B D, quàm angulo A B E, inuicem æqualibus, erunt duo anguli A B C, rectilineus, & E B D, curuilineus æquales. 7829 7830 ille autem e&longs;t angulus æquilateri, qui æqualis e&longs;t duabus tertijs vnius recti ex corollario 32. primi. 7831 7832 hic verò e&longs;t angulus &longs;ecuris. 7833 7834 e&longs;t igitur angulus &longs;ecuris æqualis duabus ter­tijs vnius recti, vt ait Proclus, quod demon&longs;trandum erat. 7835 7836 quod etiam ma­nife &longs;tum &longs;ignum e&longs;t &longs;ecuris figuram a me re&longs;titutam e&longs;&longs;e illam veterem, de qua idem Proclus loquitur.

7837 7838 Re&longs;tat, vt de antiquæ bipennis etiam figura di&longs;&longs;eramus; quæ nihil aliud erat, quàm duplex &longs;ecuris, &longs;iue &longs;ecuris anceps, qualis e&longs;t præ&longs;ens figura, vt

propterea etiam &longs;æpius bipennis ip­&longs;a &longs;ecuris appelletur. 7839 7840 dicitur enim bipennis, qua&longs;i binis pinnis, quæ &longs;e­cures erant, con&longs;tet, vt & Græcis dixteros dicebatur. 7841 7842 te&longs;te etiam No­nio, illud bipenne e&longs;t, quod vtrinque acutum e&longs;t. 7843 7844 collegi autem vtcunque hanc bipennis figuram ex Simmiæ peruetufti poetæ græci epigrammate, quod Simmiæ &longs;ecuris appellattur. 7845 7846 quod epigramma carminibus loco linearum con&longs;tat, quæ in &longs;ecuris formam con­&longs;tituta &longs;unt.

7847 7848 Sciendum namque e&longs;t Simmiam, poeticam hanc &longs;ecurim concinna&longs;&longs;e in gratiam Epei illius, qui equum Troianum ligneum fuerat architectatus, vt e&longs;t apud Virg. 7849 7850 Et ip&longs;e doli fabricator Epeus. 7851 7852 qui cum &longs;oluendi voti cau&longs;a vellet &longs;ecurim, &longs;iue bipennem, qua in equi Durij molitione v&longs;us fuerat, Mi­neruæ Deæ, quod &longs;ibi in eo opere faciendo auxilio fui&longs;&longs;et, dedicare, eamque; vt Ari&longs;t. 7853 7854 in libello de admirandis audit. 7855 7856 num. 7857 7858 104. narrat, in templo græ­cæ Mineruæ, quod erat in Gargaria Italiæ Regione propè Metapontum, &longs;u&longs;pendere, a præfato Simmia quæ&longs;iuit, vt epigrammate aliquo dedicatio­nem hanc &longs;uam complecteretur. 7859 7860 qui vt illi morem gereret ingenio&longs;æ illius bipennis dedicationem, vt melius imitaretur, &longs;ecuri hac carminum com­plexus e&longs;t. 7861 7862 quæ dedicatio, &longs;iue epigramma, quod adhuc extat, deinceps &longs;e­curis Simmiæ vocitata e&longs;t; ex qua figura bipennis illius, equi Durij fabrica­tricis nobis adhuc magna cum voluptate innotuit. 7863 7864 Porrò gratum, atque ad ea, quæ diximus intelligenda vtile Lectori fore arbitrati &longs;umus, ip&longs;am Sim­miæ bipennem ex operibus Theocriti, quibus addi &longs;olet, huc referre; quam P. Ricardus E&longs;ius de no&longs;tra Societate linguæ græcæ periti&longs;&longs;imus, in hunc modum tran&longs;tulit. 7865 7866 7867 7868 hoc autem ordine legenda e&longs;t: lectio à manubrio incipiat, deinde legatur carmen; forti&longs;&longs;imæ Deæ, quod &longs;ub&longs;e­quatur; dedit Epeus, & &longs;ic in orbem lectio, v&longs;que ad me­dium circumducatur. 7869 7870 hæc &longs;unt, quæ præ&longs;ertim in gratiam eorum, qui &longs;uaui&longs;&longs;imo an­tiquitatis &longs;tudio tenentur, la­tere nolui.

7871 7872 Simmiæ Rhodij Bipennis.

7873 7874 QVÆSTIO XX.

7875 7876 De Statera.

7877 7878

7879 7880 259

7881 7882 Antequam ad textus explicationem accedamus, con&longs;ultius e&longs;&longs;e iu­dico veteris &longs;tateræ figuram, atque de&longs;criptionem præmittere, quàm ex hoc Ari&longs;t. 7883 7884 loco, magna mihi licuit cum delectatione col­ligere: quod etiam antiquitatis &longs;tudio&longs;is pergratum fore non du­bito: atque hinc etiam ineptas, atque ad&longs;cititias textus huius figuras tanquam adulterinas reijcere; inque; earum locum veras re&longs;tituere licebit. 7885 7886 erat igitur

&longs;tatera, quantum ex Ari&longs;t. 7887 7888 conijcio primum ha&longs;ta oblonga, qualis e&longs;t in præ&longs;enti figura A B, ex cuius altero extremo B, pendebat appendicu­lum, quod propriè æquipondium dicitur: ex altera verò extremitate A, lanx vna pendebat; in qua carnes, aliæuè merces ponderabantur: in me­dia denique ha&longs;ta paribus interuallis plures trutinæ, ex quibus &longs;ingulis modo hac, modo illa, prout pondus emptoris po&longs;tulabat &longs;u&longs;pendebatur, atque in­terim tantum mercis lanci imponebatur, donec æquipondio præpondera­ret in æquilibrio. 7889 7890 &longs;ingulæ autem trutinæ ad aliquod determinatum pondus trutinandum, erant con&longs;titutæ, v. g. vna ad &longs;ex libras, altera ad octo, &c. 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 quam diui&longs;ionem, ac fabricam &longs;tateræ non e&longs;t difficilè exhibere, cum ex Ar­chimede propo&longs;. 7897 7898 6. & 7. de æquip. 7899 7900 eadem &longs;it proportio inter pondus mer­cis, & pondus æquipondij, quæ e&longs;t permutatim inter di&longs;tantias vtrinque ab a&longs;&longs;umpta trutina, quæ in trutinando hypomoclij vicem gerit: nam &longs;tatera reducitur ad vectem; pondus erit æquipondium; & merces in lance erit po­tentia mouens: &longs;unt autem in tota &longs;tateræ ha&longs;ta trutinæ plures, hoc enim modo tota fit vniformis quoad pondus. 7901 7902 æquipondium præterea debet ha­bere tantum pondus, quantum e&longs;t in nuda lance, vt &longs;ic tota &longs;tatera &longs;it per &longs;e &longs;ola æquilibrabilis: & præterea debet habere pondus &longs;tatum, a c legitimum, v. g. vnius libræ, aut duarum, aut trium, prout magis trutinandæ merci ido­neum erit, & hoc erit proprium æquipondij pondus. 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 7908 vt autem ex &longs;ingulis trutinis &longs;ingula pondera ponderentur. 7909 7910 &longs;ingulis nota aliqua &longs;culpenda e&longs;t, vt facilè mercatores merces ponderent, quod hac ratione fieri pote&longs;t. 7911 7912 pona­mus æquipondium e&longs;&longs;e 12. librarum. 7913 7914 dico, quod trutina C, dabit in lance pondus mercis 12. librarum, &longs;i ex ea fiat æquilibrium, e&longs;t enim vt A C, ad C B, ita permutatim æquipondium 12. ad mercem; &longs;ed A C, ip&longs;i C B, e&longs;t æqualis, ergò etiam æquipondium 12. erit merci æquale, hoc e&longs;t vtrunque erit, 12. librarum.

7915 7916 Similiter &longs;i &longs;ieret a quilibrium ex trutina D, e&longs;&longs;et vt A D, 3. ad B D, 9. ita 12. ad 36. tandem trutina E, æquilibrante, e&longs;&longs;et vt A E, 9. ad E B, 3. ita 12. ad 4. Si igitur trutina C, notetur 12. numero, trutina D, num. 7917 7918 36. tru­tina E, num. 7919 7920 4. & idem de cæteris: &longs;tatim facilè erit quodlibet pondus per huiu&longs;modi &longs;tateram exhibere. 7921 7922 Vnde videas contrario ab illis modo in no­&longs;tris &longs;tateris æquipondium totam ha&longs;tam percurrere; in illis verò manentè æquipondio trutinam quodammodo per ha&longs;tam moueri.

7923 7924 His præmi&longs;&longs;is ad textus paraphra&longs;im veniamus.

7925 7926 Cur &longs;tatera, qua carnes ponderantur, paruo appendiculo magna truti­nat onera, cum alioquin tota &longs;tatera nihil aliud &longs;it, quàm dimidiata libra, vbi enim onus mercis imponitur vna lanx pendet, quam vnicam &longs;tatera ha­bet; in altera autem parte, vbi libra habet alteram lancem, &longs;tatera nullam habet, &longs;ed &longs;ola &longs;ine lance e&longs;t. 7927 7928 Cau&longs;a igitur e&longs;t, quia &longs;tatera &longs;imul, & libra e&longs;t, & vectis. 7929 7930 libra e&longs;t, quia &longs;partorum, &longs;iue trutinarum quælibet fit veluti cen­trum libræ, inque; altera parte e&longs;t lanx; in altera verò loco lancis ip&longs;um æqui­pondium, quod libræ incumbit, fungiturque; vice alterius lancis, cui &longs;it onus impo&longs;itum; manife&longs;tum enim e&longs;t, quod æquipondium &longs;tateræ tantumdem trahit oneris, quantum e&longs;t illud, quod in altera lance e&longs;t. 7931 7932 eapropter &longs;tatera quodammodo tot libras in &longs;e continet, quot trutinas: quarum vna quæque cum &longs;it intra appendiculum, & lancem, apta e&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e medium, &longs;eu centrum &longs;tateræ, atque adeo etiam libræ; quæ vnam quidem lancem habeat ex vna parte, ex altera verò pro lance æquipondium. 7933 7934 &longs;tatera verò dicitur, quate­nus ex vna parte habet non lancem, &longs;ed perpendiculum. 7935 7936 &longs;ed hoc nihil e&longs;t aliud quàm e&longs;&longs;e plures in vna libras; Cur autem &longs;parta, quæ lanci, &longs;iue ap­pen&longs;o oneri proximiora &longs;unt, maiora &longs;ubleuent onera, cau&longs;a e&longs;t vectis natu­ra, quæ &longs;tateræ ine&longs;t. 7937 7938 e&longs;t enim &longs;tatera vectis, quamuis quodammodo inuer­fus, e&longs;t enim ip&longs;ius fulcimentum trutina ip&longs;a &longs;upernè collocata, pondus ve­rò leuandum e&longs;t ip&longs;a merx, potentia verò appendiculum. 7939 7940 quantò autem pro­ductior fuerit pars vectis à fulcimento ad potentiam, tanto facilius poten­tia mouet, vt in præ&longs;entia accidit. 7941 7942 mouet autem v&longs;que ad æquilibrium; hocque; modo pars illa productior &longs;tateræ, quæ vergit ad æquipondium, facit, vt onus &longs;tateræ impo&longs;itum facilè trutinetur.

7943 7944 QVÆSTIO XXI.

7945 7946 De Dentiforcipe.

7947 7948

7949 7950 260

7951 7952 Cvr Medici facilius dentes extrahunt dentiforcipis onere adiecto, quàm &longs;i &longs;ola manu vtantur? 7953 7954 fortè, quia ex manu facilius dens ela­bitur propter &longs;ui ip&longs;ius lubricitatem, quàm ex forcipe. 7955 7956 Vel etiam, quia digiti propter carnis mollitiem cedentem nequeunt dentem firmiter circumplecti; &longs;errum verò, cum vndique durum æque &longs;it, nec ce­dens, melius dentem comprçhendit. 7957 7958 Aut tandem, quia forceps hæc duos in &longs;e continet contrarios vectes; quorum, vnum tantum e&longs;t hypomoclion,

corum &longs;cilicet connexio; Virtute igitur vectis arctius dentem per&longs;tringunt, atque adeò obtinent, atque hinc etiam facilius commouent. 7959 7960 &longs;it dentiforcip is figura, ex­po&longs;ita, cuius alterum extremum, vbi &longs;unt A, B, e&longs;t illud, quod binis &longs;emicirculis concurrentibus dentem arctè con&longs;tringit, & commouet. 7961 7962 Vectis vnus e&longs;t A G D, alter B G C, communis fultura e&longs;t G, vbi e&longs;t ip&longs;orum decu&longs;&longs;ata connexio; dens loco ponderis e&longs;t; vtroque igitur C, & D, tanquam manubrijs vectium dentem Medici compræhendentes ip­&longs;um facilè commouent: quando autem commotus fuerit, facilius manu, quàm in&longs;trumento extrahitur.

7963 7964 QVÆSTIO XXII.

7965 7966 De Instrumento Nucifrago.

7967 7968

7969 7970 261

7971 7972 Tempore Ari&longs;t. 7973 7974 vt colligitur ex hac quæ&longs;tione, ad frangendas nu­ces peculiare in&longs;trumentum ligneum adhibeant, quod erat in&longs;tar forcipis, ita tamen concinnatum, vt non ad &longs;cindendum, nec ad extrahendum, &longs;ed ad frangendum per compre&longs;&longs;ionem e&longs;&longs;et aptum. 7975 7976 cuius hanc qualemcum que figuram in&longs;pice. 7977 7978 cuius latus inferius A D, fortè alicui fulcimento in plano horizontis, fixum hærebat: alterum verò A C, manu tractabatur, vt &longs;ic expeditæ nucium plurima quantitas breui po&longs;&longs;et confringi. 7979 7980 Credibile e&longs;t nucifragam hanc ad capita F E, habui&longs;&longs;e aliquod impedimentum, ne omninò con&longs;tringeretur, vt nuces frangerentur quidem, non autem comminuerentur. 7981 7982 Cur igitur nuces ab&longs;que ictu facilè confringun­tur hi&longs;ce in&longs;trumentis, quæ ad eum fiunt v&longs;um? 7983 7984 contrarium namque accidere deberet, vtentes enim prædictis in&longs;trumentis, omnibus illis viribus de&longs;ti­tuuntur, quas motio, ac violentia percu&longs;&longs;ionis afferre &longs;olent. 7985 7986 præterea cur ligneo vtuntur, ac proinde leui? 7987 7988 non ne aptius e&longs;&longs;et durum, atque pondero­&longs;um veluti ferreum?

7989 7990 His re&longs;pondendum e&longs;t, nucifragum i&longs;tud in&longs;trumentum reduci ad binos vectes, quemadmodum etiam dentiforcipem. 7991 7992 nuxigitur hoc modo duplici vecte comprimitur. 7993 7994 vecte autem facilè onera quælibet obuiantia diuelluntur. 7995 7996 qui duo vectes vnicum habent hypomoclion ip&longs;am &longs;cilicet connexionem

A. vectes &longs;unt binæ in&longs;trumenti ha&longs;tæ, F A D, E A C. dilatando igitur extrema C D, deducun­tur etiam alia extrema F, E, & impo&longs;ita nuce in hiatu K, quæuis potentia con&longs;tringendo C, D, con&longs;tringet &longs;imul F, E, ip&longs;amque; nucem confrin­get. 7997 7998 quod igitur cum percu&longs;&longs;ione feci&longs;&longs;et pon­dus mallei, id valentiori vectium virtute efficiunt F A D, E A C. quanto au­tem locus nucis K, propinquior fuerit hypomoclio A, tanto celerius confringitur, quia partes vectium A C, A D, tunc à centro A, productiores fiunt, ide&longs;t multò maiores fiunt, quàm &longs;int di&longs;tantiæ inter nucem, & cen­trum A, quod maximè poten­tiam iuuat.

7999 8000 Ex quibus præ&longs;enti quæ&longs;tioni &longs;atisfactum videtur.

8001 8002 QVÆSTIO XXIII.

8003 8004 De Rhombo.

8005 8006

8007 8008 262

8009 8010 Rhombus ex definitione 23. primi Elem. 8011 8012 e&longs;t figura æquilatera qui­

dem, &longs;ed non æquiangula, habet enim binos oppo&longs;itos angulos acutos, & alies binos oppo&longs;itos obtu&longs;os, talis e&longs;t præ­&longs;ens figura A B D C. 8013 8014 In præ&longs;enti porrò quæ&longs;tione &longs;upponitur punctum A, quod e&longs;t vnum extremum in rhombo moueri &longs;uper latus A B, ver&longs;us B, & &longs;i­militer interim æqua velocitate moueri alterum extremum B, &longs;uper idem latus A B_{2} ver&longs;us A, & in­terim dum hæc duo puncta hoc modo &longs;ibi obuiam procedunt, moueri latus totum A B, eadem ve­locitate, ver&longs;us latus C D, ita vt &longs;emper ip&longs;i C D, æquidi&longs;ter, de&longs;cendatque; per latera A C, B D, quo­u&longs;que ip&longs;i C D, congruat.

8015 8016 Horum igitur trium motuum quemadmodum æquæ &longs;unt celeritates, ita etiam &longs;patia, quibus peraguntur, nam puncta duo mouentur in latere A B, ip&longs;um verò A B, mouetur in lateribus A C, & B D, quæ cum priori A B, &longs;unt æqualia.

8017 8018 Aduertendum præterea, quod hac ratione duo puncta A, & B, duabus la­tionibus mouebuntur, &longs;i quidem proprio motu mouentur in ip&longs;o latere A B, & quia latus A B, per quod ip&longs;a incedunt eodem tempore mouetur ver&longs;us C D, &longs;equitur, quod etiam ip&longs;a hoc eodem motu ferantur. 8019 8020 erit igitur ip&longs;o­rum motus ex his duobus mixtus; & quidem ip&longs;ius A, latio erit per longio­rem diametrum A D; ip&longs;ius verò B, per breuiorem B C. 8021 8022 Quare cum pun­ctum A, peruenerit ad D, etiam punctum B, eadem c&ecedil;leritate acce&longs;&longs;erit ad C. maius autem e&longs;t &longs;patium A D, quod confecit A, quam &longs;patium B C, con­fectum a C. 8023 8024 Quærit igitur primò, cur cùm A, & B, mota fmt æquali celeri­rate in vtra que latione, vnum tamen maiorem lineam, quàm alterum per­tran&longs;iuit? 8025 8026 Quærit &longs;ecundò, cur punctum B, confecit lineam B C, quæ mi­nor e&longs;t quam ip&longs;um latus A C, quod in &longs;uo motu conficit latus A B, quando ad D C, acce&longs;&longs;it. 8027 8028 & tamen B, duplici fertur latione; A B, verò vnica; vtrun­que autem in æquali velocitate? 8029 8030 Quod autem punctus A, motu illo de&longs;eri­bat lineam A D, punctus verò B. lineam B C, manife&longs;tum erit hoc modo. 8031 8032 &longs;it v. g. punctum A, motu proprio delatum, v&longs;que ad punctum E, medium late­ris A B, erit interim totum latus A B, tran&longs;latum vbi e&longs;t F G, hoc e&longs;t, ad &longs;ui itineris dimidium, quia horum motus ponuntur æquales: hoc autem motu ip&longs;um punctum A, erit nece&longs;&longs;ariò in K, hoc e&longs;t in linea A D, vt dicebamus. 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 8038 Similiter in fine vtriu&longs;que motus, A, erit in B, proprio motu, &longs;ed alieno in D, extremo &longs;cilicet lineæ A D. &longs;imili ratione o&longs;tendi pote&longs;t de ip&longs;o B, qui cum æqua velocitate moueatur, ac punctum A, quando A erit in E; B, pariter illi occurret in E, proprio motu: &longs;ed alieno à latere B A, proueniente erit in K, vbi etiam ob alterum motum erit A: erit igitur B, in linea B C, vt vo­lebamus. 8039 8040 à quo po&longs;tea di&longs;cedens ver&longs;us C, motu pariter compo&longs;ito &longs;i&longs;titur tandem in C, extremo lineæ pariter B C. eodem ergo tempore duo rhombi extrema puncta æquè velocia, &longs;ecundum vtramque lationem mota, interual­la nequaquam æqualia confecerunt, &longs;ed A, maius, nimirum A D; B, verò minus nimirum B C.

8041 8042 Ex quibus etiam &longs;ecundæ quæ&longs;tionis explicatio, & dubitandi ratio pate­bit: nam cum in rhombo duo &longs;int obtu&longs;i anguli B, & C, & duo acuti A, & D, punctus ille, qui ab obtu&longs;o angulo B, recedit, fertur duabus lationibus inui­cem ferè contrarijs, propria enim tendit &longs;ur&longs;um ad A, aliena verò deor&longs;um trahitur ver&longs;us D; cau&longs;a huius contrarietatis &longs;unt lineæ D B, B A, obtu&longs;um angulum continentes, quæ à prædicto angulo in contrarias partes &longs;eparan­tur: per has autem lineas fiunt prædicti motus, vnde ip&longs;i quoque contrarij &longs;int nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t: & propterea &longs;e mutuò impediunt: atque hinc nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t pun­ctum B, motu compofito hinc inhibito minus interuallum B C, pertran&longs;ire. 8043 8044 At verò punctum A, quia ab acuto angulo de&longs;cendit, vtraque latione fertur deor&longs;um, quæ lationes &longs;e mutuò iuuant, faciuntque; vt A, maius, quamuis eo­dem tempore, & eadem celeritate peragret &longs;patium A D. nam punctum A, &longs;ua &longs;pontè de&longs;cendit per latus A B, & ab ip&longs;o latere A B, quod fertur ad C D, pariter deor&longs;um vehitur. 8045 8046 nihil igitur mirum fit, &longs;i A, maius interuallum A D, quam B C, percurrat. 8047 8048 cau&longs;a verò huius motuum concordiæ e&longs;t angulus acu­tus A, ob quem latera rhombi magis inuicem approximantur, redduntque longiorem A D, quàm B C: è contrariò autem, quo obtu&longs;iores &longs;unt anguli B, C, minorem faciunt ip&longs;am B C, latera enim &longs;emper magis ad rectam li­neam accedunt; donec tandem omni angulo euane&longs;cente in directum con­&longs;tituantur; quo ca&longs;u congruerent cum linea A D, rhombusque; ip&longs;e amplius nullus e&longs;&longs;et.

8049 8050 Ex his igitur &longs;equitur, quod punctum A, ab angulo A, acuto di&longs;cedens, duobus feratur motibus &longs;imilibus ad eandem partem tendentibus, & quò acutiores &longs;unt anguli, eò magis tendent ad eandem partem; & melius &longs;e mutuò inuabunt. 8051 8052 B, autem vice ver&longs;a, quoniam quanto obtu&longs;ior e&longs;t angulus B, tanto magis latera illius diuaricantur; duæ etiam motiones, quibus B, progreditur in diuer&longs;as partes tendent; fiunt enim per illa latera; & tanto etiam magis &longs;ibi contrariæ erunt; magisque; &longs;ibi mutuò impedimento erunt. 8053 8054 & propterea punctum B, minus interuallum, quale e&longs;t B C, percurret, quan­do A, maius A D, percurrit.

8055 8056 Ad &longs;ecundam verò quæ&longs;tionis partem, re&longs;pondeo con&longs;iderandum e&longs;&longs;e latus B A, moueri vnico motu ad D C, quare à nullo impedi­tur, vnde nihil mirum videri debet, quòd ip&longs;um vnica latione maius conficiat &longs;pacium quàm B, quod quamuis duplici pellatur motu, vnus tamen ab altero inhibetur.

8057 8058 QVÆSTIO XXIIII.

8059 8060 De duobus circulis.

8061 8062

8063 8064 263

8065 8066 Vnde e&longs;t, quod &longs;i duo circuli, vnus altero maior, cirea idem cen­trum po&longs;iti, volutentur, ita vt etiam centrum feratur, eo &longs;cilicet modo, quo plau&longs;trorum rotæ &longs;olent, &longs;ecundum æqualem lineam conuoluuntur, &longs;iue æquale &longs;patium conficiunt: &longs;i verò &longs;eor&longs;um &longs;eparati quilibet eodem modo volutetur, non æquale &longs;patium pertran&longs;ibunt, &longs;ed maior maiorem lineam, quàm minor; idque; ea proportione, quam inui­cem eorum circunferentiæ obtinent, cum in hac veluti rotæ conuolutione, circunferentia tota &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;iuè decur&longs;o &longs;patio adaptetur, ita vt tanta &longs;it de­cur&longs;a linea, quanta e&longs;t rotæ circunferentia? 8067 8068 Quin etiam eodem exi&longs;tente vtriu&longs;que centro, aliquando confectum &longs;patium ab vtroque tantum e&longs;t, quan­tum minor circulus &longs;olus, &longs;ecundum &longs;uam periphæriam reuolutus perfeci&longs;­&longs;et; quandoque; verò quantum maior &longs;olus ab&longs;olui&longs;&longs;et. 8069 8070 Quod autem maior &longs;olus in &longs;ua reuolutione maiorem lineam de&longs;cribat, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t hinc, quia &longs;en&longs;u patet maiorem circunferentiam in maiori circulo &longs;ubtendere angulum, qui fit à diametris in centro; minorem verò circunferentiam &longs;ubtendere eundem angulum in minori orbe, vt etiam in 8. quæ&longs;t. 8071 8072 dictum e&longs;t: eandem igitur, vt proximè dixi habebunt etiam proportionem illæ lineæ, quæ à &longs;ingulis &longs;eor&longs;um orbibus reuolutis de&longs;ignabuntur. 8073 8074 Quod præterea &longs;e­cundum æqualem conuoluuntur, quando circa idem po&longs;iti fuerint centrum, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, ita tamen, vt aliquando ambæ æquales &longs;int ei, &longs;ecundum quam &longs;olus maior conuolueretur; aliquando verò &longs;ecundum quam minor.

&longs;it enim circulus maior quidem vbi D F C, minor verò vbi E G B, vtrique autem centrum A, linea, &longs;ecundum quam quadrans F C, maioris per &longs;e rotaretur, &longs;it F L. linea verò, &longs;ecun­dum quam quadrans G B, minoris &longs;e­iuncti à maiori, volutaretur &longs;it G K, quæ æqualis e&longs;t dicto quadranti G B, &longs;icut etiam F I, æqualis e&longs;t quadran­ti F C. &longs;i quis igitur impellat mino­rem orbem mouens &longs;imul commune centrum A, cui maior e&longs;t circumpo­&longs;itus, donec diameter A B, perpendicularis &longs;it lineæ G K, in puncto K. tunc pariter diameter maioris A C, erit perpendicularis lineæ F L, in puncto L. 8075 8076 G K, autem, & F L, nece&longs;&longs;ariò erunt æquales per 34. primi, æquales igitur lineas hoc modo peragrarunt inæquales circunferentiæ, &longs;iue quadrantes G B, F C. &longs;i autem quadrantes hoc præ&longs;tant, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, quod & toti ambitus idem efficiunt, quare quando tota periphæria G B E G, fuerit re­uoluta etiam tota F C D F, &longs;uum orbem completum habebit. 8077 8078 &longs;imiliter &longs;i ma­iorem quis mouerit, cui minor &longs;it annexus eodem exi&longs;tente centro, &longs;imul ac diameter A C, erit perpendicularis ad F I, in puncto I, erit etiam A B, per­pendicularis ip&longs;i G M, in M; &longs;unt autem G M, & F I, æquales, quare quan­do F C, quadrans maioris pertran&longs;iuerit rectam F C, etiam C B, quadrans minoris tran&longs;actam habebit illi parem G M. hoc autem accidit nulla inter­cedente mora in vllo ip&longs;orum: quando enim mouetur maior, nihil ce&longs;&longs;at minor: & quando minor agitur, maior nunquam quie&longs;cit. 8079 8080 quod &longs;i hoc acci­dit quartæ parti circulorum, idem, & totis accidit periphærijs. 8081 8082 vbi in&longs;uper illud etiam mirum, centrum nimirum ip&longs;orum eadem celeritate motum, ac vnica &longs;emper exi&longs;tenti latione, modo maius, modo minus &longs;patium per­ficere; idem verò eadem velocitate latum, æquale &longs;emper deberet interual­lum tran&longs;ilire. 8083 8084 & tamen in præ&longs;entia vtrouis modo moueas eadem pernici­tate, modò maius, modò minus &longs;patium pertran&longs;ibit.

8085 8086 Huius quæ&longs;tionis enodandæ cau&longs;a, &longs;upponendum primò e&longs;t, quod eadem, &longs;eu æqualis potentia, hanc quidem magnitudinem tardius, illam verò citius mouere pote&longs;t. 8087 8088 &longs;i enim fuerit quippiam, quod à &longs;eip&longs;o moueri minimè ap­tum &longs;it; & aliud, quod à &longs;e ip&longs;o moueri aptum &longs;it; qui hoc &longs;imul cum illo coniunctum mouerit, tardius mouebit, quàm &longs;i ip&longs;um &longs;olum moueret. 8089 8090 & &longs;i quid moueatur, quod aptum &longs;it ex &longs;e moueri, verumtamen in eo motu nihil ex &longs;e moueatur, perinde e&longs;t, ac &longs;i minimè aptum &longs;it ad motum, & proinde tardius mouebitur; nec fieri poterit, vt plu&longs;quam mouens moueatur, cum nihil innata motione vtatur. 8091 8092 Si quis igitur minorem circulum, quem mo­do B, appello, mouerit &longs;upra &longs;uam circunferentiam, cui annexus &longs;it maior, quem modo appello A, &longs;ic quidem maior mouebitur, non autem ex &longs;e, &longs;ed &longs;olum quatenus à minori feretur, vnde tantum pertran&longs;ibit de recta F L, quantum à minori fuerit impul&longs;us; tantum autem e&longs;t impul&longs;us, quantum minor e&longs;t motus; quare æqualem cum illo viam confecit. 8093 8094 &longs;i igitur minor fe­cit pedalem G K, maior confecit etiam pedalem F L, quia maior nihil de proprio motu addidit, &longs;ed &longs;olum motione minoris e&longs;t tran&longs;latus. 8095 8096 &longs;imiliter &longs;i quis rotet maiorem &longs;upra &longs;uam circunferentiam annexo minori, tantum minor mouebitur, quantum à maiori deportabitur, quia nihil ex &longs;e impel­litur. 8097 8098 Verum &longs;i &longs;eor&longs;um ambo ex &longs;e &longs;ecundum &longs;uos ambitus moueantur, &longs;iue citò, &longs;iue tardè, eadem etiam velocitate perficiant integram &longs;uæ periphæ­riæ volutationem, maior maius, minor verò minus conficiet &longs;patium.

8099 8100 Sed fortè augebitur difficultas con&longs;ideranti, quod prædicti circuli &longs;unz circa idem centrum, & circa illud mouentur. 8101 8102 moueri autem circulum cir­ca &longs;uum centrum, e&longs;t moueri &longs;ecundum &longs;uum naturalem motum, ad quem circuli ex &longs;e &longs;unt apti. 8103 8104 &longs;i verò vnus moueretur circa &longs;uum centrum, alter ve­rò non, vt quando alter alteri non e&longs;t circa idem centrum compactus, & ab altero mouetur, vbi manife&longs;tè apparet, quod fertur omninò ab illo, & in il­la latione non circumuertitur circa proprium centrum, quare tunc minimè mirum e&longs;t, &longs;i neque plus, neque minus &longs;patium conficiat, quàm ab altero de­portetur, cui quoquo modo adiacet, aut appen&longs;us e&longs;t extra illius centrum.

8105 8106 Huic obiectioni re&longs;pondendum e&longs;t, quod quamuis prædicti orbes &longs;int con­centrici, nihilominus non mouentur ambo &longs;uamet motione, &longs;ed ille, qui ab alio fertur mouetur &longs;ecundum motionem illam, tanquam &longs;i nullam ad eam haberet aptitudinem; quamuis enim po&longs;lit moueri circa centrum illud A, propria natura, in præ&longs;enti tamen ca&longs;u minimè vtitur illa aptitudine; & propterea motus debet moueri, quantum mouens, nec plus, nec minus.

8107 8108 Quòd autem &longs;pectat ad id, quod initio dicebatur de eodem centro, & de mouente eadem velocitate, & de æquali ab inæqualibus orbibus pertran&longs;i­ta linea, &longs;ubeft huic dubitationi paralogi&longs;mus: quamuis enim &longs;it idem am­borum centrum, e&longs;t tamen vnius centrum per &longs;e in motione, alteri verò per accidens, veluti per accidens e&longs;t eundem virum e&longs;&longs;e mu&longs;icum, & album. 8109 8110 ille enim circulus, qui mouet alterum, obtinet illud centrum per &longs;e, & ex natu­ra &longs;ua; alter verò, qui mouetur, habet illud idem per accidens, quia non vtitur illo tanquam centro. 8111 8112 non igitur circa idem &longs;impliciter centrum fit horum motus, &longs;ed alio modo vnus, alio modo alter, vnde & reliquis dubi­tationibus facilè &longs;atisfiet.

8113 8114 QVÆSTIO XXV.

8115 8116 De Lecto

8117 8118

8119 8120 264

8121 8122 Cvr lectulorum &longs;pondas faciunt &longs;ecundum duplam proportionem, hoc e&longs;t longiorem &longs;pondam duplo longiorem, quàm &longs;it altera: il­lam enim &longs;ex pedum, vel paulò plus, hanc verò trium? 8123 8124 præterea cur re&longs;tes, quibus culcitræ &longs;u&longs;tinentur non extendunt per diame­trum, &longs;ed per tran&longs;uer&longs;um?

8125 8126 Ad primum re&longs;pondetur ideò facere &longs;pondas in dup la ratione, vt &longs;int hu­mano corpori proportionatæ, &longs;ic enim lecti longitudinem habebunt qua­tuor cubitorum, latitudinem verò duorum, in tali enim &longs;patio commo­dè cubamus.

8127 8128 Ad &longs;ecundum verò dicendum extendi illos funes non per diametrum, &longs;ed ex oppo&longs;ito, quia hoc modo ligna ip&longs;ius lecti minus di&longs;trahuntur: facilè enim ex natura &longs;ua ligna hæc ab inuicem &longs;ecundum longum &longs;eparantur; ar­ctius autem ductis funibus per tran&longs;uer&longs;um, quàm per diametrum inuicem con&longs;tringuntur: præterea, quia &longs;ic etiam funes minus laborant, cum &longs;int eo­rum ductus breuiores; & quia debent &longs;u&longs;tinere onus ftragulorum, atque cul­cìtrarum, &longs;ic certè ex hoc onere minus laborabunt &longs;i tran&longs;uer&longs;im, quàm &longs;i diametraliter &longs;ubtendantur.

8129 8130 Tertia demum ratio e&longs;t, quia hac ratione minus re&longs;tium ab&longs;umitur, quæ

vt benè intelligatur, de&longs;eriba­tur lectuli figura A F G K, & bifariam diuidatur latus F G, in B. & quia tota F G, dupla e&longs;t ip&longs;ius A F, erit dimidium F B, æquale ip&longs;i A F. & propte­rea tot erunt foramina, quibus funes immittuntur in F B, quot in A F. extendunt autem funem hoc modo incipiunt ab A, & ducunt ad B, po&longs;tea per C, re­nertuntur ad D; hinc flectunt per H, v&longs;que ad E, & per G, angulum iterum de&longs;cendunt ad M, à quo recta tendunt in F, hinc per 2. deducunt ad 3. à quo foramine, per foramen 4. reflexum faciunt ad 5. à quo iterum per B, de&longs;cen­dunt ad angulum K, ibique; alterum funis extremum de&longs;init: hocque; modo duo anguli A, & K, re&longs;tis habent capita, & re&longs;tes exten&longs;æ &longs;unt non diametrali­ter, &longs;ed tran&longs;uer&longs;im.

8131 8132 Notandum autem, quod re&longs;tes æquales &longs;unt cum &longs;uis curuaturis. 8133 8134 v. g. re­&longs;tis A B, cum &longs;ua curuatura B C, æqualis e&longs;t re&longs;ti C D, vnà cum eius curua­tura D H, & aliæ eodem modo &longs;e habent, quia eadem demon&longs;tratio omni­bus accommodari pote&longs;t: quia enim figura A B G M, parallelogrammum e&longs;t, æqualia enim &longs;unt latera B G, A M, & quot foramina &longs;unt in vno, tot etiam &longs;unt in altero, eaque; inuicem æquidi&longs;tant, &longs;equitur omnes re&longs;tes e&longs;&longs;e parallelas, & æquales, per 33, primi. 8135 8136 8137 8138 8139 8140 ex qua etiam &longs;cquitur prædictas cu­ruaturas, B C, D H, E G, e&longs;&longs;e æquales. 8141 8142 quare manife&longs;tum e&longs;t in dimidio le­ctulo tot e&longs;&longs;e re&longs;tes æquales re&longs;ti A B, quot &longs;unt foramina in dimidio latere B G, vel in dimidio F B, hoc e&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e quatuor. 8143 8144 porrò oportet quantitatem harum omnium re&longs;tium per&longs;crutari, vt eam cum quantitate re&longs;tium diame­traliter exten&longs;arum conferamus, quod geometricè hoc modo a&longs;&longs;eque mur: triangulum enim B G K, rectangulum e&longs;t, ergò per 47. primi, quadrata la­terum B G, G K, æqualia &longs;unt quadrato lineæ B K: latus B G, e&longs;t trium pe­dum, quemadmodum etiam latus G K quadratus autem numerus ternarij e&longs;t 9. ergo duo quadrati numeri 9. &longs;iue 18. æquales &longs;unt quadrato lineæ B K, ergò linea B K, e&longs;t radix quadrata numeri 18. quæ radix non pote&longs;t exactè in numeris repræ&longs;entari, e&longs;t enim, vt aiunt, radix &longs;urda. 8145 8146 verumtamen per radicum extractionem, atque approximationem ea poni pote&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e 41/4. ide&longs;t quatuor pedum cum vna quarta. 8147 8148 cum igitur in toto lecto &longs;int huiu&longs;modi octo re&longs;tes, erit omnium &longs;umma pedum 34. ferè. 8149 8150 &longs;i autem &longs;eeundum diame­trum extendantur re&longs;tes, vti factum e&longs;t in lectulo A B C D, neutiquam re­&longs;tes omnes &longs;imul &longs;uperiori quantitati adæquabuntur, &longs;ed illam longè &longs;upe­

rabunt. 8151 8152 Sit igitur lectus A B­C D, in quo diametraliter du­ctæ &longs;int re&longs;tes B D, E H, & re­liquæ, vt in figura. 8153 8154 harû quan­titas &longs;i per 47. primi, & per ra­dicis quadratæ extractionem inueniatur, erit &longs;umma earum pedum quadraginta cum dimi­dio; quæ quantitas præcedenti maior e&longs;t &longs;ex pedibus cum di­midio.

8155 8156 Atque hic e&longs;t &longs;en&longs;us Ari&longs;t. 8157 8158 quamuis tex. ip&longs;ius propter nimiam tam in græ­cis, quàm in latinis codicibus corruptionem, totus re&longs;titui nequiuerit. 8159 8160

8161 8162 QVÆSTIO XXVI.

8163 8164 De ligno humeris gestato.

8165 8166

8167 8168 265

8169 8170 Cvr difficilius e&longs;t longa ligna ab extremo &longs;uper humeros ferre, quàm &longs;ecundum medium, cùm tamen vtroque modo &longs;it &longs;emper idem pon­dus? 8171 8172 An quia dum fertur lignum &longs;uper humeros ab altero extre­mo, alterum extremum vibratur, & agitatur, quæ agitario ip&longs;ius lationem impedit? 8173 8174 An quia licet nihil inflectatur ob agitationem, neque ma­gnam habeat longitudinem, difficilius tamen ab extremo fertur, quoniam facilius ex medio eleuatur, quàm ab extremo, & quia latio e&longs;t qua&longs;i quæ­dam continua eleuatio, propterea etiam difficilius &longs;ic portatur? 8175 8176 cau&longs;a au­tem cur facilius ex medio eleuetur e&longs;t, quia hoc modo totum lignum fit ve­ctis, cuius hypomoclion e&longs;t in medio, vbi is, qui eleuat, tenet aut fert: ex­trema autem &longs;ibi mutuò æqueponderant, ita vt ab&longs;que vllo alio auxilio, â tan­ta vi, quantum e&longs;t totum ligni pondus &longs;u&longs;tineatur; quod &longs;i ab extremo ele­uetur non &longs;ufficit amplius prædicta vis, &longs;ed opus erit maiori, quia non &longs;o­lum oportebit illud eleuare, &longs;ed præterea etiam illud in æquihbrio con&longs;ti­tuere, & con&longs;eruare. 8177 8178 pondus enim totius ligni vergit ferè ad alteram ligni medietatem, quæ ab hypomoclio productior cuadit, quapropter ad onus i&longs;tud æquilibrandum, opus e&longs;t alia potentia in altero extremo. 8179 8180 &longs;it lignum

A B, &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;um ex medio C. hoc modo lignum ponderi­bus libratum &longs;uis manet in æquilibrio, pote&longs;tque à &longs;ola potentia illud eleuante etiam deferri: quia A, & B, extrema &longs;e mutuò &longs;u&longs;ti­
nent. 8181 8182 quod &longs;i non ex medio eleuaretur, &longs;ed ab extremo, vt in &longs;ecunda figura, eleuans potentia ex C, æqualis oportet, vt &longs;it præcedenti; &longs;ed præterea opus e&longs;t alia vi, quæ in B, æquiponderet alteri extremo A, quod magis grauitat, quo ab C, longius fuerit; & hoc modo in æquilibrio con&longs;titutum, & con&longs;eruatum poterit non &longs;olum eleuari, &longs;ed etiam circumferri.

8183 8184 QVÆSTIO XXVII.

8185 8186 De Gestatis &longs;uper humerum.

8187 8188

8189 8190 266

8191 8192 Cvr &longs;i valdè procerum &longs;uerit idem pondus difficilius &longs;uper humeros ge&longs;tatur, etiam &longs;i ex medio illud feratur, quàm &longs;i breuius &longs;it? 8193 8194 quod enim dudum dictum e&longs;t cau&longs;a non e&longs;t, &longs;ed vibratio, & &longs;uccu&longs;&longs;atio ligni nunc e&longs;t: quando enim ab humero productius fuerit, magis vibrantur extrema, quam ob rem contingit portantem difficilius ge&longs;tare. 8195 8196 vibrationis autem cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quoniam ab eadem vi moueute magis extrema huc illuc transferuntur, quanto procerius fuerit lignum, quia tunc maior fit di&longs;tantià à centro, &longs;eu hypomoclio, quod modo e&longs;t humerus ip&longs;e. 8197 8198 &longs;it vt in prima præcedentis quæ&longs;tionis figura, humerus vbi A. di&longs;tantiæ autem ab ip&longs;o centro &longs;unt A B, A C, quod autem maior di&longs;tantia; faciliorem reddat motum o&longs;ten&longs;um e&longs;t initio huius operis.

8199 8200 QVÆSTIO XXVIII.

8201 8202 De Tollenone.

8203 8204

8205 8206 267

8207 8208 In&longs;trumentum i&longs;tud, quod græca voce Leonicus interpres Celonia vo­cat, latinis dicitur Tolleno, à tollendo; quod etiam manife&longs;tum e&longs;t ex Fe&longs;to, qui ait, Tolleno e&longs;t genus machinæ, quo hauritur aqua in al­teram partem prægrauante pondere; quæ tollenonis de&longs;criptio om­ninò machinæ præ&longs;entis quæ&longs;tionis competit. 8209 8210 Hi&longs;pani Telonam fortè a tol­lenone nuncupant. 8211 8212 E&longs;t autem tolleno in&longs;trumentum hauriendæ è puteo aquæ idoneum, quo ru&longs;tici pa&longs;&longs;im vtuntur: idque; iuxta puteos &longs;tabile, ac firmum con&longs;truunt, quale à figura &longs;equenti refertur. 8213 8214 vbi puteus F, tolleno con&longs;tat

erecto tigno D C, & tran&longs;­uer&longs;a ha&longs;ta A C B, vnà cum fune B E, & hydria E. ap­ponitur præterea onus &longs;a­tis graue ad partem A, quale e&longs;t G. ha&longs;ta porrò A B, ve­luti vectis circa punctum C, tanquam hypomoclion, &longs;usque; deque; agitur, à poten­tia funem B E, trahente. 8215 8216 &longs;ed iam textus exponatur.

8217 8218 Cur iuxta puteos tolle­nones faciunt eo, quo vi­&longs;untur modo, ligno enim tran&longs;uer&longs;o A B, adiungunt onus plumbi G, cum alio­quin vas ip&longs;um E, & vacuum, & plenum pondus habeat: cur inquam, vt fa­cilius moueant tollenonem, tollenonis oneri onus addunt G? 8219 8220 An quoniam cùm opus hauriendi diuidatur in duo, in intingendi nimirum, & &longs;ur&longs;um tra­hendi tempora: accidit quidem ab&longs;que plumbi onere facilius intingere, quia tunc vas e&longs;t vacuum: at verò &longs;ur&longs;um vas deinde plenum trahere, laborio­&longs;ius erit. 8221 8222 &longs;i verò addatur onus G, tunc quidem paulò difficilius intingemus, &longs;ed tamen vas plenum po&longs;tea multò facilius, quod opus, & labor e&longs;t, &longs;ur&longs;um educemus: operæpretium igitur e&longs;t, onus illud plumbi, aut lapidis adiun­gere in extremo A, quia &longs;ic pondus illud tanquam quædam potentia vecte A B, vtens &longs;ur&longs;um hydriam plenam rapiet, hacque; ratione nos labore leua­bit, totumque; hauriendi opus demi&longs;&longs;ione, atque eleuatione con&longs;tans, alleuabit,

8223 8224 QVÆSTIO XXVIIII.

8225 8226 De onere phalanga gestato.

8227 8228

8229 8230 268

8231 8232 Cvr quando &longs;uper ligno, aut huiu&longs;modi quopiam duo portauerint homines æquale pondus, non &longs;imiliter grauantur, ni&longs;i quando pon­dus in medio eorum fuerit; &longs;ed magis ille premitur, cui onus vici­nius fuerit? 8233 8234 An quia lignum illud vectis efficitur, cuius hypomo­clion e&longs;t vbi pondus ge&longs;tatum &longs;u&longs;penditur; ge&longs;tantium autem oneri proxi­mior gerit vicem illius, quod vecte mouetur, remotior verò e&longs;t potentia vecte mouens. 8235 8236 quanto igitur plus di&longs;tat ab hypomoclio, &longs;eu ge&longs;tato ponde­re, tanto facilius mouet, hoc e&longs;t, alterum magis deor&longs;um premit, contra­nitente nimirum ge&longs;tato onere tanquam hypomoclio. 8237 8238 &longs;i autem in medio fue­rit pondus, nihilo magis alter ge&longs;tantium fit id, quod vecte mouetur, quàm alter; neque magis mouet: &longs;ed eodem modo alter alteri fit pondus.

8239 8240 Cæterum &longs;ciendum huiu&longs;modi lignum, quo tran&longs;uer&longs;o onera deportantur dici à latinis phalangam, vnde etiam verbum phalangare deducitur, quod huiu&longs;modi ge&longs;tationem &longs;ignificat; e&longs;tque; Vitruuio v&longs;itatum, & Afranio, qui ait, capream vnam &longs;emilaceram quaterni &longs;imul phalangabant.

8241 8242 QVÆSTIO XXX.

8243 8244 De &longs;urgente à &longs;eßione.

8245 8246

8247 8248 269

8249 8250 Cvm &longs;edemus, præcipuè &longs;i commodè &longs;edeamus, &longs;olemus duos angu­los rectos facere, vnum quidem, quem facit thorax cum femore; alterum quem facit femur cum crure, vt in figura thorax &longs;it A B,

femur B C, crus C D, anguli duo recti &longs;unt B, & C. 8251 8252 Quærit igitur, cur quando &longs;urgere volumus angu­los ho&longs;ce rectos in acutos commutamus, nam crus re­trahimus &longs;ub femur ad acutum angulum, v. g. ad po&longs;itio­nem C F. fitque; acutus angulus B C F. &longs;imiliter thoracem femori aptamus ad acutum angulum E B C, alioquin &longs;ur­gere non valemus? 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 An quia id, quod æquale e&longs;t, quietis vbique e&longs;t cau&longs;a, rectus autem angulus e&longs;t angulus æquali­tatis, atque &longs;tationis? 8259 8260 quæcunque enim angulis rectis con­&longs;tant, vt quadratum, vt cubus, quieti, ac &longs;tationi &longs;unt idonea, vt propterea Pytagorei dicerent terram e&longs;&longs;e cubicam, propten ip­&longs;ius immobilitatem. 8261 8262 e&longs;t autem angulus rectus, angulus æqualitatis, quia omnes anguli recti &longs;unt inuicem æquales, vel quia linea illa, quæ angulum rectum facit e&longs;t perpendicularis alteri lineæ, cui incumbit, æqualiterque; in vtramque partem inclinata e&longs;t: quapropter fit, vt quæcunque con&longs;tituta &longs;int &longs;uper &longs;uperficiem terræ ad angulos rectos non cadant, &longs;ed racta maneant. 8263 8264 pariter quæcunque ad angulos rectos pauimento incumbunt, non &longs;olum, quia cum illo faciant angulos rectos, &longs;ed etiam, quia &longs;imul faciunt cum &longs;uperficie terræ perpendiculum. 8265 8266 An quia qui &longs;urgit fit rectus; rectus autem manens, oporter, vt &longs;it &longs;uperficiei terræ perpendicularis. 8267 8268 debet igitur e&longs;&longs;e &longs;ecundum eandem rectitudinem, ide&longs;t caput &longs;upra thoracem, thorax verò &longs;upra femo­ra, femora verò &longs;upra crura in eadem rectitudine, quæ horizonti perpendi­culariter in&longs;i&longs;tat: quando autem &longs;edemus thorax, & crura, non &longs;unt in ea­dem linea horizonti perpendiculariter erecta, quapropter nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t pedes retrahere, caput autem reclinare, vt &longs;ic in eadem recta linea horizonti per­pendiculariter con&longs;tituantur, hocque; modo a&longs;&longs;urgere erit po&longs;&longs;ibile.

8269 8270

8271 8272 270

8273 8274 Reliquæ quæ&longs;tiones ad Phy&longs;icum &longs;pectant. 8275 8276 In 33. aperit propriam &longs;en­tentiam de motu proiectorum.

8277 8278 In 35. & vltima de vortice quamuis vide atur mathematicam &longs;apere, e&longs;t tamen phy&longs;ica. 8279 8280 Eius autem re&longs;olutiones tres ab Ari&longs;t. 8281 8282 allatas, fal&longs;as e&longs;&longs;e &longs;u&longs;picor; experientia enim docet, quod &longs;i quippiam ponatur &longs;upra rotam figuli, id non ad centrum, &longs;ed extra rotam proijcitur. 8283 8284 &longs;ed cau&longs;a e&longs;t, quia in vortice aqua ip &longs;a &longs;piratim circumcurrens tandem in centrum, vbi demer­gitur de&longs;cendit; nece&longs;&longs;e igitur e&longs;t, vt etiam ea, quæ in ip&longs;a &longs;unt, &longs;imul cum illa ad centrum per plures conuolutiones deducantur. 8285 8286 Cæterum &longs;i quis ve­lit Mechanicam facultatem &longs;eriò aggredi, nequaquam paucis his ab Ari&longs;t. traditis, eisque; leui brachio pertractatis, contentus &longs;it: verùm Archimedem de Aquæponderantibus, Commandinum, ac Lucam Valerium de centro grauitatis &longs;olidorum, ac tandem Guidi Vbaldi Mechanica adeat, vbi hu­ius &longs;cientiæ admiranda plurima, eaque; firmi&longs;&longs;imè demon&longs;trata reperiet.

8287 8288 IN LIBELLVM DE MVNDOAD ALEXANDRVM.

8289 8290 Cvm plures libellum hunc Ari&longs;t. 8291 8292 attribuant, cogor loca ip&longs;ius ma­thematica ex in&longs;tituto exponere.

8293 8294

8295 8296 271

8297 8298 In 2. cap. 8299 8300 recen&longs;et Planetarum ordinem, iuxta antiqui&longs;&longs;imorum A&longs;tronomorum traditiones, qui ob paucas, easque; imperfectas ob­&longs;eruationes muita ignorarunt, atque in multis, & præcipuè in ordine Plane­tarum &longs;tatuendo, fal&longs;i &longs;unt: A&longs;tronomi enim po&longs;teriores, & maximè Ptolæ­meus, vnà cum recentioribus no&longs;tri &longs;eculi alium ordinem exactioribus ob­&longs;eruationibus, atque demon&longs;trationibus a&longs;trucntes vetu&longs;ti&longs;&longs;imorum illorum errores patefecerunt. 8301 8302 E&longs;t autem verus ordo, vt Luna &longs;it omnium terris pro­xima, deinde Mercurius, tùm Venus, po&longs;tea Sol, Mars, Iupiter, Saturnusque; à terris alti&longs;&longs;imus, quos omnes &longs;tellarum affixarum &longs;phæra, quæ etiam fir­mamentum dicitur, complectitur. 8303 8304 non me latet huius no&longs;tri &longs;eculi di­ligenti&longs;&longs;imos a&longs;tronomos nouam mundani &longs;y&longs;tematis hy­pothe&longs;im inducere; &longs;ed ea prædicto Planctarum ordini parum, aut nihil repugnat.

8305 8306 Deæstu Maris.

8307 8308

8309 8310 272

8311 8312 In 3. cap. (Aiunt etiam multos æstus vndarumqué &longs;ublationes fiatis quibu&longs;­dam temporibus cum Luna circumag:) Perpaucis maris fluxum, & reflu­xum attingit, qui quia ex motu præcipuè Lunæ pender, non videtur alienum hoc loco eum fu&longs;ius explicare, atque nonnullis difficultatibus occurrere, quibus recentiores nonnulli nimis implicautur. 8313 8314 Ae&longs;tus maris e&longs;t quædam maris ebullitio, ob quam vt &longs;olet in ebullientibus aquis, mare intume&longs;cit: fiunt autem in toto mundo duobus tantum in locis ex hoc æ&longs;tu tumores duo, quorum vnus &longs;emper directè Lunæ &longs;ubiacet, alter verò in auer&longs;a terræ parte, &longs;iue huic antipoda, & diametraliter oppo&longs;ita.

8315 8316 Ex his Marium tumoribus fit vt aquœ, quæ naturæ &longs;ua decliuiora petunt, qua&longs;i exundantes ad littora flaant. 8317 8318 atque hic aquarum cur&longs;us fluxus maris appellatur. 8319 8320 decre&longs;cente deinde maris æ&longs;tu, & tumore ex rece&longs;&longs;u Lunæ, aquæ iterum ad medium mare refluunt: atque hic maris refluxus dicitur. 8321 8322 Cum au­tem in toto die &longs;int 24. horæ & &longs;emper &longs;int &longs;imul in mundo duo æ&longs;tus, & tu­mores, fit vt &longs;int pariter &longs;emper in mundo duo fluxus, qui tumores illos co­mitantur; necnon duo refluxus, qui eo&longs;dem &longs;ub&longs;equantur; hinc fit vt vni­cuique illorum &longs;ex heræ conueniant, &longs;ex fluxui, &longs;ex refluxui, qui &longs;ub Luna fiunt; &longs;ex verò fluxui, & &longs;ex tandem refluxui Lunæ auer&longs;is, quæ totam Lunæ circa mundum periodum 25. horarum expleant. 8323 8324 Cau&longs;am autem cur mare hoc modo &longs;tatis horis, paulò tamen &longs;erius ob Lunæ tardiorem ortum &longs;emper cre&longs;cat, & decre&longs;cat antiqui omnes in Lunam retulerunt, vt primus omnium Ari&longs;t. 8325 8326 hoc loco, deinde Strabo, Pomponius Mela, Plinius, Solinus, & alij plures idem &longs;en&longs;erunt. 8327 8328 Lunam &longs;cilicet eam habere vim in mare, vt pars il­la, quæ Lunæ &longs;irbiacet, &longs;iue quam Luna radijs ferit, æftuet, & turgeat; non aliter pars maris huic antipoda, & auer&longs;a, quamuis tota terræ moles inter

ip&longs;am, & Lunam interpona­tur, æ&longs;tuat, fluxumque, ac re­fluxum quamuis priori mi­norem, efficit. 8329 8330 quæ omnia melius in figura cernentur; vbi infra Lunam vides tumo­rem A, ex quo fluxus deriua­tur. 8331 8332 & in parte huic auer&longs;a tumorem B, ex quo alter flu­xus deriuatur. 8333 8334 & quia in alijs duobus mundi lateribus non fiunt huin&longs;modi tumores, imò mare ob refrigerationem &longs;ub&longs;idet, ibi fiunt duo reflu­xus C, & D, ita vt &longs;emper &longs;int in mari præ&longs;ertim Oceano quatuor prædicti effectus, qui &longs;imul, vt ait hic Ari&longs;t. & ex­perientia te&longs;tatur, &longs;imul cum Luna circa mundum circumaguntur. 8335 8336 hoe e&longs;t &longs;i Luna, quæ modo e&longs;t in &longs;uperiori parte meridionali, venerit ad locum E, occidentalem, eam fluxus A, &longs;uble quitur, vergitque; tumorem &longs;uum ad occi­dentem E, vnde, & fluxus B, promouebitur ad orientem, ita vt punctum F, orientalem a&longs;piciat.

8337 8338 Alij præterea duo refluxus eadem proportione promoti erunt, vbi prius erant fluxus: quæ con&longs;equentia ad Lunam perpetua, manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, fignum, ho&longs;ce fluxus, acrefluxus non aliunde quàm à Luna manare. 8339 8340 quod adhuc ma­nife&longs;tius erit, &longs;i con&longs;ideremus, quod quanto tardius quotidie Luna oritur, tanto etiam maris æ&longs;tus tardius incipit. 8341 8342 Porrò vt appareat hanc e&longs;&longs;e vete­rum &longs;ententiam libet hic attexere quædam ex lib. 8343 8344 3. Strabonis, quæ ip&longs;e ex Po&longs;&longs;idonio acceperat. 8345 8346 &longs;ic. 8347 8348 Oceani verò motum ait, &longs;cilicet Po&longs;&longs;idonius, &longs;y­deris &longs;ubire circuitum, quendam quidem diurnum, quendam men&longs;truum, quendam annuum, vt Lunæ etiam contingit. 8349 8350 quo etiam tempore i&longs;ta &longs;uper horizontem a&longs;cenderit, mare terram a&longs;cendere incipit, &longs;en&longs;u te&longs;te, quou&longs;que ad cœli medium Luna con&longs;cenderit. 8351 8352 Vbi verò declinare &longs;ydus ip&longs;um cœ­perit, &longs;en&longs;im rur&longs;us à terra pelagus ad medium mare reuertitur, donec ad occidentis painctum Luna de&longs;cenderit. 8353 8354 deinde tanto eadem incon&longs;tantia tempore manet, quanto Luna ad iplum occa&longs;um coniungitur, & adhuc tan­to magis, quanto &longs;ub terram mota, &longs;ignnm ab horizonte di&longs;tet. 8355 8356 po&longs;tea rur­&longs;us mare a&longs;cendere, quou&longs;que &longs;ub teliurem in medio cœli &longs;it Luna, deinde mare à littore regredi quoad iterum Luna in orientem procedat, ac &longs;upra horizontem eleuetur, con&longs;i&longs;ere verò v&longs;que quo fignum &longs;upra terram eleue­tur, & rur&longs;us terras mare a&longs;cendere. 8357 8358 Hanc diurnam e&longs;&longs;e circuitionem a&longs;&longs;e­rit Po&longs;&longs;idonius, men&longs;truam verò, &c. 8359 8360 vbi pergit explicare, qua ratione, ma­ria etiam alijs motibus men&longs;trno. 8361 8362 &longs;cilicet, & annuo cieantur, iuxta Lunæ periodos men&longs;truam, & annuam. 8363 8364 Eadem omninò habet Plinius, & alij ve­teres omnes, quos tu con&longs;ulere poteris vnde mirum videri debeat, cur re­centiores plurimi, neque veterum auctoritate, neque ratione, aut experientia nixi, hanc maris affectionem, à Luna effici negarint.

8365 8366 Verum ip&longs;i duabus poti&longs;&longs;imum rationibus id negant.

8367 8368 Prima e&longs;t, quod vario admodum tempore, & modo in diuer&longs;is fiant ma­ribus, & in nonnullis nihil horum æ&longs;tuum appareat.

8369 8370 Huic re&longs;pondendum e&longs;t, id ex varia marium di&longs;pofitione, tum eriam va­rio fitu, quo Lunam a&longs;piciunt prouenire. 8371 8372 hoc modo videmus vario tempo­re, & modo, in toto orbe effici dies, ac noctes, æ&longs;tatem, & hyemem; & ta­men certum e&longs;t Solem i&longs;ta omnia efficere. 8373 8374 Sed melius etiam huic dubita­tioni occurremus certa quadam, atque omninò explorata experientia ex ar­te Nautica de&longs;umpta. 8375 8376 libri enim nautici ab&longs;que vlla dubitatione Luuæ hæc cmnia verè a&longs;cribunt, dum qua&longs;dam regulas tradunt, eastamen pro varijs maribus varias, quibus per ætatem Lunæ, & &longs;itum ip&longs;ius &longs;upra horizonteni illius maris certò certius horam fluxus; & refluxus, imò eorum etiam ma­gnitudinem præuo&longs;cunt, ac prædicunt. 8377 8378 huiu&longs;modi librum vidiego Parmæ, manu &longs;criptum, auctore Augu&longs;tino Cæ&longs;areo, quem ille olim Sereni&longs;s. Duci Octauio dono dederat. 8379 8380 8381 8382 quod &longs;i hi æ&longs;tus à Luna minimè penderent, nulla ra­tione regulæ illæ effici potui&longs;&longs;ent, quibus per ætatem ipfius, ac &longs;itum &longs;upra horizontem eos prædicere tuto valerent.

8383 8384 Secunda verò ratio, quæ maximè eos torquet e&longs;t quanam ratione à Luna effici po&longs;&longs;it &longs;ecundus refluxus B, primò oppo&longs;itus, cum tota terræ moles in­teriecta ob&longs;tare videatur.

8385 8386 Verum huic difficultati optimè ex opticis &longs;atisfacere po&longs;&longs;umus, fi dixe­rimus, æ&longs;tum illum effici quidem à Luna, & Sole, &longs;ed tamen per lumen ex &longs;yderibus ad partem illam auer&longs;am reflexum; quod vt melius explicetur, & confirmetur. 8387 8388 Illud primò &longs;ciendum non &longs;olam Lunam, verumetiam Solem adæ&longs;tum maris ciendum concurrere, quamuis primas in hoc Lunæ conce­dat; experientia enim con&longs;tat maiorem fieri fluxum, quando Sol, & Luna &longs;imul &longs;unt coniuncta, vt in nouilunio accidit, quia lumina, & eorum virtu­tes vnitæ fortius eandem maris partem directis radijs percellunt. 8389 8390 &longs;imiliter maior fit, quando luminaria &longs;unt oppo&longs;ita, vt in plenilunio contingit, quia tunc radij vnius directi, a&longs;&longs;ociantur cum reflexis alterius radijs, hocque; mo­do duplicati ea&longs;dem terræ partes, & directè, & reflexè feriunt, vt melius in &longs;equenti figura patebit.

8391 8392 Secundò præmittendum e&longs;t, lumen Solis, & Lunæ reflecti ex den&longs;is, ac per­politis corporibns, vti &longs;unt omnia &longs;ydera.

8393 8394 Tertiò, ex opticis a&longs;&longs;umendum, &longs;i corpora plurima &longs;phærica lumen re­flectentia fuerinuin circulari ambitu con&longs;tituta, quemadmodum &longs;unt &longs;tellæ affixæ in ambitu firmamenti collocatæ, reflectere plurimum lumen ad vnum, & idem punctum, quod &longs;it inter lumen, & ambitum illum; quod a&longs;&longs;umptum manife&longs;tum e&longs;t ex Iride, vbi ex plurimis &longs;phæricis guttulis lumen Solis re­flectitur ad oculum; quamuis geometricè, & quidem facilè à Per&longs;pectiuo demon&longs;trari po&longs;&longs;it.

8395 8396 Quartò, ex opticis, dato corpore lumino&longs;o, & &longs;phærico reflectente, & puncto quouis, ad quod po&longs;&longs;it reflecti lumen, pote&longs;t inueniri in &longs;phæra refle­ctente punctum reflexionis.

8397 8398 Quintò, quanto radij perpendiculariores incidunt, tanto maiorem vim habere.

8399 8400 Sit ergò Sol, & Luna &longs;imul, vt in figura &longs;itque; octauæ &longs;phæræ portio A B C, cum innumeris in ea affixis &longs;yderibus. 8401 8402 e&longs;&longs;e autem totum cœlum &longs;tellis penè infinitis, ac con&longs;tipatis refertum &longs;en&longs;ui palam fit, adhibito nouo illo, ac mi­rabili Tele&longs;copij inuento.

8403 8404 Iam, vt patet ex 39.5. Alhazeni, ex &longs;ingulis &longs;tellis Solis, ac Lunæ lumen reflecti pote&longs;t (ni&longs;i quid ob&longs;tet) ad partem terræ D, luminaribus auer&longs;am, vt quarto loco &longs;uppo&longs;ui. 8405 8406 & præterea ex &longs;tellis circa B, po&longs;itis radij Solis re­percuti po&longs;&longs;unt ad eandem terræ partem D, perpendiculares, qui præ cæte­ris maximam vim obtinent. 8407 8408 quemadmodum lineæ in figura reflexæ vtcunque o&longs;tendunt, ideò a&longs;&longs;erendum e&longs;t eos, æ&longs;tum D, excitare præcipuè po&longs;&longs;e, neque terræ quantitas Solis luci obe&longs;t, cum con&longs;tet vmbram terræ parum &longs;upra Lunæ cœlum produci. 8409 8410 pote&longs;t tamen Lunæ e&longs;&longs;e impedimento quoad hos ra­dios perpendiculares; &longs;ed tamen alios minus perpendiculares, &longs;eu parum obliquos nullo modo impedire pote&longs;t, quo minus ad D, re&longs;iliant. 8411 8412 qui quam­uis &longs;int minus quàm perpendiculares efficaces, obtinent tamen non modi­cam vim. 8413 8414 Ex &longs;tellis igitur circa A, & C, reflecti pote&longs;t ex quarto fundamen­to lumen vtriu&longs;que luminaris ad D, quod &longs;atis e&longs;t efficax, cùm ferè perpendi­

culariter terræ D, incidat. 8415 8416 quamuis autem ex &longs;tellis F, E, lumen aliquod ad D, tran&longs;mittatur, tamen cum obliquè admodum illi accidat, nihil penè ef­ficere valet. 8417 8418 Verumenimuerò qui&longs;piam in hunc modum obijciet: hac ra­tione deberet fieri etiam æ&longs;tus in terræ lateribus H, I, quando quidem etiam illuc lumen ex quarto fundamento reflecti pote&longs;t.

8419 8420 Cui &longs;ic re&longs;pondendum, po&longs;&longs;e quidem aliquod lumen illuc re&longs;ilire, &longs;ed ta­men exiguum admodum, & proinde nullius penè roboris, quod experientia de&longs;umpta ex illuminatione Lunæ comprobari pote&longs;t; videmus enim, quod quanto Luna magis Soli opponitur, & proinde &longs;uam illuminationem magis ver&longs;us terram obuertit, vt in plenilunio, tanto maiorem eam vim habere æ&longs;tus excitandi. 8421 8422 multo verò minorem, quando e&longs;t in a&longs;pectu Solis quadrato, quia dimidiam tantum &longs;ui illuminationem nobis reflectit. 8423 8424 Idem proportio­naliter de &longs;tellis dicendum, quæ enim luminari maximè opponuntur, vt quæ &longs;unt circa B, illæ totam illuminationem terræ o&longs;tendunt, vnde, & efficacio­res &longs;unt. 8425 8426 cæteræ, quo magis ab illis di&longs;tant minus de &longs;ua illuminatione ter­ræ, &longs;eu mari obuertunt, & proinde minus efficiunt. 8427 8428 vnde fit, vt quamuis non­nulli radij etiam perpendiculares ad terræ latera H, I, referri po&longs;&longs;int, tamen quia pauciores &longs;unt, quàm alibi, propterea nullam ibi æ&longs;tus prouocandi vim obtinent. 8429 8430 &longs;ydera porrò illa, quæ &longs;upra Solem exi&longs;tunt, etiam &longs;i ip&longs;orum illu­minatio tota ad terras vergat, tamen in lateribus terræ prædictis nihil ef­ficiunt, quia in illa vel obliquè admodum radij incidunt, vel ea tantummo­do tangunt. 8431 8432 Verum illuminatione &longs;ua ea&longs;dem maris partes, quæ &longs;unt ad G, vnà cum Sole, ac Luna percellunt.

8433 8434 Ex quibus apparet duas tantum orbis terræ partes totis, ac plenis a&longs;tro­rum luminibus impeti, in quibus &longs;cilicet duo opoo&longs;iti æ&longs;tus ebulliunt.

8435 8436 Idem po&longs;&longs;umus hoc modo confirmare, quia cum totum firmamentum &longs;it innumeris penè &longs;yderibus &longs;tipatum, loco concaui, ac &longs;phæriçi &longs;peculi ha­beri pote&longs;t, & proinde illius in&longs;tar amborum luminarium lumen reflectere; qua ratione patet omnem ferè ad partes prædictas D, emitti reflexionem.

8437 8438 His rationibus manife&longs;tum e&longs;&longs;e patet prædictum æ&longs;tus tumorem lumina­ribus auer&longs;um, atque antipodum ex prædicta reflexione exurgere.

8439 8440 Po&longs;&longs;et etiam qui&longs;piam &longs;ic opponere, &longs;i illuc prædicta luminum reflexio pertineret, non &longs;olum illam aquarum ebullitionem efficeret, verum etiam lucem aliquam eòdem afferret, quod tamen &longs;en&longs;u minimè apparet. 8441 8442 cui &longs;ic re&longs;pondendum videtur, nece&longs;&longs;arium non e&longs;&longs;e, vt reflexio illa, quæ hoc modo mare afficit tanta &longs;it, vt etiam illud luce &longs;olito maiori afficiat; quod expe­rientia con&longs;tat in alijs c&ecedil;li influxibus: quàm &longs;æpè enim Luna nubilo&longs;o etiam tempore, fluxum, ac re&longs;luxum priorem parit, cum tamen nullam tunc lu­cem nobis afferat? 8443 8444 quamuis enim lumen &longs;tellarum &longs;uperficiem maris non attingat, attingit tamen &longs;uperficiem vaporum, exhalationum, ac nubium, quæ terram in &longs;phæræ modum ambiunt, ac parum à terra circumquaque at­tolluntur: quem exhalationum ambitum deinde luminarium virtus facilè penetrare pote&longs;t. 8445 8446 Nullum præterea lumen apparet, quia lumen reflexum præ&longs;ertim ex conuexis corporibus, vt &longs;unt &longs;tellæ, valde debile e&longs;t, quia con­uexum illud reflectendo non vnit, &longs;ed di&longs;gregat, contra quam facit concauum.

8447 8448 Tandem quærere quis po&longs;&longs;et, cur æ&longs;tus hic &longs;ecundus minor &longs;it priori. 8449 8450 Cui re&longs;pondendum, quia ille à directis radijs, hic verò à reflexis progignitur: radios autem reflexos debiliores e&longs;&longs;e directis optici docent, atque experien­tia confirmat.

8451 8452 Porrò quando luminaria &longs;unt oppo&longs;ita, vt &longs;i Luna e&longs;&longs;et in B, Sol verò in K, tunc maximus fit vterque fluxus, quia radij directi vtriu&longs;que vniuntur cum ra­dijs reflexis alterius; ita vt vterque æ&longs;tus fiat, & per radium reflexum, & per directum &longs;imul, v. g. æ&longs;tus, qui Lunæ &longs;ubiacet fit per radium Lunæ directum, & quia Sol e&longs;t in oppo&longs;itione cum Luna, &longs;it vt ip&longs;ius radij reflectantur, & vniantur cum directis Lunæ ad eundem tumorem excitandum. 8453 8454 8455 8456 8457 8458 &longs;imiliter in­fra Solem directè alius fit à directis ip&longs;ius radijs; & quia Luna ei opponitur lumen eius ad v&longs;que &longs;ydera pertinens reuertitur, vnaque; cum directa Solis lu­ce ad eundem efficiendum concurrit.

8459 8460 Exi&longs;tentibus demum lumidaribus circa quadratum a&longs;pectum, vt &longs;i Luna e&longs;&longs;et in F, Sole exi&longs;tente in K. exiguus, ac penè nullus fit fluxus, quia eorum vires non &longs;unt vnitæ, cùm radij nec incidentes, nec reflexi vniantur imò vi­res corum &longs;eparatæ inaria in contrarias partes di&longs;trahunt, vnde fit, vt neu­tro alteri concedente, apud neutrum victoria con&longs;tet.

8461 8462 Atque hæc e&longs;t mea de æ&longs;tu maris per reflexionem &longs;ententia. 8463 8464 quam iamdiu inuentam, atque auditoribus meis &longs;æpius explicatam, reperi tandem non &longs;ine gaudio fui&longs;&longs;e etiam &longs;ubtili&longs;&longs;imi Scoti opinionem, quam ip&longs;e breuiter in pri­mum &longs;ent. 8465 8466 de creatione mundi tantummodo &longs;ine vlla expo&longs;itione, atque con­firmatione proponit. 8467 8468 in eadem pror&longs;us &longs;ententia e&longs;t Rogerius Bachon inter Opticos probati&longs;&longs;imus, cap. 8469 8470 5. de Speculis Mathematicis.

8471 8472 Aliorum demum opinationes, &longs;iue Angelo cuidam, &longs;iue virtuti totam terram peruadenti hunc æ&longs;tum a&longs;cribentium, non e&longs;t meum refellere, cum non phy&longs;icum, &longs;ed mathematicum agere in&longs;tituerim.

8473 8474

8475 8476 273

8477 8478 8479 Cap. 7. (Quod Imagunculas animatas e&longs;&longs;e, &c.) huiu&longs;modi imagines, & &longs;tatuas, quæ &longs;pontè mouebantur Græci appellarunt Automata, ide&longs;t &longs;pon­tanea, cuiu&longs;modi &longs;unt automata Heronis, Alexandrini, quæ adhuc extant. 8480

8481 8482 IN LIBELLVMDe admirandis auditionibus.

8483 8484

8485 8486 274

8487 8488 Nvmero 82. Quæ de illa in&longs;ula extra Herculis columnas &longs;ita narrat, eam putant recentiores Geographi, & quidem meritò nouo orbi conuenire.

8489 8490

8491 8492 275

8493 8494 Numero 100. Quæ de I&longs;tro, &longs;iue Dannubio tradit, eum &longs;cilicet e&longs;&longs;e bifidum, alteroque; ramo in Pontum, altero verò in Mediterraneum ex­onerari: &longs;unt contra omnes recentiores Geographos; apparet tamen eam fui&longs;&longs;e veterum nonnullorum opinionem, quos &longs;equutus Ari&longs;t. 8495 8496 deceptus e&longs;t, à quibus etiam multò po&longs;t fal&longs;i &longs;unt Diodorus, Pomponius, & Solinus, qui I&longs;trum I&longs;triæ Prouincìæ fluuium faciunt, quem ex I&longs;tro Germaniæ veluti ra­mum contra omnem veritatem deriuant. 8497 8498 Verùm hoc illis-condonandum præ&longs;ertim antiquioribus, cum tunc temporis Geographia parum e&longs;&longs;et exculta.

8499 8500 Primus Strabo hanc fal&longs;itatem libro 1. redarguit, & po&longs;t ip&longs;um Plinius I&longs;trum i&longs;tum fabulo&longs;um appellat.

8501 8502 IN LIBELLVMDe lineis in&longs;ecabilibus, &longs;iue indiuiduis.

8503 8504

8505 8506 276

8507 8508 Di&longs;putat libellus hic &longs;anè acuti&longs;&longs;imus, Vtrum quantitas con&longs;tet ex indiui&longs;ibilibus, quam qu&ecedil;&longs;tionem recentiores agitant in Phy&longs;icis tractatione de Quantitate; atque hinc nonnulla &longs;umunt argumen­ta: plura &longs;umpturi ni&longs;i operis ob&longs;curitas, & mathematicarum, ignoratio hactenus ob&longs;titi&longs;&longs;et.

8509 8510 Sciendum igitur primo loco, nos po&longs;&longs;e duo indiui&longs;ibilium genera in quan­titate concipere. 8511 8512 primum eorum, quæ verè indiuidua &longs;unt, nullasque; habent partes, &longs;iue nullo modo &longs;unt quanta; cuiu&longs;inodi e&longs;t punctum mathematicum.

8513 8514 Alterum quorumdam indiui&longs;ibilium quidem, &longs;ed tamen quantorum cu­iu&longs;modi e&longs;&longs;ent, quædam adeò minimæ lineæ, quæ omnem effugiant diui&longs;io­nem: ex quibus antiqui opinabantur lineas totales, ac diniduas componi. 8515 8516 atque de hec &longs;ecundo indiuiduorum, quantorum genere videtur opu&longs;culum i&longs;tud di&longs;&longs;erere. 8517 8518 & quia partim rationibus phy&longs;icis, partim geometricis vti­tur, ideò nec omninò phy&longs;icus nec omninò mathematicus e&longs;t. 8519 8520 Ego igitur, quæ mathematica &longs;unt, exi &longs;tituto exponere aggrediar.

8521 8522 Ad intelligentiam igitur huius operis nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t noui&longs;&longs;e, quæ nam &longs;int quantitates commen&longs;urabiles, & quæ in commen&longs;urabiles. 8523 8524 quæ prima, & &longs;ecunda definitione 10. Elem. 8525 8526 explicantur; egoque; eas primo Priorum oc­ca&longs;ione a&longs;ymetriæ diametri cum co&longs;ta &longs;atis expo&longs;ui: vtrumuis locum vide­ris præ&longs;enti nece&longs;&longs;itati con&longs;ultum erit.

8527 8528

8529 8530 277

8531 8532 Primus locus Mathematicus e&longs;t hic (Po&longs;tremò ex ijs, quæ tradunt Mathe­maticis imbuti di&longs;ciplinis, quiuis lineam aliquam in&longs;ecabilem e&longs;&longs;e concedet. 8533 8534 nam &longs;i, vt aiunt, illæ commen&longs;urabiles &longs;unt lineæ, quæ eadem men&longs;ura dimetiri queunt, & nihil impedit, quin omnes commen&longs;urabiles reip&longs;a dimetiantur, extabit profe­ctò longitudo aliqua, qua omnes commen&longs;urabuntur; quæ nece&longs;&longs;ario erit indiuidua, nam &longs;i dicatur e&longs;&longs;e diuidua, huius quoque men&longs;uræ partes, men&longs;aram aliquam com­munem habebunt, partes enim toti commen&longs;urabiles &longs;unt ita, vt portio partis il­lius, quæ dimidium totius fuerat, efficiatur dupla alterius; quoniam autem hoc fieri nequit, atoma debet e&longs;&longs;e men&longs;ura hæc communis.

8535 8536 Eodem modo, & quæ &longs;imul ab ip&longs;a men&longs;ura commen&longs;uratæ, tanquam omnes ex ea men&longs;ura compo&longs;itæ &longs;unt lineæ, veluti ex atomis conflantur.

8537 8538 Affert rationem quandam ex Mathematicis, qua nonnulli probabant ex­tare lineas atomas, ex quibus cæteræ lineæ tanquam partibus con&longs;tarent: ac proinde negabant lineas e&longs;&longs;e in infinitum diuiduas, &longs;eu quamlibet lineam &longs;ecari po&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ed a&longs;&longs;erebant diuidendo, tandem ad indiuiduas deueniendum e&longs;&longs;e.

8539 8540 Præmi&longs;&longs;a igitur, vt monui commen&longs;urabilium, & incommen&longs;urabilium linearum cognitione in hunc modum, & textum Ari&longs;tot. & rationem ip&longs;o­rum exponam. 8541 8542

8543 8544 Mathematici o&longs;tendunt extare lineas commen&longs;urabiles, quæ &longs;cilicet ea­dem communi men&longs;ura men&longs;urantur: at nihil impedit quin omnes commen­&longs;urabiles re ip&longs;a men&longs;urentur, debet ergò extare vna aliqua longitudo, qua omnes commen&longs;urabiles dimetiamur. 8545 8546 hanc autem uece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e atomam, nam &longs;i diuidua &longs;tatuatur, poterit &longs;emper &longs;ecari, & &longs;ub&longs;ecari bifariam, qua­re cum partes huiu&longs;modi &longs;int toti commen&longs;urabiles, &longs;equetur aliam exi&longs;tere men&longs;uram, qua omnes hæ partes, & proinde tota linea commen&longs;urentur. 8547 8548 Verùm hoc fieri nequit, nam hoc pacto non e&longs;&longs;et vna tantum longitudo om­nium commen&longs;urabilium linearum communis men&longs;ura, verùm plures, & plures in infinitum, quod e&longs;t contra Mathematicorum placita. 8549 8550 dicendum, itaque, communem illam omnium men&longs;uram e&longs;&longs;e omnis diui&longs;ionis exper­tem; & propterea etiam lineas omnes commen&longs;urabiles ex atomis lineis componi, quæ nimirum prædictæ communi men&longs;uræ æquales &longs;int. 8551 8552 atque hæc e&longs;t illarum prima argumentatio.

8553 8554

8555 8556 278

8557 8558 Secundus locus (Idem etiam contingit in figuris planis, quæ à lineis rationa­libus procreantur: nam omnes huiu&longs;modi figuræ erunt etiam inuicem commen&longs;ura­biles, quare enadem ratione, qua in lineis proximè v&longs;i &longs;umus, &longs;equetur earum com­munem men&longs;uram e&longs;&longs;e pariter indiuiduam.

8559 8560 Sciendum e&longs;t omnes lineas commen&longs;urabiles longitudine, e&longs;&longs;e etiam com­men&longs;urabiles (vt aiunt Geometræ) potentia, ide&longs;t &longs;ecundum quadrata ea­rum, &longs;iue dicas quadrata quoque earum e&longs;&longs;e commen&longs;urabilia, v. g. linea dua­

rum vnciarum, & linea trium vnciarum &longs;unt commen&longs;urabiles longitudine, & potentia, quia potentia lineæ duarum vnciarum, &longs;iue quadratum, e&longs;t quatuor vnciarum &longs;uperficia­lium: & quadratum lineæ trium vnciarum, e&longs;t nouem vnciarum quadratarum, vt patet in figuris, quorum quadratorum communis men&longs;ura e&longs;t vncia vna quadrata. 8561 8562 8563 8564 8565 8566 atque hanc illi nullo modo diuidi po&longs;&longs;e contendebant.

8567 8568

8569 8570 279

8571 8572 Tertius locus (Præterea &longs;i quis communem &longs;tatam, ac determinatam men&longs;u­ram &longs;aciat diuiduam, non erit amplius in rerum natura linea vlla rationalis, aut irrationalis, re&longs;pectu expo&longs;itæ, ac determinatæ lineæ; neque aliarum vlla erit, de quibus modo dictum e&longs;t, veluti quam Apotomen vocant ex duobus nominibus. 8573 8574 Ve­rùm neque &longs;ecundum &longs;e aliquam definitam naturam habebunt, &longs;ed collatæ &longs;ibi ip&longs;is tam rationales, quàm irrationales erunt omnes.

8575 8576 Hæc e&longs;t alia eorumdem ratio ad idem comprobandum: quam, vt benè percipiamus, nonnulla prius ex definitionibus 10. Elem. 8577 8578 &longs;unt explicanda: vt quæ nam &longs;int lineæ rationales, quæ irrationales, quæ ex binis nomini­bus, quæ Apotomæ.

8579 8580 Propo&longs;ita igitur linea quapiam, v. g. trium palmorum qualis e&longs;t linea A, po&longs;&longs;unt inueniri quamplurimæ lineæ, quarum aliæ &longs;int illi longitudine com­

men&longs;urabiles, &longs;iue quæ cum expo&longs;ita A, ha­beant communem men&longs;uram. 8581 8582 8583 8584 8585 8586 v. g. linea B, quinque palmorum e&longs;t commen&longs;urabilis lineæ A, quia vtramque communis men&longs;ura vnius palmi metitur: aliæ verò &longs;int eidem A, lon­gitudine incommen&longs;urabiles, qualis e&longs;&longs;et diameter C D, quadrati lineæ A, quæ e&longs;t cum latere A, incommen&longs;urabilis ex vltima 10. 8587 8588 8589 8590

8591 8592 Cæterum lineam primò expo&longs;itam, vt e&longs;t in præ­&longs;entia A, quod e&longs;&longs;et notæ quantitatis, Græci appella­runt Ph/thg, ide&longs;t rationalem, quemadmodum Latini eam appellant.

8593 8594 Linearum autem longitudine incommen&longs;urabilium cum expo&longs;ita rationali A, aliæ &longs;unt, quæ tamen &longs;unt commen&longs;urabiles eidem potentia, ide&longs;t con&longs;tituunt quadrata, quæ &longs;unt commen&longs;urabilia quadrato ra­tionali A, vt linea C D, cum &longs;it diameter quadrati li­neæ A, quadratum exhibet, quod e&longs;t duplum quadrati lineæ A, ex 47. primi, quadratum autem lineæ A, e&longs;t nouem, igitur quadratum eius duplum erit octodecim, quadratum &longs;cilicet lineæ C D. octodecim autem, & nouem &longs;unt commen&longs;urabilia communi vnitatis men&longs;ura, huiu&longs;modi lineæ dicuntur com­men&longs;urabiles poteutia tantum, potentia. 8595 8596 n. 8597 8598 lineæ dicuntur quadratum illius.

8599 8600 Quæ igitur rationali propo&longs;itæ &longs;unt commen&longs;urabiles aliquo modo, &longs;iue longitudine, & potentia (quæcunque enim commen&longs;urabilis e&longs;t longitudine, e&longs;t etiam potentia) &longs;iue potentia &longs;olùm, rationales ip&longs;æ quoque dicuntur.

Aliæ verò (quarum permultæ in decimo reperiun­tur) quæ nec longitudine, nec potentia illi &longs;unt commen&longs;urabiles, irrationales appellantur, qua­lis e&longs;&longs;et media proportionalis E F, inter duas A, & C D, in præ&longs;enti figura ex 11. 10.

8601 8602 Sciendum præterea ex 37. 10. & &longs;equentibus, quod ex duabus lineis rationalibus re&longs;pectu rationalis expo&longs;itæ. 8603 8604 v. g. A, com­men&longs;urabilibus inuicem tantum potentia, componitur linea, quæ cum ea­

dem expo&longs;ita e&longs;t irrationalis, vocaturque; ex duobus nominibus, &longs;iue Binomium, vt &longs;i ex latere A, & diametro C D, componatur li­nea A C D, erit irrationalis cum rationali A, diceturque; binomium. 8605 8606 8607 8608 8609 8610 Amplius ex 74. 10. & &longs;equentibus, &longs;i prædictum minus nomen, &longs;iue minor linea A, detrahatur ex maiori nomine C D, vt re­linquatur B D linea, erit ip&longs;a reliqua B D, irrationalis, quam po&longs;tea appel­lant Apotomen, &longs;iue latinè Re&longs;iduum.

8611 8612 Po&longs;tremò, & hoc non ignorandum ex 43. 10. lineam, &longs;iue binomium A C D, non po&longs;&longs;e diuidi in alio puncto, præter C, in duas lineas, quæ &longs;int rationales expo&longs;itæ, & potentia tantum inuicem commen&longs;urabiles.

8613 8614 His præmi&longs;&longs;is textum, ac rationem illorum explicabo in hunc modum.

8615 8616 Si quis faciat diuiduam lineam illam, quæ e&longs;t communis men&longs;ura omnium commen&longs;urabilium, &longs;equetur hoc ab&longs;urdum contra demon&longs;trationes 10. quod nulla erit amplius linea rationalis, nec irrationalis, quia &longs;i communis men&longs;ura diuidatur, tolletur ea de rerum natura; vnde non erit amplius in­ter lineas &longs;ymetria vlla, quare neque vllæ erunt rationales, e&longs;&longs;e enim ratio­nale oritur ex commen&longs;urabilitate. 8617 8618 quare neque extabit illa rationalis expo­&longs;ita, ad quam cæteræ relatæ dicuntur rationales, vel irrationales: quapro­pter etiam irrationales nullæ erunt, neque vlla alia erit ex prædictis, veluti nec irrationalis illa, quam vocant Apotomen ex Binomio, &longs;iue ex duobus nominibus, de qua Euclides propo&longs;. 8619 8620 74. 10. & &longs;equentibus pertractat.

8621 8622 Notandum in ver&longs;u illo (Apotomen ex duobus nominibus compo&longs;itam) vni­ca voce illa (Compo&longs;itam) addita ab Interprete Iatino, quæ non extat in tex. græco, magnum Ari&longs;toteli imponi erratum, cum hac ratione dicat apoto­men ex duobus nominibus e&longs;&longs;e compo&longs;itam, quod fal&longs;i&longs;&longs;imum e&longs;t. 8623 8624 8625 8626 Apotome enim, vt &longs;upra dictum e&longs;t, ne dum ex duobus nominibus con&longs;tat, verum ip­&longs;a e&longs;t re&longs;iduum lineæ maioris, &longs;i minor ab ip&longs;a detrahatur. 8627 8628 Verumenimuero vox illa (Compo&longs;itam) in nullo codice reperitur, quare pro arbitrio, atque ex Geometriæ in&longs;citia addita, tolli debet, ne tantæ in&longs;citiæ Ari&longs;t. 8629 8630 ip&longs;e re­darguatur. 8631 8632 hæc in hunc locum &longs;ufficiant.

8633 8634

8635 8636 280

8637 8638 Quartus locus (Quod verò de commen&longs;urabilibus lineis po&longs;iremò dicunt, om­nes vua quadam, & eadem men&longs;ura oportere men&longs;urari, fal&longs;um t&longs;i admodum, & nequaquam Mathematicorum &longs;uppo&longs;itionibus concordat. 8639 8640 non enim ita &longs;upponunt Geometræ, neque vtile ip&longs;is i&longs;tud foret, imò potius aduer&longs;aretur, lineas omnes com­men&longs;urabiles e&longs;&longs;e, & omnium commen&longs;urabilium linearam communem men&longs;uramexi&longs;timare. 8641 8642 quamobrem ridiculum e&longs;t eos, qui dicunt &longs;e demonstrare ex Geometra­rum decretis, & ex quibus Mathematici docent in contentio&longs;am pariter, ac falla­cem diuertere argumentationem, præ&longs;ertim tam inualidam. 8643 8644 nam multis modis im­hecillis e&longs;t eiu&longs;modi ratio, & quouis modo licet euitare, ne aut inu&longs;itata dicere, aut argui videamur.

8645 8646 Refellit hoc loco &longs;uperiores rationes in tribus locis præmi&longs;&longs;is allatas, quibus nonnulli probabant quantitatem ex indiuiduis con&longs;tare, & proinde concedenda e&longs;&longs;e quædam Quanta, omninò atoma; &longs;ic igitur inquit. 8647 8648 Quod verò de commen&longs;urabilibus lineis dicunt, omues videlicet vnica quadam, eademque; determinata men&longs;ura men&longs;urari oportere, fal&longs;um omninò e&longs;t, & contra mathematicorum dogmata, non enim Geometræ hoc a&longs;&longs;erunt, cùm ip&longs;orum demon&longs;trationibus a duer&longs;etur; &longs;ed tantum dicunt omnes lineas, quæ ad inuicem &longs;unt commen&longs;urabiles, commen&longs;urari, vna eademque; men&longs;ura,

&longs;ed non tamen vnica, ide&longs;t non vnica, ac determi­nata. 8649 8650 po&longs;&longs;unt enim e&longs;&longs;e plures eædemque; men&longs;uræ communes plurium quantitatum commen&longs;ura­bilium, vt præ&longs;entium trium linearum 4. 6. 8. communis men&longs;ura e&longs;t linea 2. binarius enim tres numeros 4.6. & 8. men&longs;urat. 8651 8652 & &longs;i linea 2. bifariam &longs;ecetur, erit dimidium eius linea 1. quæ pariter erit communis men&longs;ura trium prædictarum li­nearum, cûm vnitas &longs;it omnium numerorum communis men&longs;ura. benè ve­rum e&longs;t, quod Geometræ, quando &longs;impliciter loquuntur de huiu&longs;modi com­muni men&longs;ura, intelligunt de ea, quæ inter omnes e&longs;t maxima: vt in prædi­ctis tribus lineis maxima earum communis men&longs;ura e&longs;t linea 2. Atque hec&longs;i­bi volunt Geometræ, ex quibus totus hic textus intelligi pote&longs;t.

8653 8654

8655 8656 281

8657 8658 Quintus locus (Ob rectæ verò lineæ motum in &longs;emicirculum, quam nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t in rectum ita diuidere, vt infinitæ circunferentiæ, & interualla totidem inuenian­tur) Interpres latinus &longs;ic vertit (Ob rectæ verò lineæ motum in &longs;emicirculum diuiduas non credere, &c.) vbi verba illa (Diuiduas non credere) pro arbittio, ac &longs;ine ratione, imò contra rationem addidit: tum quia in Græco textu non extant, tum quia &longs;en&longs;us totius &longs;ententiæ is e&longs;t, vt potius debui&longs;&longs;et affirmati­uè dicere (Diuiduas credere) nam Ari&longs;toteles videtur &longs;ic argumentari, quan­

do recta linea A B, vt in appo&longs;ita figura mo­uetur intrando in &longs;emicirculum C A D B, ita vt primò &longs;it in &longs;itu A B, &longs;ecundò in E F, tertiò in G H, & &longs;imiliter in alijs omnibus &longs;emicir­culi locis, nece&longs;&longs;ariò accidit, vt infinitæ peri­ph&ecedil;riæ, quales sunt A B, E A B F, G E A B F H, cadant inter infinitas partes lineæ ingredien­tis, vt &longs;unt A B, E F, G H, atque tom tota recta ingrediens, quàm totus &longs;emicirculus, diuidatur in partes infinitas, ita vt nulla pars lineæ rectæ, neque vlla &longs;emicirculi &longs;uper&longs;it, quæ &longs;e &longs;e mutuò non diuidantur, ergò nihil tam in linea, quàm in &longs;emicirculo remanet, quod non &longs;ecetur: tota igitur linea recta, & periphæria illa diuidua e&longs;t, quam ob rem nullo modo con&longs;tare pote&longs;t ex indiuiduis, ex quibus manife&longs;tum e&longs;t perpe­ram additamentum illud factum e&longs;&longs;e, & &longs;imul ratio, & textus Ari&longs;t. eadem opera patefacta &longs;unt.

8659 8660

8661 8662 282

8663 8664 Sextus locus (Rur&longs;us quoque facilè per&longs;uaderi pote&longs;t ex mota duorurm circulo­ rum æqualium, nam qui&longs;quis borum moueatur, oportet per maiorem &longs;emicirculum moueri, & quæcunque alia buiu&longs;modi constituta &longs;unt de lineis, fieri non po&longs;&longs;e, vt talis vllus motus peragatur, quin prius omnibus, & &longs;ingulis interiectis occurrat. 8665 8666 Atque bæc Mathematicorum &longs;cita, multò magis ab omnibus conce&longs;&longs;a &longs;unt, quàm illorum dicta.

8667 8668 Hæc e&longs;t alia ratio, qua probat totam circuli periphæriam e&longs;&longs;e diuiduam.

&longs;int enim duo circuli æquales primum in eo­dem loco, vocenturque; A, & B, deinde circu­lus B, moueatur, & di&longs;cedat à circulo A, ma­nente; &longs;tatim namque pars egre&longs;&longs;a E F G, erit maior &longs;emicirculo, & &longs;emper fiet maior, ac maior. 8669 8670 atque in tali motu omnes partes egre­dientis circuli &longs;ecantur ab omnibus partibus circuli manentis. 8671 8672 vnde patet nihil e&longs;&longs;e in eo­rum periphærijs, quod non diuidatur. 8673 8674 nul­lum igitur in eis e&longs;t indiuiduum. 8675 8676 falluntur igitur aduer&longs;arij.

8677 8678

8679 8680 283

8681 8682 Septimus locus (Quamuis autem ex confutatis nuper rationibus appareat, ne­que probabile, neque nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;&longs;e lineas vllas indiuiduas extare, tamen ex ijs etiam, quæ deinceps &longs;abiungam, multò magis per&longs;picuum euadet. 8683 8684 & primò quidem per ea, quæ Mathematici demon&longs;trant, at que addi&longs;cenda proponunt, quæ mutare non decet, ni&longs;t probabiliores rationes habeamus. 8685 8686 Nam neque lineæ, neque rectæ li­neæ definitio cum in&longs;ecabili linea con&longs;entit, vt quæ nec inter duo puncta exten&longs;a &longs;it, nec medium vllam babeat.

8687 8688 Idem, &longs;ed paulò mutatis verbis po&longs;tea repetit, quæ fortè ab aliquo per errorem addita &longs;unt. 8689 8690 Verumenimuerò maximè con&longs;iderandum e&longs;t, quan­tum hoc loco Ari&longs;t. Mathematicis demon&longs;trationibus tribuat: quod dixe­rim propter recentiores quo&longs;dam, qui eò audaciæ deuenerunt, vt Euclidis firmi&longs;&longs;imas, atque Ari&longs;tot. te&longs;timonio, veterumque; Philo&longs;ophorum omnium comprobatas, negare non verentur Demon&longs;trationes. 8691 8692

8693 8694 Cæterùm Ari&longs;t. 8695 8696 iterum opinionem a&longs;&longs;erentium lineas in&longs;ecabiles hoc mo­do confutat: nam &longs;i inquit, lineam illam, quam vocant in&longs;ecabilem, e&longs;t non &longs;olum linea, &longs;ed etiam linea recta, illi conueniret rectæ lineæ definitio, &longs;ed nullo modo pote&longs;t ci conuenire, ergò tollendæ &longs;unt de rerum natura huiu&longs;­modi lineæ. 8697 8698 Porrò definitio lineæ e&longs;t, vt &longs;it longitudo latitudinis expers, & &longs;i recta &longs;it ex æquo &longs;ua interiacet puncta extrema, ergò ip&longs;a linea media erit inter duo indiuidua extrema puncta; at verò linea, quam ip&longs;i volunt e&longs;&longs;e indiuiduum quoddam, qua ratione medium erit inter alia duo indiuidua? 8699 8700 ip&longs;i enim videntur velle i&longs;tam lineam non habere medium vllum, &longs;i enim con­cederent habere medium, iam po&longs;&longs;et in medio &longs;ecari, quod ipfi nequaquam concederent: patet igitur definitionem lineæ minimè illi conuenire, & pro­pterea neque e&longs;&longs;e inter lineas enumerandam.

8701 8702

8703 8704 284

8705 8706 Octauus locus (Deinde omnes lineæ commen&longs;urabiles erunt: nam omnes ab in­diuiduis lineis dimetientur, quæqué; longitudine, quæqué; potentia &longs;unt commen&longs;urabi­les. 8707 8708 indiuiduæ autem lineæ &longs;ibi ip&longs;is commen&longs;urabiles &longs;unt longitudine, cum inter &longs;e fiat æquales; quare potentia quoque, quod &longs;i hoc e&longs;t, diuiduum erit quadratum.

8709 8710 Pergit adhuc nouis rationibus aduer&longs;arios refellere, dicens, &longs;i extarent huiu&longs;modi indiuiduæ lineæ, &longs;equeretur omnes omninò lineas e&longs;&longs;e commen­&longs;urabiles, quod e&longs;t contra demon&longs;trata in 10. Elem. 8711 8712 quia cum omnes lineæ con&longs;tent per ip&longs;os ex lineis atomis, i&longs;tæ atomæ e&longs;&longs;ent omnium linearum com­munes men&longs;uræ, vnde & illæ, quæ dicuntur potentia tantum commen&longs;ura­biles, vt &longs;upra explicaui, erunt etiam commen&longs;urabiles longitudine. 8713 8714 indiui­duæ verò ip&longs;æ, cum &longs;int inuicem æquales, erunt ip&longs;æ quoque commen&longs;urabi­les longitudine, quare & potentia, omnes enim longitudine commen&longs;ura­biles, &longs;unt etiam potentia commen&longs;urabiles, ex 9. 10. vnde &longs;equitur qua­drata earum omnia e&longs;&longs;e quoque commen&longs;urabilia: atque hinc con&longs;equitur, in­quit, ea e&longs;&longs;e quoque diuidua (quam con&longs;ecutionem probat infra num. 8715 8716 290.) vnde &longs;equeretur ip&longs;am quoque lineam latus quadrati po&longs;&longs;e diuidi, non igitur ponenda erat indiuidua.

8717 8718

8719 8720 285

8721 8722 Nonus Iocus, cuius latinam interpretationem, cum admodum e&longs;&longs;et de­prauata ex græco textu, in hunc modum correxi (Præterea cùm circa maio­rem lstitudinem facit applicata, æquale ei, quod ab indiuidua, & pedali copulatis circa bipedalem, minorem faciet latitudinem, quàm &longs;it indiuidua: erit minus, quod circa indiuiduam) ide&longs;t cùm minor linea applicata cum maiore, latitudinem

faciat. 8723 8724 v. g. linea minor A B, applicata cum ma­iori B C, vt in figura, ita vt contineant figuram A B C D. 8725 8726 8727 8728 8729 8730 Minor A B, facit latitudinem figuræ, maior verò B C, facit longitudinem. 8731 8732 Iam cum aduer&longs;arij velint extare huiu&longs;modi lineas ato­mas, con&longs;tituatur figura &longs;ub vna ex illis, quæ &longs;it v. g. A B, & altera maiori, quæ &longs;it pedalis, v. g. B C, vt in præcedenti figura, &longs;umatur deinde linea bi­
pedalis E F, cui per 45. primi ap­plicetur &longs;patium E F G H, æquale &longs;patio &longs;uperiori A B C D, nece&longs;&longs;a­riò latitudo E H, huius &longs;ecundæ fi­guræ minor erit quàm latitudo il­lius, hoc e&longs;t minor, quàm &longs;it indinidua A B, quod e&longs;t ab&longs;urdum. 8733 8734 8735 8736 8737 8738 8739 8740 8741 8742 vel dicere oportet &longs;patium eirca indiuiduam A B, e&longs;&longs;e minus quàm i&longs;tud po&longs;terius, quod e&longs;t contra con&longs;tructionem, & propterea pariter inconueniens, non igitur huiu&longs;modi lineæ &longs;unt ponendæ.

8743 8744

8745 8746 286

8747 8748 Decimus locus (Cum ex tribus datis lineis triangulus componatur, ex tribus quoque indiuiduis lineis componi poterit. 8749 8750 in omni autem æquilatero perpendicularis in mediam ba&longs;im mcidit, quare, & in medium indiuiduæ.

8751 8752 Ex 22. primi Elem. 8753 8754 ex tribus datis lineis, quarum quælibet duæ &longs;int, re­liqua maiores pote&longs;t con&longs;titui triangulum: poterit igitur ex tribus indiui­

duis con&longs;titui triangulum, illudque; æquilaterum, cum omnes in­diuiduæ lineæ &longs;int æquales. 8755 8756 &longs;it igitur ex eis triangulum A B C, &longs;i igitur ab angulo A, ducatur perpendicularis A D, ad ba&longs;im B C, eam bifariam &longs;ecabit ex &longs;cholio 26. primi, erit igitur li­nea B C, &longs;ecabilis, contra quam aduer&longs;arij opinantur.

8757 8758

8759 8760 287

8761 8762 Vndecimus locus (Si quadratum ex quatuor indiuiduis con&longs;tuatuatur diametro protracta, & perpendiculari ducta, quadrati co&longs;ta potentia perpendicularem, diame-trumqué mediam æquat: quare non erit minima. 8763 8764 neque duplum erit &longs;patium à diame­tro con&longs;urgens illius, quod ab indiuidua procreatur: nans æquali ablato, reliquum erit minus indiutdua, nam &longs;i æqualis, diameter quadruplum de&longs;criberet, &c.)

ide&longs;t &longs;i per 46 primi quadratum. 8765 8766 v.g. A B C D, ex qua­tuor in&longs;ecabilibus componatur, cuius diametro B C, perpendicularis A E, in&longs;i&longs;tat, erit per 47. primi qua­dratum lineæ A B, æquale quadratis linearum A E, E B, quare tam E B, quàm A E, minores erunt ip&longs;a A B; quare ip&longs;a non erit minima cum &longs;it indiuidua, quod e&longs;t ab&longs;urdum. 8767 8768 8769 8770 Præterea ex &longs;cholio 47. primi, quadratum C B F G, diametri C B, duplum e&longs;t quadrati A B C D, ergò diameter C B, maior quàm A B. 8771 8772 Auferatur igitur ab ip&longs;a, C B, æqua­lis ip&longs;i A B, quæ igitur reliqua erit, vel erit æqualis ip&longs;i A B, vel minor. 8773 8774 non æqualis, quia tunc diameter dupla e&longs;&longs;et lateris A B, & quadratum diametri quadruplum foret quadrati lateris A B. ex &longs;cholio 4. &longs;ecundi, quod ab&longs;ur­dum e&longs;t, repugnat enim 47. primi. 8775 8776 nec minor, quia hoc modo exi&longs;teret linea quædam minor minima, &longs;cilicet atoma, quod pariter e&longs;t inconueniens.

8777 8778

8779 8780 288

8781 8782 Duodecimus locus (Amplius &longs;i quæuis linea præter in&longs;ectilem in partes diui­ di pote&longs;t, tùm æquales, tùm inæquales, &longs;eindatur linea in tria fru&longs;ta, quæ non con­&longs;tet ex tribus atomis, &longs;ed vniuer&longs;aliter ex imparibus numero atomis, &longs;ic diui&longs;a erit linea indiuidua. 8783 8784 &longs;imiliter autem &longs;i in duo diuidatur linea, quæ ex imparibus con&longs;tat)hoc e&longs;t detur linea quæpiam ab aduer&longs;ario ex lineis indiuiduis numerò im­paribus, con&longs;tans. 8785 8786 v. g. ex quinque; hæc diuidi pote&longs;t in tres æquas partes per 10.6. Si igitur diuidatur in tria æqualia, nece&longs;&longs;ariò tres ex atomis illam integrantibus erunt di&longs;&longs;ectæ, nam tertia quælibet pars continebit indiui­duam vnam cum duabus tertijs alterius partibus. 8787 8788 8789 8790 8791 8792 idem accidet &longs;i bifariam per 10. primi, &longs;ecetur quæuis ex imparibus numero atomis conflata.

8793 8794

8795 8796 289

8797 8798 Decimustertius locus (Quod &longs;i bifariam quidem non omnis linea finditur, &longs;ed quæ &longs;olum ex paribus conflata &longs;it. 8799 8800 &longs;i iam in duas partes diui&longs;a, in quæcunque diuidi pote&longs;t diuideretur, &longs;ic quoque in&longs;ectilis linea diuideretur, quando ex paribus compo­&longs;ita, per inæqualia &longs;cinderetur) ide&longs;t, quod &longs;i dixerit aduer&longs;arius, non omnem lineam bifariam diuidi po&longs;&longs;e, &longs;ed eam &longs;olùm, quæ ex numero paribus atomis con&longs;titerit: ea igitur diuidatur primo bifariam. 8801 8802 deinde iterum diuidatur quomodocunque, ide&longs;t & bifariam, & non bifariam, nam hoc etiam pacto indiuidua diuidetur, quod e&longs;t inconueniens.

8803 8804

8805 8806 290

8807 8808 Decimusquartus locus (Amplius non e&longs;&longs;et cuiu&longs;uis lineæ quadratum: babe­ret enim longitudinem, & latitudinem; atque idcircò diui&longs;ibile erit, cum illa quidemaliquid, bæc autem aliquid aliud; quod &longs;i quadratum diuiduum e&longs;t, & linea, vnde procreatur, diuidua erit) po&longs;&longs;e &longs;uper quamuis datam lineam quadratum de­&longs;cribi patet ex 46. primi, quadratum igitur de&longs;criptum ab indiuidua, cum &longs;it &longs;uperficies, latitudinem, ac longitudinem habebit, quæ diuer&longs;æ &longs;unt di­men&longs;iones. 8809 8810 poterit ergò &longs;ecundum vtramque diuidi; ex qua diui&longs;ione nece&longs;­&longs;ariò latera ip&longs;ius, hoc e&longs;t lineæ, quas indiuiduas illi ponunt diuidentur, quod e&longs;t inconueniens, non igitur indiniduæ erunt.

8811 8812

8813 8814 291

8815 8816 Decimusquintus locus (Adbuc etiam, vt linea &longs;ic, & &longs;uper&longs;icies, & corpus crit impartibile: vno quippe indiuiduo exi&longs;tente, cætera quoque con&longs;equentur, quiavnum per aliud diuiditur, at corpus indiuiduum non e&longs;t, cum in &longs;e latitudinem, & profunditatem contineat: quare nec linea pote&longs;t e&longs;&longs;e atoma. 8817 8818 corpus &longs;iquidem in &longs;u­per&longs;icies, &longs;uperficies verò in lineas &longs;oluitur) hoc e&longs;t: præterea, quemadmodum linea per aduer&longs;arium extat indiuidua, &longs;ic & fuperficies ab eadem linea de­&longs;cripta erit atoma, & corpus ab hac &longs;uperficie de&longs;criptum erit impartibile. 8819 8820 Sciendum enim, quod ex motu puncti de&longs;cribitur linea: ex motu lineæ de­&longs;cribitur &longs;uperficies: ex motu tandem &longs;uperficiei corpus ortum habet, vt &longs;o­let in horum definitionibus explicari.

8821 8822 Si igitur horum vnum nempè linea &longs;it atoma, & reliqua, quæ ab ip&longs;a ma­nant erunt indiui&longs;a, quia corpus diuiditur per &longs;uperficiem, & &longs;uperficies per lineam, ide&longs;t ad diui&longs;ionem corporis nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t diuidi &longs;uperficiem, & ad &longs;uperficiei diui&longs;ionem diuidi lineam, quæ ip&longs;am terminat. 8823 8824 At cum omne corpus latitudinem, & profunditatem habeat, nullum poterit extare cor­pus, quod diuidi nequeat; quare neque illud, quod ab atoma linea oriretur. 8825 8826 Quare nec linea illa corporis procreatrix erit indiuidua; corpus &longs;iquidem in &longs;uperficies, & &longs;uperficies in lineas quodammodo re&longs;oluitur: & ex diui­&longs;ione &longs;olidi &longs;uperficies &longs;ecari debet, & demum &longs;uperficiei, &longs;ectionem lineæ &longs;ectio &longs;ub&longs;equitur. 8827 8828 Tollendæ igitur &longs;unt de rerum natura lineæ atomæ.

8829 8830

8831 8832 292

8833 8834 Decimus&longs;extus locus (Quin etiam orbis circunferentia rectam lineam pluri­bus tanget punctis, punctus enim contactus, quiqué e&longs;t in circulo, quiqué e&longs;t in recta, &longs;e &longs;e mutuò tangunt. 8835 8836 quod &longs;i hoc fieri nequit, neque punctus punctum tangere valet: quod &longs;i &longs;e tangere nequeunt, neque linea punctis con&longs;tare pote&longs;t, nam neque punctum tangere nece&longs;&longs;arium e&longs;t.

8837 8838 In 2. 3. & corollario eius demon&longs;tratur circuli peripheriam tangere re­ctam lineam in vnico puncto. 8839 8840 iam &longs;i linea con&longs;taret ex punctis indiuiduis tanquam partibus, po&longs;&longs;et circulus tangere rectam lineam in duobus punctis.

Sit circulus, cuius centrum A, tangens lineam rectam B C, con&longs;tantem ex punctis, quorum vnus &longs;it in extremo D, lineæ B D, alterum verò in E, principio lineæ E C, circulus A, tangere poterit in F, termino communi vtriu&longs;que lineæ, hocque modo tanget vtrunque punctum D, & E, quod e&longs;t impo&longs;&longs;ibile per 2. 3. &longs;equitur igitur neque illa duo puncta D, E, &longs;e mutuò tan­gere, & eadem ratione nulla alia puncta eiu&longs;dem lineæ, ex quibus manife&longs;tum e&longs;t, impo&longs;&longs;ibile e&longs;&longs;e, lineam ex huiu&longs;modi punctis con&longs;tare po&longs;&longs;e.

8841 8842 Reliqua huius opu&longs;culi, quamuis Mathematica alicui videri po&longs;&longs;int, non tamen &longs;unt, non enim linearibus indigent demon&longs;trationi­bus, neque ex Geometriæ principijs procedunt. 8843 8844 ad Phy&longs;i­cum igitur pertinebunt, cuius e&longs;t di&longs;putare, num indiuidua exi&longs;tant, & quomodo in quanti­tate, idque; rationibus aliunde, quàm ex Geometria deductis.

8845 8846 In Librum de Propriet. Elementorum. 8847 8848

8849 8850 Libellum de cau&longs;is proprietatum Elementorum, quamuis nonnulla mathematica loca contineat, tamen, quia certò con&longs;tat ex ijs, quæ in eo de Secta Arabum, de Sclauis, de Dalmatis, qui multis po&longs;t Ari&longs;totelem &longs;æculis floruerunt, auctorem alium e&longs;&longs;e ab Ari&longs;to­tele con&longs;ultò & meritò omi&longs;i.

8851 8852 In Librum de Cau&longs;is.

8853 8854 Alterum de cau&longs;is libellum pariter prætermi&longs;i, cum is vocibus Arabi­cam barbariem redolentibus &longs;cateat: phra&longs;is præterca, & qu&ecedil;dam de Deo dicta, planè indicant authorem non e&longs;&longs;e Ari&longs;tctelem; &longs;ed potius Arabem quempiam.

8855 8856 EX LIBRO NONODE HIST. ANIMALIVM

8857 8858 Araneorum industriæ.

8859 8860

8861 8862 293

8863 8864 8865 Cap. 39. (Aranei &longs;tatim cum editi &longs;unt, fila mittunt, non ab intrin&longs;eco tanquam excrementum, vt Democritus ait, &longs;ed ab extrin&longs;eco de &longs;uo cor­pore, veluti cortice; aut more eorum animalium, quæ &longs;uos villos iacu­lantur, vt hystricis) Cum olim in hunc locum incidi&longs;&longs;em, ince&longs;&longs;ic animum meum illa cupido, vt &longs;cilicet certò &longs;cirem, numiure, an iniuria Ari&longs;t. Democritum hoc loco reijceret, Araneum fila ab intrin&longs;eco emitte­re a&longs;&longs;erentem: quapropter ad magi&longs;tram rerum experientiam confugi, ac­cepto manu bacillo Araneum quendam ex ijs, qui circulares telas, quas nonnulli, & quidem aptè labyrinthos appellant, ingenio vtique mathematico contexunt, lic adij, vt Araneus pro arbittio &longs;uper bacillum liberè inambu­laret, dum ip&longs;e interim curio&longs;ius illum ob&longs;eruarem, quanam videlicet ex parte filum foras ederet; cum ecce tibi Araneus experienti mihi vltrò fa­uens &longs;e &longs;e ex baculo demi&longs;it, ita tamen, vt ex filo &longs;uo in aere &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;us re­maneret. 8866 8867 cum primum ob&longs;eruo ip&longs;um inuer&longs;um, hoc e&longs;t capite deor&longs;um, & ventre &longs;ur&longs;um pendere. 8868 8869 vt autem acutius cernerem, eum opacæ cuidam rei oppo&longs;ui, ne præ nimia luce tenui&longs;&longs;imum aranei filum aciem oculorum effu­geret; quo facto in temperata luce illa, clari&longs;&longs;imè videbam filum ex &longs;ece&longs;&longs;u aranei prodire. 8870 8871 Araneumque; vno pede filum illud retinere, ne amplius exi­ret, longiusque; fieret, quàm &longs;uo con&longs;ilio par e&longs;&longs;et. 8872 8873 coegi deinde ip&longs;um a&longs;cen­dere, & de&longs;cendere &longs;æpius, donec certò certius, mihi con&longs;titi&longs;&longs;et filum illud non ab extrin&longs;eco, vt hoc loco Ari&longs;t. 8874 8875 affirmat, &longs;ed ab intrin&longs;eco quippe ex &longs;ece&longs;&longs;u prodire, ac proinde veri&longs;&longs;imam e&longs;&longs;e quamuis ab Ari&longs;t. 8876 8877 reiectam De­mocriti &longs;ententiam. 8878 8879 cum Ari&longs;t. 8880 8881 pariter errauit Vly&longs;&longs;es Aldobrandus in &longs;uo de in&longs;ectis pulcherrimo, atque docti&longs;&longs;imo Opere.

8882 8883 Verumenimuerò opportunè accidit, vt huius dubitationis &longs;olutio, aliam mihi alterius quæ&longs;tionis, iam olim &longs;ummis votis expetitam afferret expli­cationem. 8884 8885 ea e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi. 8886 8887 &longs;æpius fueram expertus, Araneos quo&longs;dam e&longs;­&longs;e, qui ex vno loco ad alium omninò &longs;ibi inacce&longs;&longs;ibilem, tran&longs;eant, &longs;iue quod idem e&longs;t, ex eo loco, ad illum fila deducant, vt ex vna arbore ad aliam; quamuis inter vtramque aut aquæ, aut den&longs;il&longs;ima &longs;pineta, ac &longs;epes interpo­nantur. 8888 8889 quod maximè mane æquitantes experimur, dum nobis fila per vias tran&longs;uer&longs;a, oculis, atque vultui obuiantia adhærent. 8890 8891 Qua ratione id Ara­neus perficeret, neminem, quiliteris manda&longs;&longs;et, reperi, ne ip&longs;um quidem. 8892 8893 Vly&longs;&longs;em Aldobrandum, qui in hac eruditorum palæ&longs;tra, maiores no&longs;tros omnes videtur &longs;upera&longs;&longs;e. 8894 8895 Phy&longs;iologi à me hac de re interrogati, varij va­ria, nec con&longs;entientia refpondebant. 8896 8897 Alij aiebant Araneum &longs;e demittere, ac &longs;u&longs;pendere ex vna arbore, & deinde ad aliam à vento perferri, at ego his minimè a&longs;&longs;entiebar, quia m Araneo nullum e&longs;&longs;et naturale in&longs;trumentum, veluti velum, in quod ventus po&longs;&longs;itimpingere. 8898 8899 Alij Araneum ex vna arbo­re de&longs;cendere, & po&longs;tea alteram con&longs;cendere, interim emi&longs;&longs;um retro filum raptando, ac deinde &longs;ur&longs;um attrahendo attollere, ac prætendere: &longs;ed ho­rum re&longs;pon&longs;ionum ob plurima impedimenta, quæ tenui&longs;&longs;imum filum &longs;æpius &longs;cidi&longs;&longs;ent, &longs;ubridens refellebam. 8900 8901 Alij verò aiebant Araneum qualitate qua­dam præditum e&longs;&longs;e, qua ip&longs;e per aera, non &longs;ecus, ac per aquam pi&longs;ces, & per aerem volucres, ambulare po&longs;&longs;et. 8902 8903 Verum opinatio i&longs;ta, ne ri&longs;u quidem digna videbatur. 8904 8905 Huius igitur quæ&longs;iti &longs;olutionem, quam omnes ad hanc v&longs;que diem latui&longs;&longs;e putò, quamque; omnibus grati&longs;&longs;imam fore cognoui tibi lo­co auctarij initio promi&longs;&longs;i, nunc per&longs;oluam. 8906 8907 accidit ergò, vt dicebam, vt dum Araneus fugæ cupidus ex bacillo in temperatæ lucis loco, nimirum è regione alicuius opaci penderet, vt cernerem ex filo illo, ex quo &longs;u&longs;pende­batur plura alia fila hinc inde alternatim prodire, quemadmodum ex alter­nis arundinum nodis folia ena&longs;ci &longs;olent. 8908 8909 quæ fila, innata læuitate, per ae­rem quoquo ver&longs;us ceu natantia diffundebantur. 8910 8911 factum e&longs;t autem, vt eo­rum vnum quendam arboris cuiu&longs;dam ramum attingeret, eique; &longs;tatim adhæ­reret; quod illicò Araneus optimè per&longs;en&longs;it, quippe quod filum illud vi&longs;ce­ribus eius ex altero capite affigeretur, atque per filum illud, alijs ommi&longs;&longs;is, &longs;ubitò, vti egregius funambulus accurrit, &longs;ed tamen pedibus &longs;ur&longs;um, dor &longs;o autem deor&longs;um, non &longs;upra filum, &longs;ed infra ad ramum illum &longs;e contulit, &longs;icque; me ho&longs;tem &longs;uum fuga &longs;æpius elu&longs;it. 8912 8913 Ex qna repetita &longs;æpius ob&longs;eruatione lu­ce clarius comperi Araneum non &longs;implex filum, &longs;ed ramo&longs;um, ac multiplex emittere, atque aliquando ex &longs;ece&longs;&longs;u etiam ip&longs;o duo &longs;imul eijcere, alterum quo

&longs;u&longs;pendatur, alterum verò, quod &longs;orte hac, atque illac volitans, ali­cui rei occurrat, atque hæreat, per quod po­&longs;tea ip&longs;e incedens, ad locum &longs;ibi prius inac­ce&longs;&longs;um, aditum parat. 8914 8915 qua inre fures eos per­bellè imitatur, qui &longs;chalas ex funibus con­textas, ac hamis fer­reis munitas, ad fene­&longs;tras proijciunt, vt per cas ibi affixas con&longs;cen­dere queant. 8916 8917 quæ om­nia ex appo&longs;ita figura melius percipies, vbi ex &longs;ini&longs;tra arbore pen­det Araneus A, ex filo B A, ex quo tanquam rami alia fila C G, D H, E I, M O, F L, alter­natim prodeunt, ac per aerem hinc inde volitant. 8918 8919 Si ergò filum E I, dextræ arbori occurrerit, eique; hæ&longs;erit, vt in figura, illicò Araneus huius rei con­&longs;cius per filum A E I, a&longs;cendit, &longs;eque; ad prius inacce&longs;&longs;am &longs;ibi dextram arbo­rem transfert; atque deinde inter vtramque ducto iam filo vno, pote&longs;t vltrò, citroque; means, &longs;uam etiam circularem, ac labyrinthiacam telam in mu&longs;ca­rum capturam contexere; quales aliquando inter duas arbores admira­ri &longs;olemus.

8920 8921 Quæres fortè, num Araneus filum intus tanquam in glomo, vel fpira con­uolutum contineat? 8922 8923 dicam, quod non &longs;ine experientia conijcio, exi&longs;timo Araneum non continere intra &longs;e filum vllum, verum humorem quendam vi&longs;co&longs;um, qui in tenui&longs;&longs;ima fila &longs;it ductilis; quemadmodum videmus acci­dere gummi, quæ di&longs;rupta exhibet lentorem quendam, qui &longs;olo attritu ita digitis hæret, vt amoto &longs;en&longs;im digito, filum tenue, & oblongum valdè de­ducatur, hoc inde conijcio, quia aliquando cum ventrem Araneorum &longs;ecui&longs;­&longs;em nullum intus filum, &longs;ed &longs;olus humor quidam lentus apparuit.

8924 8925 Cùm ex paruulis hi&longs;ce meis ob&longs;eruationibus circa animalculum i&longs;tud vnum tam præclara cognoui&longs;&longs;em, quæ nullus ad hanc v&longs;que diem, quod &longs;ciam ob&longs;erua&longs;&longs;et; animaduerti lati&longs;&longs;imum patere campum ad animalium hi&longs;to­riam ampliandam, &longs;i ij, qui huic pulcherrimæ cognitioni dant operam, non ijs &longs;olum, quæ ab alijs per&longs;cripta &longs;unt contenti e&longs;&longs;ent, verùm etiam certi&longs;­&longs;imis, atque explorati&longs;&longs;imis experientijs ea coniungerent.

8926 8927 Atque hæc de Araneo &longs;atis.

8928 8929 De ince&longs;&longs;u animalium.

8930 8931

8932 8933 294

8934 8935 8936 Cap. 7. (Etenim habentia pedes, quoniam &longs;uper vtrumque oppo&longs;itorum cru­rum vici&longs;&longs;im &longs;tant, pondusqué &longs;ustinent, nece&longs;&longs;e habent altero progredien­te, inflectere alterum; æqualia namque longitudine nata &longs;unt habere op­po&longs;ita membra. 8937 8938 8939 & quod ponderi &longs;ub&longs;tat rectum e&longs;&longs;e oportet, vt perpen­diculum ad terram. 8940 8941 quando autem progreditur, fit hypotenu&longs;a, valens manentem magnitudinem, & eam, quæ interiacet. 8942 8943 quoniam autem æqualia &longs;unt membra, ne­ce&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t inflecti id, quod manet, aut in poplite, aut in conflexione) Vult probare in gre&longs;&longs;u nece&longs;&longs;ariam e&longs;&longs;e aliquam flexionem membrorum. 8944 8945 verum prius &longs;ciendum, quod lineam hypotenu&longs;am, quemadmodum etiam Athenæus lib. 10. te&longs;tatur, eam appellant geometræ, quæ in triangulo rectangulo recto angulo &longs;ubtenditur, vnde & denominata e&longs;t hypotenu&longs;a, ide&longs;t &longs;ubten&longs;a, vt

in triangulo A B C, cuius angulus B, rectus &longs;it, recta A C, angulo recto B, &longs;ubten&longs;a, hypotenu&longs;a dicitur. 8946 8947 8948 8949 Ari&longs;t. 8950 8951 igitur ait, quod antequam animal ambulare in­cipiat, dum &longs;cilicet manet, habet crura, quæ manent recta, &longs;iue perpendicularia horizonti, cum autem in­cipit progredi nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t vtrunque crus inclinari ad ho­rizontem. 8952 8953 nam primum crus in ingre&longs;lu prolatum fit hypotenu&longs;a, quia &longs;cilicet &longs;ubtendit angulum rectum, quem facit alterum crus adhuc quie&longs;cens, cum hori­zonte; vt in &longs;uperiori triangulo, &longs;i concipiamus crura fui&longs;&longs;e duo latera A B, A D, quæ manente animali, fui&longs;&longs;ent ambo &longs;imul in &longs;itu A B, perpendicula­ria horizonti; incipiens autem animal ambulare, proferat primo crus A D, A D, fiet hypotenu&longs;a trianguli A B C, & quia crus hoc A D, factum hypo­tenu&longs;a æquale e&longs;t alteri manenti A B, nequit totius veræ hypotenufæ A C, officio fungi, quæ æquiualet toti A D, & præterea interiacenti D C, vrea au­
tem hypotenu&longs;a debet e&longs;&longs;e maior, quia opponitun maiori angulo nimirum recto B, quam latus A B, quod angulo acuto C, opponitur per 19. primi, & propterea ni&longs;i alterum &longs;ub&longs;equens crus A B, incli­netur, vt in &longs;ecunda figura, non pote&longs;t hypotenu&longs;a A D, terram attingere, atque hac de cau&longs;a nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t, vt initio gre&longs;&longs;us vtrumque crus, quod prius per­pendiculare erat, inclinetur; inclinato igitur crure A B, antror&longs;um tunc prolatum crus A C, terram contingit, &longs;icque; factus e&longs;t primus gre&longs;&longs;us B C.

8954 8955

8956 8957 295

8958 8959 Eodem loco (Signum autem, quod hoc ita &longs;e habet illud est. 8960 8961 &longs;i quis enim iuxta parietem per terram ambulet, quæ de&longs;ignatur linea non e&longs;t recta, &longs;ed obtorta, quo­niam minorem quidem flectentis fieri de&longs;criptam nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t; &longs;tantis autem, & ere­cti maiorem) Vt probet, quod animal in gradiendo modo attollitur, modo deprimitur, &longs;ignum hoc affert, quia &longs;i quis &longs;ecus parietem per terram am­bulet, linea quam vertex capitis in pariete de&longs;ignat non e&longs;t recta, &longs;eb obtor­ta: quæ linea optimè de&longs;ignatur, &longs;i ambulantis vmbra in pariete apparens &longs;imul, cum ip&longs;o in pariete ambulet; videmus enim vmbram illam modo al­tiorem fieri, modo breuiorem; quod &longs;ignum e&longs;t ambulantem modo incli­nari, quando &longs;cilicet crus alterum profert, &longs;eu crura dilatat; modo erigi, cum crus &longs;ub&longs;equens præce denti coniungit, tune enim incedens fit horizon­ti perpendicularis.

8962 8963

8964 8965 296

8966 8967 Eodem cap. (Quoniam autem fiat ad rectum, vel concidet recto minore effe­cto, vel non progredietur: &longs;i enim altero crure recto progreditur alterum, maius erit cum &longs;it æquale: hoc nanque poterit, & id, quod quie&longs;cit, & ip&longs;am hypotenu­&longs;am, nece&longs;&longs;e igitur e&longs;t, & inflectere id, quod procurrit, & inflexum &longs;imul alterum extendere, membra enim triangulorum æquilaterorum efficiuntur, caputque, fit infe­rius, vbi perpendiculum fuerit, in quo firmatum e&longs;t) Hæc &longs;unt ferè eadem cum ijs, quæ in primo huius capitis loco dicta &longs;unt. 8968 8969 proinde ea cum duabus illis triangulorum figuris repetenda &longs;unt, vt breuius quæ nunc re&longs;tant explicen­tur. 8970 8971 quoniam igitur animal antequam gradiatur, maximè homo, &longs;tat hori­zonti perpendicularis, nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;t ad progrediendum, vt fiat aliqua mem­brorum inflexio, &longs;i enim homo &longs;ine vlla &longs;ui corporis flexura inclinet &longs;e ad horizontem, ita vt cum horizonte faciat ex anteriori parte. 8972 8973 v. g. angulum recto minorem, &longs;iue acutum, vel concidet, vel non poterit progredi; &longs;i enim alterum crus præmitteretur, altero manente perpendiculari, &longs;icque; progre­deretur qui&longs;piam, &longs;equeretur crus prolatum, quale e&longs;t A D, iu priori trian­gulo, debere fieri maius altero crure A B, manente, quia fieret tota hypo­tenu&longs;a A C, &longs;ie enim terram attingeret; at non pote&longs;t fieri illo maius, quia e&longs;t illi æquale, ergò hac ratione ince&longs;&longs;us fieri nequit. 8974 8975 8976 8977 8978 8979 nece&longs;&longs;e igitur refle­ctere vtrumque crus non &longs;olum ad horixontem, &longs;ed etiam circa aliquam cor­poris flexuram, vel nodum, vt circa genu, aut alia. 8980 8981 crura enim in gre&longs;&longs;u fiunt latera &longs;uperiora trianguli i&longs;o&longs;celis, vt in &longs;ecunda figura patuit, cuius ba&longs;is e&longs;t pa&longs;&longs;us. 8982 8983 & tunc caput ambulantis fit inferius, quàm antequam gradere­

tur; quia tunc ambo crura erant horizonti perpen­dicularia. 8984 8985 quando autem caput fuerit in linea per­pendiculari trianguli i&longs;o&longs;celis, tunc erit inferius quàm alibi, vt in pr&ecedil;&longs;enti figura, linea perpendicularis trian­guli huius i&longs;o&longs;celis e&longs;t linea A E, quia ba&longs;i B C, per­pendicularis incidit; quando igitur caput ambulan­tis. 8986 8987 v. g. D, fuerit in hac linea, tunc erit inferius quàm in quauis alia gre&longs;&longs;us parte: quia tunc crura A B, A C, &longs;unt maximè diuaricata, & proinde angulus A, & &longs;imul punctum D, maximè demi&longs;&longs;a. 8988 8989 8990 8991

8992 8993 De motu animalium.

8994 8995

8996 8997 297

8998 8999 9000 Cap. 1. (Primum quidem in animalibus: oportet enim &longs;i moueatur aliqua particularum quie&longs;cere ahquam, & propter hoc, & flexus animalibus in&longs;unt: tanquam enim centro vtuntur flex: bus & fit tota pars, in qua e&longs;t flexus & vna, & duæ; & recta, & flexa, quæ permutatur potentia, & actu, propter flexum. 9001 9002 9003 cum autem flectitur, & mouetur, hoc quidem &longs;ignum mo-

etur, illud autem manet in flexibus, quemadmodum vtique &longs;i dia­metri, quæ quidem A D, maneat, quæ cutem B, moueatur, & fiat A C, &longs;ed hic quidem videtur, &longs;ecundum omnem modum in­diui&longs;ibile e&longs;&longs;e centrum. 9004 9005 etenim moueri, vt aiunt, fingunt in ip&longs;is, non enim mouetur mathematicorum aliquid.

9006 9007 Intendit probare nece&longs;&longs;e e&longs;&longs;e ad motum animalium, vt vna pars quie&longs;cat, dum altera mouetur. 9008 9009 propter hoc enim inquit flexus ani­malibus in&longs;unt, vbi in græco pro voce flexus legitur xampth, quod &longs;ignifi­cat nodum, articulum, & denique locum ip&longs;um, vbi fit membri flexura, tan­quam enim centro quodam vtuntur flexibus, ide&longs;t nodis, &longs;eu iuncturæ &longs;unt in motu membrorum in&longs;tar centri. 9010 9011 v. g. nodus cubiti fit centrum, cum bra­chij parte, quæ e&longs;t inter humerum, & cubitum manente, reliquum brachij circumducimus; &longs;ic manente genu tanquam centro, crus huc illud agita­mus, & fit tota pars. 9012 9013 9014 9015 9016 9017 v. g. totum brachium, in quo e&longs;t cubiti iunctura, & vna tota pars, quando manet rectum; & duæ quando in flexura cubiti brachium infle ctitur; & fit tota hæc longitudo recta prius, po&longs;tea flexa: quæ propter flexuram modo vna e&longs;t actu, &longs;ed duæ potentia. 9018 9019 9020 9021 9022 9023 modo duæ in actu, &longs;ed vna in potentia. 9024 9025 cum autem flectitur, & mouetur brachium, vnum quidem fignum, &longs;iue punctum, quod e&longs;t extremum partis manentis, manet; alterum verò &longs;i­gnum, &longs;iue punctum, quod e&longs;t extremum partis motæ e&longs;tque; alteri &longs;igno con­tiguum mouetur &longs;imul cum tota parte mota. 9026 9027 quemadmodum, &longs;i diametri &longs;uperioris figuræ, pars D A, maneat, pars autem A B, moueatur ad A C, erit huius flexuræ centrum A, quod vt extremum lineæ D A, manentis, ma­net: vt verò extremum motæ A B, mouetur. 9028 9029 quamuis in mathematicis hæc quidem duorum centrorum di&longs;tinctio nulla &longs;it, quia centrum mathemati­cum omninò indiuiduum e&longs;t: neque in mathematicis e&longs;t propriè motus, quamuis enim aliquando Mathematici dicant, &longs;i linea, vel &longs;i punctum mo­ueretur, vel moueatur, & &longs;imilia, huiu&longs;modi tamen motus &longs;unt rebus ma­thematicis extrin&longs;eci, nec quatenus hoc modo mouentur con&longs;iderantur: patet igitur, qua ratione Ari&longs;tot. partem manentem in motu nece&longs;&longs;ariam e&longs;&longs;e velit. 9030 9031

9032 9033

9034 9035 298 a

9036 9037 9038 Cap. 5. (Quemadmodum autem &longs;pontanea mouentur paruo motu facto) Spon­tanea i&longs;ta erant machinæ, quæ à &longs;eip&longs;is mouebantur, quas Græci automata dixerunt, cuin&longs;modi &longs;unt Automata Heronis Alexandrini, quæ adhuc extant. 9039

9040 9041 9042 Cap. 8. E&longs;t ibi quoddam triangulum cum elementis more geometrarum depictum, vnde locus ille videri po&longs;&longs;it mathematicus, verumtamen nullo modo geometriæ auxilio indiget. 9043

9044 9045 De generatione animalium.

9046 9047

9048 9049 298.b

9050 9051 Lib. 2. cap. 9052 9053 1. (Sitqué perinde ac admirabilia illa &longs;pontanea) Intelligit ma­chinas illas miro artificio confictas, quæ à &longs;e ip&longs;is intrin&longs;eco prin­cipio mouebantur, quas Græci veteres Automata, ide&longs;t &longs;pontanea, vel &longs;pontina, vt vertit Interpres vocabant, cuiu&longs;modi &longs;unt Auto­mata Heronis Alexandrini, quæ adhuc extant græca, quæque; ab Abbate Gua­&longs;tallen&longs;i in Italicum &longs;unt conuer&longs;a. 9054 9055 Automata hodie &longs;unt Horologia, quæ ex multis dentatis rotis Germani con&longs;truunt.

9056 9057

9058 9059 299

9060 9061 Lib. 2. cap. 9062 9063 4. (Nam & triangula figura duobus rectis æquale &longs;emper habet)vide quæ de hac re &longs;crip&longs;i lib. 9064 9065 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 3. cap. 9066 9067 1.

9068 9069

9070 9071 300

9072 9073 Ibidem (Et diametrum incommen&longs;urabilem e&longs;&longs;e cum co&longs;t a &longs;empiternum e&longs;t: at­tamen cau&longs;a eorum aliqua & demon&longs;tratio e&longs;t.

9074 9075 Quælibro 1. Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 9076 9077 23. de hac re annotata &longs;unt, abundè huic etiam loco &longs;atisfaciunt.

9078 9079 In Ethica, &longs;eu Moralia ad Nicomachum.

9080 9081

9082 9083 301

9084 9085 Lib. 1. cap. 9086 9087 7. (Faber enim, & Geometra diuer&longs;o modo rectum angulum vtrique con&longs;iderant: ille quatenus &longs;olum ad opus vtile e&longs;t, hic verò cum ve­ritatis &longs;peculator &longs;it, quid, & qualis &longs;it, indagat) Id quod dicit Ari&longs;t. confirmatur ex eo, quod Fabri omnes vtuntur amu&longs;&longs;i, &longs;eu norma,

quæ nihil aliud e&longs;t quàm angulus rectus, quæ vulgò &longs;quadra dicitur, vt eius auxilio angulum ip&longs;um re­ctum in opus conferant, &longs;icque; normæ, aut amu&longs;&longs;is du­ctu &longs;ua ip&longs;i opera ad angulos rectos, ide&longs;t quadrata, conficiunt. 9088 9089 Geometra verò con&longs;iderat eundem an­gulum, quatenus fit à linea &longs;uper lineam aliam per­pendiculariter in&longs;i&longs;tente, vt e&longs;t in definit. 9090 9091 10. primi, vt in figura, vbi linea A B, in&longs;i&longs;tens alteri D C, perpendiculariter, ide&longs;t ita vt faciat angulos hinc inde æqualis A B D, A B C, prædictos inquam duos angulos con&longs;iderat e. 9092 9093 &longs;e rectos. 9094 9095 contemplatur præterea Geometra omnes angulos rectos e&longs;&longs;e inter &longs;e æquales, vt in 12. axiomate primi Elem. 9096 9097 ponitur, & &longs;imilia plura alia, quorum con&longs;iderationem Faber omninò negligit.

9098 9099

9100 9101 302

9102 9103 Libro 2. capite 6. (Id quod &longs;ecundum Arithmeticam rationem medium e&longs;t)Arithmetica ratio, fiue proportio ea e&longs;t, cuius termini cre&longs;cunt per æqua­les exce&longs;&longs;us, vt 2. 6. 10. 14. horum enim terminorum exce&longs;&longs;us æquales &longs;unt, cum &longs;int omnes quaternarij. 9104 9105 &longs;imiliter inter hos terminos 3. 6. 9. 12. e&longs;t arith­metica analogia, cùm omnes ternario numero &longs;uperent præcedentes, & à &longs;equentibus &longs;uperentur. 9106 9107 Porrò apud Mathematicos tria &longs;unt genera pro­portionum, &longs;iue medietatum, Arithmetica quam modo &longs;uppo&longs;ui; Geome­trica, & Harmonica, quas inferius oblata occa&longs;ione opportunius explicabo.

9108 9109

9110 9111 303

9112 9113 Lib. 2. cap. 9114 9115 9. (Vt circuli medium deprehendere non cuiu&longs;libet, &longs;ed &longs;cientis &longs;olummodo e&longs;t) Reperire medium, &longs;iue centrum dati circuli docet Euclides propo&longs;itio­ne prima 3. hoc modo. 9116 9117 in datocirculo ducatur vt­cunque recta B C, quæ per 10. primi diuidatur bifa­riam in F, & per F, ducatur perpendicularis A E F D, quæ &longs;ecetur bifariam in E, eritque; punctum E, non &longs;o­lum ip&longs;ius lineæ medium; &longs;ed etiam totius circuli centrum, quemadm odum ibi demon&longs;trat Euclides.

9118 9119

9120 9121 304

9122 9123 Lib. 3. cap. 9124 9125 3. (De æternis autem nemo con&longs;ultat, vt de mundo, aut diametro, & latere, quod nulla inter &longs;e æquabilitate conueniant) Qua ratione diameter, & latus eiu&longs;dem quadrati nulia æquabilitate, ide&longs;t nulla communi men&longs;ura inter &longs;e conueniant, fusè explicatum e&longs;t libro Priorum, &longs;ecto 1. cap. 9126 9127 23.

9128 9129

9130 9131 305

9132 9133 Eodem cap. (Qui enim con&longs;ultat quærere videtur, & re&longs;oluere prædicto modo, quemadmodum de&longs;ignationes) Per de&longs;ignationes Ari&longs;t. 9134 9135 intelligere geometri­cas demon&longs;trationes &longs;æpius dictum e&longs;t in logicis textibus, quod pariter ex hoc loco confirmatur. 9136 9137 quando autem ait (Re&longs;olutre prædicto modo, quemad­modum de&longs;ignationes) innuit re&longs;olutionem geometricam, de qua abundè di­ctum e&longs;t in explicatione tituli librorum Re&longs;olutoriorum; quam expo&longs;ui, ni­hil aliud e&longs;&longs;e, quam medij inqui&longs;itionem ad id, quod propo&longs;itum fuerit de­

9138 9139 mon&longs;trandum. 9140 9141 veram autem, atque germanam fui&longs;&longs;e huiu&longs;modi explicatio­nem, hoc loco Ari&longs;t. 9142 9143 ip &longs;e confirmat, cum hanc re&longs;olutionem dicat e&longs;&longs;e &longs;imi­lem con&longs;ultationi, &longs;iue inqui&longs;itioni mediorum ad finem in rebus practicis con&longs;equendum; ip &longs;a verò e&longs;t inqui&longs;itio mediorum ad id, quod in rebus &longs;pe­culatiuis propo&longs;itum e&longs;t, demon&longs;trandum. 9144 9145 con&longs;ultatio igitur e&longs;t in rebus practicis, quod in &longs;peculatiuis e&longs;t re&longs;olutio.

9146 9147 306

9148 9149 307

9150 9151 Lib. 5. cap. 9152 9153 3. (Quod en m proportione con&longs;tat, id non tam vnitario numero, quàm numero in vniuer&longs;um proprium e&longs;t) Per vnitarium numerum intelligitur numerus ex vnitatibus ab&longs;tractis con&longs;litus, ide&longs;t, cuius vnitates non &longs;int res phy&longs;icæ, &longs;ed à naturalibus ab&longs;tractæ, qualis con&longs;iderat Arithmeticus: omni tamen numero &longs;iue ab&longs;tracto, &longs;iue non, connenit proportiones &longs;u&longs;cipere, id e&longs;t & numero, & rebus numeratis.

9154 9155

9156 9157 308

9158 9159 Ibidem (Nim proportio æqualitas e&longs;t rationum) Per proportionem hoc lo­co intelligenda e&longs;t illa, quam nunc appellant proportionalitatem, quæ e&longs;t duarum rationum, &longs;eu proportionum &longs;imilitudo, &longs;iue æqualitas, vt manife­&longs;tum e&longs;t ex 4. definit. 9160 9161 5. Elem. 9162 9163 v. g. cum &longs;it eadem ratio 9. ad 6. quæ e&longs;t 6. ad 4. propterea hæc rationum &longs;imilitudo, vel æqualitas dicitur ip&longs;a proportio, &longs;eu di&longs;tinctionis gratia Proportionalitas. 9164 9165 9166 9167

9168 9169

9170 9171 309

9172 9173 Ibidem (In quatuorqué minimis reperitur, di&longs;iunctam &longs;anè in quatuor con&longs;istere per&longs;picuum e&longs;t: &longs;ed & continentem nibilominus, vno enim hæc perinde, ae duobus vtitur, bi&longs;que id accipit in bunc modum, qualis primi re&longs;pectus e&longs;t ad &longs;ecundum, talis &longs;ecundi ad tertium; bis enim bic, &longs;ecundum dictum e&longs;t, quare &longs;i &longs;ecundum bis po&longs;itum &longs;it, quatuor erunt ea, quæ con&longs;tant proportione) Quæ hic ab Ari&longs;tot. di­cuntur de&longs;umpta &longs;unt, partim ex definit. 9174 9175 9176 9177 6. 5. partim ex 9. definit. 9178 9179 eiu&longs;dem. 9180 9181 breuiter autem &longs;ic &longs;e habent. 9182 9183 Ad con&longs;tituendam proportionalitatem ne­ce&longs;&longs;arij &longs;unt omninò quatuor termini, quod quidem primum per&longs;picuum e&longs;t in ea proportionalitate, quam Difiunctam vocant, quæ e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi, vt 9. ad 6. ita 3. ad 2. deinde verum e&longs;t etiam in ea, quam continuam dicunt, quæ talis e&longs;t, vt 9. ad 6. ita 6. ad 4. quæ in tribus quidem terminis 9. 6. 4. con&longs;i&longs;tit, &longs;ed tamen, qnia medius 6. vtrumque re&longs;picit extremum, ideò vices duorum gerit, ac proinde e&longs;t, ac &longs;i hoc modo termini di&longs;ponantur 9. 6. 6. 4. vbi 6. bis ponitur, &longs;untque; quatuor huius etiam proportionalitatis termini. 9184 9185 hinc Ari&longs;t. 9186 9187 textum &longs;atis intelligere poteris.

9188 9189

9190 9191 310

9192 9193 Eodem cap. (Sicut igitur primus terminus &longs;e babebit ad &longs;ecundum, ita tertius ad quartum; igitur etiam alterna vice, &longs;icut primus ad tertium, ita &longs;ecundus ad quartum. 9194 9195 quare etiam totum ad totum, quod di&longs;tributio binatim copulat. 9196 9197 quæ &longs;i etiam ita compo&longs;ita fuerint, iustè copulat) Accipit Ari&longs;t. 9198 9199 illum argumentandi modum, quem Geometræ alternam rationem vocant, quàmque; definit. 9200 9201 12. 5. exponunt, vt eam rebus ip&longs;is accommodet, atque in praxim deducat; e&longs;t autem huiu&longs;modi, &longs;int primum quatuor termini proportionales, ide&longs;t, vt primus ad &longs;ecundum, ita tertius ad quartum. 9202 9203 v. g. vt 9. ad 6. ita 3. ad 2. valet con&longs;equentia hæc, ergò etiam alternatim erit, vt primus ad tertium, ita &longs;ecundus ad quartum, v. g. in allato exemplo, ita erit 9. ad 3. vt 6. ad 2. quam &longs;equelam e&longs;&longs;e validam probat deinde Euclides propo&longs;it. 9204 9205 9206 9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 16. 5. hinc aliam deducit con&longs;equentiam, quam Euclides propo&longs;it. 9214 9215 12. 5. demon&longs;trat, dum ait, quare etiam totum ad totum erit. 9216 9217 v. g. quia conclu&longs;um e&longs;t ita e&longs;&longs;e 9. ad 3. quemadmodum 6. ad 2. ita etiam erit totum ad totum, ide&longs;t ita etiam erunt antecedentes termini &longs;imul ad con&longs;equentes &longs;imul, v. g. ita erit etiam totum 15. quod e&longs;t totum ex antecedentibus terminis 9. & 6. ad to­tum 5. conflatum ex con&longs;equentibus terminis 3. & 2. In &longs;umma igitur &longs;i fue­rit vt 9. ad 3. ita 6. ad 2. ita etiam erit 15. ad 5. quod verum e&longs;&longs;e apparet in his numeris, cum tam 9. ad 3. quà 6. ad 2. & 15. ad 5. habeant triplam proportionem. 9218 9219 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225

9226 9227 Horum exemplum in rebus practicis &longs;it hoc: &longs;it vt Plato ad Proclum, ita mille aurei ad quingentos aureos, ergò alternatim ita erit Plato ad 1000. aureos, &longs;icuti Proclus ad 500. quare ita etiam totum erit ad totum, &longs;cilicet Plato, & Proclus &longs;imul ad 1000. & 500. &longs;imul, quæ duo tota, di&longs;tributio mo­ralis, ac practica diuidit, & binatim copulat, hoc modo dicens, vt Plato ad Proclum, ita 1000. ad 500, & po&longs;tea, vt Plato ad 1000. ita Proclus ad 500. iuxta vtriu&longs;que merita, & quidem i&longs;ta e&longs;t huiu&longs;modi moralis di&longs;tributio, cum modis argumentandi ab Euclide comprobatis, nitatur.

9228 9229

9230 9231 311

9232 9233 Ibidem (Hanc verò proportionalitatem Mathematici Geometricam vocant: propterea quod in Geometrica euenit, vt eandem totum ad totum rationem habeat, quam habet alterutrum, ad alterutrum) ide&longs;t, hanc duarum Geometricarum rationum &longs;imilitudinem Mathematici proportionalitatem Geometricam appellant, propterea quod in hac duarum rationum geometricarum &longs;imili­tudine accidit, vt &longs;it totum ad totum, quemadmodum etiam partes toto­rum, vt &longs;upra explicatum e&longs;t; quod non accidit in duarum proportionum arithmeticarum &longs;imilitudine; &longs;i enim ponamus has duas rationes arithme­ticas &longs;imiles, vt 10. ad 8. ita 6. ad 4. quæ &longs;unt &longs;imiles, propter &longs;imiles exce&longs;­&longs;us primorum, & &longs;ecundorum terminorum, cum vbique exce&longs;&longs;us &longs;it binarij. 9234 9235 non erit tamen totum 16. ad totum 12. in eadem ratione cum diui&longs;is ter­minis, cum ibi &longs;it exce&longs;&longs;us binarij, hic verò quaternarij. 9236 9237 hæc videtur e&longs;&longs;e Ari&longs;t. 9238 9239 ratio; quam adhuc melius declara&longs;&longs;e libet. 9240 9241 Geometrica igitur pro­portionalitas ita dicta e&longs;t, quia quælibet proportio pote&longs;t in materia Geo­metrica, lineis, &longs;uperficiebus, & corporibus continuari in quatuor termi­nis, ita vt proportionalitas, &longs;eu &longs;imilitudo rationum exurgat, quod in nu­meris fieri &longs;emper nequit, cum plures fint proportiones, quæ numeris ex­primi nequeunt, vt &longs;unt eæ, quas irrationales appellant, cuiu&longs;modi e&longs;t inter diametrum, & co&longs;tam eiu&longs;dem quadrati, cuius nec proportio, nec propor­tionalitas in numeris reperiri pote&longs;t, quæ tamen in lineis, &longs;uperficiebus, ac corporibus e&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;unt: e&longs;t enim vt diameter vnius quadrati ad latus eiu&longs;­dem, ita idem latus ad aliam lineam inuentam per 11. 6. vel vt diameter ad co&longs;tam, ita quælibet alia linea ad aliam inuentam, per 12. 6. omnis igitur proportionalitas rebus Geometricis ine&longs;&longs;e pote&longs;t; non autem numeris, in quibus &longs;olum po&longs;&longs;unt e&longs;&longs;e rationes rationales, &longs;eu rerum commen&longs;urabilium; latius igitur patet Geometrica hæc &longs;imilitudo, quàm Arithmetica, cùm Geometrica complectatur tam rationales, quàm irrationales. 9242 9243 meritò igi­tur talis proportionalitas appellari debuit à rebus Geometricis, in quibus &longs;emper reperitur, non autem ab Arithmeticis, cum quibus &longs;æpius reperiri nequit. 9244 9245 Vide Campanum in e